Today’s News 2nd August 2020

  • CIA Fabricated Russiagate "Evidence", Says Former NSA Tech Chief
    CIA Fabricated Russiagate "Evidence", Says Former NSA Tech Chief

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 08/02/2020 – 00:00

    Authored by Eric Zuesse via The Duran,

    An important public statement was made on July 27th by Bill Binney, the U.S. Government’s top expert on the internet, and on computer hacking. He had been the Technical Director of the NSA when he quit and became a whistleblower against that Agency while George W. Bush was the U.S. President and invaded Iraq on the basis of faked evidence.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Binney has now laid out, in this speech, the evidence that he wants to present in court against Barack Obama’s CIA, that it defrauded Americans to believe in “Russiagate” (the allegation that Russia ‘hacked’ the computers of Hillary Clinton and Democratic Party officials and fed that information to Wikileaks and other organizations). Binney cites evidence, which, if true, conclusively proves that Russiagate was actually created fraudulently by the CIA’s extensive evidence-tampering, which subsequently became covered-up by the Special Counsel Robert Mueller, in his investigations for the Democratic Party’s first (and failed) try at impeaching and removing from office U.S. President Donald J. Trump.

    Here is the transcript of his 10-minute speech (and I add links to explanations of the meaning of technical phrases, and also boldface for emphasis of his key findings, and I place into [brackets] explanatory amplifications of my own), summarizing why he is convinced that the CIA (under President Barack Obama) did this frame-up against Russia, ‘Russiagate’ — it’s a case that he is seeking to present to Congress, and in court, and to debate in public, instead of to continue to be hidden from the public; he wants to show, and publicly to debate, this evidence, so that the public will be able to see it, and evaluate it, for themselves:

    Basically the problem is that I can’t seem to get the forensic evidence into a court or up into the mainstream of evidence for defeating-refuting Russiagate. The point is that in the Veterans Intelligence Professionals for Sanity we have a bunch of technical people including Kirk Wiebe and I and some others and some affiliates that were in the UK who also joined the analysis process, and we were looking at the files posted by Wikileaks, because the allegation from the beginning is that Russia hacked the DNC and gave the emails to Wikileaks to publish. So, we looked at those emails, to see if there was something there that might give us some idea of how Wikileaks got that data. Well, in all the 35,813 emails that they posted in three batches, one [batch was] downloaded according to last modified times on the 23rd of May, and another on the 25th of May, and one [other] on the 26th of August, of 2016. Now, all those files, all 35,813, had a last modified time that was rounded off [rounded up] to an even [the next-higher] second, so they all ended up in even [meaning complete or full, not fractional] seconds. Now, if you know anything about data processing and data storage and things of that nature, there is a program that was quite common in the past [including 2016] using what’s called fat file formatting file allocation, table formatting, which is a process that when doing a batch process of data and transferring it to a storage device like a thumb drive or a CD-ROM, it rounds off the last modified time to the nearest even [next-higher] second, so that’s exactly the property we found in all that data posted by Wikileaks. Now, that said very simply this data was downloaded to a storage device a CD-ROM or a thumb drive and physically transported before Wikileaks could post it, so that meant it was not a hack [since there’s no rounding off to the next-higher second, as it would be if it’s a file that’s been carried over the internet]no matter how you look at it. We’re looking at the forensic evidence that says the DNC emails were not hacked, they were downloaded and physically transported to Wikileaks.

    And, then, we had the other issue, [which was] with Guccifer 2. Now, Guccifer 2 came out shortly after, you know, Julian Assange announced that he had emails on Hillary Clinton, and so on, and the DNC. Well, we looked at all the material that Guccifer 2 posted and [he] was saying here are the hacks that I did on the DNC. He claimed he did one on the fifth of July, and one on the first of September, of 2016. Well, when you start looking at that — and we looked at the files — he posted a series of files, with file names, the numbers of characters in the file, and a timestamp at the end of the file. Then, the next file number of characters and timestamp, and so on, for I don’t know how many thousands of files. So, we looked at all those files, and we ran a program to calculate the transfer rate of all that data, because all you have to do is look at between the two time stamps, the file name and the number of characters in the file, and take the difference between the times [start-time versus end-time], and that’s the transfer rate for that number of characters, so we found that the variations ran from something like 19 to 49.1 megabytes per second. Now, that means for 19 to 49 million characters per second, and [yet] the world wide web would not support that rate of transfer, not for anybody who’s just, you know, a hacker coming in across the net, trying to do it. They won’t support that kind [speed] of transfer, and some people thought we could be wrong [and] that it could be done, and so we said okay, we’re going to try it. So, we organized some hackers in Europe, to try to transfer a data set from the U.S. over to Europe, to see how fast we could get it there, and we tried it from Albania, and Serbia, a couple of places in the Netherlands, and London. Well, we got various rates, but the highest rate we got was between the data center in New Jersey and one in London, and that was [the one which had gone at] 49.1 megabytes per second, and it went at 12 megabytes per second, which is one-fourth the rate, little less than one-fourth the rate necessary to do the transfer at the highest rate that we saw in the Guccifer 2 data, which meant it didn’t go across the net, so, in fact, the file rate transfers couldn’t. We were nowhere near the maximum rate that [would have been necessary if this had been a hack]. And so we said, okay, if anybody has a way of getting it there, let us know, and we’ll help you try to get to do that, and so far no one has ever come forward to dispute either the facts on the DNC data last file, modified file times, nor the transfer rates, for the Guccifer 2.

    Plus, there’s another factor with Guccifer 2, there’s actually two more with Guccifer 2 data, the first of the five July data, and the one September data, if you ignored a date and hour they could merge like you’re shuffling a deck of cards the holes in the five July data timing were filled by data from the first September, that said to us that Guccifer 2 was playing with the data, separating in the two files, saying he made two different acts and and doing a range change on the date and the hour on the one file, so this to us was also an indication of fabrication on the part of Guccifer 2. Then, there’s another factor: when Guccifer 2 put out some from files on 15 june of 2016, with the signatures of Russian saying it’s a Russian hack, our fellows in the UK looking at the data found five of those files at a minimum, I don’t know they’re through yet looking, but they found five files that Guccifer 2 posted on the 15th of June with Russian signatures saying the Russians did this because of a signature they found the same five files posted by Wikileaks from a Podesta emails and they did not have the Russian signatures, so that meant Guccifer 2 was inserting Russian signatures to make it look like the Russians did the [alleged] hack. Well, if you go back to the Vault 7 release from Wikileaks again, from CIA, and you look, they have this Marble framework program that will modify files to look like someone else did the hack, and who were the countries that they had the ability to do that, in the in the Marble framework program? Well, one was Russia, the other was China, North Korea, Iran, and Arab countries. Well, to us, then, that means that the fabrication of the insert of the Russian signatures means that somebody modified the file and made it look like it fits the Marble framework definition of doing that kind of activity, which thus says all of this boosts with two materials pointing back now to CIA, as the origin of it, that’s the basic evidence we have, and none of it points to Russia.

    In fact, we can’t even find anything that points to Russia, when in fact the Mueller indictment, or the Mueller report, and that Rosenstein indictment, named some that they called trolls for the Russian government, the IRA, the Internet Research Agency, out of St. Petersburg, and Russia, they named it in a court document, and, well, the IRA over there said we are no way near, we are not in any way associated with, the Russian government, so they sent lawyers in to challenge that in the court of law here in the U.S., and the court charged the government to prove it, and they couldn’t, they couldn’t prove anything, and so the judge basically reprimanded them and said you were never to mention the IRA as in any way affiliated with the Russian government again, so their whole case was falling apart. Everything looked like the rooks were two potato, was a fabrication, the alleged hack and so on, all applications, fabrication, and even if you look at some of the testimony that came out from the Crowdstrike CEO [hired by the Democratic National Committee], I think his name was Sean Henry, he said we we had no indications of exfiltrating the data, but we had evidence that it was exfiltrated. Now, if he’s talking about the last modified times as an indication of exfiltration, which it was but it wasn’t from a hack it was from a download, so that download then is an indication it was done locally as were the Guccifer 2 data that couldn’t go across the net. It was a download locally. All that stuff happened locally. In fact, some of the data and the Guccifer 2 material had all the time stamps indicating it was done on the East Coast of the United States, we had one in Central time, and one on the West Coast, but most of them fell on the East Coast, so it implied that all this stuff  [both Wikileaks and Guccifer 2] was happening on the East Coast, and that really pointed right back at CIA, as the origin of all this fabrication.

    Binney wants to present this case at trial, against the CIA’s top officials under President Barack Obama.

  • Car Theft Hits Record High In Los Angeles
    Car Theft Hits Record High In Los Angeles

    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 08/01/2020 – 23:30

    A COVID-19-induced recession, with exceptionally high unemployment in Los Angeles, has resulted in record-high auto thefts in 2Q20.

    A new report via Crosstown LA, who examined the Los Angeles Police Department (LAPD) data, reveals that 5,744 vehicle thefts occurred between April and June, up 57.7% from the same period last year.

    As thousands of businesses closed in the southern California city, the unemployment rate skyrocketed past 13.2%, recorded in 2010, to 19.5%, as the virus-induced recession permanently closed businesses and severely pressure household finances

    A tick up in crime is common during deep economic downturns. Months of lockdowns made vehicles susceptible to break-ins.

    Crosstown also said the California Judicial Council’s passing of a new zero-dollar bail policy was another contributing factor to the surge in thefts, which meant most non-violent crimes had no bail requirements as a way to mitigate the spread of the virus in jails. 

    “People are seeing that they’re not going to stay in jail, especially for car theft,” said LAPD Lieutenant Siage Hosea, who works on the Task Force for Regional Auto theft Protection.

    “So what’s happening is we are seeing repeat offenders.”

    Crosstown describes, in one instance, a man was arrested three times in one day for stealing a car. 

    Hosea said criminals were stealing cars during the lockdowns for transportation. 

    “People are just using them for transportation. They’re taking one car here, and then drive over there,” he said. “Like an Uber.”

    What could lead to even more car thefts this year is the Los Angeles City Council recently defunding the LAPD to the tune of $150 million. Fewer patrols in the liberal city could mean more crime, forcing some residents to flee to the suburbs

    And it’s just silly to think that New York Rep. Alexandria Ocasio-Cortez recently suggested crime surge in New York City is because struggling folks are forced to steal in order to “feed their child.” The streets are full of career criminals, partly due to the recession but also because liberal cities have relaxed rules for non-violent crimes. 

  • "Individuals With A Cervix" – Women Reduced To Body-Parts Under Transgender Orthodoxy
    "Individuals With A Cervix" – Women Reduced To Body-Parts Under Transgender Orthodoxy

    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 08/01/2020 – 23:00

    Authored by Monica Showalter via AmericanThinker.com,

    Transgenderism has a way of penalizing women, and it’s not just from the entry of biological men into the realm of women’s sports.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Suddenly, women are being reduced to body parts, commodified, based on the strange contortions of recognizing men with body dysmorphia as actual women, and vice versa. To accomodate this small group of people, women are being reduced to spare parts.

    Here’s what the Daily Mail reports:

    The American Cancer Society has been slammed for using the phrase ‘individuals with a cervix’ in its latest pap screening advice, rather than women.

    Cervical cancer screening is now recommended to start at 25, instead of 21, and HPV testing should begin at 25 rather than 30. 

    But in updating its advice, the ACS used ‘individuals with a cervix’, rather than ‘women’ in their guidance, because transgender, non-binary and gender-nonconforming individuals can also have a cervix

    And they might add, men with all the innate biology of men, are now in some absolute way, ‘women.’

    Et tu, American Cancer Society?

    To reduce women to body parts is absolutely dehumanizing – it’s what the porno industry does, it’s what butcher shops (which serve legitimate human needs) do. But now the medical industry is doing the same thing, reducing women to body parts as if they carried these parts around with them by choice in suitcases.

    The very word ‘woman’ now has to be broken down into body part functions when in fact, all the characteristics that amount to being a woman or being a man are entirely integral to one’s personhood. It goes right down into the DNA and chromosomes, XX for women, XY for men. No transgender surgery can change that, and it would be insane to treat someone medically as if they held the opposite configuration.

    Which explains why even the medical field has now got to balance bowing to the political correctness with actual medical treatment for particular conditions that can affect women.

    This sort of thing started with ‘hormones’ as if that were the only thing that made women women, and men men — hormonal treatment was the only thing necessary for born-male athlete to compete in female sports as long as they claimed the name of ‘woman.’

    But women are much more than hormones – there’s muscle, bone structure and countless things that integrate together to make women women and men men. 

    Now women are being reduced to ‘individuals with a cervix’ instead of recognized for their entire design. 

    What’s bad here is that this won’t be the end of it. If women can be reduced to body parts, it’s only a matter of time before more commodification happens. Body parts will eventually become like property, and perhaps bought and sold. And if bought and sold is the norm, then graded by quality – USDA choice, as commodities are. After that, they could also be stolen, or expropriated. Just as disgusting, a woman who’s had a double masectomy could easily be classified as ‘not a woman,’ since women are now being defined by parts.

    The early feminist movement put a lot of steam into demanding that women not be commodified, reduced to body parts – and now it’s all going that direction now. 

    This can get very grotesque, very Orwellian. Heaven help us.

  • "We're Screwed": The Worst Months For Both Renters And Landlords Still Lie Ahead
    "We're Screwed": The Worst Months For Both Renters And Landlords Still Lie Ahead

    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 08/01/2020 – 22:30

    Rent has barely trickled in across the U.S. over the last couple months as the country continues to grapple with a decimated economy as a result of the coronavirus pandemic. The only reason that many landlords have not gone belly-up alongside of their respective tenants has been due to the emergency “relief” provided by the government in the form of relentlessly printing, handing out and destroying the U.S. dollar.

    Now, with further emergency funding still up in the air and eviction moratoriums about to expire, an ugly picture is starting to emerge for both renters and their landlords. In fact, Bloomberg predicts that the “worst is yet to come”. 

    33% of renters didn’t make their full payment in the first week of July, a recent survey showed. This means that 12 million renters could face eviction over the next four months. In places like New York and Houston, more than 20% of renters say they have “no confidence” in their ability to pay rent next month. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    John Pollock, staff attorney at the Public Justice Center, commented: “You’d have to go back to the Great Depression to find the kind of numbers we’re looking at right now. There’s almost no precedent for this, which is why it’s so scary.”

    If he thinks the economic numbers are scary, he should look into how the Fed is trying to paper over them – that’s even scarier.

    The pandemic caused layoffs across the country beginning in March and, since then, many U.S. citizens have been relying on the government dole, credit cards or digging into their savings to survive. About 11 million renters spend at least half of their income just keeping a roof over their head, Bloomberg writes.

    While stimulus measures – including $1,200 checks that went out months ago and eviction moratoriums – helped the problem, the government is still struggling to extend those measures. Unemployment benefits, which were hiked by $600 per week during the pandemic, also remain an unknown. 

    One analysis says that landlords could wind up losing more than $22 billion in rent over the next four months as a result of the economy. Chuck Sheldon, who manages about 1,650 apartments in New Mexico has said that the $600 unemployment boost was a “huge” part of him still being able to collect most rents on time. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Mary Cunningham, vice president of the Metropolitan Housing and Communities Policy Center at the Urban Institute, said: “If Congress doesn’t do anything, I think we are in for a dark fall and winter.”

    John Pawlowski, a senior analyst at real estate research firm Green Street Advisors, has a different take. He thinks there won’t be an “immediate” crash if unemployment benefits are not extended: “People still need a place to live.”

    Former bartender and 33 year old Brooke Martin disagrees. She told Bloomberg that she can’t cover her $1,800 per month apartment on unemployment, after she pays off student loans and utilities.

    She concluded: “As of the end of the month, we’re screwed. There’s just no two ways about it.”

  • Obese People Are Twice As Likely To Die From Covid
    Obese People Are Twice As Likely To Die From Covid

    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 08/01/2020 – 21:58

    Just in case Americans – the most obese nation in the world – needed another reason to lose some weight, here it is.

    In what is emerging as a perfidious Catch 22, at a time when the US population is rapidly gaining weight due to mandatory work from home regulation (hence the Covid 19 pounds) as described here and here, while a surge in domestic alcohol consumption is only making the matters worse…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    … Public Health England has published a paper titled “Excess Weight and COVID-19  Insights from new evidence“, indicating that the risks of hospitalization, intensive care treatment and death increase progressively with increasing body mass index (BMI) above the healthy weight range even after adjustment for potential confounding factors, including demographic and socioeconomic factors. In other words, the fatter one is, the higher the risk that person may die from covid.

    Some more details: according to the Public Health England paper, the hazard ratios of ICU admission patients who are overweight (BMI ≥25-29.9), obese (BMI ≥30-34.9) or severely obese (BMI ≥35) are 1.64, 2.59 and 4.35, respectively  see figure below) relative to patients with a BMI of ≥20-24.9.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The study also showed an increasing risk of death with increasing BMI with hazard ratios of 1.05, 1.40 and 1.92 for people with a BMI of 30-34, 35-39.9 and ≥40, respectively, relative to BMI <30. In a nutshell, people who are severely obese are twice as likely to die from Covid.

    Which, in a world where facts could be discussed instead of dismissed and slammed as “racist”, would mean that certain races and genders are especially at risk. However, because charts like the one below are racist, it’s best to wallow in ignorance and accuse white people for what is taking place.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Source: Public Health England

    And while being overweight does not seem to increase people’s chances of contracting COVID-19 according to the study, it can affect the respiratory system, and potentially immune function as well.

    And since no crisis will ever be put to waste by a nanny state which after the covid pandemic will control virtually every aspect of our lives, the British government plans to initiate an anti-obesity campaign including strict rules on how junk food is advertised and sold in the UK.

  • A Third Of US Museums "Not Confident" They Will Survive  
    A Third Of US Museums "Not Confident" They Will Survive  

    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 08/01/2020 – 21:30

    The American Alliance of Museums (AAM) recently published a survey designed to gauge the state of the US museum industry during the COVID-19 pandemic. The survey results were troubling, at least a third of directors of 760 museums reported a “significant risk” of closing permanently within 16 months.

    The survey results document extreme financial distress in the museum field. One-third (33%) of respondents were not confident they would be able to survive 16 months without additional financial relief, and 16 percent felt their organization was at significant risk of permanent closure. The vast majority (87%) of museums have only 12 months or less of financial operating reserves remaining, with 56% having less than six months left to cover operations. Forty-four percent had furloughed or laid off some portion of their staff, and 41 percent anticipated reopening with reduced staff. – the survey said

    AAM President and CEO Laura Lott told NPR, “there’s a large public perception that museums rely on government support when the reality is they get only a quarter of their funding from the government.” 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    AAM stats show US museums receive about 850 million visits per year. However, this year, because of the virus pandemic and strict social distancing rules, those numbers will dramatically be reduced, resulting in the lower ticket, gift shop, and food sales. 

    Of the 760 museums surveyed, 40% were history museums, historic houses, and historical societies. Others were aquariums, botanical gardens, art museums, and science centers.

    AAM said museums support “726,000 direct and indirect jobs and contribute $50 billion each year to the economy,” adding that “over 40% plan to reduce staff and will need to spend additional funds to ensure their ability to reopen safely.” 

    To sum up, the great museum bust is dead ahead. Does that mean cheap art is about the hit auction houses and reverse lofty prices? 

  • The Consequences Of "Worthless Cash"
    The Consequences Of "Worthless Cash"

    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 08/01/2020 – 21:00

    Authored by Louis-Vincent Gave via Evergreen Gavekal blog,

    “Lesson: In the real world, ninety-nine cents will not get you into New York City. You will need the full dollar.”

    – Bruce Springsteen, Born to Run (back when people wanted to get into NYC, rather than out of it)

    “The desire of gold is not for gold. It is for the means of freedom and benefit.”

    – Ralph Waldo Emerson

    INTRODUCTION

    Prior to the Great War, the gold standard* reigned supreme. However, when World War I broke out, most countries abandoned this standard to pay their military expenses with printed money, which devalued their currency. The United States, which was a rising world power at the time, remained off the battlefield for the first two years of the war and became an important supplier to the United Kingdom, France, and other Allied Powers. As a result, the United States became the lender of choice for those that bought US supplies in return for foreign bonds – and gold. When the Great War began in 1914, the British pound was the world’s leading reserve currency. However, five short years later, and the US dollar replaced the pound as the world’s leading reserve currency.

    In the decades that followed, the United States once more supplied the Allies with weapons and other goods for World War II. The United States was again paid largely in gold, propelling it to hold the vast majority of the world’s most precious metal in its coffers. This precluded a return to the gold standard by almost all of the countries that had depleted their gold reserves. In 1944, the Bretton Woods Agreement was formulated. Pursuant to this, the Allies, who would go on to win the war the next year, determined that the world’s currencies could no longer be linked to gold, but could be linked to the US dollar, which was, in turn, linked to gold.

    Fast forward to today, and more than 61% of all foreign bank reserves are denominated in U.S. dollars – either in the form of cold hard cash or U.S. treasuries. This reserve status is largely based on the strength and size of the US economy and financial markets. However, as the U.S. Treasury has continued to print U.S. dollars to stabilize the economy and markets in response to the havoc unleashed by the Covid-19 pandemic, the once-mighty U.S. dollar has come under some serious pressure.

    In this week’s final installment of Louis-Vincent Gave’s three-part series on possible explanations for the recent rebound in global equity markets, Louis considers the possibility that investors are flocking into equities out of fear that the U.S. dollar could be worth a lot less in the years ahead. As you will read, two of the main beneficiaries of this tidal shift have been gold, which recently hit an all-time high, and gold miners, who have outperformed all other asset classes year-to-date.

    The jury is still out on whether the dollar’s long run as the world’s leading reserve currency will be sustained in the coming years. However, as discussed in our May 1 newsletter, our bet is that the US dollar will be the major casualty in an era of unbridled monetary and fiscal stimulus.

    On the flipside, those who have traded in their greenbacks for gold bars (and other precious metals) are likely to see a red-hot bull run continue to rage on, notwithstanding inevitable corrections along the way.  Speaking of “way”, this bullion bull market might just go way, way above the $2,000/ounce level it has nearly attained.  If it seems incomprehensible that gold might rise as high as $3,000/ounce (as some respected analysts have suggested), is it any more incredible that the Fed’s trove of treasuries, bought with its seemingly limitless bogus bucks, will soon hit $10 trillion? Never say never…especially these days.

    * The gold standard is a monetary system where a country’s currency or paper money has a value directly linked to gold.

    Disclosure: Louis Gave has an equity ownership in Evergreen. Louis’ views and opinions are his own, and are not necessarily the views of Evergreen.  Securities highlighted or discussed in this communication are not a recommendation for or against these securities. Evergreen actively manages client portfolios and securities discussed in this communication may or may not be held in such portfolios at any given time. Please see important disclosures following this piece.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    THE CONSEQUENCES OF ‘WORTHLESS CASH’ BY LOUIS-VINCENT GAVE

    In the second quarter of this year, global equity markets registered their best quarterly performance in two decades. What was behind this record-breaking rebound? A number of explanations appeared possible. In the first paper of this series, I considered the possibility that markets were pricing in a return to the macro environment that prevailed in the post-2008, pre-Covid-19 world. In the second paper, I pondered the possibility that investors had simply lost their senses. In this, the third paper, I will consider the possibility that the present growth in monetary aggregates is leading investors to conclude that they have no alternative; money is being debased at such a pace that sitting on cash in a bank account is, over the long term, sheer madness.

    Over the last few months US monetary growth has broken new highs week-after-week. Today US M2 growth stands at 24.9% year-on-year, more than six times the structural growth rate of nominal GDP. So the idea that cash is in danger of becoming worthless is no delusion; this rate of money printing has never been seen before in the history of the US, or of any other G7 economy.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    An uncomfortable diagnosis

    Finance 101 teaches that the price of an equity is determined by a company’s future cash flows, discounted by an interest rate, to which is added a risk premium. Theoretically then, to be successful an investor should only have to formulate a view on these three variables. But is it really that simple? Consider the following:

    1. Future cash flows. With global economic growth much lower today and for the foreseeable future than anticipated at the start of the year, it is obvious that corporate cashflows will take a hit in 2020, most likely in 2021, and perhaps in 2022 to boot.

    2. Interest rates. Interest rates around the world collapsed in the early days of the Covid-19 panic, and the total return on bonds, especially long-dated bonds, went through the roof. However, since April interest rates have largely flatlined, as have total returns on long-dated bonds; in recent months, falling interest rates have stopped being a tail-wind for equities.

    3. Risk premiums. If cashflows are bound to disappoint and interest rates are no longer falling, then the only possible explanation for the present bull market is that risk premiums have collapsed. But if so, then why have risk premiums collapsed? The world hardly seems a less risky place than six months ago. On the contrary: every other week seems to bring a new catastrophe. So, to attribute the current bull market to a collapse in risk premiums seems an uncomfortable proposition to say the least.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Or maybe the simpler explanation is that for all the talk about the rampaging equity bull market, global equities aren’t in much of a bull market at all. In the first two papers of this series, I pointed out that the MSCI World ex-US index has flatlined since both 2007 and 2014. Perhaps even more surprising, the Valueline composite index, which is arguably the best proxy for the performance of the median US stock, stands at the same level today as in 1998 (see the chart below).

    Admittedly, the Valueline is a price index, and so does not include the contribution of dividends to total returns. Nevertheless, the failure of key broad equity market benchmarks to make anything like new highs despite all the talk of a rampaging equity bull market is remarkable. So where should investors actually look to find this remarkable bull?

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Finding the rampaging bull

    Defining a bear market is easy enough: if the price of an asset falls by a given amount—for equity indexes, usually -20%—then it is generally accepted that the asset is in a bear market. But if it is to be useful, the definition of a bull market needs to be more complicated. The financial media usually talk about a 20% rise as a “bull market,” but that hardly seems satisfactory. Under that definition, oil, which has more than doubled from its mid-April lows, would be in a bull market. However, very few energy investors have been popping the champagne corks lately.

    So, it may be more useful to propose an alternative definition: an asset class is in a bull market when its underlying price continues to make new cycle highs.

    This handy definition is particularly useful today, given that markets bottomed in mid-March 2020, and have since rallied hard almost everywhere around the world. Yet within this broad rebound, some assets have gone on to make new highs for the year, while others have not. With this in mind, it is easier to argue that the assets that have made new highs are in a bull market, while those that have yet to recover their start-of-the-year levels still have a lot to prove.

    Using this—admittedly self-serving—definition narrows the current bull market down greatly, and so this investigation is within manageable limits. Sticking to the “must have made new year-to-date highs” benchmark, it becomes clear that:

    • The rampaging bull is no longer to be found in the world’s bond markets. From late 2018 to March 2020, bond prices continued to shoot up. However, the advance has now stalled. This is an important shift in the investment environment and a message investors should heed (see the chart below).

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    • The rampaging bull is no longer found in the US dollar. It increasingly looks as if the US dollar bull market may have ended with the blow-off top of March 2020. The US dollar, as measured by the DXY index, is now back trading below its two-year moving average—and this in the middle of a global crisis. Moreover, unless the US dollar rebounds sharply and quickly, the slope of the two-year moving average is soon set to roll over. This is another important shift in the investment environment.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    • In a broad sense, equities have now gone nowhere for 30 months. The MSCI World index ex-dividends now stands -2% below where it stood in January 2018, and -6.2% below the levels of February 2020.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Nonetheless, behind this backdrop of flat interest rates, mild US dollar weakness and flatlining—albeit volatile—global equity markets, the rampaging bull has found a home in four different asset classes: (i) Big Tech, (ii) green investments, (iii) precious metals, and (iv) Chinese equities. And of these, precious metal miners have outperformed all other asset classes year-to-date. Let’s look at these four bull markets one-by-one.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The Big Tech bull market

    Many liters of ink have been spilled over the Big Tech bull market. The subject is unavoidable, if only because Facebook, Amazon, Apple, Microsoft and Google now account for more than a fifth of the S&P 500. As a result, the decision either to overweight or to underweight Big Tech has made or broken many portfolio managers’ performance in recent years. And it’s likely to continue to do so for a good few years to come.

    In Have Equities Become A Bubble?, I reviewed the most cogent argument against overweighting Big Tech—that the law of large numbers presents a serious hurdle to future gains. To illustrate this challenge, let me propose the following exercise. Let’s accept that:

    • Over time, the S&P 500 rises by roughly 6% a year (even if this seems optimistic given current equity valuations and interest rates).

    • Over the past six years, FAAMG stocks have risen by an average of 26% a year, and that investors paying up record valuations for these stocks are obviously hopeful that these returns will continue.

    If we accept these two points, then, as the chart below illustrates, for the maths to “square up,” we would have to imagine the following:

    1. If returns for the S&P 500 ex-FAAMG were roughly -5% per annum for the next five years;

    2. Then by late 2024, the FAAMG would be larger than the other 494 companies in the S&P 500;

    3. And by 2028, at this rate the FAAMG stocks would be bigger than the entire US market, including themselves. It should go without saying that this is manifestly impossible.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    As readers will have realized, there is an obvious flaw in the chart above: if the FAAMG do continue compounding at 26% over the coming decade, then as they begin to make up an ever greater share of the S&P 500, the S&P 500 as a whole would begin to compound at a faster rate. And this begs the question whether the S&P 500 can compound at a rate much higher 6%.

    The first pillar on which the Big Tech bull market rests is that inflation and economic growth around the world will remain modest for as far as the eye can see. And in a world with low inflation, low growth and low interest rates, investors might as well pay up for aggressive growth stocks. In a low return world, the 15% annual profit growth delivered by Big Tech stands out so blatantly it warrants a 26% share price appreciation.

    This brings me back to the challenge of big numbers and the iron law of compounding (Albert Einstein reputedly said that there is no more powerful force in the universe than compounding). This iron law faces an obvious logical challenge.

    • Start with the premise that Big Tech’s share price growth can far outpace profit growth because of the lack of GDP growth around the world;

    • And GDP growth around the world is weak—say 3%?;

    • Then very quickly Big Tech will get too big as a share of global equity benchmarks. And as it does, the return on global equities will have to accelerate from roughly 6% per year now, to 8%, and then 10%, 12% etc;

    • But can global equity returns accelerate to 8%, and on towards 12%, if global GDP growth stays weak? Probably not. Such rapid equity gains would likely trigger an economic boom of their own, with roaring animal spirits feeding greater consumption.

    • And if growth accelerates, doesn’t that undermine the very first pillar on which the exceptional Big Tech bull market rests. In an accelerating global growth environment, lots of other assets would start to look attractive.

    Trying to square this particular circle, investors can come to only one of two possible logical conclusions. The first is that FAAMG stocks will not be able to keep compounding at 26% a year. At some point in the future, we will look back at Microsoft on 11.5 times sales, Tesla on 10.5 times sales, and Facebook on 9.5 times sales and remember the words of Scott McNealy, the CEO of Sun Microsystems, who said of the early-2000 valuation of his company:

    “At 10 times revenues, to give you a 10-year payback, I have to pay you 100% of revenues for 10 straight years in dividends… That assumes I have zero cost of goods sold, which is very hard for a computer company. That assumes zero expenses, which is really hard with 39,000 employees. That assumes I pay no taxes, which is very hard. And that assumes you pay no taxes on your dividends, which is kind of illegal. And that assumes with zero R&D for the next 10 years, I can maintain the current revenue run rate… Do you realize how ridiculous those basic assumptions are? You don’t need any transparency. You don’t need any footnotes. What were you thinking?

    The second possible conclusion to square the circle of FAAMG stocks compounding at such a high rate that the broader market also compounds at an ever higher rate, against a backdrop of weak US and global GDP growth, is that the currency in which all of this is denominated becomes ever more worthless. And in an environment of rapid currency debasement, equities usually outperform bonds and cash, even in the absence of credible GDP growth. One particular example springs to mind.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    This brings me to the second bull market that is unfolding: the one we might call “the rise of the green machine”.

    The rise of the green machine

    In the chart below, the red line tracks the performance of alternative energy stocks around the world. The blue line tracks the performance of more traditional energy providers—mostly oil producers, some natural gas, and a tiny little bit of coal. For most of the past six years, these two energy provider segments delivered roughly the same performance.

    This makes sense given that, by and large, alternative energy companies and traditional energy companies sell—at bottom—the same product: energy. The one key difference is the way this energy is produced.

    Suddenly, however, the difference in the method of production has become important enough to justify a massive divergence in performance between the share prices of the two groups of energy producers.

    This divergence leaves investors facing a question: why should the value of alternative energy producers be climbing to new highs, even as traditional energy producers continue to be the biggest three-legged donkey in the paddock? There are three possible explanations.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    1. The first possible explanation is that we are currently seeing a wave of technological breakthroughs in alternative energy. And these breakthroughs are of such a magnitude that they will render carbon extraction obsolete. I have a hard time buying into this explanation.

    2. The second possible explanation is that investors have taken leave of their senses. Because of a desire to be seen to be doing the “right thing”, investors no longer care about long term returns on their capital, or even the long term return of their capital. Instead, what matters is the immediate priority of “virtue-signaling” at scale. Cue the current growth of “socially responsible investing,” carbon-free investment mandates, and so on. On a purely superficial and anecdotal basis, this explanation seems to fit in well with the spirit of the times, so this could well be a factor.

    3. Having said that, it is the third possible explanation, which I shall call the Cantillon effect at work, which really makes the most sense.

    Richard Cantillon, an Irishman who spent much of his life in France, only wrote one book: Essai Sur La Nature Du Commerce En Général. It was only published after his death in the early 18th century and today is seldom studied in economics classes, even though it was a ground-breaking text in the history of political economy, and one which had a huge influence on the likes of Knut Wicksell, the economists of the Austrian school, and the great Irving Fisher.

    Cantillon’s starting point was, originally for the times, the value of money. While everyone uses money to measure all the other values in the system, few economists before Cantillon had spent any time trying to understand why money has value in the first place, or just as importantly, why that value changes over time. The reason Cantillon was drawn to the subject may have been because he lived in such extraordinary times.

    One of Cantillon’s contemporaries was John Law, who through his Mississippi Company ignited an epic boom and devastating bust in France, which until then had been by far the wealthiest country in Europe. It is fair to say that despite the long list of Englishmen who through history have inflicted such damage on France—Edward the Black Prince, Horatio Nelson, the Duke of Wellington, Brian Moore—none have caused as much damage as the Scotsman Law. However, at least one positive thing came out of the bust: Cantillon’s insights. And these were derived from practical experience; Cantillon was a phenomenally successful speculator, who made out like a bandit in both the South Sea and Mississippi bubbles, first on the way up, then on the way down.

    Cantillon’s key insight was that when “new’” money is created, those who are closest to the source of its creation are the first to see the prices of whatever they are selling rise. By contrast, those furthest from the source of the money will be the last to see the prices of their particular wares increase. To cut a long story short, if we define inflation as an increase in the money supply, then its main impact is a change in relative prices—and not, as most people believe, a change in absolute prices.

    Those who are close to the central bank get rich; those who are not get poor. As a result, investment piles into the “favored” sectors, while the rest of the economy is starved of money. Eventually, these changes lead to a misallocation of capital with the appearance of multiple false “natural rates,” while there is only one market rate. It is in this mechanism that we find the origin of the market crashes which, as night follows day, always come after major misallocations of capital.

    As an example, Cantillon cited the 16th and 17th centuries’ massive increase in Latin America’s production of silver, most of which was “captured” by the King of Spain. As a result, the prices of the goods bought by the Spanish court skyrocketed immediately, while food prices took a long time to follow. And when the production of silver eventually collapsed, all the “court-linked sectors” went bankrupt.

    Fast forward to today, and is it possible to imagine a sector closer to power than alternative energy? Which of today’s professional politicians does not want to be seen to be writing checks for the clean energies of the future, produced right here at home? And at the same time, is it possible to think of an industry further from the center of power today than big oil?

    When former vice president Joe Biden announces a plan to spend US$2trn once he’s elected on a “green new deal,” is the motivation behind his largesse the promise of future financial returns? Or is it the desire to signal virtue? (With other people’s money, naturally; the US is already running multitrillion US dollar budget deficits, with a debt-to-GDP ratio now higher than at its World War II peak. But who’s counting?)

    I would argue the latter. This implies that the performance of the alternative energy bull market is an especially strong signal of a Cantillon effect unfolding right in front of our eyes. And on the other side of a Cantillon-effect bull market always lies currency depreciation.

    This brings me to the third of today’s bull markets: precious metals.

    The bull market in precious metals

    Year-to-date, gold and silver miners have outperformed all other major asset classes. This outperformance has come against a backdrop of steadily rising gold prices, and sharp rallies in silver prices. Gold has now made new all-time record highs in every currency except the US dollar. And when it comes to the US dollar, if you look at quarterly averages for the price of gold, then the average price in 2Q20 of US$1,780/oz was a shade above the average price of US$1,772 at the peak of the previous bull market in 3Q12.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    If anything would confirm that the current bull market is driven primarily by currency debasement, it would be the outperformance of gold and silver against all other assets. As it turns out, the metals themselves are not outperforming tech. But gold and silver miners are. The question is whether this outperformance carries an important message about today’s world.

    Historically, once gold bull markets get going, they tend to be long, drawn-out affairs, interrupted only by sharp tightening from the US Federal Reserve, as in 1981, or by a sustained rise in the US dollar, as in 2012. Today, neither appears to be on the cards. So, what will stop the bull market in gold?

    One answer might have been a major bust in the emerging markets. Most of the physical demand for gold today comes from India, China, South East Asia and the Middle East. The Indian sub-continent weighs especially heavily in the supply and demand equation. When things go well in India, the marginal rupee tends to find its way into gold. And when things go badly, it has generally flowed out of gold. This pattern makes the current bull market all the more remarkable: gold prices have been rising even though the Indian economy has ground to a standstill.

    However, even as India has hit the skids, the world’s second gold market, China, has been thriving. Or at least its stock market has been ripping higher.

    The China bull market

    With Covid-19 originating in China, the US-China relationship deteriorating further, China imposing a highly unpopular security law on Hong Kong, global trade collapsing, the UK banning Huawei, China and India coming to blows in the Himalayas, and the Chinese government doing far less fiscal and monetary stimulus than any other major government, who would have thought that the CSI 300 would be outperforming all other major markets year-to-date, except for the Nasdaq? Yet, that is exactly what is happening. And just as success has many fathers, there are probably several germinal forces behind the rising Chinese equity market.

    The most obvious hand is that of the government. The market had been grinding slowly higher, like other markets, until an editorial on the front page of the China Securities Journal highlighted that a bull market would be most welcome at the current juncture. The army of Chinese retail investors did not need to be told twice, and the domestic Chinese equity market promptly gapped higher.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    But why, following the 2015 debacle, would the Chinese government decide to take another swig from this particular chalice? Possible explanations include:

    1. The need to keep capital markets on an even keel as Xi Jinping “ties up loose ends” in Hong Kong. Stepping into Hong Kong was a big change of policy for Xi. Until May, the “vibe” coming out of Beijing had been that Hong Kong was a problem for Hong Kong’s government to solve. This changed once Shanghai failed to get the Alibaba secondary placement, and once US senators started tightening the conditions for Chinese corporates listing in New York. All of a sudden, with Hong Kong the only major capital market still open for Chinese business, settling the Hong Kong situation became Xi’s priority. And now that Hong Kong is Xi’s problem, he needs to make a success of it.

    2. The need to promote consumption, especially of bigger ticket items such as cars and household appliances. Usually, this is done through the promotion of real estate. But real estate is already buoyant, and a number of cities are back flirting with bubble territory. Promoting further real estate gains from here could lead to an even bigger hangover when the party ends than a stock market boom.

    3. The desire to attract foreign capital. As it becomes increasingly obvious that the US-China divorce will be messy, China needs to dedollarize its trade and its economy even faster than it anticipated. The obvious way to do this is by promoting the renminbi as a separate trade currency. But of course, foreigners are only likely to want to keep their working capital or their savings in renminbi if renminbi-denominated assets are seen as an attractive destination.

    This last explanation brings me back to the thesis developed in the book that Charles and I wrote a little over a year ago: that China is now actively attempting to dedollarize pan-emerging-markets trade. This matters enormously, because should China succeed, emerging markets across Asia, Africa, Central Asia and Eastern Europe will find themselves needing far fewer US dollars. A world in which the US dollar’s share of global trade starts to shrink rapidly— still highly hypothetical—is a world which would rapidly find itself with far too many US dollars floating abroad.

    A world with an overflow of US dollars would be a very different world from the one we inhabit. It would be a world in which:

    • Precious metals would likely go through the roof.

    • Asia, including China, would outperform meaningfully.

    • The only thing to own in the US would be the businesses in which the US has a clear comparative advantage.

    Now, come to think of it, isn’t this precisely what we are seeing today?

  • US Beach Towns Fear Collapse As Summer Of Pandemic Causes Havoc
    US Beach Towns Fear Collapse As Summer Of Pandemic Causes Havoc

    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 08/01/2020 – 20:30

    The executive director of the Bethany-Fenwick Chamber of Commerce, Lauren Weaver, told USA Today that “our businesses (located on the southern tip of the Delmarva Peninsula) have 12 weeks to make money to survive the rest of the year…  sales for the town’s 75 or so beach-district merchants are down 40% to 70% compared with a year ago.” 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Weaver warned: “A lot of them are not going to survive” this season. 

    Bethany-Fenwick is an upscale beach community, home to wealthy elites, such as Joe Biden. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Joe Biden’s North Shores home just north of Rehoboth Beach

    The virus pandemic has made it challenging for local businesses to operate, many of whom only make money during the summer months. 

    Down the street, about 20 minutes south, revenue for businesses in Ocean City, Maryland, is down 20% to 25%, said Susan Jones, head of the Ocean City Hotel-Motel-Restaurant Association. 

    Jones said the city’s decision to reopen beaches in early May despite the virus pandemic helped businesses survive. She said this year is a not a profitability story, but rather a breakeven story. 

    Back to Rehoboth and Dewey Beaches, which are a string of beach towns that generate more than $3.5 billion in annual revenue, according to Southern Delaware Tourism. Much of the area is dependent on travel and tourism.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Bethany was shut down for 2.5 months to mitigate the virus spread, reopened in early June with stores and restaurants operating at 30% capacity. Capacity has doubled to 60% in July; the recovery, however, is anything but smooth. 

    The reopening of eateries in Dewey has been rough. Gov. John Carney had to shut down restaurants before July 4 holiday, one of the biggest revenue days of the year for businesses in the area, after tourists tested positive for COVID-19. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The Bethany Beach Ocean Suites Hotel said the average summer rate is $799 per night, has been dramatically reduced following a rash of cancellations.  

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Bethany Beach Ocean Suites Hotel

    Alex Heidenberger, who co-owns Mango’s eatery in Bethany, said he “cried” when the governor decided to shut restaurants ahead of July 4th weekend. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Mango’s eatery in Bethany

    Heidenberger said, “Mango’s revenue fell by $300,000 in the weeks before and after July 4, accounting for the bulk of the $400,000 in losses the restaurant has sustained during the crisis.”

    “To take two steps back, that is the worst possible scenario,” said Heidenberger. 

    During the good times, he said the restaurant made $200,000 per week in sales, and around $2 million in summer revenue. This summer, he said, Mango’s sales have been halved.

    “It’s really devastating us,” he said. “I’m operating at a loss,” adding that, “every day is a new challenge — it’s just exhausting.” 

    Heidenberger said he hasn’t paid the mortgage in four months. Profitability at the restaurant has collapsed. With the beach town in crisis, he has had to serve as a lifeguard on the beach as a shortage in beach crew was due to lockdowns. 

    “I’m working harder than I have ever worked in my life,” he said, adding that he puts in about 80 hours a week at the two restaurants. Yet, “I have no money… This is all I think about. I don’t sleep.”

    He wasn’t sure if Mango’s was going to make it through the summer:

    “I don’t know what the future is going to be,” Heidenberger said, noting his family already has closed two restaurants in D.C. as a result of the pandemic. At the same time, he said, “This is all I know. This is what I love.”

    A similar collapse is happening in beach communities in California, Florida, New Jersey, and Texas.

  • "Peaceful Riots"? Journalism Bows To The Woke Mob
    "Peaceful Riots"? Journalism Bows To The Woke Mob

    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 08/01/2020 – 20:00

    Authored by Mark Hemingway via RealClearPolitics.com,

    Just a few weeks ago the idea of “peaceful riots” would have seemed absurd, but the American media is nothing if not inventive these days.

    Earlier this week, ABC News reported, “Protesters in California set fire to a courthouse, damaged a police station and assaulted officers after a peaceful demonstration intensified.” Legal scholar Eugene Volokh wonders how this terminology would work in the real world: “You are being charged with an intensified peaceful demonstration, in the second degree. How do you plead?”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Indeed, the media’s commitment to tempering their descriptions of violent riots sweeping the nation as “mostly peaceful” is relentless – that particular phrase has become a media cliché practically overnight. Of course, America’s police officers could also be accurately described as “mostly peaceful,” but any journalist who dared to give cops the same generous benefit of the doubt would likely cause a riot in their own newsroom.

    That’s why it was almost shocking to read an Associated Press report earlier this week from reporter Mike Balsamo, who embedded with federal law enforcement protecting the Mark O. Hatfield courthouse in downtown Portland.

    I watched as injured officers were hauled inside. In one case, the commercial firework came over so fast the officer didn’t have time to respond. It burned through his sleeves and he had bloody gashes on both forearms. Another had a concussion from being hit in the head with a mortar,” Balsamo reported.

    “The lights inside the courthouse have to be turned off for safety and the light from high-powered lasers bounced across the lobby almost all night. The fear is palpable. Three officers were struck in the last few weeks and still haven’t regained their vision.”

    Despite the obvious evidence of organized violence, Balsamo’s report is about the only good-faith effort from the national press attempting to inform the public about the current plight of law enforcement. Meanwhile, the media have spent weeks going out of their way to portray rioters as unambiguous freedom fighters.

    When protesters in Portland organized a “Wall of Moms” to stand between federal marshals protecting the courthouse and the rioters throwing bricks and shooting fireworks, it prompted gushing media coverage. Columnist Jonathan Alter called the Wall of Moms a “brilliant tactic that may forever change social protest,” apparently unaware that groups such as Hamas have been cynically using human shields for decades. Following their 15 minutes of fame, you will not be surprised to learn that the group has descended into “Judean People’s Frontinfighting over the leader’s allegedly insufficient fealty to Black Lives Matter. In spite of media wish-casting, the Wall of Moms was never a morally serious effort.

    Naturally, the big beneficiaries of this one-sided media narrative about riots are Democratic Party politicians. On Wednesday, acting Secretary of Homeland Security Chad Wolf announced that the federal government had reached a deal with the city of Portland to downsize the federal law enforcement presence at the courthouse that was clashing with protesters. However, Wolf’s statement made it clear that the deal was contingent on the city stepping up its own police presence to protect the building, which was all the federal government had asked the city to do months ago.

    Rather than admit the deal was a tacit acknowledgement Portland had failed its basic responsibility to maintain law and order, Oregon Gov. Kate Brown pretended it was a victory against jackbooted feds who “acted as an occupying force and brought violence.”

    But Brown’s rhetoric is dishonest, as she knows better than most. There were nightly riots for weeks before the feds arrived in downtown Portland. Along with Minneapolis and Seattle, Portland holds the dubious distinction of being a city that has failed to protect its own buildings. Rioters had already burned the Multnomah County Justice Center jail and the Portland Police Bureau headquarters, just a few blocks away from the federal courthouse.

    Speaking as an Oregonian and former resident of Portland, I’ll note that the city’s problems go far beyond the recent riots. Business leaders have been begging City Hall to address law and order issues for years. In 2017, the CEO of Columbia Sportswear, one of Oregon’s most beloved companies, wrote a blistering op-ed about the city’s problems.

    “A few days ago, one of our employees had to run into traffic when a stranger outside our office followed her and threatened to kill her,” Tim Boyle wrote.

    “On other occasions our employees have arrived at work only to be menaced by individuals camping in the doorway. And our employees have had so many car break-ins downtown that we have started referring to parking in Portland as our ‘laptop donation program.’ Given these experiences, it is a relief when the only thing we are dealing with is the garbage and human waste by our front door. Think about that for a minute. This is outrageous and unacceptable.”

    Anyone who has spent time in Portland comes to understand the mutually beneficial relationship between the homeless and itinerant gutter-punks who are the main source of the city’s crime and violence and the left-wing activists whose radical agenda of decriminalization lets them control the streets. After police responded to Boyle’s plea to keep excrement out of the doorway of his business, Boyle found himself on the receiving end of organized protests, forcing him to shut down Columbia’s flagship store downtown.

    The city has also been capitulating to threats of left-wing political violence for years. Also in 2017, Portland canceled its annual Rose parade after “anti-fascists” threatened violence because members of the Multnomah County Republican Party were among the many civic groups slated to march. It’s one thing to claim that violence is justified against unwanted federal officers invading your city – but threatening local residents with violence because they are Republicans?

    Even then, the city rolled over and in doing so conceded that violent left-wing activists control Portland. That’s not hyperbole – taking control of the city was literally one of the threats made in the anonymous email that caused officials to cancel the parade: “You have seen how much power we have downtown and that the police cannot stop us from shutting down roads so please consider your decision wisely.”

    Who exactly is in charge in Portland? Well, it’s not Mayor Ted Wheeler, who’s spent years openly disparaging and undermining his own police force even as he let antifa direct traffic in his city. You’d think this would endear Wheeler to the radicals he’s trying to appease, but when he recently made a supportive appearance at the courthouse protests downtown the crowd booed and yelled at him to resign.

    At this point, it’s insulting to insist that American consumers of news can’t distinguish legitimate protest from violent rioting that has devastated Portland and dozens of other cities. Similarly, there’s plenty of room for criticism of heavy-handed federal and police tactics, while still understanding that we can’t stand by and let violent mobs burn courthouses. But if covering a story from multiple angles used to be the norm in the media, it’s not anymore.

    Ultimately, members of the media have a choice to make – you can be honest about the alarming evidence of law and order breaking down in American cities. Or you can continue to torch your credibility by downplaying the nightly violence for reasons that appear overtly partisan. Please consider your decision wisely.

  • America's Coin Shortage Is Getting Worse
    America's Coin Shortage Is Getting Worse

    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 08/01/2020 – 19:30

    The nation’s coin shortage, prompted by less cash circulating as a result of Covid-19 – is getting worse.

    And believe it or not, cash is still being used in 49% of payments that are $10 or below, according to a recent study by the Federal Reserve Bank of San Francisco, reported on by Bloomberg.

    The irony of the situation lies in the fact that the Fed can print trillions for bonds, but can’t come up with a couple of quarters to do its laundry. Despite the Fed’s best efforts to keep money circulating, there is still a coin shortage in the U.S. The effects are being felt in places like laundromats, where coins are used to do laundry.

    Brian Wallace, president and CEO of the Coin Laundry Association (we swear this is an actual organization), said: “This is just an unexpected wrench in the works that I don’t think any of us could have anticipated, finding ourselves short on quarters.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Only about 20% of laundromats offer a card option and 27% accept credit cards. In other words, most laundromats still rely on coins to do business. 

    “The people that show up to the laundromat each weekend are there for a purpose. It’s an essential service. Anything that impedes that progress certainly impacts tens of millions of families that use vended laundry each week,” Wallace continued. 

    Coinstar, which processed $2.7 billion worth of coins last year, collects an 11.9% fee from customers. The company has said its business has decreased during the lockdown, but it is now starting to see a slight bounce back. And despite operating in Japan, Canada, Italy, and several other European countries, it hasn’t seen the same issues outside the U.S. 

    “There’s something unique about the U.S. that we can’t figure out why this has come to this crisis,” says Jim Gaherity, chief executive officer of Coinstar. “I don’t refer to it as a shortage, I refer to it as ‘We don’t have coin moving.’ It’s there, it’s just not in the right place.” 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Jerome Powell said in June that the shortage would be temporary, while at the same time U.S. mints spool up more production.

    The Fed has, in the interim, put together a “coin task force” to liaise with companies like Coinstar to help come up with solutions. Organizations like the Coin Laundry Association have suggested the Fed distributing additional coins and prioritizing to “consumer businesses in the essential critical infrastructure workforce.”

    Banks and businesses are also offering premiums and deals for turning in your coins. One Wisconsin bank is offering a $5 bonus for every $100 worth of coins that are turned in. Recall, days ago, we wrote that Chick-Fil-A was giving away free food to customers who paid in coins. 

  • California COVID-19 Cases Top 500,000 As Global Total Nears 18 Million: Live Updates
    California COVID-19 Cases Top 500,000 As Global Total Nears 18 Million: Live Updates

    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 08/01/2020 – 19:08

    Summary:

    • California cases top 500k
    • Texas reports another 9k+ new cases
    • New York to announce decision on schools next week
    • Arizona cases slow, deaths climb
    • Florida deaths top 7k
    • Poland suffers 3rd record jump in COVID-19 cases
    • Germany sees “R” rate hit 1.06
    • Tokyo reports 472
    • Russia hopes to start mass vaccinations in October

    * * *

    Update (1840ET): California, the state with the largest number of COVID-19 cases in the US, has just surpassed half a million cases.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The state recorded 6,542 infections over the past 24 hours, below the rolling 14-day average, according to the state health department’s website. The death toll increased by 219 on Friday to 9,224, a 2.4% rise from the previous day.

    If California were a country, it would have the 6th-largest case total in the world, leaving it between South Africa (~505k) and Mexico (~425k).

    California now has 500,130 confirmed cases, run 7,886,587 diagnostic tests (an increase of 75,546 tests since Thursday), while the positivity rate over 14 days was 7.3%.

    Arizona reported another 2,992 cases (+1.7%) on Saturday, which was higher than the 1.5% 7-day average. Total cases, at a time when the state has doubled testing, are 177,002.

    The state reported 53 new fatalities, bringing its death toll to 3,747. The state reported 68 deaths yesterday.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Arizona’s rate of positive tests dropped again, to 12.6%, down from 15.7% reported Friday and 21.3% the day before.

    ICU occupancy declined slightly to 85%.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    In other news, New York Governor Andrew Cuomo said he would make a decision on whether the state will be reopening schools in the coming week.

    He said NYC missed a Friday deadline to submit reopening plans.

    “An initial decision at this point is schools should plan on reopening,” Cuomo said during a phone briefing with reporters on Saturday. One major complicating factor is parents – who must first believe that the schools are safe, or there will be partial attendance.

    “So you open a school, you will have partial attendance, which will serve no one,” he said.

    New York reported 753 new virus cases, in line with the 0.2% average increase of the previous seven days. The state also reported 4 new deaths.

    Texas reported 9,539 new cases on Saturday, boosting the state’s total to 430,485. Deaths increased by 268 to 6,837, the Department of State Health Services said.

    Globally, the total number of confirmed cases is nearing 18 million: There were 17,987,000 confirmed/suspected cases worldwide as of Saturday evening in New York.

    * * *

    For the next few days, the COVID-19 pandemic won’t be the only major disaster unfolding in the Sun Belt: Hurricane Isais is headed straight for Miami-Dade, the worst-hit county in the worst-hit state.

    To be sure, as we pointed out yesterday, hospitalizations and single-day case tallies, and daily positivity percentages appear to finally be declining across the Sun Belt.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    However, deaths have continued to climb. In the US, COVID-19 daily deaths topped 1,000 – another 1,353 deaths, to be exact – for the fifth consecutive day of fatalities over 1,000. for the fifth straight day, even as the shuttering of testing sites in some parts of the state has caused positivity numbers to decline.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    According to the latest data published by Bloomberg and JHU on Saturday morning, the US added 66,545 new virus cases on Friday, a 1.5% increase, compared with the daily average increase of 1.6%. Total cases were 4,561,511.

    On Saturday, Florida reported 179 new deaths, snapping a 4-day streak of record daily death numbers, while also pushing the state’s death toll past 7k to 7,022.

    Fla also reported another 9,642 cases (+2%), lower than the 2.3% average increase over the prior week. The state’s total is now 480,028.

    Governor Ron DeSantis has declared a state of emergency as the storm nears, and many state-run testing facilities have been closed.

    Meanwhile, in Europe and Asia, new case numbers continued to climb.

    Public health officials in Tokyo announced 472 new cases on Saturday, a new record for Japan’s capital city, according to NHK public television, which quoted Tokyo officials as saying such. The number of cases reported out of the capital megacity topped 400 for 2 days in a row.

    Tokyo Gov Yuriko Koike has said Tokyo could declare its own state of emergency if the situation continues to worsen, however, the central government says there is still no need to do so nationally, despite a record spike in several cities around the nation.

    As thousands of protesters gathered in Berlin to campaign against the government reimposing economically-painful COVID-19 restrictions – with some claiming the hysteria surrounding the virus, Germany recorded 864 new infections in the 24 hours through Saturday morning. A spate of smaller outbreaks has kept the infection rate above the key threshold of 1.0 for eight consecutive days. The most recent reading put the “R” rate at 1.06.

    After reporting its lowest death rate in five days, Russian health officials announced Saturday that the government is preparing to start mass vaccinations against the virus, with health workers and teachers first in line for innoculation said Health Minister Mikhail Murashko said.

    A vaccine has reportedly been developed by Moscow’s Gamaleya Institute (with help from the Russian Direct Investment Fund) and has completed clinical trials and the authorities are preparing to register it with regulators. It will be used for the vaccinations.

    Russia hopes to start the mass vaccination program in October. Meanwhile, below is the latest chart from JHU showing the 5-day-moving averages for the ten worst-impacted countries in the world.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Poland reported its highest number of new coronavirus cases for a third day in a row on Saturday, with 658 new cases confirmed, according to the Health Ministry. 5 new deaths were also reported. The country has reported a total of 46,346 coronavirus cases and 1,721 deaths.

    Poland’s prime minister hasn’t ruled out tightening some social distancing restrictions if the situation continues to worsen.

  • Syrian Army Uncovers Organ Trading Hub Of Turkish-Backed Militants In Southern Idlib
    Syrian Army Uncovers Organ Trading Hub Of Turkish-Backed Militants In Southern Idlib

    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 08/01/2020 – 19:00

    Submitted by South Front,

    The joint Russian-Turkish patrol set to be held in southern Idlib on July 29 was delayed due to increased military tensions and the inability of Ankara to ensure the security of the patrol in its area of responsibility. And the situation does not seem to be improving.

    According to pro-militant sources, on the evening of July 29th and morning of July 30th, the Syrian Army launched over 500 shells at militants’ positions in the Zawiya Mount area, including Kansafra, al-Bara, Kafar Aweed, Fatterah and Erinah. In response, Hayat Tahrir al-Sham and its allies struck Syrian Army checkpoints at Kafr Nabl, As Safa, Hakoura and in nearby areas.

    In the last few days, Hayat Tahrir al-Sham and the Turkistan Islamic Party reinforced their positions on the contact line with the Syrian Army, south of the M4 highway. Their forces reportedly remain on high alert. Pro-government sources say that the inability of Ankara to secure another joint patrol in southern Idlib is a signal that the militants are preparing for offensive actions there.

    Meanwhile, the Syrian Army uncovered a hideout that had been used by militants working as organ traders in the village of al-Ghadfah in southern Idlib. According to Syria’s state-run news agency SANA, government forces found human organs, including hearts, livers and heads in the hideout. The organs were preserved in jars with chloroform. The jars carried the names of the victims. Personal IDs of the victims, men and women, were also found in the hideout.

    The hideout included a room designated for religious studies with radical ideological publications. This indicates that the site had belonged to one of the multiple militant groups that still operate in Greater Idlib thanks to the Turkish opposition to counter-terrorism operations there.

    Al-Ghadfah is located in the vicinity of the city of Maarat al-Numan and for a long time it has been controlled by Turkey’s main partner in Idlib – Hayat Tahrir al-Sham. The town was liberated by the Syrian Army and its allies in January 2020.

    Lt. Sharif al-Nazzal of the Syrian Military Intelligence Directorate (MID) was assassinated in the town of Sahem al-Golan in western Daraa on July 29. The lieutenant was with another intelligence officer known as “Abu Haider”, when they were attacked by unidentified gunmen. Both officers were shot dead on the spot.

    Opposition sources claimed that al-Nazzal, a native of Sahem al-Golan, was close to Lebanon’s Hezbollah and Iranian forces. The officer headed a detachment of the MID in the western Daraa countryside. No group has claimed responsibility for the assassination. Nonetheless, in previous stages of the conflict Israel was extensively supporting militant groups in southern Syria. It is possible that Tel Aviv may have access to cells of these groups for support with particular operations.

    Two members of the US-backed Revolutionary Commando Army militant group based in al-Tanf were detained by the Syrian Army near the US-controlled zone. The detained persons were moving on a motorcycle and possessed assault rifles and night-vision goggles. They were reportedly involved in an information gathering operation about civilian and military facilities in the Homs desert.

    In the past, Damascus has repeatedly claimed that the US was planning to use its proxies in al-Tanf for destabilizing operations in the government-controlled area.

  • Communism Secured: Musk Calls Chinese "Smart, Hard-Working", Says Americans Are "Entitled, Complacent"
    Communism Secured: Musk Calls Chinese "Smart, Hard-Working", Says Americans Are "Entitled, Complacent"

    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 08/01/2020 – 18:30

    Elon Musk’s distaste for the U.S. is starting to become palpable – and U.S. citizens should not take to it kindly. 

    The Tesla CEO – who has made himself billions off the back of U.S. government subsidies and the U.S. taxpayer – took to the “Daily Drive” podcast on Friday to make it clear exactly what country his allegiances lie with.

    On the podcast, reported by CNBChe called the people of China “smart” and “hard working” while at the same time calling U.S. citizens “entitled” and “complacent”. He specifically called out both New York and California, states whose taxpayers have literally funded Tesla’s business with massive tax breaks amounting to billions. 

    When asked about China as an EV strategy leader worldwide, Musk responded:  “China rocks in my opinion. The energy in China is great. People there – there’s like a lot of smart, hard working people. And they’re really — they’re not entitled, they’re not complacent, whereas I see in the United States increasingly much more complacency and entitlement especially in places like the Bay Area, and L.A. and New York.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    He then compared the U.S. to losing sports teams: “When you’ve been winning for too long you sort of take things for granted. The United States, and especially like California and New York, you’ve been winning for too long. When you’ve been winning too long you take things for granted. So, just like some pro sports team they win a championship you know a bunch of times in a row, they get complacent and they start losing.”

    Recall, Tesla secured $1.6 billion in loans from the Chinese government to help build its Shanghai factory, which helped the company resume normal operations post-Covid this year. 

    Musk – apparently completely devoid of any humility to the amount of money he has received from the U.S. taxpayer – defended his company by say it hadn’t received as much government support from the Chinese government as most competitors: “They have been supportive. But it would be weird if they were more supportive to a non-Chinese company. They’re not.”

    Tesla’s total government assistance in the U.S. has surpassed $4.9 billion, according to CNBC

    When asked about his company’s stock, Musk responded: “It’s not worth trying to massage the stock market or manage investor expectations. It’s just. You know? At the end of the day, if you make great cars and the company’s healthy and making great products investors will be happy…If you make lousy products your customers will be unhappy and then your investors will be unhappy.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Musk then, seemingly unaware that bumpers are falling off of Model 3s as we speak, encouraged entrepreneurs to “focus on the product” when making something new: “My advice, you know, to corporate America or companies worldwide is spend less time on marketing presentations and more time on your product. Honestly that should be the number one thing taught in business schools. Put down that spreadsheet and that PowerPoint presentation and go and make your product better.”

    Recall, we have often brought up Musk’s ties to China here on Zero Hedge. We even asked back in April whether or not Musk risks becoming a Chinese asset. The automaker’s quick move to Shanghai and willingness to cozy up to the Chinese government has certainly raised some interest amidst skeptics and short sellers. 

    Regardless, we have a couple questions for Uncle Sam: why sit idly by and allow this public company CEO to not only spit in the SEC’s face by committing securities fraud and telling them to s*ck his c*** – but also rip off the American taxpayer at the same time. At what point does enough become enough?

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

     

  • ByteDance, Microsoft Break Off TikTok Deal Talks
    ByteDance, Microsoft Break Off TikTok Deal Talks

    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 08/01/2020 – 18:11

    Update (1800ET): Bytedance has apparently gotten the “tap on the shoulder” from the CCP bigwigs who apparently aren’t super thrilled about the optics of a mighty Chinese conglomerate kowtowing to the Trump Administration.

    Earlier today, it appeared that President Trump’s late-night threat about banning TikTok had motivated ByteDance and Microsoft to speed up their talks.

    But as the New York afternoon wore on, a Dow Jones headline proclaimed that Microsoft and ByteDance had decided to abruptly stop negotiations.

    Microsoft Corp. and Bytedance Ltd. have put acquisition talks for TikTok on hold after President Donald Trump said Friday he would oppose the deal, Dow Jones reported, citing people familiar with the matter who weren’t identified.

    Trump’s comments prompted TikTok to make additional concessions, including agreeing to add as many as 10,000 jobs in the U.S. over the next three years, according to the report.

    Microsoft was exploring an acquisition of TikTok’s operations in the U.S., people familiar with the matter said Friday. A deal would give the software company a popular social-media service and relieve U.S. government pressure on the Chinese owner of the video-sharing app.

    With the way things are going, TikTok could become the next Huawei (Senate Republicans have already passed a bill to bar TikTok from devices used by federal employees in a work capacity), and Microsoft and the other American suitors who were so eager to take the company of BD’s hands might decide it’s no longer worth the trouble.

    Meanwhile, BBG reports that the Trump administration is poised to announce a decision on Chinese-owned TikTok, potentially preventing the popular music-video app from operating in the US and escalating the administration’s clash with China.

    The decision may reportedly come within hours, according to BBG’s source.

     

    * * *

    President Trump’s insistence that the White House will ban the social-media app TikTok from the US triggered a wave of hysteria among users of the app: whatever will the American teens who built enormously valuable brands sharing dance videos on the app do now? They were just hanging out wit the Kardashians! What are they supposed to do now?!

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    China’s still-largely-state-controlled corporate sector has enough exposure to the vicissitudes of survival in the ultra-competitive, heavily scrutinized, anti-trust addled world of big tech that the leaders of Bytedance know that this kind of pressure is simply untenable. For TikTok to survive, ByteDance would need to play the administration’s game.

    Earlier this week, reports about a group of VCs bidding as much as $50 billion for the non-China business had emerged. Then Friday afternoon, Fox Business – and then the New York Times, and a gaggle of other media orgs – confirmed that Microsoft was in talks to buy the social media platform.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    In an age of burgeoning anti-trust sentiment, such a deal seemingly made little sense for Microsoft, but such a takeover would seemingly ameliorate the administration’s national security concerns, at the very least. Which is probably why what came next triggered such an intense response.

    Late last night, President Trump told the White House press corp during an impromptu briefing aboard Air Force One that “we’re banning [TikTok]”.

    “As far as TikTok is concerned, we’re banning them from the United States,” Trump told the reporters, adding that he could use emergency economic powers or an executive order.

    Was it a glaring example of Trump trying to deliberately undermine Microsoft, perhaps in retaliation against Bill Gates for his support for the WHO (and criticism of Trump)?

    Many of the president’s critics probably felt inclined to suspect such foul play. But as it turns out, it looks like Trump’s threats have had the desired effect, and ByteDance is now reportedly ready to let go of TikTok, passing 100% control to Microsoft in a deal that would see the app brought completely under the control of the American tech giant.

    Here’s more from Reuters:

    China’s ByteDance has agreed to divest the U.S. operations of TikTok completely in a bid to save a deal with the White House, after President Donald Trump said on Friday he had decided to ban the popular short-video app, two people familiar with the matter said on Saturday.

    ByteDance was previously seeking to keep a minority stake in the U.S. business of TikTok, which the White House had rejected. Under the new proposed deal, ByteDance would exit completely and Microsoft Corp would take over TikTok in the United States, the sources said.

    Some ByteDance investors that are based in the United States may be given the opportunity to take minority stakes in the business, the sources added.

    The White House did not respond to a request for comment on whether Trump would accept ByteDance’s concession. ByteDance in Beijing did not respond to a request for comment.

    Under ByteDance’s new proposal, Microsoft will be in charge of protecting all U.S. user data, the sources said.

    The plan allows for another U.S. company other than Microsoft to take over TikTok in the United States, the sources added.

    Microsoft did not respond to a request for comment.

    In the end, it looks like Trump was simply using the bully pulpit to ensure America’s national security priorities are respected by the market.

  • The Great COVID-Con: Exposing Journalistic Malpractice
    The Great COVID-Con: Exposing Journalistic Malpractice

    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 08/01/2020 – 18:00

    Authored by Vasko Kohlmayer via LewRockwell.com,

    On July 5th of this year – following weeks of steady decline – the United States recorded 263 deaths from COVID-19. This was the lowest daily toll in nearly three and half months. The July 5th figure represented a 90 percent drop from the peak which occurred April 21st. On that day there were 2748 deaths from COVID-19 (see worldometers.info for data).

    The sharp decrease in COVID deaths was obviously a most welcome development. One would expect it would have quickly generated a spate of celebratory headlines.

    However, this is not what happened that day.

    Below is a collection of links to some of the news items put forward by US media on July 5:

    It is quite astonishing that among these headlines there is no mention of the 90 percent drop in the daily death toll. Reading through them, one would have no idea that there has been such a dramatic improvement. Quite on the contrary, the impression is that things are as dire as ever.

    Neither are these items an inaccurate sampling of the kind of material put out by mainstream media outlets that day. The links above have been copied from Drudge Report, America’s leading news aggregator. Having begun with libertarian and conservative leanings, Drudge Report has gone to the other side and became in many ways the mouthpiece for the left-leaning media. This is especially true as far as Drudge’s coverage of Donald Trump and the coronavirus are concerned.

    You may think that we are being unfair to America’s journalists. Perhaps they just did not have enough time to write their celebratory pieces the same day. Surely, one would think, the news must have been announced to fanfare in the next news cycle. Let us, then, look at the Drudge headlines from July 6, 2020:

    Once again, there is no mention of the great improvement on the COVID front. Looking at the headlines, one would, in fact, get the opposite feeling: the situation is as bad as ever, if not worse. The journalists writing these stories must have been well aware of the steadily improving state of affairs and the record low daily death tolls. There can be no question that this is a concerted and deliberate effort by media outlets to make their readers believe that things are diametrically different from the actual situation on the ground.

    What we are looking at here is nothing other than a gross case of journalistic malfeasance whereby mainstream journalists simply refuse to report the truth about the situation. Whenever there is bad news they eagerly amplify and exaggerate while completely ignoring any positive news or developments. To be sure, the shrewd consumer of the news should always be prepared to make allowances for bias and misrepresentation, but the level of cynicism and conniving in this instance is truly remarkable.

    There are several reasons for this. To begin with, for journalists every crisis is a boon. Crises make for more dramatic reporting and increased readership. When nothing dramatic is happening, the demand for news naturally drops. In other words, crises are good news and good business for those in the news business. Journalists, therefore, suffer from a natural inclination to increase drama and create the impression of a crisis whenever possible. And the more dire the crisis, the better.

    But there is an added political reason why mainstream journalists are so invested in lying about this epidemic. The more people believe that we are in a life-and-death crisis, the easier it becomes to impose lockdowns and quarantines. These in turn wreak disorder and havoc in almost every aspect of our personal and societal life: the economy, commerce, education, finances, family life, interpersonal relationships, etc. The prolonged doom-mongering and shutdowns have also inflicted psychological damage as people suffer from the loss of employment, interruption of schooling and disruption of everyday activities, routines and interactions. Increased rates of anxiety, depression, addiction, relationship abuse and other ills are the inevitable consequence.

    The journalists do not seem to mind, since the multiprong mayhem will they helped to unleash will inevitably damage the reelection prospects of Donald Trump for whom the Left harbors a virulent dislike. The antipathy is due to a host of reasons, one of which is Trump’s irritating propensity to occasionally tell the truth. This poses a serious problem for devoted leftists for whom the truth has always been a grave threat, whether they be the communist totalitarians of the past or the woke snowflakes of today. It is not difficult to see why. Even though leftist ideologies may vary in their emphasis and orientation from place to place and from one historical period to another, what they invariably share is their commitment to untruths and wrong assumptions.

    Today, for example, the progressives claim with a straight face that someone who is obviously a man – someone who has XY chromosomes and male genitals – is actually a woman. Then they insist that we affirm this absurdity, which is rather difficult for anyone with a modicum of sanity or common sense. Pointing out the obvious pulls the rug from under their ideological enterprise, which is why committed leftists of all stripes are so set on suppressing the truth and destroying its bearers. The cancel culture is a present-day incarnation of this tendency. As someone who is occasionally willing to call them out on their balderdash, Trump is a thorn in their side and the prime target for destruction. True to form, leftwing journalists have shown themselves more than willing to wreck American society by spreading lies and untruths about the coronavirus (among other things) to achieve this goal.

    But the good news is that there has been a considerable improvement in the corona situation. Here is a chart taken from worldometers tracing the decline in the daily death rate from the epidemic’s peak which occurred in the last third of April.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    We have already pointed out the unreported 90 percent drop from April 21 to July 5.  You will also note that even in the current spike, the death toll for the last day for which data was available at the time of writing – 908 on July 25 – is 67 percent lower than it was at the peak.

    A headline which would honestly summarize this state of affairs would run something like this:

    “Despite a recent spike, the COVID daily death rate remains nearly 70 percent below the spring high.”

    But this is not what we get. Instead Drudge offers the following:

    Notice the death count at the top of the offering. The media have only resumed reporting this item in the last few weeks which saw an increase in this metric. In the weeks prior, when the death count was falling precipitously, they only kept reporting – to maintain the impression of an ever-worsening crisis – the rising case numbers which were largely due to expanded testing. Thus, the media corona template runs as follows: Report mounting death toll in the early stages, case numbers in the decline stage, and death toll again at the spikes. The net result of this selective reporting is that any good news on the ground never makes it to the stories.

    Also revealing is the last headline “Health anxiety Soars.” This, of course, is not surprising given all the doom and gloom coverage of the last four months. Through their selective and dishonest reporting, the journalists have managed to con people into believing that the virus is far more dangerous than it really is. The fact remains, however, that the vast majority of those infected exhibit moderate or no symptoms and recover without any great difficulties.

    We have recently conducted our own analysis of the data. The breakdown showed the death rates for various age brackets and the results were eye-opening. For individuals under the age of forty the risk is so minuscule as to be negligible. For healthy people aged 40 to 49 the chances of dying are 60 out of 100,000 which is less than one’s yearly chances of dying of an injury.

    Even though I had suspected at the outset that the numbers would be low, I did not expect them to come out this low. After obtaining the initial results, I thought that a mistake must have crept into my calculations. I repeated the process several times and then had the figures checked by a math savvy person. The low numbers were, indeed, correct.

    The relatively lows risk that the novel coronavirus poses to most people has been pointed out by Dr. John Ioannidis of Stanford University. Doctor Ioannidis is a widely-cited expert on evidence-based medicine, epidemiology, and clinical research. This is what he had to say last month in an interview with a Greek journalist: “For people younger than 45, the infection fatality rate is almost 0%.” The interview and the statement went largely unreported. Dr Ioannidis is not the only world class epidemiologist who has been censored from mainstream news for his data-based conclusions. Rather than consulting these serious scientists, the media’s favorite go to person for all questions corona has been the camera-hungry but otherwise hapless Dr. Fauci who has made a number of statements and predictions that have turned out to be spectacularly incorrect.

    The failure of major media to report truthfully is inexcusable, since accurate information would enable our society to deal with this crisis in a more reasonable manner. But this is apparently not something the leftist journalists wish us to do. Instead they try their best to keep us ignorant and frightened in order to wreak havoc in America, hoping to sink Trump. And if American society should be ruined in the process, so be it.

    It is difficult to recall any period in living memory in which manipulation of information by major news organizations reached such levels of cynicism. What we are witnessing these days is a most severe case of journalistic malpractice.

  • JPMorgan Finds That Shorts Across The Globe Have Capitulated
    JPMorgan Finds That Shorts Across The Globe Have Capitulated

    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 08/01/2020 – 17:30

    Three months ago, shortly after the March crash bottom, JPMorgan’s strategist Nikolas Panigirtzoglou predicted that stocks would rise, among other things, because there was a massive short overhang, one which would squeeze prices higher as the Fed injected liquidity, providing a secondary thrust to the market.

    Then, one month ago, in the June 16th version of Flows and Liquidity, the JPM quant doubled down by asking if there is a regional bias to the shorting activcity, namely “how much higher is the short base outside US equities?”, arguing that the regional short base backdrop favored non-US equities, in particular European stocks, something which subsequent price action confirmed.

    The argument at the time was that while the post-virus short base in individual US stocks had been largely covered, short covering had looked a lot less advanced outside US stocks. In particular, less than a third of the previous short base that had opened up on Euro area and UK stocks during Feb/Mar had been unwound by mid-June. Across EM stocks, around half of the previous short base had been unwound by mid-June.

    However, in his latest observation on this topic, Panigirtzoglou writes in his latest weekly F&W report that “this previous advantage for non-US stocks appears to have been diminished as short covering advanced.”

    Indeed, as the following four charts show, the bulk of the previous short base that had opened up during Feb/Mar across Euro area, UK and Japanese stocks has been largely normalized. It is only in EM stocks that there is some remaining short base, around 20% of that opening up during Feb/Mar, left to be covered.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    To JPM, this raises the chance that the past two months outperformance of non-US vs. US equities is close to being exhausted “and that going forward US stocks are more likely to resume their outperformance trend.” Why the pro-US bias? Because as the JPM strategist noted before, there is a modest remaining short base to be covered in US stocks at an index level even as the previous short base at individual stock level has been more than fully covered. For example, the short base in important US equity ETFs such as the SPY ETF remains above previrus despite recent declines as shown in the chart on the left…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    … while the right and final chart shows that the positions of asset managers and leveraged funds in US equity futures remain low and well below pre-virus levels.

  • What Happens To Outdoor Dining In Fall And Winter?
    What Happens To Outdoor Dining In Fall And Winter?

    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 08/01/2020 – 17:00

    Authored by Heather Lalley of Restaurant Business

    Natale Servino, whose family has run Servino Ristorante in Tiburon, Calif., for 42 years, is hoping for a pleasant fall that transitions into a very mild winter.

    Servino’s recent intense interest in weather patterns is driven by the newfound vitalness of outdoor dining at his restaurant. He’s currently hard at work, making his operation’s outdoor area even more hospitable to diners, while trying to find ways to use the space even in inclement weather.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    “We’re hoping to carry this as far into winter as we can go,” he said. “[Outdoor dining] was on our radar but we never made the full investment because outdoor seating was just a small segment of our dining.”

    Now, though, Servino and other operators are counting on outdoor business to bring in almost all, if not all, of a restaurant’s sales during the pandemic. So, they’re coming up with creative ways to keep those outdoor spaces inviting even as the weather in many parts of the country turns less-than-picnic-perfect.

    Servino Ristorante, which sits on the waterfront just north of the Golden Gate Bridge, has two patios decked out with built-in heating systems. Since then, though, the restaurant has added other enhancements to keep diners comfortable in cooler weather, Servino said:

    • Replacing metal outdoor furniture with tables and chairs made from materials that feel warmer to the touch
    • Adding greenery and shrubbery to not only help provide physical distance between tables but to also serve as a shield from wind whipping in off the water
    • Offering blankets that are laundered between each use

    Even the menu is getting a remodel, to better accommodate outdoor diners, he said.

    The restaurant will introduce its fall-focused offerings a bit earlier than normal, in case guests want to warm up with slow-cooked meats and braises or even warm cocktails.

    “It might be something we do a little bit earlier as people sit outside,” he said. “We want to make sure the dish shows well and is appropriate for the environment.”

    Servino is also working on ways to communicate with guests about whether they’d prefer a leisurely dining experience or would rather get in-and-out—especially as the weather turns.

    In Washington, D.C., Southern Mexican restaurant Espirta worked with its designer to add an awning as well as two glass panels to its patio seating. Before the pandemic, the restaurant could use drop-down plastic walls to fully enclose the area, effectively doubling the size of its operation.

    The restaurant has seven electric heaters installed about tables as well as four portable gas heaters.

    Co-owner Kelly Phillips estimates the restaurant has spent about $30,000 over the last four years working on the patio so it can be usable in more types of weather.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    “Every year we would add on another phase,” Phillips said. “We were just lucky to have done that.”

    Outdoor dining guidelines vary by state and even city, so operators should check on their local rules before adding any kinds of temporary walls to outside seating.

    In the Twin Cities of Minneapolis and St. Paul, known for especially brutal winters, multi-concept operator Brent Frederick of Jester Concepts is instead trying to make his indoor dining room as safe as possible since patios sound like an unsustainable revenue stream as the temperature drops.

    Frederick has spent close to $10,000 on ionization systems for his restaurant’s HVAC systems, which he says is designed to clear most viruses from the air. His team is currently working  on the best way to communicate the existence of the air-cleaning system to customers (and potential customers), he said.

    “It’s not a fix-all situation,” he said. “But we felt like it was worth the investment. Anything that gives the consumer confidence to come into our store.”

  • Shares Of China-Based Tesla Competitor Li Auto Surge In Nasdaq Trading Debut
    Shares Of China-Based Tesla Competitor Li Auto Surge In Nasdaq Trading Debut

    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 08/01/2020 – 16:35

    Make no mistake about it, there has been non-stop hype in EV stocks for the better part of the last several years. But over the last few months, that momentum has picked up. We just noted days ago that many EV-makers in China were going public just to stave off bankruptcy, showcasing the market’s appetite for such names. 

    Stocks in the U.S. like Kandi Technologies, Nio and Workhorse have all had recent runs on the back of continued EV hype.

    And new Chinese startup Li Auto just saw major success upon listing its shares on the NASDAQ, proving that: a) the EV hype is still alive and b) U.S. investors have learned precisely nothing from watching one China-based fraud implode after another. Li Auto is backed by TikTok owner Bytedance and ecommerce company Meituan Dianping. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Li Auto’s SUV

    The company’s shares popped 43% on its first day of trading on the Nasdaq last Thursday, before pulling back 3% on Friday. The company’s IPO raised about $1.5 billion. Li Auto has a market cap of about $14 billion, compared to Tesla’s $270 billion. Li Auto has only sold “a few thousands” automobiles. 

    Tu Le, founder of Sino Auto Insights, told FT: “The US market clearly still has a large appetite for electric vehicles, but it’s frothy and there is probably a bubble.” 

    “Fundamentally Li Auto only has a record of a few months selling cars. You have to ask; are we even comparing apples to apples when we compare Tesla to these other Chinese automakers?” he added.

    The company was founded in 2015 and sold 10,400 of its six seater SUV hybrid vehicle that use both a battery and a combustion engine by June of this year. The company – as we noted in our above linked article – faces significant competition from a growing field of EV names coming out of China.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Peer Nio has “racked up huge debts” since listing in the U.S. and nearly needed to be bailed out with a $1 billion cash injection recently. The company’s stock has still rallied, however, showing the appetite for EV stocks in the U.S. market. Despite this, China’s EV market continues to both slow and thin out, weeding out smaller players. 

    Sales of EVs are down 35% year over year in June. Mingming Huang, founder of Future Capital literally has said this time it’s different: “I know it’s easy for people to compare Li Auto to Nio, but we are very different.”

    As many wonder why frauds like Luckin Coffee are able to continue on U.S. markets, they need to look no further than the appetite for the Li Auto deal. As long as those in the pecking order (exchanges, auditors, institutions) are making money on the listing, the only “safeguard” left becomes individual investors and the SEC – both of which are useless.

  • Amazon, Jeff Bezos, And The Influential Washington Post
    Amazon, Jeff Bezos, And The Influential Washington Post

    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 08/01/2020 – 16:10

    Authored by Bruce Wilds via Advancing Time blog,

    After Jeff Bezos and several other CEOs testified before the House Judiciary antitrust subcommittee over anti-competitive conduct the following article has taken a huge leap in importance. The Washington Post is an influencer with great power. What is the definition of an influencer? The definition of an influencer is a person or entity that exerts influence. An influencer inspires or guides the actions of others The old theme of laziness and mellowness runs counter to today’s influencers, who are business-people and upscale inspirational promoters. During recent years several of the tech giants have come under fire for skewing and manipulating public opinion but sliding below the radar is the Washington Post. This means few people question the newspaper’s findings, stories, articles, or opinions.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Influence and Power Wrongly Placed!

    The Washington Post is by far the most influential newspaper in America. Its subtle ability to influence, shape, and mold the opinion of Americans cannot be overestimated. Day after day those working for the Washington Post are quoted time and time again as experts and authorities as they appear on talk-shows and news-feeds spreading their message. Much in the way a stone hitting the water sends out ripples, this amplifies their spin and in many ways determines the focus and direction in how we view issues. The Washington Post’s power goes far beyond just reporting the news but it has the ability to plant an idea like you would a seed. It then shapes public opinion utilizing various tools and even coordinating the timing to maximize their impact.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Power Corrupts

    Almost as frightening as the concentrated power held by companies such as Facebook and Google is the fact Jeff Bezos, CEO of Amazon and the world’s richest man, is the person who owns and controls the Washington Post. It is silly to think Jeff Bezos purchased the Washington Post in 2013 because he expected newspapers to make a lucrative resurgence. It is more likely he purchased the long-trusted U.S. newspaper for the power it would ensure him in Washington when wielded as a propaganda mouthpiece to extend his ability to both shape and control public opinion.

    To be blunt, the Washington Post controls much of the narrative put before the American people. Jeff Bezos, the epitome of a person who rises to the top in unregulated capitalist systems where money rewards people who are comfortable with exploiting and harming others should not be wielding such power. The fact is, when you couple the voice of the Washington Post with Amazon, a company so deeply involved with discovering and archiving detailed files and information about individuals and politicians across America you command far too much muscle and clout.

    It is not a coincidence that the Washington Post has broken many big stories that move the needle of public opinion in huge ways. This is done over the years with a cumulative effect, meaning that while many of these stories don’t immediately wow us they seem to rapidly spread throughout the mainstream media taking on a life of their own and eventually have huge ramifications that can be so subtle they go unnoticed by the average American. The propaganda they dish out can be very seductive, they simply add in a few gentle jabs to embarrass their enemies and then stir the power of suggestion.

    Many people do not realize it but the Washington Post cloaking itself as a pro-establishment mainstream publication can defend establishment narratives but actively attack anyone who challenges them. By this I mean it serves the wealthy and the powerful which can only exist with nonstop advertising to convince the American public that the “overall status quo” is in their best interest. The Washington Post is used to manufacture consent for that system; for the economic system, for the wars which prop it up, for the politicians which the plutocrats own and operate, for the political system which wealthy insiders have infiltrated every level.

    An example of this is how a story about Roy Moore published in the Washington Post on November 9, 2017, resulted in him losing the election. WaPo reported that Moore had initiated a sexual encounter with a young girl in 1979 when she was 14 and he was 32 years old. The allegations of sexual misconduct dumped out a month before the election while never proven spread like wildfire as the term “pedophile” went viral causing Moore to lose to Democratic candidate Doug Jones.

    This brings us to the question of whether The Washington Post is “that good” at uncovering and reporting the truth or simply maximizing its influence to alter and control public opinion? Even when not breaking a big story WaPo is not averse to stirring the pot and increasing outrage that can later be directed towards their target. Whether we are talking about the “Me Too” movement or just recently, the idea that record gun sales for protection because people are afraid of growing crime, will result in countless deaths.

    In recent months, according to the firearm industry’s trade group National Shooting Sports Foundation (NSSF), Americans have purchased millions of guns. These gun sales have occurred during the government-mandated lockdowns and riots erupted after the killing of George Floyd. An article authored by Ryan McMaken of The Mises Institute looks into how the Washington Post is trying to turn the soaring gun sales narrative around. A recent WaPo article claims people aren’t buying guns as a reaction to violence and social disarray but insists those new gun purchases are the cause of the violence in the first place. The piece even goes as far as attempting to tie the purchases to “state-level racism” using a study about data on Google searches for the n-word, an approach used by social scientists in the past.

    Circling back to the crux of this article, being manipulated by biased reporting claiming to be fair and balanced is real and dangerous. This needs to be exposed and curtailed or society will be lead down a path designed to enhance the power of those in control. We must never forget that Amazon is a job-killing exploiter and the company is no stranger to sweetheart deals and has lined the pockets of its CEO, Jeff Bezos, at taxpayer expense. Many of the options Bezos employs to expand Amazon are available to him only because of the many areas his various companies engage in, this is the crux of growing antitrust talk surrounding Amazon which has become a threat to our democracy and capitalism.

    Subtle but constant jabs take their toll over time and add fuel to an atmosphere that constantly warps our perception of reality. Adding to its importance is this is an election year and because our nation is so polarized the direction we take going forward matters a great deal. While Trump may not be God’s gift to mankind he does represent an effort to turn back economic forces and a deep state that has become too strong. Influencers such as WaPo by effectively undermining President Trump are much more dangerous at altering the results of the election than countries like Russia or China. Little things such as reminding the electorate and women especially that Trump “does not respect women” resulted in flipping a very valuable vote in an evenly split Senate, this matters.

    When WaPo helped to fuel the “MeToo” movement that was raging due to high profile revelations relating to Harvey Weinstein and other powerful men acting like pigs they shifted votes. In an article titled, “The Marginalized Voices Of The #MeToo Movement” the Post took a victory lap of sorts on December 7, 2017, by pointing out that when Time magazine recognized the #MeToo movement as its Person of the Year, it solidified just how much of a cultural moment we are in when dealing with sexual harassment and assault allegations against powerful men. Unstated was how the growth of the movement has further polarized our divided nation. Even the mention of this movement in a negative light has resulted in people being cast off a show or dis-invited to an event.

    All this adds fuel to an atmosphere that constantly warps our perception of the Trump administration. This is then coupled with a constant barrage of headlines such as “Trump Decides To remove National Security Advisor And Others May Follow” or, “Trump To Fire McMaster As National Security Advisor, WaPo Reports But White House Denies.” These often well-laundered stories tend to repeat vague rumors and innuendos which feed into the narrative of a White House in chaos. Most of these articles tend to loop back on themselves, while described as news they are designed to continually jolt the emotions of both those on the left and the right reinforcing the polarization that grips our nation but leaving nobody to blame.

    This type of reporting does not stop at attacking Trump but extends into our feelings about the world including our view of Russia, North Korea, Iran, and even issues like trade. It all seems a bit ironic that it was the Washington Post which was the first to print these stories that you would normally expect to flow from a source closer to home such as a newspaper in the city or state where the event took place or the accuser lived. While this is inconclusive in proving that they were prefabricated of wrongdoing. it can be taken as proof of the power the Post wields.

    One of the best descriptions I have ever read of Jeff Bezos calls him the most crafty plutocrat alive and stated he purchased the Washington Post so he could shape America’s agenda. The neo-liberal Orwellian establishment that Bezos is building his empire upon has been greatly enhanced by using the long-trusted US newspaper as a propaganda mouthpiece to propel his agenda forward. Very troubling is the fact Jeff Bezos is also a contractor with the CIA and sits on a Pentagon advisory board all part of doing everything he can to cozy up and ingratiate himself to the establishment on which his empire is built. This includes kicking WikiLeaks off Amazon servers in 2010 and dovetails in a creepy way with Amazon’s involvement in surveillance systems and digital “assistance” devices like Alexa.

    It amazes me that average Americans still have a difficult time internalizing the fact businesses are dying and workers are getting poorer as Bezo’s empire continues to grow. Bezos is happily collaborating with depraved intelligence agencies, manipulating and propagandizing Americans, and expanding the gulf between the rich and the poor all in his effort to garner more wealth. In our system where money rewards sociopaths and money equals power the plutocrats that form alliances with each other and with defense and intelligence agencies to ensure the continuation and expansion of their empires have little concern for the average American.

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 1st August 2020

  • Smith: Martial Law Is Unacceptable Regardless Of The Circumstances
    Smith: Martial Law Is Unacceptable Regardless Of The Circumstances

    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 08/01/2020 – 00:05

    Authored by Brandon Smith via Alt-Market.com,

    Back in 2014, hundreds if not thousands of conservatives and liberty movement activists converged on a farm in rural Clark County, Nevada. The purpose was to protest the incursion of federal government agents onto the property of the Bundy family, who had defied pressure from the Bureau of Land Management to stop allowing their cattle to feed on “federal land” in a form of free ranging. It was a practice that had been going on for decades and one that was required for the Bundy farm to survive, ended abruptly by environmental laws protecting a tortoise.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The Bundy family had been improving on the area with aquifers and other measures for generations without interference. The claim by the BLM and other agencies was that the farmers were destroying wildlife habitat with their cattle, yet the Bundy’s land improvements had actually allowed wildlife to THRIVE in areas where animals would find life difficult or impossible otherwise.

    The federal government became fixated on the Bundy’s, and decided to make an example out of them. Their defiance of the crackdown on their use of the land was met with extreme measures, including their cattle impounded, their farm being surrounded and sniper teams placed in the hills nearby. The liberty movement saw this as the last straw, and so reacted at a grassroots level. The concern was that Bundy Ranch could become another Waco. They locked and loaded and went to defend the Bundy’s.

    I completely agreed at the time with the efforts surrounding Bundy Ranch and I still agree with them today. The federal government had overstepped its bounds on multiple occasions when it came to rural farmers in sagebrush country and everyone had finally had enough. The feds were faced with a group of armed liberty movement members and eventually ran away. They even gave the Bundy’s back the cattle the feds had initially tried to confiscate. This event showcased the power of the people to repel tyranny when necessary.

    The claim that the public is impotent against government force was summarily trounced.  The action was not perfect, and there were many internal disputes and a plethora of mistakes, but overall it had achieved its goal.  It sent a message to the establishment that if you try to assert unconstitutional force against the citizenry there is a chance a Bundy Ranch scenario might happen again, and next time it might not simply be a defensive measure.

    I mention Bundy Ranch because I want to remind conservatives of their roots. We are a constitutional movement. We are a small government movement. We believe in individual rights, states rights and the 10th Amendment, as well as strict limitations placed on the federal government and state governments when they try to violate the Bill of Rights.  If you don’t believe in these things, you are not a conservative or a constitutionalist.

    No government, whether state or federal, supersedes the boundaries placed upon them by the constitution. Once they violate those boundaries, they must be put in check by the citizenry, for the constitution is merely an object that represents an ideal. It can’t defend itself. If a government undermines constitutional protections, it is not a failure of the constitution, it is a failure by the public to act.

    Sadly, there are “conservatives” out there who supported the efforts at Bundy Ranch in 2014, but are now calling for federal overreach and martial law today. The very same people who argued vehemently against unconstitutional actions back then are arguing for bending or breaking the rules of the constitution now. This is something I have been warning about for years…

    The greatest threat to freedom is not the government, extreme leftists or the globalist cabal; the greatest threat is when freedom fighters foresake their own principles and start rationalizing tyranny because it happens to benefit them in the moment. If freedom fighters stop fighting for freedom, who remains pick up the mantle? No one. And thus, the globalists and collectivists win the long game.

    Right now there are two sides calling for martial law-like restrictions on the public, and both sides think they are doing what is best for society at large. They both believe they are morally justified and that totalitarian actions are necessary for “the greater good”. Both sides are wrong.

    The Pandemic Puritans

    On one side, we have a group made up primarily of political leftists but also some conservatives who say that the coronavius pandemic creates a scenario in which medical tyranny must be established to protect the public from itself. Leftists enjoy control in general and the pandemic simply offers an opportunity for them to act out their totalitarian fantasies in real life.

    These are the people who wag their fingers at others on the street or in the park or at the beach for not “social distancing” properly. These are the people that inform on their neighbors, or inform on local businesses for not following strict guidelines. These are the people that get a thrill from forcing other people to conform.

    This is not to say that precautions are not warranted, they certainly are. However, these precautions MUST be up to individuals, not enforced by bureaucracy. The moment you hand government ultimate power to dictate people’s health decisions, personal daily activities, freedom of assembly and their ability to participate in the economy, you have given the government ultimate power to destroy our very culture. No government should be allowed to have that kind of influence.

    The issue here is one of the greater EVIL, not the greater good. What is the greater evil? To avoid unconstitutional measures, avoid violating individual rights and allow the virus to spread faster than it normally would? Or, to completely throw out the Bill of Rights, individual liberty and economic security in the name of a brand of “safety” that is ambiguous and undefined?

    As I write this, the state of New Jersey among others is implementing a draconian response against businesses that defy lockdown orders. NJ just arrested the owners of a gymnasium in Bellmawr who refused to close down. Even though they used social distancing measures and applied their own guidelines, the state has decided that citizens are children that must be controlled rather than adults that can make their own choices. This sets a dangerous precedence for the whole country.

    Understand that small businesses that are not deemed “essential” by arbitrary decree from the state are on the verge of bankruptcy and collapse. Millions of people are having their livelihoods threatened by the lockdowns. Millions of jobs are at risk. Is the coronavirus really worth destroying our own economic system? Because that is EXACTLY what is happening right now. The US economy was already suffering from destabilization, and now the pandemic response is putting the final nail in the coffin.

    If the economy tanks far more people will die from the resulting crisis of poverty, crime and civil unrest than will EVER die from the coronavirus pandemic. When you look at the big picture, how can anyone justify medical tyranny and martial law measures? There is simply no logical explanation for violating the economic and personal freedom of Americans in response to a disease. If some people die from the virus, so be it. Its a small price to pay to keep our freedoms intact.  Furthermore, I would stand by that argument even if I get sick from the virus.

    Sock Puppet Conservatives

    There are people out there that like constitutional rights and civil liberties “in theory”, but in practice they view these rights as inconvenient to their goals.  For these so-called “conservatives”, the Bill of Rights is only for peacetime. When war or domestic conflict rolls around, our rights are suddenly forfeit.

    I use this particular metaphor often but I really can’t find a better one:

    Government power is like the “one ring” in Lord Of The Rings. Everyone desperately wants control of it. The side of evil thirsts for it. The side of good thinks that if only they had it they could use it for honorable ends; they think they can use it to defeat evil. They are wrong.

    The “one ring” (government power) corrupts ALL. It cannot be controlled. It cannot be used for good. Eventually, it warps the minds of those who hold it, twisting them into something grotesque. Good people who exploit the ring end up becoming the very monsters they were trying to defeat, and evil wins.

    Right now through the Trump Administration conservatives are being tempted with the “one ring”. We are being tempted with ultimate government power. The leftist hordes and their actions are egregious. They act irrationally and foolishly. Their communist ideology and mindless zealotry is destructive and they openly seek the collapse of western civilization. But in the end this doesn’t matter.  They are nothing more than useful idiots for a greater agenda.

    It’s interesting that the only solution I see being presented in conservative circles lately is the use of federal power to crush the protests and riots. Again, this might seem like a reasonable action in the face of so much lawlessness, but if taken too far the implications are horrifying.

    Some conservative groups are cheering the deployment of federal agencies to cities like Portland in the name of stopping civil unrest, but there is a fine line between law enforcement and martial law. And by martial law, I mean ANY government force that is designed to suppress or break civil protections. This does not only include a military presence, it can also include federal agencies overstepping their bounds, just as they did at Bundy Ranch.

    In Portland and other cities like New York, federal agents and police have been snatching protesters off the street in unmarked vans without identifying themselves.  Essentially, they are black-bagging people. This is the kind of behavior which real conservatives traditionally despise.

    Yes, some of these protesters did in fact loot or participate in property damage; and some of them did absolutely nothing.  This is being done under 40 US Code 1315 which was signed into law by Neo-con president George W. Bush after the 9/11 attacks as part of the tidal wave of unconstitutional Patriot Act measures that were railroaded through during mass fear and panic.

    Conservatives have been warning for years about the potential for misuse of these laws to violate people’s rights. Will we now support them because they are being enforced against people we don’t like? I will say this: If an unmarked van with unidentified armed people tried to grab me off the street, I would do everything in my power to put a bullet in each and every one of them.  And, I would not hold it against any person who did the same, even if they were my ideological opponent.

    Some conservatives are calling for much more, including the deployment of the National Guard or a standing military presence. The use of such tactics opens the door to serious consequences, and I believe if we allow the federal government to bend the rules now, we set the stage for expansive martial law in the near future. By extension, labeling looters or rioters as “terrorists” also has dangerous implications.  Those of us that were activists during the Obama years know how freely that label is thrown around by government and the media.

    We might feel righteous in violating the civil liberties of social justice Marxists because of their insane behavior and the threat they pose to the stability of the country, but, what happens when the roles are reversed? During Bundy Ranch, conservatives were also being labeled “terrorists”, and who is to say we won’t find ourselves in that position again?   Would defying the pandemic lockdowns also be considered an existential threat to the country?

    Uncomfortable Questions

    There are some questions in all of this that are either not being asked or are being deliberately avoided.  For example:

    1) Why is it that the Trump Administration has not bothered to go after the elites and globalists FUNDING Antifa and BLM groups behind the unrest?  Why does George Soros and his Open Society Foundation get to operate in the US with impunity?  And what about the Ford Foundation?  Members of that institution openly admit that they have been funding and organizing the social justice cult for decades.  Shouldn’t the men behind the curtain paying for the entire thing be targeted first, instead of going after the useful idiots?  Perhaps the fact that Trump is surrounded by those very same elites in his cabinet has something to do with it…

    2) If we support martial law measures, WHO are we giving that power to?  Is it Trump, or the deep state ghouls that advise him daily?  People like Wilber Ross, a New York Rothschild banking agent, Mike Pompeo, a long time Neo-con warmonger and promoter of mass surveillance, Robert Lightheizer, a member of the globalist Council On Foreign Relations, Steve Mnuchin, former Goldman Sachs banker, Larry Kudlow, former Federal Reserve, etc.  Even if you think Trump has the best of intentions, can anyone honestly say the same for his cabinet?

    3) When the left is “defeated” and the riots stop, will martial law simply fade away, or, is it a Pandora’s Box that can never be closed again?  And if it doesn’t end, will supporters justify fighting against not just leftists, but also conservatives who will not tolerate it?  I for one will be among the people that will not tolerate it.

    Real Solutions

    There are other much better solutions than martial law when confronting the leftist riots or the pandemic.

    For the pandemic, stop trying to dictate public behavior.  If individuals feel they are at risk from the virus, then they can take their own precautions.  The only other option is to continue on the path of shutdowns and an informant society that will destroy this nation in a matter of months.

    For the leftists, communities that stage an armed presence in the face of protests have ALL escaped riots and property damage. Sometimes Antifa and BLM decide to not even show up. We DON’T NEED a federal presence or a military presence to get the job done. We can do it ourselves. We already have proof that this strategy works.

    And, if the lefties want to burn down their own neighborhoods and cities and local governments don’t want to stop them, then I say let it happen. It’s sad for the people in these places that had no dog in the fight, but maybe this will teach the locals to speak out against BLM or Antifa instead of remaining silent or virtue signaling their support in the hopes that their businesses won’t be attacked.  Maybe they should look for better government officials as well.

    Finally, it’s far past time to go after the elites that fund and engineer such groups.  Remove their influence and I suspect many people will be shocked at how fast all this unrest and chaos suddenly disappears.  Isn’t this what people wanted Trump to do from the very beginning?  And yet, nothing happens to the vampires at the top.

    Only cowards demand everyone else give up their freedoms just so they can feel safe.  The establishment is trying to pit the American people against each other as a means to pave a path to tyranny. I believe what the elites want more than anything else is to trick conservatives into forsaking their own principles. If we do, we become hypocrites that can no longer sustain a movement for freedom. By becoming the monster to fight the monster we hand our enemies victory. This is unacceptable.

    *  *  *

    If you would like to support the work that Alt-Market does while also receiving content on advanced tactics for defeating the globalist agenda, subscribe to our exclusive newsletter The Wild Bunch Dispatch.  Learn more about it HERE

  • Xi Hails Now "Fully Operational" China-Controlled Satellite Navigation System Which Rivals GPS
    Xi Hails Now “Fully Operational” China-Controlled Satellite Navigation System Which Rivals GPS

    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 07/31/2020 – 23:45

    Multiple official statements have come out of China that reveal, predictably enough, that the US pressure and sanctions campaign are not at all curbing its global ambitions or efforts at rapid defense technology modernization. Actually Washington’s hawkish stance is perhaps doing the opposite, given that President Xi Jinping told the Politburo on Friday that “only a strong military can ensure national security” while urging the country to “push forward national defense and military modernization,” according to Bloomberg citing official Xinhua.

    And this includes the potential for military modernization in space, at a moment leaders across the globe fear that space will soon become a “war-fighting domain” — which is also subject of discussions in Vienna currently, as US and Russian diplomats work to extend the New START nuclear arms reduction treaty. Xi officially commissioned China’s BeiDou Navigation Satellite System (BDS-3) on Friday, which state media now says is fully operational, is will compete with GPS.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Prior BDS-3 launch file image

    This means that China joins a very few number of nations, which includes the US, Russia, and EU, that has its own independent global navigation system. The network includes 35 satellites as part of an ambitious program that’s been under development since the 1990’s.

    Xinhua news also noted that BeiDou-based services are already in use in more than 120 countries and regions. While Beijing has specifically condemned the pursuit of the ‘weaponization of space’, Xi took the opportunity as touting the huge advantage that newly operational BDS-3 represents. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    As Xinhua describes, “Xi said the completion and opening of the BDS-3 fully reflects the political advantage of China’s socialist system in mobilizing resources for major undertakings.”

    “It is of great significance to enhance China’s comprehensive national strength, to promote China’s economic development and improvement of people’s livelihood under regular epidemic prevention and control, to promote China’s opening-up under the current international economic situation, to further enhance national self-confidence, and to strive to achieve the two centenary goals, noted Xi,” Xinhua continues.

    It was on June 22 that China launched the final Beidou satellite in completion of its orbital navigation constellation.

    According to a US-based space technology analysis site, “The first four Beidou satellites were launched between 2000 and 2007. Based on the CAST developed DFH-3 satellite bus, the satellites were orbited by Long March-3A launch vehicles to geostationary orbits.”

  • Susan Rice's Testimony On Being Out Of Russiagate Loop Doesn't Add Up
    Susan Rice’s Testimony On Being Out Of Russiagate Loop Doesn’t Add Up

    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 07/31/2020 – 23:25

    Authored by Eric Felten via RealClearInvestigations.com,

    Susan Rice, the vice presidential contender with a high-profile history of questionable public statements, has another dubious claim in her past that until now has escaped scrutiny. Rice swore under oath that as President Obama’s national security adviser she was never told about the FBI’s Trump-Russia investigation. But former FBI Director James Comey testified that Rice was present when he informed Obama all about Crossfire Hurricane just weeks after the investigation was launched.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    James Comey: His account of telling the White House about Crossfire Hurricane differs markedly from Susan Rice’s. She testified: “We were not informed by Director Comey or the attorney general that there was an active investigation of anybody in the Trump orbit.” (AP Photo/Charles Krupa)

    The contradiction could lead to charges that Rice lied to Congress about a topic still of intense interest to investigators: How actively involved in the effort to spy on the Trump campaign was the inner circle of the Obama White House, including the president himself? More immediately, the question of whether Rice told the truth on Capitol Hill might damage her bid to join Joe Biden on the Democratic presidential ticket.

    Rice earned a reputation for shading the truth after the 2012 terrorist attack on the U.S. consulate in Benghazi, Libya. She was famously dispatched to five different Sunday morning news shows to repeat false talking points: that the mob that killed four Americans – including Ambassador to Libya Christopher Stevens – was merely reacting to an obscure YouTube video mocking Islam.

    Questions about her forthrightness were redoubled when Senate investigators found that, in the waning minutes of the Obama administration, Rice wrote a curious “memo to the file.” She sent an email to herself on the day of Donald Trump’s inauguration, and in it claimed that Obama had insisted that everything to do with Russia, whether law enforcement or counterintelligence, be done “by the book.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    President Obama and Rice: Both were present at a meeting where, the FBI’s Comey said, the Trump-Russia probe was discussed at its outset. She denied knowing about it. AP Photo/Carolyn Kaster

    Asked about that memo later, Rice insisted she knew nothing about the FBI’s counterintelligence probe regarding Trump and Russia, let alone anything that could be characterized as spying on the incoming administration. She had her lawyer, Kathryn Ruemmler, write a letter to Sens. Charles Grassley, Dianne Feinstein, Lindsey Graham, and Sheldon Whitehouse. “While serving as National Security Advisor, Ambassador Rice was not briefed on the existence of any FBI investigation into allegations of collusion between Mr. Trump’s associates and Russia,” Ruemmler wrote, “and she later learned of the fact of this investigation from Director Comey’s subsequent public testimony” – testimony that didn’t occur until March 20, 2017

    On Wednesday, September 8, 2017, Rice repeated that she knew nothing of the FBI’s investigation while in the White House. This time she made the claim under oath.

    Rice was at the Capitol, sitting in a secure room used by the House Permanent Select Committee on Intelligence. The official reason for the interview was to ask what the Obama administration had done to thwart Russian efforts to interfere in the 2016 presidential election. Behind those questions was a different query: Had Barack Obama’s team used the power of the presidency to spy on and smear the Trump campaign?

    With the expectation of facing unfriendly questions, Rice arrived with two attorneys from the law firm Latham & Watkins.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Adam Schiff: “… [W]ould Director Comey brief you on the progress of his investigation?” he asked Rice. “No,” replied Rice under oath. (Scott Applewhite)

     The Republican staffer running the interview emphasized to Rice the importance of telling the truth: “You are reminded that it is unlawful to deliberately provide false information to members of Congress or staff.” She was asked to raise her right hand and take an oath: “Madam Ambassador, do you swear or affirm that the testimony you’re about to give is the truth, the whole truth, and nothing but the truth?”

    “I do,” Rice said.

    The Democrats at the interview weren’t looking to trip Rice up. But it was questions from two California Democrats in the room that Rice may regret. Rep. Adam Schiff cited the former head of the FBI: “Director Comey testified that, in July of last year [2016], he began a counterintelligence investigation into people associated with the Trump campaign and what contacts they may have had with Russia.

    “That investigative responsibility,” Schiff asked Rice, “wasn’t part of your portfolio, I take it?”

    “No, not at all.”

    “And would Director Comey brief you on the progress of his investigation?”

    “No,” said Rice. And then she elaborated. “I think it’s important for everybody to understand: We were not informed by Director Comey or the attorney general that there was an active investigation of anybody in the Trump orbit,” she said. “[I]n the Obama White House, we maintained scrupulously the firewall between people in the While House and contacts with Justice about potential or actual criminal matters. The only communication that was sanctioned in that vein was between the White House counsel and the Justice Department or the FBl.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Eric Swalwell: “ls it fair to say that, as the national security adviser, you were not read in on active, ongoing investigations that the Department of Justice or the FBI were conducting?” Rice’s reply under penalty of perjury: “Absolutely, that’s the case.”  AP Photo/Alex Brandon

    If that weren’t definitive enough, Rice added, “And Director Comey did not volunteer to us, not only then but through the duration of the administration, that there was an active investigation of anybody in the Trump orbit. I knew he was looking at this issue, that he was concerned about it. But he never specifically shared with me or others, to my knowledge, that such an investigation was ongoing. And I learned about it formally in the public domain after I left office.”

    A little later in the closed-door Capitol Hill interview, Democratic Rep. Eric Swalwell came back to the question that Rice had already answered so definitively: “Speaking of investigations, you talked about Director Comey and the FBl,” Swalwell said to Rice. “ls it fair to say that, as the national security adviser, you were not read in on active, ongoing investigations that the Department of Justice or the FBI were conducting?”

    If Rice were concerned that she might have misspoken earlier, she was presented with the opportunity to correct her testimony. She didn’t take it.

    “Absolutely, that’s the case,” Rice replied. “Those were law enforcement matters. They were not things that I was privy to unless the Justice Department chose to share them with me. The Justice Department’s normal contact in the White House, at least in the Obama administration, for anything to do with law enforcement, criminal stuff, was the White House counsel.”

    Rice’s testimony took place two years before the inspector general for the Justice Department, Michael Horowitz, released his report on the origins of the FBI’s Trump-Russia investigation. In that report is an admission from James Comey that contradicts Rice’s sworn statements. According to testimony obtained from Comey by Horowitz, the Obama team knew about the FBI’s investigation from nearly the start, and in detail.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Above, a footnote from the IG report undercuts Susan Rice’s claim of no knowledge of Crossfire Hurricane.

    DoJ Office of the Inspector General

    “Crossfire Hurricane,” as the counterintelligence investigation was called, was officially launched at the end of July 2016. Sometime in August – just weeks into the secret, “close-hold” probe – Comey was at the White House for a meeting, he told Horowitz.

    “When we asked Comey about meetings with the White House concerning Crossfire Hurricane” Horowitz writes, the former FBI director said “he did not brief the White House about the investigation.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Michael Horowitz: In his report on the origins of Trump-Russia, the Justice Department inspector general listed the attendees at a White House meeting where the probe was discussed, including Rice and President Obama. AP Photo/Jacquelyn Martin

    Comey may not have considered it an official “briefing” but that doesn’t mean he didn’t share the information. Comey told Horowitz that in August 2016 “he did mention to President Obama and others at a meeting in the Situation Room that the FBI was trying to determine whether any U.S. person had worked with the Russians in their efforts to interfere in the 2016 U.S. election.”

    Comey claimed that he wasn’t eager at that White House meeting to share specifics of the inquiry, but he had done so nonetheless.

    “[A]lthough [Comey] did not recall exactly what he said,” Horowitz writes, “he may have said there were four individuals with ‘some association or connection to the Trump campaign.’” This revelation failed to strike anyone at the meeting as remarkable: “Comey stated that after he provided this information, no one in the Situation Room responded or followed up with any questions.”

    Who were the strangely incurious officials who remained mum when they were told four individuals associated with the Trump campaign were being investigated on suspicion of conspiring with Russians to interfere in the election? Comey provided Horowitz with a list of those at the meeting. The inspector general shares that list in footnote 194 to his report: President Obama was there, as well as his chief of staff, Dennis McDonough; also present were James Clapper, John Brennan, Michael Rogers and Susan Rice.

    So Rice was among those told by James Comey about Crossfire Hurricane within weeks of the investigation’s launch. Yet she told the House Intelligence Committee under oath that “I think it’s important for everybody to understand: We were not informed by Director Comey or the Attorney General that there was an active investigation of anybody in the Trump orbit.”

    Reached by RealClearInvestigations, Rice spokesperson Erin Pelton said that Rice’s testimony was true:

    “As Ambassador Rice wrote in her book and stated to Congress, she was not briefed by the FBI or the Department of Justice on the existence of an FBI investigation into allegations of collusion between Mr. Trump’s associates and Russia, nor was she informed of any FISA applications sought by the FBI in its investigation.” Pelton said Rice “only learned of the fact of this investigation after leaving office, when FBI Director Comey testified before Congress to that effect.”

    The spokesperson offered no comment, however, about Comey’s assertion to the inspector general that he had told Obama, Rice, and the others about Crossfire Hurricane shortly after the investigation’s launch in the summer of 2016.

  • In 3rd Intercept This Week, Russia Scrambles Fighter Jet Against US Spy Plane Over Black Sea
    In 3rd Intercept This Week, Russia Scrambles Fighter Jet Against US Spy Plane Over Black Sea

    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 07/31/2020 – 23:05

    The tit-for-tat probing of borders and airspace between the US and Russia has continued, and now this week there’s been no less than three Russian intercepts of American spy planes over the Black Sea.

    Reuters reports of the latest on Friday:

    The Russian defense ministry said it had sent an Su-27 fighter plane on Friday to intercept a U.S. surveillance plane over the Black Sea, prompting it to change course away from the Russian border, Russian news agencies reported.

    Two similar incidents were reported earlier this week over the Black Sea.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Su-27 fighter file image via The Aviationist

    Russian MoD statements said there were two American military planes, with one likely being a smaller fighter jet escort to the larger spy plane.

    “The crew of the Russian jet fighter approached the air targets at a safe distance and identified them as a US RC-135 US Air Force recon plane and a P-8A US Navy patrol plane,” TASS cited military officials as saying. Both sides acknowledged the incident took place over neutral waters. 

    This comes after a spate of such close aerial encounters throughout June and July. The past two months have witnessed a noticeable uptick.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Most close encounters have taken place off Alaska’s coast, as well as over the Black and Baltic Seas, as well as the Mediterranean near Syria, and lately perhaps more rare over the Seas of Japan and over the remote Sea of Okhotsk just off the Russian far east.

  • Escobar: The Heart Of The Matter In The South China Sea
    Escobar: The Heart Of The Matter In The South China Sea

    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 07/31/2020 – 22:45

    Authored by Pepe Escobar via The Asia Times,

    When the Ronald Reagan and Nimitz carrier strike groups recently engaged in “operations” in the South China Sea, it did not escape to many a cynic that the US Pacific Fleet was doing its best to turn the infantile Thucydides Trap theory into a self-fulfilling prophecy.

    The pro forma official spin, via Rear Adm. Jim Kirk, commander of the Nimitz, is that the ops were conducted to “reinforce our commitment to a free and open Indo-Pacific, a rules-based international order, and to our allies and partners”.

    Nobody pays attention to these clichés, because the real message was delivered by a CIA operative posing as diplomat, Secretary of State Mike “We Lie, We Cheat, We Steal” Pompeo: “The PRC has no legal grounds to unilaterally impose its will on the region”, in a reference to the Nine-Dash Line. For the State Dept., Beijing deploys nothing but “gangster tactics” in the South China Sea.

    Once again, nobody paid attention, because the actual facts on the sea are stark. Anything that moves in the South China Sea – China’s crucial maritime trade artery – is at the mercy of the PLA, which decides if and when to deploy their deadly DF-21D and DF-26 “carrier killer” missiles.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    There’s absolutely no way the US Pacific Fleet can win a shooting war in the South China Sea.

    Electronically jammed

    A crucial Chinese report, unavailable and not referred to by Western media, and translated by Hong Kong-based analyst Thomas Wing Polin, is essential to understand the context.

    The report refers to US Growler electronic warplanes rendered totally out of control by electronic jamming devices positioned on islands and reefs in the South China Sea.

    According to the report, “after the accident, the United States negotiated with China, demanding that China dismantle the electronic equipment immediately, but it was rejected. These electronic devices are an important part of China’s maritime defense and are not offensive weapons. Therefore, the US military’s request for dismantling is unreasonable.”

    It gets better:

    “On the same day, former commander Scott Swift of the US Pacific Fleet finally acknowledged that the US military had lost the best time to control the South China Sea. He believes that China has deployed a large number of Hongqi 9 air defense missiles, H-6K bombers, and electronic jamming systems on islands and reefs. The defense can be said to be solid. If US fighter jets rush into the South China Sea, they are likely to encounter their ‘Waterloo.’”

    The bottom line is that the systems – including electronic jamming – deployed by the PLA on islands and reefs in the South China Sea, covering more than half of the total surface, are considered by Beijing to be part of the national defense system.

    I have previously detailed what Admiral Philip Davidson, when he was still a nominee to lead the US Pacific Command (PACOM), told the US Senate. Here are his Top Three conclusions:

    1) “China is pursuing advanced capabilities (e.g., hypersonic missiles) which the United States has no current defense against. As China pursues these advanced weapons systems, US forces across the Indo-Pacific will be placed increasingly at risk.”

    2) “China is undermining the rules-based international order.”

    3) “China is now capable of controlling the South China Sea in all scenarios short of war with the United States.”

    Implied in all of the above is the “secret” of the Indo-Pacific strategy: at best a containment exercise, as China continues to solidify the Maritime Silk Road linking the South China Sea to the Indian Ocean.

    Remember the nusantao

    The South China Sea is and will continue to be one of the prime geopolitical flashpoints of the young 21st century, where a great deal of the East-West balance of power will be played.

    I have addressed this elsewhere in the past in some detail, but a short historical background is once again absolutely essential to understand the current juncture as the South China Sea increasingly looks and feels like a Chinese lake.

    Let’s start in 1890, when Alfred Mahan, then president of the US Naval College, wrote the seminal The Influence of Sea Power Upon History, 1660-1783. Mahan’s central thesis is that the US should go global in search of new markets, and protect these new trade routes through a network of naval bases.

    That is the embryo of the US Empire of Bases – which remains in effect.

    It was Western – American and European – colonialism that came up with most land borders and maritime borders of states bordering the South China Sea: Philippines, Indonesia, Malaysia, Vietnam.

    We are talking about borders between different colonial possessions – and that implied intractable problems from the start, subsequently inherited by post-colonial nations.

    Historically, it had always been a completely different story. The best anthropological studies (Bill Solheim’s, for instance) define the semi-nomadic communities who really traveled and traded across the South China Sea from time immemorial as the Nusantao – an Austronesian compound word for “south island” and “people”.

    The Nusantao were not a defined ethnic group. They were a maritime internet. Over centuries, they had many key hubs, from the coastline between central Vietnam and Hong Kong all the way to the Mekong Delta. They were not attached to any “state”. The Western notion of “borders” did not even exist. In the mid-1990s, I had the privilege to encounter some of their descendants in Indonesia and Vietnam.

    So it was only by the late 19th century that the Westphalian system managed to freeze the South China Sea inside an immovable framework.

    Which brings us to the crucial point of why China is so sensitive about its borders; because they are directly linked to the “century of humiliation” – when internal Chinese corruption and weakness allowed Western “barbarians” to take possession of Chinese land.

    A Japanese lake

    The Nine Dash Line is an immensely complex problem. It was invented by the eminent Chinese geographer Bai Meichu, a fierce nationalist, in 1936, initially as part of a “Chinese National Humiliation Map” in the form of a “U-shaped line” gobbling up the South China Sea all the way down to James Shoal, which is 1,500 km south of China but only over 100 km off Borneo.

    The Nine Dash Line, from the beginning, was promoted by the Chinese government – remember, at the time not yet Communist – as the letter of the law in terms of “historic” Chinese claims over islands in the South China Sea.

    One year later, Japan invaded China. Japan had occupied Taiwan way back in 1895. Japan occupied the Philippines in 1942. That meant virtually the entire coastline of the South China Sea being controlled by a single empire for the fist time in history. The South China Sea had become a Japanese lake.

    Well, that lasted only until 1945. The Japanese did occupy Woody Island in the Paracels and Itu Aba (today Taiping) in the Spratlys. After the end of WWII and the US nuclear-bombing Japan, the Philippines became independent in 1946 and the Spratlys immediately were declared Filipino territory.

    In 1947, all the islands in the South China Sea got Chinese names.

    And in December 1947 all the islands were placed under the control of Hainan (itself an island in southern China.) New maps duly followed, but now with Chinese names for the islands (or reefs, or shoals). But there was a huge problem: no one explained the meaning of those dashes (which were originally eleven.)

    In June 1947 the Republic of China claimed everything within the line – while proclaiming itself open to negotiate definitive maritime borders with other nations later on. But, for the moment, there were no borders.

    And that set the scene for the immensely complicated “strategic ambiguity” of the South China Sea that still lingers on – and allows the State Dept. to accuse Beijing of “gangster tactics”. The culmination of a millennia-old transition from the “maritime internet” of semi-nomadic peoples to the Westphalian system spelled nothing but trouble.

    Time for COC

    So what about the US notion of “freedom of navigation”?

    In imperial terms, “freedom of navigation”, from the West Coast of the US to Asia – through the Pacific, the South China Sea, the Malacca Strait and the Indian Ocean – is strictly an issue of military strategy.

    The US Navy simply cannot imagine dealing with maritime exclusion zones – or having to demand an “authorization” every time they need to cross them. In this case the Empire of Bases would lose “access” to its own bases.

    This is compounded with trademark Pentagon paranoia, gaming a situation where a “hostile power” – namely China – decides to block global trade. The premise in itself is ludicrous, because the South China Sea is the premier, vital maritime artery for China’s globalized economy.

    So there’s no rational justification for a Freedom of Navigation (FON) program. For all practical purposes, these aircraft carriers like the Ronald Reagan and the Nimitz showboating on and off in the South China Sea amount to 21st century gunboat diplomacy. And Beijing is not impressed.

    As far as the 10-member Association of Southeast Asian Nations (ASEAN) is concerned, what matters now is to come up with a Code of Conduct (COC) to solve all maritime conflicts between Philippines, Vietnam, Malaysia, Brunei and China.

    Next year, ASEAN and China celebrate 30 years of strong bilateral relations. There’s a strong possibility they will be upgraded to “comprehensive strategic partner” status.

    Because of Covid-19, all players had to postpone negotiations on the second reading of the single draft of COC. Beijing wanted these to be face to face – because the document is ultra-sensitive and for the moment, secret. Yet they finally agreed to negotiate online – via detailed texts.

    It will be a hard slog, because as ASEAN made it clear in a virtual summit in late June, everything has to be in accordance with international law, including the UN Convention on the Law of the Seas (UNCLOS).

    If they can all agree on a COC by the end of 2020, a final agreement could be approved by ASEAN in mid-2021. Historic does not even begin to describe it – because this negotiation has been going on for no less than two decades.

    Not to mention that a COC invalidates any US pretension to secure “freedom of navigation” in an area where navigation is already free.

    Yet “freedom” was never the issue. In imperial terminology, “freedom” means that China must obey and keep the South China Sea open to the US Navy. Well, that’s possible, but you gotta behave. That’ll be the day when the US Navy is “denied” the South China Sea. You don’t need to be Mahan to know that’ll mean the imperial end of ruling the seven seas.

  • Ford Uses Robot Dogs To Map Plant, Human Surveyors No Longer Needed 
    Ford Uses Robot Dogs To Map Plant, Human Surveyors No Longer Needed 

    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 07/31/2020 – 22:25

    Ford Motor Company is set to abandoned traditional human surveyors for robot dogs with sensors to laser map a production plant ahead of retooling.

    Ford partnered with Boston Dynamics to digitally map its Van Dyke Transmission Plant in Michigan. The data will enable engineers to retool the plant for future products. The ability to use robot dogs, outfitted with sensors, is a much timelier and cost-effective approach than using human surveyors. 

    “Equipped with five cameras, the robots can travel up to 3 mph on a battery lasting nearly two hours and will be used to scan the plant floor and assist engineers in updating the original Computer-Aided Design which is utilized when we’re getting ready to retool our plants,” Ford said.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Ford’s digital engineering manager Mark Goderis said, “by having the robots scan our facility, we can see what it actually looks like now and build a new engineering model. That digital model is then used when we need to retool the plant for new products.”

    “We used to use a tripod, and we would walk around the facility stopping at different locations, each time standing around for five minutes waiting for the laser to scan,” Goderis said. “Scanning one plant could take two weeks. With Fluffy’s [the robot dog’s name] help, we are able to do it in half the time.”

    A typical digital scan of a plant costs around $300,000. Ford claims the robot dogs can do it for a “fraction of the cost.” 

    Here’s the robot dog in action.

    The takeaway is that automation and artificial intelligence will displace millions of jobs by 2030. The virus pandemic, forcing corporations to adopt cutting-edge (non-virus-catching) technology, will continue to weigh on the labor market recovery. As robots take human jobs, politicians, pressured by high unemployment and collapsing consumption (and supported by an enabling Fed), will increasingly support people’s quantitative easing. Washington’s socialist checks to broke Americans are likely prelude to UBI… and that likely explains the surge in gold prices.

  • Make America Constitutional Again?
    Make America Constitutional Again?

    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 07/31/2020 – 22:05

    Authored by James Bovard via The American Institute for Economic Research,

    The American political system may be on the eve of its worst legitimacy crisis since the Civil War. Early warning signals indicate that many states could suffer catastrophic failures in counting votes in November. The election will occur amidst the vast economic devastation inflicted by a political class that responded to COVID by seizing almost unlimited power. And Deep State federal agencies have already proven that they will trample the law to sabotage election results. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    America could soon see a hundred-times worse replay of the Florida presidential balloting 20 years ago in the Bush-Gore showdown. Some Florida counties had antiquated voting equipment while others had harebrained ballot designs that confounded voters. The Florida Supreme Court ordered a manual recount of disputed votes but the Supreme Court, in a 5-to-4 decision, stopped the recount because it could result in “a cloud upon what [George W. Bush] claims to be the legitimacy of his election,” Justice Antonin Scalia wrote. Two days, the same Supreme Court majority blocked any subsequent recounting because it was “not well calculated to sustain the confidence that all citizens must have in the outcome of elections.” Unfortunately, “legitimacy via blocked recounts” may also be the epithet for the 2020 presidential election. 

    Because of the pandemic, many states are switching primarily to mail-in voting even though experiences with recent primaries were a disaster.

    In New York City, officials are still struggling to count mail-in ballots from the June primary.

    Up to 20% of ballots “were declared invalid before even being opened, based on mistakes with their exterior envelopes,” the Washington Post noted, thanks largely to missing postmarks or signatures. In Wisconsin, more than 20,000 “primary ballots were thrown out because voters missed at least one line on the form, rendering them invalid.”

    Some states are mailing ballots to all the names on the voting lists, providing thousands of dead people the chance to vote from the grave. President Trump claims that the shift to mail-in voting could result in “the most corrupt vote in our nation’s history.” Trump is often wrong on issues but even a New York Daily News article tagged the recent primary results a “dumpster fire.” Delayed election results and potentially millions of disputed ballots could minimize support for whoever is designated the next president. 

    Elections supposedly choose which candidates are selected to follow the law and uphold the Constitution, but COVID shutdown dictates vividly how political power is now practically unlimited. Michigan governor Gretchen Whitmer prohibited “all public and private gatherings of any size” (prohibiting people from visiting friends) and also prohibited purchasing seeds for spring planting in stores after she decreed that a “nonessential” activity. Oregon Governor Kate Brown banned the state’s four million residents from leaving their homes except for essential work, buying food, and other narrow exemptions, and also banned all recreational travel – even though much of her state had almost zero COVID cases. 

    In the name of reducing risks, politicians entitled themselves to destroy tens of millions of jobs. Permitting governors to shut down churches was not on the ballot but that didn’t stop many states from banning worship services at the same time politicians cheered mass protests that scorned “stay-at-home” orders.

    The media has often whitewashed the damage from COVID power grabs in part because every restriction was supposedly justified by “science.” After New York Gov. Andrew Cuomo dictated that nursing homes must admit COVID patients, more than 6,000 elderly nursing home residents were killed by the coronavirus. Cuomo has yet to reveal which “science” textbook spawned this policy (which several other states also imposed). Were those state governments grossly incompetent or were they murderous? It doesn’t matter because Trump made rude comments about N.I.H. honcho and media darling Anthony Fauci. What’s the point of voting for politicians who merely need to invoke dubious statistical extrapolations to sow death and economic devastation?

    Finally, does the presidential election even matter?

    Deep State federal agencies are a Godzilla that have established their prerogative to undermine if not overturn election results. The FBI has achieved saint-like status among many liberals for its efforts to topple Trump. For almost three years, the nation’s political life was roiled by an investigation driven by false allegations that the Trump campaign colluded with Russia in the 2016 election. As George Washington University professor Jonathan Turley observed last week, the media continues to ignore “one of the biggest stories in decades. The Obama administration targeted the campaign of the opposing party based on false evidence.” Obama officials who exploited the CIA and other intelligence agencies to illicitly target Trump campaign officials have laughed all the way to million-dollar book advances. 

    During the Trump impeachment effort, the establishment media openly cheered the Deep State. New York Times columnist James Stewart assured readers that the secretive agencies “work for the American people,” New York Times editorial writer Michelle Cottle hailed the Deep State as “a collection of patriotic public servants,” and Washington Post columnist Eugene Robinson captured the Beltway’s verdict: “God bless the Deep State!” The media has almost completely abandoned its watchdog role, and its veneration will make it easier for the FBI, CIA, and National Security Agency to ravage not just elections but also Americans’ rights and liberties in the coming years.

    Even before the voting starts, surveys show that for the first time “a majority of Americans (55 percent) are dissatisfied with their system of government,” the Atlantic reported. The percentage of Americans who “expressed trust in government in Washington” has fallen from 73% in 1958 to only 17% now, according to the Pew Research Center. But those numbers could quickly become far more ominous for our political ruling class. 

    What happens if Trump continues to repel many if not most potential voters, and then Biden comes across in the presidential debates as clueless and doddering as did Special Counsel Robert Mueller in a congressional hearing last July? How many Americans will feel forced to choose between a scoundrel and an idiot?

    Many pundits and professors presume that a Biden victory in November will magically re-legitimize the American political system. But almost all the problems of recent years will continue or intensify. The Centers for Disease Control and the Food and Drug Administration, both of which horribly botched the nation’s response to COVID, will continue bollixing public health crises. U.S. foreign policy will continue to be reckless and self-defeating, with American pretensions to global hegemony becoming ever more ludicrous. Deficit spending will continue to spin out of control, spiraling closer to the day when the Federal Reserve’s sorcery fails to entrance financial markets. Unfortunately, both Democrats and Republicans appear willing to bankrupt the nation to perpetuate their own power.

    Federal legitimacy hinges on the Constitution, but there is not a snowball’s chance in hell that either Trump or Biden will “make America constitutional again.” As Thomas Jefferson declared in 1786, “An elective despotism was not the government we fought for.” What’s the point of voting if “government under the law” is not a choice on Election Day? American political legitimacy will continue plummeting as long as politicians scorn any legal and constitutional limits on their power.

  • US Takes Unprecedented Step Of Imposing Sanctions On Assad's Teenage Son
    US Takes Unprecedented Step Of Imposing Sanctions On Assad’s Teenage Son

    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 07/31/2020 – 21:45

    This week the US imposed a new round of sanctions against the Syrian government, and while this is nothing new, what is gaining attention is the unprecedented step Washington has taken against Bashar al-Assad’s teenage son.

    Secretary of State Mike Pompeo cited that the continued sanctions under the ‘Caesar Act’ were geared toward ending Assad’s “brutal war against the Syrian people.”  

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    President Assad’s oldest son, 18-year old Hafez Bashar al-Assad (named after his grandfather who previously ruled Syria), is not known to be politically active or connected, and holds no office or decision-making abilities, but now under the new sanctions he won’t be allowed to travel to or have assets in the US, reports The Guardian.

    When pressed US officials admitted that the action against Assad’s children are preemptive. US deputy assistant secretary of state, Joel Rayburn, was cited in the following:

    Asked why Assad’s teenage son had been added to the list – he was born in 2001 – Rayburn said: “There has been a trend of senior Syrian regime actors and business people who have been active in the regime to do business through their adult family members to evade sanctions.”

    “It seems very clear that the immediate family of Bashar al-Assad and their in-laws are attempting to consolidate economic power inside Syria so that they could use this to further consolidate political power.”

    He said: “Assad would only use such power to strengthen the killing machine against the Syrian people”. He denied that the sanctions would have any impact on humanitarian trade or on the economy of Lebanon.

    However, many analysts have pointed out that the sanctions are designed to ensure that Syria never recovers from its crushed war-time economy, not to mention the billions in damage to buildings, homes, and infrastructure across the country.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Hafez al-Assad, 18, is named after his grandfather, who ruled syria prior to Bashar. Image source: Reuters

    Also interesting is the fact that the sanctions do not target al-Qaeda held Idlib province, nor the oil and gas rich northeast section of the country occupied by US forces in support of Kurdish-led Syrian Democratic Forces (SDF).

    The far-reaching US sanctions now essentially “blacklist” anyone doing business with Damascus for any reason. As geopolitical commentator Jason Ditz points out: “This would cover a lot of basic commerce Syria might engage in in the course of reconstruction, particularly importing goods and services, and may force Syria to delay such rebuilding for lack of willing contractors.”

    Thus it appears that the US war on Syria will grind on for many more years to come. 

  • Black Lives Matter: An Immodest Suggestion
    Black Lives Matter: An Immodest Suggestion

    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 07/31/2020 – 21:25

    Authored by MN Gordon via EconomicPrism.com,

    We don’t like it.  But we won’t deny it.  America’s buried itself under an immense pile of public debt over the last 40 years.

    Time to grab a shovel and some gloves.  There’s plenty of digging out to do.  There’s also plenty of opportunity in doing it.  We’ll have more on this in a moment.  First, the grim facts…

    The national debt in 1980 was $908 billion. 

    Today it’s over $26 trillion. 

    New debt racked up in June alone – $863 billion – was more than the country added in its first 200 years of existence.

    But as the national debt’s been piled on with ever increasing heaps over this time.  Economic growth has diminished to near subsistence levels.  The progression was gradual at first.  Yet over the last two decades the growing burden has become inescapable.

    In the 1950s and 1960s, for example, the average GDP growth rate was above 4 percent.  Then in the 1970s and 1980s GDP growth declined to around 3 percent, where it held through the 1990s.  The 21st century, however, has been characterized by decreasing growth rates.  In fact, over the last decade, the average GDP growth rate has been below 2 percent.  That’s no joke.

    The divergence between increasing debt heaps and diminishing growth has become wider and wider.  Whereas the debt to GDP ratio was 32 percent in 1980.  Today, it’s 110 percent.  Tack on U.S. unfunded liabilities – social security, Medicare Parts A, B, and D, federal debt held by the public, plus federal employee and veterans benefits – estimated to be over $153 trillion, and the debt to GDP ratio jumps to 637 percent.

    However, this assumes GDP holds or continues to putter along at 2 percent.  The fact is, 2 percent GDP growth may be a wishful thing of the past.  Yesterday [Thursday], if you missed it, the Commerce Department reported that GDP isn’t growing; rather, it’s contracting – and it’s contracting a lot.  Specifically, it’s contracting at an annualized rate of 32.9 percent.

    In other words, government debt is blowing out like a newborn baby’s diaper.  But that’s not all.  In addition to federal debt, there’s state, local, and private debt too…

    Zombie Economics

    State and local debt levels, in many jurisdictions, have also reached levels that are inescapable.  Outstanding U.S. mortgage debt’s approaching $15 trillion.  U.S. corporations are sitting on $10 trillion in debt.  And student loan debts at $1.6 trillion.

    Rounding out the debt binge is $1.2 trillion in U.S. auto loans and nearly $1 trillion in credit card debt.  Unfortunately, all this debt dooms the economy to a perpetual state of zero to low growth for decades to come.  It also dooms the country to the social discord of a flailing economy.  Ruchir Sharma, writing for the Wall Street Journal, explains why:

    “Easy money fuels the rise of giant firms and, along with crisis bailouts, keeps alive heavily indebted ‘zombie’ firms at the expense of startups, which typically drive innovation.  All of this leads to low productivity—the prime contributor to the slowdown in economic growth and a shrinking of the pie for everyone.

    “At the same time, easy money has juiced up the value of stocks, bonds and other financial assets, which benefits mainly the rich, inflaming social resentment over growing inequalities in income and wealth.  It should not be surprising that millennials and Gen Z are growing disillusioned with this distorted form of capitalism and say that they prefer socialism.  The irony is that the rising culture of government dependence is, in fact, a form of socialism—for the rich and powerful.”

    Indeed, the massive debt buildup and zombification of large swaths of corporate America is a severe hindrance to productivity.  Rather than fueling new businesses and new investments, the economy will function to service and roll over debt in perpetuity.  It will take a productivity miracle to ever get back to sustained GDP growth above 2 percent.

    Black Lives Matter: An Immodest Suggestion

    Where will America’s productivity miracle come from? 

    Public education is not teaching students what they need to know to compete in the global economy.

    According to the National Center for Education Statistics, math scores of U.S. students rank 30th in the world.  The East Asian peers of today’s American students will eat their lunch in the growth industries of tomorrow.

    Here’s where Black Lives Matter has a real opportunity.

    The protests.  The riots.  The calls for reparation payments.  Social justice wealth transfers.  White privilege taxes.  All the nonsense.  Where’s the strategy?  Where’s the long-range ‘strategery’?

    No doubt, those selling BLM T-shirts in Walmart parking lots are exercising gumption.  But it’s not gonna cut it.  Moreover, like bingo winnings, reparation payments will be quickly squandered while the unhappiness remains.

    Here at the Economic Prism we hesitate to offer advice.  We don’t know the answers.  We hardly know the questions.  But we do observe, contemplate, and reflect…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    And as far as we can tell the BLM movement is empty of ideas and without direction.  Hence, from a place of modesty, we offer an immodest suggestion:

    If BLM was strategic they’d be fighting for school vouchers to start pumping out semiconductor engineers 10 to 12 years from now.

    Within half a generation they could take a significant role in driving America’s much needed productivity miracle.  Apathy would be replaced with dignity. 

    The politics of race, class, identity would be vanquished.

    Certainly, it would take hard work and relentless perseverance.  Yet it’s within reach…for those willing to take a grab at it.

    Bottom-line, performance is the only measure.  Professional sports has shown that the best performers make the big bucks, regardless of race.  Why not become top performers in a high-paying growth industry?

    This is an industry where America’s up and coming generation has fallen a step behind its global competitors.  There’s a need.  There’s demand.

    You can thank us in 2030.

  • Google Says New 'Contact Tracing' App To Launch In Coming Weeks
    Google Says New ‘Contact Tracing’ App To Launch In Coming Weeks

    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 07/31/2020 – 21:05

    Shortly after launching a new contact-tracing program in Ontario, a top Google executive said in a blog post published Friday that 20 US states and territories (roughly 45% of the country’s population) are “exploring” using the tool Google built with Apple to create new contact-tracing programs, and that the new apps are set to launch in the coming weeks.

    Google had previously said in May that three states, Alabama, North Dakota and South Carolina, would be launching apps using the exposure notification tool. Those states are still using the protocols, it appears.

    Additionally, the company said during its update that 16 countries and regions outside the US have launched apps using the Apple-Google tool, while other countries – including France and the UK – have sought to build their own tools from scratch, though the UK infamously pivoted, abandoned its custom system, and adopted the Google-Apple protocol.

    However, the UK has yet to launch this new app, and it’s unclear when it will be ready, as the Telegraph recently reported.

    Here’s how the UK’s app-based system (which is based on the Google-Apple system) is supposed to work, per the Telegraph.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Source: The Telegraph

    The technology should enable users to track whether they came in contact with any infected people via bluetooth signals.

    VP of Engineering David Burke penned the post, which was published Friday afternoon on the East Coast. Read it in full below:

    * * *

    In May, we partnered with Apple to launch the Exposure Notifications System (ENS) and made it available to public health authorities around the world in their fight against COVID-19. The ENS allows public health authorities to develop apps that augment manual contact tracing efforts while preserving the privacy of their citizens. As of today, public health authorities have used ENS to launch in 16 countries and regions across Africa, Asia, Europe, North America and South America, with more apps currently under development.

    In the United States, 20 states and territories—representing approximately 45 percent of the U.S. population—are exploring apps based on ENS. We expect to see the first set of these apps roll out over the coming weeks. The Association of Public Health Laboratories also announced recently that it will host a national key server to support all U.S. states, which will allow people with Exposure Notification apps to receive alerts even if they travel across state borders.

    We’ve continued to improve the technology and provide more transparency based on feedback we’ve received from public health authorities and other experts. Public health authorities will continue to make their own decisions about how exposure notifications become part of their plans in controlling COVID-19, and we will work to improve the technology in response to their feedback. Here are some of the changes we’ve already made, as well as some upcoming additional changes.

    Improvements to the Exposure Notification API

    Since the Exposure Notification API was publicly released in May, we’ve spoken with dozens of public health authorities to understand how the API could be improved to help them better manage the COVID-19 pandemic while preserving privacy. Based on this feedback, we recently launched an update to the API, which includes the following changes:

    When an exposure is detected, public health authorities now have more flexibility in determining the level of risk associated with that exposure based on technical information from the API.

    Bluetooth calibration values for hundreds of devices have been updated to improve the detection of nearby devices.

    The API now supports interoperability between countries, following feedback from governments that have launched Exposure Notification apps.

    To help public health authorities build apps more efficiently, we’ve added reliability improvements for apps and developer debug tools.

    We’ve improved clarity, transparency and control for users. For example, the Exposure Notifications settings on Android now include a simple on/off toggle at the top of the page. In addition, users will also see a periodic reminder if ENS is turned on.

    Technical guidance and transparency

    We’ve heard feedback that public health authorities and developers want more technical guidance about how ENS works. In response, we’ve published the following resources over the last few weeks:

    Reference verification server to help guide public health authorities in building a server that allows verification of test results when users report themselves as positive for COVID-19.

    Implementation code showing how the Exposure Notification API works underneath the hood.

    Telemetry design explaining what de-identified diagnostics data is collected to ensure that ENS is functioning properly and securely.

    Additional technical resources will be publicly shared as we continue to improve ENS.

    Education and privacy protections

    The Exposure Notifications website has more information about ENS, and offers educational and technical resources, as well as the latest updates.

    As a quick reminder, here are some of the core privacy protections that were built into ENS:

    You decide whether you want to use Exposure Notifications—it’s off unless you turn it on.

    ENS doesn’t use location data from your device.

    Your identity is not shared with Google, Apple or other users.

    Only public health authorities can use this system.

    Finally, we’ve received questions about why your Android device location setting has to be turned on if you want to use an Exposure Notification app. We want to explain why this particular setting needs to be on, and how you can control your location settings on Android.

    To be absolutely clear, ENS does not use device location, and the policies for using ENS prohibit public health authority apps from requesting or collecting device location. Instead, ENS uses Bluetooth technology to detect when two devices are near each other, without revealing the location of either device. While Bluetooth scanning doesn’t necessarily reveal location, it can in some cases be used to infer your device’s location. For example, if a shopping app scans for the Bluetooth signals of a stationary Bluetooth beacon located inside a store, then the app could infer that you went to that store. So in 2015, with privacy in mind, we designed the Android operating system to prevent Bluetooth scanning unless the device location setting is on. At that time no one could have anticipated that Bluetooth scanning might one day be helpful in controlling a global pandemic like COVID-19.

    Our engineering teams have been working to update the next version of Android with Exposure Notifications in mind. On Android 11, which will soon be released, users will be able to use Exposure Notification apps without turning on the device location setting. We’re making this update for Exposure Notifications only, given that ENS has been designed in such a way that neither the system nor the apps using it can infer device location through Bluetooth scanning, and apps that are allowed to use ENS are subject to additional policies that disallow automatic collection of location. All other apps and services will still be prohibited from performing Bluetooth scanning unless the device location setting is on.

    But even in current versions of Android, when you turn on the device location setting, your phone continues to prohibit access to any apps, including Google apps, that don’t have permission to use device location. The device location setting is like a circuit breaker in a house: When it’s on, power is flowing to the house, but you can turn the lights on or off in each room. If you turn on the device location setting to use ENS, it won’t affect the decisions you’ve already made about specific apps. You can always view and change which apps have access to your device location by going to Settings > Location > App permissions.

    We’re committed to supporting public health authorities as they build tools to fight COVID-19. We’ll continue to improve ENS based on feedback, while ensuring that people can trust in the privacy-preserving design of this technology.

    * * *

    Source: Google

     

  • Why The Iran-China Oil Alliance Is So Important
    Why The Iran-China Oil Alliance Is So Important

    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 07/31/2020 – 20:45

    Via Defense and Foreign Affairs,

    The steady rise in U.S. strategic competition with the People’s Republic of China (PRC) over trade and the South China Sea already has so many dimensions that it is sometimes easy to ignore shifts in the PRC’s behavior in other areas. On July 6, 2020, Iranian Foreign Minister Javad Zarif announced that Iran was negotiating an agreement with the PRC – with which it long has had trade and strategic links – which would now make the two countries the equivalent of strategic partners.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    This expanded U.S.-PRC competition to new parts of the world. Perhaps more importantly, the move is a substantive and significant response to India’s success in militarily outmaneuvering the PRC in Kashmir during June 2020.

    The PRC-Iran accord means the end of Indian use of the Iranian port of Chah Bahar and the construction of a rail link from that port city northward to link with a new rail spur into Afghanistan. India’s moves into Kashmir in 2019-2020 are widely perceived in Beijing to presage a new move by India to cut off the PRC-Pakistan landbridge through Pakistani controlled Azad (Free) Kashmir, giving India its own landbridge to Central Asia.

    Thus, after the confrontation between the Indian Army and People’s Liberation Army (PLA) troops in the Ladakh region of Kashmir on June 15-16, 2020, Beijing determined it would respond by cutting Indian access to Central Asia through Iran. The first signs came as the Iran-PRC deal was announced and the Iranian government canceled the Chah Bahar to Zahedan rail link which was to be built by India, citing Indian delays on the 628 km project. The Iranian government said that it would complete the line on its own, with a $400 million investment from the Iranian National Development Fund to the Iranian Railways.

    Indian Prime Minister Narendra Modi had gone to Tehran in May 2016 to sign the Chah Bahar deal, but work was indeed delayed as India fretted that the project might invoke U.S. sanctions against India.

    The PRC-Iran agreement could involve serious military ties and lead to major PRC defense sales to Iran, involve some $400 billion in PRC economic investment over 25 years, and lead to a major PRC role in modernizing Iranian railroads, ports, 5G Networks, and telecommunications generally. In return, the PRC would get discounted supplies of Iranian oil products and gas for the next 25 years.

    The PRC would be able to make Iran part of its Belt and Road Initiative (BRI), and be able to establish free trade zones in Iran in Maku in the northwest, Abadan in Khuzestan Province near Iraq, and Qeshm island just inside the Persian Gulf near the Strait of Hormuz.

    The agreement would give the PRC access to Jask, a major Iranian port outside the Strait of Hormuz. The PRC began developing its strategic position in the Persian Gulf region during the Iran-Iraq war as far back as 1980-1988. And the PRC presence in the Persian Gulf has only increased since that time.

    PRC activity over the last decade shows a clear intent to secure its energy imports from the Persian Gulf, compete with the U.S. and India, and look toward a day when it would be as real a power in the Persian Gulf and the Indian Ocean as it was striving to be in Asia and Pacific.

    The PRC had also made Pakistan a key partner in its Belt and Road Initiative, and the PRC now plays a key part in developing and managing the Pakistani port of Gwadar, on the Arabian Sea. The PRC also invested some $10.7 billion into transforming an Omani fishing village into the special Economic Zone Authority of Duqm. But, significantly, Oman has reserved significant parts of the maritime facilities at Duqm for British and U.S. forces.

    The PRC has taken these steps for both economic and strategic reasons. In 2019, Beijing attempted, without success, to bring Saudi Arabia and the United Arab Emirates into its orbit. It found it could not, however, have a strategic relationship with Iran and the Arabian Peninsula states simultaneously. It stayed with the more significant choice, Iran.

    It is vital to the PRC to secure its access to the Persian Gulf oil and gas, and limit U.S. capability to influence this flow to the PRC during a crisis or war. The PRC imports more than 70 percent of its petroleum, and gets more than 40 percent of its supplies from the Persian Gulf.

    Iranian-PRC trade and strategic linkages in many ways circumvent U.S. attempts to sanction the leadership of both states. At a time when both sanctioned states have come under great pressure, the new alliance, then, offers Beijing and Tehran some real respite and strategic resilience. Adding Russia into the mix only widens the trading zone of both states.

    The real challenges, however, comes from whether the PRC economy can be sustained for the duration of the new accord, and whether an Indian military thrust to cut off the Pakistan corridor to the PRC will cause grave difficulties for Beijing.

    But, certainly, the new deal with Iran is Beijing’s signal that it is planning for the day when the Pakistan corridor to the Indian Ocean may be lost to it.

  • Responding To Criticism, Elon Musk Tells The World That He And Bill Gates Are Not "Lovers"
    Responding To Criticism, Elon Musk Tells The World That He And Bill Gates Are Not “Lovers”

    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 07/31/2020 – 20:25

    “The rumor that Bill Gates & I are lovers is completely untrue.” 

    Those are the actual words that the CEO of $270 billion Tesla tweeted out on Thursday, probably when he should have been working, in response to comments that Bill Gates made the day prior on CNBC.

    Gates had appeared on CNBC to talk about the conspiracy theories associated with the coronavirus pandemic and, in the process, wound up taking a shot at Musk, who has been notoriously wrong about almost all of his coronavirus predictions (for instance, that there would be no new cases by the end of April).

    Gates said of Musk: “Elon’s positioning is to maintain a high level of outrageous comments. He’s not much involved in vaccines. He makes a great electric car. And his rockets work well. So he’s allowed to say these things. I hope that he doesn’t confuse areas he’s not involved in too much.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    This, of course, set off Musk, who had to stop whatever humankind-altering project he was working on at the time (monkeys solving Rubik’s cubes?) and respond on Twitter. He also wrote “Billy G is not my lover,” a lame reference to the Michael Jackson song “Billy Jean”.

    Recall, back in March we reported that America’s favorite sociopath CEO had Tweeted out that the coronavirus panic was “dumb”. Just hours after that, he again took to Twitter to double down on his statement and defend his reasoning using a word salad of half-assed smart-sounding terms that amounted to one giant non-sequitur.

    Asked by another Twitter user what his reasoning was for calling the coronavirus panic “dumb”, Musk responded by Tweeting:

    “Virality of C19 is overstated due to conflating diagnosis date with contraction date & over-extrapolating exponential growth, which is never what happens in reality. Keep extrapolating & virus will exceed mass of known universe!”

    We can’t believe we’re going to say this: but we’re rooting for Bill Gates on this one.

  • Universal Basic Income Is Not An Economic Savior
    Universal Basic Income Is Not An Economic Savior

    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 07/31/2020 – 20:05

    Authored by Lance Roberts via RealInvestmentAdvice.com,

    According to a new study by the left-leaning Roosevelt Institute, a universal basic income could permanently make U.S. economy trillions of dollars larger. While such socialistic policies sound great in theory, history, and data, show it isn’t the economic savior it is touted to be.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    What Is A Universal Basic Income (UBI)

    To understand why the theory of universal basic incomes (UBI) is heavily flawed, we need to understand what UBI is.

    Basic income, also called universal basic income (UBI), is a public governmental program for a periodic payment delivered to all citizens of a given population without a means test or work requirement. Basic income can be implemented nationally, regionally, or locally, and is an unconditional income sufficient to meet a person’s basic needs (i.e., at or above the poverty line).

    The idea of guaranteed income is not a new thing. According to Wikipedia:

    “The concept of a state-run basic income dates back to the early 16th century when Sir Thomas More’s “Utopia” depicted a society where every person receives a guaranteed income. 

    In the late 18th century, English radical Thomas Spence, and American revolutionary Thomas Paine, declared their support for a welfare system that guaranteed an assured basic income. Nineteenth-century debate on basic income was limited, but during the early part of the 20th century, a basic income called a “state bonus” was widely discussed. 

    In 1946, the United Kingdom implemented unconditional family allowances for every family’s second and subsequent children. In the 1960s and 1970s, the United States and Canada conducted several experiments with negative income taxation, a related welfare system. From the 1980s and onward, the debate in Europe took off more broadly, and since then, it has expanded to many countries around the world. “ 

    While the idea of a UBI sounds good in theory, as discussed previously, they fail to work in reality.

    UBI Won’t Increase Economic Growth

    “More money in people’s pockets will lead to stronger economic growth.” – J.M. Keynes

    Such is the underlying sentiment behind a universal basic income and its impact on economic growth. Unfortunately, it simply isn’t true.

    Let’s run a hypothetical example using GDP from 2007 to the present. (I am using estimates of -4.3% for 2020 GDP growth) In 2008, in response to the “Financial Crisis,” Congress passes a bill providing $1000/month ($12,000 annually) to 190 million families in the U.S. 

    The chart below shows the economy’s annual GDP growth trend assuming the entire UBI program shows up in economic growth. For those supporting programs like UBI, it certainly appears as if GDP is permanently elevated to a higher level. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    When you look at the annual rate of change in economic growth, which is how we measure GDP for economic purposes, a different picture emerges. In 2008, when the $12,000 arrives at households, GDP spikes, printing a 17% growth rate versus the actual 1.81% rate.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    However, beginning in 2009, the benefit disappears. The reason is that after UBI is injected into the system, the economy normalizes to the new level after the first year. Also, notice that GDP grows at a slightly slower rate as dollar changes to GDP at higher levels print a lower growth rate.

    UBI’s Dark Side

    Of course, the money to provide the $12,000 UBI benefit had to come from somewhere.

    According to the Center On Budget & Policy Priorities, in 2019, roughly 75% of every tax dollar went to non-productive spending. 

    “In the fiscal year 2019, the Federal Government spent $4.4 trillion, amounting to 21 percent of the nation’s gross domestic product (GDP). Of that $4.4 trillion, federal revenues financed only $3.5 trillion. The remaining $984 billion came from debt issuance. As the chart below shows, three major areas of spending make up most of the budget.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Think about that for a minute. In 2019, 75% of all expenditures went to social welfare and interest on the debt. Those payments required $3.3 Trillion of the $3.5 Trillion (or 95%) of the total revenue collected.

    That was BEFORE the shutdown of the economy due to COVID-19. Given the subsequent decline in economic activity occurring this year, those numbers become markedly worse. Given this bit of data, all universal basic income payments would have had to come solely from debt.

    The table below shows the increase in total Federal Debt adjusting for the annual UBI payment. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The chart below takes our hypothetical example and compares the impact of the additional debt on the Federal deficit from the implementation of UBI.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    While the “theoretical models” assume that UBI will create enough economic growth and prosperity to “offset” the increase in debt, 40-years of history suggest otherwise.

    UBI Won’t Increase Economic Growth

    As discussed previously, there is a high correlation between debts, deficits, and economic prosperity. 

    “The relevance of debt growth versus economic growth is all too evident, as shown below. Since 1980, the overall increase in debt has surged to levels that currently usurp the entirety of economic growth. The growth in debt continues to divert more tax dollars away from productive investments into the service of debt and social welfare.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    However, simply looking at Federal debt levels is misleading.

    It is the total debt that weighs on the economy.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Under the current economic situation, it currently requires nearly $4.00 of debt to create $1 of economic growth. However, if you added UBI into the equation, it would require roughly $5 per $1 of growth. (Unfortunately, at the current spending rate, the U.S. will be approaching the $5 mark by the end of 2020)

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    If you don’t understand the implications of debt on economic growth, let me rephrase the analysis for you.

    For instance, in the 30-years from 1952 to 1982, the economy ran at a surplus. That surplus fostered rising economic prosperity in the U.S. which averaged roughly 8%. 

    Since 1980, the economic deficit has continued to erode economic prosperity. As shown, there has been no organic growth without increases in debt. Due to the need to increase debt to fund it, UBI would only succeed in exacerbating the situation.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The UBI Test Has Already Failed

    The United States already has a semi-UBI plan. It is an effectively bankrupt system called “Social Security.” 

    The collapse in economic growth has resulted in a collapse in Federal Tax revenue needed to pay for the massive social welfare schemes in the U.S.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    It now requires more than of 100% of tax receipts just to meet the mandatory spending of social welfare and interest on the debt. In other words, we are now going into debt more just to provide social assistance.

    How bad is it?

    Social Security will be insolvent and unable to pay the full value of promised benefits by 2035. Social Security’s costs will exceed its income by 2020, according to a new report published Monday by the program’s trustees.

    At the end of 2018, Social Security was providing income to about 67 million Americans. About 47 million of them were over age 65, and the majority of the rest were disabled. If nothing changes, the Social Security Trust Fund will be fully depleted by 2035. If such occurs, the program will impose across-the-board cuts of 20 percent to all beneficiaries.”

    Getting Worse

    That report, dire in its warning already, was issued before the “Pandemic” and “economic shutdown.”

    Meanwhile, demographics are blowing up the basic premise of the funding of Social Security. There were 2.8 workers for every Social Security recipient in 2017. That’s down from 3.3 in 2007, and that’s way down from the 5.1 workers per beneficiary that existed in 1960.

    Furthermore, the two programs function mostly as a giant conveyor belt to transfer wealth from the young and relatively poor to the old and relatively rich. Such allows the average person (who now lives to be 78) more than a decade of taxpayer-funded retirement.

    Welfare now makes up the highest percentage of disposable personal incomes in history despite record low unemployment, rising wage growth, and the longest economic expansion in U.S. history.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    During the “Great Depression,” the economically devastated masses would form “breadlines.” Today, those “breadlines” form at the mailbox. Without government largesse, many individuals would be living on the street.

    The chart above shows all the government “welfare” programs and current levels to date. The black line represents the sum of the underlying sub-components. Since the onset of the “pandemic,”  both unemployment insurance and “other benefits” have surged by $3 trillion. Those increases are in excess of the continued increases in all other benefits, like social security, Medicaid, and Veterans’ benefits.

    Importantly, for the average person, these social benefits are critical to their survival. Government assistance now makes up ~38% of real disposable personal incomes. With more than 1/3rd of incomes dependent on Federal assistance, it should not be surprising the economy continues to struggle. Recycled tax dollars used for consumptive purposes, has virtually no impact on increasing economic activity.

    Conclusion

    In its essential framework, a universal basic income sounds excellent. Everyone has their basic needs covered. Then they can go out and produce and not worry about covering critical bills. In reality, the additional income is quickly absorbed into the economy as prices rise (inflation) to compensate for the extra spending. After the first year, the UBI has to be increased or no longer has any benefit. 

    Therein lies the trap with all socialistic programs.

    While UBI, along with free healthcare, education, childcare, etc., sounds great, they are NOT productive investments that have a higher return than the carrying cost of the debt. In actuality, history suggests these welfare supports have a negative multiplier effect in the economy.

    Most telling is the inability of the current economists, who maintain our monetary and fiscal policies, to realize the problem of trying to “cure a debt problem with more debt.”

    The Keynesian view that “more money in people’s pockets” will drive up consumer spending, with a boost to GDP being the result, has been wrong. It hasn’t happened in 40 years.

    We fear that these socialistic programs, which promises “free everything” with no consequences, instead delivers inflation, generates further income inequality, and ultimately higher social instability and populism. Such has been the result in every other country which has run such programs of unbridled debts and deficits.

    While UBI sounds excellent at the conversational level, so does “communism” and “socialism.” In practice, the outcomes have been vastly different than the theory.

    As Dr. Woody Brock aptly argues:

    “It is truly ‘American Gridlock’ as the real crisis lies between the choices of ‘austerity’ and continued government ‘largesse.’ One choice leads to long-term economic prosperity for all; the other doesn’t.”

    Take your pick. 

  • Egypt Receives Advanced Russian Fighter Jets Over US Lingering Sanctions Threat
    Egypt Receives Advanced Russian Fighter Jets Over US Lingering Sanctions Threat

    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 07/31/2020 – 19:45

    Ignoring the lingering threat of Washington sanctions, Egypt is moving forward with a purchase of large batch of Russian Su-35 “Flanker” jet fighters

    The first batch of Su-35’s are now said to en route to Cairo this week, after in 2019 Egypt signed an agreement to purchase more than 20 Su-35 fighter jets from the Kremlin in a $2 billion deal.

    The whole arrangement is awkward for the US defense establishment, given that it works so closely with the Egyptian military, and has done so for years going back to the Camp David Accords. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Via The Drive

    Last last year, soon after the controversial deal was inked, a US official announced that the “United States could impose sanctions on Egypt and block it from future military sales if it goes ahead with a purchase of Russian warplanes” — but now that the planes have reportedly already been shipped, it’ll be interesting to see if the threat is followed through upon.

    The news and analysis source Middle East Monitor previously offered the central rationale to Washington’s objections to its ally Egypt acquiring the aircraft: in addition to the obvious problem of the Kremlin’s growing influence in the region, the US has for decades honored its unofficial policy of ensuring that Israel keeps a “qualitative edge” over all potential rivals when it comes to defense technology. 

    The US has previously threatened other countries with sanctions under its Countering America’s Adversaries Through Sanctions Act (CAATSA) for purchases of Russian military equipment (Serbia being a recent example, related to rumors that it’s mulling S-400 anti-air acquirement).

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Cairo eyeing the advanced Russian fighter might be viewed as an especially insulting affront by the Trump administration especially given that as the second largest recipient of foreign aid historically (after Israel), Washington has provided billions in economic and military aid to Egypt over the past years, including its F-16 fighters.

  • When Corporate Power Is Your Real Government, Corporate Media Is State Media
    When Corporate Power Is Your Real Government, Corporate Media Is State Media

    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 07/31/2020 – 19:25

    Authored by Caitlin Johnstone via Medium.com,

    The New York Times published an astonishingly horrible article the other day titled “Latin America Is Facing a ‘Decline of Democracy’ Under the Pandemic” accusing governments like Venezuela and Nicaragua of exploiting Covid-19 to quash opposition and oppress democracy.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The article sources its jarringly propagandistic claims in multiple US government-funded narrative management operations like the Wilson Center and the National Endowment for Democracy-sponsored Freedom House, the extensively plutocrat-funded Carnegie Endowment for International Peace, and the United States Naval Academy.

    The crown jewel of this piece of State Department stenography reads as follows:

    “Adding to these challenges, democracy in Latin America has also lost a champion in the United States, which had played an important role in promoting democracy after the end of the Cold War by financing good governance programs and calling out authoritarian abuses.”

    Whoa, nelly.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The fact that America’s most widely regarded newspaper feels perfectly comfortable making such a spectacularly in-your-face lie on behalf of the US government tells you everything you need to know about what the mass media in America really are and what they do.

    The United States has never at any time been a champion of democracy in Latin America, before or since the Cold War. It has intervened hundreds of times in the continent’s affairs throughout history with everything from murderous corporate colonialism to deadly CIA regime change operations to overt military invasions. It is currently trying to orchestrate a coup in Venezuela after failing to stage one during the Bush administration, it’s pushing regime change in Nicaragua, and The New York Times itself admitted this year that it was wrong to promote the false US government narrative of electoral shenanigans in Bolivia’s presidential race last year, a narrative which facilitated a bloody fascist coup.

    This is propaganda. There is no other word for it. And yet the only time western politicians and news reporters use that word is to talk about nations like Russia and China.

    Why is propaganda used in an ostensibly free democracy with an ostensibly free media? Why are its news media outlets so consistently in alignment with every foreign policy objective of US government agencies no matter how destructive and inexcusable? If the media and the government are two separate institutions, why do they so consistently function as though they are not separate?

    Well, that’s easy. It’s because they aren’t separate. The only thing keeping this from being seen is the fact that America’s real government isn’t located where people think it is.

    In a corporatist system of government, where no hard lines are drawn between corporate/financial power and state power, corporate media is state media. Since bribery is legal in the US political system in the form of corporate lobbying and campaign donations, America’s elected government is controlled by wealthy elites who have money to burn and who benefit from maintaining a specific status quo arrangement.

    The fact that this same plutocratic class also owns America’s media, which is now so consolidated that it’s almost entirely run by just six corporations, means that the people who run the government also run the media. This allows America’s true rulers to set up a system which promotes narratives that are favorable to their desired status quo.

    Which means that the US has state propaganda. They just don’t call it that themselves.

    Strip away the phony two-handed sock puppet show of US electoral politics and look at how power actually moves in that country, and you just see one more tyrannical regime which propagandizes its citizens, brutally cracks down on protestersdeliberately keeps its populace impoverished so they don’t get powerful enough to change things, and attacks any nation which dares to disobey its dictates.

    Beneath the thin layer of narrative overlay about freedom and democracy, the US is just one more despotic, bloodthirsty empire. It’s no better than any of the other despotic, bloodthirsty empires throughout history. It just has good PR.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Plutocrats not only exert control over America’s media and politics, they also form alliances with the secretive government agencies whose operators remain amid the comings and goings of the official elected government. We see examples of this in the way new money tech plutocrats like Jeff BezosPeter Thiel and Pierre Omidyar have direct relationships with the CIA and its proxies.

    We also see it in the sexual blackmail operation which was facilitated by the late Jeffrey Epstein in connection with billionaire Leslie Wexner and Israeli intelligence, along with potentially the FBI and/or other US intelligence agencies. Today the internet is abuzz as newly unsealed court documents relating to Epstein and his co-conspirator Ghislaine Maxwell reveal witness testimony regarding underage sex trafficking, with such high-profile names appearing in the documents as Alan DershowitzBill Clinton, and Prince Andrew.

    The Overton window of acceptable political discourse has been shrunk into such a narrow spectrum of debate that talking about even well-known and extensively documented facts involving the real nature of America’s government and media will get you laughingly dismissed as a conspiracy theorist, which is itself a symptom of tight narrative control by a ruling class which much prefers Americans thinking they live in a free democracy whose government they control with their votes.

    In the old days you used to be able to tell who your rulers were because they’d sit on thrones and wear golden crowns and make you bow before them. Human consciousness eventually evolved beyond the acceptability of such brazen indignities, so it became necessary for rulers to take on more of a background role while the citizenry clap and cheer for the illusory puppet show of electoral politics.

    But the kings are still among us, just as cruel and tyrannical as ever. They’ve just figured out how to mask their tyranny behind the facade of freedom.

    But 2020 has been a year of revelations, a trend which seems likely to continue accelerating. Truth cannot stay hidden forever.

    * * *

    Thanks for reading! The best way to get around the internet censors and make sure you see the stuff I publish is to subscribe to the mailing list for my website, which will get you an email notification for everything I publish. My work is entirely reader-supported, so if you enjoyed this piece please consider sharing it around, liking me on Facebook, following my antics on Twitter, throwing some money into my tip jar on Patreon or Paypal, purchasing some of my sweet merchandise, buying my books Rogue Nation: Psychonautical Adventures With Caitlin Johnstone and Woke: A Field Guide for Utopia Preppers. For more info on who I am, where I stand, and what I’m trying to do with this platform, click here. Everyone, racist platforms excluded, has my permission to republish, use or translate any part of this work (or anything else I’ve written) in any way they like free of charge.

    Bitcoin donations:1Ac7PCQXoQoLA9Sh8fhAgiU3PHA2EX5Zm2

  • Seattle Moves To Replace 'Racist' Police With 'Trauma-Informed, Gender-Affirming, Anti-Racist' Organizations
    Seattle Moves To Replace ‘Racist’ Police With ‘Trauma-Informed, Gender-Affirming, Anti-Racist’ Organizations

    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 07/31/2020 – 19:05

    The Seattle City Council advanced legislation on Friday which would replace the ‘racist institution of policing’ with a civilian-led activities and organizations under a new ‘Department of Community Safety & Violence Prevention.’

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The bill justifies the move by pointing to the prevalence of ‘white supremacy culture’ and the Seattle PD’s role in ‘perpetuating racism and violence.’

    “WHEREAS, the Council is committed to confronting the structural and institutional racism as a fundamental step towards addressing the racist institution of policing,”

    Whereas, these protests forced many nationwide and in Seattle to confront the racism that has been plaguing the Black community for centuries and spread to other communities of color, the harmful impacts of white supremacy culture, and the Seattle Police Department’s (SPD) role in perpetuating racism and violence.

    The organizations replacing the SPD will need to demonstrate several characteristics, including:

    • Culturally-relevant expertise rooted in community connections
    • Well versed in de-escalation skills and mental health support
    • Trauma-informed, gender-affirming, anti-racist praxis
    • Connected to resources like housing, food security, and other basic needs

    Read the proposed bill here

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.jshttps://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  • Daily Briefing – July 31, 2020
    Daily Briefing – July 31, 2020


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 07/31/2020 – 18:55

    Senior editor Ash Bennington hosts Real Vision favorite Mike Green of Logica Capital Advisors. Mike Green gives a strategic update on the markets, and, through the lens of his renowned critique of passive investing, analyzes flow data on ETFs and mutual funds to conclude that the markets could be due for some turmoil in the coming months. Green and Bennington also discuss today’s interview with Green and Rob Arnott, one of the world’s leading quantitative investors. Green also shares his views on “volmaggedon” and the similarities between short-vol and bonds. In the intro, Jack reviews recent FAANG earnings and gives a preview of Jason Buck’s three-part “Ahead of the Curve,” a deep-dive into volatility featuring interviews with Chris Cole, Jerry Haworth, and Bastian Bolesta.

  • The World's Largest Nuclear Fusion Reactor Is Finally Being Built
    The World’s Largest Nuclear Fusion Reactor Is Finally Being Built

    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 07/31/2020 – 18:45

    Authored by Alex Kimani via OilPrice.com,

    What do The Dark Knight Rises, Back to the Future, Oblivion, and Interstellar have in common

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    They are sci-fi megahits that showcase a technology that scientists consider the Holy Grail of Energy: Nuclear fusion.

    Since the 1950s, moviegoers, scientists, and clean-energy buffs everywhere have obsessed about the vast possibilities of harnessing the almost inexhaustible supply of energy locked within atoms by creating our own miniature suns. Unfortunately, practical nuclear fusion technology has remained just that–a dream and a far-off mirage.

    That is, until now. 

    After 35 years of painstaking preparation and countless delays, scientists have finally broken ground by kicking off the five-year assembly phase of the massive International Thermonuclear Experimental Reactor (ITER), the world’s largest fusion reactor, in Saint-Paul-les-Durance, France.

    Funded by six nations, including the US, Russia, China, India, Japan, and South Korea, ITER will be the world’s largest tokamak fusion device with an estimated cost of ~$24 billion and capable of generating about 500 MW of thermal fusion energy as early as 2025. 

    Practical Fusion Power

    Initially, the United States and the former Soviet Union were the first countries to conduct fusion research due to its potential for the development of atomic weapons. Consequently, fusion technology remained classified until the 1958 Atoms for Peace conference in Geneva. Fusion research became ‘Big Science’ in the 1970s thanks to a breakthrough at the Soviet tokamak.

    However, it soon became clear that practical nuclear fusion would only make the desired progress through international cooperation due to high costs and the complexity of the devices involved.

    Nuclear fusion basically involves smashing together hydrogen atoms hard enough to form helium and release energy in the E=MC2 mass-energy equivalence. Fusion is the process through which all stars, from red dwarfs through the Sun to the most massive supergiants, generate vast amounts of energy in their cores by rising to temperatures of 4,000,000 K or higher. 

    Nuclear fusion generates four times as much energy from the same mass of fuel as nuclear fission, a technology that involves splitting atoms that is currently employed in the world’s nuclear reactors. Massive gravitational forces in the Sun and stars create the right conditions for fusion to proceed at considerably lower temperatures; however, earth’s much smaller mass (1/330,000th of the Sun’s mass) and smaller gravity means that much higher temperatures in the order of hundreds of millions of Kelvin are required to kickstart the process of nuclear fusion and sustain it.

    Unfortunately, every fusion experiment so far has been energy negative, taking in more energy than it generates.

    ITER is a nuclear power plant designed to demonstrate that carbon-free, energy-positive fusion energy can become a commercial reality. ITER plans to use tokamak reactors to confine a deuterium-tritium plasma magnetically. 

    The big fundamental challenge here is for ITER to achieve a rate of heat emitted by a fusion plasma higher than the rate of energy injected into the plasma. It is only natural to wonder what is so different this time around that makes researchers confident that ITER will not be just another expensive experiment that will end up in nuclear fusion’s trash heap.

    In a past article, we reported that ITER scientists have successfully developed a new superconducting material–essentially a steel tape coated with yttrium-barium-copper oxide, or YBCO, which allows them to build smaller and more powerful magnets. This lowers the energy required to get the fusion reaction off the ground.

    According to Fusion for Energy–the EU’s joint undertaking for ITER–18 niobium-tin superconducting magnets, aka toroidal field coils, will be used to contain the 150 million degrees celsius plasma. The powerful magnets will generate a powerful magnetic field equal to 11.8 Tesla, or a million times stronger than the earth’s magnetic field. Nearly 3,000 tonnes of these superconducting magnets will be connected by 200km of superconducting cables and kept at -269C by the world’s largest cryostat manufactured in India.

    Europe will manufacture ten of the toroidal field coils with Japan manufacturing nine. 

    The 23,000-ton tokamak is designed to produce 500 MW of fusion power from 50 MW of input heating power, thus making it energy positive.

    Cleaner Than Fission?

    The world’s 440 nuclear fission reactors generate about 10% of global electricity needs. A similar amount of fusion reactors could theoretically replace all coal-powered power plants, which currently supply nearly 40% of the world’s electricity.

    But other than their absurd power capabilities, fusion reactors have been touted as a perfect energy source since they cannot melt down and produce much less radioactive waste unlike fission reactors, which have in the past proven catastrophic from uncontrolled chain reactions.

    But here’s the irony of it all: Fission nuclear reactors remain the only reliable source of tritium for use in fusion reactors.

    The deuterium-tritium reaction is favored by fusion developers over deuterium-deuterium mainly because its reactivity is 20x  higher than a deuterium-deuterium fueled reaction, and requires a temperature only a third of the temperature required by deuterium-only fusion. Unlike deuterium, which is readily available in ordinary water, tritium is rare in nature, mainly because this hydrogen isotope has a half-life of only 12.3 years.

    If successful, ITER will become the world’s first source of electrical power that does not exploit a naturally occurring fuel.

    It’s going to be interesting to see whether ITER and subsequent fusion power plants will incur the same ignominy that conventional nuclear energy has struggled to shake off.

  • American Citizen Gunned Down In Pakistan Courtroom During 'Blasphemy' Trial
    American Citizen Gunned Down In Pakistan Courtroom During ‘Blasphemy’ Trial

    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 07/31/2020 – 18:30

    An American citizen who was being tried in a Pakistani court on charges of blasphemy has been gunned down and murdered in open court by a young man seeking ‘vengeance’ over profaning the name of Muhammad.

    Local media describes the shooting happened in a crowded courtroom Wednesday. US national Tahir Ahmed Naseem, 47, had been in Pakistani custody since 2018, charged under the country’s strict blasphemy laws. Specially he stood accused of “defiling the sacred name of the Holy Prophet Muhammad” after allegedly claiming to he was a messiah sent by God in social media messages, according to Reuters.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Protests in Pakistan by hardline Islamists, via Reuters.

    Naseem was shot six times by a young man who smuggled a gun into the court, after protests in the region led by hardline Islamists over the case had already been raging. Naseem died at the scene.

    “As Naseem’s arraignment began before the judge, a young man in the room pulled out a handgun and shot him in the head, officials and witnesses said. The young man was arrested on the spot,” Reuters reports.

    The whole incident, as well as clearly lax security, has outraged the US embassy. “We urge Pakistan to take immediate action and pursue reforms that will prevent such a shameful tragedy from happening again,” the US State Department said in a tweet.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The US State Department had also said officials were “shocked, saddened, and outraged” by Naseem’s death. Per CNN:

    The statement said that Naseem had been “lured to Pakistan from his home in Illinois by individuals who then used Pakistan’s blasphemy laws to entrap him.”

    Though we wonder why more pressure and action apparently wasn’t applied even before the bloody courtroom killing.

    Latif Afridi of Peshawar High Court Bar Association subsequently told Reuters of the gunman: “The young man who shot him had no remorse, and said he saw the Prophet Muhammad in a dream the night before.”

    And Afridi further said the killer likely had inside help in getting the gun into the court, despite no less than three security checkpoints:

    “It is likely someone who can go without being checked, perhaps a police officer or a lawyer, handed the shooter the gun after he entered,” he said.

    Naseem had been arrested in Peshawar when it appears a student at an Islamic school reported him for his messages which police said constituted “blasphemy”.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Tahir Ahmad Naseem

    Over the past three decades it’s estimated that close to 100 people have been killed in mob and other extra-judicial violence in Pakistan related to accusations of anti-Islamic blasphemy. Christians have especially been targeted by what are often the flimsiest of accusations, yet enough to gem up popular anger. 

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 31st July 2020

  • 'Momentary Lapse Of Honesty': Esper Said NATO Purpose Is To "Avoid Peace In Europe"
    ‘Momentary Lapse Of Honesty’: Esper Said NATO Purpose Is To “Avoid Peace In Europe”

    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 07/31/2020 – 02:45

    Was this a Freudian slip by the defense secretary, or is he going for Trump-style bluntness of naked and brutal honesty no matter how non-PC?

    During Wednesday’s press conference announcing the controversial Trump-ordered Pentagon plan to withdraw 12,000 troops from Germany, Mark Esper said the “importance” of NATO” lies in part with its mission to “avoid peace in Europe”

    Given the slip, Russian media was fast to pick up on it. RT called it “a momentary lapse of honesty”.

    “I’ve said that very publicly, I’ve said that very privately to my counterparts as well – about the importance of NATO, any alliance, sharing the burden so we can all deter Russia and… avoid peace in Europe,” Esper said

    It came while the Pentagon chief chastised Germany for being the “wealthiest country in Europe” but refusing to shoulder its fair share of defense spending, which the Trump administration has long urged Berlin must boost.

    About half the withdrawn troops are expected to return to the states, while the other will be ‘repositioned’ in places in Europe.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    US Army Europe’s 41st Field Artillery Brigade at the military training area in Grafenwoehr, southern Germany. AFP via Getty Images.

    Meanwhile Russian media has said the troops will deploy near borders with Russia, such as the Baltic states or Poland.

    Sputnik, for example, interpreted Esper’s remarks as confirming that “the US troops would begin leaving Germany in just a few weeks and would then be repositioned to Belgium and Italy amid the Pentagon’s plans to deploy some of them closer to Russia’s borders,” according to its commentary.

  • A Post-Brexit Agrochemical Apocalypse For The UK?
    A Post-Brexit Agrochemical Apocalypse For The UK?

    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 07/31/2020 – 02:00

    Authored by Colin Todhunter via Off-Guardian.org,

    The British government, regulators and global agrochemical corporations are colluding with each other and are thus engaging in criminal behaviour. That’s the message put forward in a new report written by environmentalist Dr Rosemary Mason and sent to the UK Environment Agency. It follows her January 2019 open letter to Werner Baumann, CEO of Bayer CropScience, where she made it clear to him that she considers Bayer CropScience and Monsanto criminal corporations.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Her letter to Baumann outlined a cocktail of corporate duplicity, cover-ups and criminality which the public and the environment are paying the price for, not least in terms of the effects of glyphosate. Later in 2019, Mason wrote to Bayer Crop Science shareholders, appealing to them to put human health and nature ahead of profit and to stop funding Bayer.

    Mason outlined with supporting evidence how the gradual onset of the global extinction of many species is largely the result of chemical-intensive industrial agriculture. She argued that Monsanto’s (now Bayer) glyphosate-based Roundup herbicide and Bayer’s clothianidin are largely responsible for the destruction of the Great Barrier Reef and that the use of glyphosate and neonicotinoid insecticides are wiping out wildlife species across the globe.

    In February 2020, Mason wrote the report ‘Bayer Crop Science rules Britain after Brexit – the public and the press are being poisoned by pesticides’. She noted that PM Boris Johnson plans to do a trade deal with the US that could see the gutting of food and environment standards. In a speech setting out his goals for trade after Brexit, Johnson talked up the prospect of an agreement with Washington and downplayed the need for one with Brussels – if the EU insists the UK must stick to its regulatory regime. In other words, he wants to ditch EU regulations.

    Mason pondered just who could be pulling Johnson’s strings. A big clue came in February 2019 at a Brexit meeting on the UK chemicals sector where UK regulators and senior officials from government departments listened to the priorities of Bayer Crop Science. During the meeting (Westminster Energy, Environment & Transport Forum Keynote Seminar: Priorities for UK chemicals sector – challenges, opportunities and the future for regulation post-Brexit), Janet Williams, head of regulatory science at Bayer Crop Science Division, made the priorities for agricultural chemical manufacturers known.

    Dave Bench was also a speaker. Bench is a senior scientist at the UK Chemicals, Health and Safety Executive and director of the agency’s EU exit plan and has previously stated that the regulatory system for pesticides is robust and balances the risks of pesticides against the benefits to society.

    In an open letter to Bench, Mason responded:

    That statement is rubbish. It is for the benefit of the agrochemical industry. The industry (for it is the industry that does the testing, on behalf of regulators) only tests one pesticide at a time, whereas farmers spray a cocktail of pesticides, including over children and babies, without warning.”

    It seems that post-Brexit the UK could authorise the continued use of glyphosate. Of course, with a US trade deal in the pipeline, there are major concerns about glyphosate-resistant GMOs and the lowering of food standards across the board.

    Mason says that glyphosate causes epigenetic changes in humans and animals: diseases skip a generation. Washington State University researchers found a variety of diseases and other health problems in the second- and third-generation offspring of rats exposed to glyphosate. In the first study of its kind, the researchers saw descendants of exposed rats developing prostate, kidney and ovarian diseases, obesity and birth abnormalities.

    Glyphosate has been the subject of numerous studies about its health effects. Robert F Kennedy Jr, one of the attorney’s fighting Bayer (which has bought Monsanto) in the US courts, has explained that for four decades Monsanto manoeuvred to conceal Roundup’s carcinogenicity by capturing regulatory agencies, corrupting public officials, bribing scientists and engaging in scientific fraud to delay its day of reckoning.

    Kennedy says there is also cascading scientific evidence linking glyphosate to a constellation of other injuries that have become prevalent since its introduction, including obesity, depression, Alzheimer’s, ADHD, autism, multiple sclerosis, Parkinson’s, kidney disease, inflammatory bowel disease, brain, breast and prostate cancer, miscarriage, birth defects and declining sperm counts.

    In her new document sent to the UK Environment Agency, Mason argues there is criminal collusion between the Department for Environment and Rural Affairs (Defra), the Chemicals Regulation Division and Bayer over Brexit.

    She also claims the National Farmers Union has been lying about how much pesticides farmers use and have ignored the side effects of chlorpyrifos, chlorothalonil, glyphosate and neonicotinoids. The NFU says farmers couldn’t do without these inputs, even though they destroy human health and the environment.

    Of course, farmers can and do go without using these chemicals. And the shift away from chemical-intensive agriculture is perfectly feasible. In a recent article on the AgWeb site, for instance, US farmer Adam Chappell describes how he made the shift on his 8,000-acre farm. Chappell was not some dyed-in-the-wool organic evangelist. He made the shift for financial and practical reasons and is glad he did. The article states:

    He was on the brink of bankruptcy and facing a go broke or go green proposition. Drowning in a whirlpool of input costs, Chappell cut bait from conventional agriculture and dove headfirst into a bootstrap version of innovative farming. Roughly 10 years later, his operation is transformed, and the 41-year-old grower doesn’t mince words: It was all about the money.”

    Surely there is a lesson there for UK farmers who in 2016 used glyphosate on 2,634,573 ha of cropland. It is not just their bottom line that could improve but the health of the nation. Mason says that five peer-reviewed animal studies from the US and Argentina released in July 2020 have focused minds on the infertility crisis being caused by glyphosate-based herbicides.

    Researchers at The National University of Litoral in Sante Fe, Argentina, have published three concerning peer-reviewed papers including two studies on ewes and rats and one review. In one study, researchers concluded that glyphosate and glyphosate-based herbicides are endocrine disruptors. They also stated that glyphosate-based herbicides alter reproductive outcomes in females.

    But such is the British government’s willingness to protect pesticide companies that it is handing agrochemical giants BASF and Bayer enormous pay-outs of Covid-19 support cash. The announcement came just weeks after Bayer shareholders voted to pay £2.75 billion in dividends. The fact that Bayer then went on to receive £600 million from the government speaks volumes of where the government’s priorities lie.

    According to Mason, the new Agriculture Bill provides a real opportunity for the UK to adopt a paradigm shift which embraces non-chemical farming policy. However, Defra has stated that after Brexit Roundup Ready GA21 glyphosate tolerant crops could be introduced.

    It is also concerning that a post-Brexit funding gap could further undermine the impartiality of university research. Mason refers to Greenpeace, which notes that Bayer and Syngenta, both sell neonicotinoid insecticides linked to harmful effects on bees, gave a combined total of £16.1m to 70 British universities over five years to fund a range of research. Such private funding could create a conflict of interest for academics and after Brexit a potential shortage of public money for science could force universities to seek more finance from the private sector.

    Neonicotinoids were once thought to have little or no negative effects on the environment because they are used in low doses and as a seed coating, rather than being sprayed. But evidence has been mounting that the chemicals harm bees – important pollinators of food crops. As a result, neonicotinoids have been banned by the EU, although they can still be used under license.

    According to Bayer’s website, academics who reviewed 15 years of research found “no adverse effects to bee colonies were ever observed in field studies”. Between 2011 and 2016, the figures obtained from the 70 universities – about half the total in the UK – show Bayer gave £9m to fund research, including more than £345,000 on plant sciences. Syngenta spent nearly £7.1m, including just under £2.3m on plant sciences and stated that many years of independent monitoring prove that when used properly neonicotinoids do not damage the health of bee populations.

    However, in 2016, Ben Stewart of Greenpeace UK’s Brexit response team said that the decline in bee populations is a major environmental and food security concern – it’s causes need to be properly investigated.

    He added:

    But for this research to command public confidence, it needs to be independent and impartial, which is why public funding is so crucial. You wouldn’t want lung cancer studies to be heavily reliant on funds from tobacco firms, nor research on pesticides to be dependent on the companies making them.”

    Stewart concluded:

    As Brexit threatens to cut off vital public funds for this scientific field, our universities need a cast-iron guarantee from our government that EU money will not be replaced by corporate cash.”

    But Mason notes that the government long ago showed its true colours by refusing to legislate on the EU Directive (2009/128/EC) on the Sustainable Use of Pesticides. The government merely stated that current statutory and voluntary controls related to pesticides and the protection of water, if followed, afford a high degree of protection and it would primarily seek to work with the pesticides industry to enhance voluntary measures.

    Mason first questioned the government on this in January 2011. In an open letter to the Chemical Regulation Directorate. The government claimed that no compelling evidence was provided to justify further extending existing regulations and voluntary controls.

    Lord Henley, the Under-Secretary of State for Defra, expanded further:

    “By making a small number of changes to our existing approach we can continue to help feed a growing global population with high-quality food that’s affordable – while minimising the risks of using pesticides.”

    In her numerous reports and open letters to officials, Mason has shown that far from having ‘high-quality food’, there is an ongoing public health crisis due to the pesticides being used.

    She responded to Henley by stating:

    …instead of strengthening the legislation, the responses of the UK government and the CRD have considerably weakened it. In the case of aerial spraying, you have opted for derogation.”

    Mason says that, recently, the day that Monsanto lost its appeal against Dewayne Lee Johnson the sprayers came around the Marina in Cardiff breaking all the rules that the EU had set for Roundup.

    We can only wonder what could lie in store for the British public if a trade deal is done with the US. Despite the Conservative government pledging that it would not compromise on the UK’s food and environment standards, it now proposes that chlorine-washed chicken, beef treated with growth hormones, pork from animals treated with ractopamine and many other toxic foods produced in the US will be allowed into the UK. All for the bottom line of US agribusiness corporations.

    It is also worth mentioning at this point that there are around 2,000 untested chemicals in packaged foods in the US.

    Ultimately, the situation comes down to a concentration of power played out within an interlocking directorate of state-corporate interests – in this case, global agrochemical conglomerates and the British government – and above the heads of ordinary people. It is clear, that these institutions value the health of powerful corporations at the expense of the health of the population and the state of the environment.

  • The Biggest Fraud Ever, Part 2: The Vaccine Swindle
    The Biggest Fraud Ever, Part 2: The Vaccine Swindle

    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 07/31/2020 – 00:00

    Authored by Barry Norris via Argonaut Capital,

    Read Part 1 here…

    It was originally assumed that only those who had previously been infected by the virus and developed an antibody response had any immunity, hence the initial focus on testing for the presence of these antibodies as well as infection. However, studies of antibodies in formerly infected patients demonstrated accuracy issues which subsequently could be explained instead by the antibodies’ rapid decay in recovering patients.  The often disappointingly low levels of antibodies in population samples is often used as evidence that herd immunity is not a realistic goal without a vaccine.

    This is not correct.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    At the end of May there was a significant breakthrough in understanding of COVID antibodies which was not widely reported: a Swiss study from Zurich led by Professor Onur Boyman demonstrated that a large proportion of the population had a natural immunity through existing antibodies on the mucous membrane (IgA) or cellular immunity (T cells), likely to have been acquired through previous exposure to coronaviruses such as influenza or the common cold (the absence of exposure to previous coronavirus is now thought to explain the opposite effect in 1918).

    The study found that that the presence of (IgG and IgM) antibodies generated on infection which tests had previously focused on, were NOT in fact required to defeat the virus and that existing (IgA and T cell) antibodies that gave a natural immunity. Moreover, the population with this natural immunity was demonstrated to be five times greater than those with the IgG and IgM antibodies on which tests had hitherto focused. If this could be substantiated, then the population already exposed to COVID would also be five times greater than previously assumed. In other words, if a population sample showed 10% had IgG and IgM antibodies (which might be subject to decay) then it was likely that at least half of the population had already been exposed to COVID.

    It followed that antibody studies that measured only IgG and IgM that were now predicting population-based mortality risk of 0.1% to 0.5% (lower than the 1% in the elderly population aboard the Diamond Princess) could be even further reduced by a factor of five to 0.02% to 0.1% and the level of symptomatic exposure from 20% to below 5% (consistent with the flu season ironically predicted by Fauci in March). Not only would this mean a further similar reduction in the estimated true mortality rate but it meant that there were far fewer people in the population who had never had exposure to the virus, so a far lower number who could potentially catch the virus in the future.

    In short, the infamous herd immunity was much closer than previously realised.

    Fig 7. Sweden’s curve flattens without lockdown

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    This explained why, by July, the virus had all but disappeared in populations like Sweden, New York (Fig. 7) and Wuhan (which reportedly tested its entire population of 11 million and found only 300 cases, all of which were asymptomatic) which were significantly affected by a “first wave”: if the ratio of those with IgA and T cell antibodies to IgG and IgM antibodies across population was confirmed at a factor of five then if 20% of the population had traditional IgG and IgM antibodies (such as New York with 21% and London with 17%) then the virus died out because there was simply no one left for it to infect. It followed that the virus could only survive in population samples where testing showed the presence of IgG and IgM antibodies was below 20% (and allowing for their decay probably well below).

    Nobel Prize winning biological scientist Michael Levitt had already come to the same conclusion based on a different approach: he predicted that the virus would “burn out” when it had infected 15-20% of the population though based on a pattern predicted by the “Gompertz curve” which indicated that the number of deaths after the peak is roughly double those from before resulting in Levitt accurately predicting the number of Chinese and Swedish deaths, months in advance. Levitt has recently bravely predicted that US COVID will “be done in 4 weeks [25 Aug] with a total reported death below 170,000”, compared to 149,000 today.

    Boyman’s theory on “IgA and T Cell immunity” explained the accuracy of Levitt’s “Gompertz curve” predictions and this was now being backed up by the empirical evidence which showed that the populations which were hit hardest with high initial rates of infection and mortality, were the ones where the virus had almost disappeared.  

    Almost none of this was reported by a media which choose instead to attach the misnomer “second wave” to outbreaks of COVID infection in populations which had not yet experienced any meaningful “first wave”: the Sunbelt states in the US, Australia, Hong Kong, Japan. The irony was that the vulnerability of populations which had not yet seen meaningful infection outbreaks and therefore the fallacy of lockdown had already been predicted by Levitt and Giesecke. It was also logical that population groups where IgG and IgM antibodies were still significantly below 20% would continue to see infections.

    COVID had become particularly political in the US. Despite the anomalously poor Democratic New York and New Jersey records on COVID mortality (Fig. 6), there was  hysterical reporting of rising infections, from very low levels, across Republican states (Florida, Texas and Arizona) which had largely avoided severe lockdown restrictions.

    Fig 6. The Swedish Anomaly?

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The same rising trend could also be observed in Democratic California which had been subject to lockdown but was largely avoided in Republican Georgia which was notable in its lockdown defiance (Fig. 10). The suspicion remains that infections will continue to rise irrespective of lockdown until populations have reached herd immunity at which point the virus will largely disappear. The anomalously high death rates of New York and New Jersey could be explained by their being affected at a much earlier stage before better understanding of hospital treatment and curtailment of infection in care homes . As hard as the lockdown fanatics looked, there was no correlation of infections or mortality to lockdown policy.

    Fig 10. Analysis of US states and coronavirus

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    It was a clear misnomer to label rising reported infections in the US sun belt as a “second wave” if these states had never suffered from a “first wave” and rises in infection rate were a predominantly caused by more widespread testing of mostly younger people testing positive for COVID with no symptoms. It must also be borne in mind that “case numbers” are simply people reported as testing positive for COVID, almost entirely without symptoms, with no commensurate leap in hospitalisations or mortality, which has been conveniently ignored as not fitting the narrative. This also led to doubts about whether test results were being accurately reported with reports that some clinics were not reporting negative test results and others reporting cases as simply “probable infections” with individuals having some of the symptoms of COVID but not having been tested.

    We must also note that although infections in Arizona, Florida and Texas have seen a similar spike to that witnessed in New York, the mortality remains mercifully lower to a substantial degree (90%) (Fig. 11) which can only be explained by rising testing of a younger population median (since the hospitalisation rate is also lower), better hospital treatment and an improved care home policy (at which New York and New Jersey were anomalously poor). Although we should clearly expect mortality rates to rise in the sun-belt states from very low levels, it is likely that overall mortality remains well below New York levels and beings to taper off when infections begin to peak (which according to Levitt is still a few weeks away).

    Fig 11. COVID “first wave” infection curve of AZ/FL/TX similar to New York but mortality 90% below

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    We should also expect the mortality rate to reduce further as hospital treatment has evolved. We now know that invasive use of ventilators in fact caused COVID deaths which was particularly unfortunate given the initial scandalous news reports on their initial shortage and in the US questionable financial incentives for nursing staff to use ventilators. Doctors have also realised that the specific cause of death in many cases is pulmonary embolism, which can be treated though cheap and well-established blood-thinning medication. Several studies have also shown early intervention with the use of zinc and malaria drug hydroxychloroquine in combination has an immediate significantly reduced hospitalisation rate, of up to 80% and mortality by 50%. There is a great irony that the mortality rate could be reduced to almost zero by proven inexpensive drug combination, though this is not necessarily in the interests of the pharmaceutical industry which would prefer there to be a need for costly new drugs and vaccines.

    Yet inexplicably we still hear the daily groupthink catechism that the only “long-term solution” to beating COVID is a vaccine, often without any understanding of the historic limitations of vaccines particularly in the immunisation against coronaviruses (there is still no vaccine against the common cold and vaccines against influenza are patchy in their effectiveness).

    A significant obstacle to a successful vaccine is the rapid degradation of IgG and IgM COVID antibodies meaning that even a successful  vaccine might not give any benefit for longer than a few weeks. As the CEO of world leading testing company Roche Diagnostics recently commented:

    “What appears to happen is that people do lose antibodies over time. And that of course poses the question, will vaccines actually work if you lose antibodies”.

    Reports of successful antibody responses amongst healthy adults in vaccine trials should be viewed with more scepticism. It is also almost certain that any antibody response would be more difficult in population samples with impaired immune systems that are most at risk from COVID. Even an efficacious vaccine might have to be ramped in dosage that would be intolerable to those most likely to benefit from vaccination.  Leading Swiss epidemiologist Pietro Vernazza has demonstrated that the high-risk group is least likely to respond to the vaccine since their immune system is already impaired.  Whilst it is possible for vaccine trials to demonstrate antibody responses, whether these will have any practical lasting benefits in reducing COVID mortality risk which are tolerable for the population group most at risk from COVID is unlikely.

    Vaccines hastily developed, rushed to market without proper trials by panicked governments ready to throw money at any promising trial candidate, creates a clear moral hazard for pharmaceutical companies and a public healthcare risk which might rival the virus itself.  We remain sceptical of biotech companies raising equity on tricked up trials, only never to deliver medication that has any practical application, or insiders dumping stock after supposedly promising “game changing” data, or even worse mandatory vaccination of a population on the basis of an erroneous assumption that herd immunity hasn’t already been reached, with the potential for dangerous and unnecessary side-effects in population groups who would otherwise (if they had not already been exposed to COVID) have been asymptomatic.

    There is a notable discrepancy between binary expectations that a vaccine will solve COVID and the definition of success for those involved in developing a vaccine. According to Sarah Gilbert, who leads the Oxford Astrazeneca experimental vaccine:

    “We need a vaccine with a high level of efficacy against disease, which also has a significant impact on virus transmission. It doesn’t need to cure you… We want a vaccine to stop people from going to hospital and dying. If you can do that, I think people will be pretty happy”

    In other words, Gilbert’s definition of “success” was mitigation rather than cure, which better hospital treatment is already achieving anyway.

    There is a more fundamental question of whether a vaccination program for the entire population is at all desirable, given that most of the population has a natural immunity, only a small cohort develops symptoms, an even smaller cohort at risk of hospitalisation and the best estimate of mortality risk from COVID now almost statistically insignificant. We are probably already at the stage in terms of hospital treatment whereby no one who does not already have existing comorbidities should die from COVID. If any vaccine does not stop transmission and comes with side-effects which may be dangerous (and could potentially cause a mortality risk where one was previously absent, such as the potential neurological damage caused to children from the vaccinations against “swine flu” a decade ago) it has to be asked whether the exclusive promotion of the vaccine solution by the pharmaceutical industry (and the advice of potentially compromised public health officials like Fauci) is now more likely to end up an investment swindle.

    We now know that there was no credible “science” behind lockdown and whilst its imposition may have originally been motivated by the precautionary principle, the perpetuation of the “Spanish Flu” narrative has been a uniquely destructive, particularly considering the exclusion of healthcare provision for non-COVID illness, prolonged absence of child education, and the well-documented economic devastation. Although our understanding of COVID is by no means complete, we now know that its mortality risk can be best mitigated by the management of infection within the care home and hospital environment, better immediate treatment of hospitalised patients and sensible social distancing measures. None of this required lockdown. Nor does it require a vaccine.

    The degree of intentionality behind the actions taken by governments, the media and the pharma industry is an unknown, but this continued perpetuation of that narrative in contrast to the empirical evidence is arguably the biggest fraud of all.

  • Here Are The Top Highlights From Ghislaine Maxwell's Unsealed Court Records
    Here Are The Top Highlights From Ghislaine Maxwell’s Unsealed Court Records

    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 07/30/2020 – 23:40

    Dozens of exhibits related to Ghislaine Maxwell and Jeffrey Epstein were unsealed Thursday evening, providing insight into allegations against the financier and his purported ‘madam,’ as well as other high-profile individuals, including Bill Clinton, Alan Dershowitz and several other people whose names one can only guess (and the internet has).

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The documents, related to a 2015 civil defamation lawsuit against Maxwell by Epstein accuser Virginia Giuffre, were ordered to be released on July 23 by US District Judge Loretta Preska – which also included flight logs from Epstein’s private jets, as well as police reports from the multiple locations where Epstein maintained residences.

    Among the findings:

    Bill Clinton was allegedly on pedo island with ‘2 young girls’

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Sordid details from alleged sexual encounters

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Virginia Giuffre asked Comey’s FBI for evidence in their possession, and was ignored.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Of course:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Maxwell was in communication with Epstein in January of 2015 – contradicting her claim that she hadn’t been in touch with him in more than a decade.

    Alan Dershowitz is mentioned several times (and has gone to great lengths to defend himself – suggesting on multiple occasions that this very document release would in exonerate him).

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Dersh defends:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Epstein accuser(s) allegedly had to have sex with this guy

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    And former New Mexico Governor Bill Richardson (D)

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Other speculative mentions (redacted): Prince Andrew, Jean Luc Brunel, and more.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Trump is in the clear (which we’ve known for some time):

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    And some food for thought…

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Check back for more…

  • Militant Antifa Group Urges Deadly Violence Against Feds
    Militant Antifa Group Urges Deadly Violence Against Feds

    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 07/30/2020 – 23:20

    Via FarLeftWatch.com,

    Over the weekend there were multiple shootings at “mostly peaceful” demonstrations across the US.

    These tragic shootings follow an ongoing campaign of agitation, targeted political violence, and organized insurgency.

    And while DNC leaders like Congressman Nadler claim this violence is “just a myth“, it is unquestionably escalating in frequency, intensity, and organization.

    The latest example of this escalation comes from the Columbia, SC based far-left militia group, Civil Defense Corps. According to their website, they are actively recruiting “former infantry” and will be using these armed “Reserve Units” to “investigate hate crimes and threats against minorities as well as the LGBTQ+ community”. The group claims to be a 501(c)3 and even has a somewhat formal application process. In addition to general employment information and professional references, there are four questions for the applicant. The first two are “Are you comfortable around firearms?” and “What is your opinion on MAGA?”.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Unfortunately, this group does not stop at just recruiting armed anti-Trump extremists, they also actively use their social media accounts to coordinate offline harm. In a recent Facebook post (archive), they encouraged their followers to shoot Federal agents “in the face”.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    On their Instagram page (archive), they openly flaunt their proclivity towards militancy and their affiliation with the domestic terrorist movement, Antifa.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The Facebook page (archive) of the leader of this militia group, Walid Hakim, is littered with Communist iconography and Black Lives Matter logos. And after encouraging his Facebook followers to shoot Federal agents “in the face” using his Civil Defense Corps account, he later used his personal account to encourage people to attend an upcoming protest at South Carolina Law Enforcement Division (SLED) in downtown Columbia, SC.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    So what else do we know about this group? Well, they have generated some local press in which they were referred to as a “Leftist Peace Group” and they claim (archive) to have the “vocal support” of the Mayor of Columbia, Stephan Benjamin.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The Mayor’s office did not immediately respond when we reached out to confirm his support of this far-left militia group.

    *  *  *

    The mission of Far Left Watch is to investigate, expose, and combat the far-left and the institutions that empower them. Every dollar you contribute empowers us to be a more efficient and effective watchdog organization.

  • Pentagon Admits Risk Of 'Mistakenly' Firing Land-Based Nuclear Missiles In Rare Memo
    Pentagon Admits Risk Of ‘Mistakenly’ Firing Land-Based Nuclear Missiles In Rare Memo

    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 07/30/2020 – 23:00

    The Pentagon has made a not-so-comforting admission that its nuclear arsenal is subject to errors and ‘mistakes’ — namely the potential for land-based missiles carrying nukes to be fired by mistake.

    The almost unheard of public acknowledgement of such a danger, which it should be noted (if not already obvious) could trigger global nuclear apocalypse, actually came as part of an argument for why the DoD nuclear weapons program needs much more funding and a ‘restart’:

    The Trump administration, in a closely held memo to lawmakers this spring, justified developing the first new U.S. atomic weapon since the Cold War by citing vulnerabilities and risks in the current nuclear arsenal that are rarely or never acknowledged in public.

    In an unclassified five-page white paper sent to Congress in May, the Pentagon and the Energy Department’s National Nuclear Security Administration, or NNSA, affirm a point they have long minimized: the dangers of land-based missiles ready to launch minutes after a warning of enemy attack.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    August 5, 2019 explosion near Achinsk, Russia. Via AP

    Recall that in late May of this year it was revealed that the White House is actually mulling conducting the first US nuclear test since the end of the Cold War. The last was conducted 28 years ago.

    Administration officials suggested it would send a strong “message” to Russia and China at a moment landmark Cold War era nuclear arms reduction treaties are unraveling, and at a moment the US hopes to revise New START to account for China’s high tech arsenal.

    “The document, which was obtained by CQ Roll Call and has not previously been disclosed, makes the fullest case yet for the $14 billion W93 submarine-launched atomic warhead program and its MK7 reentry vehicle, which would cost several hundred million more dollars,” Roll Call reports.

    Citing a “variety of risks” in the current nuclear arsenal and launch processes, officials described that “the W93 warhead must be funded, starting in fiscal 2021, because of what it described as perils and vulnerabilities in the Navy’s inventory of sub-launched weapons, as well as in the Air Force’s land-based missiles and bombers.” Fear of a false or accidental fire stem from the US nuclear systems being originally designed to launch minutes after a perceived enemy nuclear attack.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Via Flickr

    Such arguments, even if made behind the scenes among US technicians and scientists, rarely if ever make it into the media or official reports subject to the public eye.

    Further, AntiWar.com’s Jason Ditz makes a salient point: “If this argument proves successful, it may also encourage the Pentagon to slip flaws into their future designs as a way to ensure that they can get more funding for an ultimate successor.”

    But it remains that over the past decades there hasn’t been any observable major nuclear ‘accidents’ on the scale that this new Trump admin memo envisions as possible.

  • One Nation Under House Arrest: How Do COVID-19 Mandates Impact Our Freedoms?
    One Nation Under House Arrest: How Do COVID-19 Mandates Impact Our Freedoms?

    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 07/30/2020 – 22:40

    Authored by John Whitehead via The Rutherford Institute,

    “It is proper to take alarm at the first experiment on our liberties. We hold this prudent jealousy to be the first duty of citizens, and one of the noblest characteristics of the late Revolution. The freeman of America did not wait till usurped power had strengthened itself by exercise, and entangled the question in precedents. They saw all the consequences in the principle, and they avoided the consequences by denying the principle.”

    – James Madison

    We have become one nation under house arrest.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    You think we’re any different from the Kentucky couple fitted out with ankle monitoring bracelets and forced to quarantine at home?

    We’re not

    Consider what happened to Elizabeth and Isaiah Linscott.

    Elizabeth took a precautionary diagnostic COVID-19 test before traveling to visit her parents and grandparents in Michigan. It came back positive: Elizabeth was asymptomatic for the novel coronavirus but had no symptoms. Her husband and infant daughter tested negative for the virus.

    Now in a country where freedom actually means something, the Linscotts would have the right to determine for themselves how to proceed responsibly, but in the American Police State, we’ve only got as much freedom as the government allows.

    That’s not saying much.

    Indeed, it’s a dangerous time for anyone who still clings to the idea that freedom means the right to think for yourself and act responsibly according to your best judgment.

    In that regard, the Linscotts are a little old-school in their thinking. When Elizabeth was asked to sign a self-quarantine order agreeing to check in daily with the health department and not to travel anywhere without prior approval, she refused.

    I shouldn’t have to ask for consent because I’m an adult who can make that decision. And as a citizen of the United States of America, that is my right to make that decision without having to disclose that to somebody else,” said Elizabeth. “So, no, I wouldn’t wear a mask. I would do everything that I could to make sure that I wouldn’t come in contact with other people because of the fear that’s spreading with this. But no, I would have just stayed home, take care of my child.”

    Instead of signing the blanket statement, Elizabeth submitted her own written declaration:

    I will do my best to stay home, as I do every other time I get sick. But I cannot comply to having to call the public health department everytime that I need to go out and do something. It’s my right and freedoms to go where I please and not have to answer to anyone for it. There is no pandemic and with a survival rate of 99.9998% I’m fine. I will continue to avoid the elderly, just like PRIOR guidelines state, try to stay home, get rest, get medicine, and get better. I decline.

    A few days after being informed that Elizabeth’s case was being escalated and referred to law enforcement, the Linscotts reportedly found their home surrounded by multiple government vehicles, government personnel and the county sheriff armed with a court order and ankle monitors.

    “We didn’t rob a store,” Linscott said.

    We didn’t steal something. We didn’t hit and run. We didn’t do anything wrong.”

    That’s the point, of course.

    In an age of overcriminalization—when the law is wielded like a hammer to force compliance to the government’s dictates whatever they might be—you don’t have to do anything wrong to be fined, arrested or subjected to raids and seizures and surveillance.

    Watch and see: just as it did in China, this pandemic is about to afford the government the perfect excuse for expanding its surveillance and data collection powers at our expense.

    On a daily basis, Americans are already relinquishing (in many cases, voluntarily) the most intimate details of who we are—their biological makeup, our genetic blueprints, and our biometrics (facial characteristics and structure, fingerprints, iris scans, etc.)—in order to navigate an increasingly technologically-enabled world.

    COVID-19, however, takes the surveillance state to the next level.

    There’s already been talk of mass testing for COVID-19 antibodies, screening checkpoints, contact tracing, immunity passports to allow those who have recovered from the virus to move around more freely, and snitch tip lines for reporting “rule breakers” to the authorities.

    As Reuters reports:

    As the United States begins reopening its economy, some state officials are weighing whether house arrest monitoring technology – including ankle bracelets or location-tracking apps – could be used to police quarantines imposed on coronavirus carriers. But while the tech has been used sporadically for U.S. quarantine enforcement over the past few weeks, large scale rollouts have so far been held back by a big legal question: Can officials impose electronic monitoring without an offense or a court order?

    More to the point, as the head of one tech company asked, Can you actually constitutionally monitor someone who’s innocent? It’s uncharted territory.”

    Except this isn’t exactly uncharted territory, is it?

    It follows much the same pattern as every other state of emergency in recent years—legitimate or manufactured—that has empowered the government to add to its arsenal of technologies and powers.

    The war on terror, the war on drugs, the war on illegal immigration, asset forfeiture schemes, road safety schemes, school safety schemes, eminent domain: all of these programs started out as legitimate responses to pressing concerns and have since become weapons of compliance and control in the police state’s hands.

    It doesn’t even matter what the nature of the crisis might becivil unrest, the national emergencies, “unforeseen economic collapse, loss of functioning political and legal order, purposeful domestic resistance or insurgency, pervasive public health emergencies, and catastrophic natural and human disasters”as long as it allows the government to justify all manner of government tyranny in the so-called name of national security.

    It’s hard to know who to trust anymore.

    Certainly, in this highly partisan age, when everything from the COVID-19 pandemic to police brutality to football is being recast in light of one’s political leanings, it can be incredibly difficult to separate what constitutes a genuine safety concern versus what is hyper-politicized propaganda.

    Take the mask mandates, for example.

    Currently, 19 states have not issued mask mandates in response to rising COVID-19 infection numbers. More than 30 states have enacted some form of mask requirement. A growing number of retailers, including Walmart, Target and CVS,  are also joining the mask mandate bandwagon. Georgia’s governor, in a challenge to mask requirements by local governing bodies, filed a lawsuit challenging Atlanta’s dictate that masks be worn within city limits.

    In some states, such as Indiana, where masks are required but there are no penalties for non-compliance, government officials are urging people to protect themselves but not to get into confrontations over masks or turn into snitches.

    In other states, such as Virginia, the Nanny State is using more strong-handed tactics to force compliance with mask mandates, including the threat of fines, jail time, surprise inspections of businesses, and complaint hotlines that encourage citizens to snitch on each other. Officials in Las Vegas deployed 100 “compliance ambassadors” to help educate and enhance enforcement of the state’s mask mandate. One couple in Knoxville, Tenn., took mask-shaming to new heights when they created a Facebook page to track compliance by businesses, employees and customers.

    In Miami, “residents now risk a legal penalty if they venture into public without a face mask. The city has assigned at least 39 police officers to make sure that residents are following the city’s mandatory mask ordinance. Offenders will be warned but, if they refuse to comply, they will be fined. The first offense will cost $100 and the second another $100. With a third — God forbid — the offender will be arrested.

    These conflicting and, in some cases, heavy-handed approaches to a pandemic that has locked down the nation for close to six months is turning this health crisis into an unnecessarily politicized, bureaucratic tug-of-war with no clear-cut winners to be found.

    Certainly, this is not the first crisis to pit security concerns against freedom principles.

    In this post-9/11 world, we have been indoctrinated into fearing and mistrusting one another instead of fearing and mistrusting the government. As a result, we’ve been forced to travel this road many, many times with lamentably predictable results each time: without fail, when asked to choose between safety and liberty, Americans historically tend to choose safety.

    Failing to read the fine print on such devil’s bargains, “we the people” find ourselves repeatedly on the losing end as the government uses each crisis as a means of expanding its powers at taxpayer expense.

    Whatever these mask mandates might be—authoritarian strong-arm tactics or health necessities to prevent further spread of the virus—they have thus far proven to be uphill legal battles for those hoping to challenge them in the courts as unconstitutional restrictions on their right to liberty, bodily autonomy, privacy and health.

    In fact, Florida courts have upheld the mask ordinances, ruling that they do not infringe on constitutional rights and that “there is no reasonable expectation of privacy as to whether one covers their nose and mouth in public places, which are the only places to which the mask ordinance applies.”

    Declaring that there is no constitutional right to infect others, Circuit Court Judge John Kastrenakes concluded that “the right to be ‘free from governmental intrusion’ does not automatically or completely shield an individual’s conduct from regulation.” Moreover, wrote Kastrenakes, constitutional rights and the ideals of limited government “do not absolve a citizen from the real-world consequences of their individual choices, or otherwise allow them to wholly skirt their social obligation to their fellow Americans or to society as a whole. This is particularly true when one’s individual choices can result in drastic, costly, and sometimes deadly, consequences to others.”

    Virginia courts have also upheld mask mandates.

    These court decisions take their cue from a 1905 U.S. Supreme Court decision in Jacobson v. Massachusetts in which the Court upheld the authority of states to enforce compulsory vaccination laws.

    In other words, the courts have concluded that the government has a compelling interest in requiring masks to fight COVID-19 infections that overrides individual freedoms.

    Generally, the government has to show a so-called compelling state interest before it can override certain critical rights such as free speech, assembly, press, privacy, search and seizure, etc. Most of the time, the government lacks that compelling state interest, but it still manages to violate those rights, setting itself up for legal battles further down the road.

    We can spend time debating the mask mandates. However, criticizing those who rightly fear these restrictions to be a slippery slope to further police state tactics will not restore the freedoms that have been willingly sacrificed on the altar of national security by Americans of all political stripes over the years.

    As I’ve warned, this is a test to see how whether the Constitution—and our commitment to the principles enshrined in the Bill of Rights—can survive a national crisis and true state of emergency.

    It must be remembered that James Madison, the “father” of the U.S. Constitution and the Bill of Rights and the fourth president of the United States, advised that we should “take alarm at the first experiment upon our liberties.

    Whether or not you consider these COVID-19 restrictions to be cause for alarm, they are far from the first experiment on our liberties. Indeed, whether or not you concede that the pandemic itself is cause for alarm, we should all be alarmed by the government’s response to this pandemic.

    By government, I’m not referring to one particular politician or administration but to the entire apparatus at every level that conspires to keep “we the people” fearful of one another and under virtual house arrest.

    This is what we’ve all been reduced to: prisoners in our skin, prisoners in our homes, prisoners in our communities—forced to comply with the government’s shifting mandates about how to navigate this pandemic or else.

    Right now, COVID-19 is the perfect excuse for the government to wreak havoc on our freedoms in the name of safety and security, but as I make clear in my book Battlefield America: The War on the American People, don’t believe for a minute that our safety is the police state’s primary concern.

  • Billboard Ad Revenue Collapses As Americans Stay Home 
    Billboard Ad Revenue Collapses As Americans Stay Home 

    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 07/30/2020 – 22:20

    The unintended consequence of Americans driving less because of the virus pandemic has resulted in a collapse in billboard advertisement revenue, reported Bloomberg

    Researcher Magna Global said 2Q20 billboard ad revenue is projected to plunge 40% from a year earlier. 

    Wall Street estimates Clear Channel Outdoor Holdings Inc. and Outfront Media Inc., some of the largest outdoor advertising companies, could post upwards of 50% revenue declines for 2Q. 

    Current revenue growth estimates for the industry show depression in 2020 and revival in 2021. However, 2021 estimates are too optimistic. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    During lockdowns, with tens of millions of Americans confined to their couches, advertisers abandoned billboards for online advertisements. This pressured advertising companies, likely resulting in an environment where outdoor advertising remains depressed through the back half the year. 

    Consultancy firm KPMG International noted, the other week, “social-distancing measures” have “dramatically cut the amount of miles Americans travel by car.” 

    KPMG estimates a 10% permanent reduction of the almost 3 trillion miles driven each year, and vehicle ownership is expected to slump in the years ahead. 

    The report states, the new normal could be as many as “14 million fewer cars” on US highways. Fewer cars on roads are bad news for outdoor advertising companies. 

    Shown below, Atlanta’s rush-hour congestion was eliminated during lockdowns. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    TomTom Traffic data shows Atlanta’s rush-hour congestion has disappeared through July.  

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Rush-hour is also non-existent in New York City. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The overall conclusion is that advertisers will shift away from outdoor advertising spending for online options as millions of Americans stay home for various reasons, if that is because of permanent job loss or remote work, this is all terrible news for companies that own billboards. 

  • Rickards: Americans Should Fear The "Anarchy From Above"
    Rickards: Americans Should Fear The “Anarchy From Above”

    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 07/30/2020 – 22:00

    Authored by James Rickards via The Daily Reckoning,

    Chesterton – G.K. Chesterton – once wrote of “anarchy from above.”

    Anarchy. The word implies a mob amok. Anarchy implies violence. And chaos.

    Anarchy implies the murder of law, of order… both borne away by the whirlwind.

    American cities have been scenes of anarchy.

    How else would a fellow explain Minneapolis police taking to their heels — and abandoning their base to the fiery mob — who proceeded to set it ablaze?

    How else would he explain Seattle’s Capitol Hill Autonomous Zone (presently defunct)… or “antifa’s” siege of Portland, Oregon (ongoing).

    It is anarchy from below. Yet as Chesterton noted:

    “It isn’t necessary that anarchy should be violent; nor is it necessary that it should come from below.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    “A Government May Grow Anarchic as Much as a People”

    Thus he concludes, gravely, sternly, presciently:

    “A government may grow anarchic as much as a people.”

    That is, it may impose anarchy from above

    Governments have shuttered America’s restaurants, ale houses, barber shops, nail salons, gymnasiums, arenas, beaches… and all places of public resort.

    Governments have ordered churches to scatter their flocks — and bolt their doors.

    And has the Grim Reaper called on a loved one recently?

    Then you may have been unable to pay your last respects. That is because governments restricted graveside sendoffs to a handful of bereaved.

    These are the grim but necessary costs of containing a pandemic, we have been told.

    Yet the same governments that barred you from your sister’s funeral, that locked you out of Sunday service… have blessed the mightiest mass gatherings we have ever encountered.

    We refer of course to the George Floyd protests.

    Anti-Law

    15-26 million Americans swarmed the streets… each one a potential plague-spreader… in over 2,000 cities… in all 50 states of this union… plus the District of Columbia.

    Authorities not only permitted these disease incubators to infest the streets — they waved them in.

    That is, certain Americans can swarm in their thousands, in their tens of thousands, in their hundreds of thousands, in their millions… yet others cannot gather in their dozens to worship almighty God or plant a relative.

    Reduce it to its essence. And this is what you must conclude:

    The rules are arbitrary. The rules are capricious. The rules war against logic itself.

    The rules likewise war against justice itself…

    The umbrella of law must cover all alike. Else it is not law. It is anti-law, a travesty of law, a bonfire of law.

    It is anarchy from above…

    “Arbitrary Distinctions”

    Heather MacDonald of the Manhattan Institute:

    The lockdown mandates employed mind-numbingly arbitrary distinctions. Wine stores and pot dispensaries were deemed “essential” and thus allowed to stay open; medical offices were required to close. Large grocery stores got the green light; small retail establishments with only a few customers each day were out of luck. Michigan Governor Gretchen Whitmer notoriously used her red pen within megastores to bar the sale of seeds, gardening supplies, and paint.

    Next we come to the “excesses” of the protests:

    Government officials, having shut down commerce due to unblemished ignorance of how markets work, now enabled the torching and looting of thousands of businesses due to the shirking of their most profound responsibility: protecting civil peace.

    Blue state governors and mayors ordered law enforcement to stand down or use at most (in New York City Mayor Bill de Blasio’s words) a “light touch” with the rioters…

    Most remarkably, public officials overtly admitted to choosing the forms of assembly that would be allowed based on the content of the protesters’ speech. Mayor de Blasio explained that protests over “400 years of American racism” are not the same as a “store owner or the devout religious person who wants to go back to services.” While the store owner or worshipper may be “understandably aggrieved,” he conceded, their grievances must still be suppressed in the name of coronavirus safety. Not the grievances of the protesters and rioters, however.

    New Jersey Governor Phil Murphy congratulated the Black Lives Matter activists and distinguished them from mere “nail salon” entrepreneurs protesting their ongoing business stasis. The two are in “different orbits,” Murphy said.

    “A Nightmare Marriage of Anarchy From Above… With Anarchy From Below”

    The activist and the nail salon entrepreneur may inhabit “different orbits.”

    Yet the virus circles in both. And in vastly greater quantities — we must assume — in the protesters’ circle.

    Why then is the activist exempt from the rules that bind and chafe the nail salon entrepreneur?

    The result is a nightmare marriage of anarchy from above… with anarchy from below.

    Ms. MacDonald:

    They engineered the destruction of trillions of dollars of wealth, through thoroughly arbitrary decision making. And then they stood by as billions more dollars of work burned down. Public order and safety, equal treatment under the law, stability of expectations… have been decimated.

    Not Just the Blue State Politicians

    Ms. MacDonald butchers and scourges blue state politicos.

    And our applause is like thunder.

    Yet The Daily Reckoning’s political stance is aggressively, ruthlessly, militantly neutral…

    We level our darts at liberals, at conservatives, at progressives, at moderates.

    That is because they all invade our peace and dignity in one form or other — as well as our wallet.

    And we remind you that red state officials have also imposed arbitrary economic lockdowns and antisocial distancing dictates.

    These bipartisan assaults on enterprise have yielded up to 150,000 “deaths of despair.”

    These are killings by suicide, by drink, by drug, etc.

    How many Americans has the virus murdered?

    145,000… as the official figure runs.

    Anarchy From the Very Top

    Yet we have failed to mention the arbitrary, chaotic and lunatic policies of the United States government — and its central bank.

    The federal budget deficit exceeded $863 billion in June alone. As our former colleague David Stockman notes…

    The entire public debt was $863 billion in 1980. The federal government had required 192 years and 39 presidents to scale that inglorious height.

    Thus in 30 days, David shrieks, the government of the United States borrowed nearly two centuries worth of debt.

    This year’s deficit may near or exceed $5 trillion.

    The Federal Reserve — meantime — has unleashed monetary bedlam…

    “Unelected, Unaccountable Bureaucrats”

    It has fabricated $3 trillion in four months’ space. It may fabricate $7 trillion more by year’s end if our sources are accurate.

    And who can say what additional skullduggeries it will get up to?

    Are We the People granted a vote on any of it?

    Wealth manager Tim Price:

    Our entire central bank controlled financial system is based on the premise that unelected, unaccountable bureaucrats should be able to direct individuals’ consumption and production behavior from ivory tower conclaves.

    And so it goes. And so it goes.

    Here we stand in July, Anno Domini 2020…

    America confronts anarchy from above, anarchy from below, anarchy to the left, anarchy to the right…

    Anarchy in every direction…

  • "Rumors Of Structural Faults ​​​​​​​" – China's Three Gorges Dam Could Be Nearing collapse
    “Rumors Of Structural Faults ​​​​​​​” – China’s Three Gorges Dam Could Be Nearing collapse

    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 07/30/2020 – 21:40

    Concerns are rising that China’s Three Gorges Dam, the world’s largest dam, could be on the verge of collapse triggering a devastating 250-foot tidal wave that would wipe out cities, reported The Sun

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Satellite image via NASA shows water moving through the Three Gorges Dam in mid-June. 
     

    A major concern, after several weeks of raging floodwaters rushing through the dam at 60,000 cubic meters per second, is that part of the structure has shifted under enormous pressure, potentially jeopardizing the structural integrity of the dam.

    Rumors of structural faults in the walls of the 14-year-old dam have grown as heavy rains deluged the swollen Yangtze River.

    China’s secretive leaders – already facing a backlash over the Covid-19 pandemic which started in Wuhan in Hubei Province – have played down the threat.

    But authorities are said to have quietly ordered the evacuation of 38 million Chinese in the threatened zone – equating to more than half the population of the UK.

    Heavy rainfall is forecast to continue to pound the Yangtze River basin in the coming days after localized floods claimed at least 141 lives. – The Sun

    Dam operators, quoted by local media, said there are two weeks before reservoirs around the dam reach maximum level. Floodgates were used earlier this week to discharge excess water but still not enough to lower water levels. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    China’s state-run Global Times quoted a local official that said the structure is “safe and in good condition.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    A CGI video published on Twitter showed a potential scenario of the dam collapse, would flood cities along the Yangtze River. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    We’ve recently highlighted speculation the dam could be set to fail.  

    Three Gorges Dam Overview 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    If a structural failure of the dam results in flooding conditions downstream, the Communist Party of China has a new scapegoat to blame the faltering economy, and or has the ability to wash away all the virus evidence in Wuhan, including the biosafety lab. 

  • Domestic Violence More Than Doubled Under Lockdowns, New Study Finds
    Domestic Violence More Than Doubled Under Lockdowns, New Study Finds

    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 07/30/2020 – 21:20

    Authored by John Miltimore via The Foundation for Economic Education,

    The unintended consequences of the COVID-19 lockdowns have been severe: mass unemployment, increased drug overdoses and suicides, and widespread social unrest are but a few of them.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Last week, the National Bureau of Economic Research released a paper detailing another: increased domestic violence.

    Analyzing government-mandated lockdowns in India, researchers Saravana Ravindran and Manisha Shah found evidence of a 131 percent increase in complaints of domestic violence in May 2020 in “red zone districts,” or districts that experienced the strictest lockdown measures, relative to districts that had less strict measures (“green zones”).

    The researchers, who used a difference-in-differences empirical strategy, found the increase in domestic violence complaints was consistent with a surge in Google search activity for terms related to domestic violence over the same period.

    The authors’ findings “contribute to a growing literature on the impacts of lockdowns and stay-at-home policies on violence against women during the COVID-19 pandemic.”

    The findings, which also found a decline in reported sexual assaults because of decreased mobility, are similar to those from research that found lockdowns led to a 100 percent increase in intimate partner violence calls in Mexico City. A study analyzing data from police departments in four US cities showed smaller increases in domestic violence, 10-27 percent, during lockdown periods.

    Globally about one-third of women experience “intimate partner violence” (IPV), which negatively impacts female earnings, labor participation, earnings, mental health, and household consumption.

    The global increase in domestic violence during the lockdown period has received relatively little attention, though CNN recently reported on the increase south of the US border.

    In Mexico, federal lawmakers shut down most of its economy on March 23, urging people to stay indoors. Activists told the network the action spurred “an onslaught of domestic violence,” and data show 911 calls for domestic violence are up 44 percent from the same time the previous year.

    “The lockdowns triggered violence in so many ways,” Perla Acosta Galindo, Director of Más Sueños A.C., a women’s community center, told CNN. “People can’t work, there’s alcoholism, overcrowding; it’s a lot.”

    To some degree, the COVID pandemic has been portrayed as a morality play. Some would have you believe those who care about people support lockdowns; those who don’t care about people oppose them. We’re presented with false choices: we can support the economy or protect American lives.

    These types of arguments only serve to divide. They can also obscure a basic truth: there are human costs to lockdowns, besides the economic ones, that can ravage lives just as badly as any disease.

    The Washington Post, for example, recently reported on ”a hidden epidemic within the coronavirus pandemic”: drug overdoses. One Ohio coroner said he can’t process the bodies fast enough.

    “We’ve literally run out of wheeled carts to put them on,” Anahi Ortiz told the paper.

    Statistics suggest the trend is national in scope. Data from the Overdose Detection Mapping Application Program show that overdoses were up 18 percent in March, 29 percent in April, and 42 percent in May from the same periods the previous year.

    These statistics should come as no surprise. Social scientists have been writing about the deadly consequences of social isolation for years.

    It’s not just higher stress levels, disrupted sleep patterns, and altered immune systems. One 2015 study determined that social isolation substantially increased the risk of stroke (32 percent) and heart disease (29 percent).

    Social isolation is also linked to suicide. While there is no comprehensive 2020 data on suicides, anecdotal evidence suggests many are struggling to cope with quarantine life. In May, during the peak of the lockdowns, one California doctor told local media his hospital has seen “a year’s worth of suicide attempts in the last four weeks.”

    As the French economist Frédéric Bastiat stressed, every policy, “produces not only one effect, but a series of effects.” The immediate and intended effects are what he calls “the seen,” while the indirect, unintended consequences are “the unseen.” “The seen” usually gets all the attention, while “the unseen” often goes neglected.

    In this case, “the seen” are the victims of the virus and those who hopefully avoid spreading or catching the disease because of the lockdowns. They are, without a doubt, worthy of our care and attention.

    But we also must not ignore “the unseen”: the millions of human beings who, as a result of the lockdowns, have become victims of domestic violence, drug overdoses, depression, suicide, and more.

    As Antony Davies and James Harrigan wrote, “The uncomfortable truth is that no policy can save lives; it can only trade lives.” It may one day be determined that the lockdowns saved more lives than they destroyed, although recent evidence suggests the correlation between lockdown severity and COVID-19 deaths is weak. But let’s not underestimate the devastating human toll of this policy.

    The lives ruined or snuffed out by the lockdowns deserve better than that. They deserve to be seen.

  • Here Are The States Where The End Of $600 Unemployment Checks Will Hurt The Most
    Here Are The States Where The End Of $600 Unemployment Checks Will Hurt The Most

    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 07/30/2020 – 21:00

    Tens of millions of Americans are dealing with a pandemic shock of job loss, no savings, insurmountable debts, a potential rent eviction wavehunger crisis, and a fiscal cliff where federal government lifelines of Washington stimulus checks are set to expire on Friday. 

    A perfect storm of depression is swirling above households where the virus-induced downturn has easily set them back a decade. With auto loans, credit cards, and other bills deferred, for the time being, expiring $600 per week checks, seen as lifelines for many, will unequally pressure folks in different metropolitan areas.  

    No matter what, households will be hit with a cash crunch, even though their debt servicing payments have been deferred, their income streams have been severed. We recently noted a quarter of all personal income is derived from the government.  

    With Americans more dependent on the government for income streams than ever, Republicans and Democrats are at odds of how large the next round of stimulus should be. There’s talk Republicans want to reduce the upcoming series of direct payments from $600 to $200 per week, something Democrats have criticized. 

    White House chief of staff Mark Meadows said both parties are “nowhere close to a deal,” while a fiscal cliff is set to hit on Friday. This means formerly full-time workers across the country will struggle to survive. 

    The value of the $600 benefit becomes clearer when you consider existing safety nets for jobless Americans.

    A weekly unemployment check is usually a fixed percentage of a worker’s previous income, known as the replacement rate, subject to a maximum total. But there’s wide variation in the amounts states offer for both of these metrics.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    h/t Bloomberg 

    While the replacement rate has a fairly wide range, the real differentiator is the maximum weekly amount. The U.S. average is $472, but Arizona and a handful of southern states offer no more than $275 in benefits per week. North Carolina, one of several states that reduced the duration of benefits following the Great Recession, cut its maximum weekly benefit from $535 to $350 in 2013. And the true value of any weekly check is effectively reduced if the recipient lives in a high-cost city. – Bloomberg 

    The flat pre-tax $600 per week payment tremendously benefited folks in 67% of all US cities.  

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    h/t Bloomberg 

    Due to higher living costs, the weekly lifeline is less effective in 34% of all cities. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    h/t Bloomberg

    An example of this compares Morgantown, West Virginia—a relatively cheap place to live with prices 10% below the national average—to the Portland area in Oregon, which has slightly above-average living costs. The gap between wages in the two cities is about 25%. Before the $600 check arrived, Morgantown’s median-wage unemployed workers received a price-adjusted $118 less per week in regular benefits than their Portland counterparts. But since then, Morgantown workers have received a cost-adjusted benefit of $1,096 versus Portland’s $1,124. Their benefit gap shrank from 28% to less than 3%. – Bloomberg

    Here are the areas where weekly payments helped folks the most.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    h/t Bloomberg

    Areas where the checks weren’t as potent due to higher living costs.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    h/t Bloomberg

    “With payments now expiring, workers in states with low maximum benefit amounts will suffer the biggest shock,” Bloomberg warns. 

    As the $600 weekly payment expires Friday – and likely, the dollar amount of the next round of checks won’t be as great as before, this means MSAs that experienced the largest artificial boost of consumption, such as towns like Morgantown, well, those areas may soon experience a consumption collapse.

  • The Myth Of The Failure Of Capitalism
    The Myth Of The Failure Of Capitalism

    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 07/30/2020 – 20:40

    Authored by Ludwig von Mises via The Mises Institute,

    [From The Clash of Group Interests, and Other Essays, translated by Jane E. Sanders]

    The nearly universal opinion expressed these days is that the economic crisis of recent years marks the end of capitalism.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Capitalism allegedly has failed, has proven itself incapable of solving economic problems, and so mankind has no alternative, if it is to survive, than to make the transition to a planned economy, to socialism.

    This is hardly a new idea. The socialists have always maintained that economic crises are the inevitable result of the capitalistic method of production and that there is no other means of eliminating economic crises than the transition to socialism. If these assertions are expressed more forcefully these days and evoke greater public response, it is not because the present crisis is greater or longer than its predecessors, but rather primarily because today public opinion is much more strongly influenced by socialist views than it was in previous decades.

    I

    When there was no economic theory, the belief was that whoever had power and was determined to use it could accomplish anything. In the interest of their spiritual welfare and with a view toward their reward in Heaven, rulers were admonished by their priests to exercise moderation in their use of power. Also, it was not a question of what limits the inherent conditions of human life and production set for this power, but rather that they were considered boundless and omnipotent in the sphere of social affairs.

    The foundation of social sciences, the work of a large number of great intellects, of whom David Hume and Adam Smith are most outstanding, has destroyed this conception. One discovered that social power was a spiritual one and not (as was supposed) a material and, in the rough sense of the word, a real one. And there was the recognition of a necessary coherence within market phenomena which power is unable to destroy. There was also a realization that something was operative in social affairs that the powerful could not influence and to which they had to accommodate themselves, just as they had to adjust to the laws of nature. In the history of human thought and science there is no greater discovery.

    If one proceeds from this recognition of the laws of the market, economic theory shows just what kind of situation arises from the interference of force and power in market processes. The isolated intervention cannot reach the end the authorities strive for in enacting it and must result in consequences which are undesirable from the standpoint of the authorities. Even from the point of view of the authorities themselves the intervention is pointless and harmful. Proceeding from this perception, if one wants to arrange market activity according to the conclusions of scientific thought—and we give thought to these matters not only because we are seeking knowledge for its own sake, but also because we want to arrange our actions such that we can reach the goals we aspire to—one then comes unavoidably to a rejection of such interventions as superfluous, unnecessary, and harmful, a notion which characterizes the liberal teaching. It is not that liberalism wants to carry standards of value over into science; it wants to take from science a compass for market actions. Liberalism uses the results of scientific research in order to construct society in such a way that it will be able to realize as effectively as possible the purposes it is intended to realize. The politico-economic parties do not differ on the end result for which they strive but on the means they should employ to achieve their common goal. The liberals are of the opinion that private property in the means of production is the only way to create wealth for everyone, because they consider socialism impractical and because they believe that the system of interventionism (which according to the view of its advocates is between capitalism and socialism) cannot achieve its proponents’ goals.

    The liberal view has found bitter opposition. But the opponents of liberalism have not been successful in undermining its basic theory nor the practical application of this theory. They have not sought to defend themselves against the crushing criticism which the liberals have leveled against their plans by logical refutation; instead they have used evasions. The socialists considered themselves removed from this criticism, because Marxism has declared inquiry about the establishment and the efficacy of a socialist commonwealth heretical; they continued to cherish the socialist state of the future as heaven on earth, but refused to engage in a discussion of the details of their plan. The interventionists chose another path. They argued, on insufficient grounds, against the universal validity of economic theory. Not in a position to dispute economic theory logically, they could refer to nothing other than some “moral pathos,” of which they spoke in the invitation to the founding meeting of the Vereins für Sozialpolitik [Association for Social Policy] in Eisenach. Against logic they set moralism, against theory emotional prejudice, against argument the reference to the will of the state.

    Economic theory predicted the effects of interventionism and state and municipal socialism exactly as they happened. All the warnings were ignored. For fifty or sixty years the politics of European countries has been anticapitalist and antiliberal. More than forty years ago Sidney Webb (Lord Passfield) wrote: “it can now fairly be claimed that the socialist philosophy of to-day is but the conscious and explicit assertion of principles of social organization which have been already in great part unconsciously adopted. The economic history of the century is an almost continuous record of the progress of Socialism.”2 That was at the beginning of this development and it was in England where liberalism was able for the longest time to hold off the anticapitalistic economic policies. Since then interventionist policies have made great strides. In general the view today is that we live in an age in which the “hampered economy” reigns—as the forerunner of the blessed socialist collective consciousness to come.

    Now, because indeed that which economic theory predicted has happened, because the fruits of the anticapitalistic economic policies have come to light, a cry is heard from all sides: this is the decline of capitalism, the capitalistic system has failed!

    Liberalism cannot be deemed responsible for any of the institutions which give today’s economic policies their character. It was against the nationalization and the bringing under municipal control of projects which now show themselves to be catastrophes for the public sector and a source of filthy corruption; it was against the denial of protection for those willing to work and against placing state power at the disposal of the trade unions, against unemployment compensation, which has made unemployment a permanent and universal phenomenon, against social insurance, which has made those insured into grumblers, malingers, and neurasthenics, against tariffs (and thereby implicitly against cartels), against the limitation of freedom to live, to travel, or study where one likes, against excessive taxation and against inflation, against armaments, against colonial acquisitions, against the oppression of minorities, against imperialism and against war. It put up stubborn resistance against the politics of capital consumption. And liberalism did not create the armed party troops who are just waiting for the convenient opportunity to start a civil war.

    II

    The line of argument that leads to blaming capitalism for at least some of these things is based on the notion that entrepreneurs and capitalists are no longer liberal but interventionist and statist. The fact is correct, but the conclusions people want to draw from it are wrong-headed. These deductions stem from the entirely untenable Marxist view that entrepreneurs and capitalists protected their special class interests through liberalism during the time when capitalism flourished but now, in the late and declining period of capitalism, protect them through interventionism. This is supposed to be proof that the “hampered economy” of interventionism is the historically necessary economics of the phase of capitalism in which we find ourselves today. But the concept of classical political economy and of liberalism as the ideology (in the Marxist sense of the word) of the bourgeoisie is one of the many distorted techniques of Marxism. If entrepreneurs and capitalists were liberal thinkers around 1800 in England and interventionist, statist, and socialist thinkers around 1930 in Germany, the reason is that entrepreneurs and capitalists were also captivated by the prevailing ideas of the times. In 1800 no less than in 1930 entrepreneurs had special interests which were protected by interventionism and hurt by liberalism.

    Today the great entrepreneurs are often cited as “economic leaders.” Capitalistic society knows no “economic leaders.” Therein lies the characteristic difference between socialist economies on the one hand and capitalist economies on the other hand: in the latter, the entrepreneurs and the owners of the means of production follow no leadership save that of the market. The custom of citing initiators of great enterprises as economic leaders already gives some indication that these days it is not usually the case that one reaches these positions by economic successes but rather by other means.

    In the interventionist state it is no longer of crucial importance for the success of an enterprise that operations be run in such a way that the needs of the consumer are satisfied in the best and least expensive way; it is much more important that one has “good relations” with the controlling political factions, that the interventions redound to the advantage and not the disadvantage of the enterprise. A few more Marks’ worth of tariff-protection for the output of the enterprise, a few Marks less tariff-protection for the inputs in the manufacturing process can help the enterprise more than the greatest prudence in the conduct of operations. An enterprise may be well run, but it will go under if it does not know how to protect its interests in the arrangement of tariff rates, in the wage negotiations before arbitration boards, and in governing bodies of cartels. It is much more important to have “connections” than to produce well and cheaply. Consequently the men who reach the top of such enterprises are not those who know how to organize operations and give production a direction which the market situation demands, but rather men who are in good standing both “above” and “below,” men who know how to get along with the press and with all political parties, especially with the radicals, such that their dealings cause no offense. This is that class of general directors who deal more with federal dignitaries and party leaders than with those from whom they buy or to whom they sell.

    Because many ventures depend on political favors, those who undertake such ventures must repay the politicians with favors. There has been no big venture in recent years which has not had to expend considerable sums for transactions which from the outset were clearly unprofitable but which, despite expected losses, had to be concluded for political reasons. This is not to mention contributions to non-business concerns—election funds, public welfare institutions and the like.

    Powers working toward the independence of the directors of the large banks, industrial concerns, and joint-stock companies from the stockholders are asserting themselves more strongly. This politically expedited “tendency for big businesses to socialize themselves,” that is, for letting interests other than the regard “for the highest possible yield for the stockholders” determine the management of the ventures, has been greeted by statist writers as a sign that we have already vanquished capitalism.3 In the course of the reform of German stock rights, even legal efforts have already been made to put the interest and well-being of the entrepreneur, namely “his economic, legal, and social self-worth and lasting value and his independence from the changing majority of changing stockholders,” above those of the shareholder.

    With the influence of the state behind them and supported by a thoroughly interventionist public opinion, the leaders of big enterprises today feel so strong in relation to the stockholders that they believe they need not take their interests into account. In their conduct of the businesses of society in those countries in which statism has most strongly come to rule—for example in the successor states of the old Austro-Hungarian Empire—they are as unconcerned about profitability as the directors of public utilities. The result is ruin. The theory which has been advanced says that these ventures are too large to be run simply with a view toward profit. This concept is extraordinarily opportune whenever the result of conducting business while fundamentally renouncing profitability is the bankruptcy of the enterprise. It is opportune, because at this moment the same theory demands the intervention of the state for support of enterprises which are too big to be allowed to fail.

    III

    It is true that socialism and interventionism have not yet succeeded in completely eliminating capitalism. If they had, we Europeans, after centuries of prosperity, would rediscover the meaning of hunger on a massive scale. Capitalism is still prominent enough that new industries are coming into existence, and those already established are improving and expanding their equipment and operations. All the economic advances which have been and will be made stem from the persistant remnant of capitalism in our society. But capitalism is always harrassed by the intervention of the government and must pay as taxes a considerable part of its profits in order to defray the inferior productivity of public enterprise.

    The crisis under which the world is presently suffering is the crisis of interventionism and of state and municipal socialism, in short the crisis of anticapitalist policies. Capitalist society is guided by the play of the market mechanism. On that issue there is no difference of opinion. The market prices bring supply and demand into congruence and determine the direction and extent of production. It is from the market that the capitalist economy receives its sense. If the function of the market as regulator of production is always thwarted by economic policies in so far as the latter try to determine prices, wages, and interest rates instead of letting the market determine them, then a crisis will surely develop.

    Bastiat has not failed, but rather Marx and Schmoller.

  • Ohio Withdraws Ban On Hydroxychloroquine; Fauci Accused Of 'Misinformation Campaign'
    Ohio Withdraws Ban On Hydroxychloroquine; Fauci Accused Of ‘Misinformation Campaign’

    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 07/30/2020 – 20:39

    Update (1240ET): The Ohio Board of Pharmacy withdrew a rule preventing the use of hydroxychloroquine to treat COVID-19 after Governor Mike DeWine called on the board to halt the rule, according to the Dayton Daily News.

    “As a result of the feedback received by the medical and patient community and at the request of Gov. DeWine, the State of Ohio Board of Pharmacy has withdrawn proposed rule 4729:5-5-21 of the Administrative Code,” reads a Thursday statement from the board.

    “Therefore, prohibitions on the prescribing of chloroquine and hydroxychloroquine in Ohio for the treatment of COVID-19 will not take effect at this time.

    The board will reexamine the rule with the help of the State Medical Board of Ohio, clinical experts and stakeholders to determine the next step.

    The rule, which was scheduled to go into effect today, would prohibit pharmacies from selling or dispensing hydroxychloroquine and chloroquine for coronavirus unless the use is approved by the board’s executive director. The rule would also void all previous approvals of the drug. –Dayton Daily News

    On Thursday, DeWine said that he agreed with FDA commissioner Stephen Hahn, who said that the decision to use HCQ should be between doctor and patient.

    “Therefore, I am asking the Ohio Board of Pharmacy to halt their new rule prohibiting the selling or dispensing of hydroxychloroquine or chloroquine for the treatment or prevention of COVID-19,” DeWine said earlier in the day.

    *  *  *

    Update (1240ET): Ohio Governor Mike DeWine (R) says he agrees with FDA Commissioner Steven Hahn (see below), and has asked the state medical board to “halt their new rule prohibiting the selling or dispensing of hydroxychloroquine or chloroquine for the treatment or prevention of COVID-19.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    *  *  *

    With the science behind the use of hydroxychloroquine (HCQ) to treat COVID-19 far from settled, more than a few people have noted the aggressive campaign against the widely-prescribed anti-malaria drug.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The anti-HCQ push has infected Silicon Valley as well – as tech giants have been labeling pro-hydroxychloroquine content as ‘misinformation’ – most recently banishing a press conference by a group of doctors touting the drug from just about every platform.

    To that end, Yale epidemiologist Dr. Harvey Risch has accused Dr. Anthony Fouci of waging a “misinformation campaign” against the drug, according to Just The News.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    On Tuesday during an interview on “Good Morning America,” Fauci further downplayed the drug’s purported benefit, claiming that “the overwhelming prevailing clinical trials that have looked at the efficacy of hydroxychloroquine have indicated that it is not effective in [treating] coronavirus disease.

    Risch, however, is sharply criticizing Fauci’s approach to evaluating the drug’s effectiveness, arguing that repeated trials and tests have shown that it is markedly effective at treating COVID-19 so long as it is administered properly. 

    On Tuesday, Risch went further, charging in an interview with Just the News that Fauci is perpetrating a “misinformation campaign” in his opposition to the drug. 

    Fauci “has been maintaining a studious position that only randomized controlled trial evidence has any value,” Risch said, “and everything else he calls anecdotal.” –Just The News

    In a Newsweek Op-Ed published last week, Risch called HCQ “the key to defeating COVID-19,” and said it was particularly effective in conjunction with one of two antibiotics and zinc, saying it has “shown to be highly effective.”

    Risch said the drug could save 100,000 lives if widely deployed.

    Meanwhile, Food and Drug Administration (FDA) Commissioner Stephen Hahn noted that some medical observational studies “suggest a benefit” to the drug, also according to Just The News.

    So the FDA looks at all what we call ‘the totality of data,’” Hahn said in a Tuesday morning radio interview with Florida radio host Drew Steele. “There are observational studies that suggest a benefit. There are five randomized trials that did not show a benefit to hydroxychloroquine, both in the prophylactic setting and in the treatment — both early and late.” –Just The News

    More recently, Rep. Louie Gohmert (R-TX) announced that he would be taking “zinc, erythromycin and hydroxychloroquine” after being diagnosed with COVID-19 on Wednesday.

    If you’re looking for those positive studies, click into this thread:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    And for an even longer thread on positive reports involving HCQ, click this tweet:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  • Vegas Bust – Recovery Road Could Take 3 Years 
    Vegas Bust – Recovery Road Could Take 3 Years 

    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 07/30/2020 – 20:20

    Las Vegas economic analyst Jeremy Aguero warned that Sin City’s economic recovery could take between 18 and 36 months to revert to 2019 growth activity levels, reported Las Vegas Review-Journal.  

    Aguero said Vegas has a long way to go before a vibrant recovery is seen, dashing hopes for a V-shaped recovery in the back half of 2020. He recently spoke at the Las Vegas Perspective, an online presentation focusing on the economic impacts of the gaming industry due to the virus-induced recession, hosted by the Las Vegas Global Economic Alliance.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    “Our economy is in recession,” Aguero said, warning that the velocity of job loss today was much greater than the economic crash a decade ago. He said the Great Recession left 96,000 people out of a job within 2.5 years, this time around, 280,000 people lost their jobs in less than two months. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    He said airlines serving Las Vegas would struggle for years. The latest data from Las Vegas’ McCarran International Airport shows 11.7 million passengers passed through the airport in 1H20, compared to 25.2 million in 1H19. 

    Casinos in Vegas reopened June 4 under strict social distancing measures, reduced occupancy levels, and mask-wearing. 

    Last week, multiple Vegas casinos notified staff of furloughs and possible layoffs were ahead.

    Here’s what MGM Resorts International told their employees:

    “As you were previously informed, MGM Employees who are not recalled on or before August 31, 2020, will be separated from the company on that date and it now looks like that will, unfortunately, include the majority of employees working in our division,” the letter, signed by the president of the division George Kliavkoff, said.

    The business environment is worsening as Tropicana Las Vegas is now for sale. 

    Washington believes continued rescue packages worth trillions of dollars will save the economy, though it might not be enough to save Vegas. 

    But, Robinhood daytraders panic bought casino stocks: 

    MGM

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    LVS

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The great Vegas bust is underway. 

  • Dunkin' Could Close 1,150 Global Locations
    Dunkin’ Could Close 1,150 Global Locations

    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 07/30/2020 – 20:00

    By Jonathan Maze of Restaurant Business,

    Dunkin’ could close as many as 800 U.S. locations this year, and another 350 internationally, as part of a global effort to reassess its real estate portfolio and shed locations that don’t fit with the company’s long-term plan. The company revealed the possible closures Thursday, saying that it is working with operators to close the locations.  CEO Dave Hoffmann said the closures would be concentrated on “off-strategy locations” that typically have “low average weekly sales.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The 800 U.S. restaurants slated for closure includes 450 restaurants inside of Speedway locations Dunkin’ previously said were slated to close.

    “Since this management took over, we have been focused on quality over quantity,” Hoffmann said.

    He said that as the company looked at its future strategy, “these locations weren’t part of that future. They were unprofitable for franchisees. We felt like it was the right management move.”

    CFO Kate Jaspon said on Thursday that if all 800 U.S. restaurants were to close, that would represent 8% of the domestic store base, but just 2% of system sales. On average, she said, the restaurants the company wants to close generate a quarter of the system’s average weekly sales and have lower profit margins.

    The stores are “well below average for sales and profitability,” Jaspon said. “Closing these restaurants will enable [franchisees] to do greater investment in the brand.”

    Dunkin’ operates nearly 9,600 U.S. locations, and more than 13,000 globally. Its U.S. operators have already been closing some restaurants—franchisees closed 40 more restaurants than they opened during the second quarter ended June 27. That includes 10 Speedway restaurants. The chain’s U.S. same-store sales declined nearly 19% in the quarter, but executives said that those results improved through the quarter.

    Currently, they said, about 4% of domestic locations are still temporarily closed, including 70 traditional restaurants and 300 that are primarily in transportation hubs and on college campuses. As the locations closed, executives said they took the opportunity to assess its real estate portfolio and look at weaker locations. It is working to convince operators of restaurants that cannot be remodeled in its new design or can’t be moved to a more higher traffic area.

    Most of the closings, Jaspon said, are expected to take place this year. “The closures position us and our franchisees for more profitable future growth,” she said. Hoffmann described the closures as a “good scrubbing of the portfolio” to weed out unprofitable locations that don’t fit with the company’s long-term plan.

    Nor does the effort represent a shift out of its traditional urban markets. Those locations have more likely struggled during the pandemic, in part because they’ve been in hard-hit areas and rely on consumers walking in the door.

    In contrast, its newer Midwest drive-thru units have performed better and saw positive sales at the end of the quarter as consumers opted for low-contact service. But Hoffmann said that the company is not going away from its urban locations. “There’s a great place for us in urban markets,” he said. “As the economy opens up, they have performed well for us.”

  • As Americans Ditch Airports And Hotels, RV Boom Saved GDP From Even Bigger Collapse
    As Americans Ditch Airports And Hotels, RV Boom Saved GDP From Even Bigger Collapse

    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 07/30/2020 – 19:40

    RV travel is booming this summer as American families ditch airports and hotels for campgrounds. 

    Reuters is reporting new data via the RV Industry Association (RVIA) shows wholesale shipments of RVs posted their highest monthly total in June since October 2018. Shipments totaled 40,462 units in June or about +10.8% YoY. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Shipments in April plunged because of lockdowns, were down 82% YoY, and -30% in May. 

    “We didn’t anticipate this turn being as strong as it has been,” Craig Kirby, RVIA’s president. “People don’t want to fly, they don’t want to stay in a hotel. In an RV, you can cook your own meals and sleep in your own bed.”

    In late May, baby boomers, cooped-up in homes, exiting lockdowns, panic bought RVs to get out of the house and travel, since flying on airplanes or going on cruises were not in their best interest. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Kirby said some manufacturers are developing RVs “with dedicated workspaces that allow for the desks and other systems to be stowed away once work is over.” 

    He said mobile workspaces in RVs could be the next big trend for the industry – especially since people can now remotely work. 

    Google search term “By RV” explodes to record highs.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Kirby said first-time buyers are surging. Dealers are reporting 50% to 80% of sales are first-time purchasers. A year ago, that figure was around 25% to 35%. He said RVs are attracting millennials. 

    Cross-generational panic buying of RVs was so great in Q2 GDP, it partially saved growth from crashing further, which registered at a mindboggling 32.9% annualized rate. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Winnebago Industries Inc.’s CEO Michael Happe said a turnaround in the industry has begun.

    “We have seen an incredible rebound in retail demand and dealer demand since early May across all our businesses,” Happe told investors on a conference call last month.

    Dealerships have also reported increasing sales since lockdowns ended. Olathe Ford RV Center’s general manager Daryn Anderson told The Kansas City Star that folks have turned to RVs because they feel it’s safer than airplanes and hotels. He said RV demand is exploding. 

    “All of a sudden, the phone started ringing and the internet got busy,” Anderson said. “The next thing we knew, the last two months have been records by huge margins.”

    Anderson attributed this boost in business to people’s desire to get out of the house.

    “I think people are quarantining, but they’re also tired of sitting inside their houses and not being able to go out and do things,” Anderson said. “So, they’re buying campers and maybe going to a lake or a state park or a national park. They’re far enough away from the next person, and they can still have a little bit of an adventure and be able to enjoy themselves.”

    While the pandemic has clearly altered the shift in how people travel, there is also reason to believe, with at least ten million people about to get evicted, America’s working poor could end up moving from apartments and homes to mobile RV trailers. 

  • Flynn Update: Order To Dismiss Case "Vacated"; Case Will Be Reheard In August
    Flynn Update: Order To Dismiss Case “Vacated”; Case Will Be Reheard In August

    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 07/30/2020 – 19:20

    Authored by Sara Carter via SaraACarter.com,

    The internal battle in the courts and Department of Justice regarding the case against former national security advisor Michael Flynn has been nothing short of a roller coaster ride. Now it seems the decision by a federal appeals court is prolonging the case.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The full U.S. Court of Appeals for the D.C. Circuit issued the order Thursday that challenged the Department of Justice’s request last month to drop the case against Flynn.

    That order will allow the courts to revisit U.S. District Judge Emmet G. Sullivan’s request that the case not be dismissed and the case will be reheard by the full federal appeals court in Washington D.C.

    The order to hear the set oral arguments is now scheduled for August 11.

    Sidney Powell, Flynn’s defense attorney, could not be immediately reached for comment.

    “Further ordered is that the court’s order filed June 24, 2020 be vacated,” stated the order.

    It also stated that an “oral argument before the en banc court 9:30 am on Tuesday, August 11.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    U.S. Attorney General William Barr disclosed this week that he has appointed U.S. Attorney John Bash from the Western District of Texas, to investigate the “unmasking” Flynn that led to the national security leak in The Washington Post.

    The Post’s David Ignatius revealed in January, 2017 the details of a classified telephone conversation between Flynn and former Russian Ambassador Sergey Kislyak. That conversation had been intercepted by U.S. intelligence officials monitoring the Russian Ambassadors communications.

  • Hong Kong Police Arrest 4 Teens For Mere Online Posts Under New Security Law
    Hong Kong Police Arrest 4 Teens For Mere Online Posts Under New Security Law

    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 07/30/2020 – 19:00

    The ill effects of the Hong Kong national security law which took effect June 30 are continuing to be felt. Hong Kong pro-democracy, anti-Beijing activists have continued to be on edge and now largely ‘underground’ since last month’s formal passage of the sweeping national security law in response to the mass protests and unrest which gripped the city for much of last year. 

    On Wednesday four activists were arrested for merely making online posts expressing pro-independence sentiment. The AP reports that all of the them are young, between 16- and 18-years, and were further said to have been ‘organizing’.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    HK police in riot gear, file via Getty Images/BBC

    “Our investigation showed that a group has recently announced on social media that they have set up an organization for Hong Kong independence,” said Li Kwai-wah, head of the new HK police unit tasked with enforcing the law.

    “They said they want to establish a Hong Kong republic, and that they will unreservedly fight for it,” the police commander described.

    “They also said they want to unite all pro-independence groups in Hong Kong for this purpose,” he added.

    When the law took effect at the start of the month, a few prominent anti-Beijing activists decided to flee, such as Nathan Law, on fears the law would certainly be used to punish their activities, and even apply retroactively. 

    This also as the law harshly cracks down on dissent with possible maximum life jail sentences for some crimes, largely dependent on the ambiguous and highly open to interpretation (with no independent review) question of what constitutes ‘foreign interference’ or sponsorship of a ‘terror’ organization. 

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 30th July 2020

  • New Study Predicts Global Population As Low As 6.29 Billion By 2100, Shattering Most Climate-Alarmist Models
    New Study Predicts Global Population As Low As 6.29 Billion By 2100, Shattering Most Climate-Alarmist Models

    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 07/30/2020 – 02:45

    Much of the basis for concern pushed by climate change alarmists has hinged on estimates of the global population (and its corresponding carbon footprint) expanding to between 9.4 billion and 12.7 billion by the year 2100. These estimates were based on the 2019 United Nations World Population Prospects report.

    Now, a new study published in The Lancet on July 14, 2020 flips those population estimates – and the corresponding climate change alarmism – on its head. According to the study, highlighted in a WSJ op-ed called “Snooze The Climate Alarms”, the global population is now being estimated to be as low as 6.29 billion by 2100; about 33% lower than current U.N. projections.

    The new study suggests that the global population will peak at 9.7 billion in 2064 and will then fall to as low as 6.29 billion, if the U.N.’s Sustainable Development Goals for education and contraceptive are met in full. If those goals are not met, the study suggests the population could still drop to 8.8 billion by 2100. 

    Even under the 8.8 billion population scenario, the difference is profound. China would fall to third in world population rankings behind India and Nigeria. Places like Japan, South Korea, Italy, Portugal and Spain could all see their populations decline 50% from their highs. America would be estimated to have a population of 336 million, only slightly more than today.

    The economic growth that is expected to take place globally would be a positive in keeping the population under control, the report says, as it would drive future improvements in health care and education for women around the world – including information about contraception and urbanization – and would result in declining fertility rates. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The impact on climate emissions, from the same economic growth and population declines, would also be profound. More important, the study shows a link between economic progress and combating climate change that most parts of the “green” movement ignore.

    The WSJ op-ed then talks about the importance of policy makers in realizing these links. “Conventional strategies for combating climate change are too narrowly conceived,” author Walter Mead writes. “A focused global effort to ensure that the education and contraceptive SDG targets are fully met could have a significantly greater long-term impact on emissions than more-expensive and unpopular policy choices like carbon taxes or the mandated use of expensive renewables.”

    Reproduction is put into focus as one of several human behaviors that changes with greater wealth and better education. Those with access to both also are more inclined to preserve their natural surroundings, Mead says. Poor countries may be more likely to cash in on the natural resources they have available to them, but rich countries invest in repairing such damage, he argues.

    Mead also argues in favor of factory farming, which often draws the ire of the “green” movement:

    The transition from traditional agriculture to more-intensive “factory farms” offends green sensibilities but can achieve green goals. Factory farms produce more food on less land and are often more carbon-efficient than the small-scale organic farms beloved by hipsters. The U.S. today produces far more food than in the 19th century, but as marginal land is taken out of production, the forests return. In America, forests have been expanding for more than 50 years, and even though population has more than tripled, there is more forested land in the country today than there was in 1910. In Europe, forested land expanded by an area the size of Portugal between 1990 and 2015.

    He concludes: “If economic development spreads the blessings of greater freedom and greater education to more of the world, popular demands for cleaner air, cleaner water and the protection of nature will only grow.”

  • NordStream 2 Splits The Western World
    NordStream 2 Splits The Western World

    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 07/30/2020 – 02:00

    Via GEFIRA,

    If we were to paint the current situation with a broad brush, we would receive the following simplified picture.

    • The European Union is split into two camps: the old and new member states.

    • The West is split across the Atlantic: it is – roughly – Washington against Paris and Berlin.

    • The world is split into three rivalling superpowers: the United States (strong military and strong economy), Russia (strong military, weak economy) and China (weak military, strong economy).

    Western Europe gravitates more to Russia than Eastern Europe does; Eastern Europe in turn gravitates more to the United States than Western Europe does.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The state of affairs on the Old Continent is as follows.

    [1] Germany wants a stable energy supply in the form of natural gas and from among a number of providers it has decided on Russia because

    [2] Russia has large natural gas deposits and being in need of hard currency is willing to sell its energy resources to any bidder.

    [3] Germany and Russia countries entered a commercial agreement which resulted in the construction and completion of one pipeline laid on the bottom of the Baltic: NordStream 1.

    [4] Since the capacity of one pipeline was not sufficient to satisfy the needs of Germany and other West European states, another agreement was concluded to build a second pipe along the bottom of the Baltic – NordStream 2 – which is now near completion.

    [5] Both pipelines sidetrack eastern European countries – Ukraine, Poland, Czechia and Slovakia – which makes them alarmed because soon Russia will be able to cut off its gas supplies to and through those countries – the Yamal (Poland, Belarus) and Brotherhood (Czechia, Slovakia, Ukraine) pipelines – while continuing the provision of gas to Western Europe, thus breaking the economic solidarity of the European Union.

    [6] The United States helped Western Europe out of trouble during (a) the First World War (against Germany), (b) The Second World War (against Germany) and – (c) the Cold War (against the Soviet Union) and so feels entitled to continue in this role.

    [7] The United States perceives itself as the equivalent of the ancient Roman Empire in guarding the Pax Americana (its national and imperial interests) throughout the world but especially Europe; like the Roman Empire it has its military bases (legions) deployed to many parts of the world, including Europe and in particular Germany. Washington feels threatened by Russian economic inroads in Europe.

    [8] Western Europe has long striven to emancipate itself from American guardianship, while Eastern Europe (in particular Poland as of now) has been looking to the United States for protection against Russia, the successor to the Soviet Union, because some Eastern European countries have had bitter historical experiences connected with Russia and the Soviet Union: (a) Poland (where anti-Russian sentiment is the strongest) was under Russian rule throughout the 19th century and under Soviet dominance for almost half a century after the Second World War; (b) two Hungarian national uprisings were suppressed respectively by Russia in 1849 and the Soviet Union in 1956; (c) Romania lost to the Soviet Union the whole north-eastern province of Moldova (whose inhabitants are Romanians) in 1940. The United States can therefore rely on Eastern European countries and use them as bridgeheads against Western Europe (Germany in particular) and its dealings with Russia.

    [9] The European Union is split over the issue of the two pipelines connecting Russia and Germany. This split resulted in passing Directive 2009/73/EC, which is aimed against Russian commercial dominance as it requires the so called ownership unbundling, which means that (a) energy generation, (b) energy supply and (c) energy transmission must belong to different legal persons. This measure is said to have been designed to (a) guard against Europe’s dependence on one external supplier of energy, (b) counteract monopoly and (c) provide European customers with a choice. The requirement of split ownership of energy generation, supply and transmission is going to make life difficult for Russia or – to be precise – Russian Gazprom.

    [10] In turn the United States in a glaringly patronising way passed the Protecting Europe’s Energy Security Act, which envisages punitive sanctions against any entity taking part in the construction of NordStream 2. The act is supposed to protect Western Europe – obviously against its will – against Russian dominance and ensure for the United States customers for its natural gas.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Source: BiznesAlert.pl.

    The question arises why the United States wants to defend Western Europe and especially Germany against its will? Is it possible that German leaders do not see that the two pipelines pose a threat to the independence of their country?

    The answer is many-faceted.

    • It may be that the German leaders prefer Russian rather than American dependence.

    • It may be that they have no choice: the North Sea sources are for one reason or another not an option, nor is the gas from the Middle East.

    • It may also be that the German elites are much more interested in their own income than in the condition of their country, still less their nation to which they feel little commitment. Former Chancellor Gerhard Schröder, for one, was very much involved with the NordStream project.

    • The German investors may view both NordStream pipelines as sources of private and corporate stable income. To this end they may be playing a double game: on the one hand encouraging Russians to continue with the construction of the pipe, while on the other shedding crocodile tears over Europe’s growing dependence on the eastern gas provider and thus allowing for the European Union to pass the said directive that will also enable them – if they create energy transmission companies that will take over some of the income from Gazprom – to draw larger benefits from the NordStream project.

    Some Eastern European countries, while remaining ardent member-states of the Union, are doing their best to disrupt the German-Russian deal, which overlaps with Washington’s plans. This does not mean that we are facing any new exits from the European Union: far from it. The eastern member-states are firmly committed to their participation in it. Rather, the Union is going to be somewhat weakened because it is divided against itself, so to say. The eastern EU member-states are perhaps oversensitive when it comes to their dependence on Russia. Their leaders tend to think that it is Russia which wants to have control over them. They seem to be overlooking the fact that the NordStream deal has two parts to it: Russia and Germany. If Berlin cared about the sovereignty of the eastern member-states, it would not have entered into the agreement with Moscow. Yes, bypassing Poland, Ukraine, Czechia and Slovakia Russia can exert economic pressure on these countries by curtailing gas supplies to them without at the same time having to endanger its relations with Germany, the Netherlands or Great Britain. Yet, the two NordStream pipelines are as much an advantage to the Western members of the Union because they do without transit money that would otherwise have to be paid to Belarus, Poland, Ukraine, Slovakia and Czechia, thus making the gas cheaper and because – if the ownership unbundling principle is effected – the West may also have a larger share in the gas supply.

    New member states seem to be left to their own devices by their older partners. Washington is their only hope, but Washington is merely acting in defence of its own interests, eying suspiciously Berlin and Moscow. Germany has built the present equivalent of the old project of Mitteleuropa – Middle Europe Project – which meant creating a ring of economically dependent states in Central Europe. At present Berlin to a larger degree than Moscow controls the destiny of its eastern and southern, close and farther neighbours. Germany’s agents of influence operating in Eastern Europe will make every endeavour to eventually bring to power in Warsaw, Prague, Bratislava, Budapest, Bucharest and Kiev people who will take into account German interests. American agents of influence with do the same. If Berlin prevails, then Germany will strengthen its grip on the European Union; if America prevails, then the EU is going to be weakened.

  • The Biggest Fraud Ever, Part 1: The Hocus "Science" Behind Lockdowns
    The Biggest Fraud Ever, Part 1: The Hocus “Science” Behind Lockdowns

    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 07/29/2020 – 23:45

    Authored by Barry Norris via Argonaut Capital,

    Fraud (from 14th century Latin) n – deceit, trickery, intentional perversion of truth in order to induce another to part with something of value or to surrender legal rights: and art of deceiving or misrepresenting; imposter, cheat, one who is not who that person pretends to be: something that is not what it appears to be

    Hoax (probable contraction of hocus, circa 1796) n – an act intended to trick or dupe: something accepted or established by fraud or fabrication; v – to trick into believing or accepting as genuine something false and often preposterous

    Swindle (from Old English, coined circa 1782, “to vanish”) v – to take money or property by fraud or deceit.

    – “Great Hoaxes, Swindles, Scandals, Cons, Stings and Scams” Joyce Madison, 1992

    Frauds often have powerful counter-narratives.

    When Wirecard went straight from a DAX-30 €12bn capitalisation to insolvency in June, we wondered not only why it had taken so long for the auditor to seek confirmation of cash balances but why so many investors had been hoodwinked for so long by its empty claims to have been a legitimate player at the epicentre of the digital payments industry. We had also long been inclined to believe that $4bn FTSE-100 member NMC Healthcare’s management had been siphoning off shareholders’ assets (and that the same was true of its smaller sister “fintech” company Finablr), but were bemused to see continued institutional demand for insider share placings and belief in faked takeover rumours, right up until the declared insolvency in March.

    Whilst we think there is plentiful potential for further stock-market flops it is time to consider whether these serious corporate failings have now been dwarfed by the unnecessary damage caused by the “science” behind lockdown and the current parallel focus on a vaccine as the sole long-term COVID solution.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Part 1 – The hocus “science” behind lockdown

    When lockdown was imposed, we were told we were facing a second Spanish flu pandemic (thought to have killed up to 50 million people); that hospitals would be overrun and there would be 500,000 deaths in the UK alone. This was a powerful and emotive narrative, but it was never true. Governments and an obedient media focused exclusively on Imperial College’s now discredited doomsday scenario built on a hypothetical, badly coded model5, ignoring its author’s history of failed doomsday predictions and the different views of other scientists.

    Alternative evidence-based (i.e. theories based on facts) population samples already existed: the most prominent being the Diamond Princess Cruise Ship; which at the end of February accounted for over half of all confirmed infections outside of China. “Cruise ships are like an ideal experiment of a closed population”, according to Stamford Professor of Medicine John Ioannidis. “You know exactly who is there and at risk and you can measure everyone” .

    Quarantined for over a month after a virus outbreak, the entire cruise ship ‘closed population’ of 3,711 passengers and crew, with an average age of 58,  were repeatedly tested. There were 705 cases (19% total infection rate) and six deaths (a Case Fatality Rate of just 1%) by the end of March (eventually 14 in total). This compared to 116 deaths that would have been predicted by the Imperial model).

    Over half of the cruise ship cases were asymptomatic, at a time when the official “science” behind the lockdown, Prof. Neil Ferguson (UK), dismissed the lack of any evidence for a high proportion of cases so mild that they had no symptoms and Dr Anthony Fauci (US) had written in the New England Journal of Medicine that in the event of a high proportion of asymptomatic cases, the COVID mortality rate would ultimately be “akin to a severe seasonal influenza” (a statement which he now at least seems to have clearly forgotten in his enthusiasm for a vaccine solution).

    The cruise ship deaths were exclusively amongst an over 70’s age cohort. Although the Diamond Princess sample size was small it remains the earliest and most accurate predictor of mortality, infection and asymptomatic cases. Extrapolating this data to the wider, younger population would logically lead to downward revision on the mortality risk and upwards revisions to the level of asymptomatic cases. COVID outbreaks aboard naval ships with younger populations confirmed this: only 1 death and 3 hospitalised cases out of 1,156 infections on the USS Theodore Roosevelt; zero deaths out of 1,046 confirmed cases on the Charles de Gaulle. Even in ships which could not carry out effective social distancing the virus mortality rate, whilst a serious public health risk, was certainly not the “Spanish flu”.

    As more testing was carried out across population samples (and not just on the patients hospitalised) studies came to the same conclusion: the rate of infection was higher than thought with more harmless cases and therefore the ultimate mortality risk was much lower than originally claimed.  Despite this empirical evidence and the contrarian opinions of other expert epidemiologists which have since proven to be much more accurate, the Imperial College virus narrative of “the worst pandemic in 100 years”(Fig. 1) did not change: governments, the media and the official “science” doubled down on the “dialogue of doom”. Ferguson then broke his own lockdown in a tryst with his married lover and justified it by claiming he had antibody immunity (which given what we now know about decaying antibodies may not have been correct).

    Fig 1. COVID-19 mortality in perspective

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The population mortality risk of the virus was initially estimated at 3.8% by the WHO which had arrived at this number simply by dividing the number of Chinese deaths by the number of confirmed cases, ignoring the fact that only a small proportion of likely infected people had actually been tested; that asymptomatic cases were likely to be significantly underrepresented in testing and that the more serious cases were likely highly correlated to serious symptoms. This basic statistical error of simply dividing deaths by reported infections not only exaggerated the severity of the risk but led directly to policy error on hospital capacity and care home deaths.

    Media reporting also intentionally failed to acknowledge that mortality risk was highly skewed to age (median mortality age of 8229) in order to scare the entire population into observing lockdown with falsely exaggerated media reports of young and healthy people dying from the virus. Mortality risk amongst the elderly was skewed to those with existing health issues (the presence of comorbidities) with Italy reporting that 96% of virus fatalities also suffered from other illnesses, but this did not fit the desired narrative. Whereas the Spanish flu in 1918 had disproportionately killed the young and  healthy – meaning that each death lost more years before predicted average mortality – COVID deaths on average occurred at or beyond average life expectancy, which was always consistent with a normal mortality risk curve, and seasonal non-pandemic coronavirus.

    Fig 2. UK COVID deaths by age and presence of comorbidities

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    It was also originally wrongly assumed that the hospitalisation rate of the virus based on Chinese data could be as high as 20% (ten times higher than influenza) hence the focus on ensuring that hospital intensive care units were not over-burdened. The overall hospitalisation rate in New York City is reported as 25% based on reported cases but this figure comes down to just 1.5% based on predicted infections based on antibody tests (55,000 hospitalisations out of an estimated 2.7 million infected). New intensive care hospital capacity was built (but never used), non-COVID treatment cancelled with likely consequences for excess mortality far more disastrous than COVID and infected hospital patients moved to care homes with disastrous consequences. This policy mistake occurred primarily as a result of panic and the statistical error of drastically over-estimating the mortality and hospitalisation rate through under-estimation of asymptomatic cases. Whilst widespread testing was not necessarily available, public health authorities could have studied the facts of the COVID outbreaks on the boats rather than rely on Ferguson’s “rubbish-in-rubbish-out” model.

    Deaths in care homes are now estimated to have accounted for half of all COVID related mortality (Fig. 3). Similar failures to isolate COVID patients in hospitals are thought to have been responsible for up to 20% of all infections in the UK and 40% in Wuhan. All of this could have been mitigated by isolation of those infected and those treating the infected which need not have been dependent on a general lockdown of the entire population. When this point was put to Ferguson he responded by dismissing the specific isolation of the “old and vulnerable” as “wishful thinking” simply because it had previously never been done, as if putting the wider economy into lockdown was simpler, with precedent of success and no unintended negative consequences. The accusation remains that lockdown was at best a sledgehammer to crack a nut: mitigating nosocomial infections never required lockdown.

    Fig 3. Care Home deaths by country

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    New York State Governor Andrew Cuomo (who was to preside over the worst mortality rate (Fig. 6) of any US state) summed up the emotional policy response when announcing a strict lockdown in March with the justification that “if everything we do saves just one life, I’ll be happy”. There was no acknowledgment that lives were at risk from other causes of death due to lack of treatment and that this risk could be magnified by the lockdown. Did Cuomo realise that there were on average 150,000 daily deaths globally of which half were accounted for by cardiovascular diseases and cancer, which could also be mitigated if targeted by public policy with the same urgency as COVID? The 650,000 reported COVID deaths worldwide are rarely put into the perspective of 33.4 million deaths globally so far this year.  Moreover, it was becoming clear that the mortality risk for most of the population from COVID, whilst not zero, was statistically lower or comparable to an average influenza season, road accidents or suicide (Fig. 4) But perhaps because COVID was a new, unknown cause of death, proportionality got lost: the mission was not to just “flatten” the infection curve but to be seen trying to prevent ALL COVID deaths.

    Fig 4. UK COVID deaths by age vs. other causes of mortality

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Nevertheless, Imperial College continued to argue that lockdowns had saved millions of lives (based solely on reality being radically different from their doomsday model). By now it had become clear that there was a significant element of society that enjoyed authoritarianism for its own sake and whatever the evidence to the contrary, were now inclined to believe that the withdrawal of civil liberties and economic destruction in the name of protection from COVID (but not any other source of mortality risk) was always justified and its proportionality or unintended consequences never questioned. By now Dr Fauci – who had avoided Ferguson’s personal disgrace – had become a household name in the US. He continually warned about the dangers of re-opening too quickly, but when challenged about “trade-offs” for the economy or other non-COVID health factors, of what he regarded as an “inconvenient” situation resulting from lockdown, it was clear that his advice was solely one-dimensional:

    “I’m a scientist, a physician, and a public health official. I give advice, according to the best scientific evidence. There are a number of other people who come into that and give advice that are more related to the things that you spoke about, the need to get the country back open again, and economically. I don’t give advice about economic things. I don’t give advice about anything other than public health.”

    The Swedish government had been unique in recognising the trade-offs between COVID public health and other factors a rational, non-panicked, responsible government might consider and had chosen to implement social distancing but not lockdown. It therefore became a dangerous experiment which could not be reported as succeeding whatever the objective truth. Whilst even Ferguson begrudgingly accepted that Swedish mortality was a fraction (6%) of his prediction of 96,000 deaths by June (he claimed because Sweden had in his view done a kind of phantom lockdown without telling the outside world), other lockdown fanatics began distorting statistics by highlighting Swedish infections (Fig. 5) on a cumulative basis or comparing to other Scandinavian countries with different situations; as Sweden had a higher initial infection rate in a larger and more densely populated country, so the outcome could never be compared as a measure of success).

    Fig 5. Media reporting of Swedish COVID deaths

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>
    More outrageously, when the leading Swedish epidemiologist admitted to “mistakes” in the management of care homes (which accounted for 75% of Sweden’s 5,500 deaths with an average age of 86) this was bizarrely and widely reported by supposedly reputable media outlets as an admission of failure of the overall policy.

    To put the Swedish “failure” to lockdown into further perspective, there are around 2,000 -3,000 deaths (from a 10 million population) in Sweden annually in a normal flu season. Nevertheless, for lockdown to have been justified the Swedish mortality rate should have been anomalous – it was not (Fig. 6). The control group and the experimental group produced similar mortality outcomes.

    Fig 6. The Swedish Anomaly?

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Not only did Ferguson’s lockdown model over-estimate Sweden’s deaths by a factor of 20 but Sweden also produced the same mortality and infection curve as the UK (and most other similarly urbanised European countries) and a significantly flatter infection and mortality curve than New York (Fig. 7) even comparing Stockholm with New York State (Fig. 8) (with Stockholm having over 2.5x more population density that NY State).  

    Fig 7. Sweden’s curve flattens without lockdown

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Fig 8. Stockholm’s curve compared to New York State

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The “shape of the curve” was unaltered by differing lockdown policy. At best the efficacy of lockdown was unproven but then there were also the unintended consequences and trade-offs that Fauci might not consider but responsible governments might . If it were a drug trial, lockdown would have been pronounced a failure and the experiment stopped.

    Subsequently, a range of scientific studies have now shown that government actions had no statistically significant reductions in the number of critical cases or overall mortality. Given the economic catastrophe, social breakdown and neglect of non-COVID healthcare this was a devastating policy error. When by July (Fig. 9) the virus had all but disappeared from Sweden there was no positive acknowledgement from other governments which had implemented lockdown and no reporting from their lapdogs in the media.

    Fig 9. The virus disappears from Sweden to be acknowledged by…complete silence

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Just silence.

    *  *  *

    Fully hyper-linked reference list available here

    Part 2 (of 2) – “The Vaccine Swindle” will be released tomorrow

  • Harvard Prof Charged With False Statements, Failing To Report Income From Wuhan University Of Technology
    Harvard Prof Charged With False Statements, Failing To Report Income From Wuhan University Of Technology

    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 07/29/2020 – 23:25

    In what we’re sure is just an honest mistake and total coincidence, Harvard University professor Dr. Charles Lieber was charged yesterday “in a superseding indictment with tax offenses for failing to report income he received from Wuhan University of Technology (WUT) in Wuhan, China.”

    The United States District Attorney of Massachusetts said yesterday that Lieber, who had already been arrested on January 28, 2020, was indicted by a federal grand jury in Boston on two counts of making and subscribing a false income tax return and two counts of failing to file reports of foreign bank and financial accounts with the Internal Revenue Service. Then, in June 2020, Lieber was indicted on two counts of making false statements to federal authorities.

    The DA alleges that Lieber served as the Principal Investigator of the Lieber Research Group at Harvard University, which received more than $15 million in federal research grants between 2008 and 2019. Unbeknownst to his employer, Harvard University, Lieber allegedly became a “Strategic Scientist” at WUT and, later, a contractual participant in China’s Thousand Talents Plan from at least 2012 through 2015.

    China’s Thousand Talents Plan is described as “one of the most prominent Chinese talent recruitment plans designed to attract, recruit and cultivate high-level scientific talent in furtherance of China’s scientific development, economic prosperity and national security.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    He was paid a salary of up to $50,000 per month, living expenses of up to $150,000 and was awarded more than $1.5 million to establish a research lab at WUT. It is alleged that in 2018 and 2019, Lieber lied to federal authorities about his involvement in the Thousand Talents Plan and his affiliation with WUT.

    He is accused of not paying taxes on money earned in 2013 and 2014 and it is alleged that he, together with WUT officials, opened a bank account at a Chinese bank during a trip to Wuhan in 2012. WUT “periodically deposited portions of Lieber’s salary into that account.”

    According to the Mass. DA, “the charge of making false statements provides for a sentence of up to five years in prison, three years of supervised release and a fine of $250,000. The charge of making and subscribing false income tax returns provides for a sentence of up to three years in prison, one year of supervised release and a $100,000 fine. The charge of failing to file an FBAR provides for a sentence of up to five years in prison, three years of supervised release and a fine of $250,000.”

    We reported on Lieber when he was arrested back in January here. We noted the two Chinese nationals he was found to be working with – one a Boston University researcher who was once a lieutenant in the People’s Liberation Army, according to prosecutors, and another who was a cancer researcher who tried to smuggle 21 vials of biological materials in his sock – allegedly.

    “Lieber’s actions look like an unvarnished attempt at espionage, complete with an extremely seductive monetary reward,” we noted at the time.

  • "2020 Is For All The Marbles" – Exposing America's White-Black-Nationalist Color Revolution
    “2020 Is For All The Marbles” – Exposing America’s White-Black-Nationalist Color Revolution

    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 07/29/2020 – 23:05

    Authored (satirically, kinda) by CJ Hopkins via The Consent Factory,

    So, the White Black Nationalist Color Revolution (“made possible in part by GloboCap”) appears to be going extremely well. According to Foreign Policy magazine, the Trump regime is clinging to power, but it’s only a matter of time until the identitarian moderate rebels drive the Putin-backed fascists out of office and restore democracy to the Western world.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Yes, that’s right, just when it looked like the corporate-sponsored, totally organic, peaceful uprising against racism was over, and the Russo-fascist Trump regime had survived, the Global Capitalist Anarchists of Portland and other militant “Resistance” cells have launched a devastating counter-attack against assorted fascist building facades, fascist fences, and stores, and so on, and are going mano-a-mano in the streets with heavily-armed Putin-Nazi goon squads.

    According to The Guardian, and other elements of the underground “Resistance” media, peaceful protesters in Portland have been attacking the fascists with rocks, bottles, improvised explosive devices, and various other peaceful anti-racist projectiles. In Oakland, they peacefully set fire to the courthouse. In Austin, Texas, a peaceful protester armed with an AK-47-style rifle was shot to death by a suspected fascist whose car was peacefully swarmed by a mob after he “tried to aggressively drive past protesters.” In Los Angeles, peaceful anti-racism protesters have been whipped up into such a frenzy of righteous anti-fascist fervor that they are performing flying tackles on the cops, who then promptly beat the snot out of them. And so on … I think you get the picture.

    Portland, Oregon (where just under 6% of the population is Black) has of course been at the vanguard of the revolution, as it has since the Russians stole the election from Hillary Clinton in 2016 by “influencing” gullible African-Americans with a handful of ridiculous Facebook ads, and then installed Donald Trump and the rest of the Putin-Nazi Occupation Government in office. Not only have local Antifa militants been tirelessly fighting gangs of neo-nationalist boneheads you’ve probably never heard of more or less around the clock since then, Portland is also the headquarters of most of the militant Antifa intelligentsia (characters like Alexander Reid Ross, an anti-fascist geography lecturer who inculcates kids with his paranoid theories about the international Duginist-Red-Brown conspiracy to take over the whole world and mass-murder the Jews). So, naturally, Portland is now the epicenter of the White Black Nationalist Color Revolution.

    But this isn’t just the usual Portlandia silliness. This White Black Nationalist Color Revolution has been in the works for the last four years. Since the moment Trump won the Republican nomination, the global capitalist ruling classes have been fomenting racialized polarization, Putin-Nazi paranoia, and other forms of mass hysteria, in anticipation of the events of this summer. The propaganda has remained consistent.

    Both the liberal corporate media and the alternative left media have been predicting that Trump is going to go full-Hitler, impose martial law, proclaim himself Führer, and perpetrate some sort of racialized holocaust… for reasons they’ve never quite been able to explain.

    He hasn’t, of course, so the global capitalist ruling classes had no choice but to unleash a shit-storm of civil unrest to goad him into overreacting … which, no surprise, he was stupid enough to do. Ordering the goon squads into the streets might delight his hardcore right-wing base, but it will alienate the majority of “normal” Americans, who aren’t especially fond of goon squads (unless they’re doing their thing in some faraway country). Most importantly, it will motivate all those non-Clinton-voting Obama voters to go out and vote for “Slappy” Joe Biden, or whichever corporate puppet the Democrats have replaced him with by November 3. That seems to be the general strategy.

    Now, regardless of whether they can pull this off (and whatever your feelings about GloboCap as a de facto hegemonic empire), you have to at least admire their audacity. The part where the mayors of major cities stood down and otherwise hamstrung their cops, and let the “peaceful protesters” run amok, was particularly audacious, in my opinion. That was a serious gamble on GloboCap’s part. Trump could have resisted the urge to go totalitarian and called their bluff. He could have made a speech explaining to Americans exactly how these color revolutions work, how this one is going right by the book, and why he wasn’t going to take the bait, and left the cities in question to their own devices (until the mayors were forced to restore order themselves). But no, tactical genius that he is, he had to order in the goon squads, which, of course, is exactly what the “Resistance” wanted. Now he’s got cities like Philadelphia threatening to order their police to confront and attempt to arrest the federal agents … I assume you see where this is heading.

    The other part that was particularly tricky was segueing from the original protests following the murder of George Floyd by the cops, most of which were authentic expressions of frustration and outrage by actual Black people about systemic racism and police brutality (both of which are very real, of course) to the orchestrated civil unrest that followed, most of which is being coordinated, funded, and carried out by White people. That was also an extremely bold move, but, as the generous folks at The Ford Foundation put it in July of 2016, when they announced that they would be overseeing the funneling of $100 million to organizations in the Black Lives Matter movement:

    “We want to nurture bold experiments…”

    Oh, and speaking of bold experiments, what better setting could there be for a White Black Nationalist Color Revolution than a fake apocalyptic plague that has wrecked the economies of most Western countries, terrorized the masses into mindless obedience, and destabilized whole societies to the point where fanatical, GloboCap-brainwashed brownshirts are macing people in the face for not wearing masks at outdoor picnics and wishing death on entire families if the mothers won’t put masks on their kids?

    No, credit where credit is due to GloboCap. At this point, not only the United States, but countries throughout the global capitalist empire, are in such a state of mass hysteria, and so hopelessly politically polarized, that hardly anyone can see the textbook color revolution that is being executed, openly, right in front of our faces.

    Or … OK, actually, most Trump supporters see it, but most of them, like Trump himself, have mistaken Antifa, Black Lives Matter, and the Democratic Party and their voters for the enemy, when they are merely pawns in GloboCap’s game. Most liberals and leftists cannot see it at all … literally, as in they cannot perceive it. Like Dolores in the HBO Westworld series, “it doesn’t look like anything” to them. They actually believe they are fighting fascism, that Donald Trump, a narcissistic, word-salad-spewing, former game show host, is literally the Return of Adolf Hitler, and that somehow (presumably with the help of Putin) he has staged the current civil unrest, like the Nazis staged the Reichstag fire! (The New York Times will never tire of that one, nor will their liberal and leftist readers, who have been doing battle with an endless series of imaginary Hitlers since … well, since Hitler.)

    I’ve been repeating it my columns for the last four years, and I’m going to repeat it once again. What we are experiencing is not the “return of fascism.” It is the global capitalist empire restoring order, putting down the populist insurgency that took them by surprise in 2016. The White Black Nationalist Color Revolution, the fake apocalyptic plague, all the insanity of 2020 … it has been in the pipeline all along. It has been since the moment Trump won the election.

    No, it is not about Trump, the man. It has never been about Trump, the man, no more than the Obama presidency was ever about Obama, the man. GloboCap needs to crush Donald Trump (and moreover, to make an example of him) not because he is a threat to the empire (he isn’t), but because he became a symbol of populist resistance to global capitalism and its increasingly aggressive “woke” ideology. It is this populist resistance to its ideology that GloboCap is determined to crush, no matter how much social chaos and destruction it unleashes in the process.

    In one of my essays from last October, Trumpenstein Must Be Destroyed, I made this prediction about the year ahead:

    2020 is for all the marbles. The global capitalist ruling classes either crush this ongoing populist insurgency or God knows where we go from here. Try to see it through their eyes for a moment. Picture four more years of Trump … second-term Trump … Trump unleashed.

    Do you really believe they’re going to let that happen, that they are going to permit this populist insurgency to continue for another four years? They are not. What they are going to do is use all their power to destroy the monster, not Trump the man, but Trump the symbol. They are going to drown us in impeachment minutiae, drip, drip, drip, for the next twelve months. The liberal corporate media are going to go full-Goebbels.

    They are going to whip up so much mass hysteria that people won’t be able to think. They are going to pit us one against the other, and force us onto one or the other side of a simulated conflict (Democracy versus the Putin-Nazis) to keep us from perceiving the actual conflict (Global Capitalism versus Populism). They are going to bring us to the brink of civil war …”

    OK, I didn’t see the fake plague coming, but, otherwise, how’s my prediction holding up?

  • Unsolved Mysteries: Who Released The Toxic Plume Of Methane In Florida? 
    Unsolved Mysteries: Who Released The Toxic Plume Of Methane In Florida? 

    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 07/29/2020 – 22:45

    A mysterious toxic plume of methane, estimated to be about 300 metric tons, was released somewhere north of Gainesville, Florida, in early May, eventually reached Jacksonville, according to Bloomberg, citing new satellite data from Bluefield Technologies Inc.

    Yotam Ariel, the founder of Bluefield, said, satellites can now track climate change and aid researchers in finding out who released the plume of methane a couple of months back. 

     

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    h/t Bloomberg

    So far, no energy or industrial company in the area has come forward about the methane discharge. 

    Stanford University professor Adam Brandt said the methane is likely from an “industrial facility, power plant, or gas compression or handling system,” calling it, “a significant leak.”

    The Alachua County Environmental Protection Department told Bloomberg they’re “unaware of any incidents that may have contributed to methane emissions.” 

    Bloomberg dug around and found that Gainesville Regional Utilities (GRU) requested an exemption on its air permits on April 24 to replace a steam turbine generator at its J.R. Kelly power plant, which is about 12 miles south from where the methane cloud was spotted. 

    GRU has yet to disclose when the turbine was replaced. Also near where the plume was detected, the utility company has at least two more power plants, one that runs on natural gas and another on coal. 

    In the same area, Energy Transfer LP’s Florida Gas Transmission has natural gas pipelines and compressor stations. The energy company didn’t report any planned releases or disruptions in early May. 

    Underneath the area of where the plume was spotted is land owned by forest products company Weyerhauser Co. Christine Berish, development review manager for Alachua County’s Department of Growth, said the forestry company “doesn’t have development projects in that area.”

    How the toxic plume was released remains a mystery. 

  • Soros'd – The Chicago Tribune Union’s Depraved Assault On John Kass
    Soros’d – The Chicago Tribune Union’s Depraved Assault On John Kass

    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 07/29/2020 – 22:25

    Authored by Mark Glennon via Wirepoints.org,

    John Kass of the Chicago Tribune is one of maybe three consistently right-of-center columnists in all of Illinois, and certainly the most widely read, so it was only a matter of time before the mob tried to off him.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Now we have it, from the Chicago Tribune Guild, which is that newspaper’s union. It’s perhaps the most vicious effort to date in the cancel culture’s assault on journalism, and it’s based on a charge that’s entirely fabricated.

    Kass wrote last week about the growing sense of lawlessness in urban areas, focusing on the connections between soft-on-crime prosecutors and the political donations that helped elect them from billionaire George Soros.

    Yawn. Old news, you might think. Anybody following American politics has, for several years, seen a very long list of news stories and commentary in media of all political stripes across the nation about those Soros contributions, which are thoroughly documented. And Kass was hardly the first to address the obvious question about the connection between those prosecutors’ work and the surge in violent crime.

    But it wasn’t lack of originality that the Tribune union alleged.

    It was Kass’s “odious, anti-Semitic conspiracy theory that billionaire George Soros is a puppet master controlling America’s big cities.” Kass, the Guild wrote in a letter to all staff, “does not deserve a mainstream voice, especially at a time when hate crimes are rising.”

    The Guild went on:

    This column from the Tribune’s lead columnist does a disservice to our entire institution, not just the editorial board, for which he nominally works. It undermines the efforts of our newsroom to provide fair and diligent reporting to readers who, we all know, don’t always grasp the distinction between “opinion” and “news.” 

    We ask that the paper, and Kass separately, apologize for his indefensible invocation of the Soros tropes….

    But read Kass’s column.

    Read it again.

    It contains nothing whatsoever that says or implies anything remotely like that.

    It’s entirely about Soros’s contributions and their effect on law enforcement, which obviously are important matters to address.

    Among those who have covered the topic before is Commentary, which was founded by the American Jewish Committee and has long had a central focus on “the future of the Jews, Judaism, and Jewish culture in Israel, the United States, and around the world.”

    Aside from the pure cruelty to Kass and its naked contempt for diversity of opinion, the Guild’s letter is a tragedy for other reasons.

    To charge anti-Semitism where there is none dilutes attention to real anti-Semitism, which there’s no shortage of. That includes false charges against Soros. Crank stories about Soros abound on the internet and they often include anti-Semitic, world conspiracy theories. Defeat those by attacking them, not columns that are entirely unrelated, or you will only inflame the conspiracy theorists.

    Consider the irony that Cook County State’s Attorney Kim Foxx is among the prosecutors whose campaign Soros funded – with a whopping $333,000. It’s not irony, actually, but consistency.

    It’s Foxx who let Jussie Smollett off. What most infuriated many about that, especially blacks, was that his made-up story of bigotry detracts from real stories of bigotry. The Tribune Guild is guilty of precisely that, undermining the real fight against real bigotry by concocting a fake one. So much for the mob’s sincerity about bigotry.

    Kass has now published his own response to the union’s letter.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    John Kass

    Standing ovation to him for dealing with the mob exactly as one should, by not giving in a single inch. From Kass’s response:

    I will not apologize for writing about Soros.

    I will not bow to those who’ve wrongly defamed me.

    I will continue writing my column.

    Kass says Tribune management has decided not to take sides on the controversy. That’s a big mistake by the Tribune if true. This is a chance to distinguish itself from the long list of formerly reputable media, from the New York Times on down, that have thrown both their own reputations and the most fundamental standards of journalism to the wind.

    Most of Chicago’s beaches are wide open because of the coronavirus shutdown, so the Tribune Guild should have no trouble taking a running jump into Lake Michigan. That’s what they should be told to do.

  • In Unprecedented Move, Congress Proposes Taxpayer-Funded Bailout Of $550 Billion CMBS Industry
    In Unprecedented Move, Congress Proposes Taxpayer-Funded Bailout Of $550 Billion CMBS Industry

    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 07/29/2020 – 22:05

    Well, with everyone and everything else getting a bailout, may as well go all the way.

    Two months after we reported that the state of California is trying to turn centuries of finance on its head by allowing businesses to walk away from commercial leases – in other words to make commercial debt non-recourse – a move the California Business Properties Association said “could cause a financial collapse”, attempts to bail out commercial lenders have reached the Federal level, with the WSJ reporting that lawmakers have introduced a bill to provide cash to struggling hotels and shopping centers that weren’t able to pause mortgage payments after the coronavirus shut down the U.S. economy.

    The bill would set up a government-backed funding vehicle which companies could tap to stay current on their mortgages. It is meant in particular to help those who borrowed in the $550 billion CMBS market in which mortgages are re-packaged into bonds and sold to Wall Street. What it really represents, is a bailout of the only group of borrowers that had so far not found access to the Fed’s various generous rescue facilities: and that’s where Congress comes in.

    To be sure, the commercial real estate market is imploding, and as we reported at the start of the month, some 10% of loans in commercial mortgage-backed securities were 30 or more days delinquent at the end of June, including nearly a quarter of loans tied to the hard-hit hotel industry, according to Trepp LLC.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    “The numbers are getting more dire and the projections are getting more stern,” said Rep. Van Taylor (R., Texas), who is sponsoring the bill alongside Rep. Al Lawson (D., Fla.).

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Van Taylor (R-Texas) is sponsoring the bill to aid hotels and shopping centers.

    Under the proposal, banks would extend money to help these borrowers and the facility would provide a Treasury Department guarantee that banks are repaid. The funding would come from a $454 billion pot set aside for distressed businesses in the earlier stimulus bill.

    Richard Pietrafesa owns three hotels on the East Coast that were financed with CMBS loans. They have recently had occupancy of around 50% or less, which doesn’t bring in enough revenue to make mortgage payments, he said.

    He said he is now two months behind on payments for one of his properties, a Fairfield Inn & Suites in Charleston, S.C. He has money set aside in a separate reserve, he said, but his special servicer hasn’t allowed him to access it to make debt payments.

    “It’s like a debtor’s prison,” Mr. Pietrafesa said.

    Those magic words, it would appear, is all one needs to say these days to get a government and/or Fed-sanctioned bailout. Because in a world taken over by zombies, failure is no longer an option.

    While any struggling commercial borrower that was previously in good financial standing would be eligible to apply for funds to cover mortgage payments, the facility is designed specifically for CMBS borrowers.

    It gets better, because not only are taxpayers ultimately on the hook via the various Fed-Treasury JVs that will fund these programs, but the new money will by default be junior to existing insolvent debt. As the Journal explains, “many of these borrowers have provisions in their initial loan documents that forbid them from taking on more debt without additional approval from their servicers. The proposed facility would instead structure the cash infusions as preferred equity, which isn’t subject to the debt restrictions.

    Yes, it’s also means that the new capital is JUNIOR to the debt, which means that if there is another economic downturn, the taxpayer funds get wiped out first while the pre-existing debt – the debt which was unreapayble to begin with – will remain on the books!

    Perhaps sensing the shitstorm that this proposal would create, the WSJ admits that “the preferred equity would be considered junior to other debt but must be repaid with interest before the property owner can pull money out of the business.”

    What was left completely unsaid is that the existing impaired CMBS debt will instantly become money good thanks to the junior capital infusion from – drumroll – idiot taxpayers who won’t even understand what is going on.

    How did this ridiculously audacious proposal come to being? Well, Taylor led a bipartisan group of more than 100 lawmakers who last month signed a letter asking the Federal Reserve and Treasury to come up with a solution for the CMBS issues. Treasury Secretary Steven Mnuchin and Fed Chairman Jerome Powell have indicated that this may be an issue best addressed by Congress.

    In other words, while the Fed will be providing the special purpose bailout vehicle, it is ultimately a decision for Congress whether to bail out thousands of insolvent hotels and malls.

    And if some in the industry have warned that an attempt to rescue the CMBS market would disproportionately benefit a handful of large real-estate owners, rather than small-business owners, it is because they are precisely right: roughly 80% of CMBS debt is held by a handful of funds who will be the ultimate beneficiaries of this unprecedented bailout; funds which have spent a lot of money lobbying Messrs Taylor and Lawson.

    Of course, none of this will be revealed and instead the talking points will focus on reaching the dumbest common denominator. Taylor said the legislation is focused on – what else – saving jobs. What he didn’t say is that each job that is saved will end up getting lost just months later, and meanwhile it will cost millions of dollars “per job” just to make sure that the billionaires who hold the CMBS debt – such as Tom Barrack who recently urged a margin call moratorium in the CMBS market – come out whole.

    “This started with employees in my district calling and saying ‘I lost my job’,” Taylor said, clearly hoping that he is dealing with absolute idiots.

    And while it is unclear if this bill will pass – at this point there is literally money flying out of helicopters and the US deficit is exploding by hundreds of billions every month so who really gives a shit if a few more billionaires are bailed out by taxpayers – should this happen, well readers may want to close out the trade we called the “The Next Big Short“, namely CMBX 9, whose outlier exposure to hotels which had emerged as the most impacted sector from the pandemic.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Alternatively, those who wish to piggyback on this latest egregious abuse of taxpayer funds, this crucifxion of capitalism and latest glorification of moral hazard, and make some cash in the process should do the opposite of the “Next Big Short” and buy up the BBB- (or any other deeply impaired) tranche of the CMBX Series 9, which will quickly soar to par if this bailout is ever voted through.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

  • Beijing Professor Who Says He Was "Framed" On Prostitution Charges Takes Unheard Of Step Of Suing Police
    Beijing Professor Who Says He Was “Framed” On Prostitution Charges Takes Unheard Of Step Of Suing Police

    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 07/29/2020 – 22:05

    A Chinese legal scholar who believes he’s being framed by the communist government after he wrote a series of essays criticizing President Xi Jinping’s leadership style, especially after the 2018 constitutional changes which allowed Xi to rule for life, is taking the extremely rare step of defying the party by filing a lawsuit against police. 

    Xu Zhangrun was until earlier this month a law professor at one of Beijing’s most prestigious universities. But that institution, Tsinghua University, fired him after police arrested him on the professionally humiliating charge of soliciting prostitution. Xu was held in detention for a week and then released with little explanation.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Via GMTV/Casino.org

    But despite authorities showing no evidence whatsoever – not even documents or surveillance footage to suggest he was even at a hotel with a prostitute as the police said – this was enough to get him dismissed from his prestigious teaching position.

    Xu and his supporters think it hearkens back to his public essays which case the country’s leader Xi in a negative light. “Professor Xu believes there is no evidence whatsoever supporting their claim that he solicited prostitutes and believes he is being framed and entrapped,” an unnamed person involved in the case told FT

    According to The Wall Street Journal

    Mr. Xu on Tuesday engaged a pair of well-known human-rights lawyers, Mo Shaoping and Shang Baojun, to assist his efforts to overturn the solicitation charge, according to Mr. Shang. Police had accused Mr. Xu of committing the offense in the southwestern Chinese city of Chengdu in December, an allegation the former professor rejected as false and “wholly nonexistent,” Mr. Shang said.

    Though the country doesn’t have Miranda rights, it’s normal procedure to at least be given access to a copy of the police-detention order, which his lawyers are now working to obtain.

    The 57-year-old was told by his university that not only was being terminated based on the prostitution arrest, but due to the series of political-related essays he’d authored going back to July 2018.

    The WSJ notes it he was “deemed to have violated a code of conduct for teachers at tertiary institutions, according to a photo of the notice reviewed by The Wall Street Journal.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Portrait of Chinese President Xi Jinping during a parade to commemorate the 70th anniversary of the founding of Communist China, via AP

    The WSJ report suggests that it may still be uncertain whether or not he and his lawyers will move forward with the lawsuit, or if they’ll simply appeal the police and university decisions and seek reinstatement. Regardless, it was a bold move to hire lawyers and seek to overturn everything in the first place. 

    And now given the Western media attention, if Xu was indeed framed by someone or entities high within the party, we can expect the lawsuit and story itself to quietly go away, given the nature of the Chinese system.

  • Chinese Banks Bar Clients From Buying Precious Metals
    Chinese Banks Bar Clients From Buying Precious Metals

    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 07/29/2020 – 21:47

    In an attempt to avoid another retail-driven momentum meltup similar to what happened with Chinese stocks earlier this month when government-media first encouraged Chinese investors to buy stocks only to backtrack days later when local markets soared sparking fears of another stock bubble on the mainland, Reuters reported that Chinese regulators and major banks have been rushing to curb precious metal trading by domestic investors to temper speculation that could send prices explosively higher, something we hinted at just last week.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The scramble to limit risks comes as gold prices hit record highs this week, spurred by investors hunting for safe haven assets in markets rattled by worries of rising coronavirus cases, lofty equity valuations, and a plunge in the U.S. dollar which prompted Goldman to contemplate if the days of the world’s reserve currency are numbered.

    Industrial and Commercial Bank of China (ICBC), the country’s largest bank said on Wednesday it would bar its clients from opening new trading positions for platinum, palladium and index products linked to precious metal from Friday. That directive, according to the lender’s customer service department, was in response to “violent price volatility” and “the need to control risks.” The reality? It is neither in China’s, nor any other government’s interest, to see gold prices soaring as they likely would if tens of millions of Chinese speculators rushed to bid up the precious metal.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Similarly, Agricultural Bank of China said it had recently suspended new businesses related to gold, while Bank of China also said it halted new account openings for platinum and palladium trading.

    Meanwhile, the Shanghai Gold Exchange said on Tuesday that gold and silver holdings were high, and it would take risk-control measures if warranted to protect investors.

    It’s odd how investors are never “protected” when stock prices soar… but only when gold and silver do.

    The Shanghai Futures Exchange, where gold and silver futures contracts are traded, also urged its members to strengthen risk-management efforts and invest rationally.

    Gold remains a niche investment in China due to limited investment channels,” said Frank Hao, an analyst at Hywin Wealth Management in Shanghai. “Investors mainly rely on purchasing paper gold products at commercial banks as a way to counteract risks.”

    Chinese investors have also been actively buying up gold ETFs, whose turnover has jumped in recent weeks. Huaan Gold ETF, Asia’s biggest gold exchange-traded fund, has seen its assets under management soar more than 68% to over 11.8 billion yuan ($1.69 billion) since end-2019.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Hao said any further gains in gold may spur more speculation, despite regulatory attempts to tamp it down.

    “If the gold price rises past $2,000, some more hot money will certainly flow into the market, and some investors will divert their stock investments to gold,” he said.

    Which really says all one needs to know: when it comes to stocks, nobody is worried about the “hot money” flowing into the market, in fact it is encouraged. But when gold explodes higher and it may “divert” stock investment to gold the authorities start to panic and do everything in their power to limit its ascent.

  • Paying People Not To Work Is Not An Economic Stimulus
    Paying People Not To Work Is Not An Economic Stimulus

    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 07/29/2020 – 21:45

    Authored by Stephen Moore via RealClearPolitics.com,

    Back in 2009, Nancy Pelosi infamously declared the best way to revive the economy was to dole out ever more generous food stamps and unemployment benefits. The more people collecting welfare the better.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    At the time, this notion seemed laughable. Now this economic illiteracy seems to have become a conventional wisdom. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    This was a headline in the New York Times recently: “End of $600 Unemployment Bonus Could Push Millions Past the Brink.”

    Here was the lead on the “news” piece:

    “When millions of Americans began losing their jobs in March, the federal government stepped in with a life preserver: $600 a week in extra unemployment benefits to allow workers to pay rent and buy groceries, and to cushion the economy.

    “With economic conditions again deteriorating, that life preserver will disappear within days if Congress doesn’t act to extend it. That could prompt a wave of evictions and inflict more financial harm on millions of Americans while further damaging the economy.”

    These benefits are not a “life preserver,” but a job-killer. A study for the Committee to Unleash Prosperity by University of Chicago economist Casey Mulligan estimated 10 million fewer Americans working by the end of the year, thus killing any chance of a “V-shaped recovery.”

    Perhaps that’s why Pelosi is so adamant about the policy remaining in place. This would mean a high unemployment rate in November when voters go to the polls. How convenient for Pelosi and Joe Biden.

    Incidentally, there are now some 5 million unfilled jobs in the U.S. today — near an all-time high. This is a weird predicament we are in. Even with some 25 million unemployed Americans, employers are hanging “Help Wanted” signs in the windows.

    Here’s why.

    Under the Pelosi policy, 5 out of 6 unemployed workers are getting paid more NOT to work than to return to the job, according to the Congressional Budget Office. We estimate that most workers who earn $30 or less are financially better off staying off the job — even as the economy improves. Many workers can get twice as much for staying unemployed. Workers are supposed to lose unemployment benefits if they are offered a job and don’t take it. But workers know how to game the system. They can pretend to be sick, and employers are loath to bring a contagious worker back in the office or factory.

    Employers are now telling me that to get workers back on a construction crew, on a factory line or in a restaurant, they won’t work unless they get paid cash of, say, $100 or $200 a shift so they can still collect the unemployment benefits. The Economist magazine recently wrote that the extra unemployment benefits are doing more harm than good. Liberal groups are marching in the streets for another six months of these payments.

    This policy is what I have long-called economic bimboism. Somehow, magically, if I pay my kid who gets up, mows lawns and works hard 40 hours a week, and I pay my other son even more money for staying home and playing computer games, this strategy is going to lead to more work effort in the Moore household. I assure you it won’t.

    Paying people not to work is no way to expand economic output, more jobs and more prosperity. By this warped logic, we should start paying unemployed workers $5,000 a week, and we will really have a rip-roaring recovery.

    This is not just lousy economics; it also violates basic principles of fairness. Think of a construction company with 100 employees laid off. They are all offered their jobs back a month later, but only 50 come back to work. Under the Pelosi scheme, the 50 that work hard get less money than the ones who stay home and watch TV. The suckers here are the ones who return to the job.

    The only way politicians can “stimulate” the economy and lower unemployment is by incentivizing more economic production. This is why a payroll tax cut makes a lot of sense, and let us hope President Donald Trump, who favors the idea, doesn’t give up on it. Every worker — the heroes of our economy, including nurses, technicians, sanitation workers, truckers and nursing home care givers — would get a 7.5% pay raise starting on or around Aug. 1. Every small business would see their payroll costs shrink by 7.5%. By a 2-to-1 margin, workers love the payroll tax cut.

    Skeptics complain that the payroll tax cut only helps people with a job, not the unemployed. Wrong. The best way to help the unemployed, Nancy Pelosi, is not by passing out food stamps and unemployment benefits. It is getting people a job, a paycheck and a step on the economic ladder. And there is one other thing that liberals seem to have forgotten: there is dignity and educational value in working rather than getting a welfare check paid for by someone else.

  • Chinese Banks Urged To Switch From SWIFT And Drop USD In Anticipation Of US Sanctions
    Chinese Banks Urged To Switch From SWIFT And Drop USD In Anticipation Of US Sanctions

    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 07/29/2020 – 21:25

    Even as the market does its best to ignore the unprecedented upheavals in US-Sino relations in everything from trade, to diplomacy, to financial relations, the truth is that there are tectonic shifts tearing apart decades of established norms between the two superpowers, and one doesn’t even have to dig too deep to see it.

    Consider this: one month ago, we reported that Guo Shuqing, chairman of the China Banking and Insurance Regulatory Commission, delivered a strong warning on the US currency, frontrunning Goldman by about a month in cautioning that the greenback’s reserve status may be ending.

    Speaking at the Lujiazhui Forum in Shanghai, Guo made four points:

    • The Fed is the de facto central bank of the world. When its policy targets its own economy without considering the spillover effect, the Fed is “very likely to overdraft the credit of the dollar and the U.S.”

    • The pandemic may persist for a long period of time, and countries keep throwing money at the problem with a diminished impact. “It is recommended that you think twice and reserve some policy space for the future.”

    • There is no free lunch. Watch out for inflation.

    • Financial markets are disconnected from the real economy, and such distortions are “unprecedented.” It’s going to be “really painful,” when the policy withdrawal starts.

    “Some people say: ‘Domestic debt is not debt, but external debt is debt. For the United States, even external debt is not debt. This seems to have been the case for quite some time in the past, but can it really last for a long time in the future?”

    So what will China do? “China cherishes the conventional monetary and fiscal policies very much. We will not engage in flooding the system, nor will we engage in deficit monetization and negative interest rates.”

    It’s not the first time China vented frustration against the “exorbitant privilege” of the dollar. After the financial crisis, then-PBOC Governor Zhou Xiaochuan proposed using the SDR to replace the dollar as the main reserve currency. For the most part these warnings were ignored, but one thing was clear: China is all too aware that the US is not only ready but also willing to weaponize the dollar and use it to its advantage in the recently launched cold with China.

    So fast forward to today, when according to Reuters, a report from the investment banking unit of Bank of China warned that China should prepare for potential US sanctions by switching away from the Dollar-centric SWIFT system, and increasing use of its own financial messaging network for cross-border transactions in the mainland, Hong Kong and Macau.

    According to the BOC report, which was co-authored by a former foreign exchange regulator, greater use of the Cross-Border Interbank Payment System (CIPS) instead of the Belgium based SWIFT system would also reduce exposure of China’s global payments data to the United States. The bank’s chief economist Guan Tao was previously a director of the international payments department of State Administration of Foreign Exchange (SAFE).

    The report looked at potential measures the United States could take against Chinese banks, including cutting off their access to the SWIFT financial messaging service, the primary network used by banks globally to make financial transactions.

    “A good punch to the enemy will save yourself from hundreds of punches from your enemies,” the report wrote, amid deteriorating relating between the world’s two largest economies. “We need to get prepared in advance, mentally and practically.”

    The report said that if the United States were to take the extreme action of cutting off some Chinese banks’ access to dollar settlements, China should also consider stopping using the U.S. dollar as the anchor currency for its foreign exchange controls.

    Chinese state banks have been implementing contingency plans in anticipation of US legislation that will penalize banks for serving officials who implement the new national security for Hong Kong, Reuters reported earlier this month.

    China launched the CIPS clearing and settlement services system in 2015 as its alternative to SWIFT and in hopes to internationalise use of the yuan. So far, uptake has been negligible: supervised by the central bank, CIPS said it processed a mere 135.7 billion yuan ($19.4 billion) a day in 2019, with participation from 96 countries and regions.

    The BOC also recommended that China develop legislation similar to the European Union’s Blocking Statute, which allowed the EU to sustain trade and economic relations with Iran, a country targeted by U.S. sanctions, although as has emerged in the past two years, Europe’s attempt to launch its own SWIFT-equivalent via Instex has been a failure, as virtually nobody is willing to risk alienation from the US Dollar by endorsing a European alternative. In fact, only when push comes to shove, and correspondent nations have no choice but to launch their own non-dollar transfer systems, will SWIFT’s supremacy finally be but to the test… as will the reserve status of the dollar.

    Finally, confirming that this time China will have no choice but to proceed with “Plan B”, the SCMP reported overnight that the top adviser to Hong Kong’s leader, Carrie Lam, confirmed that his account at a US bank was closed earlier this year, as a result of Washington’s push to sanction Chinese and local officials over the city’s national security law.

    Bernard Chan, convenor of the Executive Council, Chief Executive Carrie Lam Cheng Yuet-ngor’s de facto cabinet, told the Post on Tuesday he believed it was because he was deemed to be a “politically exposed person”.

    He had opened the account at the bank, which has so far been unnamed and which also has branches in Hong Kong, more than a year ago. But it was closed by the institution, and he got his money back in April.

    “I’m sure they closed it because they found out I’m a PEP, politically exposed person,” Chan said. “I have other bank accounts in the United States which still function normally.” 

    Chan previously told the Financial Times that senior members of the city’s government were finding it increasingly difficult to bank with foreign institutions, as tensions mount between China and the US over the city’s future.

    In retaliation for Beijing’s decision to impose a national security legislation on Hong Kong, President Trump signed a law and issued an executive order on July 15 to sanction individuals and banks deemed to have aided the erosion of Hong Kong’s autonomy. He also put forth an executive order ending the city’s preferential trading and other privileges.

    Foreign individuals or entities determined by the US secretary of state to fall into this category will be blocked from investing, transferring, exporting, withdrawing or dealing with any property or interests in property in the US.

    In other words, while markets may be oblivious to these latest developments, the financial war between Washington and DC has officially begun and from this point on it will only accelerate as both countries progress in tit-for-tat retaliation to each and every move they find provocative.

  • The "Government Put" Is A Tailwind For Gold
    The “Government Put” Is A Tailwind For Gold

    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 07/29/2020 – 21:05

    Authored by Addison Wiggin via The Daily Reckoning,

    Gold recently crested $1950, where it is today as of this writing. For some, the $1900 price level is an important indicator of momentum building. I’ll share with you some advice on the gold price offered by my zoom interview this week, George Gammon, Rebel Capitalist, below.

    In an effort to help you sort things out, I’ve invited George to help us put the macro picture into perspective given the pandemic, shutdown of the economy, a bizarrely resilient stock market and prospects for your investments now and in the future.

    Gammon’s own story – from serial entrepreneur to global real estate developer to macroeconomic guru – uniquely positions him to help put the current state of affairs into perspective. On top of that he’s a heckuva good guy, entertaining, approachable; he has a talent for making complex ideas easy to understand.

    He’s well versed in my late obsession with collectivism, which I’ve been exploring deeply since the protests started. He also explains how the Fed will monetize the $26.5 trillion in debt racked up during the crisis; the secret vehicle the Treasury will use if Fed efforts fail; how and why the dollar remains strong; what shenanigans the data wonks to white wash important economic data.

    We further discussed prospects for reopening of the economy; why the economy and the stock market have diverged so dramatically; what signs to look for in the capitalist endgame; where the heck all that stimulus money is going; and more.

    Frankly, my conversation with George was one of the more interesting, informative and entertaining I’ve done since starting the Surviving and Thriving series for Agora Financial Platinum Reserve members.

    You’ll definitely want to see the “lightning round” at the end where we cover his thoughts on real estate, stocks, tech, commodities, bitcoin, gold, silver and precious metals; including a look under the hood at some of his own investments. Go here for a full transcript of our interview.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Now, let’s play with a hypothetical…

    Let’s say we have another wave of lockdowns in various geographic locales in the economy. Here in Baltimore the mayor is about to close restaurants again, for example. The restaurants close. Bars close. Gyms close. Schools don’t reopen… yada, yada.

    Institutional traders get spooked, again – still speaking hypothetically – and start selling stocks. The hoi polloi see the numbers tanking in their 401(k)s. And so on. We know what happened during the initial lockdown. February and March of 2020 account for 8 out of 10 of the largest single day point losses in the Dow Jones’ ever.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Source: Standard and Poors

    By March 11 the Dow had lost 6,004 points – down 20.3% from the Feb. 12 high. What if bad news causes this, still jittery, market to drop 20% again?

    “The whole U.S. economy is so tied to asset prices,” George Gammon suggests, “I just cannot see the Fed and or Treasury not stepping in and trying to prop up the market. Fact is, they have to step in and try to do something.”

    I can’t argue with that.

    “When you trap people in a system of debt,” said lefty linguist Noam Chomsky, “they can’t afford the time to think.”

    I’m not sure I’d agree with Chomsky on too many things, but I think he nails that one.

    For the first time since WWII the interest on the debt — which grows daily — is higher than the nation’s GDP. If that isn’t a trap, I can’t think of what would be… and so much of the hole the country is digging itself into is entirely out of your hands.

    What’s an individual investor to do?

    Back in the Crisis of ‘08 I often referred to the “Fed Put” — a friendly colloquial term describing the Fed practice of buying mortgage backed securities to put a floor in the market. So many banks were leveraged into those moribund financial instruments, without the Fed Put, the entire global system would have been kaput.

    Fast forward 12 years and a fully re-inflated bubble, The ‘Fed Put’ may have expired. “If you want to think that one through,” George explains:

    Remember when the Fed had that emergency meeting in March, where they were going to meet on Wednesday to decide the interest rate policy, but they had that emergency meeting on Sunday where they dropped interest rates by 100 basis points, took it down to zero and they announced QE Infinity and they’re committing a trillion a day to the repo market.

    Monday, the market opens, it does go higher for maybe three or four hours, but then it just tanks, drops out of bed. Even though the Fed throws everything at it but the kitchen sink. And then the government comes in and announces all these stimulus programs. Then at that point, the market started to go back up a few days later.

    So it seems like maybe, just maybe the Fed Put has expired and has been replaced by a government put. So now the only entity to prop up the market is going to be straight government spending.

    What that means is not just bank reserves, but that means a direct M2 money supply — cash to folks like you and me — and an increase in velocity, the speed at which “getting and spending” happens.

    Whether it will continue to work, or not, is anybody’s guess.

    The “Government Put” could be the butterfly that unleashes a hurricane on the other side of the planet.

    So… what should you buy? How about gold? And when should you buy it?

    “I don’t even worry about the price of gold,” Mr. Gammon answers.

    “I don’t even look at the price. When I get an extra hundred grand, bam, 10,000 goes into gold.”

    “As far as silver, I look at that more like a speculation, more like Bitcoin. But the ultimate speculation right now are the gold miners. And I was fortunate enough to buy a lot of those back in March as well. And they’ve had a good run, but again, I’m not planning on selling them at all. And if they go back down even further, I’ll buy more.”

    “I think if you look at everything we’ve talked about in this interview, and the M2 money supply, the velocity, the deficits, not only that, but you’ve got oil that’s very low, which definitely helps the P&L for the gold miners because a lot of their expenses are energy.”

    Cheap oil benefits them tremendously. And with the Government Put there is already a huge tailwind for gold in general. They could go down. But if they do go down, I’ll happily buy more and just wait until I think they’re expensive, which probably is going to be a long bull run from now.”

    Buy gold (and gold miners)… and enjoy the ride.

  • Junkies Transform Part Of NYC's Midtown Into A "Shooting Gallery" 
    Junkies Transform Part Of NYC’s Midtown Into A “Shooting Gallery” 

    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 07/29/2020 – 20:45

    A band of junkies has transformed Broadway in Midtown Manhattan into “shooting gallery, injecting drugs unhampered in broad daylight and then shuffling around in a zonked-out stupor, seemingly oblivious to the Midtown bustle around them,” the New York Post reports.

    Reporters from The Post snapped several pictures of junkies shooting up at a pedestrian plaza at Broadway and West 40th Street. They found syringes on the ground and called the area “mini needle park.” 

    “They’ve taken over the tables, blatantly using needles and shooting up heroin all day long,” said a city worker who asked only to be identified as James. “There’s no police action, there’s no reach-out. There’s nobody preventing this, and you know we’ve had multiple calls to 311 but nobody really responds. It’s becoming a real problem.”

    Edgar Rivera, a construction worker in the area, said the junkies sleep on the ground and occasional ambulance visits are seen; he noted the same group of junkies congregate daily and shoot up heroin in broad daylight. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Another city employee said the situation has gotten worse over the years: 

    “Disappointing the way they discard all the syringes. It’s not the safest,” the man said who didn’t want to be identified. “In the last year, it’s gotten really bad. I’ve been seeing more syringes, discarded syringes, ever since they started coming in.”

    As junkies takeover Midtown Manhattan, we’ve outlined in a series of reports, over the last couple of weeks, the area is a ghost town. Unemployment is high in the city, which can influence illegal drug use due to psychological distress. 

    Here’s another liberal utopia city, San Francisco, imploding under the weight of “crack and heroin everwhere.” 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    With that being said, a crushing recession and high unemployment in Midtown and across the entire country, well, it’s entirely possible drug usage continues to soar as America implodes from within. 

  • Why Texas Is In Trouble
    Why Texas Is In Trouble

    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 07/29/2020 – 20:35

    Submitted by Adam Andrzejewski, from OpenTheBooks.com

    Why Texas Is In Trouble—78,064 Public Employees With $100,000+ Paychecks Cost Taxpayers $12 Billion

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Everything is bigger in Texas—including the supersized salaries of its city managers, school superintendents, state staffers, and other public servants. Last year, 78,064 state and local government employees made more than $100,000 each, and 18,600 of them out-earned Texas Governor Greg Abbott, who made $153,750.

    Our auditors at OpentheBooks.com found the speech writers for university presidents making up to $140,000; library directors booking $202,875; community college presidents making up to $505,000; and city managers raking in an eye-popping $1.85 million over the last three-years.

    We also found 19,519 federal bureaucrats based in Texas who earned six figures or more. Collectively, these employees cost taxpayers $2.5 billion in 2018, the last year available.

    Using our interactive mapping tool, quickly review (by ZIP code) the highly compensated public employees earning more than $100,000 annually from local, state, and federal governments. Just click a pin and scroll down to see the results rendered in the chart beneath the map.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Auditing Texas’ largest local and state pay systems:

    Municipalities (22,656 employees who made $100,000+) – Texas is home to some of the most highly compensated city managers in the nation.

    In 2018, Sheryl Sculley ($574,594), the then-city manager in San Antonio, ranked number one.  Her base salary was $467,789 plus a $106,805 bonus. Six deputy and assistant city managers also made between $231,544 and $270,125. The library director made $202,875— and outearned all federal bureaucrats employed at the National Archive and Smithsonian Institution ($201,400).  

    In 2019, frustrated voters in San Antonio capped city manager pay and term-limited employment to eight-years by passing a referendum.

    This hasn’t happened in other Texas towns.

    In the past three-years, Laredo poured $1.85 million into their city manager position (2017-2019). Horacio De Leon earned $880,486 in 2019 and $314,556 in 2018. In 2017, the previous city manager, Jesus Olivares, received $651,867 – including $278,028 in severance.

    We reached out to Laredo and all the other cities with highly compensated employees for comment. We will update the piece if they respond.

    Top-paid city managers included Peter Vargas ($433,842 Allen); T.C. Broadnax ($410,692 Dallas); Spencer Cronk ($378,071 Austin); Bruce Glasscock ($374,537 Plano); Daniel Johnson ($357,744 Richardson); David Cooke ($348,730 Fort Worth); Tomas Gonzalez ($340,746 El Paso); and Robert Wood ($319,946 West Lake Hills).

    The city of Plano responded to our comment request:

    “Mr. Glasscock’s salary included his retirement payout of benefits since it was 2019 and he retired in April of that year. His actual annual salary was lower than that.”

    El Paso gave a lengthy defense of their pay scale. Nevertheless, Tomas Gonzalez $340,746), their city manager, outearned every four-star general in the U.S. military ($268,332) last year.

    Other highly compensated workers included the general manager of Austin Energy, Jacqueline Sargent, earned $419,942. Two employees of Garland Power & Light made more than $412,000 last year.

    In Dallas, top executives received hefty pay hikes. For example, in 2011, the Dallas city manager made $265,617, which increased to $410,692 last year (a 53 percent bump). The top assistant city manager in 2011 made $198,048, but that position earned $289,001 last year (a 46-percent increase).

    “Dallas pays city executives equitably to close gender and cultural compensation gaps. Executive compensation is commensurate with experience to attract and retain the talent needed to provide excellent, equitable, ethical, and empathetic service to our residents and stakeholders.” Catherine Cuellar, City of Dallas spokesperson.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Public Schools (8,975 employees who made $100,000+) – Nearly 9,000 Texas public school administrators, athletic directors, teachers, and other employees pulled down six-figure salaries in 2019 and cost taxpayers $1.1 billion. Nearly 1,000 teachers and administrators out-earned the governor ($153,750).

    The $400,000 Club (2019) included six superintendents: David Faltys ($452,014 Carroll); Donald Stockton ($447,879 Conroe); John Henry ($442,917 Cypress-Fairbanks); Susan Simpson ($429,795 Grand Prairie); Bradford Lancaster ($411,148 Lake Travis); and Lawrence Anthony Hindt ($407,787 Katy).

    The Dallas Independent School District (DSD) accumulated $3.8 billion in voter-approved debt as of 2018. But DSD still employed the second highest number of six-figure educators (349) which cost taxpayers $44.1 million. Only the district in Houston employed more (367). In 2017, Dallas paid 274 employees more than $100,000 for a total cash compensation of $34 million.

    Fort Bend Independent paid their superintendent Charles Dupre $368,852 last year and responded to our request for comment:

    “With more than 11,000 employees and a budget that exceeds $1 billion, Fort Bend ISD is the largest employer in Fort Bend County.”

    For context, the Secretary of the U.S. Department of Education made $199,700 last year – a cabinet level position.

    State Government (8,310 employees with $100,000+ salaries) – The state governments 8,310 highly compensated six-figure employees made a collective $1.1 billion last year. James McCall earned $1.1 million as chancellor of the Texas State University System and was one of the most highly compensated state employees.

    Other state government executives also made a lot of money: Jerry Albright, CIO, ($800,175) and Eric Lang, Sr. Managing Director of Private Markets, ($750,540) at Teacher Retirement System; Paul Ballard, CEO, ($703,692) at Texas Treasury Safekeeping Trust Co.; Barney Timmins III, CIO, ($640,163) at Texas Education Agency; and Charles Tom Tull, CIO, ($577,981) at the Employees Retirement System of Texas.

    The Texas Education Agency responded to our comment request by providing FY2020 estimated compensation for Barney Timmins III – who received another pay increase from $640,163 to $685,308.

    In the Office of the Governor alone, 48 employees earned six-figure salaries and eleven out-earned their boss ($153,750). This included four deputy directors who made $265,000 each. In addition, ranked against the 50 states, the Texas governor’s office has the largest staff at a headcount of 277.

    However, it’s important to note that the Texas governor’s office includes up to 30 departments and these departments operate independently in other states.

    “The Texas Legislature appropriates a set amount for staff salaries within the Office of the Governor, and we are currently operating well under budget. In fact, the Office of the Governor has operated under budget since Governor Abbott first took office in 2015.” Read the full statement here. Nan Tolson, Deputy Press Secretary, Office of the Governor

    Colleges and Universities (16,981 employees with $100,000+ salaries) –

    Football is king in Texas, and head coaches made the largest incomes: Jimbo Fisher ($5.15 million Texas A&M); Tom Herman ($4.72 million University of Texas (UT)); Dana Holgorsen ($3.7 million University of Houston).

    The Austin campus at UT employed 3,441 six-figure employees for $618 million in cash compensation. High earners in rank-and-file positions included Matthew Kivel, the president’s speech writer ($140,105); Gary Susswien, chief communications officer ($251,913); and Edmund Gordon, a diversity provost ($280,532).

    Not only does UT pay hefty salaries, it also has one of the largest endowments in the nation: $31 billion. However, in March, the UT system took home $173 million in coronavirus relief funds as part of the CARES Act. This doesn’t even include amounts for the M.D. Anderson Medical Center at UT, which had 6,400 employees making between $100,000 and $3.8 million last year.

    The Texas A&M University system employed 3,902 six-figure employees for $626 million in cash compensation last year. The university received $82 million in coronavirus bailout funds through the CARES Act despite their $13.5 billion endowment.

    A Texas A&M spokesperson responded to our request for comment:

    “Even with the CARES Act money, the Texas A&M System to date is experiencing almost $160 million in revenue losses, future cuts in state appropriations and the cost of testing our students, faculty and staff for COVID-19 so we can reopen safely.”

    Overall, Texas state government is drowning in $99 billion dollars in debt, according to Truth in Accounting. It amounts to $3,413 per man, woman, and child. By contrast, Florida has only $12 billion in debt and a $600 per-person liability.

    To their credit, most of Texas isn’t begging for a coronavirus bailout like many other states. However, Nancy Pelosi’s $3 trillion HEROES Act would deliver an extra $34.3 billion to the Lone Star State over the next two years.

    However, critics say that Texas – at every level of state and local government – should tighten its own belt first.

  • Visualizing The World's Most Heavily Indebted Companies
    Visualizing The World’s Most Heavily Indebted Companies

    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 07/29/2020 – 20:25

    Submitted by KryptoSzene

    With a debt burden of $192 billion US, Germany’s auto giant Volkswagen Group is the most heavily indebted enterprise in the world. This can be seen in a new infographic from Kryptoszene.de. Their mountain of debt is comparable to that of entire nations such as South Africa or Hungary. All of this despite the fact that the Wolfsburg-based company is highly profitable and has the second-highest EBIT margin of any automotive group.

    As the “Corporate Debt Index” data show, two other German groups, in addition to Volkswagen, are among the ten companies with the highest debt burden: Daimler and BMW have debt of $151 and $114 billion US respectively. An analysis of financial data from the 900 largest companies by market capitalization reveals that US companies carry the largest debt burden overall, while Germany and companies based there rank second.

    The infographic shows that Volkswagen distinguishes itself in other respects as well. According to a ranking by the “Center of Automotive Management”, Volkswagen is also the most innovative automotive group. This ranking is put together based on number of innovations and world firsts in various areas of technology.

    Volkswagen also occupies a leading position in terms of profitability. Its EBIT margin last year was 7.3%. Only Toyota had a higher figure at 8.4%.

    However, a glance at Google data shows that demand for Volkswagen shares is currently weak. The Google Trend Score, which indicates relative search volume, currently stands at 13, with a score of 100 representing the highest possible search volume.

  • HVAC Business Is Booming Amid "Huge Demand" For Medical-Grade Ventilation Systems
    HVAC Business Is Booming Amid “Huge Demand” For Medical-Grade Ventilation Systems

    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 07/29/2020 – 20:05

    While most restaurants and retailers have stocked up on gallons of Purell and sanitizing wipes, masks, gloves, toilet paper and other supplies, a growing body of evidence gleaned from scientific studies has shown that the virus’s propensity to spread via airborne transmission is much greater than the WHO had initially believed.

    Increasingly, scientists from around the world are pressuring the WHO to change its guidelines to account for this shift in understanding. But the international public health body has, bizarrely, resisted this pressure, inviting even more criticism about the WHO spreading misinformation, like the time one of its top officials said instances of viral transmission involving asymptomatic individuals are “rare”.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

     

    Now that our understanding of the virus has matured, and the resurgence in the Sun Belt has prompted cautious business owners to accept that the virus, even once under control, likely won’t be going away any time soon, restaurants and other businesses are paying big money for advanced HVAC systems that use UV light and other advanced techniques to cleanse air of potentially infectious particles.

    Bloomberg interviewed a few restaurant owners and others in the hospitality and retail spaces about what they’re buying, and why.

    Building specialists are poring over how well heavy-duty filters block microbes and considering whether to install systems that use ultraviolet light or electrically charged particles in the ductwork to kill the virus. Companies including Honeywell International Inc., Carrier Global Corp. and Trane Technologies Plc are benefiting from the surge in demand, offering everything from air-monitoring sensors to portable filter machines to help make up for deficiencies in ventilation.

    “Every building is going to have some kind of solution. Is it going to be 100%? No,” said Hani Salama, head of the New York chapter of the Building Owners and Managers Association. “But it’s going to be better than what they have now, and will help mitigate some of these airborne transmission issues that everybody is afraid of.”

    This trend isn’t spreading quickly enough. Especially as more studies appear to confirm the findings of one University of Oregon study which found virus particles in the HVAC systems of 25% of hospitals that had treated COVID-19 patients. Even scientists who are skeptical of these findings still think poorly ventilated environments could be dangerous breeding grounds for COVID-19.

    Unsurprisingly, industrial giants like Honeywell are cashing in, selling filters designed for medical environments, but retrofitted for modern business settings like restaurants and other facilities.

    However, the larger energy costs could create problems, particularly for Democrats who try to justify the cost of AOC’s “Green New Deal”, which requires buildings in cities like NYC to become far more energy efficient, something that would be virtually impossible given all the additional demand for power.

    For building owners, the trade-offs abound. It’s best to let in more fresh air, but that puts a strain on cooling or heating. Dense filters that trap more microbes are coveted, yet can choke off airflow and worsen ventilation if a building’s fans aren’t powerful enough. And most solutions require more energy consumption. Building-safety products are proving to be a bright spot for sales at companies like Honeywell, which has technology for “frictionless entry,” automatic temperature-taking and sensors that monitor air quality.

    Carrier, which specializes in HVAC and reports earnings this week, has seen its stock more than double since its separation in March from the former United Technologies Corp.

    “We’re seeing a very huge demand,” said Manish Sharma, chief technology officer for Honeywell’s building technologies unit. “Everyone wants to see how you can get back to business.”

    One owner of a theater chain said he shelled out and purchased new state of the art UV light filters for all of his 80+ theaters across the Southwest..

    He said he was convinced by a study showing the filter was “99% effective”. He says he hasn’t heard of anyone getting sick at his establishments.

    Allan Reagan, chief executive officer of Flix Brewhouse, adopted elaborate protocols for sanitizing and creating social distancing at his 10 dine-in movie houses. As the risk of airborne spread drew more attention, he hired Trane Technologies to install bipolar ionization for all 87 of the company’s screening auditoriums, at $1,500 a piece.

    A study showing the system kills as much as 99% of pathogens won Reagan over, and Flix Brewhouse opened in San Antonio to the public for two weeks to try the system. He said the venue had about 700 visitors, including 50 employees, and he hasn’t heard of any Covid cases that arose.

    All of Flix’s theaters are closed for now, mainly because of a lack of new films from Hollywood, he said.

    “We tried it out, declared victory, and we’ll come back when we have some good content,” Reagan said. “In the meantime, we’ll be retrofitting our other theaters. So when they reopen we’ll have this technology across the circuit.”

    For many years, running a small HVAC business was a reliable means to earn a solid blue-collar living. Maybe some of the unemployed who are about to see their benefits cut should consider a career change, especially all those servers who probably won’t see tips return to normal levels for some time.

  • Big Tech Firms Enjoy "Monopoly Power", Should Be "Heavily Regulated": House Judiciary Chair
    Big Tech Firms Enjoy “Monopoly Power”, Should Be “Heavily Regulated”: House Judiciary Chair

    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 07/29/2020 – 19:59

    Big tech CEOs took a beating from both sides on Wednesday, with Democrats on the House Judiciary antitrust subcommittee hammering the heads of Facebook, Amazon, Google and Apple over anti-competitive conduct, and Republicans on the committee focusing on bias against conservatives.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Representative David Cicilline, the chairman of the antitrust subcommittee, grilled Sundar Pichai, Google’s chief executive, about how Google steers traffic to its own search pages and products. Representative Jerrold Nadler of New York asked Mark Zuckerberg, Facebook’s top executive, about emails he wrote describing Instagram as a potentially disruptive competitor before the company acquired the firm. And Representative Hank Johnson of Georgia pushed Tim Cook of Apple on whether his company exerts unfair dominance over app developers in its app store. –NYT

    Wrapping up the five-plus hour session, Chairman Rep. David Cicilline (D-RI) said during his closing statements that all four companies are monopolies, saying “These companies, as they exist today, all have monopoly power,” adding “Some need to be broken up” and “heavily regulated.”

    “Their control of the marketplace allows them to do whatever it takes to crush independent businesses and expand their own power,” Cicilline added.

    “They’re engaged in behavior that’s anticompetitive, which favors their own products and services, which monetizes and weaponizes data, which compromises the privacy of their users and which creates a competitive disadvantage for companies attempting to enter the marketplace.”

    Republicans on the committee – particularly Rep. Jim Jordan (R-OH), grilled the CEOs over political bias.

    Jordan accused the companies of being “out to get conservatives.”

    “I’ll just cut to the chase,” said Jordan during opening remarks. “Big Tech is out to get conservatives. That’s not a suspicion, that’s not a hunch — that’s a fact.”

    “We’re 97 days before an election, and the power … these companies have to impact what happens during an election, what American citizens get to see before their voting, is pretty darn important,” said Jordan.

    Later in the hearing, Jordan dug into Pichai, repeatedly demanding assurances that Google would not tip the scales for the Democrats in November.

    Can you assure Americans today you won’t tailor your features to help Joe Biden in the upcoming election?” asked Jordan, who mentioned reports of a “silent donation” the company made to the Clinton campaign in the 2016 election cycle.

    Jordan had to repeat the question several times during his allotted five minutes before Pichai finally uttered, “You have my commitment.”

    Jordan’s grievances notwithstanding, lawmakers on both sides of the aisle were united in holding the tech titans’ feet to the fire, amid bipartisan concerns that they’ve developed a stranglehold on the internet and American life. –NY Post

    The CEOs defended their businesses, with Bezos arguing that ” Every day, Amazon competes against large, established players like Target, Costco, Kroger and, of course, Walmart — a company more than twice Amazon’s size.”

    Mark Zuckerberg painted Facebook as an “American success story” and an underdog compared to his competitors.

    “[The] most popular messaging service in the US is [Apple’s] iMessage,” he said. “The most popular app for video is [Google’s] YouTube. The fastest-growing ads platform is Amazon, the largest ads platform is Google. And for every dollar spent on advertising in the US, less than 10 cents is spent with us,” he said.

    Rep. Pramila Jayapal rejected Zuck’s framing, firing back “When the dominant platform threatens its potential rivals, that should not be a normal business practice.”

    “Facebook is a case study, in my opinion, in monopoly power, because your company harvests and monetizes our data, and then your company uses that data to spy on competitors and to copy, acquire and kill rivals. Facebook’s very model makes it impossible for new companies to flourish separately, and that harms our democracy, it harms mom-and-pop businesses and it harms consumers.”

    Tim Cook defended Apple’s App Store amid accusations that the company has unfairly blocked apps which rival its in-house products, along with the 30% cut the company takes from in-store purchases.

    “I’m here today because scrutiny is reasonable and appropriate,” he said, adding “If Apple is a gatekeeper, what we’ve done is open the gate wider.”

    But, as the Post explains, “It was the frequently evasive Pichai, however — defending Google’s far-reaching online ad business — who seemed to catch most of the flak.”

    Cicilline charged that Google has “evolved from a turnstile to the rest of the Web, to a walled garden that increasingly keeps users within its sites.

    “It used its surveillance over Web traffic to identify competitive threats and crush them,” continued Cicilline. “It has dampened innovation and business growth … virtually ensuring that any business that wants to be found on the Web paid Google a tax.” –NY Post

    “Our founders would not bow before a king,” said Cicilline. “Nor should we bow before the emperors of the online economy.”

    Update (1615ET):

    In an interesting exchange, Rep. Jamie Raskin (D-MD) read an email which Amazon’s Jeff Bezos sent to his staff saying “We’re buying market position, not technology.” 

    *  *  *

    Update (1445ET):

    While the tech titans mostly stuck to their prepared remarks at the beginning of today’s testimony, Facebook’s Mark Zuckerberg veered off script – pointing out that Google is the largest online advertising platform in the world, while Amazon is growing the fastest.

    In many areas, we are behind our competitors,” he said. “The most popular messaging service in the U.S. is iMessage. The fastest growing app is TikTok. The most popular app for video is YouTube. The fastest growing ads platform is Amazon. The largest ads platform is Google. And for every dollar spent on advertising in the U.S., less than ten cents is spent with us.”

    Translation: Facebook couldn’t possibly commit antitrust violations with these advertising behemoths at the head of the pack.

    *  *  *

    Update (1155ET): The Big-Tech hearing has been delayed until 1230-1300ET as the Judiciary Committee attempted to complete another hearing on immigration.

    *  *  *

    The CEOs of Amazon, Google, Apple and Facebook will testify before House lawmakers over allegations of anti-competitive practices. For members of the House Judiciary antitrust subcommittee, it will be their sixth hearing in their investigation into Silicon Valley antitrust accusations.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Watch Live (the ‘virtual’ hearing is due to start at 1200ET):

    *  *  *

    The four CEOs have now released their prepared remarks.

    Amazon CEO Jeff Bezos:

    Apple CEO Tim Cook:

    Google CEO Sundar Pichai:

    Facebook CEO Mark Zuckerberg:

    *  *  *

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Composite photo via Business Insider

    As Politico notes, “The session also arrives as scrutiny of the behemoths is surging across the globe, including an expected Justice Department antitrust case against Google and the recent launch of two European probes of potential anticompetitive behavior by Apple.”

    It will also mark the first time Jeff Bezos, the world’s richest person, has offered testimony before Congress – albeit via videoconference, while House Judiciary lawmakers will attend both virtually and in-person in a hybrid format, according to the report.

    That said, today’s ‘showdown’ could go one of two ways; fireworks, or snoozefest. If House Democrats jump off script from antitrust issues and press the CEOs over online hate speech, or if GOP members drill them on anti-conservative bias, things could get interesting.

    Even the format of the questioning – four elite CEOs, all appearing by videoconference because of the coronavirus pandemic – could make it harder for the members to land a glove on the companies’ varied issues, ranging from Google’s and Facebook’s command of digital ad revenue to Apple’s control of its App Store and questions about whether Amazon misled Congress. –Politico

    “The discussion will go well beyond antitrust,” said Carl Szabo, VP and General Counsel of NetChoice, a tech trade group which counts Google, Amazon and Facebook as members. “It will go into issues of election interference, or conservative bias, or any of the other issues de jour on which we like to saddle tech.”

    As we detailed previously, here’s what to expect assuming things go according to plan:

    Lawmakers will likely question Bezos about whether an Amazon lawyer misled the Judiciary Committee last summer by claiming the company doesn’t use data collected from third-party vendors to launch competing products of its own.

    In fact, according to the Wall Street Journal, Amazon employees did just that – which prompted Judiciary leaders to question whether a criminal referral was appropriate for perjury charges. The company disputed WSJ‘s report, and said it did not ‘intentionally mislead’ the Committee – while also promising to conduct an internal investigation.

    Facebook’s Mark Zuckerberg will likely face questions over acquisitions of former rivals WhatsApp and Instagram, while Sen. Elizabeth Warren (D-MA) and others have called for regulators to break up the social media giant.

    Other items of inquiry will include how Facebook handles its trove of data collected from more than 2 billion users, including whether it is for anticompetitive purposes.

    “There’s a real fear that no other competitor could ever successfully launch a social media platform because it could never match Facebook’s troves of data, which, given their record, it’s a serious threat to users,” Rep. Joe Neguse (D-CO) told Politico.

    Google’s Sundar Pichai will have to answer for whether the company amplifies its own search services to the detriment of competitors and consumers seeking maps, videos or other services.

    Separately, questions will be asked over whether their domination of online advertising has harmed smaller businesses as well as news outlets.

    The committee has also accused the company of being less than forthright in its past testimony, including on questions such as what percentage of searches on the company’s engine lead to website referrals not on Google.

    Google has separately been a frequent target of Republican allegations of anti-conservative bias on its video sharing platform YouTube, a topic that is expected to come up again at Monday’s hearing. Google and other major tech platforms deny those charges. Democrats, meanwhile, have taken issue with the company’s handling of hate speech and misinformation on YouTube. –Politico

    Lastly, Apple CEO Tim Cook will face questions over how the company has handled its app store.

    Because of the market power that Apple has, it is charging exorbitant rents — highway robbery, basically — bullying people to pay 30 percent or denying access to their market,” Rep. David Cicilline (D-RI) told The Verge in June. “It’s crushing small developers who simply can’t survive with those kinds of payments. If there were real competition in this marketplace, this wouldn’t happen.

  • Supreme Court Justice Ginsburg Hospitalized For "Minimally-Invasive" Surgery
    Supreme Court Justice Ginsburg Hospitalized For “Minimally-Invasive” Surgery

    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 07/29/2020 – 19:57

    Less than two weeks after her previous hospitalization, Supreme Court Justice Ruth Bader Ginsburg is back in Sloan Kettering for a procedure to revise a bile-duct stent. She is expected to be released by the end of the week.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Full Statement:

    Justice Ginsburg underwent a minimally invasive non-surgical procedure today at Memorial Sloan Kettering Cancer Center in New York City to revise a bile duct scent that was originally placed at Sloan Kettering in August 2019.

    According to her doctors, stent revisions are common occurrences and the procedure, performed using endoscopy and medical imaging guidance, was done to minimize the risk of future infection.

    The Justice is resting comfortably and expects to be released from the hospital by the end of the week.

    Tow weeks ago, she confirmed that was living with a recurrence of liver cancer.

    On May 19, I began a course of chemotherapy (gemcitabine) to treat a recurrence of cancer. A periodic scan in February followed by a biopsy revealed lesions on my liver. My recent hospitalizations to remove gall stones and treat an infection were unrelated to this recurrence.

    Immunotherapy first essayed proved unsuccessful. The chemotherapy course, however, is yielding positive results. Satisfied that my treatment course is now clear, I am providing this information.

    My most recent scan on July 7 indicated significant reduction of the liver lesions and no new disease. I am tolerating chemotherapy well and am encouraged by the success of my current treatment. I will continue bi-weekly chemotherapy to keep my cancer at bay, and am able to maintain an active daily routine. Throughout, I have kept up with opinion writing and all other Court work.

    I have often said I would remain a member of the Court as long as I can do the job full steam. I remain fully able to do that.

    At 87, Ginsburg is the oldest member of the U.S. Supreme Court, and a stalwart of its liberal wing.

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 29th July 2020

  • In Rare Compromise, Turkey 'Pauses' Gas Exploration Near Greece After EU & US Pressure
    In Rare Compromise, Turkey ‘Pauses’ Gas Exploration Near Greece After EU & US Pressure

    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 07/29/2020 – 02:45

    The Turkish gas and oil exploration drama in the East Mediterranean which put Greece and Cyprus on a war footing with Turkish forces has taken a surprise turn. 

    Amid the ratcheting pressure on Ankara over alleged incursions into Greece and Cyprus’ economic zones coming from the European Union and United States, it appears Turkey has backed down for now.

    Days ago France’s Emmanuel Macron even invoked the threat of EU sanctions, citing that it’s “not acceptable for the maritime space of a European Union member state to be violated or threatened.” Turkey has frequently been source of rifts among fellow NATO member states. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Via AP

    For the first time, Turkey says its ambitious and expansive, but hugely controversial, gas exploration initiative is on hold. On Tuesday TRT World reports that “Turkey has said it could pause energy-exploration operations in the Eastern Mediterranean Sea for a while pending talks with Greece.”

    The announcement came from the office of the president, with spokesman Ibrahim Kalin revealing in a CNN Turk interview that Erdogan told his aides to “be constructive and put this on hold for some time”.

    He identified that the seismic exploration vessel “Oruc Reis” was set to search for hydrocarbons “180 kilometers from the island of Meis (Kastellorizo in Greek)” — an area Greece recently said it would deploy military assets to if the Turkish operation was initiated. 

    “Despite this our president said while the negotiations are continuing, let’s be constructive and hold (energy search) for a while,” the presidential spokesman said

    The Greek Navy has said it’s in a state of “heightened readiness” in response to any incursion of Greece’s territorial waters. It boils down to how the rival longtime enemies interpret their offshore zones, with Turkey in the past years using especially its so-called “Turkish Republic of Northern Cyprus” to lay claim to waters entirely surrounding the island. 

    Below is a Turkish interpretation of its rightful waters, within which some of Greece’s easternmost islands are located:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Likely helping Turkey to hit the pause button was a forceful message out of US Ambassador to Greece Geoffrey Pyatt earlier this week: “I want to echo the clear message from Washington and elsewhere in Europe, urging Turkish authorities to halt operations that raise tensions in the region, such as plans to survey for natural resources in areas where Greece and Cyprus assert jurisdiction in the eastern Mediterranean,” he said.

    Pompeo also earlier this month asserted that the US clearly backed Greece, Cyprus, and the EU’s interpretation of the economic zones and Turkish violations of that territory.

  • Israel Rolls Out Dystopian "Cyber Espionage Award" For US-Backed Digital Saboteurs
    Israel Rolls Out Dystopian “Cyber Espionage Award” For US-Backed Digital Saboteurs

    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 07/29/2020 – 02:00

    Authored by Raul Diego via MintPressNews.com,

    A “mastermind in the field of cyber espionage” will be awarded a lifetime achievement by the state of Israel in September. The “Israel Defense Award” ceremony is slated to take place in the residence of President Reuven Rivlin, himself a former member of the IDF’s intelligence corps, Haman, which is tasked with “collecting, disseminating, and publishing intelligence information.” In addition, prizes will also be handed out to members of three secret cybersecurity projects developed by Mossad, the IDF, the Shin Bet and MAFAT (Administration for the Development of Weapons and Technological Infrastructure) that have made a “long-standing contribution to national security and for initiating many technological solutions”, not to mention the forging of close ties to the U.S. National Security state.

    The identity of the “legendary” Israeli spy who is slated to receive the official commendation has not been revealed and has only been referred to as “Aleph”; said to be in his forties and well-known both in Israeli and American intelligence circles. He is described as a “phenomenon” of the cyber field who turned down a lucrative career in the tech industry in order to serve the national interest. The mystery-man was credited with creating a “significant part” of the work in Israeli cybersecurity by an unnamed acquaintance.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Current Israeli Defense Minister and Alternate Prime Minister, Benny Gantz announced the winners and heaped praise on Israel’s “human capital,” whose work proves that there are “no borders in the war on Israel’s security.” Indeed, this statement by the IDF’s former chief of staff can be corroborated by taking a look at the corporate partners who are a part of the winning projects; the first of which is a joint collaboration between the Israeli national intelligence agency, Mossad, the Rafael Company, the Israeli Air Force and a new IDF Intelligence Unit 9900, which “provided the IDF with unique capabilities” and “technological breakthroughs.” The Rafael Company, (Rafael Advanced Defense Systems Ltd.), is also involved in the second project to be recognized by the Israeli state, along with Elbit Systems. Both of these companies have major cybersecurity contracts outside of Israel and the U.S., in particular.

    Critical infrastructure

    Elbit Systems received a contract from the U.S. government last year to build an “integrated” surveillance system across the Arizona-Mexico border spanning over 200 linear miles. They have since deployed dozens of “sophisticated” cameras on towers along the border and have also secured multi-million dollar contracts to equip an unnamed Southeast Asian navy’s ships with their AI-enabled technology for “complex reconnaissance missions.”

    The Rafael Company, meanwhile, is a major player in international weapons systems development and is the principal creator of the “Iron Dome” anti-missile technology through a  subsidiary company, mPrest. The Iron Dome software is currently running on “critical infrastructure systems” in the United States and has been a recent subject of concern for the U.S. military, who refused to integrate the software into its air defense systems after the Israeli company failed to provide the source code, resulting in the loss of a $600 million-dollar contract for the Tel-Aviv-based company.

    The Rafael Company subsidiary, nevertheless, has partnered with several American utility companies, providing “mission-critical monitoring” services to sectors of the U.S. power grid. mPrest’s “System of Systems” has been integrated by San Diego Gas & Electric (SDG&E), Southern Company – the second-largest utility company in the United States – and others. The New York Power Authority (NYPA) entered into a partnership with the Israeli company in 2017 to deploy their technology in a number of utility plants across the state.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    In the official statement issued by Gantz announcing the prize winners, he gave special attention to the fact that their work “was done in secret,” while President Rivlin lauded the “long nights, days, weeks and months of exhausting and grueling work” put forward by the recipients of the Eliyahu Golomb award, named after the commander and chief architect of the Haganah (the Defence) militia – a paramilitary organization that would eventually become the IDF after the founding of the Jewish state and progenitor of terrorist organizations like Irgun and the Stern Gang.

    Old collaborators

    The history of the Haganah provides a unique look into the permanent relationship between certain U.S. interests and the state of Israel, dating back to its gestation period during the British mandate of Palestine, as well as a direct link to Israel’s present-day cybersecurity technology apparatus through a young RCA engineer from New York, Dan Fliderblum, who was recruited by the Zionist guerilla to set up a “network of secret radio transmitters in Palestine” to protect their illegal arms smuggling operation. Fliderblum would later change his name to David Avivi and pioneer the Isreali electronics industry.

    At the time, an organized crime association comprised of the Sicilian and Jewish mafias, often referred to as “Murder, Inc.” controlled the Port of New York. Meyer Lansky, as leader of the New York crime families, was approached by Haganah operative and close aid to Ben-Gurion, Yehuda Arazi, to help move weapons to Palestine. Arazi was an underground agent who had been doing Ben-Gurion’s bidding throughout Europe for years and was sent to the United States by the future first Prime Minister of Israel to procure heavy armaments, including “aircraft, artillery pieces, tanks [and] antiaircraft guns.”

    Jewish mobsters in the United States would henceforth play a pivotal role in obtaining and providing financial and other resources to the Haganah. Notorious Jewish gangsters, like Bugsy Siegel, Longy Zwillman, and Moe Dalitz, met with another Haganah agent every week in 1946 in the back of a Los Angeles restaurant to arrange or deliver money to finance the ongoing war in Palestine.

    The extent of the mob’s involvement in these operations came to light when the FBI seized a B-25 bomber obtained by the “syndicate” was forced to return to Newark by bad weather, causing the entire shipment of aircraft, which included twenty AT-6 airplanes, to be confiscated.

    As for the man whose name dons the prize Israel will award its undisclosed cyber-tech heroes in a few months’ time, it was his arguments in favor of a “much more extensive and orderly defensive force,” that convinced Ben-Gurion to move ahead with the creation of the IDF and, along with it, the establishment of less suspect partnerships that wouldn’t hinder the social advancement of the Jews involved, like the case of Miami mob figure Sam Kay, who it is claimed, was motivated to aid the Haganah’s arms-smuggling operation to “clean up” his own image and help his daughter marry up.

    The candidates

    The partners of today’s IDF-linked tech initiatives read more like a blue-chip investment portfolio than a police rap sheet, but the scope of the crimes dwarf those that occurred in the days of jukeboxes and trench coats. The myriad cybersecurity, AI, and IoT startups emerging out of Israel’s state-funded organizations have extensive ties to Fortune 100 companies like Apple, Google, Microsoft, and many others. The vast majority of these startups originate in military outfits like Unit 8200, which has been the center of offensive cyber warfare technology like Stuxnet, co-developed with the United States to take down an Iranian nuclear facility in 2010, among other covert operations and initiatives.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The Natanz enrichment facility was significantly damaged by a ‘mystery’ fire early this month, via Iran Atomic Energy Organization/AFP

    While Israel won’t reveal the names of the winners selected for the Israel Defense prize awarded every year for the past six decades, we can take a few educated guesses as to who might have been some of the finalists. People like Lior Div come to mind; founder of a cybersecurity company called Cybereason, which has been running simulations on behalf of the U.S. government of a foreign-hacked 2020 general election. The table-top exercise predicted dozens of dead Americans, hundreds injured, and an election that never happens.

    Div fits the age-range given for the winner of the lifetime achievement award but would be eliminated from consideration if we take the claim seriously that the recipient shied away from the millions he could have made in the private sector. Lior Div’s company is currently valued at just over $1 billion and his own net worth can be assumed to be near that, at least.

    There are other potential nominees, such as Amit Yoran, who certainly fits the bill of an individual who is “known in [the Israeli] and the American intelligence community” as reported in several pieces about the mysterious “Aleph.” Yoran fits the age profile, as well, and as former Cybersecurity chief at DHS has the credentials to be recognized in both the halls of the Mossad and CIA’s Langley headquarters. But, he too has thrown his hat into the private sector many times and is currently CEO of a cybersecurity firm called Tenable, which offers solutions to address “vulnerabilities and misconfigurations in your modern IT environment.”

    If lifetime achievement is the true criteria, then former head of Mossad, Tamir Pardo, might be considered as the potential candidate that could claim that a “not insignificant part of [Israel’s Defense] work was created by him personally due to his special talent.” Pardo served under Bibi Netanhayu’s brother, Yoni’s military command, and has been a member of Israel’s top brass for a very long time. Pardo once described Mossad as a “criminal organization with a license.” But, far from a critique, Pardo followed his controversial statement by admitting it was “the fun part.”

  • The COVID-Hysteria Campaign – The Ultimate Divide And Conquer Strategy
    The COVID-Hysteria Campaign – The Ultimate Divide And Conquer Strategy

    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 07/28/2020 – 23:55

    Authored by Russ Bangs via Off-Guardian.org,

    “It has frequently been observed that terror can rule absolutely only over people who are isolated against each other and that therefore one of the primary concerns of tyrannical government is to bring this isolation about. Isolation may be the beginning of terror; it certainly is its most fertile ground; it always is its result. This isolation is, as it were, pretotalitarian; its hallmark is impotence insofar as power always comes from people acting together, acting in concert; isolated people are powerless by definition.”

    – Hannah Arendt, The Origins of Totalitarianism

    Western civilization, led by the US government and media, has embarked upon a campaign of mass psychological terrorism designed to cover for the collapsing economy, set up a new pretext for Wall Street’s ongoing plunder expedition, radically escalate the police state, deeply traumatize people into submission to total social conformity, and radically aggravate the anti-social, anti-human atomization of the people.

    The pretext for this abomination is an epidemic which objectively is comparable to the seasonal flu and is caused by the same kind of Coronavirus we’ve endured so long without totalitarian rampages and mass insanity.

    The global evidence is converging on the facts: This flu is somewhat more contagious than the norm and is especially dangerous for those who are aged and already in poor health from pre-existing maladies. It is not especially dangerous for the rest of the population.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The whole concept of “lockdowns” is exactly upside down, exactly the wrong way any sane society would respond to this circumstance.

    It’s the vulnerable who should be shielded while nature takes its course among the general population, who should go about life as usual. Dominionist-technocratic rigidity can’t prevent an epidemic from cycling through the population in spite of the delusions of that religion, especially since Western societies began their measures far too late anyway.

    So it’s best to let herd immunity develop as fast as it naturally will, at which time the virus recedes from lack of hosts (and is likely to mutate in a milder direction along the way). This is the only way to bring a safer environment for all including the most vulnerable.

    The fact that most societies have rejected the sane, scientific route in favor of doomed-to-fail attempts at a forcible violent segregation and sterilization is proof that governments aren’t concerned with the public health (as if we didn’t know that already from a thousand policies of poisoning the environment while gutting the health care system), but are very ardent to use this crisis they artificially generated in order radically to escalate their police state power toward totalitarian goals.

    The whole concept of self-isolation and anti-social “distancing” is radically anti-human. We evolved over millions of years to be social creatures living in tight-knit groups. Although modern societies ideologically and socioeconomically work to massify and atomize people, nevertheless almost all of us still seek close human companionship in our lives.

    (I suspect most of the internet police-state-mongers are not only fascists at heart but are confirmed misanthropic loners who couldn’t care less about human closeness.)

    This terror campaign seeks to blast to pieces any remaining human closeness, which means any remaining humanity as such, the better to isolate individual atoms for subjection to total domination. Arendt wrote profoundly on this goal of totalitarian governments, though even she didn’t envision a state-driven cult of the literal physical repulsion of every atom from every other atom.

    So far the people are submitting completely to a terror campaign dedicated to the total eradication of whatever community was left in the world, and especially whatever community was starting to be rebuilt.

    Some dream of this terror campaign somehow bringing about a magical collective transformation. They don’t explain how that is supposed to happen when everyone’s so terrorized they’re desperate to detach physically from their own shadows, let alone physically come together with other people. But any kind of political or social action, any kind of movement-building, requires close person-to-person contact.

    It seems that for most erstwhile self-alleged dissidents, the fact that social media is no substitute for face-to-face organizing and group action, a fact hitherto universally acknowledged by these dissidents, is another truth suddenly to be jettisoned replaced by its complete antithesis.

    Thus the terror campaign is a virus causing those it infects to abdicate all activism and all prospect for all future activism, for as long as they remain insane with the fever of this propaganda terror.

    Far more profoundly and evoking despair, the terror campaign is a virus causing those it infects to fear and loathe all human contact, all companionship, all closeness, all things which ever made us human in the first place. Prior totalitarian regimes sought this lack of contact and trust through networks of informers.

    These networks are part of today’s terror campaign as well, encouraged from above and spontaneously arising from below as a result of the feeling of terror as well as the exercise of prior petty-evil intentions on the part of petty-evil individuals.

    But today’s totalitarian potential is far worse than this. Now the regimes aspiring to total domination have terrorized and brainwashed the vast majority of people into an automatic physical distrust of all other people. One no longer fears that someone is an informer, but fears the very existence of another human being.

    Any kind of human relations, from personal friendship and romance to friendly social gatherings and clubs to social and cultural movements become impossible under such circumstances. This threatens to be the end of the very concept of shared humanity, to be replaced by an anthill of slave atoms with no consciousness beyond fear and the most animal concern for food and shelter, which already is allowed or denied in the same way experimenters do with lab rats.

    And the more people fear and loathe the literal physical existence of all other people, the more the situation becomes ripe for every epidemic of murder, from the spiking rate of domestic violence and killings to incipient lynch mobs to pogroms to Nazi-style extermination campaigns.

    This is the system’s end goal. It’s the logical end where every trend of today leads. All of it is trumped up over an epidemic which objectively is a flu season somewhat rougher than average.

    Why do the people want to surrender and throw away all reality and future prospect of shared humanity, happiness, freedom, well-being, over so little? Is this really a terminal totalitarian death cult, the globe as one massive Jonestown?

    So far it seems this is what the majority wants. If they don’t really want this consummation of universal death in spirit, emotion and body, they’d better snap out of their terror-induced mental delirium fast, before it’s too late.

  • Iran's IRGC Attacks US Carrier Mock-Up In Massive Drill Off Hormuz Strait 
    Iran’s IRGC Attacks US Carrier Mock-Up In Massive Drill Off Hormuz Strait 

    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 07/28/2020 – 23:35

    New satellite images have confirmed that Iran has moved its mock US aircraft carrier to the strategic Strait of Hormuz for use in live-fire drills, which state media says have commenced. 

    Analysts say the mock-up actually appears close to America’s fleet of Nimitz-class carriers, commonly stationed in the region and routinely traversing the contested Strait of Hormuz. It even includes fake fighter jets parked on the deck.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Iran’s refurbished mockup aircraft carrier is seen towed by a tugboat near Bandar Abbas, via Maxar Technologies/Reuters.

    The fake carrier been estimated to be at some 650 feet long and 160 feet wide. Timing-wise it should be noted that the real USS Nimitz just entered the Persian Gulf area via the Indian Ocean just days ago. 

    According to an AP-CBS report

    Iran’s paramilitary Revolutionary Guard fired a missile from a helicopter targeting a replica aircraft carrier in the strategic Strait of Hormuz, state television reported on Tuesday, an exercise aimed at threatening the U.S. amid tensions between Tehran and Washington.

    The maritime tracking analysis site Tanker Trackers showed that Iran cleared its shipping lanes to make way for the military drills.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    According to Iranian state media, IRGC used “long-range ballistic missiles with the ability to hit far-reaching aggressor floating targets,” according to Guard’s deputy commander for operations, Abbas Nilforoushan.

    State media subsequently published a photo set of the mock carrier being attacked, some of which were dated to Monday.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Iran’s PressTV described the multi-branch drills as “massive” — also said to include helicopters attacking the mock carrier:

    According to the IRGC’s Sepah News, the final phase of the exercises, codenamed Payambar-e A’zam (The Great Prophet) 14, kicked off on Tuesday across land, air and sea in the general area of Hormozgan Province, west of the Hormuz Strait and in the Persian Gulf.

    Several units from IRGC’s Navy and Aerospace Division are taking part in the maneuvers, which feature missiles, vessels, drones, and radars, and are designed to practice both offensive and defensive missions.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Some reports said nearby surface missiles were also used during the drills. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Meanwhile, Iran’s air and naval military drills in the strait have put US forces in the region on high alert.

    A US Navy statement on Tuesday slammed the drills as “irresponsible and reckless”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    It comes as the Trump administration has shown no signs of letting up on the ‘maximum pressure’ campaign targeting Iran.

    This even amid the current showdown with Beijing which has resulted in tit-for-tat consulate closures in the past week, and as the US Navy is increasingly active over the South China Sea. 

    * * *

    Video of this week’s Iranian military drills featuring the mock aircraft carrier:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  • FOMC Preview: The Fed Must Find Ways To "Out Dove" Market Expectations
    FOMC Preview: The Fed Must Find Ways To “Out Dove” Market Expectations

    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 07/28/2020 – 23:18

    While nobody expects any fireworks from the Fed tomorrow or any major market-moving announcement, the FOMC meeting will likely involve a debate over the toolkit with a discussion of how to pivot from “stabilization” to “accommodation” policies according to BofA strategists, who notes that while there likely is an agreement that the next steps should accomplish the goal of “enhancing forward guidance,” they do not think Fed officials have settled on the strategy.

    Amid growing fears of covid chaos and renewed economic shutdowns, Powell will likely be grilled on, and will discuss some of the Fed’s options while the minutes released in three weeks will provide more clarity. That said, the statement is likely to provide little new insight, with only a few edits to the current conditions paragraph to highlight improvement thus far, but also express caution over recent signs of slowing in some of the high-frequency indicators.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    More importantly, the rates and FX markets expect no new policy action to be taken at the July FOMC meeting, which should lead to a muted reaction across markets (it also sets up markets for a surprise). Instead, according to BofA, market participants will be much more focused on the guidance and “stage setting” that Chair Powell provides on what the next easing steps might look like. On net, a discussion of additional easing measures in the Powell press conference – such as forward guidance, asset purchase duration, and YCC/YCT – risks lower real rates, flatter curve, and weaker USD (and, in the worst case, a very adverse reaction across risk assets).

    Economics: a policy discussion

    As BofA frames it, there seems to be an agreement among Fed officials on the “what” but not the “how.” The consensus appears to be to send a strong signal that the Fed will be committed to accommodative policy, remaining at the ZLB, well into the recovery and perhaps even until full employment has been reached and inflation is able to run at/above the 2% target. This would be a more dovish strategy than following the 2008-09 recession when the Fed pursued a “normalization” policy, pushing up interest rates prior to achieving trend 2% inflation or closing the output gap. Back then the Fed discussed the balancing act between increasing rates earlier but slower, or waiting and having to hike more quickly. Looking back, it seems many Fed officials believe that waiting longer might have been prudent given that 2% inflation was not achieved and the Fed ended up reversing some of the hikes later in the recovery.

    There are several options for the Fed to enhance forward guidance, which are not mutually exclusive:

    • the primary focus is on language, potentially using both outcome and calendar-based language. Fed officials seem particularly focused on making sure 2% inflation is reached, which means likely explicitly supporting an overshoot of the inflation target (something which the record surge in gold is clearly sniffing out). This could be done through a commitment to keep rates at zero until 2% is reached on a trend basis but also, perhaps, by reinforcing this language with calendar guidance.
    • The secondary focus is on balance-sheet policies such as yield curve caps or targets (YCT) or a change in the composition of the balance sheet (QE). While YCT on the short to medium end of the curve seems like an attractive option, it is still novel and Fed officials appear to want more time to study such a program. Recent language from Fed officials suggests our expectation for YCT to be introduced at the September meeting might end up being too early.

    The Fed can choose to employ one or all of these strategies at the same time or phased in, depending on the state of the economy and markets (as a reminder, the worse the economy and the lower the S&P500, the greater the flexibility Powell will have to unleash the next phase, whatever it may be). Certainly, if facing a weaker economy with low realized and expected inflation, the Fed would likely need to be more aggressive. Another scenario would be if the market prematurely prices in hikes thereby tightening financial conditions. The Fed might look to fight this market pricing and push out hike expectations, which could be done through calendar guidance or YCT, most directly (unless of course the Fed wants to push the market lower so it has more degrees of freedom).

    Meanwhile, the Fed is also engaging in a prolonged framework review that will likely guide the policy decision. The annual Jackson Hole conference will also take place virtually at the end of August. It has historically been a good forum for central bankers to debate policy and will likely be focused on the best way to achieve enhanced forward guidance.

    Fed markets programs: extension likely

    The July FOMC meeting will likely see some communication around an extension of Fed and Treasury markets programs. Most markets programs are slated to expire in September as shown in the table below.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    However, it is virtually assured that these will all be extended as the Fed will want to keep these programs indefinitely in place to guard against the risk of a more material economic slowdown and potential tightening of financial conditions (and also because any of the “temporary” aspects of the covid crisis are really permanent). BofA anticipates that most programs will be extended until March 2021 (in reality they will never expire). This would reduce the risk of a material tightening of financial conditions in 2H and smooth volatility stemming from year-end dealer balance-sheet constrains.

    Most of the programs require Treasury approval for extension, and it is safe to assume that both the Fed and Treasury will be supportive of pushing out their deadline.

    Rates: September stage setting and twist potential

    According to BofA STIR strategists, the US rates market expects no new policy action to be taken at the July FOMC meeting. Instead, market participants will be much more focused on the guidance and “stage setting” that Chair Powell provides on the next steps to ease policy, including enhanced forward guidance, asset purchase adjustments, and yield curve control (YCC)/yield curve targeting (YCT).

    While no change is expected to the Fed’s settings for administered rates (IOER, ON RRP) at this meeting, the rates market is already expecting a very dovish message from the Fed with the timing of the first rate hike not until late 2024 or early 2025 (if ever).

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The main challenge for the Fed will be to find ways to “out dove” market expectations in their next easing round likely through:

    1. the establishment of an inflation framework that ensures a “durable” increase in core PCE at or above 2% for 6 or 12 months before the first rate increase and
    2. a potential reallocation of Treasury purchases to remove additional duration risk from the market.

    BofA discusses the potential for a Fed UST twist and likely market reaction below:

    Why twist? Recent media reports have suggested the Fed is considering changing the composition of their UST and MBS toward longer-dated securities to further ease financial conditions. This theme was furthered on last week by headlines from William Dudley, former NY Fed head, who noted that the Fed could extend its purchase duration. Both sets of comments come in the context of a Fed that is seeking to “pivot” from market stabilization to monetary easing via some combination of forward guidance, asset purchases, and potential YCC / YCT.

    How to twist? The Fed has clear logic to twist upon implementation of enhanced forward guidance or YCC. The argument to twist would be most impactful if the Fed incorporated any calendar dimension to its guidance. For example, a credible Fed commitment not to raise rates or implement YCC until at least end ’22 / end ’24 would reduce the need to purchase securities at this part of the curve. The slated purchases could then be reallocated to longer-dated maturities to extract more duration risk from the market while keeping total purchase quantity the same or lower.

    The Fed is currently purchasing $80bn/month of USTs (in proportion to USTs outstanding). BofA shows hypothetical Fed purchase scenarios below (Table 2) where the Fed could cease buying the 0-2.25Y or 0-4.5Y part of the curve, leave TIPS purchases unchanged, and distribute the remaining purchases in proportion to debt outstanding. The Fed could also remove more 10Y duration equivalent risk from the market while maintaining the current monthly purchase pace or lowering it to $65bn/m.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Twist effectiveness? Recall the 2011 twist and relevance of a similar policy today.

    2011 twist: The Fed announced its most recent twist in September 2011 (a combination of short-term UST sales and longer-dated UST purchases) in reaction to the sharp risk off and economic slowdown following the US downgrade. This policy was mentioned in the August meeting minutes and was implemented the following meeting. The weighted average maturity of purchases increased substantially while keeping the total amount of UST holdings the same, on average (Chart 1, Table 2). Long-end rates declined materially the day the twist was announced and the curve aggressively bull flattened (Chart 2, Table 3). The month after the twist, rates sold off but the curve remained flatter.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Effectiveness today: Today is very different from 2011 and the Fed knows it. Comparing today vs September 2011: 10 and 30Y rates are 135-200bp lower, curves are significantly flatter, 10Y term premium measures have fallen 80-200bp, the real neutral rate (real 5y5y) has dropped 160bp, and the Chicago Fed fin conditions index is easier (Table 4).

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The June FOMC meeting minutes reflect that the Committee is well aware of these dynamics: “declines in the neutral rate of interest, term premiums, and low levels of longer-term yields would likely act as constraints on the effectiveness of asset purchases in the current environment“. However, Treasury WAM and longer-dated issuance is higher, which a Fed twist would offset.

    Twist impact: Fed twist would likely result in (1) 30Y UST rally and curve bull flattening, likely on par with 2011, and (2) spread curve steepening. The spread curve move would be driven by a modest cheapening of short-dated USTs vs OIS (less Fed buying) and a richening of longer-dated USTs vs OIS (more Fed buying). Bank front-end policing would likely limit the potential for a material UST-OIS cheapening.

    Bottom line: there is rising likelihood for a “twist” operation, especially since the Fed seemingly wants to ease more. This risks wider 30Y spreads and reinforces even lower longer-dated real rate view (currently 10Y TIPS is at a record low -0.93%). Guidance on the likelihood of a Fed twist from Powell’s press conference or July FOMC minutes release (29 August) will be of keen interest to the rates market and the outlook for the long end of the curve. That said, not even BofA expects the Fed to commit to such a policy at this meeting, but likely start the stage-setting process this week.

    * * *

    Impact on the dollar

    With an uneventful FOMC meeting widely anticipated, there is only moderate risk to FX and USD specifically. Still, potential discussion of the Fed’s toolkit (specifically options to ramp up monetary policy support in the event that downside risks are realized) seems a negative USD risk, in BofA’s view, as it is likely to reinforce the widespread belief among market participants in the Fed “put” that has driven up risk assets and undermined the greenback since end-March. For the same reason, extension of current programs may also weigh on USD. And while perception that a credible and effective set of additional Fed stimulus options exists, it would serve to further undermine USD per above, while as BofA ominously warns, “perception that the Fed is out of ammo could cause a reassessment of the Fed “put” and support USD via lower risk assets.”

    Sharp USD weakness over in the second half of July has accelerated into this FOMC meeting. Over the last week, the DXY is about -3% lower, with EUR and SEK leading the pack of outperformers against USD. Much of the recent USD weakness is due to (1) buoyancy in risky “reflation”-sensitive assets, which continue to decouple from challenging economic conditions and recently worsening COVID-19 dynamics; as well as (2) the accelerating EUR rally driven by market participants concerned over missing out on bullish price action post-EU Recovery Fund approval (which however does not equate to broad dollar weakness as discussed previously).

    Looking forward, BofA expects a reversal in USD weakness despite persistent over-valuation, and forecasts EUR/USD is 1.08 at end-2020 due to COVID-19-related risks to the global and US economies although it concedes that “persistently frothy risk appetite is a risk to this call.”

  • Kennedy Jr. Warns Parents About Danger Of Using Largely-Untested COVID Vaccines On Kids
    Kennedy Jr. Warns Parents About Danger Of Using Largely-Untested COVID Vaccines On Kids

    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 07/28/2020 – 23:15

    Authored by Martin Berger via GlobalResearch.ca,

    Environmental lawyer Robert F. Kennedy Jr. warned Americans on Thursday to be cautious about any new coronavirus vaccine, pointing out that key parts of testing are being skipped.

    “The Moderna vaccine, which is the lead candidate, skipped the animal testing altogether,” Kennedy said during an online debate on mandatory vaccinations with renowned Harvard law professor Alan Dershowitz. The debate was aired by Valuetainment and moderated by Patrick Bet-David.

    Kennedy is part of a political family, being the son of Senator Robert F. Kennedy and the nephew of President John F. Kennedy. Both were murdered in the 1960s.

    Another aspect of testing was equally unsatisfying, Kennedy said. The Moderna vaccine was tested “on 45 people. They had a high-dose group of 15 people, a medium-dose group of 15 people, and a low growth group of 15 people.”

    “In the low-dose group, one of the people was so sick from the vaccine they had to be hospitalized,” he explained.

    “That’s six percent. In the high-dose group, three people got so sick they had to be hospitalized. That’s twenty percent.”

    In spite of these significant problems,

    “they’re going ahead, and making two billion doses of that vaccine.”

    Another problem with the testing of the coronavirus vaccine is that it’s tested not on “typical Americans,” but a carefully selected group of people who don’t suffer from certain conditions.

    “They use what they call exclusionary criteria,” Kennedy said.

    “They are only giving these vaccines in these tests that they’re doing to the healthiest people.”

    “If you look at their exclusionary idea criteria: You cannot be pregnant, you cannot be overweight, you must have never smoked a cigarette, you must have never vaped, you must have no respiratory problems in your family, you can’t suffer asthma, you can’t have diabetes, you can’t have rheumatoid arthritis or any autoimmune disease. There has to be no history of seizure in the family. These are the people they’re testing the vaccine on.”

    He asked,

    “What happens when they give them to the typical American? You know, Sally Six-Pack and Joe Bag of Donuts who’s 50 pounds overweight and has diabetes.”

    Kennedy stressed several times that

    “any other medicine … that had that kind of profile in its original phase-one study would be [dead on arrival].”

    “No medical product in the world would be able to go forward with the profile that Moderna has,” he reiterated.

    During the course of the debate, Kennedy also talked about the regular vaccines most people take, from Hepatitis B to the flu shot, emphasizing that no proper testing had ever been done, which is mandatory for any other medication. Vaccines “are the only medical product that does not have to be safety-tested against a placebo,” he explained.

    In a study involving placebos, one group of people would be injected with the actual vaccine, while another group would be injected with saline solution, which would not have any effect in preventing a particular disease. The people who are part of the study would then be observed to see if there are any differences between the two groups, both regarding the disease vaccinated against, and side effects.

    As these tests are never done on vaccines, “nobody knows the risk profile of any vaccine that is currently on the schedule. And that means nobody can say with any scientific certainty that that vaccine is averting more injuries and deaths than it’s causing.

    In fact, it should be the opposite, Kennedy said, with vaccines being tested even more thoroughly than any other medication.

    “It’s a medical intervention that is being given to perfectly healthy people to prevent somebody else from getting sick,” he pointed out.

    “And it’s the only medicine that’s given to healthy people … and particularly to children who have a whole lifetime in front of them. So you would expect that we would want that particular intervention to have particularly rigorous guarantees that it’s safe.”

    Kennedy said

    it’s not hypothetical that vaccines cause injury, and that injuries are not rare. The vaccine courts have paid out four billion dollars” over the past three decades, “and the threshold for getting back into a vaccine court and getting a judgment – [the Department of Health and Human Services] admits that fewer than one percent of people who are injured ever even get to court.”

    He mentioned another reason not to trust blindly any company currently producing vaccines in the United States. Each one of the four vaccine producers “is a convicted serial felon: GlaxoSanofiPfizerMerck.”

    “In the past 10 years, just in the last decade, those companies have paid 35 billion dollars in criminal penalties, damages, fines, for lying to doctors, for defrauding science, for falsifying science, for killing hundreds of thousands of Americans knowingly.”

    “It requires a cognitive dissonance,” Kennedy commented, “for people who understand the criminal corporate cultures of these four companies to believe that they’re doing this in every other product that they have, but they’re not doing it with vaccines.”

    While Kennedy is often described as being against vaccines altogether, he stressed that he does not oppose vaccines, as such. He accused his critics of “marginalizing me and silencing me” by misrepresenting his actual position.

    In May, Kennedy signed an appeal created by Archbishop Carlo Maria Viganò aimed at raising public awareness among people, governments, scientists, and the media about the serious dangers to individual freedom caused during the spread of Covid-19.

    The appeal raised concern at one point about a COVID-19 vaccination in relation to human freedom.

    “We also ask government leaders to ensure that forms of control over people, whether through tracking systems or any other form of location-finding, are rigorously avoided. The fight against Covid-19, however serious, must not be the pretext for supporting the hidden intentions of supranational bodies that have very strong commercial and political interests in this plan. In particular, citizens must be given the opportunity to refuse these restrictions on personal freedom, without any penalty whatsoever being imposed on those who do not wish to use vaccines, contact tracking or any other similar tool.”

    The appeal made it clear that for Catholics it is “morally unacceptable to develop or use vaccines derived from material from aborted fetuses.”

    Comments on the YouTube video of the debate between Kennedy and Dershowitz indicated, almost unanimously, that Kennedy had won the debate. Dershowitz conceded many points, arguing, however, that from the point of view of constitutional law, the coronavirus vaccine could be made mandatory.

    Dershowitz, who has provided legal counsel to and defended people like Donald Trump, Jeffrey Epstein, and Julian Assange, cited a 1905 Supreme Court ruling as precedent. Jacobson v. Massachusetts upheld the authority of states to enforce compulsory vaccination laws.

    Kennedy clarified that the state government at the time had offered people to either be vaccinated or pay a five dollar fine. Dershowitz’s argument, however, was that based on constitutional law, including this precedent, “the state has the power to literally take you to a doctor’s office and plunge a needle into your arm.”

    Kennedy said,

    “I think there’s a big constitutional chasm between, you know, that remedy, which is paying a fine, and actually going in and holding somebody down and forcibly injecting them.”

    President Trump has already said that the new coronavirus vaccine would not be mandatory, but available for those “who want to get it. Not everyone is going to want to get it.” A LifeSiteNews petition saying no to mandatory vaccinations has garnered more than 650,000 signatures and can still be signed here.

    The ethical issue of many vaccines being derived from cell lines of aborted babies was not discussed during the debate.

  • Florida Man Used PPP Loans To Buy Lamborghini Huracan, Goes On Spending Spree
    Florida Man Used PPP Loans To Buy Lamborghini Huracan, Goes On Spending Spree

    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 07/28/2020 – 22:55

    For months, we’ve warned loans granted under the Paycheck Protection Program (PPP) for businesses seeking coronavirus relief funds were susceptible to fraud.

    A Florida man was charged Monday after using PPP loans to buy a 2020 Lamborghini Huracan, according to the U.S. Department of Justice (DoJ). 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    2020 Lamborghini Huracan. h/t Fox News, DoJ

    David T. Hines of Miami, Florida, fraudulently obtained $3.9 million in PPP loans and used those funds to buy the Huracan, shop at luxury stores, and splurge on fancy Miami resorts.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The DoJ charged Hines,29, with one count of bank fraud, one count of making false statements to a bank and one count of engaging in transactions in unlawful proceeds.

    The DoJ complaint claims the man requested $13.5 million in PPP loans for four companies with dozens of employees.

    “In the days and weeks following the disbursement of PPP funds, the complaint alleges that Hines did not make payroll payments that he claimed on his loan applications,” according to the complaint. “He did, however, make purchases at luxury retailers and resorts in Miami Beach.”

    In early July, we reported a Texas man received almost $1 million in PPP loans to support 51 employees at his “Texas Barbecue” company, though the company never existed. The man used the loans to trade cryptocurrency on Coinbase.

    Not too long ago, Treasury Secretary Steven Mnuchin said that he is considering “forgiving all small loans, but would need fraud protection,” for businesses. The government has so far approved about $518.1 billion spread over 4.9 million PPP loans since the pandemic began. 

    The LA Times notes there are at least a dozen PPP fraud cases filed in 11 states in July. Many of these cases are blatant fraud, such as falsifying tax or business records, lying on applications, and misusing the money. 

    While safeguards to prevent PPP fraud appear to be lacking, Senate Republicans have unveiled even more PPP loans for business, which has really upset the Tea Party. “Republicans are now no different than socialist Democrats when it comes to debt,” Senator Rand Paul said. 

  • With 'Liability Shield' Red-Line Looming Over Stimulus Bill, Schumer Claims Dems "Have A Lot Of Leverage & Aren't Afraid To Use It"
    With ‘Liability Shield’ Red-Line Looming Over Stimulus Bill, Schumer Claims Dems “Have A Lot Of Leverage & Aren’t Afraid To Use It”

    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 07/28/2020 – 22:35

    While the to-ing and fro-ing over whether $200 is too little and $600 is too much plays out, the bigger issue separating the two sides of the aisle over the next US aid package is unlikely to find a goldilocks ‘just right’ outcome anytime soon.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    As a reminder the Senate GOP plan includes:

    • $1,200 direct payments, CARES redux

    • PPP sequel “to help prevent more layoffs”

    • Federal UI bonus, hints at $200/week

    • Money for schools

    • $ for testing, treatment, vaccines

    • Liability shield for biz/hospitals/entities

    Senate Majority Leader Mitch McConnell reaffirmed that his proposed changes to liability law must be included wholesale in the aid package during an interview on CNBC, saying…

    …the legislation “will have liability protection in it, so we’re not negotiating with the Democrats over that.”

    On the other side, as Bloomberg reports, Senator Dick Durbin, the chamber’s No. 2 Democrat, said he doesn’t see any reason his party would support the plan to shield businesses, schools and other organizations from lawsuits over Covid-19 infections from employees or customers.

    “This is an effort by the Republicans to seize the moment and to push through changes in tort law that they have been longing for for decades that have nothing to do with Covid-19.”

    House Speaker Nancy Pelosi said that the first day of negotiations did not go well:

    “It wasn’t a good way for us to begin the discussion.” 

    Schumer was less pessimistic, and more bombastic, proclaiming that Democrats have the power and Republicans are desperate:

    “I think Republicans are reading the polls. The president is slumping, their Republican Senate candidates are slumping in the polls. They have to show something,”

    Adding that:

    “We don’t have a majority in the Senate and we can’t pass it alone, but we have a lot of leverage and we’re going to use it,”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    But on the bright side, we did not get leaked photos of her standing and pointing across the cabinet desk at members of the Trump admin.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Finally, Trump weighed in, giving himself an out by saying that there are some things in the Republican package that he doesn’t support.

    The Senate Republicans’ more modest $1 trillion stimulus package unveiled yesterday remains a far cry from the blockbuster $3.5 trillion proposal that Democrats have proposed and thus, by the end of the farcical theater pretending to be a negotiation, the final sum will likely be closer to the latter than the former…

    McConnell is somewhat cornered by pressure from more fiscally responsible conservatives (of course that is all relative). As Senator Kevin Cramer, a North Dakota Republican warned:

    “The bigger the price tag gets, the fewer Republicans that will support it.”

    And if they do, one wonders what that will do the price of gold?

  • China Has Quietly Cut Dollar Usage In Cross-Border Trade By 20%
    China Has Quietly Cut Dollar Usage In Cross-Border Trade By 20%

    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 07/28/2020 – 22:15

    The chorus calling for a weaker dollar is getting louder, and now includes none other than a stark warning from Goldman Sachs, which in a stunning shot across the bow of the modern monetary system warned overnight that U.S. monetary and fiscal policy (i.e., helicopter money a/k/a MMT) is triggering currency “debasement fears” and that for the first time “real concerns are emerging” about the future of the dollar as a reserve currency.

    And while the DXY Index got a rare reprieve from the selling on Tuesday – despite Goldman’s ominous warning – gold continued marching higher, even as technical indicators show signs of near-record overextension.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    As Bloomberg’s Ye Xie summarizes, “it seems like a perfect storm for the U.S. currency: the relentless decline of real yields, the U.S.’s inability to control the virus, the overhang of the twin deficits and the dear valuation.” Adding to reserve currency concerns, Bridgewater’s Ray Dalio – who is clearly talking either his or Beijing’s book although these days the two appear interchangeable – warned a Sino-U.S. “capital war” could harm the dollar.

    Meanwhile, as Rabobank’s Michael Every has been discussing for the past few months, with the U.S. now using the privileged role of the dollar for political gains, such as penalizing banks over issues in Hong Kong and Xinjiang for instance, it will naturally alarm politicians in other countries, Xie adds.

    Indeed, as Xie adds, China is already is quietly reducing its reliance on the dollar in cross-border trade and services. The percentage of the payments and receipts denominated in yuan in total FX transactions by banks for their clients increased to 37% in June, from 19% two years ago, according to data compiled by the State Administration of Foreign Exchange, with the Bloomberg strategist also calculating that the usage of the dollar has declined to 56% from 70% – a decline of ~20%.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    While this shift partly reflects local companies’ desire to limit their exposure to FX volatility, it may also mirror an intentional nudge from the authorities… and it’s not just trade.

    Picking up on his recent observation that Jack Ma’s decision to list his giant Ant Group in Shanghai and Hong Kong (where it is seeking a $200BN valuation) instead of the US, coupled with the exodus of U.S.-listed Chinese companies from America, Xie writes that this underscores the shift in capital markets, and adds that “by extension, one has to wonder what Beijing might to do with its $1.1 trillion Treasury holdings.”

    Guo Shuqing, the party secretary of the PBOC, delivered a stern warning on the U.S. currency last month: “Some people say, ‘Domestic debt is not debt, but external debt is debt. For the United States, even external debt is not debt.’ This seems to have been the case for quite some time in the past, but can it really last for a long time in the future?”

    As Xie concludes referring to the chart above, “apparently China isn’t waiting to find out the answer.”

  • Is It Time To Defund The Defunders?
    Is It Time To Defund The Defunders?

    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 07/28/2020 – 21:55

    Authored by Jim DeMint, op-ed via The Hill,

    Like many Americans, Republicans have had a hard time coming up with a plan to fight back against antifa and the outraged mobs that have terrorized communities across the country. The main goal of these rioters is to defund police departments. It is so insane that it is hard to respond with anything more than confused laughter.

    But conservatives in Congress have the right idea to defund the defunders.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Let us back up from the cable news hysteria and remember something important.

    Police departments are the primary reason we have the government. When you get right down to it, the government has a monopoly on the legitimate use of force, which means its emissaries are paid to commit premeditated violence when necessary to enforce the laws. Police officers are the emissaries who carry guns and swear to use them only to enforce the laws written by the people.

    Yet the party of big government has become so drunk on its “wokeness” that it now wants to eliminate the most basic core functions of the government like fighting crime, enforcing the laws, and protecting public safety. Defunding the police would be like putting on a football game without referees. Someone has to call penalties or the contest will descend into a brawl. There would be more injuries than points.

    This principle can be doubly applied when you talk about criminals. What exactly is supposed to deter murderers, drug dealers, human traffickers, and sexual predators from openly plying their trade if there’s no one to stop them? If your city council defunds the police department, and you see a robbery taking place, who do you call? If criminals break into your own house, what are you supposed to do?

    The activists have no answer to this. The best they have come up with is to replace police officers with social workers. They seem not to understand that the reason adults become criminals is because the authority structures of family and society have failed and, when that happens, the heroic efforts of social work have proven incapable of fixing the problem. What exactly are social workers supposed to do to armed bank robbers or drug cartel hit squads? Sing “Imagine” by John Lennon to them?

    But it is much worse than that. After all, this summer we have seen a glimpse of what life would be like without police in Seattle and Portland. In Seattle, a mob took over a neighborhood, turned it into an autonomous zone, established physical barriers, and declared it an independent state not subject to the city or state. The local government told law enforcement to stand down. What followed was weeks of violent chaos.

    The situation was perhaps even worse in Portland. The occupiers were not just trying to establish an autonomous zone outside the authority of the city and state. They actively tried to destroy the legitimate authority of their community. They attacked individuals, threw bottles at police officers, and set fire to the federal courthouse and other property. The liberal politicians in charge have largely sided with the mob. They are more upset about President Trump trying to restore order than the violent mob destroying their city.

    These liberal politicians also seem to want to defund police departments. If cities and states are crazy enough to throw their people to the wolves, the Constitution may give them the right to be crazy, although when it involves federal laws and property, the federal government has legitimate reasons to intervene. But if these cities and states refuse federal support, the rest of us should not have to subsidize such lunacy.

    Congress must ensure this country has serious leaders. Our lawmakers cannot just lock their doors and hide from the mob. They must take necessary action. When Congress passes its spending bills, it should deny federal law enforcement funds to city councils and state legislators that defund their police. If these mobs want to risk the lives of their fellow citizens to act cool, make them do it on their own dime. It is time to defund the defunders.

  • Which Part Of "You Get Nothing" Isn’t Clear?
    Which Part Of “You Get Nothing” Isn’t Clear?

    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 07/28/2020 – 21:35

    By Bloomberg’s Rick Green and Madeleine Ngo

    The warning to shareholders of newly bankrupt Ascena Retail Group Inc. could hardly have been more direct. There it is, in black-and-white, on page 5 of the court declaration filed by Ascena’s most senior official just hours into the case:
    Existing common equity in Ascena will be canceled.” Full stop. Creditors will take ownership of the retail chain, which Ascena also made plain.

    So how did stock investors respond? By bidding up the shares just shy of 120%, on off-the-charts volume.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    It was a similar story for bankrupt Global Eagle Entertainment Inc. The airborne Wi-Fi service jumped more than 50% on July 24 after its court filing, despite warning shareholders earlier in July that they stood to lose everythingto creditors in a Chapter 11 case. And it hearkens back to Hertz Global Holdings Inc., whose stock became Example A of post-bankruptcy rallies.

    The persistent mania for busted companies baffles financial advisers. “What’s going on here? I really couldn’t tell you; it’s not something I would ever recommend to anyone,” said George Gagliardi at Coromandel Wealth Management in Lexington, Massachusetts.

    “People have too much money to play with,” said Dennis Nolte, an adviser at Florida’s Seacoast Investment Services.

    “Most of these traders won’t be around when the bankruptcy proceedings are complete. Just turn the light off when you leave the room, if the lights aren’t turned off by the utility company because there’s no money to pay the bill.”

  • Rockets Pound U.S. Bases In Iraq Following Hezbollah-Israeli Escalation
    Rockets Pound U.S. Bases In Iraq Following Hezbollah-Israeli Escalation

    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 07/28/2020 – 21:15

    Submitted by SouthFront,

    On July 27, fighting broke out between Israeli forces and Hezbollah along the Israeli-Lebanese contact line. This became the heaviest open confrontation between the sides in about a year. The incident occurred in an area known as Chebaa Farms, which was occupied by Israel in the 1967 Middle East war.

    Israeli shelling started at around 3:30 p.m. local time which lasted for about an hour and a half. The Israeli Defense Forces (IDF) claimed that they had repelled an infiltration attempt by a Hezbollah unit and there were no casualties among IDF forces. The exchange of fire came as the IDF was on heightened alert for a possible attack by Hezbollah, after an Israeli airstrike in Syria killed a Hezbollah member earlier in July.

    In a televised address, Israeli Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu warned Hezbollah that it is “playing with fire,” and stated that “Hezbollah and Lebanon bear full responsibility for this incident and any attack from Lebanese territory against Israel.”

    In its own turn, pro-Hezbollah sources claimed that Hezbollah targeted a vehicle and a battle tank of the IDF with anti-tank guided missiles.

    Hezbollah itself described Israeli claims about the outcome of the clashes as fake and aimed to boost the morale of Israeli forces by fabricating fictitious victories. It also rejected reports about strikes on IDF targets.

    “The answer to the martyrdom of [our] brother, Ali Kamel Mohsen, in the vicinity of Damascus airport has not been given yet. Zionist occupiers must still wait for that answer and their punishment at the hands of the resistance forces,” Hezbollah said.

    A few hours after the incident on the Lebanese-Israeli contact line, rockets struck US-operated military bases in Iraq. The strike on Camp Speicher, located near Tikrit, caused a large explosion on the site. At the same time, at least three rockets targeted another US-operated military base – Camp Taji, located near Baghdad. According to local media, one rocket hit an Iraqi helicopter while another landed in an artillery weapon depot. The third rocket landed in the area of the 2nd Air Force Squadron but did not explode.

    Local sources claim that the strikes came in response to a drone strike on the al-Saqer military camp, south of Baghdad, on July 26. This camp is operated by the Popular Mobilization Units. This branch of the Iraqi Armed Forces is often described by Washington and mainstream media as Iranian proxies and even terrorists.

    Even if the incidents in Iraq and the Lebanese-Israeli border were not linked, they serve as strong evidence of the escalating tensions in the Middle East. Despite the defeat of ISIS and the relative de-escalation of the conflict in Syria, the region still remains in a permanent state of escalation. However, now, the source of these tensions is the developing conflict between the Israeli-US bloc and Iranian-led forces.

  • COVID-Carrying Defector Fled Sex Abuse Charges & Debts By Fleeing Back To North Korea
    COVID-Carrying Defector Fled Sex Abuse Charges & Debts By Fleeing Back To North Korea

    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 07/28/2020 – 20:55

    We may have rushed to judgment over the weekend when we reported on what appeared to be the first public confirmation of a widespread outbreak of COVID-19 within North Korea’s borders. When we read the story, reported by KCNA, the North Korean state news agency (fortunately they publish in English), we found it stretched the bounds of credulity.

    The North Korean government claimed the reason for the lockdown on the border area between North and South Korea was a defector who had left the country years ago had sneaked back across the border from South Korea, carrying COVID-19 with him.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    It is said that, sometimes, truth can be stranger than fiction (somebody said that once. We forget who. But we digress). Needless to say, we were surprises when we saw the following Reuters headline: “Escape to North Korea: Defector at heart of COVID-19 case fled sex abuse investigation”.

    So, you’re telling me that somebody who had the temerity and good fortune to survive the exceedingly dangerous trip across the DMZ – over fences sheathed in barbed wire, and fields and fens littered with mines and other unpleasant surprises – was crazy enough to sneak back in to North Korea? What could possibly motivate somebody to do something so seemingly absurd?

    According to Reuters, the defector – who was barely 21 when he fled North Korea 3 years ago – was fleeing charges that he sexually assaulted another North Korean defector during a meeting in a private residence.

    SEOUL (Reuters) – Last week, a 24-year-old defector returned to North Korea the way he left in 2017, authorities say, but with a coronavirus pandemic raging in the background this time, his illicit trip drew far more attention.

    Things only get weirder from there.

    South Korea has identified the man only by his surname, Kim, and said he was the “runaway” who North Korea accuses of illegally crossing their shared border last week with symptoms of COVID-19.

    Facing a sexual assault investigation, Kim evaded high-tech South Korean border control systems by crawling through a drain pipe and swimming across the Han River to the North on July 19, the South Korean military has said. He appears to have spent several days there before being caught.

    South Korean military chief Park Han-ki told parliament on Tuesday that Kim, who is 163 cm (5.35 ft) tall and weighs 54 kg (119 lb), cut his way through barbed wire fences installed at the end of the pipe leading to the river.

    A Seoul official told Reuters that Kim is believed to have taken a similar path when he defected to the South in 2017, and authorities say he scoped out the area earlier in July, apparently in preparation.

    Kim’s story as a defector begins and, so far, ends in the city of Kaesong, a North Korean border town that hosted a now-shuttered inter-Korean factory park and liaison office.

    When that industrial project was shut down amid rising tensions over North Korea’s nuclear weapons programme in 2016, the economic shock prompted Kim to try his luck in the South in 2017, he said in a YouTube video filmed with a fellow defector in South Korea in June.

    Rather than make his way through China, as the vast majority of North Korean defectors usually do, Kim headed south via the porous sea border toward the heavily guarded Demilitarized Zone that divides the two Koreas.

    “After passing through barbed-wire fences, I encountered minefields, which I bypassed and came to a reed field near the Han River where I stayed hidden for about three hours,” he said in the video, adding that he was living off mere bread crumbs.

    He started swimming, following the lights on the southern bank of the river. When he finally made land, he let out a cry for help, and was found by a unit of South Korean soldiers.

    But it wasn’t just charges of rape that motivated the young man to flee. He reportedly owed nearly $17k in debt to a fellow defector.

    Little is known about how Kim made a living in South Korea, but a source with knowledge of his background told Reuters that he owed 20 million won ($16,800) to at least one fellow defector from Kaesong.

    “He had expressed his wish to become a security lecturer for students, like many other defectors do, but it never happened, partly because of the pandemic,” the source said on anonymity due to the sensitivity of the issue.

    According to police, a female defector in her 20s filed a complaint on June 12, accusing Kim of sexually assaulting her at his home. They interviewed him once on June 21, and he denied the accusations.

    The investigation gathered steam when one of Kim’s acquaintances reported to police on July 19 that he threatened the woman and planned to flee to the North, a police official said.

    So this guy went through all the trouble of sneaking into North Korea just to crawl through a sewage-filled drain pipe back into North Korea, where he presumably will be blown to pieces by an anti-aircraft gun for showing such profound disrespect to the dear leader. If he’s especially unlucky, they’ll blame him for the entire outbreak. COVID-19 has probably been circulating in North Korea for months. But in the official history of the Worker’s Party, the South Korean aggressors sent this traitorous defector to poison the country and undermine the regime.

    What this Kim guy did – that’s like Andy Dufresne hitchhiking all the way back from Mexico just to crawl back up the drain pipe into his old cell.

  • ShopRite Pilots Salad-Making Robot 'Sally'
    ShopRite Pilots Salad-Making Robot ‘Sally’

    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 07/28/2020 – 20:35

    by Krishna Thakker of GroceryDive

    • ShopRite is piloting Sally, a salad-making robot manufactured by tech firm Chowbotics, at its store in Carteret, New Jersey, the company announced in a press release. Sally gives customers a contactless alternative to the self-service salad bars.

    • The robot has 22 ingredients including dressings, fruits, nuts, vegetables and proteins like eggs, chicken and ham. Customers can order a grain bowl, pasta salad or custom salad that contains two base ingredients, up to six toppings, and a dressing. Its chef-recommended recipes include a chicken brown rice bowl and a Cobb salad. 

    • ShopRite said it hopes to roll out salad bars similar to Sally at other locations.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Sally allows retailers like ShopRite to offer a “salad bar” experience to customers without exposing them to the risks posed by self-serve food stations, which supermarkets had to close down in response to the pandemic. 

    Customers receive a glove from a dispenser to wear as they tap the screen to order their salad. Later this year, Chowbotics plans to roll out an app that will allow shoppers to place their order on a mobile device and get a QR code which the machine can scan, which will make their transaction completely touch-free. 

    “Prior to the COVID-19 pandemic, my family’s ShopRite store was looking for a salad bar solution that was touchless, fresh, and innovative. The current health crisis made it even more of a priority,” said Jonathan D’Orsi, vice president of operations at the ShopRite store in Carteret, said in the press release

    Although grocers have largely shut down their salad bars because of the pandemic, they had already begun to see a decline in salad bar usage before the public health crisis started. According to Nielsen data, salad bar sales declined 6.5% last year compared to 2018. Sally could remove the need for workers to refill a whole salad bar daily and reduce waste.

    Even after the pandemic ends, customers may never want to go back to eating from a traditional salad bar. Investing in a technology like Sally now prepares ShopRite for shopping habits down the road. 

    Before arriving at ShopRite, Sally made its grocery debut at a Heinen’s store in Pepper Pike, Ohio. Chowbotics, which told Grocery Dive that prior to COVID-19 grocery stores were not a focus for the company, plans to launch at additional food retailers in the coming weeks.

    Meanwhile, it seems that yet another occupation just went extinct at the hands – or in this case knives – of a robot.

  • China Says Mysterious Seed Packages Are "Forged" And Aren't Really From The Country's Postal Service
    China Says Mysterious Seed Packages Are “Forged” And Aren’t Really From The Country’s Postal Service

    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 07/28/2020 – 20:15

    It was just two days ago that we highlighted a mysterious trend that was sweeping the U.S.: citizens were receiving unsolicited packages of seeds, with return addresses from China, for apparently no reason at all.

    In our report, we suggested the mailings could be some sort of agricultural warfare brewing between the U.S. and China – where agriculture remains a key point of trade tensions – and where a cold war of sorts appears to be bubbling up under the surface. 

    After multiple reports in the U.S. media regarding the seeds, China’s Foreign Ministry responded on Tuesday by saying that China Post (the country’s state owned mail service) “has strictly followed regulations that ban the sending and receiving of seeds,” according to Bloomberg.

    Further, Chinese Foreign Ministry spokesman Wang Wenbin says that the parcels were “forged” and “not from China”. China has supposedly requested that the U.S. mail the seeds back to China so they could investigate further.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The response is anything but re-assuring. We’re not postmaster generals but we find the idea of being able to forge mailing labels – and get products to their final destination – in this day and age where even the decrepit U.S. postal service is mostly digital, as a difficult one. 

    Recall, we wrote days ago that Americans across the country were starting to report receiving unsolicited packages of different types of seeds that they didn’t order – and don’t know anything about – at their door. The return address on the packages is always from China. 

    The Washington State Department of Agriculture wrote about the phenomenon on their Facebook page on July 24, 2020 and said that the seeds are being shipping in packaging that identifies the contents as jewelry. Similar advisories have been issued in Virginia, Utah, Kansas, Arizona and Louisiana.

    Facebook users have been adding photos in the comments section of the post sharing photographs of seeds they have received from China. “It’s not a joke. I got some the other day!!!” one user commented, stating that the package identified the contents as a “Rose flower stud earring”.  

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    “Look’s like it’s all across the country,” stated an Indiana resident who also received seeds in the mail unsolicited. 

    At least 40 residents in Utah were said to have been mailed the unsolicited packages, according to the Daily Mail. The Kansas  Department of Agriculture and the Arizona Department of Agriculture also addressed the phenomenon, as did the Louisiana Department of Agriculture and Forestry, who said: 

    “Right now, we are uncertain what types of seeds are in the package. Out of caution, we are urging anyone who receives a package that was not ordered by the recipient, to please call the LDAF immediately. We need to identify the seeds to ensure they do not pose a risk to Louisiana’s agricultural industry or the environment.”

    There had been similar reports from Virginia’s Department of Agriculture and Consumer Services. “The seeds have yet to be identified, but officials speculate that the seeds may be of an invasive plant species and are advising residents not to use them,” Fox News reported.

    “Taking steps to prevent their introduction is the most effective method of reducing both the risk of invasive species infestations and the cost to control and mitigate those infestations,” VDACS wrote in a press release.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Twitter is also littered with reports of people receiving these seeds:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The Washington State Department of Agriculture has advised people on its Facebook page:

    1) DO NOT plant them and if they are in sealed packaging (as in the photo below) don’t open the sealed package.

    2) This is known as agricultural smuggling. Report it to USDA and maintain the seeds and packaging until USDA instructs you what to do with the packages and seeds. They may be needed as evidence.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Anyone who has received seeds in the mail can report them to the United States Department of Agriculture by visiting their website here. The site says:

    If individuals are aware of the potential smuggling of prohibited exotic fruits, vegetables, or meat products into or through the USA, they can help APHIS by contacting the confidential Antismuggling Hotline number at 800-877-3835 or by sending an Email to SITC.Mail@aphis.usda.gov.

    USDA will make every attempt to protect the confidentiality of any information sources during an investigation within the extent of the law.

  • Gold's Record Price Is All About Currency Debasement
    Gold’s Record Price Is All About Currency Debasement

    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 07/28/2020 – 19:55

    Authored by Michael Maharrey via SchiffGold.com,

    Gold broke its all-time price record on Monday and held above that level throughout the day.

    So, what is this telling us?

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    It’s easier to understand gold’s record-breaking move up if you look at it from the other side of the equation. The dollar is now at its all-time low compared to gold.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    In simple terms, the dollar is losing value.

    This is a direct result of US government borrowing and spending backed by Federal Reserve money printing.

    TD Securities reiterated that dollar debasement is driving gold in a note.

    “The USD weakens amid massive fiscal and central bank stimulus, a bloating debt pile and a slow growth environment.”

    Since the economy crashed thanks to the governments’ shutdowns in response to the coronavirus, the federal government has borrowed trillions of dollars for its stimulus program. The June budget deficit was bigger than all but five of the yearly deficits in history. Meanwhile, the Fed is monetizing a big chunk of that debt through its government bond purchase program. In effect, it is buying up US debt and paying for it with money printed out of thin air.

    All of this money creation is inflation. The rising price of gold reflects the inflationary pressure.

    As more dollars go into circulation, each individual dollar is worth less, all other things equal. That’s why the price of gold is going up in dollar terms. We have more dollars chasing roughly the same amount of gold. That means it takes more dollars to buy an ounce.

    This isn’t mere speculation. Money supply growth hit a new all-time high for the third month in a row in June. The only time we’ve seen money supply growth anywhere near this level was during the inflationary years of the 1970s. In June, year-over-year growth in the money supply came in at 34.5%. That was up from 29.5% in May.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The “true” or Rothbard-Salerno money supply measure (TMS) – is the metric developed by Murray Rothbard and Joseph Salerno, and is designed to provide a better measure of money supply fluctuations than M2. The Mises Institute now offers regular updates on this metric and its growth. This measure of the money supply differs from M2 in that it includes Treasury deposits at the Fed (and excludes short-time deposits, traveler’s checks, and retail money funds).

    As you can see from the chart, the Fed’s balance-sheet was already growing in late 2019 with the quantitative easing the central bank refused to call quantitative easing. But total Fed assets surged to over $7 trillion in June. That set a new all-time high and propelled the Fed balance sheet far beyond anything seen during the Great Recession’s multiple rounds of QE. The Fed’s assets are now up more than 600% from the period immediately preceding the 2008 financial crisis.

    Some people in the mainstream are speculating that gold could be near its top. But that would assume the money printing is about to come to an end. There’s no reason to believe that. As Peter Schiff tweeted after gold pushed above its record price:

    This record won’t last long as the dollar’s decline is only just getting started. It’s about to plunge to new depths taking the American standard of living down with it.”

    Congress is working on another stimulus package that will mean trillions more in borrowing and spending. And the Fed will have to monetize all that debt. Jerome Powell has already committed to “do whatever we can, for as long as it takes.”

    In other words, there is no reason to believe the monetary debasement is going to end any time soon. That’s extremely bullish for gold – and silver too.

    Deutsche Bank chief US economist Matt Luzzetti projects the Fed’s balance sheet will continue to explode.

    We find that the Fed will need to provide significant accommodation – roughly equal to a fed funds rate of -5% — and that QE and forward guidance could be insufficient. Assuming limited impact from forward guidance given that markets are pricing negative rates, our estimates range from an additional $5tn to $12tn more of balance sheet expansion needed. Our  preferred calibration sits towards the high end of that range.”

    We may see some profit-taking and corrections in the price of gold in the near-term, but given the economic dynamics and the trajectory of government and central bank policy, it appears gold still has a long way to run up.

  • One Chick-Fil-A Franchise Is Offering Free Food For Your Coins
    One Chick-Fil-A Franchise Is Offering Free Food For Your Coins

    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 07/28/2020 – 19:35

    Amid the nationwide coin shortage, businesses across the U.S. have been offering their customers specials to bring in coins. Smaller mom and pop convenience stores may offer a cup of coffee, while other companies – notably Chick-fil-A – are even going as far as offering free food.

    At one Chick-fil-A in Lynchburg, Va., the company is offering coupons for a free entree in exchange for every $10 in rolled coins that guests provide, in addition to the same amount in cash. Each guest is limited to 10 coupons maximum, according to the Hill and the company’s Facebook page

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The store is allowing customers to come in on Wednesday between 9AM and 11AM to redeem the coupon. The company has said on its Facebook page that the response has been “overwhelming” and that they will definitely do another special of the sorts.

    The special comes as the nation faces a massive coin shortage as a result of the coronavirus lockdown, which eliminated not only the amount of people going to stores – but specifically the amount of people using cash to pay for things. 

    The Federal Reserve imposed a rationing order last month, which limits the number of coins given to regional banks. Fed Chair Jerome Powell had said: “With the partial closure of the economy, the flow of funds through the economy has stopped. We are working with the Mint and the Reserve Banks and as the economy reopens we are starting to see money move around again.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Chick-fil-A commented: “Due to the decrease in coin circulation nationwide, some restaurants may choose to offer incentives like this one to ensure they maintain enough coins to provide guests proper change, should they choose to pay with cash. This is not a national promotion, as Chick-fil-A restaurants are individually owned and operated.”

  • Absentee Ownership: How Amazon, Facebook, & Google Ruin Commerce Without Noticing
    Absentee Ownership: How Amazon, Facebook, & Google Ruin Commerce Without Noticing

    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 07/28/2020 – 19:15

    Authored by Matt Stoller via BIG,

    Welcome to BIG, a newsletter about the politics of monopoly and finance. If you’d like to sign up, you can do so here. Or just read on…

    Three housekeeping items. First, a colleague and I wrote up for Politico a piece on the American tradition of taking on monopoly power, going all the way back to the 1600s. Second, I co-authored a report explaining how Amazon acquired its market power and the list of laws that need reform to make the corporation safe for democracy. Third, there is another antitrust suit against the cheer monopolist Varsity Brands. If you’re in that world, there’s more info at: https://www.takebackcheer.com

    Tomorrow, the CEOs of Apple, Google, Facebook, and Amazon will testify before the House Antitrust Subcommittee. If done right, this hearing could be the most important hearing on monopoly power in decades. So today, in preparation, I’m going to write about how big tech regulates American commerce, using some stories I worked on over the past few weeks.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    And now… let’s start with a weird picture of a Chinese return address…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Facebook, Google, and Counterfeiting

    Last week, I got an email from a frustrated customer of the luxury shoe brand Rothy. “On Memorial Day weekend,” she wrote. “I was on Facebook and there was a sale on my favorite shoe brand, Rothy. The sponsored advertisement said Rothy so I clicked on it and ordered 2 pairs of shoes. When they arrived a few days later, I immediately knew they were counterfeit shoes. I went onto Paypal and requested a refund. A few days later, I received a response that I have to return them to China in order to provide a refund. The return address was in complete Chinese characters. How do Americans write 12 chinese characters?”

    Rothy’s is a high quality branded women’s apparel company focusing on sustainability. Rothy shoes and bags are well-made, and the company charges a reasonably high price for them, a price chosen to convey that the Rothy brand means quality. It does not, as a rule, ever put its shoes on sale. I went back and forth with this customer, and she told me that she had called Rothy to complain, and “they shared that they are getting hammered by fraud on Facebook and Instagram but can’t get these goliaths to stop it.”

    Such a high quality brand offers an enticing target for Chinese counterfeiters, who have found the perfect criminal accomplice: Facebook. Chinese counterfeiters are buying ads offering Rothy’s shoes for a low price, and directing people to fake websites. People then buy the shoes, which are counterfeit, and customers then complain to Rothy’s. Facebook does take fake ads down, but it is reactive, not proactive about doing so. Rothy’s is in a constant whack-a-mole trying to find the fake ads so they can get Facebook to act.

    It gets even more interesting when you throw the Facebook ad boycott into the mix. A few weeks ago, Rothy’s, like a lot of companies, pulled its ads from Facebook in solidarity with Black Lives Matter over Mark Zuckerberg’s policies around hate speech. Many companies did so, which had an interesting effect on ad prices. Facebook ad prices are done on an auction model, which means that high ad demand pushes prices up, and low ad demand pushes them down. With a boycott going on from advertisers, ad prices on that particular day were likely lower than usual. With no Rothy ads on Facebook and Instagram, and low ad prices, Chinese counterfeiters took advantage, and Facebook and Instagram were full of ads for fake Rothy’s. In other words, intentionally or not, Facebook damaged Rothy’s business by allowing counterfeiters to steal the company’s brand equity when the company sought to make a political point with its ad spending.

    Why does Facebook enable such scams? It’s simple. The law lets Facebook make a lot of money enabling counterfeiting. Section 230 of the Communications Decency Act immunizes Facebook from any consequences for the content of ads bought on their platform; they can’t be sued for facilitating fraud and counterfeiting, so they don’t have any incentive to do anything about it. With no one at Facebook actually paying attention to the scam artists who are buying these ads, scams proliferate.

    Contrast ad buying on Facebook with that of television ad purchases. Facebook’s ad sales are automated; anyone can just open a Facebook ad account and start buying advertising, with no third party audits on who is seeing the ad or where that ad is directing people. When you buy a television ad, by contrast, the process involves people at the TV networks interacting with ad agencies, as well as third party auditing through tracking companies. The automating of the ad buying process enables Facebook to have a higher profit margin, because they don’t have to hire anyone to vet advertising sales, especially when ad buyers are using small amounts of money. It also enables straightforward fraud.

    Lest you think such negligence or bad behavior by Facebook is a one-off, automated ad systems run by both Facebook and Google routinely enable such brand destruction. Costco, for instance, has had to deal with fake coupons passed around on Facebook. Here’s what that fake coupon looked like:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    So has Krogers, which had to deal with a counterfeit ad promoting a fake contest for free groceries.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Scammers regularly rip off Kickstarter products, as Matt Binder on Mashable reported last year. “Scammers find an interesting or popular product from crowdfunding sites such as Kickstarter or Indiegogo, rip the item’s details, photos, and videos, and push them via Facebook ads as their own products,” Binder wrote. “Victims of the fraud are either never sent the product or receive a knockoff version.: 

    This dynamic involved something an early 20th century economist named Thorstein Veblen called “Absentee Ownership,” which is when the locus of control and the locus of responsibility are different. Facebook isn’t legally responsible for the consequences of what goes up on its network, but it still has control over what goes up on its network. Meanwhile, Rothy’s has responsibility for its brand, but no control over how Facebook sells advertising by counterfeiters exploiting its brand.

    The same incentives apply to Google, which has earned millions of dollars from companies selling fake health care plans, and has allowed advertisers to put up ads for fake customer service for Netflix as well as fake Microsoft Windows support. (Amazon has its own counterfeiting problem, which the Department of Homeland Security noted awhile back.)

    Ultimately, fraud and counterfeiting destroy commerce, and make it impossible for people to create branded goods. There are two legal drivers of absentee ownership that enable this kind of bad behavior. The first is Section 230 of the Communications Decency Act, which immunizes these platforms from legal liability for enabling fraud and counterfeiting. (Incidentally, Senator Josh Hawley just introduced a bill today to strip this liability protection from companies that sell targeted ads, aka Google and Facebook, and that would solve this problem). The second is the refusal to enforce antitrust law; Facebook’s purchase of Instagram means that a potential competitor to Facebook was taken out of commission. It is possible Instagram might have tried to compete for ad dollars by promising a safer space for advertising, but since Zuckerberg bought this nascent competitor, Instagram never ended up being able to create a differentiated offering.

    Monopolies are bad, but monopolies who don’t have to take responsibility for what they destroy are even worse.

    So that’s story one, here’s story two.

    “I’m from Amazon and I’m here to help.”

    A few weeks ago, I got an email from a shoe retailer who told me about something odd happening with Amazon. He told me that his Amazon sales, which had been generally a high turnover reasonable business, were suddenly down 40%. He uses Amazon’s warehousing and logistics business, which is called Fulfillment by Amazon, which meant Amazon took care of making sure that his inventory got to customers.

    Only, now that there were fewer sales, inventory began piling up, and he started getting warnings from Amazon that his metrics were below their standards and he was in jeopardy of losing storage capacity for the upcoming holiday season. This kind of million dollar penalty happens often among merchants who sell on Amazon, often randomly and for no discernible reason.

    Increases or decreases in sales are a regular topic on the Amazon Seller Forums for merchants who have to sell through its Marketplace. Sometimes Amazon changes its algorithms or features for business reasons. But often stuff just breaks, and no one bothers to fix it. It’s hard to conceptualize this if you’ve never sold through Amazon, because as a consumer, the experience is generally good. But if Amazon has market power over you, the experience is one of hostile neglect. As one merchant put it:

    Never expect Amazon to fix broken features unless it will add to their bottom line or the media get involved. Sometimes Amazon acts like that passive boyfriend who never really breaks up with you, they just ghost you until you give up. That is why some features/functions “break” and how much of Amazon’s seller support works.

    Over the course of a week and a half, I tried to figure out what was going on with this Amazon algorithm change. It was a fascinating experience. At first, I thought it was an intentional conspiracy by Amazon, where Amazon was trying to further monopolize control over customers. The corporation, under this theory, would be directing consumers who normally bought from independent merchants to Zappos, which is an Amazon subsidiary.

    That regulation of who sells what happens through what is called the Buy Box, which is the piece of web real estate shown to consumers that lets them buy an item. The screenshot of the Buy Box is below. Consumers can pick which merchant they buy from, but as you can tell from the small text in the red box, they are very unlikely to do so. So winning the Buy Box determines whether you can sell through Amazon. Suddenly, the theory went, Amazon was automatically awarding the Buy Box to its own branded subsidiary for unknown business purposes.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    I confirmed that Amazon had done this for Zappos with a number of different brands. I even saw a letter from a major product company telling its retailers that yes, indeed, Zappos now had the advantage on them through Amazon. Over the next week, product makers complained to Zappos about the situation. Their other third party channels were being destroyed, which meant the brands would become entirely dependent on Amazon/Zappos. The situation returned to normal, Zappos stopped immediately winning the Buy Box. But then a few days later, it flipped back; Zappos started getting its immense advantage again. Finally, in the middle of last week, it returned to the status quo of Zappos being one of many merchants that could win the Buy Box.

    But something about the story didn’t quite make sense. There was no obvious reason for the changes, as Amazon benefits whether Zappos makes the sale or not. As the Institute for Local Self-Reliance just put out, Amazon makes a lot of money from third party merchants.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    It also turns out there was a much larger set of algorithm changes beyond the specific line of business I was tracking. Thousands of merchants were suffering, and sellers were also trying to figure out whether the change in the Buy Box was a technical glitch or something more sinister. The truth was, no one knew, and Amazon was denying anything was wrong (which is their usual tactic, whether something was broken or not). Here are some of the cries from help from merchants whose businesses, and thus livelihoods, had suddenly fallen apart:

    “I’m having the same issue. Called support and they just gave me the rundown of how my account is fine and that lots of factors control the buybox. Very scary.”

    “I am also a victim of this Glitch since July 1st…Lost a lot of sale and buy box even though my rates are the lowest…Please help… I even tried to add my items to the cart to purchase but was not able to add them to my cart… I am desperate for the help.”

    “Just because Amazon CAN help doesn’t mean they WILL.”

    “Like many things on Amazon, stuff just breaks and no one ever tends to fix it. You can report these but you are just wasting your time as they will just heal randomly but no one from Amazon support will ever be able to actually resolve these issues and instead will just cut and paste random junk about buy boxes.”

    There is now an entire media ecosystem and consulting world surrounding how to succeed on Amazon, replete with specialized software tools designed to win the Buy Box. One common piece of advice to deal with the recent Buy Box glitch was, “When Amazon sales plummet because of a glitch, one short-term solution is to lower your price by 1-2 percentage points to win the Buy Box. Then, as soon as you win it, raise the price. You won’t be able to do this manually, though. You need a real-time repricer like Sellery to stay ahead.” In other words, the way to deal with Amazon’s neglect is to buy consulting and software services.

    In the end, I couldn’t figure out what was actually happening. Amazon’s secret algorithm toys with hundreds of thousands of businesses, with no recourse or transparency, and no active regulation even by Amazon itself.

    This situation reflects the same absentee ownership dynamic on display in the counterfeiting ads enabled by Facebook and Google above. Amazon has control of the Marketplace structure, how consumers buy, and even the inventory of third parties, but it doesn’t have responsibility for any of it. Amazon gets paid whether it makes Zappos a dominant seller or whether it extracts fees from merchants for its warehousing and marketplace services, or whether its algorithm has glitches or not. It can’t be sued, because all merchants have to sign arbitration clauses in their contracts that prohibit lawsuits. Amazon is the government of online commerce, and who goes bankrupt based on Amazon’s arbitrary decisions is literally irrelevant to Bezos.

    In 1986, Ronald Reagan made a famous joke about the coercive power of an incompetent and haphazard government over independent farmers, saying “The nine most terrifying words in the English language are, ‘I’m from the government and I’m here to help.’” Today, for merchants in America, Amazon is that government.

    Congress versus $5 Trillion

    These stories brings us to the big hearing tomorrow. After a year of investigating, the Antitrust Subcommittee now has the four CEOs up to testify at noon, men who in aggregate represent $5 trillion of market capitalization and the raw power over the channels of commerce that amount of money represents.

    Congress has dealt with the power of monopolies. In 1950, Congressman Emanuel Celler, chair of that same Antitrust Subcommittee, wrote in Reader’s Digest on a threat made by General Electric in the refrigerator industry. A GE salesman had told a customer of a rival that GE would sell compressor’s “at any cost,” with the goal of killing off a competitor, the Tecumseh Company. GE CEO Charles Wilson, in testifying before Congress, was asked about this situation, to which Wilson admitted that, yes, a salesman had made such an offer, but not under orders. Wilson had talked to the President of Tecumsah to let him know that GE had no intention of destroying its rival. “I told him it was bunk,” said Wilson, “and that the salesman had been talked to.”

    Celler wrote that, while it was good that GE had decided not to ruin its competition, the problem was the power it had to do so in the first place. “I don’t like to see men first ter­rorized,” Celler noted, “and then relieved to find that Charles Wilson is feeling kindly and won’t let his men shoot.” And that is the feeling that merchants have with Amazon, Facebook, Google, and Apple. They just hope that Jeff Bezos, Mark Zuckerberg, Sundar Pichai, Tim Cook or one of their underlings, are feeling kindly.

    There are reasons to be wary of this hearing. As Dave Dayen noted, the format is such that each member of Congress gets only five minutes to grill all four CEOs, though members can stay for multiple rounds. These CEOs are going to be testifying remotely instead of in-person, which means they can be surrounded by lawyers who give them answers off screen. And while I had hoped for subpoenas for documents, it seems less likely that the Judiciary committee wants to fight to get such information. One of Facebook’s original investors, Roger McNamee, told CNBC that “This is at best the first step in a long process…Each one deserves a multi-day hearing.” He’s right, and I suspect there will be more hearings in future Congress’s.

    Even so, just having these CEOs being forced to answer is a meaningful step forward. And some of the members genuinely understand the stakes. Here’s Congresswoman Pramila Jayapal, who pointed out that the problem of big tech is fundamentally political. “We need to move very quickly, as a Congress,” she said, “to reassert our authority into regulation of these tech companies and [their] anticompetitive practices.”

    In America, the law is meant to protect us from arbitrary threats and the abuse of power in our commercial sector, in particular from monopolies and financial predators. It’s been a long time, over forty years, since policymakers even understood that their job was, in part, to regulate commerce so as to promote fair competition and the liberty that comes with it. As a result, others regulate our commerce, the most significant being Facebook, Google, Amazon, and Apple. But the tide is turning. These men will in the end have to answer for how they regulate, and the public, through Congress, will finally start getting a say.

    Thanks for reading. Send me tips, stories I’ve missed, or comment by clicking on the title of this newsletter. And if you liked this issue of BIG, you can sign up here for more issues of BIG, a newsletter on how to restore fair commerce, innovation and democracy. If you really liked it, read my book, Goliath: The 100-Year War Between Monopoly Power and Democracy.

    *  *  *

    P.S. A contact sent this note to me that I found interesting on Amazon/Whole Foods and cattle ranching.

    I came across an Amazon scam yesterday that I’ll pass along for your files. I was talking to a farmer/rancher who lives up the road from me…she and her husband do mostly dairy, but they do some beef cattle too. She said slaughter houses are backed up by several months right now (COVID), so they haven’t been able to get their beef slaughtered. But, there’s a guy who buys 12-18 steer a month from them…she asked him what he does with them…he puts them in a pasture for a month and then sells them as “grass fed” (which rich suburbanites pay a premium for) to Whole Foods (who has front-of-the-line status at slaughter houses)…mind you, they feed these animals primarily grain (which is fine, but not what people think they’re buying) – only in the last month of their lives are they “grass fed”…and right now it works particularly well because Amazon can butt in line at the slaughter house. Fucking ridiculous…people pay primo $ for what is really just standard beef, and it gets to market easily while others wait.

  • US-China Military Conflict Deemed "Highly Likely" To "Almost Certain" Over Next 3 Years
    US-China Military Conflict Deemed “Highly Likely” To “Almost Certain” Over Next 3 Years

    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 07/28/2020 – 18:55

    A top independent Australia-based think tank which regularly advises the Canberra government has produced a “risk assessment” studying the likelihood of America and China going to war. Involving defense experts around the world, the study was undertaken on the heels of the US sending two carrier strike groups to sail through the South China Sea in provocative “freedom of navigation” operations. 

    Given that “normalization” with China — a longtime foreign policy emphasis which goes back to Nixon and Carter  appears to have gone out the window during this latter half of the Trump administration, there’s lately been much forecasting on the potential for the US and China to stumble into war. While there’s already for the past couple years been much ink spilled over the possibility of the US and China falling into the so-called Thucydides Trap, this latest assessment is among the most dire predictions to date in terms of conclusions reached

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Via Getty Images/Daily Express

    Top daily newspaper The Australian introduces that leaders in Canberra woefully underestimated the potential for significant regional conflict upon being warned over a decade ago.

    “Back 14 years ago in 2006 Australia’s top defence analysts, Air Power, set out in a long document for the Foreign Affairs Committee the emerging power of China contrasting with the looming American decline. It was a remarkable forecast,” the report begins.

    Defense leaders at the time ignored and dismissed what they saw as an overly pessimistic view of US capabilities and its role in the world, The Australian continues:

    In response the then Department of Defence deputy secretary strategy Michael Pezzullo reflecting his department’s view said:

    “It is predicated upon a radically different set of strategic circumstances which, I must say, I do not necessarily see even in the most speculative parts of my crystal ball.”

    “It would also require a massive erosion of the US military capability edge which, again, I do not foresee even in the most speculative part of my crystal ball.”

    But the new Air Power assessment, which takes into account soaring tensions of the past two months, is being received with a new urgency.

    Crucially, the new analysis deems that within the next three years a direct military conflict between the US and China ranges from “highly likely” to “almost certain”:

    The defence “crystal ball“ gave the wrong signals but It took almost 14 years for them to discover their error and the options available in 2006 have now mostly disappeared. The defence mistakes have been compounded by similar mistakes by the Department of Foreign affairs.

    AirPower last week contacted major defence to strategists around the world to undertake a “risk assessment” of military conflict between China and the US. They rate conflict in the next 12 months as “likely”; over the next two years as “highly likely” and over the next three years as “almost certain”.

    Indeed we’ve already seen language out of both sides which too easily shifted from a ‘war of words’ within the usual economic and diplomatic realms, to the more unusual military threats.

    Via the Blavatnik School of Government: “When a rising power threatens to displace a ruling one, the most likely outcome is war. Twelve of 16 cases in which this occurred in the past 500 years ended violently.”

    Consider for example the Chinese military’s recent response to America’s dramatically ramped up air and navy operations over the South and East China seas: The South China Sea is fully within the grasp of the Chinese People’s Liberation Army (PLA), and any US aircraft carrier movement in the region is solely at the pleasure of the PLA, which has a wide selection of anti-aircraft carrier weapons like the DF-21D and DF-26 “aircraft carrier killer” missiles.

    Meanwhile, whether it’s pre-November “distraction” or not, it remains that Washington hawks have appeared to focus their near and long term sights on Beijing, thus at the very least “normalization” is now a thing of the past, with war inching closer on the horizon. 

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 28th July 2020

  • President Trump's Approval Rating Overseas
    President Trump’s Approval Rating Overseas

    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 07/28/2020 – 02:45

    A new Gallup poll has found that views of U.S. leadership remain negative internationally.

     

    As Statista’s Niall McCarthy notes, across 135 countries and territories, the median approval rating for US. leadership is 33 percent with views worst in Europe. Gallup also found that views of U.S. leadership in Asia remain near lows not seen since the George W. Bush administration.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    This infographic provides an overview of President Trump’s approval rating in several key countries.

    Infographic: President Trump's Approval Rating Overseas | Statista

    You will find more infographics at Statista

    Trump has proven popular among Israelis after he moved the U.S. embassy from Tel Aviv to Jerusalem and 64 percent of people polled there approve of his leadership. In Germany, however, a mere 12 percent of Gallup’s respondents said they approve of the American president’s leadership.

    But the Russians really don’t like him… which is odd given that he is supposedly “Putin’s Puppet”.

  • Turkey On The Warpath
    Turkey On The Warpath

    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 07/28/2020 – 02:00

    Authored by Uzay Bulut via The Gatestone Institute,

    Turkey is currently involved in quite a few international military conflicts — both against its own neighbors such as Greece, Armenia, Iraq, Syria and Cyprus, and against other nations such as Libya and Yemen. These actions by Turkey suggest that Turkey’s foreign policy is increasingly destabilizing not only several nations, but the region as well.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    In addition, the Erdogan regime has been militarily targeting Syria and Iraq, sending its Syrian mercenaries to Libya to seize Libyan oil and continuing, as usual, to bully Greece. Turkey’s regime is also now provoking ongoing violence between Armenia and Azerbaijan.

    Since July 12, Azerbaijan has launched a series of cross-border attacks against Armenia’s northern Tavush region in skirmishes that have resulted in the deaths of at least four Armenian soldiers and 12 Azerbaijani ones. After Azerbaijan threatened to launch missile attacks on Armenia’s Metsamor nuclear plant on July 16, Turkey offered military assistance to Azerbaijan.

    “Our armed unmanned aerial vehicles, ammunition and missiles with our experience, technology and capabilities are at Azerbaijan’s service,” said İsmail Demir, the head of Presidency of Defense Industries, an affiliate of the Turkish Presidency.

    One of Turkey’s main targets also seems to be Greece. The Turkish military is targeting Greek territorial waters yet again. The Greek newspaper Kathimerini reported:

    “There have been concerns over a possible Turkish intervention in the East Med in a bid to prevent an agreement on the delineation of an exclusive economic zone (EEZ) between Greece and Egypt which is currently being discussed between officials of the two countries.”

    Turkey’s choice of names for its gas exploration ships are also a giveaway. The name of the main ship that Turkey is using for seismic “surveys” of the Greek continental shelf is Oruç Reis, (1474-1518), an admiral of the Ottoman Empire who often raided the coasts of Italy and the islands of the Mediterranean that were still controlled by Christian powers. Other exploration and drilling vessels Turkey uses or is planning to use in Greece’s territorial waters are named after Ottoman sultans who targeted Cyprus and Greece in bloody military invasions. These include the drilling ship Fatih “the conqueror” or Ottoman Sultan Mehmed II, who invaded Constantinople in 1453; the drilling ship Yavuz, “the resolute”, or Sultan Selim I, who headed the Ottoman Empire during the invasion of Cyprus in 1571; and Kanuni, “the lawgiver” or Sultan Suleiman, who invaded parts of eastern Europe as well as the Greek island of Rhodes.

    Turkey’s move in the Eastern Mediterranean came in early July, shortly after the country had turned Hagia Sophia, once the world’s greatest Greek Cathedral, into a mosque. Turkish President Recep Tayyip Erdogan then linked Hagia Sophia’s conversion to a pledge to “liberate the Al-Aqsa Mosque” in Jerusalem.

    On July 21, the tensions arose again following Turkey’s announcement that it plans to conduct seismic research in parts of the Greek continental shelf in an area of sea between Cyprus and Crete in the Aegean and Eastern Mediterranean.

    “Turkey’s plan is seen in Athens as a dangerous escalation in the Eastern Mediterranean, prompting Prime Minister Kyriakos Mitsotakis to warn that European Union sanctions could follow if Ankara continues to challenge Greek sovereignty,” Kathimerini reported on July 21.

    Here is a short list of other countries where Turkey is also militarily involved:

    In Libya, Turkey has been increasingly involved in the country’s civil war. Associated Press reported on July 18:

    “Turkey sent between 3,500 and 3,800 paid Syrian fighters to Libya over the first three months of the year, the U.S. Defense Department’s inspector general concluded in a new report, its first to detail Turkish deployments that helped change the course of Libya’s war.

    “The report comes as the conflict in oil-rich Libya has escalated into a regional proxy war fueled by foreign powers pouring weapons and mercenaries into the country.”

    Libya has been in turmoil since 2011, when an armed revolt during the “Arab Spring” led to the ouster and murder of dictator Muammar Gaddafi. Political power in the country, the current population of which is around 6.5 million, has been split between two rival governments. The UN-backed Government of National Accord (GNA), has been led by Prime Minister Fayez al Sarraj. Its rival, the Libyan National Army (LNA), has been led by Libyan military officer, Khalifa Haftar.

    Backed by Turkey, the GNA said on July 18 that it would recapture Sirte, a gateway to Libya’s main oil terminals, as well as an LNA airbase at Jufra.

    Egypt, which backs the LNA, announced, however, that if the GNA and Turkish forces tried to seize Sirte, it would send troops into Libya. On July 20, the Egyptian parliament gave approval to a possible deployment of troops beyond its borders “to defend Egyptian national security against criminal armed militias and foreign terrorist elements.”

    Yemen is another country on which Turkey has apparently set its sights. In a recent video, Turkey-backed Syrian mercenaries fighting on behalf of the GNA in Libya, and aided by local Islamist groups, are seen saying, “We are just getting started. The target is going to be Gaza.” They also state that they want to take on Egyptian President Sisi and to go to Yemen.

    “Turkey’s growing presence in Yemen,” The Arab Weekly reported on May 9, “especially in the restive southern region, is fuelling concern across the region over security in the Gulf of Aden and the Bab al-Mandeb.

    “These concerns are further heightened by reports indicating that Turkey’s agenda in Yemen is being financed and supported by Qatar via some Yemeni political and tribal figures affiliated with the Muslim Brotherhood.”

    In Syria, Turkey-backed jihadists continue occupying the northern parts of the country. On July 21, Erdogan announced that Turkey’s military presence in Syria would continue. “Nowadays they are holding an election, a so-called election,” Erdogan said of a parliamentary election on July 19 in Syria’s government-controlled regions, after nearly a decade of civil war. “Until the Syrian people are free, peaceful and safe, we will remain in this country.”

    Additionally, Turkey’s incursion into the Syrian city of Afrin, created a particularly grim situation for the local Yazidi population:

    “As a result of the Turkish incursion to Afrin,” the Yazda organization reported on May 29, “thousands of Yazidis have fled from 22 villages they inhabited prior to the conflict into other parts of Syria, or have migrated to Lebanon, Europe, or the Kurdistan Region of Iraq… “

    “Due to their religious identity, Yazidis in Afrin are suffering from targeted harassment and persecution by Turkish-backed militant groups. Crimes committed against Yazidis include forced conversion to Islam, rape of women and girls, humiliation and torture, arbitrary incarceration, and forced displacement. The United States Commission on International Religious Freedom (USCIRF) in its 2020 annual report confirmed that Yazidis and Christians face persecution and marginalization in Afrin.

    “Additionally, nearly 80 percent of Yazidi religious sites in Syria have been looted, desecrated, or destroyed, and Yazidi cemeteries have been defiled and bulldozed.”

    In Iraq, Turkey has been carrying out military operations for years. The last one was started in mid-June. Turkey’s Defense Ministry announced on June 17 that the country had “launched a military operation against the PKK” (Kurdistan Workers’ Party) in northern Iraq after carrying out a series of airstrikes. Turkey has named its assaults “Operation Claw-Eagle” and “Operation Claw-Tiger”.

    The Yazidi, Assyrian Christian and Kurdish civilians have been terrorized by the bombings. At least five civilians have been killed in the air raids, according to media reports. Human Rights Watch has also issued a report, noting that a Turkish airstrike in Iraq “disregards civilian loss.”

    Given Turkey’s military aggression in Syria, Iraq, Libya, and Armenia, among others, and its continued occupation of northern Cyprus, further aggression, especially against Greece, would not be unrealistic. Turkey’s desire to invade Greece is not exactly a secret. Since at least 2018, both the Turkish government and opposition parties have openly been calling for capturing the Greek islands in the Aegean, which they falsely claim belong to Turkey.

    If such an attack took place, would the West abandon Greece?

  • Watch: Israel Reinforces Troops Near Golan Heights Fearing Hezbollah Retaliation To Strikes On Syria
    Watch: Israel Reinforces Troops Near Golan Heights Fearing Hezbollah Retaliation To Strikes On Syria

    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 07/28/2020 – 01:00

    Submitted by South Front,

    The Middle East is rapidly moving towards a new round of confrontation between the US-Israeli bloc and Iranian-led Shiite forces…

    On July 26, the Israeli Defense Forces (IDF) deployed M109 Doher howitzers near the separation line with Lebanon. The deployment of howitzers became the latest in a series of broad measures employed by the IDF near Lebanon recently. Earlier, the 13th “Gideon” Infantry Battalion of the IDF’s elite 1st “Golani” Brigade reinforced troops near the border. The number Israeli Hermes 450 drone reconnaissance flights also significantly increased over southern Lebanon. Additional IDF units were also deployed in the occupied Syrian Golan Heights. On top of this, the IDF announced that it will hold the Lebanese government responsible “for all actions emanating from Lebanon”.

    These measures followed the July 20 Israeli strike on Syria, which resulted in the death of a member of Lebanese Hezbollah. Over the past years, Hezbollah has been one of the main supporters of Syrian Army operations against ISIS and al-Qaeda. Tel Aviv increases its strikes on what it calls Hezbollah and Iranian-affiliated targets in Syria every time when the Syrian Army launches active actions against terrorists and seems to be very concerned by the possibility of a Hezbollah response to the July 20 attack.

    If Israel is really set to conduct strikes on Hezbollah targets in Lebanon to the retaliatory action by Hezbollah, this scenario could easily evolve into a wider border confrontation between Hezbollah and the IDF.

    At the same time, tensions between local resistance groups and the US-led coalition grew in Iraq. On July 24, the Islamic Resistance in Iraq, Ashab al-Kahf, announced that its forces had shot down an unmanned aerial vehicle of the US military over the province of Saladin. The group claimed that the UAV was downed by some ‘new weapon’ and released a photo showing the launch of what appears to be an anti-aircraft missile, likely a man-portable air-defense system.

    On the same day, four unguided rockets struck the Pasmaya military camp, which is located 60km south of Baghdad. One of the rockets hit a garage for armoured vehicles, while another one targeted the barracks of the security unit. Two other rockets landed in an empty area. Despite causing some material damage, the rocket attack did not result in any casualties. No group has claimed responsibility for the attack.

    The Pasmaya military camp is known to be hosting troops of the U.S.-led coalition and is used for training of Iraqi troops. On July 25, the coalition withdrew its forces from the camp and handed it over to the Iraqi military. According to the official statement, the coalition trained 50,000 personnel and invested $5 million into the creation of training infrastructure there.

    Earlier in 2020, the US-led coalition withdrew its forces from several smaller military camps across the country. Some sources tried to present this as a withdrawal from Iraq due to the increasing attacks on coalition forces by anti-US Shiite paramilitary groups. These attacks increased significantly after the assassination of Iraqi Popular Mobilization Units Deputy Commander Abu Mahdi al-Muhandis and Iranian Quds Force Commander Qasem Soleimani in a US drone strike on Baghdad International Airport on January 3, 2020. The attack put the region on the brink of the US-Iranian war and caused a public outcry against the US military presence in Iraq. However, in fact, the US has not been withdrawing its troops from the country, but rather redeploying them to larger bases. The US military even brought Patriot surface-to-air missile systems to provide additional protection to its forces. It also continues isolated attacks on positions of the Popular Mobilization Units, an official branch of the Iraqi Armed Forces that Washington describes as terrorist groups and Iranian proxies.

    On July 26, several large explosions rocked the al-Saqer military camp near the district of Dora south of Baghdad. The Al-Saqer military camp hosts forces of the Popular Mobilization Units (PMU) as well as the Iraqi Federal Police. Large quantities of ammunition, which were stored in the camp, exploded. Iraqi Security Media said the ammunition exploded as result of “high heat” and “poor storage”. Nevertheless, sources affiliated with the PMU rejected these speculations. Local sources claimed that the explosions were caused by US drone strikes. An MQ-1 Predator combat drone was spotted over the al-Saqer military camp just after the incident. This was the second situation of this kind that happened in al-Saqer. In 2019, a US drone strike hit a weapon depot at the camp.

    The current situation sets almost no prospects for a de-escalation in Iraq. The main goal of attacks by local Shiite groups is to force the US to withdraw troops from the country. At the same time, the US is not planning to withdraw its forces and uses these attacks to justify the increase of its campaign against pro-Iranian forces in the Middle East.

  • "It Reeks Of Orwell" – The COVID Coup (& How To Unlock Ourselves)
    “It Reeks Of Orwell” – The COVID Coup (& How To Unlock Ourselves)

    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 07/28/2020 – 00:05

    Authored by Angelo Codevilla via AmericanMind.org,

    Panicked by fears manufactured by the ruling class, the American people assented to being put essentially under house arrest until further notice, effectively suspending the habits, preferences, and liberties that had defined our way of life. Most Americans have suffered economic damage. Many who do not enjoy protected status have had careers ended and been reduced to penury. Social strains and suicides multiplied. Forcibly deferring all manner of medical care is sure to impose needless suffering and death. In sum, the lockdowns’ medical and economic dysfunctions make for multiples of the deaths and miseries of the COVID-19 virus itself.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Bad judgments and usurpations—the scam, not the germs—define this disaster’s dimensions. The COVID-19’s devastating effect on the U.S. body politic is analogous to what diseases do to persons whom age (senectus ipsa est morbus) and various debilities and corruptions had already placed on death’s slippery slope.

    Outside of the few who have gained (and are still gaining) power and wealth from the panic, Americans are asking what it will take to end this outrage—not to modify it with any “new normal” decided by who knows whom, on who knows what authority. Since no one in authority is leading those who want to end it, Americans also wonder who may lead that cause. What follows suggests answers.

    What history will record as the great COVID scam of 2020 is based on 1) a set of untruths and baseless assertions—often outright lies—about the novel coronavirus and its effects; 2) the production and maintenance of physical fear through a near-monopoly of communications to forestall challenges to the U.S.. ruling class, led by the Democratic Party, 3) defaulted opposition on the part of most Republicans, thus confirming their status as the ruling class’s junior partner. No default has been greater than that of America’s Christian churches—supposedly society’s guardians of truth.

    Truth

    Since obfuscation, pretense, and lies concerning the COVID-19 are the effective agents of the panic and of the seizure of arbitrary power, truth and clarity about it are the foundational requirements for escaping its effects. Here is a dose.

    From early March 2020 on, the best-known authorities on epidemics—the World Health Organization and the U.S. Centers for Disease Control—presented the COVID-19 respiratory disease to the Western world as a danger equivalent to the plague. But China’s experience, which its government obfuscated, had already shown that the COVID-19 virus is much less like the plague and more like the flu. All that has happened since followed from falsifying this basic truth.

    Our “best and brightest,” at first having minimized fears of person-to person contagion during January and February, during which the disease spread from China to the West, then declared that the virus is unusually contagious, and posited—on zero factual basis—that it would kill up to one in twenty persons it infected—5% infection/fatality rate (IFR). Based on that imagined fatality rate, they adopted mathematical models from Britain and the University of Washington that predicted that up to two million Americans would die of it.

    The U.S. Institute for Health Metrics and Evaluation (IHME) modeled the authoritative predictions on which the U.S. lockdowns were based. Its model also predicted COVID deaths for un-locked-down Sweden. On May 3 it wrote that, as of May 14, Sweden would suffer up to 2800 daily deaths. The actual number was below 40. Whether magnifying this falsehood was reckless or willful, it amounted to shouting “fire!” in a crowded theater. What justifies listening to, and paying, people who do that kind of science?

    Establishing any infectious disease’s true lethality is characteristically straightforward: test a large sample of the population proportionately representative of location, age, sex, race, socioeconomic categories. Follow up with the subjects a month later to add up the rate of infections and learn the results thereof. Period. Today, we still lack this definitive, direct knowledge of COVID’s true lethality because bureaucrats have prevented widespread testing for the purpose of firmly establishing the one figure that matters most. That is because that figure’s absence allows them to continue fearmongering.

    In May the Centers for Disease Control, by then discredited professionally (though not, alas, in the mass media), was forced to conclude that the lethality rate, far from being circa 5% was 0.26%. Double a typical flu. The CDC was able to keep the estimate that high only by factoring in an unrealistically low figure for asymptomatic infections—never mind inflated figures for deaths. But the U.S. government, instead of amending its recommendations in the face of reality, tried to hide reality by playing a shell game with the definition and number of COVID “cases.”

    During March and April, the authorities had defined as “cases” people sick enough to be hospitalized, who also tested positive. Whoever divided the number of reported deaths (a number inflated by a CDC directive to count deaths due to other causes as being due to COVID) by the number of cases thus defined, was predictably scared and willing to heed “the best advice”—namely societal lockdowns—on how to stay safe. That turned out to be ruinous in and of itself. At the time, they defined the number of these “cases” as the “curve” which we were supposed to sacrifice so much to “flatten,” lest the wave of hospitalizations overwhelm our health care system. Because their premises were wrong, that wave never came.

    Instead, in May, as various non-official surveys were published showing that the majority of those who tested positive for COVID either barely knew that they had been infected or had not known at all, these very authorities doubled down their dishonesty. They began labeling mere infections as “cases.” They divorced reporting of these “cases” from reporting of the number of deaths, and warned the inattentive public about “spiking COVID cases” as if infection carried a serious risk. They also promoted widespread testing of wholly asymptomatic persons for current and past infections, the results of which tests were sure to produce a surging number of new “cases” thus defined.

    And they toyed with reporting deaths by attributing to COVID any that “involved” or looked as if they might have involved it. They then included pneumonia, influenza, and COVID into the category PIC. That is how the death figure came to exceed 100,000. But if the CDC had used the same criterion that it did with the SARS virus, namely “severe acute respiratory distress syndrome,” the figure by the end of June would have been some 16,000.

    Such naked ploys could succeed only because the media colluded in them. The New York Times’ May 27 lead story ominously blared: “California is the fourth state with more than 100,000 known cases.” Meanwhile, the number of deaths attributed to COVID continued dropping from ever-lower bases. By the July 1, even using the CDC’s inflated figures for COVID-responsible deaths, COVID-19’s Infection Fatality Rate for people under 70 was 0.04%. But rather than ask how clarion calls of danger comport with decreasing reports of deaths that may somehow be associated with it, the ruling class agitated to reverse returning to normal life. Be afraid, be very afraid. Heads the House wins, tails you lose.

    Irrefutable if indirect indication that COVID is no plague also comes from comparison between the number of deaths attributed to COVID-19 during any given period with the number of deaths due to all causes for the same period—despite official inflation in the number of deaths attributed to the virus.

    The Imperial College, London’s tally for Great Britain, broken down by age of death, shows that the chances of dying from COVID-19 infection roughly track the chances of death from all causes at any given age, except for the very young. For men, the chances of death co-incident with the virus don’t exceed 1%, or the average death rate, until age 70. For women, they don’t exceed the average death rate until close to age 90. In Spain, the death rate for infected persons over 90 years old was 10%.

    The measure of “excess deaths” tells a similar story. During the six-week peak of the COVID event in 2020, deaths in the U.S. exceeded deaths during the same period in the previous year by 82,000. Considering that, concurrently, the 2020 flu season was one of the worst on record (typically the flu is responsible for some 50,000 deaths during the season) and given the CDC-mandated conflation of COVID numbers with others, the COVID-19 pandemic in and of itself did not amount to much—except in New York City, for reasons only partly known. By the week of June 20, 2020 the CDC was reporting ZERO excess deaths—meaning that the figure for weekly deaths was within the long-term normal curve for that time of the year.

    Not incidentally, in 1957 some 116,000 Americans (out of a population two thirds of today’s size) died of the flu. Ten years later, the toll was 100,000 and in 2019 it was 61,000. By June 2020 the (inflated) toll from COVID-19 stood at 100,000.

    In short, COVID-19 is not America’s plague. It did not shake America. The ruling class shook it. They have not done it ignorantly or by mistake. They have done it to extort the general public’s compliance with their agendas. Their claim to speak on behalf of “science” is an attempt to avoid being held accountable for the enormous harm they are doing. They continue doing it because they want to hang on to the power the panic has brought them.

    BTW: Whenever you hear someone claiming to speak on science’s behalf, referring to authorities rather than to facts and logic, you may be sure that person is a fraud.

    Falsehood

    Falsehood extorted shutdowns, which caused deaths and ruined lives.

    “Lockdowns” of the general population had to be based on the premise that everyone is, if not equally vulnerable, then equally responsible, and hence that everyone must stay cooped up to contribute to everyone else’s safety. But because every word of that is contrary to reality, false, a lie, applying the lockdowns’ force to society has caused needless deaths and suffering.

    Prefatory to considering the lockdowns’ specific effects, we must be clear about what separation of infected or possibly infected persons from presumably un-infected ones can and cannot do. This has been known to whomever wished to know it since the Middle Ages, and repeated even in the humble 1956 study guide for the Boy Scout Public Health merit badge: protecting the un-infected from infection by limiting their contact with those who may be infected depends on knowing that the people to be protected really are un-infected.

    Medieval Venetians, to make sure that no one coming from places infected by the plague would bring it into the city, prevented debarking from ships coming from such places for forty days (quarantine). By the same token, quickly finding the few infected among the many un-infected, and removing them even faster along with those with whom they had been in contact (known these days as contact tracing), is effective only to the extent of the bulk of the population’s near-virginity.

    But, once an infectious disease has spread within a population, quarantines and associated measures are a waste at best. Personal hygiene and minimizing contact (what we now call social distancing) retain all their natural importance for reducing any given individual’s chances of infection to some extent—perhaps even delaying chances of exposure until the disease has run its course. But, once a contagion is rooted in a population, these measures make no difference to general public health. The disease running its course means, in part, that enough people have been infected and hence will have developed immunity, that they can no longer transmit it to others (herd immunity).

    That is how human communities have lived with and through history’s countless epidemics. We have seen this once again in how COVID-19 affected Sweden and U.S. states (e.g. South Dakota and Arkansas) that never did shut down. When COVID-19 hit Germany, Chancellor Angela Merkel said that, regardless of what anyone did, some 70% of Germans would eventually become infected. And that would be that.

    Isolation makes the biggest of differences, however, to sub-categories of the population that may be especially vulnerable to the disease. The Bubonic Plague was an equal-opportunity killer, as was Smallpox. COVID-19, however, seems to discriminate a lot. Yes, all diseases are most noxious to those already most debilitated. But this one seems to have done so more than most.

    In Italy, 99.1% of those who died with or of COVID-19 also suffered from other diseases. But this virus obviously has a special predilection for those with type 2 diabetes, high blood pressure, compromised lungs, and most of all for the very old—to the point that a study by Germany’s Ministry of the Interior asked whether it made any sense to ascribe to any cause the deaths of persons whose bodies were in the process of shutting down anyhow. By contrast, COVID-19’s effect on ordinary healthy persons is considerably milder than those of ordinary respiratory diseases. What sense, then, could general isolation ever have made in the context of COVID-19?

    It made some sense in the context of the U.S. ruling class’s (tragically wrong) assumptions/pretenses/convictions (take your pick) that the COVID-19 is so infectious as well as plague-like in its lethal danger to the general population, that a wave of desperately ill and dying patients would submerge American hospitals unless its natural course were slowed. Hence all medical decks had to be cleared of all other activities, emergency hospitals had to be constructed in the parks, and the Navy’s hospital ships had to be brought in.

    As we have seen, there was never the slightest evidence that the COVID-19 virus could produce mass casualties. From the first, all evidence pointed in the opposite direction. Even in New York, where Governor Cuomo hyperventilated panic, the hospitals in the park and the Navy’s hospital ship were virtually empty.

    But the ruling class’s attachment to its assumptions/pretenses/convictions overrode the obvious truth that the elderly and infirm should have special isolation from contact with persons possibly infected with the virus and that the rest of the population should go about its business.

    The U.S. authorities, the “experts,” the ruling class, chose to do precisely the opposite. They “locked down” a general population that is at virtually no risk, thereby delaying the virus’s spread to people it could not harm and whose infection would build herd immunity. Keeping millions of people indoors also worsened their health. Keeping people from interacting and working normally wrecked economic and social life.

    Worst of all, these authorities, these experts, transferred elderly persons known to be infected with the virus into nursing homes. In Michigan, the authorities even assigned to a nursing home an aide known to be infected with the virus. As a result, the as-yet fully uncounted deaths in these facilities, which house about 1.3 million people (about 0.39% of the population) come to about half of the total U.S. death toll. That is what happened, and it is perverse. It deserves punishment.

    Doubly so because of the cruelty with which it was done. As known virus carriers and unscreened persons were moved in, as the contagion raged, the debilitated, powerless inmates were prohibited visits from their families. These, being nearly all uninfected, would have posed no danger. Had the families been allowed to visit, they might have become aware of what was happening. As it was, they were powerless to save these innocents who, without advocates, were effectively condemned. One New York nurse was fired for objecting. Triply perverse, because some of the officials responsible—e.g. Pennsylvania’s Secretary of health—knew what they were doing enough to pull their own relatives out of danger.

    Others, e.g. New York Governor Andrew Cuomo, who sent 4,500 COVID-infected patients from hospitals to nursing homes and blew off his responsibility for over 5,000 deaths with the words “people die,” later deflected responsibility onto what legitimately may be deemed to be national policy. He cited guidance from the Centers for Disease Control: “’Nursing homes should admit any individuals from hospitals where COVID is present.” Both the lockdown for ordinary people and the transfer of COVID carriers to nursing homes, said Cuomo, followed CDC recommendations. Cuomo did not resist the recommendation. He was occupied trying to score political points on Donald Trump.

    In May Dr. Anthony Fauci, the federal COVID team’s most influential MD, explained the counterproductive national lockdown of healthy people on national television. Earlier, he had said lockdowns were needed to preclude the overcrowding of hospitals. That having proved to be his gross professional error as an epidemiologist, he now said that extending the lockdowns was necessary to prevent so many apparently healthy young people from eventually infecting the old and infirm.

    But there is zero evidence that apparently healthy (i.e. asymptomatic though infected) people infect others with the COVID-19. The evidence is that only symptomatic people (ones with coughs and sniffles) do, and that not through casual contact. Moreover, if separating known spreaders had been Fauci’s intention all along, why had the CDC ordered known COVID carriers to be shifted to nursing homes? At the very least, the man who drove the COVID team did it in a reckless manner that killed people. He too had other things on his mind—political ones.

    Similarly, Governors from New York to Michigan and Illinois, to California, Oregon, and Washington have ordered citizens to stay indoors—which always was and once again proved to be the ideal environment for the transmission of respiratory viruses. Illinois’s governor criminalized more than two people in any boat. Californians have been arrested for walking on the beach, and New York City’s mayor threatened to pull swimmers out of the sea. All in the name of Science. Online searches find no science that shows viruses thriving in fresh air and sunshine, never mind in salt water. The mayor of Los Angeles ordered residents to wear masks at all times outdoors, though there is no evidence that this virus transmits through casual proximity anywhere, but especially outdoors.

    In July, Anthony Fauci said that masks are necessary. But in March the same Fauci had said they did more harm than good—equally without the slightest scientific proof. Surreally, the L.A. Health Department specified that persons should wash their hands after putting on unwashed face coverings, and refrain from touching their faces—except to put on the face coverings that were supposed to make their hands dirty to begin with! Science, anybody? Fauci also guided governors to permit people to congregate by the hundreds at Walmart and Costco, but to forbid them to do so in churches. This fount of Science also gave his imprimatur to sex among strangers but advised Christians to refrain from Communion. Too intimate. What level of partisan credulity does it take to believe any of that?

    One may also ask what level of partisan credulity it takes to take seriously such personages as the governors of New York, Michigan, and California and the mayors of Chicago and Los Angeles, who personally flout the regulations they try to impose on others. Restrictions for thee but not for me!

    The answer really does lie in the depth of political party/class solidarity. The governors and officials who imposed, maintain, and rationalize the lockdowns are all but one (Ohio’s) Democrats. Their counter-factual assumptions/pretenses/convictions, their misrepresentations, their falsehoods and outright lies, are all about their social class’s effort to secure their privileges against an increasingly recalcitrant general population.

    Politics

    We begin by focusing on how seamlessly the Western world’s ruling class has translated the COVID-19 event into yet another of its weapons in the fight it has been waging this century against voters’ growing disaffection. Support for the lockdowns has become as integral to the American Establishment Left, i.e., to the Democratic Party, as belief in abortion, global warming, open borders, and censorship of whatever they choose to call “hate speech.” To understand this, one must realize that the ruling class’s campaign regarding public health, global warming, race, the rights of women, homosexuals, micro-aggressions, the Palestinians, etc. etc. have far less to do with any of these matters than with seizing ever more power for itself.

    Intersectionality

    We note that the language, the attitudes, by which the ruling class have hyped COVID’s health challenge have been integrated into the identities of its constituency’s manifold components so as to add force to the longstanding demands of each. How readily—how naturally—activists for Black Lives Matter, Feminism, Global Warming, etc. have adopted support of all manner of socioeconomic restrictions on the pretend-basis of saving lives from the COVID as if it were their own cause, is yet another practical manifestation of the latter-day Left’s theory of “intersectionality.” As the activists of Black Lives Matter burn down buildings, they also wear masks supposedly to show their commitment to social responsibility for public health. Nor incidentally, they also tout their commitment to LGBTQ sexuality, for abortion, and against the nuclear family. The same may be noted about every component’s support of every other.

    By the same token, every one of the ruling class’s constituencies, the disparity of their foci notwithstanding, has adopted as its own the demand that voting in American elections must henceforth be “from home,” with ballots collected or “harvested” by third parties. That would shift electoral power from those who vote to those who process and count the votes—i.e. to themselves. Hence it would set the entire ruling class free from the voters.

    Each sub-constituency translates the accusation into its own idiom. In America, accusations of racism are the lowest (alas the most common) form of political pandering and intimidation. Securing over 90% of the black vote being the sine qua non of the Democrat Party’s electoral successes, no one was surprised when the New York Times, followed by the rest of the major media, noted that, the COVID-19 having struck African Americans proportionately harder than other races, proves American society treats them despicably and must submit to reform.

    Yet at the Times, CNN, etc. they know that this is a lie and that, regardless of race, adverse outcomes of COVID-19 infections go along with obesity, type 2 diabetes, etc. And they know as well as anyone precisely to what extent African Americans exhibit these very conditions proportionately more than other races, and that these conditions have more to do with calories today than with slavery two centuries ago.

    The COVID event has also made the face mask into a physical badge of tribal identity, common to all the sub-constituencies. Wearing the mask is now about publicly distinguishing the virtuous and deploring the deplorables. North Carolina’s Democrat Governor Roy Cooper said that “A face covering signifies strength and compassion for others” and “wearing one shows that you care about other people’s health.” On the same day, New York’s Andrew Cuomo put it this way: “Wearing a mask is now cool, I believe it’s cool…. Wearing a mask is officially cool.”

    Anthony Fauci, who in March had told 60 minutes “there’s no reason to be walking around with a mask,” in May gave his scientific judgment that masks are “a symbol for people to see that that’s the kind of thing you should be doing,” while admitting that they are “not 100% effective.” He could hardly have done otherwise since the New England Journal of Medicine had said: “wearing a mask outside health care facilities offers [the wearer] little, if any, protection from infection,” and is irrelevant to others in casual contact. Such a symbol of intersectional identity has it become that, as rioters were burning Minneapolis, its Democrat mayor urged the rioters whom he let burn parts of his city to make sure they wore masks while doing so.

    In sum, the lockdowns have been perpetuated and prolonged by people who care more about your compliance than your health.

    Regime of Fear

    They are about increasing the Democratic Party’s chances in the 2020 election.

    The 2016 U.S. election confronted the U.S. ruling class with the possibility that the presidency’s enormous powers might be used to dismantle its network of prestige and privileges. The public is just beginning to understand the extent to which all manner of bureaucrats and allies used their powers to try defeating the challenge of 2016, and then instituted the socio-political equivalent of basketball’s “full court press,” treating anything and everything about the Trump administration as illegitimate, running official investigations not to gather information but as pretexts for feeding slander to their media associates. They tried to catch Trump in perjury traps. They toyed with the idea of leading him into statements that might be construed as bases for removal from office. But the U.S. economy boomed. Trump’s ratings rose. As 2020 dawned and Trump seemed a cinch for re-election, the Democratic Party et al. were grasping at straws for ways of getting at him.

    By the time COVID came over the horizon, thought of using it had already crossed ruling class’s minds. No conspiracy was necessary or possible. The existing party sentiment and like-mindedness were enough to produce the unanimity and uniformity with which the ruling class has used the COVID-19 event to produce, stoke, and maintain fear, to energize its constituencies’ agendas in pursuit its power.

    In January 2017 Dr. Anthony Fauci, speaking at Georgetown University, said he had no doubt that the Trump administration would face a “surprise outbreak” of “infectious diseases.” A few days earlier, The Atlantic published an article titled “How a Pandemic Might Play Out Under Trump,” which wished out loud that Trump’s handling of such an event would undermine his presidency. Yet earlier, NYU professor Arthur Caplan had published an article along the same lines: “The End of Civilization and the Real Donald Trump.” In short, weaponizing a public health event had crossed eager minds.

    The prospect of locking down the country, ostensibly to save it from COVID-19, offered a near monopoly of communications. Trump’s rallies were shut down. Above all, churches were shut down, as well as the countless meetings of clubs, businesses, friends, etc. that are the lifeblood of what one might call the country class. Nor may people congregate as they wish for political purposes: the strictures that North Carolina’s Democrat governor put on the Republican National Convention made it impossible to hold it in that state.

    Without face-to-face contact, television became the chief means by which communication took place—but it was one-way communication, whose programming and corporate advertising—immediately—began telling the people the joys of obedience: “we are all in this together,” “ Alone, together.”

    It reeks of Orwell. The companies whose advertising pays for this are household names: Adidas, Amazon, Airbnb, American Express, Bank of America, BMW, Burger King, Citigroup, Coca Cola, DHL, Disney, eBay, General Motors, Goldman Sachs, Google, IBM, Mastercard, McDonald’s, Microsoft, Netflix, Nike, Pfizer, Procter & Gamble, Sony, Starbucks, Twitter, Verizon, Walmart, Warner Brothers and YouTube. The ruling class.

    Driven by the politics of partisan identity, the ruling class used the COVID-19 event to collapse American life.

    A glance is enough to reveal the perverse enormity of what it caused.

    Because the lockdowns closed most restaurants and hotels, where about half of the nation’s calories were consumed, demand for food shifted in ways that made it impossible for distribution networks and processing plants to adjust seamlessly—especially as the government limited their operation and paid workers to call in sick. Millions of gallons of milk have been poured down drains, millions of chickens, billions of eggs and tens of thousands of hogs and cattle have been destroyed, acres of vegetables and tons of fruit disked under. Vineyards have been ripped out. This scrambled allocation and waste of food resulted in shortages. Prices in the markets rose. In some places, meat and eggs were rationed. Persons deprived of work have less money with which to pay these prices, and struggle to feed their families. This reduced countless self-supporting citizens to supplicants at food banks.

    Who could produce surplus and scarcity simultaneously except sorcerers’ apprentices wielding government power? That’s expertise for you. By intentionally reducing the supply of food available to the population, the U.S. government joined the rare ranks of such as Stalin’s Soviet Union and Castro’s Cuba.

    But no sane person had ever imagined the near-shutdown of a whole nation’s entire medical care except for one disease. The U.S. government did that, on the advice of its very best experts. Between mid-March to July hospitals stood nearly empty, having cleared the decks for the (ignorantly) expected COVID flood. Patients having been discouraged or forbidden to come in for other reasons, doctors and nurses were idled. Not a few were furloughed. Emergency rooms were closed to most of their customers—the poorer people who routinely get routine care there. Private clinics and practices—where most Americans get most medical care—practically shut down. Many will never reopen. Forget about dentistry. This has meant that most Americans have been left essentially without medical care for about a third of a year.

    Tests missed, conditions not diagnosed, treatments forgone or delayed. Human bodies’ troubles not having taken a corresponding holiday, it is impossible to estimate how much suffering and death this lack of medical care has caused and will yet cause—all while the U.S. government was making it happen. Officials who claim to be smarter than we ordered it—for our own good, they claim.

    More than forty million Americans have filed claims for unemployment assistance since the shutdowns began. To this number one must add the as-yet unknown tens of millions owners of small businesses which were forced to close or radically to reduce activity. Add to that the uncountable millions not directly affected—farmers, professionals—whose products and activities the shutdowns de-valued. Imagine the millions of careers wrecked, the shattering of dreams that had been realized by lifetimes of work, and you search for words to describe it: Catastrophe? Tragedy? Man-made, for sure.

    The experts who made this happen stigmatized, tried to silence, and effectively criminalized dissent as dangerous to health and, of course, as racist. But there is zero evidence that all or any of the above measures increased anybody’s life expectancy, and plenty to the contrary. They wronged America. But why? and cui bono?

    Power

    All of the above served the ruling class’s overarching interest in its own power. Are there any categories of people who benefited from the shutdowns? Government gained. We know of no employee of federal, state or local government who was furloughed or had his or her pay reduced. On the contrary, all got additional power. The federal government created trillions of dollars, the distribution of which is enriching the usual suspects involved in administration. The teachers’ unions gained the power to extort concessions as a price for reopening schools. Among them, restrictions on or elimination of charter schools.

    And as independent businesses were throttled, big ones grew. The biggest, Amazon, was the biggest winner. The news media, unrestricted and at the service of the powerful, themselves exercised unprecedented power. The social media platforms seconded the coup by censoring dissent from the “line” of their own most aggressive bureaucrats and officials. Try getting figures for COVID deaths and how they are counted from Google. YouTube deleted a video gone viral of two medical doctors who pointed out the truth about the COVID-19’s true lethality as dangerous disinformation, and Twitter appended a note to President Trump’s objection to voting by mail for facilitating fraud, accusing it of falsehood.

    Prohibitions such as of playing in the park or swimming in the sea are mere devices to train the public to accept unlimited bureaucratic discretion. You may congregate at Costco, but not at church. Failure to obey regulations will land ordinary citizens in jail, while the jails release robbers and child molesters. You may not exceed limits on occupancy or fail to wear a mask. You may not even sing in church. But if you and friends loot and burn the neighborhood store, the police will just stand by. Yet all Democrat governors celebrated and some joined masses of “protests”—forget about masks and social distancing. They did this not for anybody’s health but to to secure another few percentage points of the black vote for their party and to leverage their seizure of power over police forces.

    We are supposed to believe that all this is dictated by “Science.” In June, 1,200 “health experts” signed a letter approving the BLM protests because, it said, “white supremacy is a lethal public health issue.” But it cautioned that “this should not be confused with a permissive stance on…protests against stay-home orders.” In short, Coronavirus restrictions, like the rest of political correctness’s commandments, are pure political weaponry—nothing short of an inversion of the American people’s priorities, accomplished by nobody’s vote. Ruling class presumption. In short, we are living through a coup d’état.

    Declaring emergencies to excuse taking “full powers” is the oldest of ploys. Does anybody remember the Reichstag fire? The prospect of similar things happening in America had been rising along with the ruling class and the administrative state. The authorities’ seizure of arbitrary power in the name of expertise is the deadliest strike at our way of life. Suspending law and rights, issuing arbitrary rules of behavior, has been mostly the doing of Democrat-controlled state and local government. But the lead came from the Democrat-controlled Federal bureaucracy, empowered by a president elected as a Republican, and with the silent complaisance of perhaps a majority of Republican politicians.

    The ruling class’s gains of power and money have been at the country class’s expense, and have depended on suppressing truth.

    An egregious example of forcible official lying is the ruling class’s political campaign against the drug Hydroxychloroquine. President Trump had pointed to the truth that this standard treatment for malaria for more than a half century is effective against the early and mid-stages of the COVID disease. This fact had been discovered accidentally and confirmed by studies and practices in France, Spain, India, and South Korea. In April, U.S. doctors started prescribing it widely, reported good results, and took it themselves prophylactically. The ruling class found this intolerable because it contradicted its narrative that nothing could prevent the sky from falling, but above all because its success might cast a favorable light on Trump. Hence it set about canceling truth about drugs from public consciousness and substituting its own narrative.

    The ruling class machine began by labeling reports of the drug’s success as “anecdotal.” Then, the Veterans Administration gave the drug in small doses to some 380 elderly patients dying with/of the COVID. Every major media outlet touted their deaths as proof of its ineffectiveness and danger. On May 22, the Lancet, arguably the most authoritative medical journal, published what it called an analysis of the world’s biggest medical data base showing, definitively it claimed, that Hydroxychloroquine is ineffective, counterproductive, and dangerous. The Yale School of Medicine officially concluded that the drug is bad stuff, despite a study to the contrary by its own professor of epidemiology, Harvey Risch. The great Anthony Fauci who, when pressed hard, had said that he would take the drug were he to be sick of the COVID, then backed the political narrative by quipping that, as of now there is no treatment for COVID illness. The U.S. food and Drug Administration stopped clinical trials, pharmacy boards refused orders from physicians and retailers, and hospitals around the country required their physicians to stop treating their patients with it.

    It turns out, however, that the Lancet study’s database was part of a fly-by-night, strictly political operation, and that its details are literally incredible—e.g., the number of reported Hydroxy deaths for one Australian hospital exceeded the number of total deaths for the entire country. In short, the report was another professionally unsustainable hit job. The New York Times reported that “More than 100 scientists and clinicians have questioned the authenticity” of the database as well as the study’s integrity. The Lancet withdrew it in shame.

    But it was too late. Fauci and the medical establishment did not apologize. For the media and for headline-readers, the case was closed. The lie stood. Then, on July 1, Michigan’s Henry Ford health system published a peer-reviewed study that shows Hydroxychloroquine significantly cut death rates even in mid-to-late COVID cases. Again, the ruling class machine ignored the truth. Again: all mainstream news about the COVID affair is related to health only incidentally. Be very afraid.

    Nor has the COVID affair to do with any emergency—except possibly the 2020 election. Democrat politicians and the stream of public service TV advertising have left no doubt that the ruling class’s objective is to establish “a new normal” by extending into the indefinite future the powers by which bureaucracies have eclipsed America’s laws and way of life.

    But, as the Authorities toyed too openly with the truth, they impeached themselves and lost authority. Fewer and fewer believe what they hear from on high. As Russians under Communism learned, the truth is usually the opposite. Whenever the government reported bountiful harvests, they stocked up on potatoes.

    Default, and Consequences

    Fairness requires noting that, regardless of whatever America’s ruling Left has done, whatever its hopes, plans, or coordination, what actually happened to the United States of America consequent to COVID could not have happened had President Donald Trump, much of the Republican Party, and America’s religious establishment not concurred in its happening.

    This is another way of saying that the ruling class rules by size and seduction, as well as by intimidation. It did not rush into imposing the shutdowns, or even into making too big a deal of COVID. Its parts and personages did not fully commit themselves until after they had convinced president Trump to give them the preclusion of opposition without which inflicting so much pain on so many would have exposed them to official and popular retribution.

    President Donald Trump, having cut travel from China on January 31 and from Europe on March 12 had maintained his grip on public opinion while pointing to the evidence that that COVID is not catastrophic. He sustained accusations of xenophobia. But, as the virus took root in America, the opposition shifted to blaming him for doing nothing in the face of a plague. Countering that would have required standing on the truth, attacking the central falsehood that the COVID is a plague, and its purveyors as liars. Since the experts had been wrong again and again, this was doable.

    But on March 15, Trump asked the country to shut down for fifteen days to slow the spread of the disease—to flatten the curve. Then, on March 31 the New York Times crowed victoriously that the previous week, President Trump had been stampeded to abandon his goal of restoring normal life by Easter: “The numbers the health officials showed President Trump were overwhelming. With the peak of the coronavirus pandemic still weeks away, he was told, hundreds of thousands of Americans could face death if the country reopened too soon.” Also, poll questions that framed the choice just so had helped produce another set of numbers. Said the Times: he was told that “voters overwhelmingly preferred to keep containment measures in place over sending people back to work prematurely.” Trump let himself be scared into sheltering politically under what he supposed would be the protective professional wings of Dr. Anthony Fauci and the CDC.

    Trump believed that Fauci would cooperate in a plan for reopening, and counted on the Democratic Party sharing credit for providing near a trillion dollars in relief to the people who the lockdowns were depriving of livelihood.

    But, once Trump let go of the truth, he ceded control and entered a political blind alley. Trump was giving the de facto alliance between the Democratic Party, Fauci et al., the press, and a host of profiteers public credit even as they discredited him in every way possible. They had him where they wanted him. As the lockdowns throttled America, they used the political leverage to raise demands. They aimed at his political demise as well as at economic, social, and political transformation.

    The guidelines for “Opening Up America Again” that Trump unveiled on April 17 resulted from that imbalance of political credit and leverage. Far from returning the country to what it had been, the “data-driven” process they outlined, written by Fauci’s CDC, would make sure that state and local officials so inclined now have top-level, pseudo-legal cover for keeping or reimposing whatever arbitrary restrictions on opponents they think they can get away with, with whatever data they can manipulate to that purpose.

    The Guidelines “advise” (that means “mandate” for officials who so choose) opening only to a percentage of capacity, and with restrictions—e.g. no singing in church,—that counter their reason for being. But churches and small business cannot survive at less than at full capacity. Schools set up other than for maximum concentration on the stuff to be learned are counterproductive. In short, the guidelines give federal sanction to choking America’s “main street” sector.

    The guidelines’ arguably most dangerous legacy may be their recommendation/requirement that governments certify persons’ safe status for work and public interaction by tracking and isolating persons infected with the virus—or said to be. This involves hiring hundreds of thousands of persons to enforce compliance with decreed regulations on personal behavior—effectively a “lifestyle police,” empowered at the very least to declare anyone the equivalent of “medically untouchable.”

    The governors of Michigan and California (there is no dissent among Democratic Party officials) have already defined “racism” as a major health hazard. Is there any doubt that these police will be less concerned with health as ordinary people understand it than with enforcing their chiefs’ will on political opponents? Thus, without law or trial, anyone could be separated peremptorily from job, business, or family, pending redress in the courts—which most people cannot afford.

    Were this practice adopted nationally, it really would be the centerpiece of a “new normal.” By May, New York’s mayor had already deputized hundreds of (arguably former) gang members and criminals, paying them to circulate among the general population to “encourage”—dare we say, intimidate?—citizens to follow the Mayor’s orders. He also offered rewards for reports on neighbors’ violations of those orders. This is the beginning of explicitly partisan policing more as in China than in the America in which we grew up. Not incidentally the World health Organization—an extension of China’s government, formally recommended that nations “observe active surveillance and tracing of their populations.” Presumably, when the next virus comes along, the ruling class’ arbitrary powers will ratchet up yet another notch.

    Sadly Anthony Fauci, whose reputation could not withstand any sort of scrutiny, retains the capacity to mislead because no one with a major national audience has publicly scrutinized it.

    All of this, one must keep in mind, is so because President Trump’s complaisance with the ruling class’s falsehoods about the virus precluded high-level affirmation of the truths that negate the COVID Coup lies and pretenses. That he gave that complaisance contre coeur is beside the point. When pressed, Trump stuck by the falsehoods, as he did on April 22, after Georgia’s Republican governor, Brian Kemp, who had opposed the lockdowns, announced that he was lifting them in his state. Trump chastised him publicly in the strongest terms, prompting the media into an orgy of accusations that Kemp was turning Georgia into a death camp. As it happened, Georgia got healthy. But that did not matter.

    The biggest and most significant default however, has been that of America’s Christian churches—all of them—from their hierarchs to their priests, pastors, and ministers. Their complaisance with the lockdowns set aside a truth far more important to human dignity than anything having to do with any physical ailment—the one truth that puts all human power in proper perspective, the truth on which our civilization itself rests: that no human power can manufacture true and false, right and wrong, any more than we can make ourselves, and that, therefore, we are obliged to “render unto Caesar the things that are Caesar’s and unto God the things that are God’s.” 

    Jewish congregations have been similarly craven.

    The churches’ agreement to suspend public worship and the distribution of sacraments also contradicted their duty. Until 2020, Christian clergy felt obliged not just to offer public worship to whomever, but also to search out the sick, to offer sacraments to the dying, especially in places where victims of plagues lay between life and death—regardless of consequences. Because surrendering to secular dictates concerning how congregants should behave, even in church cannot be justified in Christian terms it would not have crossed previous generations of churchmen’s minds.

    Had this generation of church leaders simply practiced their faith, even by merely keeping silent about the ruling class’s claims about the COVID-19 rather than ignorantly, submissively endorsing them, they would have preserved their intellectual and moral credit to help the general population to deal with the growing realization that they had been duped. Instead, they chose to be complicit with tinpot Caesars. Hence, as Americans face the bitter fact that we have been hurt worse than for nought, the churches have largely disqualified themselves as arbiters of truth.

    Truth and clarity about what history will record as the 2020 COVID coup is the necessary condition for the American people to overcome its effects. Overcoming those effects must begin with discrediting those pretenses and the reputations of those who made them.

    Who Will Lead Us?

    Uncompromised leadership is in short supply because few prominent persons have resisted ruling-class pressure to join its COVID narrative. But so anxious are Americans for truth about what happened, what is happening; so substantively thin are the lies on which the scam has been based, and so abundant are the resources for establishing the truth; so hungry are Americans for examples of successes in countering the scam, that a few courageous leaders in key places may suffice.

    The following outlines how the U.S. Senate can function as a truth commission concerning the COVID coup’s several aspects, and how state governors so inclined can provide practical leadership to motivate, guide, and legitimize life independent of our dysfunctional ruling class. 

    With regard to the latter, we note that the manner in which states and localities run by Democrats have managed the COVID event differs from that of places otherwise governed as if they were from regimes, countries, even civilizations, alien to one another. This is yet more evidence that American society has largely broken into incompatible pieces, and that avoidance of civil war may hinge on mutual tolerance of parting ways. More on that below.

    Truth Commission

    In the past, as the misbehavior of important persons confused and divided Americans, wise senators summoned to public hearings those involved in the controversies, put them under oath and hence possible penalty for perjury, and established the often-uncomfortable truth on which the country came together. In 1948 Senator Richard Nixon’s (R-CA) hearings showed beyond doubt how deeply Soviet intelligence had penetrated our government. Between 1951 and 1957, Senator Estes Kefauver (D-TN) exposed and hence dismantled the mafia’s control of the U.S. labor movement. In 1974 Senator Sam Ervin’s (D-NC) hearings left no doubt about President Nixon’s role in the Watergate coverup. Today, the COVID scam being based on lies and misrepresentations by countless important persons, rigorous public testimony under oath can expose them and those who spread them.

    Because of jurisdictions and/or of particularly able chairmen, the Senate’s Committee on Homeland Security and Oversight, on Health, Education and Labor, on Finance, and on the Judiciary, each can shine their particular lights on specific aspects of the problem.

    Senator Ron Johnson’s (R-WI) Committee on Government Affairs, with oversight over the Centers For Disease Control, can set the record straight about how its relationship with China’s laboratories, with the World Health Organization and with the Chinese government itself has shaped how the U.S. government has dealt COVID. The CDC having grasped enormous powers over American life, the Committee can inquire about the level of expertise it has brought to its task. What, if anything, justifies its claim to scientific management? The Committee can also audit how the CDC’s expenditure of funds and efforts among a variety of political, non-health topics affected its readiness to deal with the recurrence of viruses from exotic places.

    Its subcommittee on Oversight and Emergency Management, under Senator Rand Paul (R-KY), himself a physician, is well placed to expose who knew what about the COVID-19 virus, when they knew it, who told the public what, and on what basis. The public has noted with dismay the discrepancy and contradictions about COVID-19 from supposedly medical experts, most prominently by Dr. Anthony Fauci. 

    At different times, these experts told us that the virus posed very little danger, and that it was a mortal threat to us all, that masks were useless, and then essential. On the basis of their many statements, hundreds of millions of American lives were wrecked, and millions continue to languish under “guidelines” that make no sense on their face. Expert questioning under oath in front of the cameras can let the American people judge for themselves what sense they make. The experts will have to reveal what medical expertise might have led them to stigmatize young people relatively unaffected by the COVID for going to the beach while not objecting as greater numbers of higher-risk black Americans rioted in the streets.

    The jurisdiction of Senator Charles Grassley’s Finance Committee (R-IA) includes unemployment compensation, social services, and Medicare/Medicaid. The COVID event having caused some forty million persons to file for unemployment, having placed unusual burdens on all manner of government services, and having roiled food markets in ways harmful to health as well as suggestive of possible price fixing, this Committee is well placed to unravel the causal threads between the strictures that governments have placed on the population and the troubles that ensued. Grassley, one of the Senate’s better investigators, can showcase categories and individuals hurt by the lockdowns and call governors to square the harm they caused with the benefits they claim they achieved. Who lost my job? Who destroyed my business? where do I go to rebuild what I lost? These are some of the questions that the committee can put to officials on the American people’s behalf. Grassley and ranking Democrat Ron Wyden (D-OR) can also bring to bear their staff’s expertise regarding nursing homes to probe how government policy brought about the holocaust that the COVID-19 wrought in them.

    Parents all over America wonder about the basis on which the 2019-20 school year was cut in half and the bases on which the 20-21 year was compromised. Senator Rand Paul’s Subcommittee on Children and Families can put such questions authoritatively to the officials who made that call, confront the projected risks with reality, and weigh them against the results of lost education and social disruption.

    Americans ask by what right governors and mayors essentially put people under house arrest without due process, and had them arrested for such activities as playing in the park or paddling in the sea; by what right they shut down religious services, etc. What else may government do in violation of the Bill of Rights? Under the U.S. Constitution, what limits are there on a citizen’s obligations and rights? These are some of the questions with which Senator Ted Cruz (R-TX) can confront federal, state, and local officials summoned before Senate Judiciary’s Subcommittee on the Constitution. Cruz would also summon officials of the U.S. Department of Justice’s Civil Rights Division and ask why they have not treated state and local officials’ denial of the free exercise of religion and of freedom of assembly as violations of the First Amendment. What is their understanding of civil rights?

    The American people have an interest in knowing how the mentality of current officials is changing the practical meaning of the Constitution’s words. Cruz might well ask, government officials having changed the meaning of the basic bargain between people and government, what remains of the people’s obligation to obey the government?

    Exemplary Leadership

    Publicly contrasting the thoughts, deeds, and consequences of the officials and professionals who made the COVID event such a tragedy with those of the officials and professionals who led in opposite directions would not be the least of the beneficent results from serious hearings. Most Americans don’t know, but should, that several U.S. States never did shut down, while others reduced activities far less than the likes of California and New York. Like Sweden’s government, these states’ officials never saw reason to believe that the COVID was the plague and believed that individual persons’ exercise of responsibility for themselves is the surest guarantee of safety for all.

    But the differences in what happened in California and Florida, in New Jersey and South Dakota do not speak for themselves. That is why the public would benefit by seeing these states’ governors defending their widely different perspectives on the COVID, and their results.

    Perspective

    It should be clear that the COVID event in America is only tangentially about health. It is essentially a political campaign based on the pretense of health. Mere perusal of news from abroad is enough to see that this is true as well throughout the Western world. Throughout, the campaign by governments and associated elites has essentially smothered social and economic activity. Not least—and by no means incidentally—it has smothered the overt political opposition which had increasingly beleaguered said governments and elites throughout the Western world.

    Through the previous decade, the various failures and inadequacies of these governments and elites, of “Davos Man,” had become the prime subject of public discourse. At the very least, the COVID campaign changed the subject to physical safety and economic survival. Davos Man tightened control by using the state’s coercive power more forcefully than in wartime, covering its class by claiming to speak for “science” in a manner that precludes counterargument.

    In America as elsewhere, there was no doubt about which sectors of society were on what side, who were the campaign’s protagonists, winners, and losers. The governments, their bureaucracies, the major legacy political parties, the celebrities and the media, Davos Man, were on one side. On the other were middle class people and their “populist” representatives. As the northern hemisphere’s summertime was banishing the latest respiratory virus, Davos Man strove to make as many restrictions as possible part of a “new normal.”

    In Europe as in America, the COVID affair was but the latest round in which the very same protagonists had faced off. There as here, the language and attitudes with which Davos Man denigrated its supposed inferiors in the COVID affair fit seamlessly into previous patterns of the larger, long-term struggle.

    Had there been any doubt that the COVID-19 virus was more an occasion than a cause, it vanished at the end of May as, on both sides of the Atlantic, Davos Man switched to berating ordinary people and their civilization and ginned up yet another campaign to beat back challenges to its power.

  • "Capitalism Always Finds A Way" – How Texas Strip Clubs Are Surviving The Pandemic
    “Capitalism Always Finds A Way” – How Texas Strip Clubs Are Surviving The Pandemic

    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 07/27/2020 – 23:45

    Scott Gottlieb said over the weekend that encouraging signs that the outbreak may have “peaked” are beginning to emerge in some parts of the Sun Belt – though the US is still far from done with this yet, and Americans should take caution. A few hours later, Texas health officials reported the state’s lowest daily tally of new coronavirus cases in two weeks (as deaths in the state topped 5,000).

    It seems Gov Abbott’s belated decision to close bars, restaurants and other businesses for in-person service is having some kind of impact. Meanwhile, COVID-19 is no longer the state’s only immediate problem.

    All the while, as volatile oil prices have whiplashed the state’s economy, heaping more pain on the state’s labor market, a group of strip club owners won a victory in Texas’s conservative courts allowing them to reopen as “restaurants with entertainment”, hosting what amounts to outdoor adult entertainment, mostly held in large tents set up outside.

    Houston-based Vivid Gentleman’s Club became the first “drive-thru strip club” in the state when it reopened just last week. A reporter from the Houston Chronicle described “black metal barricades separate the dancers from the cars, and dollar bills litter the asphalt between the white siding of the tent walls. The purplish-blue lighting casts a familiar (to club-goers) ambience over the scene, but obvious reminders of the pandemic remain; some of the performers are in face masks.”

    Like with strip clubs allowed to reopen in other states, performers kept their masks on while removing their clothes.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    While restaurants are now allowed to operate at 50% capacity and bars are still currently shut down across Texas, strip clubs, which fall in a grey area, were forced to adapt.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Cars pull up under a white tent, order food, and while they wait, they can watch the girls – both masked and unmasked – dance. However, the experience comes with a limit that most customers probably find unappealing: There’s a two-song limit per customer.

    Stories about these ‘drive thru’ clubs are starting to circulate on social media, inspiring a flood of commentary, with tweets ranging from humorous, to incredulous, to sarcastic.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Even the replies to @NickatFP’s tweet were of an unusually high quality.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    They’re serving breasts…and wings?

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Is it any wonder Elon Musk and Joe Rogan are reportedly ditching California for the Lone Star State?

  • US Military Flies Record Number Of Planes Near China’s Coast In July
    US Military Flies Record Number Of Planes Near China’s Coast In July

    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 07/27/2020 – 23:25

    Authored by Jason Ditz via AntiWar.com,

    As part of Washington’s increased military presence in Indo-Pacific, the month of July has seen a record number of aerial surveillance flights by US military aircraft in the South China Sea and near China’s coast. A Beijing-based think tank counted over 50 sorties by US military aircraft in the region in the first three weeks of July.

    “At the moment the US military is sending three to five reconnaissance aircraft each day to the South China Sea,” the South China Sea Strategic Situation Probing Initiative (SCSPI) said. While July saw record numbers, the increased flights started earlier this year with “much higher frequency, closer distance and more variety of missions,” SCSPI said.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    US Air Force file image: B-52 Bombers and fighter escort over South China Sea.

    The closest flight to China’s coast happened in May, when a US Navy plane almost flew within the 12 nautical mile zone of China’s Hainan Island. SCSPI statistics show that flights by US planes within 50 to 60 nautical miles of the Chinese Mainland were “frequent.”

    With US-China relations rapidly deteriorating in the wake of the Covid-19 pandemic, the South China Sea has seen massive US military exercises. Twice this month, two aircraft carrier strike groups led drills in the contested waters.

    The Trump administration also formally rejected most of Beijing’s claims to the South China Sea, ratcheting up tensions even more.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Via Business Insider: The overlapping maritime claims in the South China Sea.

    In 2001, a US reconnaissance plane collided with a Chinese military aircraft 59 nautical miles off the coast of Hainan Island. The collision killed the Chinese pilot and forced the US plane to land on Hainan.

    The ramping up of US flights in the region increases the risk of accidents like the 2001 incident, and souring US-China relations makes solving future incidents diplomatically less likely.

  • More Explosive Leaks From OPCW Show Trump Bombed Syria On False Grounds
    More Explosive Leaks From OPCW Show Trump Bombed Syria On False Grounds

    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 07/27/2020 – 23:05

    As the ongoing increased sanctions regimen on Syria demonstrates, Washington’s pursuit of regime change against Assad is not over, despite Damascus clearly having won the war, and with the US having wisely ditched talk of some kind of overt major Iraq-style military intervention (as was the case under Obama in August 2013).

    While mainstream media has largely “moved on” from coverage of Syria (so much for feigned humanitarian “concern” for millions of Syrians suffering under severe American-led sanctions!), some analysts like independent journalist Aaron Maté have been detailing damning leaks from the chemical weapons watchdog Organization for the Prohibition of Chemical Weapons (OPCW).

    “A series of leaked documents from the OPCW raise the possibility that the Trump administration bombed Syria on false grounds and pressured officials at the world’s top chemical weapons watchdog to cover it up,” Maté’s latest report in The Nation begins.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Guided-missile destroyer USS Porter during the first strikes on Syria in 2017 from the Mediterranean Sea, Us

    “Two OPCW officials, highly regarded scientists with more than 25 years of combined experience at the organization, challenged the whitewash from inside. Yet unlike many whistle-blowers of the Trump era, they have found no champion, or even an audience, within establishment circles in the United States,” the report continues.

    Recall that President Trump bombed Syria on two occasions. On the last occasion, in April 2018, Damascus was pummeled with a series of major tomahawk missile strikes ostensibly in response to claims by the primarily Saudi-backed jihadist group Jaysh al-Islam that the Syrian Army had carried out a chemical weapons attack on civilians. It was the all too familiar pattern which went back to 2013: “rebels” on the brink of being wiped out make a last ditch unverified claim in order to draw Western military support, then the mainstream media runs with it because it already fits the narrative of the “monster” Assad, and then right away it’s American and allied “bombs away” with no questions asked

    But Maté now documents an avalanche of leaks and internal dissent within the global chemical weapons watchdog group OPCW to say the US once again attacked a Middle East country based on lies (and just like in neighboring Iraq, don’t forget that some 1,000 or more American troops occupy the oil-rich northeast section of Syria).

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Maté’s report finds that “Since May 2019, internal OPCW documents, including a trove published by WikiLeaks, reveal that the Douma investigators’ initial report reached different conclusions than their organization’s published version. They were overruled by senior officials who kept evidence from the public.”

    The Nation report outlines leaks’ key revelations as follows:

    • Senior OPCW officials reedited the Douma investigators’ initial report to produce a version that sharply deviated from the original. Key facts were removed or misrepresented and conclusions were rewritten to support the allegation that a chlorine gas attack had occurred in Douma. Yet the team’s initial report did not conclude that a chemical attack occurred, and left open the possibility that victims were killed in a “non-chemical related” incident.
    • Four experts from a OPCW and NATO-member state conducted a toxicology review at the OPCW team’s request. They concluded that observed symptoms of the civilians in Douma, particularly the rapid onset of excessive frothing, as well as the concentration of victims filmed in the apartment building so close to fresh air, “were inconsistent with exposure to chlorine, and no other obvious candidate chemical causing the symptoms could be identified.”
    • Chemical tests of the samples collected in Douma showed that chlorine compounds were, in most cases, detected at what amounted to trace quantities in the parts-per-billion range. Yet this finding was not disclosed publicly. Furthermore, it later emerged that the chemicals themselves did not stand out as unique: According to the author of the initial report, the OPCW’s top expert in chemical weapons chemistry, they could have resulted from contact with household products such as bleach or come from chlorinated water or wood preservatives.
    • The author of the initial report protested the revisions in an e-mail expressing his “gravest concern.” The altered version “misrepresents the facts,” he wrote, thereby “undermining its credibility.”
    • Following the e-mail of protest over the manipulation of the team’s findings, the OPCW published a watered-down interim report in July 2018. Around that time, OPCW executives decreed that the probe would be handled by a so-called “core team,” which excluded all of the Douma investigators who had traveled to Syria, except for one paramedic. It was this core team—not the inspectors who had been deployed to Douma and signed off on the original document—that produced the final report of March 2019.
    • After the e-mail of protest, and just days before the interim report was published on July 6, a US government delegation met with members of the investigation team to try to convince them that the Syrian government had committed a chemical attack with chlorine. According to veteran reporter Jonathan Steele, who interviewed one of the whistle-blowers, the Douma team saw the meeting as “unacceptable pressure and a violation of the OPCW’s declared principles of independence and impartiality.” Interference by state parties is explicitly prohibited under the Chemical Weapons Convention.
    • The inference drawn from the OPCW’s final report—widely disseminated, including by the Trump administration—was that gas cylinders found in Douma likely came from Syrian military aircraft. An unpublished engineering study reached the opposite conclusion. The study evaluated competing hypotheses: Either the cylinders were dropped from the sky or they were manually placed. There is “a higher probability,” it concluded, “that both cylinders were manually placed…rather than being delivered from aircraft.” At “Location 4,” where a cylinder was found on a bed, the study determined that the cylinder was too large to have penetrated the hole in the roof above; at the other site, “Location 2,” the observed damage to the cylinder and to the roof it allegedly penetrated were incompatible with an aircraft bombing. Ballistics experts also said it was more likely that the crater had been made by an explosion, probably from an artillery round, a rocket, or a mortar. With both cylinders, the study concluded, “the alternative hypothesis”—that the cylinders were manually placed and that the craters were caused by other means—”produced the only plausible explanation for observations at the scene.”

    Of course, the media is seeking for these revelations to be memory-holed right way.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    They are being conveniently ignored, and not just ignored, but covered up.

    * * *

    Read the full in-depth investigative report at The Nation.

  • How A Society Unravels
    How A Society Unravels

    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 07/27/2020 – 22:45

    Submitted by Ritesh Jain via World Out Of Whack

    In an interview with Edward Griffith in 1984, former KGB operative Yuri Bezmenov outlined the playbook of the Soviet Union and the staged manner in which a communist apparatus takes over a country.

    The ideal recruit for the KGB were rich filmmakers, academicians and cynically egocentric people. These people held the most potential what is required to destabilize a country are narcissistic, greedy and morally devoid people. He cites that KGB recruited Professors and civil right defenders to subvert and destabilize the country. He repeats again when these useful idiots serve their purpose they are to be killed or exiled. His disaffection with the KGB began after he understood what was to happen to the Pro Soviet Indian Journalists, but when he tried to get the message across, they did not believe him.

    The ultimate objective of KGB was Ideological subversion which was supposed to be carried out by changing perception of reality, and not be bothered by what is true or false. But rather be driven by self-interest.

    He lists down four phases as to how it happens:

    Phase 1 – Demoralization

    This is a process which can take about 15-30 years to perform . During this stage, the moral fibre and integrity of the country is put into question, thereby creating doubt in the minds of the people. To do so, manipulation of the media and academia is required to influence young people. As the younger generation embraces new values, such as Marxism and Leninism in newer and trendy Garbs , the older generation slowly loses control simply through attrition.

    Phase 2 – Destabilization

    The intent is to create a massive government permeating society and becoming intrusive in the lives of its citizens. This can take from two to five years to perform, again with the active support of academia pushing youth in this direction. Here, entitlements and benefits are promised to the populace to encourage their support. Basically, they are bribing the people to accept their programs.

    Phase 3 – Crisis

    This is a major step lasting up to six weeks and involves a revolutionary change of power. This is where an alarming event upsets and divides the country thereby creating panic among the citizens.

    Phase 4 – Normalization

    The final stage is where the populace finally acquiesces and begins to assimilate communism. This can take up to two decades to complete.

    The List of Rules he cites for Revolution are:

    1. Corrupt the young, get them interested in sex, take them away from religion. Make them superficial and snobbish in their understanding of the world.

    2. Divide the people into hostile groups by constantly harping on controversial issues of less importance to create and compound a divide.

    3. Destroy people’s faith in their national leaders by holding the latter up for contempt and ridicule.

    4. Always preach democracy, but seize power as fast and as ruthlessly as possible.

    5. Encourage government extravagances, destroy its credit system, which will produce years of inflation with rising prices and general discontent.

    6. Incite unnecessary strikes in vital industries, encourage civil disorders and foster a lenient and soft attitude on the part of the government towards such disorders.

    7. Breakdown the old moral virtues of honesty, sobriety, self-restraint, faith.

    The Main point he makes it all starts by the act of trying to legislate equality rather than understanding the fundamental that not all are born equal. Once this process starts there has to be a third party who has to legislate this equality and that usually is the government. Once you create an atmosphere of information where people who are deemed unequal have to be made equal by law is where you lay the foundation of discontent. These negative feedback loops are taken advantage of by politicians and this ultimately leads to critical mass of discontent. Once a society is this fragile it takes one catalyst to spark the flame which starts engulfing the system.

    Link to the Interview

    This video was shot in 1984 but you can correlate to whats happening in western society today. The prophetic words about the moral decay of the society are so evident in US where riots have broken out on street, the educated majority has gone silent and hooligans getting free handouts have taken over. The free money is the opium of the people and Leninist Marxist ideology will be having the last laugh.

  • ESPN Has Nearly $1 Billion In Ad Revenue Hanging In The Balance Of College Football Season
    ESPN Has Nearly $1 Billion In Ad Revenue Hanging In The Balance Of College Football Season

    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 07/27/2020 – 22:25

    Disney’s ESPN has almost $1 billion in ads hinging on whether or not college football season is going to happen this year. The only question now is whether or not the season is going to take place.

    ESPN owns two conference networks and has deals to televise every major bowl game. The network also owns many postseason games and commercial rights like sponsorships and naming rights, according to Sportico. ESPN’s networks televised 282 games and sold $792.5 million in ads – more than double the $314.8 million that the network’s NFL package generated. And that doesn’t even count the network’s digital service, ESPN+. 

    In other words, college football is the network’s major business. And the disruption of the season – which looks more and more to be a foregone conclusion – could create a very real top line problem for the network. The Big Ten and Pac 12 have already canceled some early season games and the NCAA’s board of governors will continue meeting to determine the fate of the rest of the season.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Ads that ran during bowl games last year averaged about $30,000 for a 30 second spot. For the semifinal and national title game, those numbers rose to $560,000 and $1 million. The national title game last year drew in 27.3 million viewers. 

    Dan Cohen, who leads Octagon’s media rights consulting division, said: “ESPN’s business in college sports, and primarily college football, is an actual ecosystem. And a lot of their business is organic, as opposed to inorganic. Buying rights to Major League Baseball, then selling ads and securing affiliate deals off that content is inorganic, it’s a transactional piece of business. When you own bowl games, and when you own networks, that becomes a business unit in and of itself.”

    The network does have some security, however, due to its long-term sponsorship deals with names like Allstate and Dr. Pepper. Smaller advertisers, however, could come calling for refunds. The network’s affiliate fees will also help offset some of the turmoil. Sportico writes:

    “Each month, the network receives $9.06 for every household that subscribes to its linear TV feed, a premium rate—the industry average is around 40¢ per sub per month—that this year will pump some $8.8 billion into ESPN’s coffers. That’s just for keeping its signal turned on, and the loss of marquee programming won’t put ESPN in default with the operators.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    One media consultant commented: “The cable guys may be justified in not wanting to pay those fees [if there’s no football]. But they don’t have much recourse one way or the other. The force majeure language in most affiliate contracts says the programmer has up to a year to deliver the goods.”

    The report says it is “unclear” how far along the network is in selling ads for the upcoming season. 

    Cohen concluded by noting that ESPN does have some leverage from having all of its eggs in one basket: 

    “From an economic perspective, you take a bigger hit because you have a bigger piece of the pie, but it also might be easier to manage because you have more control and more flexibility. Let’s say it’s a bowl game that ESPN owns. If they need to create new sponsorship assets that are digital or virtual in nature, they don’t need to work with another entity to figure that out. If they want to re-price or discount ad rates or entitlements, they can make that decision themselves; they don’t need to work with another broadcaster or property owner.”

  • One Professor's Reaction To Loyola Students Petitioning To Fire Him
    One Professor’s Reaction To Loyola Students Petitioning To Fire Him

    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 07/27/2020 – 22:05

    Submitted by Walter E. Block, Ph.D., Harold E. Wirth Eminent Scholar Endowed Chair and Professor of Economics at Loyola University in New Orleans

    My Reaction to Loyola Students Petitioning to Fire Me

    I was horrified to learn that a large group of Loyola students wished me to be fired from my tenured position as Harold E. Wirth Eminent Scholar Endowed Chair and Professor of Economics. They set up a petition to this effect claiming I was a racist, a sexist and an anti-disablist.

    “Morality” is too loose a term to condemn slavery. It is akin to giving a surgeon a bludgeon instead of a scalpel. It is immoral to gossip, to disrespect your parents, to tell white lies, to be lazy, to drink too much, etc. This does not even begin to get to the core of why slavery is an egregious evil. It is akin to damning with faint praise, saying that Martin Luther King, Adolf Hitler, John F. Kennedy, were “pretty good” public speakers, only in the opposite direction. Slavery is an abomination because it violates rights; this “curious institution” is incompatible with the non-aggression principle of libertarianism; yet it also violates morality, but that is a relative minor transgression. Imagine wanting me to be fired because I oppose slavery for this “wrong” reason.

    A racist is someone who hates and reviles the targeted race (black people in this case), wishes them ill, does everything he can to undermine them, impoverish them, initiate violence against them. I have a long paper trail, and numerous public speeches, which attests to the very opposite. For example, I favor reparations for slavery!

    Other attempts of mine to improve the lot of African-Americans is to legalize all victimless crimes, particularly for addictive drugs, since a lot of black on black murder emanates from this source (this would also free a disproportionate number of young black males now improperly imprisoned); to abolish our pernicious welfare system, which has broken up the black family (something slavery was unable to do), and to eliminate the minimum wage law, which is responsible for a disproportionate unemployment rate particularly for, again, young black males.

    What about my support for paying men more than women? Sexism was another charge made against me by these students. This too, sounds exquisitely offensive to modern ears. However, it is black letter economic law that wages tend to equal marginal revenue product, or, productivity for short. Winfrey, Gates and Milken earn so much money because they raise the profit levels of their employers by gargantuan amounts. Ordinary doctors, lawyers, college professors register middle class salaries since our productivity is more moderate. The pay scales of people who push brooms, are even lower, based, again, on their ability to enhance the bottom line.

    A century ago, men on average were paid more than women because most jobs required upper body strength. Physical labor was required to saw down trees, dig holes for building’s foundations, etc., and, on average, men are stronger than women. But nowadays, thanks to mechanization, there are very few jobs to which this applies. Women can operate buzz saws, steam-shovels and bulldozers just as well as men. Why, then, the persistence of a wage gap of some 25%? It is due not to discrimination, but to marital asymmetry. Wives do the lion’s share of household tasks: cooking, cleaning, shopping, child-care, etc. Whenever you do more of any one thing, you tend to do other things less well. Females specialize in jobs in the home, and thus do more poorly than would otherwise be the case in the labor market.

    Evidence? First, while there is a rough 25% salary gap between all men and all women, the divergence between the ever marrieds (married, widowed, divorced, separated) is much higher, some 60%. The discrepancy between males and females who have never been touched by the institution of marriage? Zero! Second, if men and women really had equal productivities at work, any pay-gap would engender gigantic profit opportunities for employers to fire males and hire females. But higher profits are not garnered in industries that employ more members of the distaff side.

    Happily, I am unlikely to be fired as a result of these efforts of Loyola students. For one thing, I have tenure. For another, their petition has garnered far fewer signatures than one inaugurated in support of me, calling for a raise in my salary. Also, the President and Provost of Loyola University, while not agreeing with my viewpoints on these matters, have come out in favor of ideological diversity and academic freedom.

  • Gold Futures Hit $2000 After US Mint Reduces Bullion Coin Supplies
    Gold Futures Hit $2000 After US Mint Reduces Bullion Coin Supplies

    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 07/27/2020 – 21:46

    Gold and Silver futures prices have extended their gains after hours, with the barbarous relic hitting $2000…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    …and silver topping $26.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    This move came after Bloomberg reported  that, according to documents reporters had seen, the U.S. Mint has reduced the volume of gold and silver coins it’s distributing to authorized purchasers as the coronavirus pandemic slows production.

    As we previously noted, sales of silver and gold coins had been surging until the pandemic hit and shutdown production.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The Mint’s West Point complex in New York is taking measures to prevent the virus from spreading among its employees, and that will probably slow coin production there for the next 12 to 18 months.

    The facility is no longer able to produce gold and silver coins at the same time, forcing it to choose one metal over the other, according to the document, which was presented to companies authorized to buy coins from the Mint last week.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Bloomberg reports that a spokesman for the Mint didn’t immediately have comment.

    “The pandemic created a whole new set of challenges for us to manage,” the Mint said in the document.

    “We believe that this environment is going to continue to lead to some degree of reduced capacity as West Point struggles to balance employee safety against market demand.”

    Ahead of this unexpected interruption in supply, the premium for physical gold was already high

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    …and we suspect this will send it soaring back near those $100 levels seen at the last Mint production halt.

  • Putin Hails Russian Navy On Cusp Of Achieving Hypersonic Nuclear Strike Weapons
    Putin Hails Russian Navy On Cusp Of Achieving Hypersonic Nuclear Strike Weapons

    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 07/27/2020 – 21:25

    It’s been a while since Russian President Vladimir Putin touted the country’s experimental hypersonic weapons, especially following last year’s (Aug. 2019) major radiation emitting explosion at a military testing ground in Russia’s far northern Arkhangelsk region, believed to have been a failed hypersonic missile test, which killed multiple scientists and technicians. 

    But according to new statements of his addressing an annual naval parade in St. Petersburg, the Russian military is far past merely the realm of the “experimental,” but is on the cusp of deploying hypersonic nuclear strike weapons.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Putin with Admiral Nikolai Yevmenov, left), Commander-in-Chief of the Russian Navy, via TASS.

    “The widespread deployment of advanced digital technologies that have no equals in the world, including hypersonic strike systems and underwater drones, will give the fleet unique advantages and increased combat capabilities,” Putin said on Sunday, according to Reuters. He claimed that the whole world is “chasing after Russia” in this crucial area of cutting edge defense technology.

    The Pentagon, which has its own program which is at an unknown stage of development, has had current and former generals dub missiles flying at hypersonic speeds essentially “indefensible” — though the US program is aimed in part at achieving precisely defensive capability against them.

    Reuters describes of the as yet to be deployed (to our knowledge) Russian hypersonic arsenal:

    The weapons, some of which have yet to be deployed, include the Poseidon underwater nuclear drone, designed to be carried by submarines, and the Tsirkon (Zircon) hypersonic cruise missile, which can be deployed on surface ships.

    The combination of speed, manoeuvrability and altitude of hypersonic missiles, capable of travelling at more than five times the speed of sound, makes them difficult to track and intercept.

    Elsewhere the Russian defense ministry was widely cited as a saying its first nuclear submarine capable of launching the Poseidon nuclear drone had entered the testing phase. “Work is being successfully completed to create modern weapons systems for the Navy,” a Kremlin statement said.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Aboard the Raptor patrol boat before the Navy Day parade in Saint Petersburg, via Reuters.

    However, Western analysts have typically considered such statements to be far out front of actual successful testing. But Russian media has detailed thatThe tests of Russia’s ship-based Zircon missile – one of several hypersonic weapons introduced by the country’s military – are successfully nearing completion,” citing the Defense Ministry, which has “confirmed the unique tactical and technical characteristics of this missile, as well as its ability to travel at hypersonic speeds.” The Zircon is said to be capable of reaching Mach 9 at an operational range of 1,000km.

    Putin also touted that the navy will receive at least 40 new ships this year, without giving further details on types and sizes. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    MiG-31 with hypersonic rocket, via Sputnik 

    The speech comes days after last week the Russian president held a phone call with Trump over New START, which is set to expire next year. Both sides have expressed a strong desire to avoid an arms race, especially involving nuclear arms. 

    New START, which is the landmark nuclear arms reduction treaty signed by the two superpowers in 1991 and took effect in 1994, specifically is set to expire in February 2021, which would be a mere weeks after the next presidential inauguration.

  • Why Marxist Organizations Like BLM Seek To Dismantle The "Western Nuclear Family"
    Why Marxist Organizations Like BLM Seek To Dismantle The “Western Nuclear Family”

    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 07/27/2020 – 21:05

    Authored by Bradley Thomas via The Mises Institute,

    One of the most oft-cited and criticized goals of the Black Lives Matter organization is its stated desire to abolish the family as we know it. Specifically, BLM’s official website states:

    We disrupt the Western-prescribed nuclear family structure requirement by supporting each other as extended families and “villages” that collectively care for one another, especially our children, to the degree that mothers, parents, and children are comfortable.

    This idea isn’t unique to BLM, of course. “Disrupting” the “nuclear family” is a commonly stated goal among Maxist organizations. Given that BLM’s founders have specifically claimed to be “trained Marxists,” we should not be surprised that the organization’s leadership has embraced a Marxian view of the family.

    But where does this hostility toward the family originate? Partly, it comes from the theories of Marx and Engels themselves, and their views that an earlier, matriarchal version of the family rejected private property as an organizing principle of society. It was only later that this older tribal model of the family gave way to the modern “patriarchal” family, which promotes and sustains private property.

    Clearly, in the Marxian view, this “new” type of family must be opposed, since the destruction of this family model will make it easier to abolish private property as well.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Early Family Units in Tribal Life

    Frederick Engels’s 1884 book The Origin of the Family, Private Property and the State provides a historical perspective of the Marxian view of the development of the modern Western family unit and its relation to property rights. (Engels, of course, was the longtime benefactor of and collaborator with Marx.)

    In reconstructing the origins of the family within a Marxian framework, Engels traces back to the “savage” primeval stage of humanity that, according to his research, revealed a condition in which “unrestricted sexual intercourse existed within a tribe, so that every woman belonged to every man, and vice versa.”

    Under such conditions, Engels explained, “it is uncertain who is the father of the child, but certain, who is its mother.” Only female lineage could be acknowledged. “[B]eing the only well known parents of younger generations,” Engels explained, women as mothers “received a high tribute of respect and deference, amounting to a complete women’s rule [gynaicocracy].”

    Furthermore, Engels wrote, tribes were subdivided into smaller groups called “gentes,” a primitive form of an extended family of sorts.

    These gens were consanguineous (i.e., included people descended from the same ancestor) on the mother’s side, within which intermarrying was strictly forbidden. “The men of certain ‘gens,’ therefore, could choose their wives within the tribe, and did so as a rule, but had to choose them outside of their ‘gens,’” Engels explained. And “marriage” at this stage was a “communal” affair, meaning that multiple partnerships between men and women was closer to the rule than the exception.

    Because mothers were the only parents who could be determined with certainty, and the smaller gentes were arranged around the mother’s relatives, early family units were very maternal in nature and maternal law regarding rights and duties for childrearing and inheritance were the custom.

    Transition to the “Pairing Family”

    This was the state of affairs for thousands of years, according to Engels. Over time, however, there emerged what Engels referred to as the “pairing family,” in which “A man had his principal wife…among many women, and he was to her the principal husband among others.” This was in no small part due to the “gentes” within tribes developing more and more classes of relatives not allowed to marry one another. Due to these increasing restrictions, group marriage became increasingly impossible and ever more replaced by the pairing family structure.

    Under this structure, however, the role of mothers was still dominant. Quoting Arthur Wright, a missionary among the Seneca Iroquois tribe, Engels notes, “The female part generally ruled the house….The women were the dominating power in the clans [gentes] and everywhere else.”

    The fact that women all belonged to the same gens, while husbands came from separate gentes “was the cause and foundation of the general and widespread supremacy of women in primeval times,” Engels wrote.

    “In the ancient communistic household comprising many married couples and their children, the administration of the household entrusted to women was just as much a public function, a socially necessary industry, as the procuring of food by men,” he added.

    As society evolved, as Engels described it, from “savagery” to “barbarism,” an important evolution was man’s development of weapons and knowledge that enabled them to better domesticate and breed animals.

    Cattle and livestock became a source of wealth, a store of milk and meat. “But who was the owner of this new wealth?” asked Engels. “Doubtless it was originally the gens,” he answered, referring to a collective, or group ownership over the sources of wealth. “However, private ownership of flocks must have had an early beginning.”

    “Procuring the means of existence had always been the man’s business. The tools of production were manufactured and owned by him. The herds were the new tools of production, and their taming and tending was his work. Hence he owned the cattle and the commodities and slaves obtained in exchange for them,” Engels explained. This transition marked an early passage from “collective” property to “private” ownership over property—particularly property in productive resources.

    Such a transformation, Engels noted, “brought about a revolution in the family.”

    Part of that revolution involved a shift in the power dynamics of the household.

    “All the surplus now resulting from production fell to the share of the man. The woman shared in its fruition, but she could not claim its ownership,” wrote Engels.

    The domestic status of the woman in the house, which had previously involved control and distribution of the means of sustenance, had been reversed.

    “Man’s advent to practical supremacy in the household marked the removal to his universal supremacy,” and further ushered in “the gradual transition from the pairing family to the monogamic family” (what we would consider the nuclear family).

    With the superior status acquired, Engels wrote, men were able to overthrow the maternal right to inheritance, a move he described as “the historic defeat of the female sex.”

    The family unit’s transition to a male-centered patriarchy was complete, according to Engels. Much of the blame for this can be attributed to the emergence of private property and men’s claim over it.

    How to Overcome the Patriarchy?

    In the Marxian view, therefore, the modern nuclear family runs counter to the ancient “communistic” household Engels had earlier described. It is patriarchal and centered on private property.

    “In the great majority of cases the man has to earn a living and to support his family, at least among the possessing classes. He thereby obtains a superior position that has no need of any legal special privilege. In the family, he is the bourgeois, the woman represents the proletariat.” The family unit, rather than the collective tribe, had become the “industrial unit of society.”

    The overthrow of this patriarchic dominance can only come, according to Engels, by abolishing private property in the means of production—which he and those steeped in Marxist ideology blame for the patriarchy.

    “The impending [communist] revolution will reduce this whole care of inheritance to a minimum by changing at least the overwhelming part of permanent and inheritable wealth – the means of production – into social property,” he concluded.

    What would this new social arrangement look like, according to Engels?

    The care and education of children becomes a public matter. Society cares equally well for all children, legal or illegal. This removes the care about the “consequences” which now forms the essential social factor – moral and economic – hindering a girl to surrender unconditionally to the beloved man.

    In this we see early echoes of the modern left’s current refrain attacking “patriarchy” and the nuclear family as essentially capitalist and private property–based institutions.

    In this, BLM is no different from other Marxist groups. The organization’s goals extend far beyond police abuse and police brutality. The ultimate goal is the abolition of a society based upon private property in the means of production.

  • Mind-Bending Medicine: An Overview Of Psychedelic Substances
    Mind-Bending Medicine: An Overview Of Psychedelic Substances

    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 07/27/2020 – 20:45

    Fueled by a slew of new research, psychedelics may hold the key to treating a multitude of debilitating disorders such as addiction, PTSD, and depression.

    But as an industry that has laid dormant for decades, Visual Capitalist’s Katie Jones explains below that it will need to shed its negative connotations that have limited its potential and undermined new discoveries for so long.

    The infographic below showcases data from The Report on Psychedelics which explains seven of the most common psychedelic substances and examines the many mind-bending ways they could radically transform mental health as we know it.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Resurrecting a Stigmatized Industry

    Although evidence of humans using psychedelics as medicine dates back thousands of years, it was not until the 1940s that psychiatrists became advocates of their therapeutic potential.

    Unfortunately, recreational psychedelics became a symbol of the 1960’s counterculture movement, which contaminated the industry’s reputation. The U.S. responded by introducing the Controlled Substances Analogue Enforcement Act, deeming these drugs illegal and stymying research studies in the process.

    Following some new discoveries in the early ‘90s however, psychedelics moved from the hands of festival-goers back to the labs of scientists. Since then, certain substances such as psilocybin have been granted breakthrough therapy status for treating depression by the U.S. FDA.

    With these recent developments, new companies and investment opportunities are beginning to emerge in the psychedelics space. But these complex drugs are not always easy to understand—so let’s dive in.

    What are Psychedelics?

    Psychedelics are psychoactive substances that can alter perception, mood, and cognitive processes. There are two broad classifications of psychedelics that relate to chemical structure.

    • Entheogenic Plants: Plants or fungi that produce chemical substances that can cause hallucinations

    • Synthetic Drugs: Drugs created in laboratory setting to mimic the effects of entheogenic plants

    Here are seven of the most common psychedelic substances explained:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    With sound scientific evidence and standards coming into place, it’s no surprise that investors—from bestselling author Tim Ferris to several established cannabis companies—are supporting the born-again industry.

    Given the industry’s foothold in recreational use, a therapeutic comeback may be a tough pill for many to swallow. However, it is possible that we are on the precipice of not only a psychedelic revolution but more importantly, a mental health one.

    “Psychedelics, used responsibly and with proper caution, would be for psychiatry what the microscope is for biology and medicine or the telescope is for astronomy.”

    – Stanislav Grot

  • Portland: The Pentagon Should Step-Up Or Pipe-Down
    Portland: The Pentagon Should Step-Up Or Pipe-Down

    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 07/27/2020 – 20:25

    Authored by James Durso, op-ed via The Hill,

    Some military figures apparently have qualms about the U.S. Border Patrol, a federal law enforcement agency, wearing “their” uniforms in the defense of the federal courthouse in Portland, Ore.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    After President Donald Trump’s highly publicized walk from the White House to St. John’s Episcopal Church, two senior officials — the Secretary of Defense and the Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff – were scandalized to find they were in the vicinity of politics.

    The secretary and the chairman retreated across the Potomac faster than General Robert E. Lee after the Battle of Antietam. Secretary Mark Esper distanced himself from the photo-op and the president’s suggestion the military be used to restore order under the authority of the Insurrection Act. The Chairman, Gen. Mark Milley, also apologized, and said he hoped to learn from the situation, as he and the secretary were apparently alarmed that the American people may have glimpsed a camouflage military uniform in the nation’s capital even as rioters were poised to attack federal buildings.

    Since then, the Border Patrol deployed its Border Patrol Tactical Unit (BORTAC), similar to a SWAT team, to protect the Mark O. Hatfield U.S. Courthouse in Portland, Ore., from rioters. The BORTAC officers wear a camouflage uniform, known as Operational Camouflage Pattern, similar to that worn by the U.S. armed forces.

    The Border Patrol officers sallied from the courthouse with non-lethal weapons – tear gas, pepperballs, and “impact weapons” (rubber bullets) – to repel and apprehend rioters who tried to set fire to the courthouse. Five of the officers were injured and three may have suffered permanent eye injury from lasers wielded by the rioters. 

    No sooner had the (tear gas) clouds parted than we were subjected to a lot of “concerns” and furrowing of brow by the Secretary of Defense and military figures worried that federal officers trying to keep a courthouse from being burned down might be confused with their troops.

    The military should be so lucky.

    Rep. Seth Moulton (D-Mass.), a former U.S. Marine, said the Border Patrol officers “…obviously have no understanding of our military’s most basic values — to uphold and defend the Constitution of the United States.” Tell it to the blinded officers.

    Retired Lt. Gen. Mark Hertling criticized the wearing of camouflage by the Border Patrol and proudly recounted that when he was leading the effort to rebuild Iraq’s police force, he equipped them in uniforms dissimilar to those worn by Iraq’s military. The Iraqi Police definitely looked like regular cops, but that didn’t stop it from being infiltrated by militia groups and earning a well-deserved reputation for corruption and brutality.

    Retired Lt. Gen. Russel Honoré decried the Border Patrol for wearing “the cloth of our nation” and followed up with “Get the hell out of our uniforms.

    Really, “the cloth of our nation?”

    Starting in 2001, the military services cycled through camouflage patters with monotonous regularity until Congress told them to stop. The most notorious was the Universal Camouflage Pattern which cost $5 billion and failed to conceal soldiers. But it was good news for Army surplus stores everywhere.

    And these critics don’t understand the Border Patrol officers typically operate in the chaparral environment on the Southwest border where camouflage is a must. BORTAC has also deployed to Iraq and Afghanistan — these guys aren’t “Officer Friendly” coaching police athletic league baseball.

    Ironically, the military’s disquiet with the Border Patrol may reflect its uneasiness with its own operations on the Southwest border in support of civil agencies attempting to stem narcotics, human trafficking and illegal immigration. The U.S. military feels Southwest border operations pose an “unacceptable risk” to combat readiness, according to then U.S. Marine Corps Commandant Gen. Robert Neller. Thus, America may have the only military that thinks defending the border is someone else’s job.

    Or maybe they’re feeling competitive – because the Border Patrol unit that also deployed to Iraq and Afghanistan is doing work the military doesn’t want to do on the Southwest border and is now doing work it doesn’t want to do in Portland.

    The Pentagon is the beneficiary of a DOD budget of $740 billion, plus about $20 billion in Department of Energy funds for nuclear weapons, a big chunk of the intelligence community budget of about $80 billion, and $250 billion for the Department of Veterans Affairs. The military is into the American taxpayer for over a trillion dollars a year, so it would be great if it could bestir itself, worry less about another agency’s fashion choices, and voice some support for those defending a federal courthouse — a symbol of equal justice under law.

  • Companies In The Super-Saturated Chinese EV Market Are Going Public To Avoid Going Bankrupt
    Companies In The Super-Saturated Chinese EV Market Are Going Public To Avoid Going Bankrupt

    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 07/27/2020 – 20:05

    The competition in the EV market – especially in China – is starting to become super-saturated. But rather than actually allow the market to consolidate and eliminate some of the smaller players, Chinese EV companies are taking another route to stave off going under: going public.

    After all, what better way to put a company that’s not meant to survive on life support than to sell shares of it to a public that doesn’t know how to read financial statements? 

    Hozon New Energy Automobile is the latest name to launch an IPO, Bloomberg points out in a recent article, saying it wants to list in Shanghai next year. WM Motor Technology Co. is also considering a listing, potentially this year. They will join names like Nio, Tesla and Li Auto in competing in the world’s largest auto market.

    Hozon is trying to capitalize on lower priced vehicles, offering an electric SUV for less than $10,000. The company has already shipped more than 16,000 vehicles. WM Motor is seeking a valuation of about $4.3 billion and is backed by names like Baidu and Tencent. Li Auto is seeking an IPO in the U.S. that could raise up to $1 billion. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    And it has been the public market performance of names like Tesla and Nio that has paved the way for smaller names to go public. Both stocks have more than tripled this year. 

    Robert Cowell, an analyst at Shanghai-based private-equity firm 86Research Ltd. told Bloomberg: “The strength in Tesla and NIO shares is creating a window for new EV startups to list. The current conditions provide an attractive opportunity to raise funds, which can help some of these smaller startups sustain the investments necessary to compete effectively.”

    This has given hope to the dozen or so EV names that have been able to raise money in China. They have emerged from a group of nearly 100 EV startups, all helped along by the government’s promise of subsidies for the industry. But its likely that out of the dozen that will make it to the public markets, not even all of those candidates will be successful.

    Charley Xu, managing director and partner at Boston Consulting Group in Shanghai concluded: “This industry by nature requires huge investment in product development and manufacturing. Financing from the public market can further boost its development.”

  • This Is Bigger Than COVID But Few People Are Paying Attention
    This Is Bigger Than COVID But Few People Are Paying Attention

    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 07/27/2020 – 19:45

    Authored by Simon Black via SovereignMan.com,

    Most people realize that 2020 has thrust two game-changing trends upon us that will change the world for years to come.

    The first is Covid.

    In less than six months, this virus has created extreme global hysteria and economic devastation.

    Countless businesses have gone bust or are teetering on the edge. Tens of millions of jobs have been lost.

    Government debt around the world has exploded higher. And their heavy-handed abuse of power has been astonishing… often incomprehensible.

    Politicians and public health officials have suspended many of our most fundamental freedoms, threatened to come into our homes and take our family members away, and even banished us from our own private properties.

    We’ve also seen a breakdown in basic social conventions.

    Family and friends have stopped gathering together in person out of fear that someone may be a carrier. Weddings and funerals are virtual. And a simple handshake is practically considered an act of biological terrorism.

    And, just like 9/11 nearly two decades ago, many effects of Covid will never return to ‘normal’.

    Then there’s the social justice movement… which tore onto the world stage two months ago with a desire to make important cultural changes.

    At its core, the movement is virtuous. After all, it’s supposed to be about freedom.

    But it has quickly become divisive, menacing, and pointlessly violent.

    Everything is offensive. Intellectual dissent must be immediately squashed. People lose their jobs, receive death threats, or are censored, merely for expressing completely valid (and even supportive) opinions.

    And some of the largest corporations in the world have all submitted to the Twitter mob, like Nazi collaborators in France who began goose-stepping with the Wehrmacht the moment Hitler took Paris.

    History is being rewritten. Vocabulary is being replaced. And any civil discourse results in persecution.

    Just like lingering Covid effects, this social turmoil will also be with us for years. Don’t fool yourself into believing it’s some some flash in the pan that will be over in a few weeks.

    But what I wanted to tell you today is that there is a THIRD, major trend brewing right now. And it could prove to be even bigger than Covid, bigger than the social justice movement.

    It’s not one that evokes the same emotion. So you won’t see too many people marching in the streets or cowering in fear in their homes. There’s no hysteria.

    This third major trend is rational. And that’s why it’s largely been ignored. But its impact could be far bigger and longer lasting.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    I’m talking about conflict with China.

    Over the past several months we’ve witnessed a minor trade dispute between the United States and China escalating into a major diplomatic conflict, and now, into full-blow Cold War.

    US Secretary of State Mike Pompeo left no doubt about this when he essentially declared cold war against China’s communist party in a speech late last week:

    “If we bend the knee now, our children’s children may be at the mercy of the Chinese Communist Party, whose actions are the primary challenge today in the free world.

    General Secretary Xi is not destined to tyrannize inside and outside of China forever, unless we   allow it.

    Richard Nixon was right when he wrote in 1967 that ‘the world cannot be safe until China changes.’Now it’s up to us to heed his words.

    Today the danger is clear. And today the awakening is happening.

    Today the free world must respond. We can never go back to the past.”

    It’s pretty incredible how China has already managed to get most of the world to bend to its will.

    There are so many examples of this; major US airlines like Delta and American, have scrubbed  references to “Taiwan” on their websites so as not to offend the Chinese communist party.

    Hollywood, despite constantly thrusting its woke social justice politics in everyone’s faces, refuses to utter the slightest criticism of China, simply so they can squeeze out more box office revenue there.

    And the National Basketball Association  squashed an executive for Tweeting support to Hong Kong protesters last year.

    Even the league’s biggest and most outspoken star, Lebron James, meekishly told reporters that China has “a complicated issue with racial, socioeconomic and geopolitical layers” and that he saw “little upside in speaking up” against the Chinese communist party.

    Comparing sports team owners to ‘slave owners’ is perfectly fine. But don’t say anything bad about China!

    In addition to Pompeo’s speeech, the US-China conflict escalated last week when the US government ordered the Chinese to close its consulate in Houston, Texas.

    The Chinese government retaliated by closing a US consulate in China.

    This is after months of sanctions, asset seizures, tariffs, arrests, expelling of foreign journalists, and   plenty of tension about the Coronavirus.

    I know there’s a lot of fear that an actual shooting war will break out between the US and China. And that is a possibility.

    I’m probably biased as a West Point graduate, but I’m convinced that the US Marine Corps and Army Rangers are the most proficient fighting forces in the world.

    But the reality is that China has a bigger army. It’s better equipped with newer, better technology. Its tanks are superior, and it has more of them.

    China has also been investing heavily in its Navy and Air Force; it already has more ships than the US Navy, and it has also rolled out a fifth-generation fighter jet, the J-20, to compete head-to-head against the US military’s F-22 and F-35.

    But that’s just conventional warfare. The next war will be highly unconventional… and the Chinese are dominant in “system destruction warfare”.

    They could take down the US power grid, hack multiple defense and intelligence networks, and remotely disrupt key US command and control elements, before a single shot was fired.

    This is not my assessment; the Pentagon has been wargaming conflict between the US and China for years. And in the words of one researcher who has participated in these scenarios, the US “gets its ass handed to it.”

    Fortunately, a shooting war is unlikely. Why would China want to invade the US and deal with 400 million guns in the hands of the civilian population?

    Why would the US want to invade China and deal with another Vietnam war?

    War doesn’t benefit either nation, and on that basis it’s possible… but not probable.

    What is likely is a total reset in the global financial system.

    The current “Bretton Woods” financial system in which the US economy and US dollar are at the center of the global economy is decades old.

    The US has derived extraordinary wealth and prosperity from this system for years.

    Bretton Woods is the reason why the US national debt can be nearly $27 trillion (over 100% of GDP) without the dollar collapsing in value.

    It’s the reason why the Federal Reserve can conjure trillions of dollars out of thin air and keep interest rates at 0% for years, but still be taken seriously.

    Losing this advantage would be nothing short of catastrophic for the US economy.

    And continued conflict with China is the one thing that is practically guaranteed to make it happen.

    That’s why this trend– conflict with China– could be the biggest thing happening right now.

    It’s not as scary as Covid, it’s not as emotional as social justice… but the effects may be permanently devastating.

    On another note… We think gold could DOUBLE and silver could increase by up to 5 TIMES in the next few years. That’s why we published a new, 50-page long Ultimate Guide on Gold & Silver that you can download here.

  • Turkish Lira Goes Berserk As Central Bank Briefly Loses Grip On Capital Controls
    Turkish Lira Goes Berserk As Central Bank Briefly Loses Grip On Capital Controls

    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 07/27/2020 – 19:25

    Some time in mid-June, Turkey’s president Erdogan and the central bank which he now de facto controls, decided to do to the Turkish lira what the Fed has done to the bond market, and nationalized it the result being an unprecedented flatlining in the country’s troubled currency which had been collapsing in the months prior and only the government’s ruthless intervention managed to halt the slow-mo collapse.

    As shown in the chart below, for the past month the USDTRY was effectively pegged to a level of 6.85, ending the currency’s precipitous decline.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    However today, just after 1pm ET, the government and central bank finally lost control of the lira their multiple capital controls failing to protect the currency from the forces of the free market, and the lira crashed 2% against the dollar in the space of minutes – posting its biggest intraday drop since October 7 as the USDTRY spiekd as high as 6.9835 – before the central bank finally regained control, and the currency quickly rallied back to recover most of its losses amid local limits on credit lines and liquidity.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The lira briefly also touched an all-time low the euro, falling as much as 3% to 8.2178 at 1:14 p.m. ET before retreating to trade at 8.0791

    “A few theories could be the way domestic banks manage their FX exposures,” Wells Fargo FX strategist Brendan McKenna told Bloomberg. “Turkish banks have all but placed capital controls in place and any time there are some adjustments to regulations they can cause some swings in the lira.”

    By “some adjustments”, he probably means that any time something unexpected happens and the capital controls fail to keep the currency pegged to its imaginary value, all hell breaks loose as it briefly did earlier today. 

    While Turkey has generally kept a very low profile in recent months, suffering from a substantial slowdown in foreign investment hitting its bond market and capital accounts, it has been hit by an escalating geopolitical conflict with Greece; as we reported over the weekend, tensions flared up over the weekend in the Mediterranean region after the government in Ankara said it was sending a ship to carry out a drilling survey in waters contested by Turkey and Greece.

  • 10 Big Fat Lies You're Being Told About The Portland Riots
    10 Big Fat Lies You’re Being Told About The Portland Riots

    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 07/27/2020 – 19:05

    Authored by Victoria Taft via PJMedia.com,

    Democrats have fully pivoted on the nightly Portland riots. They’ve gone all-in on blaming the riots on President Trump thus allying themselves with the antifa and Black Lives Matter anarchist and communist mobs. Instead of black bloc balaclavas or masks, the politicians have donned the cloak of civil libertarianism. In doing so, they make a mockery of it.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Democrats, so far as I can find, have never denounced the violent mobs, though New York Governor Andrew Cuomo once wagged a finger at George Floyd rioters while simultaneously explaining that it wasn’t really their fault because “income inequality” led to violence. Indeed, the only remonstrance issued was over people burning down black-owned businesses – their “own house” as he put it, because burning your own stuff “never makes sense.” As denunciations go, it was a rambling nothing-burger. Atlanta’s mayor voiced similar disgust with the arsonists and looters.

    In fact, mayors, governors, and prosecutors have fallen all over themselves to support the violent mobs in Seattle, New York, St. Louis, Washington, D.C., and, of course, Portland, often conflating the “mostly peaceful” protesters upset with the killing of George Floyd – remember him? – with the ones looting Louis Vuitton, tearing down statues of George Washington, and trying to burn down federal buildings.

    Seattle Mayor Jenny Durkan ceded a section of the fancy Capitol Hill neighborhood to the mob. She handed over a police precinct to the mob. Two murders, gunshot wounds, assaults, and rapes took place at her pet mob’s little “summer of love” squat. She’s never apologized.

    Minneapolis Mayor Jacob Frey gave over a police precinct to the mob. Police officers inside thought they’d die that night and if they’d stayed they would have. When rioters weren’t boosting free stuff from the Target, looters and rioters were spectating the conflagration they’d started at the precinct with a sense of satisfaction and accomplishment. The mayor later asked President Trump for money to help rebuild it. Trump said hell no.

    But this is an election year and time is short. The mobs are deployed to cause chaos and misdirection, as they were in Portland and elsewhere in the months leading up and after the 2016 presidential election. They are cracking heads and cold-cocking Trump rally-goers who dare bring a contra-narrative to one of their riots.

    Far from denouncing the violent and destructive nightly arsons and assaults, Democrats embrace the riots to denounce President Trump. They point to the mobs of concerned citizens who have been impelled, catapulted from their spot at the tattoo parlor to join the mob in the streets because how-dare-Trump-send-police-to-defend-a-federal-building that the left is obsessed with bringing down.

    It’s a real-time exercise in psy-ops. It’s gaslighting writ large. But they believe you’re dumb enough to believe it.

    Instead, follow along on these ten big lies the Left wants you to believe about the Portland riots and learn something.

    Lie 1: The Riots Are Committed by Mostly Peaceful Protesters

    Everyone knows the riots are a disgraceful dumpster fire of venom and vinegar with green lasers and IEDs thrown at cops to give them that special something. Those of us covering the Portland Professional Protester™ scene for years have seen most of this behavior before.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Portland Mayor Ted Wheeler allowed the riots to go on in a section of downtown for six weeks before the Trump administration came in to protect its own buildings and roll up the bad guys attacking them.

    Acting deputy secretary of the Department of Homeland Security, Ken Cuccinelli, says bringing weapons, gas masks and shields are “preparations for violence. Peaceful protester? I don’t think so.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Wheeler’s strategy, if you can call it that, of letting the rioters riot and ruin part of downtown, leaves Oregonians feeling unsafe, police outraged, and the rule of law in tatters. Now Wheeler says Trump’s defense of the federal buildings is somehow breaking the law. The entire Leftist monoculture has coalesced around this absurd assertion.

    So certain is Wheeler that the rioters should be viewed as misunderstood arsonists and predators that the mayor/police commissioner took an armed five-person plainclothes police detail with him on his “listening session” photo op to show everyone how safe it was during a Portland antifa and Black Lives Matter street riot.

    Over the weekend, there were multiple shootings and stabbings at these “mostly peaceful” protests, or, as the news media likes to dub them, “rowdy rioters.

    Wheeler may be a lot of things, but heroic isn’t one. He took a team of men with guns to protect him from the rowdy rioters.

    Lie 2: Tear-Gassed Mayor Says It Was a Total Surprise

    On his “listening” session at the riots last Wednesday night, Mayor Ted Wheeler stood at the fence line protecting the federal courthouse, which he’s now trying to remove because it’s in the way of a bike lane (side note: there’s only one group of people more beloved than antifa in Portland and that’s bicyclists).

    As he stood there staring intently at the IED-pocked, scorched, and graffitied building, there was an “unprovoked” gassing of the protesters. Wheeler was overcome by the fumes, his COVID-19 mask not being enough to keep out the smell. He later pronounced that the feds had no provocation for gassing the crowds—that he had seen nothing which could possibly, remotely, ever, ever cause cops to shoot tear gas canisters.

    As protest-watcher Andy Ngo pointed out, “the building had been set on fire and rioters were throwing explosives.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    It turns out that the mayor missed a few things—such as the bags of burning garbage, IEDs, assorted other fireworks, and green lasers being shot into the eyes of law enforcement. In fact, this Christian Broadcast Network reporter, who was standing near the mayor, says rioters were given several warnings to get out or they’d be pushed back with crowd-control devices – tear gas. The mayor knew this. The reporter from CBN called the mayor a “liar” for alleging that the federal police response was unprovoked. He thinks Wheeler did it for a photo op.

    Lie 3: ‘Moms’ Bravely Leave Children’s Sides to Attend Riots

    After Democrats issued the new talking points that federal cops were “Trump’s secret police,” women, some of them known antifa members, took off their black balaclavas to refashion themselves into “moms.” Somehow these individually acting, concerned mothers all knew to get a yellow shirt, riot helmet, and “hey, hey, ho, ho” chant to drive away those bad federal officers.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Ngo writes of these “moms,” “I recognize a lot of the so-called ‘moms’ as the same antifa women who dressed in black as recent as a couple days ago. They just put on a yellow shirt now for optics. Most of these people aren’t mothers & many don’t even identify as female. #PortlandRiots”

    If you hadn’t figured it out yet, it’s Portland’s version of Pallywood. These are merely actors playing a role.

    Lie 4: These Dads With Leaf Blowers Showed Up Out of Thin Air!

    Then the “dads” showed up at the riots. Of course, to get “dads” to show up with leaf blowers, which you’ll come to learn are dead-useful at a riot, you must put out a casting call – and bring your gas masks and bring your leaf blower.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The casting calls for Portland’s Professional Protesters™ have been going on forever. This one’s from Occupy Portland that occurred in 2011-12.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    A quick look at these grassroots “dads” on Twitter reveals they’ve been around – hold on a second – since July of 2020. Just in time for the riots!

    The “Dads,” who look oddly like the rioters from the night before, came with the leaf blowers to blow back at federal officers all the CS or tear gas they’ve deployed, while their “comrades” – yes, they call them “comrades,” lobbed IEDs. Another set of dads were armed with umbrellas to keep the gas out of the faces of the rioters so they could continue to ready their munitions to throw at the federal building.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    As you may have wondered, yes, Portland has a leaf blower ordinance ( Leaf Blower Regulations – 18.10.035) banning the use of them in the city after 7 p.m. But, Governor Kate Brown has COVID restrictions on large gatherings too. The duplicitous politicians have agreed that the law doesn’t apply to the Democrats’ pet protesters. Look for more shutdowns after Oregon experiences another spike in COVID cases in the next few weeks from the riots. They’ll cancel church, but not the riots.

    Lie 5: Rioters Are Patriotic, Flag-Waving American Veterans!

    You’ve heard the saying that dissent is patriotic and it is. Riots, however, are not protected speech. They necessarily conflict with other people’s rights to be left the hell alone and in peace to go about their lives.

    People watching Portland’s antifa/Black Lives Matter riots have been appalled by the violence, lawbreaking and head-cracking. The stated goal of both antifa and Black Lives Matter is the destruction of the country of which the flag is a symbol. But now, the same people who spit on,  poop on, stomp on, beat up people with, and set fire to American flags are recasting themselves as patriots.

    That’s why all of a sudden you’ve seen rioters holding American flags.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    These are people who want to burn down America. Because so many people know they want to burn down the country’s institutions, the Left has formulated another sub-group culled from Central Casting just for these riots.

    You thought the Great White Way was closed for COVID? Welcome to Portland, with its white protesters cast for their newly announced production, the “Wall of Vets,” a collection of protesters who now call themselves military veterans. Some of them may be military vets. The idea is to show that rioting to bring down the country and serving to protect this country are totally the same thing. Totally.

    “Team Joe” member, Jon Cooper, the “Draft Joe Biden for President 2016” finance chair and former chair of The Democratic Coalition, points to the veteran street theater as a moving event in a cheap attempt to whitewash antifa and BLM’s anti-Americanism.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    If you see a media outlet or politico selling this Broadway production-pap, they’ve been had and you need to re-think your news sources.

    Lie 6: Portland Antifa Says, Hey, It Ain’t Us Doing These Riots!

    Of all the whoppers, Portland’s antifa is stating explicitly that they have nothing to do with the riots in their own city and, in fact, it must be the right-wing doing this.

    “We’ve said this before, but to re-iterate: we are not organizing, leading, or otherwise behind the local protests. We are FULLY supportive, but defer to the leadership of the Black organizers who have dedicated themselves to fighting for Black liberation & against state violence.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Antifa welcomes new rioters coming to town like a host city for a convention. You could argue that this is the Democratic Party’s in-person convention. As my Facebook Friend Kathleen Worman wrote in response to a contest of sorts I’m having to come up with clever names for the riots and rioters, the Oregon woman pronounced them “Demtifa.” Another friend dubs the riots as “Commie-Con.” True that.

    Rose City Antifa writes in a tweet: “since we see a lot of new folks coming out to the local protests (welcome!), we’d like to remind everyone of the importance of good cybersecurity…”

    A later Rose City Antifa tweet vowed: “we’ve never been more prepared to fight for what we believe in and what is right.”

    Rose City Antifa is being sued by Andy Ngo for death threats and attacks and he’s asking for damages. They’ve recently been outed by James O’Keefe and Project Veritas and are most certainly under scrutiny by the feds. Consider their statement their official legal disclaimer, even as they help put together IEDs and source green lasers for rioters.

    If they’re not outright organizing it with their Lisa Fithian-like trainers around the country, they’re in it.

    Lie 7: Riot Groups Are Not Organized

    The media and Leftists, but I repeat myself, often point to the fact that federal charging documents against rioters do not include the word “antifa.” They say it’s proof the group doesn’t exist as an organization.

    As my points about the riotous “wall of ____” (insert moms, dads, vets) groups should point out, there is organization. On cue, protests to “support Portland” from Trump’s “secret police” are popping up in cities across America.

    Lights! Camera! Action! Quick! “Get down to the Justice Center” for more mayhem.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Stories abound about how “you can help” the organized riots are ubiquitous. Besides bringing your leaf blower and wearing your yellow shirt, you can bring food and water.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Antifa even has its own food cart in downtown Portland. Now that the antifa hard cider hang out “Cider Riot!” is out of business, you can help out the organized “Riot Ribs” food cart to make food for hungry rioters. Oh, and they’d like your money to buy a mobile food truck to be called “Riot Kitchen” in a Seattle expansion.

    Gee, I’m sensing a theme here.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Not organized? Getouttahere.

    Lie 8: The City Isn’t Under ‘Siege’

    Local and national press argue that only downtown Portlanders are inconvenienced by the riots – as if that’s somehow OK – and that the riots don’t affect anyone else.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Here’s another from the local Oregonian newspaper, whose reporters should know better, that said the rest of downtown is just fine. Until it’s not.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Portlanders know that mobs historically migrate from downtown to the northwest, southeast, northeast, and north sections of town. They know they’re not safe from the rabble.

    They “direct traffic,” block freewaysblock bridges, block ingress to the airport, barricade doors of police precincts, and set the building on fire and burn police union halls. People who talk about violence are prosecuted and those who commit acts of violence are not.

    This is not downtown Portland.

    Whose streets? Their streets. Whose freeways? Their freeways. That’s because the political class of like-minded “public servants” agree with them and let them do it.

    Lie 9: What Lasers?

    A few days ago federal authorities acknowledged that three police officers defending the federal courthouse may have sustained permanent damage to their eyesight because rioters shone lasers in their eyes. This is the stuff of terrorists and it’s real, as Acting Department of Homeland Security Deputy Ken Cuccinelli says.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    This was widely scoffed at. But here’s video of the “dads” at the riot providing cover for the laser operators.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Lie 10: They Want ‘Liberty’

    Antifa and their BLM brethren seek to destroy American institutions because they claim those institutions are somehow racist and oppressive.

    They want to riot, burn, loot, and command and control with impunity and they want to use their “comrades” to do it for the good of the “collective.”

    Like this: “Every city, every town, burn those precincts to the ground.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Black Lives Matter was formed after Trayvon Martin was killed by a neighborhood watch guy who fought back with a gun.

    BLM demanded that the institutional racism they alleged occurred at the local Ferguson cop shop was why Michael Brown, he of the phony “hands up, don’t shoot” big lie, was killed. Three investigations, including one by Obama Attorney General Eric Holder, showed that wasn’t true. At all.

    But BLM has soldiered on, recasting the group as being in support of “black lives,” when it’s only blacks killed in connection with a law-enforcement action that they care about.

    And, as PJMedia colleague Stacey Lennox reported, BLM has intentionally adopted a more decentralized antifa model, muted their own well-known founders, and are now a much more political organization.

    The group and antifa are connected at the hip.

    They both want to tear down law enforcement and “defund” police because of high-profile cop killings that bring in big money from Democrats’ online fundraising tool “Act Blue.” 

    The only freedom they want is freedom from the laws that make a civil society work. That means they can’t take over streets that other people use, commit violent acts against others, and tear down, burn and loot other people’s property.

    Democrats, like this “democratic strategist,” cheer them on.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    They claim to practice “empathy,” but they’re not about black people whose lives have been snuffed out by abortion, black-on-black crime, or during riots.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    They believe there’s no normal, no family, and this is “liberation.” If you don’t agree, you don’t matter and will be canceled By Any Means Necessary (BAMN). See Lies #1 and #8.

    After their enemies are vanquished and they get a few more socialists and communists like AOC in place, they’ll be in charge. That’s why these riots are taking place right before the November election.

    It’s about power—the power of the collective against the rights of the individual, which is the fundamental precept upon which this country was built.

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 27th July 2020

  • "Paralyzed By The Pandemic" – World's Largest Diamond Company Considers Restructuring
    “Paralyzed By The Pandemic” – World’s Largest Diamond Company Considers Restructuring

    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 07/27/2020 – 02:45

    De Beers Group, the world’s largest oldest diamond company, is expected to undergo a restructuring period as diamond sales collapse. 

    Bloomberg notes the company “is considering ways to restructure mines, expand in jewelry and overhaul diamond sales.” Adding that it must “rethink its entire business in an industry left paralyzed by the pandemic.” 

    There’s going to be no V-shaped recovery for the diamond industry this year. The industry has been severely damaged by the virus-induced downturn, as consumers across the world can no longer afford pricey diamonds. 

    Even before the global downturn, diamond sales were waning with De Beers. The younger generation lost interest in the whole marriage thing, as their finances, with insurmountable debts and no savings, made it near impossible to layout enough money for weddings and a diamond ring. 

    The came big bad COVID-19, led to a further collapse in consumer finances, along with a period where jewelry stores were closed around the world. This pressured De Beers, who reported $56 million in rough diamonds sales in 2Q20, down 96% from a year earlier. RBC expects the diamond company to post a $100 million loss in 1H20.

    Read: Diamond Crisis – De Beers Records Lowest Profits Since 2009

    De Beers CEO Bruce Cleaver told employees this week, in an email, that it will “narrow the gap between its revenue and costs.” He warned diamond demand would slump in the near term. 

    “Covid-19 has compounded and exacerbated difficulties that already existed in the diamond world,” Cleaver said. “These difficulties, which have inhibited our growth over the past several years, have become even more urgent to address. They require us to act now to protect the short-term health of the business while refocusing and reorienting it to realize our long-term potential.”

    Cleaver didn’t layout all the changes in the company email. Bloomberg notes the restructuring will likely result in job cuts. 

    Shown below, spot diamond prices via IDEX show prices have been slumping for more than 5-years. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The world’s largest diamond company appears to have gone bust. 

  • In Message To Turkey, France & Egypt Conduct Joint Naval Exercises In Mediterranean
    In Message To Turkey, France & Egypt Conduct Joint Naval Exercises In Mediterranean

    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 07/27/2020 – 02:00

    Via AlMasdarNews.com,

    On Saturday, the Egyptian and French naval forces carried out naval drills in the eastern Mediterranean, with the participation of the Egyptian Ghost frigate and French Ghost frigate (ACONIT).

    These joint naval drills also come at a time when Egypt, Greece, France, and Cyprus are at odds with Turkey over the latter’s intervention in Libya and their oil exploration plans in the eastern Mediterranean.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Egypt and France joint naval drills this weekend, via Egyptian Army Spokesman.

    According to the Egyptian army statement, “The training included many training activities of a professional nature focused on methods of organizing cooperation in the implementation of combat missions in the sea against hostile marine formations with the actual use of weapons in engagement with surface and air targets in addition to the implementation of confrontational battles, with the use of aircraft.”

    The statement said, “The training showed the professionalism of the crews of ships in carrying out combat missions with accuracy and high efficiency, with a focus on common coordination points between all the common elements.”

    It added that “these exercises are in the framework of supporting the pillars of joint cooperation between the Egyptian and French armed forces, and identifying the latest fighting systems and methods in a manner that contributes to honing skills and combat and operational experiences and supporting efforts of maritime security, stability and peace in the Mediterranean.”

    Meanwhile on the same day, Saturday evening, the Turkish Ministry of Defense published a video clip of its own military exercises in the eastern Mediterranean region, amid heightened tensions over the Libyan crisis.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The Ministry of Defense tweeted that “Turkish fighters carried out training exercise in the eastern Mediterranean last Thursday, July 23,” without providing further details.

    The spokesman for the Turkish presidency, Ibrahim Kalin, said earlier, that his country wants to share all natural resources in the eastern Mediterranean fairly, pointing out that Turkey will not accept letters that include a threats.

    He said that “sending Egyptian forces to Libya would be a dangerous military adventure, in addition to the support that France provides to Haftar, threatens the security of the North Atlantic Treaty Organization (NATO)… We are only here to protect our rights… We do not accept the language of threats or the threat of sanctions.

  • Let It All Burn (Or Not)
    Let It All Burn (Or Not)

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 07/26/2020 – 23:30

    Authored by Erick Erickson via TheResurgent.com,

    There is no police power in the federal constitution. The police power is left to the states. To the extent the President can send federal officers into Portland, OR, it must be to protect federal buildings and laws.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The President cannot save Portland from itself and he should not.

    I want a mask mandate, but there is no federal police power for the President to impose it. It must come from governors, who have way more expansive police powers than your average libertarian-leaning person would have you believe.

    The President does not have that power.

    But, beyond that, the people of Portland have a history of outlandish displays of protest and behavior, including nudity. The place is so bizarre there’s been an entire television show parodying Portland.

    By sending federal troops to Portland, OR, the President and federal government are allowing Portland not just escape from their own democratic choices, but also allowing them a scapegoat to take the blame.

    Portland can blame President Trump instead of the residents of the city. They can blame Washington instead of their mayor.

    At some point, we must allow people to live with their choices and make it easy for those who want to escape to actually move. If we allow Portland to fester as it wants, it will either figure out it must change, or live with its consequences.

    When people move out, the tax base collapses, and crime goes up, the people will either change their behavior or be democratically marginalized in their voting power. If life goes on as normal or more people move in to embrace what is happening, then they’ve chosen it or the problems have been exaggerated by conservatives, as they claim.

    Let the market decision by letting the actions of a free people control their fate.

    The President should withdraw from Portland immediately and let the city burn, if it will, or thrive if it will, but it is the choice of the people there.

    A President sending in a police force to a city is a dangerous precedent that will be expanded upon even though the United States Constitution lacks a general police power. A city allowed to chose its own fate is a positive precedent from which we can all draw lessons.

    Let Portland burn or not, but let it decide without intervention from Washington.

  • A Look Inside The $52 Trillion Bubble That Has "Hijacked China's Economy"
    A Look Inside The $52 Trillion Bubble That Has “Hijacked China’s Economy”

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 07/26/2020 – 23:08

    More than three years ago, we explained why “the fate of the world economy is in the hands of China’s housing bubble.” As we said at the time, “China has always been a serial bubble inflator courtesy of a closed (capital account) economy, and nearly $30 trillion in bank deposits [$40 trillion as of July 2020] which slosh from one asset class to another, be it the stock market, bitcoin, commodities, farm animals or – most often – housing. “

    Why is it so important for China to consistently reflate this bubble? The answer is simple: for China’s middle class there is no more important asset than housing: as Deutsche’s Zhiewi Zhang wrote in 2017 when discussing the macro and market consequences of the Chinese bubble, it is nothing more (or less) than “a massive wealth effect.”

    Furthermore, unlike the US, which is hyperfinancialized and the bulk of household net worth is in financial assets (less than 30% is in real estate), in China it is the opposite, and roughly three-quarters of all household worth is in real estate.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    And since a global healthy economy starts with a growing, stable and inflating Chinese economy, unless China’s housing bubble is growing at a steady, measured pace created a “wealth effect” illusion among several hundred million middle-class Chinese, we concluded three years ago that the global economy is just as reliant on China’s housing market as it is on the global – and certainly US – stock market.

    Fast forward a little over three years, when China’s housing bubble is bigger than ever, and now the WSJ has picked up on what we said three years ago, namely that China’s epic housing market is perhaps the world’s most defining bubble, and more importantly, not even the covid pandemic did anything to threaten the sanctity of this bubble.

    First, some context why China’s housing bubble currently eclipses the one in U.S. housing in the 2000s: “At the peak of the U.S. property boom, about $900 billion a year was being invested in residential real estate. In the 12 months ended in June, about $1.4 trillion was invested in Chinese housing. More was invested last month in Chinese real estate than any other month on record.”

    Some more statistics: “the total value of Chinese homes and developers’ inventory hit $52 trillion in 2019, according to Goldman Sachs, twice the size of the U.S. residential market and outstripping even the entire U.S. bond market.” China’s housing market is certainly bigger than the US stock market, and at its current growth rate will surpass the total value of all global stocks (which is currently about $85 trillion) in just a few years!

    And since just like the US stock market, China’s housing bubble is one of those special “assets’ that continue to grow with the explicit blessing of the government, Chinese houses are not allowed to suffer even a modest drop in values. Which also means home prices constantly have to keep rising, and they do just that:

    In March, 288 apartments in a new Shenzhen property development sold out online in less than eight minutes. A few days later, buyers snapped up more than 400 units in a new housing complex in Suzhou. In Shanghai, apartment resales neared a record high in April, by one estimate. One Saturday last month, nearly 9,000 people each put down a deposit of one million yuan ($141,300) to qualify to buy apartments in a Shenzhen development.

    “I barely had time for lunch on weekends in March” when the market started bouncing back, said Zhao Wenhao, a Shanghai-based agent at Lianjia, one of China’s largest real-estate brokerage firms.

    To be sure, by now China’s middle class must be aware that it is buying into a giant bubble – how has that not put paused some of the relentless euphoria? The answer is simple: Many of Lianjia’s clients worry China’s currency will depreciate in the global economic slowdown, he said, driving even more money into housing as a haven. As a result, instead of holding soon to be devalued 1s and 0s in some bank deposit account, the local population is bracing for devaluation by scrambling into real estate, in the process only assuring that the inevitable housing market crash may well come before said devaluation.

    But not just yet: and whereas some speculated that the coronavirus crash would send Chinese home prices tumbling, that never happened and instead the market’s coronavirus pause didn’t last long. Urban home prices in China were 4.9% higher in June than in the year-earlier period. Year-to-date investment is up 1.9% in the first half of the year, despite a huge drop in sales in February and cutting earnings guidance by 50% in late February.

    The unexpected resilience has been a blessing to local home developers, which plunged in February and March only to stage a dramatic recovery since.  China Evergrande, the country’s biggest home builder, even raised its sales target for the year by 23% from its January estimate, after strong sales in March.

    That said, the continued growth of China’s housing bubble simply means that the day of reckoning has merely been delayed. And while the rapid housing-market recovery is good news on one level for Beijing, the WSJ notes that it is also a reminder of behavior that has long worried the central government, which has tried repeatedly to keep property prices from getting out of control. Chinese President Xi Jinping declared in 2017 that “houses are built to be lived in, not for speculation,” which became the guiding mantra for government housing policy.

    Of course, having had virtually no declines since then, Xi’s words proved to be just a hollow as Bernanke’s CNBC interview in which he “didn’t buy the premise” that housing prices can crash. The only difference is that so far China has been able to preserve control over home prices, but its day of reckoning is also coming.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Meanwhile, since Beijing has tipped its hand that it will not temper any housing price speculation, the local population has been happy to chase home price to the upside, and after a decade of rapid home-sales growth, fueled by borrowing, China’s household leverage ratio hit a record high of 57.7% in the first quarter. It was, according to the WSJ, the biggest quarterly jump in the ratio since the first quarter of 2010.

    Indeed, as noted above, the WSJ confirms that “the central problem in China is that buyers have figured out the government doesn’t appear to be willing to let the market fall. If home prices did drop significantly, it would wipe out most citizens’ primary source of wealth and potentially trigger unrest”, something we have been saying for more than half a decade.

    That gives Chinese citizens who have enough money an incentive to keep buying because they believe property in large cities will remain the safest investment in China, regardless of the health of the broader economy.

    “Property has hijacked China’s economy, so the government wouldn’t dare to push for a plunge in housing prices, even if that’s the most effective way to deflate the bubble,” said Chen Zhiyu, who works for an American retailer and is looking to purchase a property in Shenzhen. He could as well be talking about the US stock market, which is serving a similar wealth effect function half a world away in the US.

    “You gotta follow the money,” said the 37-year-old, adding that he has raised his budget for spending on property since the coronavirus pandemic helped drive up prices. “Whenever governments start printing money, asset prices will go up. In the U.S., you have a bull stock market, but in China, only housing prices will keep surging.”

    Bingo, and for the reason why to China the housing market is as stocks are to the US, see the top chart above.

    Meanwhile as the bubble grows bigger, an ever greater portion of the economy becomes reliant on its continued expansion and viability.  Sales activity, for one, is being driven by cash-strapped developers and the local governments that sell them land. And both need to gin up revenue to pay down debts or offset other problems, and are cooking up more incentives to move properties. The bottom line: everyone is targeting higher home prices which in turn drive much of the rest of the economy.

    The problem, as China has found out the hard way on so many occasions, is that every bubble eventually bursts, and when it comes time for the housing bubble – which is now arguably even bigger than the US stock bubble, let along the US housing bubble of 2007 which was amateur hour by comparison – no one has any idea how Chinese officials can manage the problem without destabilizing the broader economy. Even if the market stays strong, it creates headaches for policy makers, who have had to hold off on more aggressive economic stimulus this year—which some analysts say is needed—partly because of fears it will inflate housing further.

    Meanwhile, the bubble is only getting worse:

    Polling conducted by the China Household Finance Survey, based in the Southwestern University of Finance and Economics in Chengdu, suggests the coronavirus pandemic has encouraged the kind of buying Beijing worries about, with demand for property rising among people who already own multiple properties, even as it has dropped among those who don’t yet own any.

    That is a telltale sign of speculative investment, according to Gan Li, a professor of economics at Texas A&M University and an expert in Chinese household finance.

    “Speculative demand is on the rise because [people] view housing as a safer asset than the stock market or overseas assets,” he said. “They think it’s guaranteed. Because of the pandemic they’re actually consuming less, and saving more. So they’ll actually have more money available to invest. That will create an even larger housing problem.”

    There are other problems too, one is that instead of actually living in them, many Chinese use local apartments as nothing more than an investment asset. Back in late 2018  we observed that for Beijing, a “nightmare scenario” was unfolding as more than 50 million apartments were vacant, about 21% of all homes in urban China.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Since then the number was only increased, and according to the WSJ which cites recent data from China Household Finance Survey, there are now 65 million empty units. Among families who owned two properties, the vacancy rate reached 39.4%, and among those that owned three or more, 48.2% were empty.

    The record number in vacant units has meant little upward pressure on rents; in fact, Chinese rental yields are below 2% in major cities like Beijing, Shanghai, Shenzhen and Chengdu, less than can be made buying Chinese government bonds. Even so, Shannon Bi, a 42-year-old English teacher, told the Journal that the pandemic has pushed her to invest in a second home in Shenzhen sooner than she planned, because she worries about inflation. “You have to invest the money somewhere, or it will only depreciate,” she said, and she is not wrong.

    * * *

    What is so worrisome to some economists is the speed at which China’s property boom – just like the US stock market rebound in the past four months – has grown so large, and its tendency to keep climbing even during times of economic stress. As recently as the 1990s, it was illegal under China’s communist system for most people to own homes.

    A State Council decision in 1998 abandoned the country’s system of employer-allocated housing, and homeownership took off. By late last year, about 96% of China’s urban households owned at least one home, according to a Chinese central bank survey released in April, far exceeding the 65% homeownership rate in the U.S. Needless to say, mortgage debt in China has absolutely exploded.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    In some ways, the boom accomplished Beijing’s goals. It has boosted economic growth and created wealth for millions of middle-class Chinese families (even if it is all dependent on nothing more than money printing and cheap credit, and like every other bubble, it will eventually crash). It also gave local governments, which must turn over a major part of income-tax revenue to the central government, additional revenue from land sales to developers.

    But the boom has taken investment dollars away from other industries competing with real-estate borrowers for bank funding. It also has saddled many families with debt. Globally, China accounted for around 57% of the $11.6 trillion increase in household borrowing over the decade through 2019, according to Bank for International Settlements data, or roughly half of all global debt created since 2005! The U.S. accounted for about 19%.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Home prices in some Chinese cities have reached levels comparable with some of the world’s most expensive urban areas. Average home prices across China reached 9.3 times average income in 2018, according to the Chinese Academy of Social Sciences, compared with 8.4 in San Francisco.

    In Tianjin, a city of 15 million southeast of Beijing, apartments in upscale areas sell for around $9,000 a square meter, or about $836 a square foot, according to real-estate services company Savills PLC. That is roughly the price an average buyer would pay in some of the most expensive parts of London, even though disposable incomes are seven times as high in London as in Tianjin.

    The bottom line is that, for better or worse, just as Americans have gone all in on stocks, urban Chinese have bet everything on their homes. And picking up on the chart that we first showed years ago, the WSJ notes that the Chinese “now have nearly 78% of their wealth tied up in residential property, versus 35% in the U.S.”

    And so, to avoid a spectacular bubble burst in Feb and March when the Chinese economy imploded due to covid, bigger developers and local governments rolled out incentives to bring buyers back. Since February, at least 26 of 32 Chinese provinces and regions have unveiled policies to boost their property markets, according to Huatai Securities, including looser down-payment requirements and subsidies for home purchases.

    “While local governments are under pressure to prevent further surges in housing prices, what scares them more is a sharp decline,” said Gao Fei, general manager at real-estate firm Centaline Group in Tianjin. They can ill afford to let the market go down. Income from land sales and related taxes on developers accounted for 52.9% of local governments’ revenue in 2019, a record high, according to Shanghai Yiju Real Estate Research Institute.

    China Evergrande, whose enormous debt gives it the largest interest bill in the world among listed nonfinancial stocks, offered discounts of 25% in February and 22% in March. Country Garden Holdings, another major developer, offered more than 17,000 new homes across China via social media with discounts of up to 50%.

    These worked: of China’s 34 largest developers, 27 reported a year-over-year increase of sales volume in May, according to data from China Real Estate Information Corporation.

    One can, of course, say that same thing for the symbiotic relationship between the US government and the stock market. The bottom line is that every regime has its own pet bubble that it will cultivate as a bubble pop could mean a civil uprising, if not revolution as hundreds of millions realize their paper wealth was just that.

    Yet the unprecedented push to preserve the bubble at all costs is now ending.

    As the WSJ notes, in a sign the central government disapproves of some of the loosening measures, in at least 12 cities, including Jinan and Guangzhou, documents detailing relaxed lending policies were removed from local governments’ official websites within days. One city in Shandong province backed off plans to provide subsidies to home buyers in mid-May, saying some parts of its plan “violate relevant requirements from senior officials.”

    More recently, incentives have been trimmed, though not entirely. At one development in Shanghai in mid-May, CK Asset Holdings offered prospective buyers a Huawei phone and vouchers of 20,000 to 40,000 yuan ($2,800 to $5,600) for future apartment-management fees.

    In other developments, no discounts were on offer, and would-be buyers had to enter lotteries to access the smaller and cheaper apartments. China Vanke Co. sold apartments in mid-May worth a total of 148 million yuan ($20.8 million) within four hours online in a live-streaming show hosted by an actress. In other developments, no discounts were on offer, and would-be buyers had to enter lotteries to access the smaller and cheaper apartments.

    Still, it doesn’t look like China actually needs all the incentives: China Vanke sold apartments in mid-May worth a total of 148 million yuan ($20.8 million) within four hours online in a live-streaming show hosted by an actress.

    Why? Because just as FOMO is pushing 10-year-old retail investors in the US stock bubble due to FOMO, so in China the fear of losing out is driving more buyers to look now, with home prices in some desirable areas up by at least 10% this year according to  Yin Haiping, who runs a property consulting firm in Shenzhen.

    Xu Xiaohua, a university lecturer in Tianjin who already owns a property there, just bought another apartment this month in Shenzhen. He paid 6.5 million yuan ($913,050) in cash in early May (they sure pay university lecturers well in China) for the 50-square-meter (538-square-foot) property after checking out about a dozen apartments within a week.

    He said he thinks most Chinese will park their wealth in real estate during downturns. “The worse China’s economy turns,” he said, “the higher property prices in places like Shenzhen will climb.”

    He is right, of course, as long as there is a greater fool willing to buy the next marginal unit at an even higher price. And in a world where central banks are now openly the buyer of last and first resort, one wonders just how much longer this farce of fake wealth built up on artificially inflated assets – housing in China, stocks in the US – can continue…

  • Spot Gold Soars To Record High As Dollar Freefall Accelerates
    Spot Gold Soars To Record High As Dollar Freefall Accelerates

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 07/26/2020 – 23:04

    Spot Gold is surging in Asian trading as the dollar is dumped.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Source: Bloomberg

    Spot Gold traded above $1930, taking out the $1921 highs from 2011…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Source: Bloomberg

    The dollar has crashed to 19 month lows…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Source: Bloomberg

    Gold appears to be more and more in favor as an alternative place to allocate wealth amid the growing pile of negative-yielding debt (and note that cryptos are starting to get a bid for the same reason)…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Source: Bloomberg

    As Jim Grant recently explained:

    The Fed wants us to believe that we should believe that there will be no inflation out of all this and to me that is a vast unknown. We have America’s fasted peacetime money-growth coexisting with the all-time 4,000-year record lows in interest rates. It’s a most curious and troubling juxtaposition there.”

    Grant said aggressive moves by governments and central banks are unwise.

    I think what we have is a monetary moment that is unprecedented and therefore calls for extreme caution and great humility on the parts of all of us.”

    So is the “monetary moment” sparking a loss of faith in fiat?

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

     

  • Rutgers University Declares Grammar 'Racist'
    Rutgers University Declares Grammar ‘Racist’

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 07/26/2020 – 22:30

    Authored by Rick Moran via PJmedia.com,

    If you’re looking for peak idiocy from academic institutions who are falling all over themselves to kowtow to the mob’s notions of “social justice,” look no further.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The English Department at Rutgers University has declared that proper use of grammar is a hidden form of racism because it disadvantages students of “multilingual, non-standard ‘academic’ English backgrounds.”

    Grammar is rather boring so the department is going to sex it up with all sorts of fascinating additions.

    Washington Free Beacon:

    The “critical grammar” approach challenges the standard academic form of the English language in favor of a more inclusive writing experience. The curriculum puts an emphasis on the variability of the English language instead of accuracy.

    “This approach challenges the familiar dogma that writing instruction should limit emphasis on grammar/sentence-level issues so as to not put students from multilingual, non-standard ‘academic’ English backgrounds at a disadvantage,” Walkowitz said. “Instead, it encourages students to develop a critical awareness of the variety of choices available to them [with] regard to micro-level issues in order to empower them and equip them to push against biases based on ‘written’ accents.”

    “Variability instead of accuracy” means incorrect usage of grammatical norms. It’s nice that someone speaks a foreign language but isn’t the whole point of teaching proper grammar is teaching foreigners the proper way to speak English?

    Yes, but it’s white and it’s male, and it’s gotta go.

    Unfortunately, Rutgers apparently missed the mark with some activists. Aside from being incomprehensibly stupid, the change is, itself, virulently racist.

    Leonydus Johnson, a speech pathologist and libertarian activist, said the school’s change makes the racist assumption that minorities cannot comprehend traditional English. Johnson called the change “insulting, patronizing, and in itself, extremely racist.”

    “The idea that expecting a student to write in grammatically correct sentences is indicative of racial bias is asinine,” Johnson told the Washington Free Beacon.

    “It’s like these people believe that being non-white is an inherent handicap or learning disability…

    That’s racism. It has become very clear to me that those who claim to be ‘anti-racist’ are often the most racist people in this country.”

    I guess it depends on how you think about the idea of “language.” You and I and the rest of the sane world sees language as a way to communicate. Writing or speaking using a common language with (mostly) agreed-upon definitions for words is the key to communicating and understanding ideas. Even abstract ideas like emotions and feelings can be communicated using commonly accepted forms of grammar.

    Grammar “greases the skids” of communication by making things easier to understand. Form and function merge seamlessly and effortlessly so that an intelligent conversation is possible.

    But “critical grammar” is so counterintuitive that we’d have to think about every word we used to avoid “bias.” That’s the price we pay for “decolonization.”

    The Rutgers English department created a Committee on Bias Awareness and Prevention in 2012. In light of Black Lives Matter protests, the school has moved past bias awareness and prevention and into a focus on “decolonization.” Walkowitz’s email talks of “decolonizing the writing center.” The department offers a specific internship titled “Decolonizing the Writing Center” to “make the writing centers more linguistically diverse.”

    When will students revolt against this nonsense? Or will they remain sheep and be led around by the nose by ignoramuses so besotted with ideology they can’t think straight?

  • "The Swamp Is In A Feeding Frenzy" – 'Tea Party' Resurgent Amid Trillion-Dollar Bailout Bills
    “The Swamp Is In A Feeding Frenzy” – ‘Tea Party’ Resurgent Amid Trillion-Dollar Bailout Bills

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 07/26/2020 – 22:00

    Tea Party conservatives are waking up to the lack of fiscal discipline by the Republican establishment over exploding deficits and another round of economic stimulus, according to The Hill

    What’s happening today is similar to the Republican backlash in 2008 when they bailed out Wall Street during the financial crash, it’s just this time, the bailouts dwarfed the ones a decade ago. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    This puts Senate Majority Leader Mitch McConnell, a Kentucky Republican, in a tight spot as he is up for reelection this fall. His state is flooded with Tea Party patriots, who have raised the alarm over the Trump administration’s reckless deficit spending. 

    “Just came from Progressive Democrat, whoops, I’m mean Republican caucus,” Senator Rand Paul, a Kentucky Republican, tweeted last week. 

    “The majority of Republicans are now no different than socialist Democrats when it comes to debt. They simply don’t care about debt and are preparing to add at least another trillion dollars in debt this month, combined with the trillions from earlier this summer,” Paul said. 

    Senator Ted Cruz, a Texas Republican, said “hell no” to critical components of McConnell’s next stimulus package. 

    This is the swamp in a feeding frenzy. Everybody’s lobbyist has their hand out, saying, ‘Look, if you’re spending trillions of dollars, I want to get some.’ And it’s not right,” Cruz said.

    GOP Senator Ron Johnson of Wisconsin, another politician who was elected during the Tea Party movement a decade ago, told The Hill that Congress shouldn’t authorize “a dime more” until “we’ve thoroughly taken a look at the $2.9 trillion we’ve already authorized” and figure out what funds have actually been spent. 

    “When we were in the minority, we were able to put a brake on Obama’s desires,” Johnson noted, adding that the Republican establishment has lost fiscal discipline in recent years. 

    Senator Rick Scott, a Florida Republican, said the pandemic “shouldn’t be used as an excuse to spend” his “state’s taxpayers’ hard-earned dollars” to bailout out other “poorly managed state budgets.”

    “As we begin looking at another spending bill, we need to know how the money already allocated has been spent. Last month, I wrote to all governors requesting details on how this taxpayer money is being spent. I’m still waiting on responses from most of them,” Scott said. 

    Ten years later, the Tea Party has failed to curtail deficit spending. Republicans, disillusioned by the “greatest economy ever,” are beginning to realize in the age of Trump they lost their ways through reckless deficit spending.  

    Read: Ron Paul: Is The (Tea) Party Over?

    President Trump, who appeared to be a deficit hawk as a candidate, and promised to “eliminate the national debt in eight years” has increased the country’s debt load by at least $6 trillion, or about 30% in his first term. 

    In May, the US added a trillion dollars to combat the virus-induced downturn. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    For context, here is total US debt since the start of the century.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Republicans are in a Catch-22 situation, one where they must pass the next trillion-dollar stimulus bill or face a crash in consumption. Passage of the bill will drive internal strife among establishment Republicans and Tea Party members. 

  • Hertz Has To Sell 182,000 Cars By 2021
    Hertz Has To Sell 182,000 Cars By 2021

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 07/26/2020 – 21:30

    Authored by Fred Smith via RoadandTrack.com,

    Two months after filing for bankruptcy protection, Hertz finally has a plan in place to attempt to stay afloat until 2021.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    To appease lenders and maintain future business, it will unload nearly 200,000 of the manufacturer’s total leased vehicles, numbering under 500,000.

    The long-awaited bulk sale of 182,521 cars will take place over the course of the rest of the year, with a deadline set for December 31st, in order to fund an agreed $650 million in other lease-related debts. The number is a step up from the 144,000-car shedding Hertz had proposed last month, but leaves the company with a large enough fleet to maintain a viable business when it emerges from bankruptcy into a world that will, hopefully, involve enough routine travel for rental cars to be a viable business enterprise.

    The deal is a direct result of a more positive used car market than the one Hertz had previously faced when it announced its filing in May. The market will allow the rental giant to recoup more of its losses than it had previously expected, which seems to have been the sticking point for lenders approving the deal.

    That same market, however, could look very different by the end of the sale period, thanks in no small part to the potential market flooding of 182,000 former rental cars hitting the market with a requirement to be sold in a specific time period.

    While no specifics were offered about which portion of the Hertz fleet will be sold, earlier sales this year have included a wide range of low mileage C7 Corvette Z06 options, as well as two of the unique-to-Hertz, 750 horsepower Camaro ZL1s.

  • Charting The Retail Devastation: Here Is The Stunning List Of US Store Closures In 2020
    Charting The Retail Devastation: Here Is The Stunning List Of US Store Closures In 2020

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 07/26/2020 – 21:00

    While the US “bricks-and-mortar” retail industry was already on its deathbed before the covid pandemic struck with stories discussing the “retail apocalypse” as far back as 2015, the events in the past few months have simply accelerated a long-overdue process that would have taken several years to conclude with mass bankruptcies of corporate zombies coupled with tens of thousands of store closures.

    And so, unlike other sectors of the US economy which have – for now – avoided to be swept by the “biblical” default wave that is sweeping across the US corporate sector, amid temporary store closures as part of shelter-in-place measures, Goldman calculates that the announcement (and completion) of permanent store closures YTD (~7,430) has already reached more than half of 2019 figures (~12,370) due to slowing/declining sales growth, leveraged balance sheets, and rising occupancy costs.

    It’s only going to get worse: according to Coresight Research, around 20,000-25,000 stores could permanently close in 2020 on COVID-19 headwinds in the US, implying an accelerated store closure schedule in the second half of the year. Further, it expects to see an increase in bankruptcy filings owing to reorganizations or difficulties with financing activities amid the current pandemic.

    Meanwhile, as some retailers are experiencing a surge in digital volumes, pure-play eCommerce companies like Amazon continue to benefit from greater access to consumer data and purchase history that enable compelling consumer experiences and also deliver efficiency and competitive benefits through advertising, product recommendations, and dynamic pricing.

    This is also why Goldman believes that eCommerce growth will accelerate over the course of the second half amid social distancing measures, record number of retail store closures, investments in fulfillment by Amazon, and increasing tech investments by traditional retailers.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Not surprisingly, with apparel & accessories continuing to record large share of store closures as shown in the charts above and below, Goldman which just upped its price target on Amazon to $3,800, believe the online retail giant will be the primary beneficiary considering this segment already sees >20% online penetration.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

  • Agricultural Warfare? People Are Receiving Mysterious Unsolicited Packages Of Seeds In The Mail From China
    Agricultural Warfare? People Are Receiving Mysterious Unsolicited Packages Of Seeds In The Mail From China

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 07/26/2020 – 20:45

    Just when you thought tensions between the U.S. and China couldn’t get any stranger in the midst of the ongoing global pandemic, Americans across the country are starting to report receiving unsolicited packages of different types of seeds that they didn’t order – and don’t know anything about – at their door. The return address on the packages is always from China. 

    The Washington State Department of Agriculture wrote about the phenomenon on their Facebook page on July 24, 2020 and said that the seeds are being shipping in packaging that identifies the contents as jewelry. 

    Similar advisories have been issued in Virginia, Utah, Kansas, Arizona and Louisiana.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    “Unsolicited seeds could be invasive, introduce diseases to local plants, or be harmful to livestock,” the post says.

    Facebook users have been adding photos in the comments section of the post sharing photographs of seeds they have received from China. “It’s not a joke. I got some the other day!!!” one user commented, stating that the package identified the contents as a “Rose flower stud earring”.  

    “Look’s like it’s all across the country,” stated an Indiana resident who also received seeds in the mail unsolicited. 

    At least 40 residents in Utah were said to have been mailed the unsolicited packages, according to the Daily Mail. The Kansas  Department of Agriculture and the Arizona Department of Agriculture also addressed the phenomenon, as did the Louisiana Department of Agriculture and Forestry, who said: 

    “Right now, we are uncertain what types of seeds are in the package. Out of caution, we are urging anyone who receives a package that was not ordered by the recipient, to please call the LDAF immediately. We need to identify the seeds to ensure they do not pose a risk to Louisiana’s agricultural industry or the environment.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    There have been similar reports from Virginia’s Department of Agriculture and Consumer Services. “The seeds have yet to be identified, but officials speculate that the seeds may be of an invasive plant species and are advising residents not to use them,” Fox News reported.

    “Taking steps to prevent their introduction is the most effective method of reducing both the risk of invasive species infestations and the cost to control and mitigate those infestations,” VDACS wrote in a press release.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Twitter is also littered with reports of people receiving these seeds:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The Washington State Department of Agriculture has advised people on its Facebook page:

    1) DO NOT plant them and if they are in sealed packaging (as in the photo below) don’t open the sealed package.

    2) This is known as agricultural smuggling. Report it to USDA and maintain the seeds and packaging until USDA instructs you what to do with the packages and seeds. They may be needed as evidence.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Anyone who has received seeds in the mail can report them to the United States Department of Agriculture by visiting their website here. The site says:

    If individuals are aware of the potential smuggling of prohibited exotic fruits, vegetables, or meat products into or through the USA, they can help APHIS by contacting the confidential Antismuggling Hotline number at 800-877-3835 or by sending an Email to SITC.Mail@aphis.usda.gov.

    USDA will make every attempt to protect the confidentiality of any information sources during an investigation within the extent of the law.

    We can’t help but wonder, given the fact that agriculture is such a large cornerstone of trade talks with China, whether or not this could be more than just “agricultural smuggling”, but perhaps agricultural warfare of sorts.

    This story is developing and we will continue to update it if more information becomes available. 

  • The Worst Year In History?
    The Worst Year In History?

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 07/26/2020 – 20:30

    Authored by Saamir Ansari via Medium.com,

    2020 has already been immortalised. It is a year that nobody will forget.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    However, when speaking of the worst year recorded in human history there are many to choose from:

    • The year 1349 saw the Black Death kill half the population of Europe.

    • In 1520 smallpox ravaged the Americas and killed between 60 and 90 per cent of the continents’ original inhabitants.

    • In 1918 the Spanish Flu led to the deaths of over 50 million people.

    • The rise of Hitler in 1933 is often claimed to be the turning point in modern history.

    However, historians are unanimous in their choice…

    The title of the worst year in history is easily held by the year 536 AD.

    Medieval historian, Michael McCormick has stated that:

    “it was the beginning of one of the worst periods to be alive, if not the worst year.”

    Science Magazine, Ann Gibbons, 2018

    The year began with an inexplicable, dense fog that stretched across the world which plunged Europe, the Middle East and parts of Asia into darkness 24 hours a day, for nearly 2 years.

    Consequently, global temperatures plummeted which resulted in the coldest decade in over 2,000 years. Famine was rampant and crops failed all across Europe, Africa and Asia. Unfortunately, 536 AD seemed to only be a prelude to further misery. This period of extreme cold and starvation caused economic disaster in Europe and in 541 A.D. an outbreak of bubonic plague further led to the death of nearly 100 million people and almost half of the Byzantine Empire.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>
    This part of the sixth century has a widely been referred to as the Dark Ages, but the true source of this darkness had previously been unknown to scholars. Recently, researchers led by McCormick and glaciologist Paul Mayewski, have discovered that a volcanic eruption in Iceland in early 536 led to incredibly large quantities of ash being spread across much of the globe, creating the fog that cast the world into darkness. This eruption was so immense that it altered the global climate and adversely affected weather patterns and crop cultivation for years to come (Antiquity).

    Labeling each new year as ‘the worst year in history’ has become something of a fad these days.

    We should look back to the year 536 A.D. and cherish how fortunate we are not to have lived in a time when the world was truly in darkness.

  • Three Reasons Why Morgan Stanley Thinks The Recovery Is Still On Track
    Three Reasons Why Morgan Stanley Thinks The Recovery Is Still On Track

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 07/26/2020 – 20:00

    One day after Goldman poured cold water on the V- or any other shaped recovery narrative, when its high-frequency, real-time indicators showed that the pace of the recovery was slowing across various consumption metrics…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    … but more notably, observed a clear contraction within the US job market and warning that “the labor market recovery is stalling due to the worsening virus situation” as “workplace activity measures have declined in the states hit hardest with virus spread and moved sideways in others since late June”…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    … on Sunday, Morgan Stanley, which in the past 4 months has emerged as the biggest cheerleader of the economy (perhaps because it feels the need to justify its bullish market take by being optimistic on the broader economy as if the two are still somehow connected), felt its was its duty to launch another full-throttled defense of the economy – something it has been doing virtually every week – and in the bank’s Sunday Start note, Morgan Stanley chief economist Chetan Ahya gives “three reasons why the recovery is still on track”, and lists the following:

    1. Unlike in March, there has been a change in calculus between the virus and economy, and policy-makers (at least those who are no part of the #resistance) are now balancing the social and economic costs brought about by lockdown measures versus the adverse implications for public health.
    2. The outlook for vaccines/treatments for COVID looks promising (although there is a risk that elevated levels of COVID-19 cases could coincide with the traditional flu season (which typically leads to hospitalizations beginning to rise from around mid-November onwards and peaking in January), meaning that there will be a greater strain on hospital capacity during that time period.
    3. Policy support remains unprecedented. As a refresher, the G4 central banks are expanding their balance sheets by 28% of GDP by end-2021 and the G4 and China economies are extending fiscal support of 17% of GDP in 2020. The Fed’s balance sheet will rise to 30% of GDP by end-2021 and the fiscal deficit in the US will rise to 24.6% of GDP in 2020, on our forecasts.

    And just in case the bulls are starting to get cold feet, below are the details from the rest of Morgan Stanley’s traditionally upbeat take on the US economy and global markets.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Three Reasons Why the Recovery Is Still on Track, by Chetan Ahya, chief economist and global head of economics at MOrgan Stanley.

    Every new economic cycle begins with considerable uncertainty. Concerns about whether we have seen the worst effects of the shock and whether there will be aftershocks or lingering effects tend to be the key causes of uncertainty during the initial recovery. This time is no different.

    But we have steadfastly held on to our forecast that the global economy will regain its pre-COVID-19 levels of output by 4Q20 (and DMs by 4Q21). Our views on the global macro outlook are underpinned by three factors – (1) the evolving COVID-19 situation, (2) the race for effective treatments and vaccines, and (3) the extent of the policy support. As we review each of them in turn, we hope to shed some light on why we think the global recovery is still on the right track.

    #1: The equation between the virus and the economy is changing

    The virus is still spreading in the US and LatAm, while new clusters of infections have emerged in Asia and Europe. For the latter group, policy-makers have been able to manage these new clusters with selective lockdowns, and aggregates for economic activity have not been affected.

    This risk of a renewed aggressive lockdown is the most acute in the US. But the equation between the virus and the economy is now changing – with policy-makers now balancing the social and economic costs brought about by lockdown measures versus the adverse implications for public health.

    Moreover, the link between new case counts, hospitalizations, and fatalities is also very different today versus the situation in March/April. Today’s cases include more of the milder or asymptomatic variant, a reflection of ramped-up testing capacity as compared to the earlier days of the outbreak where testing capacity constraints meant that only symptomatic cases were being tested. The median age of new cases is also lower, and the medical community is better prepared to deal with COVID-19 patients. Net new hospitalizations have now eased from the recent peak, easing concerns that policy-makers would have to take up strict lockdown measures.

    #2: The outlook for vaccines/treatments for COVID-19 is promising

    We have been concerned about a renewed wave of infections in the autumn ever since the beginning of the outbreak (we built this into our base case with a forecast that the pace of growth will slow, but not re-enter into sequential decline, around the turn of the year). The issue is that elevated levels of COVID-19 cases could coincide with the traditional flu season (which typically leads to hospitalizations beginning to rise from around mid-November onwards and peaking in January), meaning that there will be a greater strain on hospital capacity during that time period.

    However, we are also watching the potential mitigating factors. The additional precautions such as widespread wearing of masks may help to temper the spread of COVID-19 and the traditional flu season. There is also emerging evidence that the current flu season in the Southern Hemisphere is more subdued as compared to previous seasons.

    Moreover, treatment options are available today, with the prospect of more to come. In addition to remdesivir, our US biotechnology analysts have highlighted that there are over 20 antibodies in development, and they believe that Regeneron and Eli Lilly are likely to be first to market. They also view antibody treatments as having a high probability of success and expect details of the clinical trials to be released later this summer.

    A number of potential vaccine candidates are also entering into phase III trials. Our US biotechnology analysts expect all three companies (Moderna, Pfizer and AstraZeneca) to have a reasonable probability of success in delivering positive phase III results, with potential details released in the September-November timeframe. Manufacturing of these vaccines is already under way and each of these companies are positioned to provide 100M+ doses of vaccines by year-end. This combination of treatments and vaccines will give us another layer of defense against COVID-19.

    #3: Don’t forget about the significant support from policy stimulus

    Policy support is crucial during the initial stages and, this time around, the scale of stimulus has been unprecedented. As a refresher, the G4 central banks are expanding their balance sheets by 28% of GDP by end-2021 and the G4 and China economies are extending fiscal support of 17% of GDP in 2020. The Fed’s balance sheet will rise to 30% of GDP by end-2021 and the fiscal deficit in the US will rise to 24.6% of GDP in 2020, on our forecasts.

    The fact that this is an exogenous shock (i.e., nobody was at fault for causing the recession) has meant that policy-makers have acted quickly. Just this week, we received a welcome upside surprise with the earlier than expected approval of the European recovery fund. In the US, negotiations are ongoing over CARES II and we expect an additional US$1 trillion fiscal package, with the risks skewed towards a bigger package of over US$1.5 trillion (which will take the deficit over 27% of GDP – a post-1943 high). Moreover, considering the outsized impact that the recession has had on lower-income households, central banks and policy-makers have committed to make the recovery as robust as possible, which in turn means that the overall monetary and fiscal policy stance will remain accommodative for some time.

    In sum, our big-picture view is that the global economy will continue to make up lost ground, attaining pre-COVID-19 output levels by 4Q20 (DMs by 4Q21). In fact, the recent run of upside surprises in the data in the US and China makes us believe that this might even pan out a bit faster than we originally envisaged. As these economies have already made up a lot of lost ground, they will naturally see a moderate pace of improvement from here and we would also expect to see some month-to-month gyrations in the data. The baton of growth leadership will be passed on to Europe next as it begins to experience catch-up rates of growth.

  • GOP Reach Agreement On COVID-19 Relief; $600 Unemployment Boost Becomes 70% 'Wage Replacement'; Pelosi Pops Fuse
    GOP Reach Agreement On COVID-19 Relief; $600 Unemployment Boost Becomes 70% ‘Wage Replacement’; Pelosi Pops Fuse

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 07/26/2020 – 19:44

    With the Trump Treasury sitting on $1.8 trillion and three months to spend it, the White House and Senate Republicans are set to introduce a $1 trillion spending bill on Monday which would be released in stages – angering Democrats who are pushing for an immediate, $3 trillion shotgun blast of stimulus.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Speaking with ABC‘s “This Week,” White House Chief of Staff Mark Meadows said “I see us being able to provide unemployment insurance, maybe a retention credit, to keep people from being displaced or brought back into the workplace, helping with our schools,” adding “we can negotiate on the rest of the bill in the weeks to come.

    The Trump administration opposes an extension of a $600-a-week enhanced unemployment payment that expired this month, Mnuchin and Meadows said. Instead, White House officials favor a plan to reimburse an individual’s lost wages or salary by up to 70%, said Mnuchin and Meadows. –Newsday

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    House Speaker Nancy Pelosi (D-CA) popped a fuse at the GOP proposal, blaming Republicans for waiting too long to negotiate for more relief after House Democrats passed a fifth, $3 trillion relief bill which would have included immediate aid to state and local governments, expanded testing and contact tracing for COVID-19.

    Appearing on CBS’s “Face the Nation,” Pelosi said that Republicans are “in disarray and that delay is causing suffering for America’s families. So we have been ready for two months and 10 days. I’ve been here all weekend hoping they had something to give us.”

    Treasury Secretary Steven Mnuchin, meanwhile, says the White House is “prepared to act quickly.”

    We bet they are.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Mnuchin added that unemployment benefits would be extended, while schools and universities would receive protection against “frivolous” lawsuits – part of overall GOP support for protections that would also include corporations.

    “Within the trillion-dollar package, there’s certain things that have time frames that are a bigger priority, so we could look at doing an entire deal, we could also look at doing parts,” said Mnuchin, adding that he would push for a “technical fix” to unemployment insurance after many have criticized the $600 weekly benefit as being too high, and a disincentive to searching for a job.

    The fix would ensure “that people don’t get paid more to stay home than they do to work, and we can move very quickly with the Democrats on these issues,” Mnuchin said.

    He added: “The fair thing is to replace wages, and it just wouldn’t be fair to use taxpayer dollars to pay more people to sit home than they would get working and get a job.”

    Pelosi said last week that Democrats would not accept a “piecemeal” approach to a deal. 

    The Speaker on Sunday said it’s easier for the government to provide a $600 payment to the unemployed than to calculate what 70% of each worker’s salary was. –Newsday

    “The reason we had $600 was its simplicity,” said Pelosi, adding “And figuring out 70% of somebody’s wages. People don’t all make a salary … They make wages and they sometimes have it vary. So why don’t we just keep it simple?

  • Moving The COVID Goalposts: Will The Next Step Be Masks To Protect From The Flu & Common Cold?
    Moving The COVID Goalposts: Will The Next Step Be Masks To Protect From The Flu & Common Cold?

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 07/26/2020 – 19:30

    Authored by Paula Bolyard via PJMedia.com,

    How did we go from “flatten the COVID-19 curve” to “shut up and wear the mask – or else” in just a few short months? Back in March, we were told that lockdowns were necessary to ensure COVID-19 cases would not overwhelm hospitals and, in particular, intensive-care units. In most parts of the country, hospitals were not only not overwhelmed, many were forced to lay off nurses and other employees because elective procedures were put on hold – a move that likely cost lives as people postponed health critical screenings and avoided going to the hospital when they had chest pains for fear of catching COVID-19.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    At the beginning of the pandemic, we were assured that once hospitals had things under control we could go back to our regularly scheduled lives, with the understanding that as things reopened and testing increased there would be a spike in the number of cases. Now it seems the goalposts are moving again and we’re being sent into further lockdown —in some cases more stringent lockdowns than before — by governors and other mini-tyrants who are in panic mode because people are catching a contagious (but not very deadly for most people) disease that is, you know, contagious.

    Case in point, Ohio Gov. Mike DeWine, who on Wednesday announced a statewide mask order that came with a threat: We’d all better obey him if we want schools to open in the fall.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Nice school you’ve got there. It would be a shame if anything happened to it.

    But while the number of diagnosed cases of COVID-19 has risen in Ohio over the last month, hospital admissions haven’t kept up and the number of deaths has plummeted:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    (Ohio Dept. of Health, July 22, 2020)

    You have to dig around the Ohio Dept. of Health website to find these numbers. When you land on the site you’re greeted with a graph showing the cumulative number of deaths and hospitalizations, which make it appear there’s been a huge spike, when in fact it’s showing the growth of the cumulative total over time:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    (Ohio Dept. of Health, July 22, 2020)

    A Google search turned up no stories about hospitals being overwhelmed or nearing ICU capacity in Ohio, yet DeWine, who is the Democrats’ favorite Republican these days, went ahead with his mask order — the first statewide mask order in Ohio since the pandemic began. To hear DeWine talk (and tweet), you’d think hospitals are overwhelmed with COVID patients (who are probably lying on filthy FEMA cots) and we are all in very grave danger:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Meanwhile, in Wayne County, where I’m blessed to live, it doesn’t feel like we’re in grave danger—and the numbers bear that out:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    (Ohio Dept. of Health, July 22, 2020)

    That’s 55 total hospitalizations since the pandemic began. Last week there were two COVID hospitalizations recorded and no deaths. This despite the fact that nearly everything in the county reopened in mid-May and very few people are wearing masks. To date, we’ve had a grand total of 398 cases of COVID-19 and 59 deaths (most of them in nursing homes) out of a population of 117,710. Yet DeWine’s draconian new OMG-hair-on-fire statewide mask order is being forced on us and we’ll all have to wear them while singing in church on Sunday and smiling at babies in the park.

    Look, I’m not denying COVID-19 is a serious and sometimes deadly illness. It is, and many families are grieving the loss of loved ones who’ve died of it. And many families are grieving the loss of loved ones from the flu, from auto accidents, and from cancer. Death catches up to all of us eventually.

    I’m also not denying that masks can slow down the spread of disease. They can. But what is the goal at this point? Are we to wear masks until COVID is completely eradicated in the U.S.? Until we have zero cases? And once COVID is eradicated (it won’t be, but stick with me here), shouldn’t we continue to wear them until the flu is eradicated? And the common cold? Rotavirus? RSV? We’re being told that if we love our neighbors (and, by the way, you’re not a real Christian if you don’t’ want to wear a mask) we should be happy to wear a mask to protect them from COVID-19. If that’s the case, we’re going to have to continue to wear them until all contagions have been purged from the face of the earth—in other words, forever.

    There’s risk inherent in living life. Each day we calculate the potential risk and make decisions about what we’ll do and where we’ll go. Most of us climb into a car every day and buckle up knowing that there are 1.25 million deaths from car crashes each year and our morning commute could be our last. Some choose not to drive because the risk is too high. Others drive faster than the speed limit, making the calculus that the benefits of getting to where they’re going faster outweigh the risks.

    Decisions individuals make about whether to wear a mask or stay home when there are contagions floating around are no different. Unfortunately, high on their own power, politicians like DeWine are gleefully soberly making those decisions for us. And now that they’ve done it with COVID-19, what’s to stop them from issuing other, more onerous, orders or locking us down every year during flu season or using health department orders to confiscating our firearms because gun violence is on the rise and PUBLIC HEALTH CRISIS!!!

    That’s what worries me most about these orders, many of which have, thank goodness, already been ruled unconstitutional. There’s a growing sense that this is the new normal – in fact, many of these mayors and governors have said as much. If that’s the case, we can kiss our liberties goodbye.

  • "Be Prepared & Godspeed" – Hurricane Douglas Closes In On Hawaii 
    “Be Prepared & Godspeed” – Hurricane Douglas Closes In On Hawaii 

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 07/26/2020 – 19:00

    Hurricane Hanna was downgraded to a tropical storm on Sunday morning after making landfall Saturday evening in south Texas. Now we will shift our attention to Pacific Hurricane Douglas, bearing down on the Hawaiian islands Sunday afternoon. 

    Douglas is a Category 1 storm about 90 miles East of Kahului, Hawaii. The system is moving west-northwest at around 16mph. It is expected to pass near, or over, the islands from Maui to Kauai on Sunday through Monday. Maximum winds are near 90mph with gusts just over 100mph.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The County of Maui is expected to blare warning sirens for the hurricane on Sunday to alert residents to shelter in place. The main threats of the storm are dangerous surf, high winds, and storm surge. 

    “A hurricane warning has been issued for Maui County, so we’re strongly urging all residents to shelter in place today due to Hurricane Douglas,” Mayor Victorino said. “Mahalo to our first responders for keeping us all safe during this storm. Make sure you keep listening to your radio and watching the news for updates. We are Maui Strong, and we will get through this together.”

    Hurricane conditions are expected for portions of Maui county Sunday, and Kauai and Niihau tonight. Tropical storm conditions will be seen on the Big Island. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    One Twitter user said, “Prepare for a direct hit from #HurricaneDouglas on Oahu tonight 8:00 pm. This is from Sunday 5 AM National Weather Service Advisory of Central Pacific Hurricane Center on Hurricane Douglas: Maximum sustained wind 90 mph. Hurricane in warm Hawaii waters now. Be Prepared & Godspeed.” 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Emergency warnings are being sent to residents’ phones. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Weather radar shows Douglas is approaching Hawaii. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    CNN said if Douglas makes landfall it would the third known hurricane to directly strike the islands. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Here are spaghetti models of where Douglas could be headed. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    As for the tropics this weekend, well, it has been very busy.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    We’ll be updating readers on tropical developments next week.

    • Here's Why JPMorgan Expects The Gold Surge To Continue
      Here’s Why JPMorgan Expects The Gold Surge To Continue

      Tyler Durden

      Sun, 07/26/2020 – 18:35

      Helped by a sharply weaker dollar in the past month, and a collapse in real 10Y yields to all time negative lows of -0.93%…

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      … the price of gold made a new all time closing high surpassing $1900 on Friday with the December contract (where the most open futures interest can now be found) hitting an all time high, and gold has already jumped out of the gate with futures reopening on Sunday…

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      … with silver similarly spiking.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      According to JPMorgan’s Nikolas Panigirtzoglou, retail investors appear to have been mostly behind the recent rally (although the Robinhood army has yet to fully engage), and indeed the buying of physical gold ETFs, a major vehicle used by retail investors, rose steeply in recent weeks, making this year already the strongest on record with still five months remaining. This is shown in the chart below which shows the annual flow into physical gold ETF in metric tonnes.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      As a result of this year’s inflow, the stock of gold in ETFs has reached a record high of close to 110 million ounce far higher than its previous high seen in 2012.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      This also means that retail investors are becoming more overweight gold and are approaching the 2012 highs. This in turn is shown in the next chart which shows the ratio of the outstanding amount of gold ETFs in dollar terms divided by the dollar value of equity and bond funds worldwide.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      This ratio, which can be considered as proxy for the gold allocation of retail investors, is only .03% away from its peak of 0.5% seen in 2012. It remains to be seen whether this previous high gold allocation of 2012 will be breached or not in the current conjuncture. At the moment the chart above implies further room for the gold rally to continue.

      Retail investors aside, what about tactical institutional investors such as hedge funds? To gauge the exposure of speculative institutional investors such as hedge funds, JPMorgan looks at the spec position on gold futures reported by CFTC every week. This is shown in the final chart which shows that the spec position in gold futures is some way from its Feb peak, also leaving quite a bit of room for further rally.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      JPMorgan’s conclusion: “In all, whether we look at retail investors’ gold allocations or the spec positions on gold futures by hedge funds, we see further room for the gold rally to continue.”  And judging by the spike in precious metals in Sunday’s premarket, traders agree.

    • Texas' COVID-19 Death Toll Tops 5,000 As New Cases Slide To 2-Week Low: Live Updates
      Texas’ COVID-19 Death Toll Tops 5,000 As New Cases Slide To 2-Week Low: Live Updates

      Tyler Durden

      Sun, 07/26/2020 – 18:13

      Summary:

      • Texas passes 5,000 deaths, new cases lowest since July 13
      • California reported 8,259 new cases
      • Scott Gottlieb says pandemic starting to slow in some parts of the Sun Belt
      • Arizona reports latest COVID numbers
      • Florida passes New York, now in 2nd place
      • Fla reports another 9,300 new cases
      • Spain assures world new outbreak ‘under control’
      • Countries impose travel restrictions on Spain due to worsening outbreak in Catalonia
      • COVID-19 cases pull back after hitting daily records

      * * *

      Update (1800ET): Texas numbers were the rare silver lining in another day of slightly less dismal numbers across the Sun Belt, and increasingly, in the deep south as well.

      Texas reported just 5,810 new cases on Sunday, a sharp drop from the prior day and the state’s lowest daily total since July 13 (about 2 weeks ago),. That brought the Lone Star State’s tally to 381,656.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      But the bigger milestone on Sunday came from the “deaths” column, when the state reported another 153 fatalities, pushing Texas’s death toll north of 5,000 to 5,038.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      The state’s positivity rate has increased slightly to 13.76%.

      * * *

      Update (1450ET): California reported 8,259 new cases on Sunday, as the pace appeared to slow across the state, even as worries about a potential return to lockdown simmer.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Sunday’s number (reported with a 24-hour delay) came in below both the 14-day average of 9,421 and the 10,666 from the prior day The statewide total climbed to 453,659 confirmed cases. The number of fatalities increased by 79, which was below the 14-day daily average of 98 and also below the 151 reported the previous day. A total of 8,416 people have died.

      As cases continue to slow in certain parts of the Sun Belt, former FDA Commissioner Scott Gottlieb said he is seeing “unmistakable signs” that the pandemic is slowing in Texas and Arizona, though he is less certain about California and Florida. This as one Democratic lawmaker called for Los Angeles County to restore a stay-at-home order.

      US cases rose by 65,965 in the latest daily count, a 1.6% increase that’s lower than the 1.8% average over the prior seven days. Deaths increased by 921, breaking a four-day streak of more than 1,000 deaths per day.

      * * *

      Update (1413ET): Arizona reported another 1,973 cases, bringing its total to 162,014.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      ICU capacity has ticked lower to 86%.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      * * *

      Update (1350ET): One day after Florida blew past New York in the national rankings, the state reported a slight decline in single-day cases, with 9,338 reported over the past 24 hours, according to the Florida Department of Health.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Several data sources reported that Florida’s numbers pushed it past New York in the rankings (though we reported on Friday that the Sunshine State had already overtaken the Empire State). Florida became the second state after California to pass New York in the national rankings.

      The top three states, according to Reuters data.

      • California – 423,855
      • Florida –  423,855
      • New York – 415,827

      Keep in mind that totals vary from source to source.

      Still, New York has recorded by far the most deaths of any US state, with more than 32,000. Florida has fewer than 6,000 cases. On average, Florida has added more than 10,000 cases a day in July while California has been adding 8,300 cases a day and New York has been adding 700 cases.

      Meanwhile, New York Gov Andrew Cuomo said total hospitalizations fell by 637.

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      Even though New York has gotten the virus under control, the state still has most businesses locked down.

      * * *

      As the UK, France, Norway and a handful of other European countries impose mandatory quarantines on travelers visiting from Spain – or warning their citizens to avoid travel to Catalonia, the epicenter of the outbreak – anxieties are rising as the outbreak in Barcelona and the surrounding suburbs, including the village of Lleida, and seven nearby towns, intensifies.

      A little over a week ago, Catalan authorities imposed a lockdown affecting 160,000 people in and around Lleida, a swath of suburban Barcelona. Since then, they’ve advised people in the restive region of 7.5 million to stay home and observe social distancing practices with assiduous dedication.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      The resurgence is the most glaring evidence yet that the Spanish government’s attempt to salvage at least some of the peak travel season has blown up in the country’s face. It further illustrates just how complicated combating the virus has become: with some authorities warning that finding a vaccine could take two years or more, the quest for a ‘sustainable’ and reasonably safe virus response that doesn’t destroy the lives of millions of Americans has become fraught with political considerations.

      Spain’s health ministry reported 920+ new cases on both Thursday and Friday, the highest numbers since early May, when the government was just beginning the process of unwinding its strict lockdown, which was lauded as one of the most intense in Europe. Authorities in Catalonia have closed bars and nightclubs as fears of a second wave intensify.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      The 4th highest death toll in Europe was recorded in Spain, with roughly 28k deaths.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Despite all the tough talk from Spain’s neighbors, the tourism industry’s insistence that the border between France and Catalonia remain open, though French PM Jean Castex has said he’s negotiating with Spain to limit the number of such crossings. The UK has added Spain to its “unsafe” list, right alongside the US. But across the Europe, the tourism industry is hurting, and small concessions are still being made.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      On Sunday, the Spanish Foreign Ministry advised that the country’s coronavirus epidemic was “under control”, despite the spate of travel advisories adopted by several of Spain’s European neighbors.

      Hospitals are coping well with the increase in infections and more than half of new cases are asymptomatic, the ministry said.

      With lockdown measures being reimposed, outbreaks in Catalonia and Aragon should soon be brought under control, they said, according to Reuters.

      Globally, the world saw a pullback in newly confirmed COVID-19 cases from the record numbers seen just a day prior, as the world reported 257,789 new cases over the last 24 hours…

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      …bringing the global total to 16,292,002, according to Worldometer.

    • Some Colleges Will Require Students To Take COVID-19 Test Twice A Week
      Some Colleges Will Require Students To Take COVID-19 Test Twice A Week

      Tyler Durden

      Sun, 07/26/2020 – 18:10

      Colleges and universities across the US are planning to roll out strict COVID-19 testing measures at their campuses for those starting back this Fall. 

      In some instances, like Cornell University in New York or Baylor in Waco, all students, faculty, and staff will be required to test negative before being admitted on campus. 

      Even more extreme measures are being taken by Colby College in Maine. The Associated Press reports testing will be a “routine part of campus life”. Students will be nasal swabbed twice a week throughout at least the Fall. 

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      University of Washington on campus last March. Getty Images

      Perhaps more and more students must be thinking: time for a gap year

      All students will be required to provide a nasal swab every other day for two weeks, and then twice a week after that. All told, the college says it will provide 85,000 tests, nearly as many as the entire state of Maine has since the pandemic started. — AP

      Currently it appears that most schools with a testing regimen in place, which they say is a necessity to prevent being forced to go to online only classes (Harvard recently announced all undergraduate classes will be conducted online, with only 40% of students invited back to campus), will only screen students once arrived, with further tests reserved only for those students showing symptoms. 

      Texas A&M University, for example, will use its some 15,000 tests only for those who are known to have been exposed or who are showing symptoms. Still, there’s a raging debate within the health and scientific community over testing approach and strategy, as the AP summarizes:

      At Cornell University, a research team recently found that students would need to be tested every seven days to keep infections down. A separate study at Yale University and Harvard Medical School suggested that all students should be tested every two or three days. It found that testing only once a week could lead to thousands of infections over a semester.

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      In the most common form of the test, it requires a no doubt deeply unpleasant swab deep inside a person’s nasal cavity (sometimes multiple swabs are done). 

      So it’s uncomfortable at best, and likely terrifying for some at worst. “It’s awful… I wish there was a better way to do it,” one health-care worker previously commented when widespread testing first rolled out in the US months ago.

      However, there are high hopes that experimental and less invasive, and perhaps faster, saliva tests could be utilized, also amid a national back log of lab processing nationwide. 

      All this is no doubt going to give many students and their families serious pause considering they’re about to drop perhaps $30K to $40K or $50K total in tuition, dorm and campus costs for the year while being forced to get a nasal swab possibly up to twice a week.

      That gap year consideration might be looking very attractive right about now, also considering the possibility that a potential outbreak on campus could take the whole school straight back to a remote learning format at any time.  

    • Wilds: Are Predictions Of The Dollar's Demise Premature?
      Wilds: Are Predictions Of The Dollar’s Demise Premature?

      Tyler Durden

      Sun, 07/26/2020 – 17:45

      Authored by Bruce Wilds via Advancing Time blog,

      Predictions of the dollar’s demise are likely premature and overblown. This post is in response to the rising interest in both precious metals and cryptocurrencies. Several factors are driving this trend. One is the idea governments have targeted cash and wish to move us towards a “cashless” society where they control our every move. Another is rooted in the idea inflation is about to raise its ugly head as currencies are debased.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      I contend that for several years currencies have been trading in a hyper-manipulated state. It should be noted that fiat money is often sheltered from the storm of volatility by both politics and because it exists in a rather closed system. Wealth is contained within this system of fiat money by laws and rules that discourage freedom of movement. It is the coordinated collusion of the major central banks that have allowed this charade to exist. The fact it has not been recognized or acknowledged does not alter or guarantee the system will continue. The failure or major repricing of any of the world’s four major reserve currencies will destroy the myth that major currencies are immune to the fate that has haunted fiat money throughout history. When the nations granting these currencies prove unable to control their budgets history shows their currency is destroyed and crushed under the weight of debt.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Central Bank Balances Have Exploded

      One thing the global economy doesn’t need with all the uncertainty that is currently floating around is unstable currency markets. When you consider just how destabilizing currency swings can be it is easy to see how a strong dollar could obliterate the global economy. It should not be a surprise in our current situation that behind the curtain central bankers could be busy manipulating currencies so they trade in a narrow range that will not rock the boat.

      Over the years countries have become very adept at coordinating economic policy, currency swaps are only one of the tools they use, this has now even extended to investing in stocks. When the dollar began to soar back in late 2014, fear began to rise and concerns grew about the stress it was causing in countries that owed a great deal of debt that would have to be paid back in dollars rather than their own currency. This has caused Fed Chairman Powell to attempt navigating a course that doesn’t cause the dollar to strengthen and devastate emerging markets. By doing so the Fed has created a situation that allows the dollar to be used as a global prop.

      As far as the idea that China and its cohorts are tanking the dollar because by reducing their holdings of U.S. Treasuries in order to support the yuan, their ability to carry out such a scheme is questionable. We must remember the world currency market is a complicated place full of paths that fall away or come back on themselves and many of the tools used are like a double-edged sword that cut both ways. In the case of China, capital is sneaking and flowing out of the country faster than the government can create new ways to bolster the currency. Sadly for them, it is flowing into America strengthening the dollar even more. Adding to China’s woes is that as their currency falls they will hear more calls from Trump supporters to place duties and tariffs on their exports to America in an effort to level the playing field and reduce the trade deficit.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Currency Swaps Creates Illusion Of Stability

      Refrain from calling me Captain Obvious when saying that currencies are trading in a false paradigm and investors should get ready for a rude awakening when currency values shift. A dam has been built to protect market stability but pressure is building and when it breaks it will wreak major damage. Part of this is constructed upon the fallacy we have been given and accepted that a major currency cannot fail or collapse. This will only become more apparent as concern over the future of both the yen and the euro become more of an issue. Both the yen and the euro have major problems going forward and while people point to the fact that behind the dollar America stands with a rapidly growing national debt it is nothing compared to the issues Japan and the Euro-zone face.

      The different growth paths are a symptom of a general problem that has haunted currency unions for centuries. Competitiveness and productivity develop at a different pace in different countries. Over time, this leads to large imbalances in growth and a shifting of wealth among the members of a currency union. When the dollar union of the U.S. threatened to fall apart during the Great Depression because of the different economic conditions and unequal potential apparent between states, the federal government found it necessary to enact federal income transfers from prosperous states to aid ailing ones. The federal budget rapidly increased and this practice of income transfers from one state to another to bind the states together as a union became permanently embedded in the American system.

      While in the United States a no-bailout policy of crisis-hit states that had been enacted decades ago remains, our “inter-system wealth transfers” has contributed that “special something” that the Euro-zone completely lacks. Inequality has a way of growing and must be addressed early, After a certain point, it becomes too late to implement such a system that transfers wealth from the most prosperous to the most needy because some people feel cheated and others resentful. The bigger a debt problem and inequality is allowed to grow the more people and institutions suffer when they become the victims of a default. Greece has fallen and continues to suffer the consequences of this while much bigger countries like Italy and Spain are teetering on the brink.

      During the last several years the question of how to exit the Euro-zone monetary union and the euro has become an important economic issue. Uncertainty and fear relating to its costs tend to discourage political leaders from taking the risk and decisive steps towards an exit but if one or more sizeable countries bolt from the shelter of the euro or the Euro-zone the currency could quickly unravel. A major cause of the Euro-zone problem is growing inequality among its members exacerbated by the lack of system-wide bank protection which causes money and wealth to flee the weaker countries and their failing banks. Japan faces an entirely different problem while national debt is an issue for the central banks that issue both currencies. Japan’s debt is much larger and the country faces a demographic crisis that leaves it forced to support a population comprised of citizens far too old to work.

      These problems give credence to the possibility that both the euro and the yen will fail at some point and if they do it is very likely that in our modern era, where wealth leaps across borders at the push of a button, their death will be fast, and swift. Like many Americans, I have railed against our growing debt and questioned whether it would destroy the dollar, however, when looking at the miserable alternative currencies before us the dollar is without a doubt king. We must not underestimate the advantage the dollar has as the world’s reserve currency or the size of debt floating across the globe comprised of dollar based-agreements. If the dollar proves victorious in the currency wars and is indeed the last major currency standing the people of America will reap the benefits of a game well played or just plain luck.

      *  *  *

      If you have read the above article in its entirety I urge you to not nitpick or respond with a knee-jerk reaction. To say this is a complex issue is an understatement and I would be interested in your thoughts. I recognize those interested in pursuing a New World Order will gladly throw us under the bus for fun and profit. Still, shifting currency values are a big deal.

    Digest powered by RSS Digest

    Today’s News 26th July 2020

    • Suspect In Custody After Fatal Shooting At Austin BLM Protest
      Suspect In Custody After Fatal Shooting At Austin BLM Protest

      Tyler Durden

      Sun, 07/26/2020 – 01:09

      According to Axios, Austin police have detained a suspect in the shooting.

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      *  *  *

      A protester in downtown Austin is dead following a Saturday night shooting, according to local station KXAN.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      The incident, filmed by journalist Hiram Gilberto and broadcast via Facebook Live, shows BLM protesters marching into an intersection at Congress Avenue and East 6th Street just after 10 p.m. when some type of altercation occurs before several shots can be heard in quick succession.

      A woman who appears to be an acquaintance of the deceased protester, who she identified as Garrett – the husband and sole caretaker of a quadriplegic woman named Whitney. The woman says Garrett was on his 50th day of protesting.

      “A car drove up, and he shot Garrett,” she says, through tears.

      Austin-Travis County EMS said they responded to an incident near East 6th Street and Congress Avenue around 9:52 p.m. According to ACTEMS officials, the call initially came in as a shooting with multiple victims. According to KXAN, Austin PD is expected to give a press conference Saturday night.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      (KXAN Photo: Tim Holcomb)

      (h/t Gateway Pundit)

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    • Has China's Military Deeply Infiltrated US Medical Research?
      Has China's Military Deeply Infiltrated US Medical Research?

      Tyler Durden

      Sat, 07/25/2020 – 23:50

      Submitted by Lawrence Sellin, Ph.D. is a retired U.S. Army Reserve colonel, who previously worked at the U.S. Army Medical Research Institute of Infectious Diseases and conducted basic and clinical research in the pharmaceutical industry. He is a member of the Citizens Commission on National Security.

      It is a widely accepted fact that China has stolen U.S. intellectual property worth billions of dollars.

      The U.S. government recently ordered the closure of the Chinese consulate in Houston, Texas, which Senator Marco Rubio (R-FL) described as a “central node of the Communist Party’s vast network of spies & influence operations in the United States.”

      At virtually the same time, the U.S. Department of Justice indicted two Chinese nationals for seeking to steal COVID-19 vaccine research and hacking hundreds of companies in the United States and abroad, including defense contractors.

      Now, Juan Tang, 37, who had been a visiting cancer researcher at the University of California, Davis, School of Medicine for several months, has been arrested by the FBI  after hiding in the Chinese consulate in San Francisco.

      She is one of four Chinese researchers charged by federal authorities in recent days with lying about their background to gain entrance into the United States.

      A federal criminal complaint filed in court in Sacramento charges Juan Tang with lying about her connections to the Chinese military when she applied for a nonimmigrant visa on Oct. 28, 2019.

      The FBI criminal complaint shows Juan Tang in Chinese military uniforms and her scientific affiliations are listed as the National Translational Science Center for Molecular Medicine & Department of Cell Biology, The Fourth Military Medical University, Xi’an 710032, China.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      According to Andy Fell, a spokesman for the University of California, Davis, Juan Tang was a visiting researcher in the School of Medicine’s Department of Radiation Oncology. Her research was funded by the Chinese Scholarship Council, “a study-based exchange program affiliated with the China’s Ministry of Education and Xijing Hospital in China.”

      Yes, but why the University of California, Davis?

      It may be because Jian-Jian Li, who received his M.D. degree in 1984 from China’s Fourth Military Medical University in Xi’an, is a professor in the Department of Radiation Oncology at the University of California, Davis School of Medicine and, like Juan Tang’s position in China’s National Translational Science Center for Molecular Medicine, Dr. Li is Director of Translational Research at the University of California, Davis.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Dr. Li received a Ph.D. in 1994 from the Department of Radiation and Free Radical Biology, University of Iowa and was trained at the National Cancer Institute of the National Institutes of Health from 1995 to 1998.

      Over many years, Dr. Li has maintained extensive collaboration with scientists in China, some of whom work at the Fourth Military Medical University.

      It seems highly unlikely that Dr. Li did not know of Juan Tang’s affiliation with China’s Fourth Military Medical University.

      The arrests of the four Chinese nationals mentioned in this article represent only a tiny proportion of the Chinese students, postdoctoral researchers and full-time medical scientists, many of whom are supported by U.S. taxpayer dollars, and may be actively assisting China’s military obtain U.S. secrets and proprietary information, medical research being the softest of the soft espionage targets.

      The time is long past for a comprehensive investigation of the medical research exchange programs between the U.S. and China.

    • Over 40% Of US Adults Are Susceptible To Severe COVID-19
      Over 40% Of US Adults Are Susceptible To Severe COVID-19

      Tyler Durden

      Sat, 07/25/2020 – 23:20

      Several studies have found that the risk of contracting severe Covid-19 that can result in hospitalization, ICU admission, mechanical ventilation or death increases with age as well as the presence of underlying health conditions.

      In the United States, the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC) recently released a study showing that a considerable share of the American population has some form of underlying health issue, which, as Statista’s Niall McCarthy details below, places them at risk from severe forms of the virus. The study’s findings are based on the 2018 Behavioural Risk Factor Surveillance System (BRFSS) and U.S. Census population data and it determined that 40.7 percent of U.S. adults (aged 18 and over) have a pre-existing health condition.

      Infographic: Over 40% Of U.S. Adults Are Susceptible to Severe Covid-19 | Statista

      You will find more infographics at Statista

      The most prevalent condition in the study is obesity, affecting just over 30 percent of Americans and it followed by diabetes which has a national prevalence of 11.2 percent.

      Chronic obstructive pulmonary disease (COPD) and cardiovascular disease have a prevalence of just under 7 percent while chronic kidney disease is at approximately 3 percent. The CDC stated that “while the estimated number of persons with any underlying medical condition was higher in population-dense metropolitan areas, overall prevalence was higher in rural nonmetropolitan areas.

      It also added that “the counties with the highest prevalences of any condition were concentrated in Southeastern states, particularly in Alabama, Arkansas, Kentucky, Louisiana, Mississippi, Tennessee, and West Virginia, as well as some counties in Oklahoma, South Dakota, Texas, and northern Michigan, among others”.

    • Biden Campaign 'Mistreating Latino Field Organizers And Suppressing Latino Vote' According To Scathing Letter
      Biden Campaign 'Mistreating Latino Field Organizers And Suppressing Latino Vote' According To Scathing Letter

      Tyler Durden

      Sat, 07/25/2020 – 22:50

      95 field organizers for the Florida Democratic Party have accused Joe Biden’s campaign of mistreatment, and ‘suppressing the Latino vote’ among other things.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      In a scathing seven-page letter obtained by the Miami Herald, field organizers levied eight allegations against the campaign surrounding the lack of a “fully accountable field plan.”

      Among the claims: mistreatment of field organizers, relocating trained staff members without explanation, lack of organizing resources and taking on volunteers who are then left in limbo. –Miami Herald

      We can only imagine that for nearly 100 Florida organizers to claim the Biden campaign has neglected Latinos – an accusation which could damage the former VP just 100 days out from the general election, in a battleground state – and as polls show waning enthusiasm from Latino voters, that things must be genuinely bad.

      According to the letter, Biden’s campaign lacks key infrastructure and has perpetuated a “toxic” work culture that has damaged morale among staffers.

      In one grievance, several organizers were recently transferred from a heavily Puerto-Rican region to another part of the state with a small percentage of Hispanics.

      “Four of five Spanish-speaking organizers along the I-4 corridor who were moved to North Florida were Puerto Rican,” reads the letter, adding that input from staffers in tune with Puerto Rican residents living in Central Florida is often dismissed.

      “The [Coordinated Campaign of Florida] is suppressing the Hispanic vote by removing Spanish-speaking organizers from Central Florida without explanation, which fails to confront a system of white-dominated politics we are supposed to be working against as organizers of a progressive party,” reads the letter.

      A Democratic official familiar with internal discussions who asked not to be named said the letter comes amid negotiations between the Coordinated Campaign in Florida and the field organizers’ union, the IBEW Local 824.

      The official said organizers have not been updated on their individual assignments due to the ongoing union negotiations, which predate the letter. –Miami Herald

      “We are roughly 100 days out from the election, and there is no functional targeted field outreach and organizing of the Hispanic/Spanish-speaking, Brazilian/Portuguese-speaking, and Haitian/Creole-speaking communities in our state,” the letter continues. “There are no targets, scripts, data infrastructure, community outreach, or phonebanks established for this.”

      Among the requests from the field organizers is for the Coordinated Campaign to:

      Apologize for “treatment of field staff;”

      Commit to restoring organizers back to their original locations;

      Give adequate notice of planned events and job openings;

      Resume previous organizing activities that have been halted;

      Provide more support to county chairs. –Miami Herald

      It is necessary to emphasize that despite this lack of preparedness by leadership, existing productive work was halted and the little strategy that was shared is ill-suited for the new dynamics of remote organizing,” according to the letter’s authors.

      In response to the letter, ‘Biden for President Florida’ state director Jackie Lee said in a statement that the campaign has an “open-door policy,” and that they’re looking forward to consulting with the union on “many of the issues” brought up in the letter.

      We look forward to discussing them with organizers and getting their feedback as soon as able,” said Lee, adding “The stakes of this election are critical, and we are committed to working with our organizers and Florida Democrats at every level in order to build a strong, successful Coordinated Campaign.”

      According to Lee, “No staff are asked to move or relocate, either from out of state or within states” over the past six weeks.

      One field organizer told the Herald that “A lot of the field organizers are young and with that comes different views of workplace norms, the kind of culture that we want to establish,” adding “The way you treat your lowest ranked employees says a lot about you as an organization … especially in electoral work, when organizers are the ones on the front lines, they ones you’re asking to make 400 calls a day, the ones you’re asking to make real connections with voters on the ground.”

      Another organizer said being asked to suddenly relocate has led to uncertainty over housing in the midst of the raging COVID-19 pandemic.

      “We were told that we would get placement calls about where we thought we should be best placed and where we’d be most effective,” the organizer said. “A number of organizers didn’t even get those calls. … Since then, as we kind of merged into the Coordinating Campaign, we just haven’t been kept in the loop.”

      The field organizer based in Central Florida said that while they all have a unified goal, many organizers feel unheard and unseen by the Coordinated Campaign in the few months leading up to the election.

      It’s disappointing, but i can’t say that I’m surprised,” the staffer said. “I just hope that it will be reckoned with soon.” Miami Herald

      Expect to see Joe Biden pandering in a sombrero and mask within the next week.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    • Las Vegas Casinos Are Making Another Round Of Brutal Furloughs And Layoffs
      Las Vegas Casinos Are Making Another Round Of Brutal Furloughs And Layoffs

      Tyler Durden

      Sat, 07/25/2020 – 22:20

      Re-opening? Not so fast.

      At least that’s the sentiment in sin city, where casinos announced last week there would be another round of furloughs and potential permanent layoffs after the industry remains crippled from the Covid-19 shutdown. 

      Three of the strip’s major properties, including Wynn Resorts, Circus Circus and the Tropicana all made announcements last week that they would be cutting more staff, according to Fox 5 Las Vegas. This, of course, comes after a first round of layoffs and furloughs that took place after the country first shut down, months ago. 

      Wynn has notified some of its workers they would be placed on furlough this week. “Although we retained all of our people while we were closed, we now know how challenged business volumes in Las Vegas are and are staffing to the significantly reduced demand,” the casino said.

      The company had paid all salaried, hourly and part time workers through May 31, for a total of 75 days of payroll continuance. More than 15,000 employees received payroll coverage, which even included distributed tips. Wynn had invested almost $250 million in payroll expenses during the closure, but can no longer do so.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      In addition to the layoffs, some of its employees also face pay cuts. Pay reductions ranged from 5% to 20% based on staff members’ salaries. For those who make under $75,000, their salary was cut 5%. Furloughed employees will continue to receive health benefits through Oct. 31, the company said.

      Circus Circus has said they are laying off some employees due to the loss of business incurred from the pandemic. 252 employees are set to be permanently terminated at the hotel, it said in a letter sent to the Nevada Department of Employment, Training and Rehabilitation.

      The hotel’s official statement said: “Circus Circus Las Vegas has had to assess and make business decisions in order to effectively operate during these uncertain times. We hope that business volumes will recuperate sufficiently so that most of our employees can get back to work in the near future.”

      Finally, the Tropicana furloughed a total of 26,000 employees, it said in a statement. A “number” of these employees are expected to return upon re-opening, but some will eventually become permanent layoffs.

      “Based on the sudden and unforeseeable events in March, we were forced to furlough 26,000 of our team members in April. At the time, we were hopeful that we’d be able to call the employees back within a couple of months. However, while we have been able to reopen most of our properties on a limited basis, the continued social distancing requirements and uncertain business volumes means our properties will not be able to resume normal operations for the foreseeable future,” the casino concluded.

    • Here's What You Need To Know About Sending Your Child Back To School This Year
      Here's What You Need To Know About Sending Your Child Back To School This Year

      Tyler Durden

      Sat, 07/25/2020 – 21:50

      Authored by Linnea Johnson via The Organic Prepper blog,

      As the summer goes on, schools are refining and finalizing how they will conduct school in the fall. Already, Atlanta, Los Angeles, and San Diego have declared schools will not re-open physical classrooms and others will follow. Many districts have suggested revised schedules, including part of the students attending one day or week and others another day or week, staggered drop-off and pickup times, mask-wearing at all times, social distancing, food brought from home, and no shared use of common resources. Teacher unions are beginning to object to sending teachers, particularly those in the higher risk age groups, back into the classroom and parents have understandable concerns for their children as well.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      One way or another, school will not look like it used to this school year, and discipline issues will now include compliance with COVID-19 restrictions. Online learning will deliver the bulk of instruction, with little personal interaction between students, peers, and teachers. While I am a believer in online learning for older and more motivated students, I believe it is not the best learning mechanism for younger children.

      Millions of parents, after homeschooling their children for months are seriously considering homeschooling because of the dystopian guidelines issues by the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention and being followed by most school districts.

      CDC Recommendations

      In May, the US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC) issued school reopening guidelines that called for:

      • Strict social distancing tactics

      • All-day mask wearing for most students and teachers

      • Staggered attendance

      • Daily health checks

      • No gym or cafeteria use

      • Restricted playground access and limited toy-sharing, and

      • Tight controls on visitors to school buildings, including parents.

      School districts across the country quickly adopted the CDC’s guidelines, devising their reopening plans accordingly. Once parents got wind of what the upcoming school-year would look like, including the real possibility that at any time schools could be shut down again due to virus spikes, they started exploring other options. (Source)

      Like it or not, you will need to make a decision; send your child to a dystopian school situation or seek an alternative. We’ve already discussed homeschooling here, here, and here.

      Questions to Ask Yourself

      Let’s talk more about the decision making process. Questions you might ask yourself are:

      • Am I putting my child and family at undue risk by sending my child to school in the fall? Check out this article.

      • Will my child fall behind because of a chaotic schedule at the school (some days or weeks online, others in the classroom)

      • How will school districts measure the effectiveness of this new mode of learning? How will teachers be evaluated? How will my child be evaluated? How will I know my child will be ready for the next grade and has the skills s/he needs?

      • What additional vaccination requirements will be imposed on my child and our family if my child attends a school?

      • What will discipline in the schools look like in the fall? Will my child or family be reported to the authorities if s/he takes their mask off? Will my family be fined?

      • How will wearing a mask all day long affect my child’s health?

      • How will I juggle my work schedule to support the schedule the school assigns my child to? If I can’t change my work schedule, who will care for and supervise my child?

      • If I’m already staying home to supervise my child’s remote learning, is it that much greater a commitment to homeschool entirely?

      Factors to Consider

      I’m sure you can think of even more questions that are valid to ask. Without considering all the options, it’s difficult to make an informed decision. Let’s take an objective look at the implications of each scenario.

      Your choices are basically, partial re-opening of school, school and full school-sanctioned online learning.  Criteria we could use to evaluate those choices include:

      1. Stability in schedule(minimum variation for child and parent in scheduling work around the school schedule). Adjustments in schedules will likely be made as the school year progresses, necessitating adjustments in work and family schedules.  With partial re-opening or online options, you will need to adjust your work schedule or find someone else to care for and supervise the learning of your children. This could be chaotic for the child and your family. If you homeschool, you can plan a schedule that works for your child and your family and you can decide what topics to cover.

      2. Ability to Choose Curriculum and Subjects: With partial re-opening or full online instruction, you will not be able to choose or influence the subjects your child will study.  In addition, you will not be able to adjust the speed at which new topics are introduced.  With homeschooling, as long as you choose the basics, reading, writing, and math, you can augment their study with science, history, art, music, and practical skills like cooking , gardening, or carpentry.

      3. Socialization and Human Contact Considerations:  With partial reopening, your child will have some interface with other adults and children, however, the environment will be quite sterile and stilted because of COVID-19 restrictions.  With full online instructions, your child will have little personal contact with other students or adults.  If you homeschool, you can choose who your child interacts with and how.  Play dates can be arranged in open air settings and families can share homeschool responsibilities, especially in smaller groups.

      4. Sports and Extracurricular Activities: Some sports and activities may resume, but most schools are canceling fall sports and other activities will have reduced participation to allow for social distancing.  With homeschooling, you can involve your child in your own exercise routine or take up walking the dog, bicycling, hiking, running, tennis, badminton, or volleyball.  Find fun exercise videos on YouTube or learn dance moves to music you both enjoy. There are a ton of things you can do for exercise with your child that are fun.  Be creative.

      5. Impact on the Parent doing the bulk of instruction/supervision of children:  With partial reopening of the schools, you will get time away from your children, but with online learning, you will still need to care for and supervise your child to ensure learning is happening.  In addition, the effectiveness of online learning is influenced by the skill with which the instruction is designed.  Younger children do not benefit from online instruction as much as older, more mature students who are self-motivated.  If you choose to homeschool, you will be able to control what and how quickly your child moves through curriculum.   If you choose to homeschool, you’ll need support to get through this new experience. I’ve just started a new homeschool community blog that you may find useful: StartHomeschoolNow.com

      6. Ability to Control Safety Factors:  Sending your children to school in a partial school re-opening could put your child and your family at risk.  In addition with tensions running high, some people’s behavior may be less than desirable. Health and safety in your home will be within your control when you homeschool.

      7. Independence: While sending your child to school part-time may allow you some independence, in the end, you are tied to the school’s schedules and decisions. With homeschooling, your schedule is defined by you and your child and not by an outside entity. Vacations can be taken at non-peak times, thereby saving money and avoiding crowds. You have taken a step to create a life you control and enjoy. Welcome to the homeschool lifestyle!

      Thoughts About Learning and School

      The more you can teach your child the joy of independence in learning, the more peaceful your household will be for everyone. Kids naturally love to learn and be creative and will gravitate to things that interest them. Sometimes, however, the school system beats that curiosity out of them.

      A teacher says something critical or a child can’t spell no matter how hard s/he works at it and is branded “stupid”. Other students follow the teacher’s lead and start bullying the child. Or, the teacher wants to spend all her time with the “gifted” students in the classroom and can’t wait to get rid of those requiring a little extra effort to special education pullouts. What about those active kids that teachers suggest be evaluated and end up on Ritalin? Those children are usually pretty smart, like to be challenged, and prefer hands-on learning. Perhaps your child can’t shake his or her reputation at a school because teachers pass-on information about each of the students to next year’s teachers. With those biases from the previous year’s teacher, there’s no way a student can break free from a prescribed role. I’ve seen it all, either with my own children, or when I volunteered in classrooms, or when I substitute taught, or when I taught in the public schools. Schools are not a particularly nurturing environment for many children, or teachers for that matter. Ask a teacher what goes on in the teacher’s lounge and how they feel about it. Teaching can be a dog-eat-dog profession.

      You’re going to have to make a decision this fall. If you don’t actively evaluate your options and decide, you’ve let somebody else make the decision for you.

      Decision-Making is Hard

      Look, decision-making is hard. Even when we think we’ve made a good decision, sometimes we second guess ourselves and wonder what it would have been like if we hadn’t made that choice. All we can do is weigh the options and make the best decision with the information we have at the moment. What information do we have now?

      • Schools will be different in the Fall

      • We don’t know what measures schools will implement in response to COVID, but we know they will incorporate masks, social distancing, and some measure of remote learning

      • We know tensions are high in the general population and it will be the same story in the schools, for both teachers and students

      • You know your child—how will s/he do in that environment?

      • How will you do in that environment?

      If you plan to homeschool now, you’re ahead of the game. If you don’t plan for homeschooling, your life and that of your child will be in the hands of a school district that is making a guess at how to do school in these circumstances.

      If homeschooling doesn’t work out, you can always re-enroll your child in a public school. I would suggest giving it at least a semester, better yet a year to work the kinks out. Remember, learning can happen at a kitchen table, in the car, waiting at a doctor’s office, in a store, on a road trip, or in your backyard. Life is a lesson waiting to be learned, and you’re in a good position to help guide your child through those lessons.

    • Protests Erupt Across Country; Black Militia Member Accidentally Shoots Comrades In Park
      Protests Erupt Across Country; Black Militia Member Accidentally Shoots Comrades In Park

      Tyler Durden

      Sat, 07/25/2020 – 21:27

      Update (2130ET): Saturday BLM protests unfolded across the country on Saturday, with tensions flaring in major cities including Portland, Seattle, Chicago and Louisville, Kentucky. 

      In Seattle, the police department – which on Friday announced that they would effectively not be enforcing the law due to a City Council ban on the use of non-lethal crowd control measures – declared a riot, citing “ongoing damage and public safety risks,” according to USA Today. 16 protesters were arrested by Seattle PD for assaulting officers, obstruction and failure to disperse. One officer was hospitalized with a leg injury caused by an explosive, while the crowd launched mortars and rocks at the police.

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      In Chicago, hundreds of protesters called for abolishing ICE and defunding the police, while chants of “Black women matter” and “Latino lives matter” could be heard. 

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      Meanwhile, dozens of pro-police protesters gathered in Grant Park, where Mayor Lori Lightfoot removed a statue of Christopher Columbus on Friday morning before dawn. Attendees of the “Back the Blue” rally could be heard chanting “We love CPD,” as counter-protesters gathered across the street.

      And In Louisville, tensions almost spilled over into violence as two opposing and heavily armed militia groups faced off within yards of each other downtown.

      More than 300 members of the Atlanta-based Black militia NFAC, or “Not F**king Around Coalition” came to Louisville demanding justice for 26-year-old Breonna Taylor, an ER technician who was fatally shot by officers in March.

      The group came close to 50 far-right “Three Percenter” militia members, who were also heavily armed. Police kept the sides apart and tensions eventually dissipated. Both militias had said they wanted to avoid violence. 

      Cries of “Black lives matter” were heard through downtown. One man yelled “Don’t fire unless you’re fired upon.” –USA Today

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      At one point gunshots erupted when one NFAC member accidentally shot three of his comrades.

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      *  *  *

      The Seattle Police Department announced on Friday that residents and business owners are essentially on their own, after the City Council banned the use of pepper spray and other ‘less lethal tools’ to disperse crowds.

      “Simply put, the legislation gives officers NO ability to safely intercede to preserve property in the midst of a large, violent crowd,” reads a letter from Seattle Chief of Police, Carmen Best – who added that thanks to the City Council, “Seattle Police will have an adjusted deployment in response to any demonstrations this weekend.”

      And in anticipation of violent weekend protests coordinated over social media platforms (which ban conservatives for mean words), Seattle business and police have been boarding up.

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      Nationwide coordination

      The Portland-based Pacific Northwest (PNW) Youth Liberation Front – which describes itself as a “decentralized network of autonomous youth collectives dedicated to direct action towards total liberation,” has issued a call to action for other Antifa cells across the country on Saturday – calling it “J25” (July 25).

      In a Facebook ‘call to action,’ the anarchist group writes:

      The Federal Government has already waged war against Portland, which has been protesting everyday for 50 days straight, and now feds are going to war against protesters everywhere in an attempt to take control and snuff out the fire of this uprising. We must become more powerful than them.

      Form an affinity group.

      Coordinate an action.

      Get tactical.

      Mask up.

      Bring a friend.

      Show up.

      -PNW Youth Liberation Front.
      -Marin Youth Liberation Front.
      -Tennessee Youth Liberation Front.
      ​​​​​​​-Direct Action Alliance.
      -Maryland Youth Liberation Front.
      -Olympia Youth Liberation Front

      •Oakland action: 7:30pm, Grant Oscar Plaza.
      •Tacoma action: July 24th, 2pm, tollefson plaza.
      •Seattle: July 25th, 1pm, Pine and Broadway.
      •Portland: July 25th, 8pm, Alberta Park.
      •Salem: 6pm, Oregon State Capitol.
      •New Jersey: at Fraternal Order of Police Lodge 12, 6pm.
      •Washington DC: DuPoint circle, 6pm.
      •Eugene, OR: 8:00pm, federal courthouse.
      •Los Angeles: 4:30pm, LA city hall.
      •Richmond, VA: July, 25th, location TBD.
      •Las Vegas: Bellagio fountains, 7pm.

      Meanwhile, Antifa protests are already heating up across the country after demonstrations began on Friday night:

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    • Animated Map Of What America Searched For On Google Over The Last Decade
      Animated Map Of What America Searched For On Google Over The Last Decade

      Tyler Durden

      Sat, 07/25/2020 – 21:20

      Cultural shifts come in many shapes and forms, and some are harder to measure than others.

      Google search volume provides an easy avenue for measuring large-scale cultural trends. And, as Visual Capitalist’s Carmen Ang notes, because Google makes up more than 90% of all internet searches in the U.S., looking at what’s trending on Google is a good way to understand the shifting questions and interests that are captivating society at any given time.

      This animated map by V1 Analytics provides an overview of the top trending Google searches in every state over the last decade. It sheds light on what types of new information, events, and stories received the most attention in the last ten years—and more generally, it shows us what the U.S. population has been thinking about.

      Trending Searches versus Top Searches

      Before diving into the top trends of the decade, it’s worth taking a moment to distinguish between “trending searches” and “top searches”:

      • Trending Searches: Keywords that had the largest increase in traffic, in a specific period of time

      • Top Searches: The most searched keywords in a given time frame

      This video would look a lot different, and a lot less interesting, if it showed Google’s top searches. To give some perspective, here are the Top 10 Searches in the U.S. (as of 2020):

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Understanding the difference between trending searches and top searches is important because it gives us insight into why certain keywords trend in some places, but not others. For instance, in March 2020, the word “coronavirus” was trending throughout a majority of the U.S., with a few exceptions—it wasn’t trending in Massachusetts, California, Texas, Nevada, or Arizona.

      It’s easy to make the assumption that people in these states were not concerned about COVID-19—however, that’s not necessarily the case.

      It’s important to remember that trending searches are measured by the increase of traffic, not just the overall amount of searches. Therefore, in states where it wasn’t trending, the word “coronavirus” may have already been a popular search term for a while, so the keyword didn’t see a sudden spike in interest like it did in other places.

      Undivided Attention

      In the last decade, there were moments when the entire country was googling the same thing. Some keyword trends lasted a day, while others lasted over a week.

      Here’s a look at keywords that took over the whole U.S, and when they were trending unanimously:

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      It’s interesting to look at the variety of topics that dominate the population’s collective thoughts. There’s a unique mix of popular culture, entertainment, electronics, prominent figures, and public scandals.

      Something else worth noting is how country-wide trends became a lot more common in the latter part of the decade—in 2019 for example, 9 keywords trended unanimously. This was more than in the entire first half of the decade.

      While the secret to going viral remains a mystery, one thing remains clear—the public certainly has a broad range of interests. So really, it’s anyone’s game.

    • The India-China Border Issue
      The India-China Border Issue

      Tyler Durden

      Sat, 07/25/2020 – 20:50

      Authored by Jayant Bhandari via Acting-Man.com,

      Deep-Seated Racism and Happy-Smiley Hypocrites

      In Delhi, people of the northeastern part of India, who have mongoloid features, are derogatorily called “chinky.”

      It is not unusual for men in Delhi to stop their cars to proposition a random girl from the northeast for a sexual encounter, assuming her to be “loose.”

      Indians’ ignorance about the geography of their own country, their irrationality, superstitions and bigotry have been fertile ground in these days of Covid-19. People from the northeast have faced massive problems based on the assumption that they are carriers of the virus. They have been refused services at shops and have been thrown out by landlords.

      Indians from the northeast being denied entry into a shop

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      The girl from the northeast was spat at and called “corona,” instead of “chinky.”

      Girls from the northeast threatened with eviction for “being carriers of corona-virus” being saved by the police

      To visit monuments in India, an Indian pays a much lower charge than a non-Indian. Most Indians buy their entrance tickets, but not those from the northeast. They must prove that they are Indian by showing their IDs. Even then, the ignorant-ticket seller might still insist on the price foreigners pay.

      Indians like to believe that they have a great family system and that they are generous and welcoming. Quite in contrast, surveys show Indians to be among the most race, color, caste, and religion conscious people in the world. My friend in Delhi had one of the happiest families I have seen. When I probed, she told me that hers was a “happy-smiley” family.

      I didn’t know what that meant. She told me it was about a family in which everyone hated each other, but which made a great public display of their cohesion. While I had forgotten about this hypocrisy, I recalled how completely blown away I was when I met real, functional families in the UK during my first visit abroad.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      India, one of the most racist countries

      Complicated Relations 

      Since 1962 China has been regarded with derision in India. Contrary to the indoctrination Indians get, it was an extremely embarrassing defeat for India, which offered no resistance in most places. In those days, India’s GDP was higher than that of China.

      Today, China is five times richer than India and invests a higher proportion of its budget in its armed forces. By that measure, any renewed armed conflict between India and China will likely give China an even more comfortable win over India.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      India had a larger GDP than China in 1962; Now China’s is five times larger

      Most Indians, who are vicariously proud while sitting in front of their TV, think that it is China that is afraid of India. It is so easy to feel courageous when the person who dies is not you or your son.

      India has complicated relations with all its neighbors, perhaps with the  slight exception of Bhutan, which is stuck in such a way that it cannot complain, even if it wanted to. Still, muffled noises do even come out of Bhutan once in a while.

      India’s relationship with its closest ally Nepal, the only other Hindu country in the world, has taken a tumble

      India is one of the most closed countries in the world. Countries around the world today have an open road system and a visa-free regime with their neighbors, irrespective of any border issues they may have.

      India has virtually no road connection with its neighbors, a product of an extremely paranoid and close-minded Indian ruling class. They are scared that someone might do better, and cross-border friendships and business relations might develop. These bureaucrats are not just corrupt but brimming with jealousy and sadism.

      Indians think that getting a visa is an achievement, forgetting that an Indian passport has no value. It gives Indians visa-free travel only to Nepal, Bhutan, and a handful of small countries, making it one of the worst passports in the world.

      So disconnected are Indians from the on-the-ground realities of China that they think all of China is a bubble and a backwater communist tyranny. The fact that Indians are among the most bigoted people, and their ruling class neurotic, paranoid, and close-minded must be taken into account when evaluating India’s border problems with China.

      In 1962 China voluntarily ceded many areas it had taken over from India, despite officially maintaining claims over them. Contrary to popular perception, China is not necessarily an expansionary power. It took over Hong Kong and Macau after protracted negotiations, rather than through coercive measures.

      And Tibet, which has historically been an area of Chinese influence, is not necessarily as clear-cut an issue as Richard Gere has made it out to be.

      At Odds with Reality

      In his speech about the recent Chinese incursion into India, Indian Prime Minister Narendra Modi said there had been no such incursion. Very quickly India’s media and society proceeded to ignore the  horrendous and glaring contradiction between Modi’s words and the scores of dead Indian soldiers.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      The dead get word from the prime minister… [PT]

      Modi didn’t care to explain what the border problem was all about then. Also, he gives no — none, zip, nada — appearances before journalists in public. If he ever does an interview, everything is scripted to minute details.

      The most important job of the Indian government is to protect its borders, but for all intents and purposes, Modi does not think that Indians need to know what is happening. It is clear that despite all the chest-thumping, India cannot afford a war with China.

      China is scared of all religions. Its most significant worry is Xingjian, a Muslim province. There is a highway that runs from Tibet to Xingjian. This highway is in a desert, Aksai Chin, which is claimed by India and close to the area of the current conflict. New infrastructure building by India in that area has also put at risk the Karakoram highway, which connects Xingjian to Pakistan and then to the sea.

      Indeed, most of the contested territories are deserts or glaciers, of no value to anyone by themselves — although, Indians and Pakistanis are obsessed with land, even deserts, which cost them a considerable amount of blood and treasure to defend.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Expensive contested desert [PT]

      Misapprehending China

      Is the current Chinese incursion nothing but China’s attempt to protect its highways? Did India fail to offer security guarantees? Given the self-centered, paranoid nature of India’s ruling class, I wouldn’t be surprised. China certainly hasn’t moved in for any internal, nationalistic reason.

      There is minimal coverage of the border problem inside of China. In contrast, Indians have gone into a trance regurgitating how Indian troops killed twice as many Chinese — as if that was a yardstick — without providing any evidence. Indians generally don’t understand China, and it is doubtful whether many Indian bureaucrats understand China or speak Mandarin.

      According to international law, China was likely at fault by dint of its incursion, and Xi Jinping is considered heavy-handed both internationally and domestically. Still, India has no choice but to live next to China, in an evolving world in which the US is less and less interested in the affairs of other countries.

      Moreover, India doesn’t have comparable economic power, which is why other countries may show sympathy, but will do nothing more.  When it comes to the crunch, it is China that matters to the West, not India. This realpolitik-informed situation is incomprehensible to heavily propagandized Indians.

      There is a much deeper question. India, rather than Pakistan, should have been a close ally of China. At least India is constitutionally secular, whereas Pakistan is sharia-compliant. China needed a road system to get to the Indian ocean. India did not grant it the right of way; had India done so, it would have given  China a reason to be friendly toward India.

      Moreover, the Chinese economy both on a gross and a per capita basis is five times that of India. India is to China what Mexico is to the US. This is a reality Indians adamantly ignore, for they have come to see themselves at the cutting edge of growth and technology – all vicariously, for half of India’s citizens still poop in the open.

    • US Closer To Developing Small Nuclear Reactors That Sustain Life On The Moon & Mars
      US Closer To Developing Small Nuclear Reactors That Sustain Life On The Moon & Mars

      Tyler Durden

      Sat, 07/25/2020 – 20:20

      The US Department of Energy issued an unusual statement on Friday calling for private sector help in its years-long project to develop technology that would sustain future civilizations on the moon as well as Mars.

      At least back to 2018, NASA and the Department of Energy’s National Nuclear Security Administration (NNSA) have been working on a portable nuclear reactor to power deep-space exploration, such as human missions to Mars in the next decade and beyond.

      “Small nuclear reactors can provide the power capability necessary for space exploration missions of interest to the Federal government,” the Energy Department wrote Friday.

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      The Dept. of Energy call for partners reads as follows: 

      Battelle Energy Alliance, LLC (BEA), the managing and operating contractor for the U.S. Department of Energy’s Idaho National Laboratory (INL), is seeking information from leaders in the nuclear and space industries to develop innovative technologies for a fission surface power (FSP) system that can be operated on the moon. The request for information can be viewed here. Responses are sought by Sept. 8. After receiving responses, INL will issue a request for proposal.

      According to Time Magazine commentary, the plan includes two phases, described as first, “Developing a reactor design” and second: “building a test reactor, a second reactor be sent to the moon, and developing a flight system and lander that can transport the reactor to the moon.”

      “The goal is to have a reactor, flight system and lander ready to go by the end of 2026,” the report says.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Via Scrabbl

      That date seems extremely ambitious, also given that to be rocketed up into space by either NASA or SpaceX, the portable rectors would have to be under 7,700 pounds, would be capable of generating uninterrupted electricity of at least 10 kilowatts, and must be able to run autonomously for a minimum of ten years. 

      Numerous companies have for the past few years been developing portable nuclear power for earthly applications, including TerraPower, a Seattle-area venture backed by Microsoft co-founder Bill Gates.

      * * *

    • Martenson: We Are On Our Own In The Post-COVID World
      Martenson: We Are On Our Own In The Post-COVID World

      Tyler Durden

      Sat, 07/25/2020 – 19:50

      Authored by Chris Martenson via PeakProsperity.com,

      It’s time to be our own heroes, because those in charge sure won’t be…

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Even before the coronavirus pandemic hit, things weren’t all that great for the bottom 90% of households.

      The median household was barely scraping by with ultra-low financial reserves, meager retirement savings and high levels of debt. All while being relentlessly crushed by cost of living inflation running far higher than the blatantly fraudulent government statistics offered up by the BLS.

      Even more infuriating, the economic pie was preferentially handed to the top 10% — well, more specifically, to the top 1%. And even more dramatically to the top 0.1%.  Don’t even get me started on the 0.001%…

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      (Source)

      While often presented in the media as a puzzling thing without any root cause, both the income and wealth gaps are the direct result of Federal Reserve policies and actions Helped, of course, by lobbyists for the elites influencing Congressional tax legislation.

      So it’s no accident that over time, tax rates on the rich have been substantially cut:

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      This chart says that the very highest income earners have a lower effective tax rate than anybody else in the nation.  Billionaire Warren Buffett famously pays a lower rate than his secretary. Goldman Sachs bankers are taxed more favorably than their Uber drivers. Again, this isn’t happening by accident.

      And it reveals that, despite the fiction of fairness and freedom, America’s true values and priorities are aimed at funneling more and more of its wealth to in the pockets of an elite few.

      Said another way: The final looting operation has begun.

      The reason Peak Prosperity exists is to fight this outcome tooth and nail.  The path that the US government and Federal Reserve have charted ends in the destruction of prosperity for all of us. Yet the current crop of national managers (not leaders) are just too self-isolated in their echo chambers to grasp that.  They’re insulated from the impacts of their policies and so they can’t quite see ahead to the endgame.  Or they simply don’t care.

      Which is why I am in a certain way thankful for SARS-Cov-2. It has woken up a center mass of people and alerted them to the true reality of their situation.  It has revealed just how corrupt, self-serving, and disinterested the elites are in the plight of the middle and lower classes.  It has exposed the extent to which institutions and corporations are failing at their most basic of duties.

      It has finally laid bare the truth: We are on our own. 

      There’s no rescue coming.  No next elected official who can repair all that’s gone wrong.  The very DNA of the organs of the State has mutated beyond repair.

      Which in a twisted sense is positive news. We need the status quo to fail so it can be replaced with something better.

      Necessary Change

      Constructive change is long overdue.  The dismal charts above show that the wealth disparity in the US didn’t suddenly appear in 2020; it’s been festering for decades.

      The grotesque inability of our health care to acknowledge let alone utilize the profoundly effective Covid-19 treatments that exist (e.g. MATH+, HCQ+ early on, etc.) in favor of overhyped/unproven new drugs like Remdesivir which barely works at all, is nothing new.  It speaks to a corruption of science and the power of monetary greed at the expense of basic goodness and human decency that also did not suddenly arise in 2020.  It too has been been with us a very long time.

      When farmers can only survive by going deeper into debt while receiving only 7 cents of the final dollar spent by the consumer who buys their food at the store, it speaks to a profoundly misguided system that seems to have forgotten that without the producers you have nothing at all.  Yet it merrily squeezes the farmers year after year taking as much as it can for itself.

      When such disconnects become so entrenched that they are no longer even questioned, you cannot vote them back into working order.  You cannot tweak some policies and fix them.  They need to be swept aside and rebuilt.

      The time before us is about remembering what’s important and veering back towards integrity and away from myopic self-interest.  Away from “me” and back towards “us.”  No, I am not saying socialism, communism, or any other ‘ism.’  I am saying that we’re all in this together and that it’s time to swing back towards acting as if we care about more than ourselves,as if we understand how the larger system works best when we can set petty ego and greed aside.

      Time To Vote!

      No, I don’t mean vote in elections.  (Though sure, go ahead and vote if that makes you feel any better. But personally I’ve lost all attachment to the idea that there’s a lick of worthwhile difference between the major parties.)

      I mean vote with your money. Vote with your actions. Vote with your heart. And vote with your mind.

      There’s nothing you can do about the fact that the world’s central banks have printed up $5 trillion of new currency in approximately 6 months. That’s roughly equal to their combined output during 4 entire years of the Great Financial Crisis:

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      None of us can vote the central banker rascals out (they are appointed), but we can we vote with our currency — exchanging it for gold, silver, land, and any other hard assets we can manage to store well.

      It’s worth noting that gold, which we’ve been strongly recommend folks accumulate for this very reason,  just hit a brand-new weekly closing high this week :

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      And silver’s at multi-year highs.

      Both are telegraphing a loss of confidence in the US dollar and the global financial system itself.

      We can’t do anything about our politicians’ weak, ineffective efforts at getting people to wear masks or take Covid-19 seriously. But we can vote with our feet and move to more sustainable, less densely populated areas, as is already happening in droves.

      We can’t control the anger of the populace or the sudden proliferations of riots and unrest. But we can arm (and train!) ourselves to protect our loved ones if need be, which explains surging gun sales.

      We can’t predict the quality the price or even the availability of vegetables & meat. But we can plant gardens and begin raising chickens.

      Join The Movement

      SARS-CoV-2 has exposed a lot rot in the system.  And that’s a good thing because it needed to be.

      No problem has ever been fixed without first being identified.

      Now we can focus on fixing what can be salvaged and tossing the rest.

      Perhaps you’re a fast adjuster and you’re one of the few folks already busy operating in the solution space. If you are, I’ll bet that you know lots of people who aren’t there yet. Who are still clinging to some level of denial or bargaining that the failing status quo can somehow continue indefinitely.

      Don’t worry, they’ll catch up. Eventually. Because they’ll have to. Change will be forced upon them.

      The data all point to a rapidly intensifying set of trends that will completely reshape both our future prosperity and opportunities we have to pursue it.  Great fortunes will be made and lost.

      As with any fast-changing moment in history, the trick is skating to where the puck is going to be.

      My co-founder Adam Taggart and I have spent the past ten years laying out the case for why this moment in time would inevitably arrive, and how people can prepare themselves.  Not to merely survive, but to thrive.

      We’ve cajoled, nudged, urged and cautioned people to read between the lines and heed the warning signs.  We’ve strongly advocated for converting paper wealth into precious metals and other hard assets, developing multiple income streams (in case a bread-winner’s job was lost), developing stronger relationships and a healthier body.

      Every one of our recommendations has served our readers very well leading up to — but especially in — today’s trying times.

      Did we know Covid-19 was coming along?  No, of course not.  But all that the pandemic has done is accelerate the public’s recognition of the many predicaments and plights we’ve been warning of.

      So, with systemic instability increasing and the serious changes coming fast and furious now, how should you be prioritizing your focus?

      Even if you’re a first time reader of our material and haven’t taken any steps yet, there’s still much every one of us can and should be doing.

      The economic and health consequences of Covid-19 are extremely severe.  Expectedly so.  And they are still creating havoc in ways we don’t fully appreciate yet.

      So every day counts now, and all your actions matter.  It’s time to build resilience.  At the household level first, and then within your community.  Deepen your pantry, deepen your friendships, and deepen your soil.

      The more you can rely on yourself and those around you, the better off you’ll be.

      Which is why in Part 2: Welcome To The Movement, I detail out the tremendous advantage of learning from and participating in the Peak Prosperity “tribe” as we all plan for the approaching turbulent times. There are literally tens of thousands of like-minded people of goodwill and staggering expertise all around the world connecting through this online community, eager to help and support one another.

      Our individual chances of making it through with safety and optimism are much higher together vs going it alone. Consider joining the movement.

      Click here to read Part 2 of this report (free executive summary, enrollment required for full access).

    • Florida Passes New York For Biggest Outbreak As 46% Of COVID-19 Deaths Linked To Nursing Homes: Live Updates
      Florida Passes New York For Biggest Outbreak As 46% Of COVID-19 Deaths Linked To Nursing Homes: Live Updates

      Tyler Durden

      Sat, 07/25/2020 – 19:42

      Summary:

      • Texas sees daily cases fall for 4th day
      • Florida nursing home deaths 46% of total
      • NJ judge rules health department can shutter defiant gym
      • California reported another 10k+ new cases
      • Arizona reports daily cases
      • Florida reports another 12k+ cases
      • Bolsonaro tests negative
      • Global cases see new record spike
      • US reports 4th day of deaths; total nears 150k

      * * *

      Update (1920ET): The state of Texas reported another 8,112 coronavirus cases on Saturday, as the number of single-day cases trended lower for the 4th straight day…

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      …even as the number of deaths declined slightly, though the pullback wasn’t large enough to stop the 7-day average for daily deaths from climbing to a new record high. The 7-day positivity rate for cases, however, declined to its lowest level since July 3.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      All told, the state has 375,846 cases and 4,885 deaths.

      In other news, a judge in New Jersey has ruled that Atilis Gym, a gym in Bellmawr, NJ that has gained national attention for refusing to close, can be forcibly shuttered by the state Department of Health.

      The DoH is “authorized to place locks on the doors to Atilis Gym of Bellmawr or otherwise construct or place barriers on or around the premises to ensure compliance” with state closure orders, Judge Robert Lougy ordered in his ruling. He also ordered the gym to “not obstruct [state health authorities] in any way from carrying out the terms of this order.”

      The owners of the gym slammed the governor, Phil Murphy, for continuing to “unconstitutionally shutdown” the gym.

      “It is absurd that Governor Murphy continues to unconstitutionally shutdown gyms while other indoor exercise continues including gymnastics, dancing and Kickboxing. This attests to the randomness of the Governor’s orders,” Mermigis said.

      Finally, in another finding that shows just how vulnerable the oldest and most sickly among us are to the virus, in Florida, 46% of all COVID-related deaths in the state have been linked to long-term care facilities, according to new data released by the Florida Department of Health. That’s 2,645 out of 5,777 total deaths, to be more precise. That’s still far less than in New York, where some 6,500 deaths have been linked to nursing homes.

      * * *

      Update (1633ET): California, officially the state with the largest number of cases, reported another 10,066 (+2.3%) Saturday bringing its total to 445,400 cases. The state also reported another 151 deaths, bringing the death toll to 8,337 deaths.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      California’s non-ICU hospitalizations declined by 57, while the number of occupied ICU beds increased by 17.

      In other news, Florida finally surpassed New York on Saturday in the ranking of US states with the largest number of cases.

      The ranking is now California, Florida, New York, Texas, though the Lone Star State is certainly on track to surpass the Empire State, and will likely pass its total in the coming week, barring an unforeseen resurgence of new cases in the northeast. California’s rate of spread was 1.05, indicating the virus is still spreading.

      With deaths showing few signs of peaking across the Sun Belt, the US looks like it’s set to report more than 1,000 deaths in 24 hours for the fifth straight day.

      Yesterday, the US and the global community reported record single-day increases in new cases, while globally, the 7-day average for confirmed deaths had reached its highest level since late April.

      * * *

      Update (1200ET): The state of Arizona reported 3,748 new cases of the coronavirus on Saturday, bringing the statewide total to 160,041. The state also reported 144 new deaths, bringing its statewide death toll to 3,286.

      The total percent positive was 12.6%, with 22,336 tests run.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      ICU occupancy climbed to 86%.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Statewide, the rate of spread – represented by R-sub-t – has slowed to 1.00

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      * * *

      Update (1120ET): In the latest sign that nothing has really changed in Florida – although it has been roughly three weeks since the state reported its last record tally of new cases, it notched its single-day record for deaths just two days ago, and the states COVID wards are as crowded as ever – the state reported another 12,199 new cases (+3%) on Saturday, bringing the statewide total to 414,511.

      The daily total is north of the 7-day average of 2.7%.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      The state reported another 126 deaths, pushing the state’s coronavirus-related resident death toll to 5,777.

      To date, the Florida Department of Health has reported 2,921,866 negative tests, including 47,542 on Saturday. A total of 59,741 tests were run. The state’s hospitalizations climbed to 23,730, after 505 new hospitalizations, the 3rd time over 500.

      In other news, weeks after testing positive, Brazilian President Jair Bolsonaro announced Saturday that he had finally tested negative.

      * * *

      It has been another disappointing week for coronavirus numbers out of the US. Although hospitalizations and new cases have, encouragingly, moved decidedly lower in some of the worst-hit Sun Belt states – Arizona is perhaps the best example – the region is now struggling with what appears to be the delayed wave of deaths that Dr. Fauci and other health experts had promised, while hospitalizations and new cases remain elevated.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      However, if there is a silver lining in all of this, it’s that the outbreaks afflicting the Sun Belt states have so far proved much less deadly than what happened in New York.

      The absurdly high level of fatalities in the Greater New York area has been linked to both the large number of unconfirmed cases (antibody surveillance has shown some neighborhoods in the Bronx have as much as 60% penetration) and a staggering failure of leadership from Gov Cuomo. 

      Cuomo’s office allowed thousands of deaths that could have been avoided by sending COVID-19 positive patients back to their long-term care facilities, leading to a wave of nursing home outbreaks that contributed to more than half of the deaths recorded in the state. For all the criticism the New York Times heaps on Florida Gov Ron DeSantis and Georgia Gov Brian Kemp for their unwillingness to take decisive action, Cuomo’s horrifying policy blunder is arguably the deadliest mistake made by a governor.

      But we digress. As we await the latest round of daily tallies, it’s worth noting that the world reported a new record jump in new cases yesterday, as the daily tallies in Brazil, India and the US have climbed at a rapid clip. According to WorldoMeter, 289,028 new cases were reported around the world yesterday (remember, these data are typically reported with a 24-hour delay).

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      This brought the global case total to 15,931,445.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      The world reported 6,199 deaths yesterday. The daily tally was well below the record numbers reported in mid-April, but the increase brought the 7-day average to its highest level since late April.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      This brought the global death toll to 641,885.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Keep in mind, Worldometer’s numbers typically vary – sometimes by a modest margin – from the numbers reported by Reuters, the AP and Johns Hopkins. The latter of these has become the international standard, though many other tallies exist and are regularly cited by the English-language press around the world.

      But all were pretty much in agreement on this: Yesterday, the US recorded more than 1,000 deaths for the fourth day in a row, pushing the 7-day average to its highest level since late April.

      What’s more, the US reported 78,009 cases yesterday – a new single-day record, and the first daily tally north of 78k.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      This brought the US tally to 4,248,327.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Death-wise, the US recorded 1,141 new deaths yesterday, to be exact.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Bringing the US death toll to 148,490.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      As Trump pushes for children to return to school across the country in the fall, provoking understandable fears that this might spark a surge in deaths, it’s worth remembering that the virus’s propensity to infect and kill the most vulnerable patients has been substantially mitigated as health-care professionals have honed their techniques, and studies have shed more light on the ability of therapeutics like remdesivir to help patients with the most severe symptoms. Dexamethasone also comes to mind, as at least one high-quality study has shown the drug to be surprisingly effective in patients with severe symptoms. Hydroxychloroquine, a common anti-malarial drug that has been commonly used for decades, has been shown in a handful of studies to slow the disease’s advance during the early stages, though some studies examining the drug’s impact on seriously ill patients have shown undesirable side effects in a small number of patients.

    • Why Central Bank Policies Are Fundamentally Destructive
      Why Central Bank Policies Are Fundamentally Destructive

      Tyler Durden

      Sat, 07/25/2020 – 18:50

      Authored by Alasdair Macleod via GoldMoney.com,

      Explaining The Credit Cycle

      This article summarises why the credit cycle leads to alternate booms and slumps. It is only with this in mind that they can be properly understood as current economic conditions evolve.

      The reader is taken through three monetary models: a fixed money economy, one governed by changes in bank credit, and finally the consequences of central bank intervention.

      Classical economics provided the basis for an understanding of the effects of bank credit expansion. The theory, embodied in the division of labour, eluded Keynes, who was determined to justify an interventionist role in the economy for the state.

      Neo-Keynesian policies have been responsible for growing monetary intervention. This article serves as a reminder of the distortions introduced by the credit cycle and why central bank monetary policies are fundamentally destructive of the settled economic order that exists without monetary expansion.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Defining the problem

      The credit cycle drives the business, or trade cycle. It should be obvious that changes in the quantity of money, mostly in the form of bank credit, has an effect on business conditions. Indeed, that is why central banks implement a monetary policy. By increasing the quantity of money in circulation and by encouraging the banks to lend, a central bank aims to achieve full employment. Other than quantitative easing, the principal policy tool is management of interest rates on the assumption that they represent the “price” of money.

      But there is also a cyclical effect of boom and bust, linked to changes in the availability of bank credit, and so modern central banks have tried to foster the boom and avoid the slump.

      This is the Holy Grail for interest rate policy. Assuming interest is the price of money, there should therefore be a correlation between changes in interest rates and changes in the general price level. In other words, managing interest rates should allow a central bank to manage the general level of prices, and therefore, so it is said, influence the level of consumer demand. But empirical evidence denies this. The little-known Gibson’s paradox proves that there has been no such correlation, and instead, it is the price level and nominal interest rates that correlate, as shown in Figure 1 below, which is of Britain’s experience, covering a period of 225 years of relatively free markets.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      The bond yield is of Consols undated stock, which with little variation acts as an effective proxy for wholesale borrowing costs, since it lacks the pull of a gross redemption yield.

      Contrast the correlation in Figure 1 with the lack of correlation in Figure 2, which shows no correlation between wholesale borrowing costs and the rate of price inflation.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Keynes, no less, named the phenomenon as a paradox in 1930, confirming the observations of Thomas Tooke in 1844 and then the eponymous Alfred Gibson, who wrote about it in an article for Banker’s Magazine in 1923. But because no one, including luminaries such as Keynes himself, Irving Fisher, Milton Friedman, and even Knut Wicksell, the Swedish economist who is remembered for his pioneering work on interest rates, managed to crack the paradox.

      The solution of Gibson’s paradox turns out to be very simple, and I wrote a paper on it for Goldmoney in 2015. A businessman, allocating capital for the manufacture of a product, in his calculations had an important point of reference that could not be ignored: the price for which he might expect to sell his product. If the price was trending higher, he could afford to pay a higher rate of interest, the converse also being true. This tendency would be particularly marked if the expected profit for his product was experienced by other manufacturers, in other words the general level of prices was rising. Then we would find that the increased demand for monetary capital would be bid up to alter the ratio between savings and consumption until a new balance was found.

      It also informs us of something else, and that is business is prepared to bid up for savings, instead of savings being merely a matter of savers deciding to defer a portion of their consumption. Consequently, central banks using interest rates to manipulate the savings rate is bound to fail, because it overrides rather than supplements the vital link between demand for capital, which emanates from business, and its supply from savers who would at the margin prefer to spend rather than save.

      If it is great enough, the suppression of interest rates at some point will encourage businesses to invest more capital in production, but the motivation is no longer driven by expectations of future demand but by the opportunity for access to artificially cheapened borrowing. The propensity to save is materially reduced, fundamentally disrupting the market mechanism.

      The reason for pointing all this out is that the empirical evidence also shows interest rates are ineffective as a tool of monetary policy for the purpose of controlling the general level of prices. But since the explanation eluded Keynes et. al. it was designated a paradox and simply ignored. Why did all the leading economists since Tooke who addressed the phenomenon miss the solution? In their ivory towers they had little or no experience or understanding of what it takes to be a successful businessman.

      Nor, for that matter, have central bankers. Clearly, central bank policy with respect to interest rates is fatally flawed for this reason. That interest rates are not just the price of money but reflect the difference between possession of a good (not money!) and its future possession ties in the theory of exchange to Gibson’s paradox, not central bank assumptions that money is a separate good and interest is its price. It strikes at the heart of Keynesian economics and demolishes his understanding of how the boom and bust cycle should be managed.

      In Chapter 22 of his General Theory, Keynes put forward his own explanation of the business cycle which briefly was as follows. He believed that fluctuations in the propensity to consume played a part. In other words, changes in the relationship between consumption and savings he described elsewhere as being governed by “animal spirits” and “the paradox of thrift”. But that’s a cop-out and not an explanation. Secondly, he believed that changes in liquidity preference were a factor, an argument that echoes his savings paradox but at a business level. Again, that is not an explanation, because it assumes money withheld from investment lies idle: it does not, unless it is held in cash notes, Instead, it is always being redeployed elsewhere through the banking system.

      And thirdly, he cites the marginal efficiency of capital, an invention of his, which appears to describe the point at which the discounted value of an investment produces a return in excess of the rate of interest. This is also incorrect, the correct comparison being between alternative applications for the investment of capital. Furthermore, a businessman knows that in calculating the marginal efficiency of capital by discounting his investment over the life of a project is purely guesswork wrapped up in a mathematical model. He is better evaluating future markets for his product, where his knowledge and entrepreneurial instinct gives him an advantage, and then calculating the costs involved before deciding whether it is profitable for him.

      None of this explains the cyclical nature of the business cycle. Here, Keynes gets into a muddle, claiming the bust is the result of organised investment markets under the influence of purchasers largely ignorant of what they are buying, and speculators chasing a quick buck instead of making a reasonable estimate of the future yield of capital assets. It is the condition, Keynes claimed, which leads to over-optimistic and over-bought markets that fall with sudden and catastrophic force.

      Keynes clearly reckoned that as an economist he knew better than commercial businessmen their businesses clearing through markets, a view that persists with the neo-Keynesians planning monetary policy today, now developed even further into total control over markets.

      Without adequate explanation Keynes then assumes “the dismay and uncertainty of the future” accompanies a collapse in the marginal efficiency of capital, followed by an increase in liquidity preference and hence a rise in interest rates. One would have thought the rise in interest rates was the prelude to the collapse in the marginal efficiency of capital and increasing liquidity preferences, rather than the way round Keynes assumes.

      Much of the problem with Keynes’s economics are with his slippery definitions, many of which have now entered the economic lexicon. But this cursory examination of Chapter 22 on the business cycle in his General Theory reveals the principal errors that guide central bank policy makers to this day. Nowhere is there mentioned the role of bank credit expansion.

      For a better understanding of the business cycle we turn to some basic pre-Keynesian theory.

      What happens when there is no change in the money quantity

      Before we can move on to what drives a boom and bust business cycle, we first must understand the condition of an economy with no change in the quantity of money. It matters not what the money is, only that it is accepted by everyone as money. That is to say, a commodity with the sole function of acting as an intermediary between the exchange of labour for goods and services and to facilitate the choice between different goods and different services. The root of exchange is not the money, but that it facilitates comparisons of value between goods.

      It is therefore the basis behind the division of labour, famously described by French economist, Jean-Baptiste Say in 1803 in the following terms:

      It is worthwhile to remark that a product is no sooner created than it, from that instant, affords a market for other products to the full extent of its own value. When the producer has put the finishing hand to his product he is most anxious to sell it immediately, lest its value should diminish in his hands nor is he less anxious to dispose of the money he may get for it; for the value of money is also perishable but the only way of getting rid of money is in the purchase of some product or other. Thus, the mere circumstance of creation of one product immediately opens a vent for other products.

      And

      Money performs but a momentary function in this double exchange and when the transaction is finally closed it will always be found that one kind of commodity has been exchanged for another. (A Treatise on Political Economy – 1803)

      Bear in mind that this was written in uncertain times for France, following the collapse of assignats and mandats territoriaux, two forms of state-issued currency during the previous decade —hence the rejoinder about disposing of money immediately. Otherwise, it is a fair description of how producers and consumers, always different but the same people, use money and of its true purpose.

      The import behind these two statements was subsequently given the title of Say’s law. They were so obviously true that Keynes had a problem getting around it so that an economic role could be created for the state, which was the hidden purpose behind his General Theory. His solution was to minimise any mention of Say’s law and to restrict it to one reference early on (page 26). And that reference was another of his slippery definitions:

      “Thus Say’s law, that the aggregate demand price output as a whole is equal to its aggregate supply price for all volumes of output is equivalent to the proposition that there is no obstacle to full employment.”

      This is not Say’s law. What is aggregate demand price output? It is pure nonsense as is aggregate supply price for all volumes of output. These high-sounding phrases deflect attention from the truisms in Say’s law, that we divide our labour to maximise our vendible output so that we can acquire the goods and services we need and desire. No mention is made of full employment. There will always be unemployment among those unable to work, the workshy, the sick and the elderly. But they need either their own savings to draw upon or benefactors to support them. Family, charities and the state perform this function, but in all these cases support must come from those that produce. Say’s law is not and never was equivalent to the proposition that there is no obstacle to full employment.

      As to the unemployment question in the wider sense, neo-Keynesian manipulation of money and support for businesses that do not serve the consumer to his satisfaction have coincided with the rise of unemployment.

      It will become obvious that the quantity of money in the economy is irrelevant for its efficient functioning, so to have a fixed amount of circulating currency will not impair the workings of the economy in any way. Goods and services are produced solely for the satisfaction of consumers and other businesses, all of which in turn also produce goods and services for others. The economy continually evolves, and through free markets scarce capital is deployed by entrepreneurs to be used as efficiently as possible for profits. The supply of capital comes from consumers’ savings together with money put aside for the purpose by producers themselves.

      Consumers are encouraged by producers to defer some of their consumption by compensating them with an amount that exceeds the value they place on possession of current goods over possession at a future date. The mechanism, interest rates, are bid up to achieve the level of deferred consumption required to fund the necessary investment to produce the products demanded in the future. They will reflect three components: the originary rate, which can be equated to a general time preference reflecting the different values of possession and future possession; the risk of loss of capital; and an entrepreneurial value because bond holders and business owners share a common objective even though contractually their interests are separated.

      The monetary capital made available to the entrepreneurial class is put together with other factors of production, such as labour, commodities, machinery, part-manufactures and an establishment to produce goods and services.

      Thus, an economy has all that is needed to supply the evolving demands of consumers: a fixed quantity of money, part of which is retained in savings for investment in production, production and finally consumption itself. Businesses fail and others emerge. The division of labour ensures everyone is employed, with the exception of those unable to work, who are carried by others who are or supported by their savings.

      Individual prices of goods and services rise and fall, according to changes in demand and the anticipation of producers to meet those changes. It is this environment where Schumpeter’s description of creative destruction applies. Production of goods and services that fail to produce expected returns are quickly abandoned and capital in all its forms redeployed to more productive and profitable uses. The arbiter in this process is always the consuming customer. Any business that fails to satisfy the customer fails itself.

      In our example of a fixed money economy, government involvement merely redistributes existing money. Because a government is always bureaucratic and interventionist it detracts from the economic progress otherwise enjoyed, which is why a high spending government suppresses economic progress, while a low spending government permits a greater degree of economic progress. Non-monetary government intervention only changes the level of economic progress and does not lead to cyclical behaviour.

      The effect of changes in the quantity of money

      Now let us amend our model to accept fluctuations in the quantity of circulating money. We can now see that there is an additional factor to the conditions of Say’s law; there is money whose economic origin is not that of a selling producer or spending consumer. But being wholly fungible with existing money it does not have a different identity.

      Without the state’s intervention, the source of extra money is bank credit. Banks create loan facilities, which in turn create deposits when loans are drawn down through payments made in the course of business. During a period of bank credit expansion, all banks will see increasing levels of deposits, and when these lead to imbalances for individual banks they are reconciled through wholesale money markets.

      The expansion of bank credit favours the banks themselves and the bank’s lending customers, who get to benefit and spend it first before prices can reflect the additional currency in circulation. As the extra money is spent into increasingly wider distribution, it drives prices up behind it in what is known as the Cantillon effect. Eventually, it is fully absorbed into economic activities. But since production resources are relatively inelastic, the purchasing power of currency units declines as the greater quantity of money chases the same goods. This is reflected in an increase in the general level of prices.

      But during the process of new money being absorbed into the economy, a cycle of economic activity develops. Initially, the extra money in circulation creates demand for goods and services that did not previously exist. A temporary boom in business activity takes place but only for those goods and services in the locations where the new money is spent. But unrecorded is the transfer of wealth that benefits early receivers of the new money, from those who only receive it later. The losers are obviously the savers whose capital buys less and the workers whose salaries are devalued.

      The spread of rising prices affects businesses as well. As the extra money percolates through the economy they find that the cost of raw materials and commodities rises, driven by excess demand for them created by the additional money. Shortages of skilled labour develops, and the cost of labour rises. Waiting times for manufacturing equipment lengthens, and their prices rise as well. Other prices rise, such as establishment costs and the cost of energy. Meanwhile, the availability of monetary capital continues to expand as banks compete for business in the boom times.

      At some point, the expansion of the banks’ balance sheets informs the prudent banker that even though times are good, some caution must prevail. The fall in the currency’s purchasing power has led to money being diverted from savings to consumption, because the time preference between possession and non-possession has increased. Even though higher levels of spending ensure money continues to circulate through the banks, they need to raise interest rates to maintain the balance between the extension of bank credit and the security of customer deposits. This is because there is an inherent risk for banks in funding term credit through checking accounts which can be drawn down without notice instead of term deposits.

      The rise in interest rates disrupts producers’ business models and they begin to consider reallocating capital to other applications. As we have seen, in the case where there is a stable quantity of money, this is not a problem, essentially because changing business strategies in a fixed-money economy is a random process. Furthermore, the extension of production time that tends to accompany artificially supressed interest rates, illustrated by Hayek’s triangle, is never an issue in a fixed-money economy. But the effect of an expansion of money has been to ensure all businesses tend to act in the same way at the same time. A significant bias develops, so that the majority of businesses end up at a crossroads at the same time, reassessing businesses that have become unprofitable.

      Commercial banks are sensitive to these changed conditions and are only too aware of the risks of extended lending to unprofitable businesses. At the same time therefore, bankers in the majority of banks arrive at the same conclusion, again all together: they should reduce lending risks for fear of being caught out in a slump.

      The expansion of bank credit commences and gathers pace over an extended period of time, and then comes to a sudden halt. It is clear that the origin of the business cycle is found in an increase in the quantity of circulating money in the form of bank credit. Without changes in the quantity of bank credit, a cycle of business activity cannot develop.

      The disruptive role of central banks

      For some time, central banks have been extending their interventionist roles in an attempt to smooth the business cycle. Keynes and others wrote the textbooks for them, justifying the management of the banking sector through monetary policy, always ensuring the banks have enough liquidity on hand. They have extended their role from acting as lender of last resort to now flooding the economy with money even before it slumps, planning to “normalise” interest rates once confidence has returned.

      We have seen that Gibson’s paradox negates this cornerstone of monetary policy. Figure 2 above illustrates the lack of correlation between the rate of inflation, which oscillates wildly while interest rates in free markets remained relatively stable.

      Until price inflation took off in the 1970s, there was no correlation between wholesale borrowing rates and price inflation, not even in wartime. Yet, even though it has been shown that extreme interest rate suppression in the form of negative rates fails to affect price inflation — at least as measured by the consumer price index — central banks persist in supressing interest rates.

      Instead of managing the cycle of bank credit, more recently central banks that had yet to do so have now resorted to outright monetary inflation, as nations attempt to defray the economic consequences of the Covid-19 panic. The Bank of Japan and the European Central Bank had even resorted to negative interest rates long before Covid-19, expanding their money quantities through quantitative easing continually to finance government spending. From June 2008, before the Lehman failure, the sum of the assets of the five major central banks (excluding China) totalled $4.4 trillion; they climbed to $21.8 trillion by the end of June. 10-year government bond yields range from 0.6% for the US to minus 0.47% for Germany and minus 0.51% for Switzerland. While it is not the place of any economist to second guess originary interest rates, these bond yields are clearly the result of their suppression through monetary inflation.

      Then there is the seen and the unseen. We see the money handed out by the government to selected businesses and individuals funded by monetary inflation and deem it to be a good thing. What we do not see is the transfer of wealth that accompanies it from all citizens through monetary debasement. And as that debasement accelerates even further, it will only cease when there is no more wealth for the government and its central bank to acquire from the population by inflationary means.

      Monetary expansion has now become unstoppable, because if it was to be stopped the accumulated economic distortions from as long ago as the Second World War — certainly in the case of nationalisations — would unwind. Unemployment would rise, demand collapse, and so prices would fall — a definite no-no for the Keynesians. Governments would lose their inflationary funding and would have to attract genuine savings, which in America and the UK in particular hardly exist today as a result of Keynesian policies. Interest rates would have to rise to normalise savings rates, but at the same time government demand for funding would deprive the productive economy of the monetary capital necessary for it to restructure itself.

      There is now no policy alternative for democratically elected governments and their central banks to pursuing inflationary policies to their bitter end. They have failed to extend the boom so that the slump can be avoided. They do not understand that the boom bust cycle is a phenomenon of bank credit expansion, instead making the error of believing in Keynes’s animal spirits — reiterated by Alan Greenspan twenty years ago as irrational exuberance.

      No one has a mandate to rein it in. Ultimately, the ever-increasing pace of monetary expansion required to postpone the bust will destroy the currencies of all nations following neo-Keynesian monetary policies. And with the currencies will go all the personal wealth through the mechanism of inflationary transfer.

      Covid-19 is only bringing forward a certain end to the abject failure and the hubris behind neo-Keynesian nonsense.

    • Hurricane Hanna Makes Landfall In Texas 
      Hurricane Hanna Makes Landfall In Texas 

      Tyler Durden

      Sat, 07/25/2020 – 18:45

      Update (18:45ET): The National Weather Service (NWS) reports Hurricane Hanna “made landfall on Padre Island, Texas, at 500 PM CDT about 15 miles north of Port Manfield, Texas, with maximum sustained winds of 90 mph.” 

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      The National Hurricane Center (NHC) warns of “life-threatening storm surge will continue along portions of the Texas coast from Port Mansfield to Sargent, where a storm surge warning is in effect.” 

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Storm chasers are reporting Hanna’s high winds have already damaged buildings in the Port Mansfield area. 

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      *  *  *

      Update(9:05ET): Tropical Storm Hanna was upgraded to a hurricane on Saturday morning, making it the first hurricane of the 2020 Atlantic hurricane season. 

      Hurricane #Hanna Advisory 10A: Noaa Hurricane Hunters and Doppler Weather Radars Find Hanna Has Become the First Hurricane of the 2020 Atlantic Hurricane Season. https://t.co/VqHn0u1vgc

      — National Hurricane Center (@NHC_Atlantic) July 25, 2020

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      The National Weather Service (NWS) said NOAA hurricane hunters and Doppler weather radars show the system has maximum sustained winds of 75mph, meeting the 74mph threshold of Category 1 hurricane status. The system is moving west at 9 mph, located about 100 miles east-southeast of Corpus Christi, Texas. 

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      AP News notes Hanna could produce life-threatening conditions for south Texas. 

      A storm surge warning in effect from Baffin Bay to Sargent was extended south of the bay to Port Mansfield, Texas. Storm surge up to 5 feet (1.5 meters) was forecast for that area. People were advised to protect life and property from high water.

      Tornadoes were also possible Saturday for parts of the lower to middle Texas coastal plain, forecasters said. A hurricane warning remained in effect for Port Mansfield to Mesquite Bay, and a tropical storm warning was still in effect from Barra el Mezquital, Mexico, to Port Mansfield, Texas, and from Mesquite Bay to High Island, Texas.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Forecasters said Hanna could bring 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 centimeters) of rain through Sunday night — with isolated totals of 18 inches (46 centimeters) — in addition to coastal swells that could cause life-threatening surf and rip current conditions. – AP News 

      Hurricane Hanna’s Landfall Forecast  

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Several spaghetti models show Hurricane Hanna’s potential path after landfall. 

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      The tropics are very active.  

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Meteorologist Ryan Maue tweeted Thursday there are even more disturbances that need to “be watched closely into next week.” 

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      *  *  *

      Tropical Storm Hanna was located by satellite and weather radars to be about 230 miles east of Port Mansfield, Texas, with winds about 50 mph. The storm continues to intensify in the Gulf of Mexico as it churns west-northwest at nine mph.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Hanna is expected to make landfall along the Texas coast Saturday afternoon. Winds could increase above 50 mph with higher gusts in the overnight hours. Tropical storm warnings have been posted for Galveston Bay, including the cities of Corpus Christi, Rockport, and Victoria. As the storm makes landfall, it could bring torrential rains, which may cause flash flooding across southern Texas.

      KBTX meteorologist Max Crawford provides an update on Hanna. 

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      NHC’s latest update on the storm. 

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Tropical Storm Gonzalo is another system heading to the Caribbean waters this weekend. Barbados and the Windward Islands are expected to see tropical storm winds and heavy rains. 

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      And if that isn’t enough, Hurricane Douglas is approaching Hawaii, which is currently the strongest storm on the planet, packing winds up to 120 mph. There’s also a tropical wave emerging off the west coast of Africa that could strengthen into a hurricane next week.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      The 2020 hurricane season is certainly off to a busy start. 

    • Pentagon Releases Satellite Photos Of Greatly Expanded Russian Presence In Libya
      Pentagon Releases Satellite Photos Of Greatly Expanded Russian Presence In Libya

      Tyler Durden

      Sat, 07/25/2020 – 18:20

      Oh the irony, lost on all those whose foreign policy memory is limited to merely days or weeks ago: the United States has accused Russia of arming Libyan rebels. 

      So suddenly Washington thinks this is a “bad” thing? 

      “The Russian Federation continues to violate UN Security Council Resolution UNSCR 1970 by actively providing military equipment and fighters to the front lines of the conflict in Libya,” AFRICOM said in a statement Friday.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      File image via SOFREP

      The new accusations are based on satellite imagery released by the Pentagon which it says shows continuing kinetic operations by Putin-linked security firm Wagner in support of Gen. Khalifa Hafter’s Libyan National Army (LNA).

      Despite a UN arms embargo officially being in place on Libya, multiple external state actors are involved in arming up either side of the conflict, especially Turkey in supporting of the Tripoli GNA, and UAE and Egypt in support of pro-Haftar forces, which are based in the east of the war-torn country.

      The AFRICOM statement includes:

      “Russia continues to play an unhelpful role in Libya by delivering supplies and equipment to the Wagner group,” said Marine Corps Maj. Gen. Bradford Gering, Africom director of operations. “Imagery continues to unmask their consistent denials.”

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      New DoD released satellite imagery showing alleged Russian military hardware on the ground at al Khadim Airfield, Libya. Source: Defense.gov

      Wagner mercenaries have also been long reported to have a presence in Syria, where Moscow and the US have nearly entered full on the ground conflict at times over the past years. As we detailed last year, Wagner is headed by Yevgeny Prigozhin, commonly known as “Putin’s chef” due to his Kremlin catering contracts and longtime friendship with the Russian president. 

      Russia has withstood US regime change efforts in both Libya and Syria, with the former country now enduring the chaos unleashed by Muammar Gaddafi’s 2011 overthrow by US-NATO intervention. The US and Europe used jihadist “rebels” to oust and execute Gaddafi, after which jihadists were weaponized in Syria against Assad. 

      Haftar is seen by many, including the Trump administration, as a “stabilizer” of chaotic Libya – a kind of Gaddafi 2.0 figure, ironically enough. 

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Via Defense.gov

      Though Russian mercenaries have long been documented as on the ground in eastern Libya, the new Pentagon satellite images reveal their operations may be much larger than previously thought:

      As Africom has documented in a series of media releases, the U.S. assesses that Russia supplied Wagner forces operating in Libya with fighter aircraft, military armored vehicles, air defense systems and supplies, further complicating the situation and increasing the risk for miscalculation, leading to continued and needless violence in Libya.

      “Imagery reflects the broad scope of Russian involvement,” said Army Brig. Gen. Gregory Hadfield, Africom deputy director of intelligence. “They continue to look to attempt to gain a foothold in Libya.”

      The latest imagery details the extent of equipment being supplied to Wagner. Russian military cargo aircraft, including IL-76s, continue to supply Wagner fighters. Russian air defense equipment, including SA-22s, are present in Libya and operated by Russia, the Wagner Group or their proxies. Photos also show Wagner utility trucks and Russian mine-resistant, ambush-protected armored vehicles are also present in Libya.

      “Russian involvement is evident — which the Kremlin lies about every time they deny it,” the statement said further.

      Of course, the Kremlin has accused Washington of the same thing, and on a much larger scale, in places like Syria, Iraq, and Libya. As we’ve said many times, Libya is re-emerging as the next major Mediterranean proxy war. 

      Already, Egypt and Turkey are close to direct conflict as each side threatens open military intervention in the North African Mediterranean country. 

    • New Opportunities For Marxists: Climate Change And Coronavirus
      New Opportunities For Marxists: Climate Change And Coronavirus

      Tyler Durden

      Sat, 07/25/2020 – 17:50

      Authored by Thorstein Polleit via The Mises Institute,

      In The Communist Manifesto (1848) Karl Marx (1818–83) and Friedrich Engels (1820–95) predicted that capitalism would lead to the impoverishment of the laboring class. Why? Well, to raise profit on capital invested, Marx and Engels argued, entrepreneurs (the capitalists) would exploit the workers. They would reduce wages and worsen working conditions by, say, increasing working hours. From that viewpoint, Marx and Engels put forward an immiseration theory of capitalism.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Worker “Exploitation”

      Marxists would not argue that workers’ wages would decline in absolute terms, but certainly in relative terms: the wage incomes of the many would rise less than the incomes of the capitalists, thereby making the former poorer compared to the latter over time. Especially in times of crisis, which are inevitable and recurrent in a capitalist economy, workers would be hit particularly hard, causing their economic and financial conditions to fall further behind of those of the capitalists.

      Capitalist “Imperialism”

      To make things worse, Marxists argue that capitalism would bring about violent colonialism and imperialism. As capitalists pay less for labor than what is appropriate, the workers cannot buy all available products. Profit-seeking capital is, therefore, seeking to open up new markets in other parts of the world. Conflicts over who controls what arise among nations, paving the way toward war. This is, in fact, the message Vladimir Lenin (1870–1924) hammered home to his readers in his 1917 book Imperialism: The Highest Stage of Capitalism.

      If capitalism is bad – if it brings exploitation, misery, and even war to a great many people, and all this comes to the benefit of the capitalists – isn’t it rightful and consequential to do everything to overcome capitalism and replace it with socialism-communism, the alternatives said to bring peace, equality and happier life for the people in this world? Sound economics reveals that the Marxist critique of capitalism, as well as the high-flying enthusiasm for socialism-communism, is tantamount to outright intellectual confusion.

      What Capitalism Really Is: Peaceful Cooperation

      Many people do not know what capitalism really means. Capitalism is the social and economic order in which the means of production are privately owned. In its “pure” form, capitalism means unconditional respect of people’s private property, free markets, and, most importantly, a form of state that is confined to protecting people and their property against aggression from inside and outside the country’s borders. “Pure” capitalism is no doubt conducive to peaceful and productive cooperation nationally as well as internationally.

      It is capitalism that makes mass production possible – the production of goods and services for the consumption of the greatest number of people. The productivity gains that it creates result in a tendency toward a continuous increase in people’s average living standard. Producers are subject to the profit and loss principle: they are economically rewarded only if and when their products meet consumers’ preferences. If they don’t, entrepreneurs will suffer losses, forcing them to improve their output to the benefit of their customers.

      Pure capitalism not has only a built-in mechanism to improve the masses’ material well-being. What is particularly wonderful is that under pure capitalism, people’s wages do not depend on individual workers’ productivity, but the marginal productivity of labor in general. Assume a firm makes a productive innovation. To hire new labor, it has to pay higher wages compared to those paid by other employers. The latter, to retain their staff, will also have to offer a higher wage—to the benefit of less productive workers.

      It should also be noted here that pure capitalism encourages the division of labor among people, nationally and internationally. This, in turn, entices people to seek peaceful cooperation rather than conflict: everyone realizes that it pays off to cooperate, that this is mutually beneficial to all parties involved. In other words: pure capitalism is a recipe for peace. In a world of pure capitalism, there would simply be no reason for large-scale violent conflicts, let alone state wars.

      Interventionism vs. Capitalism

      Why do so many people harbor resentment or even hate against the concept of capitalism? One answer is that they presumably look around and see the many evils in this world, such as the recurrence of financial and economic crises; mass unemployment; bailout programs that make big corporations richer, disregarding the fate of small and medium-sized firms; chronically rising costs of living; growing income and wealth inequality; and growing geopolitical tensions and conflicts.

      Unfortunately, all these evils are attributed to capitalism. A fatal conclusion, though, because there is no pure capitalism, neither in the US nor in Europe, Asia, Latin America, or Africa. What we find are interventionist-collectivist and sometimes even socialist economic and societal systems. Especially in the Western world, basically all states, and the special interest groups that exert great influence over them, have succeeded in increasingly replacing what little is left of the capitalist system in recent decades.

      States have interfered in all areas of people’s lives. Be it education (kindergarten, schools, universities), health, pensions, transport, law and order, money and credit, or the environment, the states and their governments have become major players in markets for goods and services, turning free markets into hampered markets, raising taxes ever higher, and increasingly undermining and even destroying the institution of private property.

      Intervention Cripples the Wealth Creation Offered by Capitalism

      Sound economics tells us that interventionist-collectivist, let alone socialist, systems do not work to the greatest benefit of all. All these systems are much less efficient than pure capitalism in terms of material wealth creation—and even prove to be outright failures in the case of socialism. The particular problem with interventionist-collectivist systems is that to the uninformed observer they may well appear to be capitalism, resulting in all the evils of interventionism-collectivism being ascribed to capitalism.

      The truth, however, couldn’t be more different. Interventionism-collectivism works toward the elimination of capitalist remnants. The crises that these systems inevitably cause, the dissatisfaction they create among a great many people, are interpreted as a result of capitalism, and so, as a consequence, people call for ending capitalism, for replacing it with a better, more just and reliable economic and societal order. However, it would be naïve to assume that the problem is confined to a lack of insight into sound economics.

      Blaming Capitalism for the Evils Caused by States

      By no means less important are the ideologues on the political left. Knowing that the chances for establishing outright socialism-communism in the Western world through a violent upheaval have been fairly small in recent years, those in the Marxist tradition have adapted their strategy: they seek a gradual transformation of what is left of the free economic and societal system by discrediting capitalism, blaming all evil, all societal problems on capitalism, fictionalizing it as the nemesis of mankind.

      This, however, is an intentional misinterpretation of what is really going on. It is to give a wrong tint to reality—with tragic consequences. People heed the message—being propagandized over and over—that capitalism will seal their fate: that it makes the rich richer at the expense of the poor; causes ever greater financial and economic turbulence; doesn’t create enough and secure jobs; destroys the environment; and so forth. All this amounts to nothing more than giving a new face to Marx’s immiseration theory.

      Neo-Marxists: Not Waiting for the Revolution

      This plays into the hands of the Neo-Marxists who seek control over economic and societal affairs, striving to establish a “new world order.” The spread of interventionism is certainly a milestone in this direction. Because interventionism, if it is not halted and reversed, leads to socialism. And the logical culmination of socialism is a struggle for world dominance, as socialism cannot exist within limited areas of the earth’s surface, especially not if there are still more or less capitalist systems around.

      Marxists in the traditional sense may expect capitalism to make the world ripe for socialism. Neo-Marxists, in contrast, wouldn’t want to wait for things to turn their way; they seek action. Instilling fear among the people that capitalism cannot overcome the world’s pressing economic, social, and environmental problems, that capitalism is the root cause of all these plights, characterizes the strategy of the Neo-Marxists. That said, “climate change” and the coronavirus pandemic are lucky coincidences for them.

      Climate Change

      Under the promise of preventing climate change, governments are meant to run truly radical market interventions: imposing taxes and manipulating prices of goods and services, thereby politically determining the size and structure of consumer and investment demand. In fact, under the well-sounding “climate change policy” label, far-left policies can push economies effectively into central planning: the ruling elite determines who produces what and when and at what costs, and who is to consume when and what.

      The Virus Panic

      The coronavirus epidemic offers to all the enemies of pure capitalism an even bigger opportunity to strike down what little is left of the free market system. With the help of coercive lockdowns—allegedly a measure to “fight the virus”—governments can directly destroy corporate capital, boycott global trade, and cause mass unemployment, thereby leaving a great many people despondent and receptive to even more interventionist-collectivist or even outright socialist policies.

      Fear is known to be the foundation of any government’s power. Neo-Marxists, and those in favor of establishing central global control, have increasingly incorporated this unfortunate truth into their political agitation to destroy what is left of the free market and free societal order, and all the more as their immiseration theory—the impoverishment of the masses under capitalism—has lamentably failed. Whether the Neo-Marxist onslaught can be successful or defeated is of paramount importance for the vast majority of people.

      Only Capitalism Can Deliver Needed Goods and Services

      Pure capitalism is the only viable economic and societal form of organization. In his Socialism: An Economic and Sociological Analysis from 1951 (first published in 1922 as Gemeinwirtschaft: Untersuchungen über den Sozialismus), Ludwig von Mises (1881–1973) noted: “Capitalism is that form of social economy in which all the deficiencies of the socialist system…are made good. Capitalism is the only conceivable form of social economy which is appropriate to the fulfilment of the demands which society makes of any economic organisation” (p. 220).

      Disregarding the sound economics’ teachings about capitalism and socialism and giving in to the ideas propagated by Neo-Marxism would ultimately lead to the destruction of the very foundations upon which the material well-being of billions of people on this globe rests. It would result in great misery, even starvation and violent conflicts. It is therefore high time to boldly expose the errors and confusions of interventionist-collectivist and socialist-Marxist ideology and courageously call for reestablishing pure capitalism.

    • "I Told My Wife I'm Gonna Be A Millionaire": Millions Of Unemployed Americans Are Flooding Into The Stock Market
      "I Told My Wife I'm Gonna Be A Millionaire": Millions Of Unemployed Americans Are Flooding Into The Stock Market

      Tyler Durden

      Sat, 07/25/2020 – 17:20

      It was just a couple of days ago that we published our report showing three charts that showed “The Shift From Prospering Online Brokerages To Retail Daytrader Mayhem”. 

      In that article, we pointed out what is becoming seismic shift in the trading world, where thanks to the seductive cocktail of both the Robinhood app being overtly easy to use and Dave Portnoy livestreaming himself daytrading on a daily basis, every Tom, Dick and Harry with a couple hundred bucks is jumping into the market and having a go at trying to make themselves rich – regardless of whether or not they have any clue what they are doing.

      Following up on that piece, last week the WSJ wrote an article sharing the same sentiment. “Everyone’s a Day Trader Now,” they wrote. In their article they note that e-Trade investors opened 260,500 retail accounts just in March alone. Robinhood logged 3 million new accounts over the same timeframe. They compared the influx into the market to the dot com boom of the late 1990s.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      As we said last week, Robinhood is making trading feel like a video game for people that have never done it before. 38 year old Sharmila Viswasam told the WSJ: “I feel like Sonic the Hedgehog, collecting my coins.”

      She started trading after her unemployment checks from her real estate job weren’t enough to support her. To get started, she read “Trading for Dummies” and watched YouTube videos. She calls her trading style “risky” and justified it by telling the WSJ: “Scared money makes no money.”

      She started with $25,000 and has parlayed it to $65,000 through July – all using her phone.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Viswasam / Photo: WSJ

      Granit Selimaj opened an account on Robinhood as soon as he turned 18 years old in December 2018. He says he was approved to trade options “moments” after filling out the application on the platform. He says he has avoided them so far, because he doesn’t really understand how they work. He sticks mostly to trading stocks. 

      “I’m a Level 2, and I don’t know much about that,” he said.

      26-year-old rental car-company employee Trae Williams said he started using Robinhood about 2 years ago, but really started paying attention to it during the pandemic. He told the WSJ: “There’s not much to spend money on, but also I can pay attention to it more. I have more time to do it.”

      “…in the wintertime, when it gets to be 20 degrees Fahrenheit here or it’s snowing and raining, [daytrading] is going to be a perfect hobby for grandpa,” said another Robinhood user, 66 year old Matt Miller. He says he has abandoned his buy and hold strategy to trading more actively since the pandemic began. 

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Miller / Photo: WSJ

      The number of individual investors in the market has more than doubled the usual level of activity this year, the article notes. This increased demand has had a self-fulfilling prophecy effect, sending shares of some companies soaring. But the addition of Robinhood traders to a stock isn’t exactly a bellwether of good things to come. In fact, it’s just the opposite.

      “Barclays examined trades by Robinhood customers between March and early June and concluded that the more they bought a specific stock, the worse that stock performed,” the Journal wrote. 

      One great example is the stock of Ideanomics, which was promoted on Twitter and in videos by retired police officer and new daytrader Stanley Barsch. He has over 70,000 Twitter followers and had been touting Ideanomics as the next big thing. He even interviewed the company’s CEO on a livestream for his followers.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Barsch / Photo: Facebook

      Hours after the interview, well known short seller Hindenburg Research released allegations that the company was engaged in an “egregious and obvious fraud”, including photoshopping pictures of its operations in China that it was including in its press releases.

      Shares plunged 21% that day and 40% the next day. Stan, who goes by the name “Stan the Trading Man” on Twitter, says he lost $27,000 on the trade.

      “Some people took to social media, accusing Mr. Barsch of engaging in pump and dump,” the Journal wrote. Stan sees things differently. “I told my wife earlier this year that I’m going to be a millionaire,” he said. Sure you are, Stan.

      Recall, this shift in the industry was captured beautifully in a series of Tweets from Bloomberg’s Morgan Barna, CFA a couple of weeks ago. She showed how trading volume had spiked significantly in Q1 and Q2 of 2020.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Next, she showed how Schwab has seen its revenue per trade collapse over the last 5 years, as the brokerage has tried to keep pace (or in some cases lead the charge) for lower commissions to help bring in new clients. 

      For all intents and purposes, commissions no longer seem to exist for stock trades and have been almost totally priced out of the industry.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Finally, she showed that interest in creating accounts continues to rise. Among the surprises we’ve seen during the Covid lockdown has been the fact that Americans are actually saving money and paying off credit cards, instead of spending it, with the economy melting down and the government wiring them free checks.

      They are also putting this money into brokerage accounts, as you can see below:

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      This lunacy in general is, of course, enabled by the Fed, behind the scenes, doing everything it can to make sure that the NASDAQ continues to hit new highs despite what has been an unprecedented economic collapse in the country.

      When the average American logs on to Twitter and sees the President (or worse, Larry Kudlow) bragging about the market despite tens of millions of people unemployed, we don’t blame them from meandering toward the honeypot that our country’s public markets have become.

      Unfortunately, what comes up must come down – and the new retail traders being lured into the market with promises of neverending all time highs and commission free trades – will likely be the first blood shed when the Fed’s ponzi scheme is inevitably exposed for what it truly is and comes crumbling down. 

    • Steele's "Primary Subsource" Was Alcoholic Russian National Who Worked With Trump Impeachment Witness At Brookings
      Steele's "Primary Subsource" Was Alcoholic Russian National Who Worked With Trump Impeachment Witness At Brookings

      Tyler Durden

      Sat, 07/25/2020 – 16:50

      Authored by Paul Sperry via RealClearInvestigations.com,

      The mysterious “Primary Subsource” that Christopher Steele has long hidden behind to defend his discredited Trump-Russia dossier is a former Brookings Institution analyst — Igor “Iggy” Danchenko, a Russian national whose past includes criminal convictions and other personal baggage ignored by the FBI in vetting him and the information he fed to Steele, according to congressional sources and records obtained by RealClearInvestigations. Agents continued to use the dossier as grounds to investigate President Trump and put his advisers under counter-espionage surveillance.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      The 42-year-old Danchenko, who was hired by Steele in 2016 to deploy a network of sources to dig up dirt on Trump and Russia for the Hillary Clinton campaign, was arrested, jailed and convicted years earlier on multiple public drunkenness and disorderly conduct charges in the Washington area and ordered to undergo substance-abuse and mental-health counseling, according to criminal records.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Fiona Hill: She worked at the Brookings Institution with dossier “Primary Subsource” Igor “Iggy” Danchenko (top photo), and testified against President Trump last year during impeachment hearings. AP Photo/Manuel Balce Ceneta

      In an odd twist, a 2013 federal case against Danchenko was prosecuted by then-U.S Attorney Rod Rosenstein, who ended up signing one of the FBI’s dossier-based wiretap warrants as deputy attorney general in 2017.

      Danchenko first ran into trouble with the law as he began working for Brookings – the preeminent Democratic think tank in Washington – where he struck up a friendship with Fiona Hill, the White House adviser who testified against Trump during last year’s impeachment hearings. Danchenko has described Hill as a mentor, while Hill has sung his praises as a “creative” researcher.

      Hill is also close to his boss Steele, who she’d known since 2006. She met with the former British intelligence officer during the 2016 campaign and later received a raw, unpublished copy of the now-debunked dossier.

      It does not appear the FBI asked Danchenko about his criminal past or state of sobriety when agents interviewed him in January 2017 in a failed attempt to verify the accuracy of the dossier, which the bureau did only after agents used it to obtain a warrant to surveil Trump campaign adviser Carter Page. The opposition research was farmed out by Steele, working for Clinton’s campaign, to Danchenko, who was paid for the information he provided.

      A newly declassified FBI summary of the FBI-Danchenko meeting reveals agents learned that key allegations in the dossier, which claimed Trump engaged in a “well-developed conspiracy of cooperation” with the Kremlin against Clinton, were largely inspired by gossip and bar talk among Danchenko and his drinking buddies, most of whom were childhood friends from Russia.

      The FBI memo is heavily redacted and blacks out the name of Steele’s Primary Subsource. But public records and congressional sources, who spoke on condition of anonymity, confirm the identity of the source as Danchenko.

      In the memo, the FBI notes that Danchenko said that he and one of his dossier sources “drink heavily together.” But there is no apparent indication the FBI followed up by asking Danchenko if he had an alcohol problem, which would cast further doubt on his reliability as a source for one of the most important and sensitive investigations in FBI history.

      The FBI declined comment. Attempts to reach Danchenko by both email and phone were unsuccessful.

      The Justice Department’s watchdog recently debunked the dossier’s most outrageous accusations against Trump, and faulted the FBI for relying on it to obtain secret wiretaps. The bureau’s actions, which originated under the Obama administration, are now the subject of a sprawling criminal investigation led by special prosecutor John Durham.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Rod Rosenstein: In an odd twist, a 2013 drunkenness case against Danchenko was prosecuted by then-U.S Attorney Rod Rosenstein, who ended up signing one of the FBI’s dossier-based wiretap warrants as deputy attorney general in 2017. (Greg Nash/Pool via AP)

      One of the wiretap warrants was signed in 2017 by Rosenstein, who also that year appointed Special Counsel Robert Mueller and signed a “scope” memo giving him wide latitude to investigate Trump and his surrogates. Mueller relied on the dossier too. As it happens, Rosenstein also signed motions filed in one of Danchenko’s public intoxication cases, according to the documents obtained by RCI.

      In March 2013 — three years before Danchenko began working on the dossier — federal authorities in Greenbelt, Md., arrested and charged him with several misdemeanors, including “drunk in public, disorderly conduct, and failure to have his [2-year-old] child in a safety seat,” according to a court filing. The U.S. prosecutor for Maryland at the time was Rosenstein, whose name appears in the docket filings.

      The Russian-born Danchenko, who was living in the U.S. on a work visa, was released from jail on the condition he undergo drug testing and “participate in a program of substance abuse therapy and counseling,” as well as “mental health counseling,” the records show. His lawyer asked the court to postpone his trial and let him travel to Moscow “as a condition of his employment.” The Russian trips were granted without objection from Rosenstein. Danchenko ended up several months later entering into a plea agreement and paying fines.

      In 2006, Danchenko was arrested in Fairfax, Va., on similar offenses, including “public swearing and intoxication,” criminal records show. The case was disposed after he paid a fine.

      At the time, Danchenko worked as a research analyst for the Brookings Institution, where he became a protégé of Hill. He collaborated with her on at least two Russian policy papers during his five-year stint at the think tank and worked with another Brookings scholar on a project to uncover alleged plagiarism in Russian President Vladimir Putin’s doctoral dissertation — something Danchenko and his lawyer boasted about during their meeting with FBI agents. (Like Hill, the other scholar, Clifford Gaddy, was a Russia hawk. He and Hill in 2015 authored “Mr. Putin: Operative in the Kremlin,” a book strongly endorsed by Vice President Joe Biden at the time.)

      “Igor is a highly accomplished analyst and researcher,” Hill noted on his LinkedIn page in 2011.

      “He is very creative in pursuing the most relevant of information and detail to support his research.”

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Strobe Talbott of Brookings with  Hillary  Clinton:  He connected with Christopher Steele and passed along a copy of his anti-Trump dossier to Fiona Hill. AP Photo/Carolyn Kaster

      Hill also vouched for Steele, an old friend and British intelligence counterpart. The two reunited in 2016, sitting down for at least one meeting. Her boss at the time, Brookings President Strobe Talbott, also connected with Steele and passed along a copy of his anti-Trump dossier to Hill. A tough Trump critic, Talbott previously worked in the Clinton administration and rallied the think tank behind Hillary. 

      Talbott’s brother-in-law is Cody Shearer, another old Clinton hand who disseminated his own dossier in 2016 that echoed many of the same lurid and unsubstantiated claims against Trump. Through a mutual friend at the State Department, Steele obtained a copy of Shearer’s dossier and reportedly submitted it to the FBI to help corroborate his own.

      In August 2016, Talbott personally called Steele, based in London, to offer his own input on the dossier he was compiling from Danchenko’s feeds. Steele phoned Talbott just before the November election, during which Talbott asked for the latest dossier memos to distribute to top officials at the State Department. After Trump’s surprise win, the mood at Brookings turned funereal and Talbott and Steele strategized about how they “should handle” the dossier going forward.

      During the Trump transition, Talbott encouraged Hill to leave Brookings and take a job in the White House so she could be “one of the adults in the room” when Russia and Putin came up. She served as deputy assistant to the president and senior director for European and Russian affairs on the National Security Council from 2017 to 2019.

      She left the White House just before a National Security Council detailee who’d worked with her, Eric Ciaramella, secretly huddled with Democrats in Congress and alleged Trump pressured the president of Ukraine to launch an investigation of Biden and his son in exchange for military aid. Democrats soon held hearings to impeach Trump, calling Hill as one of their star witnesses.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Congressional investigators are taking a closer look at tax-exempt Brookings, which has emerged as a nexus in the dossier scandal. As a 501(c)(3) non-profit, the liberal think tank is prohibited from lobbying or engaging in political campaigns. Gryffindor/Wikimedia

      Under questioning by Republican staff, Hill disclosed that Steele reached out to her for information about a mysterious individual, but she claimed she could not recall his name. She also said she couldn’t remember the month she and Steele met.

      “He had contacted me because he wanted to see if I could give him a contact to some other individual, who actually I don’t even recall now, who he could approach about some business issues,” Hill told the House last year in an Oct. 14 deposition taken behind closed doors. 

      Congressional investigators are reviewing her testimony, while taking a closer look at tax-exempt Brookings, which has emerged as a nexus in the dossier scandal.

      Registered with the IRS as a 501(c)(3) non-profit, the liberal think tank is prohibited from lobbying or engaging in political campaigns. Specifically, investigators want to know if Brookings played any role in the development of the dossier.

      “Their 501(c)(3) status should be audited, because they are a major player in the dossier deal,” said a congressional staffer who has worked on the investigation into alleged Russian influence.

      Hill, who returned to Brookings as a senior fellow in January, could not be reached for comment. Brookings did not respond to inquiries.

      Ghost Employee

      As a former member of Britain’s secret intelligence service, Steele hadn’t traveled to Russia in decades and apparently had no useful sources there. So he relied entirely on Danchenko and his supposed “network of subsources,” which to its chagrin, the FBI discovered was nothing more than a “social circle.”

      It soon became clear over their three days of debriefing him at the FBI’s Washington field office – held just days after Trump was sworn into office – that any Russian insights he may have had were strictly academic.

      Danchenko confessed he had no inside line to the Kremlin and was “clueless” when Steele hired him in March 2016 to investigate ties between Russia and Trump and his campaign manager.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Christopher Steele, former British spy, leaving a London court this week in a libel case brought against him by a Russian businessman. Dossier source Danchenko’s drinking pals fed him a tissue of false “rumor and speculation” for pay— which Steele, in turn, further embellished with spy-crafty details and sold to his client as “intelligence.” (Victoria Jones/PA via AP)

      Desperate for leads, he turned to a ragtag group of Russian and American journalists, drinking buddies (including one who’d been arrested on pornography charges) and even an old girlfriend to scare up information for his London paymaster, according to the FBI’s January 2017 interview memo, which runs 57 pages. Like him, his friends made a living hustling gossip for cash, and they fed him a tissue of false “rumor and speculation” — which Steele, in turn, further embellished with spy-crafty details and sold to his client as “intelligence.”

      Instead of closing its case against Trump, however, the FBI continued to rely on the information Danchenko dictated to Steele for the dossier, even swearing to a secret court that it was credible enough to renew wiretaps for another nine months.

      One of Danchenko’s sources was nothing more than an anonymous voice on the other end of a phone call that lasted 10-15 minutes.

      Danchenko told the FBI he figured out later that the call-in tipster, who he said did not identify himself, was Sergei Millian, a Belarusian-born realtor in New York. In the dossier, Steele labeled this source “an ethnic Russian close associate of Republican U.S. presidential candidate Donald Trump,” and attributed Trump-Russia conspiracy revelations to him that the FBI relied on to support probable cause in all four FISA applications for warrants to spy on Trump adviser Carter Page — including the Mueller-debunked myth that he and the campaign were involved in “the DNC email hacking operation.”

      Danchenko explained to agents the call came after he solicited Millian by email in late July 2016 for information for his assignment from Steele. Millian told RCI that though he did receive an email from Danchenko on July 21, he ignored the message and never called him.

      “There was not any verbal communications with him,” he insisted. “I’m positive, 100%, nothing what is claimed in whatever call they invented I could have said.”

      Millian provided RCI part of the email, which was written mostly in Russian. Contact information at the bottom of the email reads:

      Igor Danchenko
      Business Analyst
      Target Labs Inc.
      8320 Old Courthouse Rd, Suite 200
      Vienna, VA 22182
      +1-202-679-5323

      At the time, Danchenko listed Target Labs, an IT recruiter run by ethnic-Russians, as an employer on his resumé. But technically, he was not a paid employee there. Thanks to a highly unusual deal Steele arranged with the company, Danchenko was able to use Target Labs as an employment front.

      It turns out that in 2014, when Danchenko first started freelancing regularly for Steele after losing his job at a Washington strategic advisory firm, he set out to get a security clearance to start his own company. But drawing income from a foreign entity like Steele’s London-based company, Orbis Business Intelligence, would hurt his chances. 

      So Steele agreed to help him broker a special “arrangement” with Target Labs, where a Russian friend of Danchenko’s worked as an executive, in which the company would bring Danchenko on board as an employee but not put him officially on the payroll. Danchenko would continue working for Steele and getting paid by Orbis with payments funneled through Target Labs. In effect, Target Labs served as the “contract vehicle” through which Danchenko was paid a monthly salary for his work for Orbis, the FBI memo reveals.

      Though Danchenko had a desk available to use at Target Labs, he did most of his work for Orbis from home and did not take direction from the firm. Steele continued to give him assignments and direct his travel. Danchenko essentially worked as a ghost employee at Target Labs.

      Asked about it, a Target Labs spokesman would only say that Danchenko “does not work with us anymore.”

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Brian Auten: He wrote the memo on the FBI’s interview with the Primary Subsource, which is silent about Danchenko’s criminal record. Patrick Henry College

      Some veteran FBI officials worry Moscow’s foreign intelligence service may have planted disinformation with Danchenko and his network of sources in Russia. At least one of them, identified only as “Source 5” in the FBI memo, was described as having a Russian “kurator,” or handler.

      “There are legions of ‘connected’ Russians purveying second- and third-hand — and often made-up — due diligence reports and private intelligence,” said former FBI assistant director Chris Swecker. “Putin’s intelligence minions use these people well to plant information.”

      Danchenko has scrubbed his social media account. He told the FBI he deleted all his dossier-related electronic communications, including texts and emails, and threw out his handwritten notes from conversations with his subsources.

      In the end, Steele walked away from the dossier debacle with at least $168,000, and Danchenko earned a large undisclosed sum.

      The FBI interview memo, which is silent about Danchenko’s criminal record, was written by FBI Supervisory Intelligence Analyst Brian Auten, who was called out in the Justice inspector general report for ignoring inconsistencies, contradictions, errors and outright falsehoods in the dossier he was supposed to verify.

      It was also Auten’s duty to vet Steele and his sources. Auten sat in on the meetings with Danchenko and also separate ones with Steele. He witnessed firsthand the countless red flags that popped up from their testimony. Yet Auten continued to tout their reliability as sources, and give his blessing to agents to use their dossier as probable cause to renew FISA surveillance warrants to spy on Page.

      As RCI first reported, Auten teaches a national security course at a Washington-area college on the ethics of such spying.

    • Gundlach Says "Classic Bear Market Rally" Reminds Him Of 1999
      Gundlach Says "Classic Bear Market Rally" Reminds Him Of 1999

      Tyler Durden

      Sat, 07/25/2020 – 16:20

      Jeffrey Gundlach, the billionaire chief investment officer of DoubleLine Capital, was quoted by Reuters on Friday as saying the stock market’s parabolic move in the last couple of months reminds him of the days right before the Dot Com bust. 

      Gundlach, who oversees a $138 billion fund that is primarily invested in fixed income assets, was troubled by the rapid surge in government debt that has propped up the ailing economy

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      He said the dollar would be pressured to the downside as deficits rise. Dollar weakness could boost equities in the short term, he said, adding that “ultimately it weakens as the debt situation is really remarkably bad for a developed country.”

      Gundlach voiced concerns about the V-shaped recovery in the S&P500 from its March lows, along with how much of the gains are concentrated in a handful of technology stocks. 

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      He said the concentration in equity market leadership is mainly in FANG stocks (that is Amazon, Apple, Microsoft, and Google) and retail investors panic buying stocks “is classic bear market rally activity,” and a reminder of what he believes could be similar to the days right before the Dot Com implosion. 

      Gundlach warned today’s situation is “way worse because we don’t have the ability to cut interest rates” and have “used all the tools that are typically reserved for fighting economic problems.”

      Gundlach said there could be more opportunities in overseas markets. His latest warning is similar to the DoubleLine Total Return Bond Fund webcast on July 9, where he said stocks are likely to fall from its “lofty” perch. 

      For more color on why Gundlach is convinced today’s move in stocks is a “bear market rally,” the first chart below is the ratio of tech-heavy Nasdaq 100 over S&P500, hitting levels not seen since the Dot Com peak as investors panic buy FANG stocks. 

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      In early July, the ratio breached the Dot Com peak, implying high-flying tech stocks were more overvalued today than right before the bust in late 1999/2000. Shown below, the ratio has since faded below the 2000 peak, due mainly to valuation concerns.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Nasdaq 100 remains disconnected from reality as treasury yields slide due to stalling recovery

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Gold soars to decade high. Gundlach mentioned in his July webcast that he was still bullish on precious metals.  

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Gold rises as negative-yielding debt market value increases. 

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      While Gundlach fears 1999, many are more concerned the current bear-market bounce is more akin to the 1930s collapse. Either way, this is far from over…

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Gary Shilling believes a 1930s-style decline in the stock market is just ahead… 

    Digest powered by RSS Digest

    Today’s News 25th July 2020

    • Patriotic Dissent: How A Working-Class Soldier Turned Against "Forever Wars"
      Patriotic Dissent: How A Working-Class Soldier Turned Against “Forever Wars”

      Tyler Durden

      Sat, 07/25/2020 – 00:05

      Authored by Steve Early and Suzanne Gordon via Counterpunch.org,

      When it comes to debate about US military policy, the 2020 presidential election campaign is so far looking very similar to that of 2016. Joe Biden has pledged to ensure that “we have the strongest military in the world,” promising to “make the investments necessary to equip our troops for the challenges of the next century, not the last one.”

      In the White House, President Trump is repeating the kind of anti-interventionist head feints that won him votes four years ago against a hawkish Hillary Clinton. In his recent graduation address at West Point, Trump re-cycled applause lines from 2016 about “ending an era of endless wars” as well as America’s role as “policeman of the world.”

      In reality, since Trump took office, there’s been no reduction in the US military presence  abroad, which last year required a Pentagon budget of nearly $740 billion. As military historian and retired career officer Andrew Bacevich notes, “endless wars persist (and in some cases have even intensified); the nation’s various alliances and its empire of overseas bases remain intact; US troops are still present in something like 140 countries; Pentagon and national security state spending continues to increase astronomically.”

      When the National Defense Authorization Act for the next fiscal year came before Congress this summer, Senator Bernie Sanders proposed a modest 10 percent reduction in military spending so $70 billion could be re-directed to domestic programs. Representative Barbara Lee introduced a House resolution calling for $350 billion worth of DOD cuts. Neither proposal has gained much traction, even among Democrats on Capitol Hill. Instead, the House Armed Services Committee just voted 56 to 0 to spend $740. 5 billion on the Pentagon in the coming year, prefiguring the outcome of upcoming votes by the full House and Senate.

      An Appeal to Conscience

      Even if Biden beats Trump in November, efforts to curb US military spending will face continuing bi-partisan resistance. In the never-ending work of building a stronger anti-war movement, Pentagon critics, with military credentials, are invaluable allies. Daniel Sjursen, a 37-year old veteran of combat in Iraq and Afghanistan is one such a critic. Inspired in part by the much-published Bacevich, Sjursen has just written a new book called Patriotic Dissent: America in the Age of Endless War (Heyday Books)

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Patriotic Dissent is a short volume, just 141 pages, but it packs the same kind of punch as Howard Zinn’s classic 1967 polemic, Vietnam: The Logic of WithdrawalLike Zinn, who became a popular historian after his service in World War II, Sjursen skillfully debunks the conventional wisdom of the foreign policy establishment, and the military’s own current generation of “yes men for another war power hungry president.” His appeal to the conscience of fellow soldiers, veterans, and civilians is rooted in the unusual arc of an eighteen-year military career. His powerful voice, political insights, and painful personal reflections offer a timely reminder of how costly, wasteful, and disastrous our post 9/11 wars have been.

      Sjursen has the distinction of being a graduate of West Point, an institution that produces few political dissenters. He grew up in a fire-fighter family on working class Staten Island. Even before enrolling at the Academy at age 17, he was no stranger to what he calls “deep-seated toxically masculine patriotism.” As a newly commissioned officer in 2005, he was still a “burgeoning neo-conservative and George W. Bush admirer” and definitely not, he reports, any kind of “defeatist liberal, pacifist, or dissenter.”

      Sjursen’s initial experience in combat—vividly described in his first book, Ghost Riders of Baghdad: Soldiers, Civilians, and the Myth of The Surge (University Press of New England)—“occurred at the statistical height of sectarian strife” in Iraq.  

      “The horror, the futility, the farce of that war was the turning point in my life,” Sjursen writes in Patriotic Dissent.

      When he returned, at age 24, from his “brutal, ghastly deployment” as a platoon leader, he “knew that the war was built on lies, ill-advised, illegal, and immoral.” This “unexpected, undesired realization generated profound doubts about the course and nature of the entire American enterprise in the Greater Middle East—what was then unapologetically labeled the Global War on Terrorism (GWOT).”

      A Professional Soldier

      By the time Sjursen landed in Kandahar Province, Afghanistan, in early 2011, he had been promoted to captain but “no longer believed in anything we were doing.”

      He was, he confesses, “simply a professional soldier—a mercenary, really—on a mandatory mission I couldn’t avoid. Three more of my soldiers died, thirty-plus were wounded, including a triple amputee, and another over-dosed on pain meds after our return.”

      Despite his disillusionment, Sjursen had long dreamed of returning to West Point to teach history. He applied for and won that highly competitive assignment, which meant the Army had to send him to grad school first. He ended up getting credentialed, while living out of uniform, in the “People’s Republic of Lawrence, Kansas, a progressive oasis in an intolerant, militarist sea of Republican red.” During his studies at the state university, Sjursen found an intellectual framework for his “own doubts about and opposition to US foreign policy.” He completed his first book, Ghost Riders, which combines personal memoir with counter-insurgency critique. Amazingly enough, it was published in 2015, while he was still on active duty, but with “almost no blowback” from superior officers.

      Before retiring as a major four years later, Sjursen pushed the envelope further, by writing more than 100 critical articles for TomDispatch and other civilian publications. He was no longer at West Point so that body of work triggered “a grueling, stressful, and scary four-month investigation”by the brass at Fort Leavenworth, during which the author was subjected to “a non-publication order.” At risk were his career, military pension, and benefits. He ended up receiving only a verbal admonishment for violating a Pentagon rule against publishing words “contemptuous of the President of the United States.” His “PTSD and co-occurring diagnoses” helped him qualify for a medical retirement last year.

      Sjursen has now traded his “identity as a soldier—the only identity I’ve known in my adult life—for that of an anti-war, anti-imperialist, social justice crusader,” albeit one who did not attend his first protest rally until he was thirty-two years old. With several left-leaning comrades, he started Fortress on A Hill, a lively podcast about military affairs and veterans’ issues. He’s a frequent, funny, and always well-informed guest on progressive radio and cable-TV shows, as well as a  contributing editor at Antiwar.com, and a contributor to a host of mainstream liberal publications. This year, the Lannan Foundation made him a cultural freedom fellow.

      In Patriotic Dissent, Sjursen not only recounts his own personal trajectory from military service to peace activism. He shows how that intellectual journey has been informed by reading and thinking about US history, the relationship between civil society and military culture, the meaning of patriotism, and the price of dissent.  

      One historical figure he admires is Marine Corps Major General Smedley Butler, the recipient of two Medals of Honor for service between 1898 and 1931. Following his retirement, Butler sided with the poor and working-class veterans who marched on Washington to demand World War I bonus payments. And he wrote a best-selling Depression-era memoir, which famously declared that “war is just a racket” and lamented his own past role as “a high-class muscle-man for Big Business, for Wall Street, and for the Bankers.”

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Reframing Dissent

      Sjursen contrasts Butler’s anti-interventionist whistle-blowing, nearly a century ago, with the silence of high-ranking veterans today after “nineteen years of ill-advised, remarkably unsuccessful American wars.”  Among friends and former West Point classmates, he knows many still serving who “obediently resign themselves to continued combat deployments” because they long ago “stopped asking questions about their own role in perpetuating and enabling a counter-productive, inertia-driven warfare state.”

      Sjursen looks instead to small left-leaning groups like Veterans for Peace and About Face: Veterans Against the War (formerly Iraq Veterans Against the War), and Bring Our Troops Home. US, a network of veterans influenced by the libertarian right. Each in, its own way, seeks to “reframe dissent, against empire and endless war, as the truest form of patriotism.” But actually taming the military-industrial complex will require “big-tent, intersectional action from civilian and soldier alike,” on a much larger scale. One obstacle to that, he believes, is the societal divide between the “vast majority of citizens who have chosen not to serve” in the military and the “one percent of their fellow citizens on active duty,” who then become part of “an increasingly insular, disconnected, and sometimes sententious post-9/11 veteran community.”

      Not many on the left favor a return to conscription.

      But Sjursen makes it clear there’s been a downside to the U.S. replacing “citizen soldiering” with “a tiny professional warrior caste,” created in response to draft-driven dissent against the Vietnam War, inside and outside the military. As he observes:

      “Nothing so motivates a young adult to follow foreign policy, to weigh the advisability or morality of an ongoing war as the possibility of having to put ‘skin in the game.’ Without at least the potential requirement to serve in the military and in one of America’s now countless wars, an entire generation—or really two, since President Nixon ended the draft in 1973–has had the luxury of ignoring the ills of U.S. foreign policy, to distance themselves from its reality.”

      At a time when the U.S. “desperately needs a massive, public, empowered anti-war and anti-imperial wave” sweeping over the country, we have instead a “civil-military” gap that, Sjursen believes, has “stifled antiwar and anti-imperial dissent and seemingly will continue to do so.” That’s why his own mission is to find more “socially conscious veterans of these endless, fruitless wars” who are willing to “step up and form a vanguard of sorts for revitalized patriotic dissent.” Readers of Sjursen’s book, whether new recruits to that vanguard or longtime peace activists, will find Patriotic Dissent to be an invaluable educational tool. It should be required reading in progressive study groups, high school and college history classes, and book clubs across the country. Let’s hope that the author’s willingness to take personal risks, re-think his view of the world, and then work to change it will inspire many others, in uniform and out.

    • Canada Approves "Glory Holes" For Safe Sex During Pandemic 
      Canada Approves “Glory Holes” For Safe Sex During Pandemic 

      Tyler Durden

      Fri, 07/24/2020 – 23:45

      The British Columbia Centre for Disease Control’s website has an entire section dedicated to sex education during the virus pandemic. Deep within, government leading health experts suggest “glory holes” could be the safest technique to minimize virus spreading during sex. 

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      “Use barriers, like walls (e.g., glory holes), that allow for sexual contact but prevent close face-to-face contact,” the Canadian CDC wrote. 

      As defined by Urban Dictionary, a “Gloryhole is a hole made in a thin wall or other type of partition where a man can insert their penis for sexual stimulation by an anonymous person on the other side.”

      The crowdsourced online dictionary for slang words also said these holes “can be found in bathrooms in the stall wall, in private rooms found in adult bookstores, and in dark rooms and labyrinths in bathhouses. Open rooms in bathhouses with many gloryholes are called a sucktorium and often have a raised level on one side of the holes to allow everyone to stand.”

      Canadian CDC also suggests “masturbation” and “virtual sex” are the best methods for getting turned on during the pandemic. Still, at the same time, it allows one to practice safe sex social distancing. If one is to “masturbate with a partner(s), physical distancing will lower your chance of getting COVID-19,” health officials added.

      Of course, the internet went crazy, here’s what people had to say about top Canadian officials  advising the public to use “glory holes.” 

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      The world is a whack place…

    • The Biden Campaign: Disease, Depression, & Racial Discord
      The Biden Campaign: Disease, Depression, & Racial Discord

      Tyler Durden

      Fri, 07/24/2020 – 23:25

      Authored by Jonathan Cohen via AmericanThinker.com,

      As the presidential election draws closer, the Biden campaign’s strategy has increasingly focused on blaming Trump for disease, depression, and racial unrest. Presidents, like coaches of sports teams, get too much credit during good times and too much blame when troubles occur. The last six months have brought a motherlode of bad luck on Trump’s campaign; the worst pandemic in a century; a massive lockdown of the economy; public health measures resulting in 40 million people out of work and living in extreme social isolation; weeks of rioting with widespread looting, unopposed attacks on police and the burning down of many businesses. While Trump is responsible for none of it, the Biden campaign strategy has become the party of disease, depression, and racial violence in order to aggravate all three crises.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      1. On the pandemic they have transformed the Chinese Communist Party’s role in the origin and internationalizing of the disease into the claim that Trump is a racist. They have transformed the FDA and CDC’s initial testing screwup into a Trump failure that caused the disease to take hold in the U.S. They attacked one possible treatment, hydroxychloroquine, as a dangerous drug simply because Trump suggested it might be helpful. They claimed that the few hundred people demonstrating against the lockdown were going to kill thousands while ignoring the fifteen million people violating social distancing norms to attack police. And worst of all, they offered little support for the administrations’ guidelines on slowing the spread.

      2. On the economy, they have encouraged overly restrictive lockdown policies that deepen and prolong the economic deterioration. They insisted on putting financial incentives into the supplemental appropriations to incentivize people to remain on unemployment rather than return to work.

      3. Worst of all, in response to the death of George Floyd, they have played down the demonstrators demands to abolish the police, refused to condemn rampant vandalism, opposed attempts to control rioting, and above all celebrated the massive turnouts at Black Lives Matter rallies even though they clearly created a serious contagion risk.

      With disease, depression, and chaos in the streets on Trump’s watch, it simply makes no sense for the Democrats to have Biden out at press conferences forced to take positions on lockdown measures, reopening the economy, and violence in the streets.

      What does the Biden campaign have to gain by having to answer questions about what he thinks about tearing down statues of Washington and Jefferson?

      While I agree that Biden was never too smart to begin with and does show signs of reduced mental capacity, his debate with Sanders showed that he is still capable of managing a debate. Given the current predicaments that the Trump administration is facing, if Biden makes it out of the debates without drooling, it may be enough to push him over the finish line.

      The real danger for the Democrats is that this could backfire. If the violence continues abetted by the Democratic officials demonizing police, imposing selective shutdowns of businesses, churches, and gatherings of more than ten people while enthusiastically promoting anti-police rioting that violates social distancing guidelines, prosecuting people for defending their homes and businesses against rioters while letting tens of thousands of violent criminals out of jail, then the public may grow weary of the chaos and shift the blame from Trump to the Democrats.

      Law and order is not a Trump electoral strategy. Basic safety is something that people desperately want and the radical Democratic mayors, governors, and city councilors are actively promoting crime and violence by their anti-police policies. CNN and MSNBC do their best to hide the deterioration of social order in our cities but people know what is happening and as they realize that it is their local official’s fecklessness that is making them unsafe, they may turn against the Democrats.

      The election is still three months away and the Democrats playbook comes with a lot of risk. While the current polling shows that promoting disease depression and racial discord may in the short run help Biden, in the long run it may well backfire as the public wises up to the Democrat’s destructive policies.  

    • Young Americans Have Used 33% Of Their Total Savings During COVID-19
      Young Americans Have Used 33% Of Their Total Savings During COVID-19

      Tyler Durden

      Fri, 07/24/2020 – 23:05

      The coronavirus shutdowns have had a dramatic impact on the broader economy (if not the stock market, which is almost back to all time highs) and few have been hit as hard as young Americans such as Millennials and Gen Zers. A recent survey from Travis Credit Union seeking to learn more about the money-saving habits of young Americans and how Covid-19 and the looming recession has impacted their savings, polled nearly 2,000 Millennials and Gen-Zers and here’s what they found:

      • 99% said that saving money is important to them.

      • 39% of young Americans have had to dip into their savings during Covid-19 and have used an average of one-third of their total savings

      • The top reasons for using savings during Covid-19: Food, utilities, mortgage or rent, credit card debt, and student loans.

      • 73% of respondents said Covid-19 will shape their financial habits moving forward.

      Some more details: on average, respondents began saving at the age of 19 and 90% have taken the first step and opened a dedicated savings account. While men have more saved than women on average ($16,631 and $11,649, respectively), over half of all respondents add to their savings on a monthly basis.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Looking into the future, 1 in 4 young Americans say that the most important thing they’re planning for is retirement, with just over half saying they have a savings account dedicated to their retirement goals. The most popular type of retirement account: 401(k) (34%), followed by a Roth IRA (20%) and separate personal savings account (20%).

      Even with good saving habits in place, 8 out of 10 respondents said that they’ve felt stress or anxiety when it comes to saving money. That’s no surprise, given the current economic climate – but they’ve learned to plan for times like these. In addition to a nest egg, 2 in 5 have and work to maintain an emergency fund. When asked what they are preparing for, many said potential job loss (33%), while others cited family emergencies (32%), medical emergencies (27%), and major home or car repair (8%).

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      As the survey concludes, in the face of the Covid-19 pandemic and an economic recession, Millennials and Gen Zers are learning the importance of having these funds tucked away for a rainy day. Three out of four say that the impact of coronavirus has changed their saving habits and that it will continue to shape their financial habits going forward.

      This is not the first time a crisis has changed young adults’ relationship with money. Many point to the 2008 economic recession as a financial influence, and one in three say it changed how they approach their saving habits. When asked, 42% said they began saving sooner, 21% became more aware of their spending, 19% began saving for retirement earlier than planned, and 18% pursued a career with job security.

      Of course, no matter how optimistic of a spin the poll creators want to put on it, if a third of young America’s savings has indeed already been wiped out, that means that a tremendous amount of future purchasing has been pulled into the future. And in an economy that has been notoriously hostile to young workers, it is unclear just how or where all these Millennials and GenZers will find the funds to replenish their savings funds. Worse, it also means that if four months of living under the pandemic is all it took for a third of their savings to be gone forever, we dread to think what will happen in 8 months if there is still no vaccine or cure, and the economy is still barely functioning as it is today.

    • Escobar: Brazil's "Money Laundering Scandal From Hell" That No One Wants To Talk About
      Escobar: Brazil’s “Money Laundering Scandal From Hell” That No One Wants To Talk About

      Tyler Durden

      Fri, 07/24/2020 – 22:45

      Authored by Pepe Escobar via The Strategic Culture Foundation,

      Two decades after the fact, a political earthquake that should be rocking Brazil apart is being met with thunderous silence…

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      What is now described as the Banestado leaks and the CC5gate is straight out of vintage WikiLeaks: a list, published for the first time in full, naming names and detailing what is one of the biggest corruption and money laundering cases in the world for the past three decades.

      This scandal allows for the healthy practice of what Michel Foucault characterized as the archeology of knowledge. Without understanding these leaks, it’s impossible to place in the proper context the sophisticated Hybrid War unleashed by Washington on Brazil initially via NSA spying on President Dilma Roussef’s first term (2010-2014), all the way to the subsequent Car Wash corruption investigation that jailed Lula and opened the way for the election of neofascist patsy Jair Bolsonaro as President.

      The scoop on this George Orwell does Hybrid War plotline is due, once again, to independent media: the small website Duplo Expresso, led by young, daring Bern-based international lawyer Romulus Maya, which first published the list.

      An epic 5-hour podcast assembled the three key protagonists who denounced the scandal in the first place, back in the late 1990s, and now are able to re-analyze it: then Governor of Parana state Roberto Requiao; federal prosecutor Celso Tres; and police superintendent, now retired, Jose Castilho Neto.

      Previously, in another podcast, Maya and anthropologist Piero Leirner, Brazil’s foremost analyst of Hybrid War, briefed me on the myriad political intricacies of the leaks while we discussed geopolitics in the Global South.

      The CC5 lists are herehere, and here. Let’s see what makes them so special.

      The mechanism

      Way back in 1969, the Brazilian Central Bank created what was described as a “CC5 account” to facilitate foreign companies and executives to legally wire assets overseas. For many years the cash flow in these accounts was not significant. Then everything changed in the 1990s – with the emergence of a massive, complex criminal racket centered on money laundering.

      The original Banestado investigation started in 1997. Federal prosecutor Celso Tres was stunned to find that from 1991 to 1996 no less than $124 billion in Brazilian currency was wired overseas. Between 1991 and 2002 that ballooned to a whopping $219 billion – placing Banestado as one of the largest money laundering schemes in history.

      Tres’s report led to a federal investigation focused in Foz do Iguacu in southern Brazil, strategically located right at the Tri-Border of Brazil, Argentina and Paraguay, where local banks were laundering vast amounts of funds through their CC5 accounts.

      This is how it worked. U.S. dollar dealers in the black market, linked to bank and government employees, used a vast network of bank accounts under the name of unsuspecting ”smurfs” and phantom companies to launder illegal funds from public corruption, tax fraud and organized crime, mainly through the Banco do Estado do Parana branch in Foz do Iguacu. Thus the Banestado case.

      The federal investigation was going nowhere until 2001, when police superintendent Castilho ascertained that most of the funds were actually landing in accounts at the Banestado branch in New York. Castilho arrived in New York in January 2002 to turbo-charge the necessary international money tracking.

      Through a court order, Castilho and his team reviewed 137 accounts at Banestado New York, tracking $14.9 billion. In quite a few cases, the beneficiaries had the same name of Brazilian politicians then serving in Congress, cabinet ministers and even former Presidents.

      After a month in New York, Castilho was back in Brazil carrying a hefty 400-page report. Yet, despite the overwhelming evidence, he was dropped out of the investigation, which was then put on hold for at least a year. When the new Lula government took power in early 2003, Castilho was back in business.

      In April 2003, Castilho identified a particularly interesting Chase Manhattan account named “Tucano” – the nickname of the PSDB party led by former President Fernando Henrique Cardoso, who was in power before Lula and always kept very close ties to the Clinton and Blair political machines.

      Castilho was instrumental in the set up of a Parliamentary Inquiry Commission over the Banestado case. But once again, this commission led to nowhere – not even voting a final report. Most companies involved negotiated a deal with the Brazilian Internal Revenue Service and thus ended any possibility of legal action in regard to tax evasion.

      Banestado meets Car Wash

      In a nutshell, the two largest political parties – Cardoso’s neoliberal PSDB and Lula’s Workers’ Party – which never really faced down imperial machinations and the Brazilian rentier class, actively buried an in-depth investigation. Moreover Lula, coming right after Cardoso, and mindful or preserving a minimum of governability, made a strategic decision of not investigating “tucano” corruption, including a slew of dodgy privatizations.

      New York prosecutors duly prepared a special Banestado list for Castilho with what really mattered for criminal prosecution to go though: the full circle of the money laundering scheme, with (i) funds first illegally remitted out of Brazil using the CC5 accounts, (ii) passing through the New York branches of the Brazilian banks involved, (iii) reaching offshore bank accounts and trusts in tax havens (e.g., Cayman, Jersey, Switzerland) and then finally (iv) going back to Brazil as – fully laundered – “foreign investment”, for the actual use and enjoyment of the final beneficiaries who first got the not accounted for money out of the country using the CC5 accounts.

      But then Brazilian Justice Minister Marcio Thomaz Bastos, appointed by Lula, nixed it. As superintendent Castilho metaphorically puts it, “this, deliberately, prevented (him) from going back to Brazil with the murdered body”.

      Well, whereas Castilho never got hold of this critical document, at least two Brazilian Congressmen, two Senators and two Federal Prosecutors – who would later on rise to fame as Car Wash investigation “stars”, Vladimir Aras and Carlos Fernando dos Santos Lima – did get it. Why and how the document – call it the “body bag” – never found its way into the criminal proceedings back in Brazil is an extra mystery wrapped up inside the whole enigma.

      Meanwhile, there are “unconfirmed” reports (several sources would not go on record on this) that the document might have been used for outright extortion of the individuals, mostly billionaires, featured on the list.

      Extra sauce in the judicial sphere comes from the fact that the provincial judge in charge of burying the Banestado case was none other than Sergio Moro, the self-serving Elliot Ness figure who in the next decade would rise to superstar status as the capo di tutti I capi of the massive Car Wash investigation and subsequent Justice Minister under Bolsonaro. Moro ended up resigning and is now de facto already campaigning for President in 2022.

      And here we hit the toxic Banestado-Car Wash connection. Considering what is already public domain about Moro’s modus operandi on Car Wash, as he altered names in documents with the single-minded objective of sending Lula to jail, the challenge now would be to prove how Moro “sold” non-convictions related to Banestado. With a very convenient legal excuse: with no “body” found (or formally brought back to criminal proceedings in Brazil), no one could be found guilty of murder.

      As we plunge into excruciating details, Banestado increasingly looks and feels like the Ariadne’s thread that may reveal the beginning of the destruction of Brazil’s sovereignty. A tale full of lessons to the learned by the whole Global South.

      The Black Market Dollar King

      Castilho, in that epic podcast, did ring alarm bells when he referred to $17 million that had transited in the Banestado branch in New York and then was sent, of all places, to Pakistan. Castilho and his team found that out only a few months after 9/11. I sent him some questions about it, and he answered, through Maya, that his investigators would dig it all up again, mentioning that a report did indicate the origin of these funds.

      This is the first time such information has surfaced – and the ramifications may be explosive. We’re talking about dodgy funds, arguably from drugs and weapons operations, leaving the Triple Border – Brazil, Argentina, Paraguay – which happens historically to be a top site for CIA and Mossad black ops.

      Financing may have been provided by the so-called King of The Black Market Dollars, Dario Messer, via CC5 accounts. It’s no secret that black market operators at the Tri-Border are all connected to cocaine trafficking via Paraguay – and also to evangelicals. That is the basis of what Maya, Leirner and myself have already described as Cocaine Evangelistan.

      Messer is an indispensable cog in the recycling mechanism inbuilt in drug trafficking. Money travels to fiscal paradises under imperial protection, is duly laundered, and gloriously resurrects on Wall Street and the City of London, with the extra bonus of the U.S. easing some of its current account deficit. Cue to Wall Street’s “irrational exuberance”.

      What really matters is free circulation of cocaine – why not hidden in the odd soya cargo, something that comes with the extra benefit of securing the well being of agro-business. That’s a mirror image of the CIA heroin ratline in Afghanistan I detailed here.

      Most of all, politically, Messer is the notorious missing link to judge Moro. Even mainstream O Globo newspaper was forced to admit, last November, that Messer’s shadowy businesses were “monitored” nonstop for two decades by different U.S. agencies out of Asuncion and Ciudad del Este in Paraguay. Moro for his part is an asset for two different U.S. agencies – FBI and CIA – plus the Dept. of Justice.

      Messer may be the joker in this convoluted plot. But then there’s the Maltese Falcon: There’s only one Maltese Falcon, as the John Huston classic immortalized it. And it’s currently lying in a safe in Switzerland.

      These happen to be the original, official documents submitted by construction giant Odebrecht to the Car Wash investigation which have been undisputedly “manipulated”, “allegedly” by the company itself. And “maybe”, in collusion with (then) judge Moro and the prosecution team led by Deltan Dallagnol. Not only, possibly, for the purpose of incriminating Lula and persons close to him, but also – crucially – deleting any mentions of individuals who should never be brought to light. Or Justice. And, yes, you guessed it right if you thought about the (U.S.-backed) Black Market Dollar King.

      The first serious political impact after the release of the Banestado leaks is that Lula’s lawyers Cristiano and Valeska Zanin have finally, officially requested for Swiss authorities to hand over the originals.

      Governor Requiao, by the way, was the only Brazilian politician to publicly ask Lula, back in February, to go for the documents in Switzerland. It is no surprise that Requiao was the first public figure in Brazil to now ask Lula to make all this content public once the former President gets hold of it.

      The real, not adulterated Odebrecht list of people involved in corruption is crammed with big names – including the Judiciary elite. Confronting the two versions, Lula’s lawyers may finally be able to demonstrate the falsification of “evidence” that led to the jailing of Lula but also, among other developments, the exile of Ecuador’s former President Rafael Correa, the imprisonment of his VP, Jorge Glas, the imprisonment of Peru’s former President Ollanta Humala and wife and, most dramatically, the suicide of Peru’s former two time President Alan Garcia.

      The Brazilian Patriot Act

      The big political question now is not to uncover the master manipulator who buried the Banestado scandal two decades ago.

      As anthropologist Leirner detailed it, what matters is that the leaking of the CC5 accounts focuses on the mechanism of the corrupted Brazilian bourgeoisie, with the help of their political and judicial partners – national and foreign – to solidify itself as a rentier class, but still always submissive to and kept in check by “secret”, imperial files.

      Banestado leaks and the CC5 accounts should be seen as a political opening for Lula to go for broke. This is all-out (Hybrid) War – and blinking is not an option. The geopolitical and geoeconomic project of destroying Brazilian sovereignty and turning it into an imperial sub-colony is winning – hands down.

      A measure of the explosiveness of Banestado leaks and CC5 gate has been the reaction by assorted limited hangouts: thundering silence, and that encompasses Leftist parties and alternative, supposedly progressive media. Mainstream media, for whom judge Moro is a sacred cow, at best spins it as “old story”, “fake news” and even a “hoax”.

      Lula is facing a fateful decision. With access to names so far shadowed by Car Wash, he may be able to unleash a neutron bomb and pull off a reset of the whole game – exposing a rash of Car Wash-linked Supreme Court judges, prosecutors, district attorneys, journalists and even Generals who received funds from Odebrecht overseas. Not to mention bring back Black Market Dollar King Messer – who controls the fate of Moro – to the frontline. This means directly pointing a finger at the U.S. Deep State. Not an easy decision to make.

      It’s now clear that creditors of the Brazilian state were, originally, debtors. Confronting different accounts it’s possible to square the circle on Brazil’s legendary “fiscal imbalance” – exactly as this plague is brought up, once again, with the intent of decimating the assets of the ailing Brazilian state. Finance Minister Paulo Guedes, a neo-Pinochetist and Milton Friedman cheerleader, has already warned he’ll keep selling state companies like there’s no tomorrow.

      Lula’s plan B would be to clinch some sort of deal that would bury the whole dossier – just like the original Banestado investigation was buried two decades ago – to preserve the leadership of the Workers’ Party as domesticated opposition, and without touching on the absolutely essential issue: how Guedes is selling out Brazil.

      That would be the line favored by Fernando Haddad, who lost the presidential election to Bolsonaro in 2018: a sort of Brazilian Bachelet (Chile’s former President), an ashamed neoliberal sacrificing everything to have yet another shot at power possibly in 2026.

      Were Plan B to happen it would galvanize the wrath of trade unions and social movements – the flesh and blood Brazilian working classes which are on the verge of being totally decimated by neoliberalism on steroids and the toxic collusion of the U.S.-inspired Brazilian version of the Patriot Act with the military schemes to profit from “Cocaine Evangelistan”.

      And all that after Washington – successfully – nearly destroyed national champion Petrobras, an initial objective of NSA spying. Zanin, Lula’s lawyer, also adds – maybe too late – that the “informal cooperation” between Washington and the Car Wash op was in fact illegal, according to decree number 3.810/02.

      What will Lula do?

      As it stands, as a development of the Banestado leaks, a first Banestado “VIP list” was gathered. It includes the current President of the Supreme Electoral Tribunal, who also serves as a Supreme Court Justice, Luis Roberto Barroso, bankers, media tycoons and industrialists. Car Wash prosecutor Deltan Dallagnol happens to be very close to the neoliberal Supreme Court Justice in question.

      The VIP list should be read as the road map for the money laundering practices of the Brazilian 0,01% – roughly estimated to be 20,000 families who own the close to one trillion dollar Brazilian internal debt. A great deal of those funds had been recycled back to Brazil as “foreign investment” through the CC5 scheme back in the 1990s. And that’s exactly how Brazil’s internal debt exploded.

      Still no one knows where the Banestado-enabled torrent of dodgy money actually landed, in detail. The “body bag” was never formally acknowledged to have been brought back from New York and never made its way into the criminal proceedings. Yet money laundering is still in progress – and thus the limitation period does not apply – so somebody, anybody would have to be thrown in the slammer. It doesn’t seem that will be the case anytime soon, tough.

      Meanwhile, enabled by the U.S. Deep State, transnational finance and local comprador elites, some in uniform, some in robes, the slow motion Hybrid War coup against Brazil keeps rambling on.

      And day by day inching closer to full spectrum dominance.

      Which bring us to the key, final question: what will Lula do about it?

    • Wealthy Elites Buy Private Islands To Isolate From "Coronavirus Storm" 
      Wealthy Elites Buy Private Islands To Isolate From “Coronavirus Storm” 

      Tyler Durden

      Fri, 07/24/2020 – 22:25

      As the virus pandemic continues to spread around the world, demand is surging for private islands as wealthy elites escape virus-infected metros. 

      The evolution of elites abandoning cities started during lockdowns. Folks with economic mobility packed up their bags and headed to rural communities and towns as major cities were engulfed with the virus and resulting lockdowns. Shortly after lockdowns eased, social-unrest exploded across the country, which was another major factor in the exodus. Let’s not forget, the rapid advances in technology have made it possible for white-collar folks to work remotely. 

      While fleeing to the suburbs isn’t enough for some folks, there appears to be increasing demand for private islands in recent months. 

      Financial Times spoke with real estate agents who say demand for “private hideaways” in the South Pacific, Caribbean, and remote parts of the US and Europe are becoming in high demand in the age of virus pandemic.  

      Trayor Lesnock, founder of Platinum Luxury Auctions, and the agent who is selling a small island in Fiji, called Mai Island, said the pandemic has allowed people to “reassess their lives” and pursue new living environments to isolate themselves. 

      “Owning an island has long been considered cool and desirable, but it’s often been a whimsical dream,” Lesnock said. “But with Covid-19, it’s starting to look a lot more practical, as people rush to find private spaces for themselves and keep a distance from others.”

      Here’s the 32-acre island he is selling in Fiji:

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Financial Times points out wealthy buyers aren’t just purchasing tropical islands, a 157-acre island, called Horse Island, off the south-west coast of Ireland recently sold for €5.5m ($6.6 million). 

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      “There’s obviously a thought process in people’s minds — particularly those that can afford these multimillion-euro properties — that they can just get away and self-isolate,” said Callum Bain, a surveyor at Colliers International, the real estate agent that helped sell the island. 

      Farhad Vladi, a German businessman who has sold 3,000 islands in five decades, said the pandemic had caused a “spike” in wealthy folks buying islands. He said, “less expensive islands in Scandinavia and Canada” are being purchased at the moment with buyers not even visiting the properties. 

      Agents said private islands off the coasts of countries that have strict social distancing, and low cases and deaths are in high demand. Many of these islands are based around Australia, New Zealand, and the South Pacific islands. 

      Pumpkin Island, a private island off Australia’s Great Barrier Reef Marine Park, was recently listed for $25 million, is described by owners as a “safe haven” from the pandemic.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      “We’ve weathered the [coronavirus] storm well and people are looking for places where they will have space and where they don’t feel like they’re on top of someone else . . . I definitely think that’s an attraction,” said Laureth Rumble, whose family owns Pumpkin Island.

      The trend is clear: wealthy elites are fleeing cities for rural communities, have now decided to buy private islands as the virus pandemic shows no signs of abating. 

    • Doug Casey On Why This Election Could Be The Most Important Since The US Civil War
      Doug Casey On Why This Election Could Be The Most Important Since The US Civil War

      Tyler Durden

      Fri, 07/24/2020 – 22:05

      Via InternationalMan.com,

      International Man: The hysteria surrounding COVID-19 and the government lockdown has completely changed in-person interactions.

      How do you think this will impact the way that Americans cast their vote in the presidential election?

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Doug Casey: It’s a very bad thing from Trump’s point of view. For one thing, it’s severely limiting the number and size of his rallies, which he relies on to keep enthusiasm up.

      More people are staying at home and watching television than ever before. And unless they glue their dial to Fox, they’ll gravitate towards the mainstream media, which is stridently anti-Trump. People who are on the fence hear authoritative-sounding talking heads on television, and it naturally influences them away from Trump.

      Furthermore, this virus hysteria is discouraging people from going out—especially older people who are roughly 80% of the casualties of this virus. They’re less likely to go to vote. But older people are most likely to be Trumpers because they’re culturally conservative. I’m assuming that the COVID hysteria will still be with us in November.

      Keeping his voters at home is one thing. But the effects that the hysteria is having on the economy are even more important. Presidents always take credit when the economy is good and are berated when it’s bad on their watch, regardless of whether they had anything to do with it. If the economy is still bad in November—and I’ll wager it’s going to be much worse—people will reflexively vote against Trump.

      With free money being passed out—the $600 per week in supplementary unemployment—between the state and federal payments, something like 30 million people are making more now than they were before the virus. In February, before the lockdown, there were about 3.2 million people collecting unemployment. Now, there are about 35 million. So, it seems we have over 30 million working-age people who are . . . displaced. That doesn’t count part-time workers, who aren’t eligible for unemployment but are no longer working.

      When the supplementary benefits end, so will the artificial good times.

      Worse, the public has come to the conclusion that a guaranteed annual income works. This virus hysteria has provided a kind of test for both Universal Basic Income and Modern Monetary Theory—helicopter money. So far, anyway, it seems you really can get something for nothing.

      Even Trump supports helicopter money because he knows it’s all over if today’s financial house of cards collapses.

      Most people will still be out of work when the free money ends. The recognition that the country is in a depression will sink in. They’ll look for somebody to blame. When things get seriously bad, people want to change the system itself.

      There’s now a lot of antagonism toward both free minds and free markets. Polls indicate that a majority of Americans actually support BLM, an openly Marxist movement. Forget about free minds—someone might be offended, and you’ll be pilloried by the mob. Forget about free markets—they’re blamed for all the economic problems, even though it’s the lack of them that caused the problem. The idea of capitalism is now considered undefendable.

      Widespread dissatisfaction with the system is obviously bad for the Republicans and good for the Democrats, who promote themselves as the party of change.

      The bottom line is that this whole episode with COVID is uniformly bad for whatever Trump or the Republicans represent. It’s bad for the old status quo.

      International Man: If people are afraid to go out, will it impact voter turnout?

      Doug Casey: Absolutely. As I just said, especially among older people who tend to be conservative Republican voters.

      But let’s be candid. This election is going to hinge on who cheats the best. And the Democrats have, over the years, developed far greater expertise in cheating than the Republicans. Saul Alinsky’s “Rules for Radicals” wasn’t written for the kind of people who vote Republican.

      For one thing, there’s going to be more emphasis on mail-in votes, which make it easier to cheat. You can register dead people as voters. You can register your dog as a voter. If the fraud is ever even discovered, it won’t be until long after the election.

      That’s only part of it, though. A high percentage of voting machines are computerized. Fraud by hacking voting machines is apparently easy to do—and it’s pretty untraceable. It’s just a matter of planning and boldness.

      One of the consequences of this widely acknowledged dysfunction is to delegitimize the whole idea of voting. As you know, I don’t believe in mass democracy, because it inevitably degrades into a system where the poorer citizens vote themselves benefits at the expense of the middle class. Basically, mob rule dressed in a coat and tie. But if the populace loses faith in “democracy” during a serious economic crisis—like this one—they’re going to look for a strong man to straighten things out. The US will look more and more like Argentina.

      International Man: In previous US elections, there were issues with voter fraud and delays tallying votes in a handful of US states.

      If this happens again, do you think that the election results could be contested? What would the implications of that be?

      Doug Casey: The election will be contested no matter which side wins because the country has become totally polarized. No matter who wins, the other side is going to be terminally unhappy with the result.

      This election is undoubtedly the most important one since 1860. The outcome of that was the War Between the States.

      The Democrats really want to change the very nature of the US. If they win, they’ll be able to do so, for several reasons. First, it seems almost certain that they’ll make Washington, DC, a state; there will then be 102 senators voting—and those two from Washington, DC, will without question be left-leaning Democrats. Second, the 20 million undocumented people—illegal aliens—now in the US will undoubtedly be made citizens; they lean heavily toward the Democrats. Third, they’ll expand the size of the Supreme Court and pack it with leftists.

      There could be more, of course. Perhaps they’ll reduce the voting age to 16; it’s already the case in Argentina and a growing number of other countries. Maybe they’ll even engineer a Constitutional Convention to change everything. The 2nd Amendment will go, of course, and the rest of the Bill of Rights would be heavily modified. Most of it’s already a dead letter—but that would formalize the change once and for all.

      These things would cement the Democrats in office. But please don’t think I support the Republicans. That would be like supporting tuberculosis just because it’s better than terminal cancer.

      It used to be pretty simple—the Republicans and the Democrats were just two sides of the same coin. Like Tweedledee and Tweedledum. Traditionally, one promoted the warfare state more, the other the welfare state. But it was mostly rhetoric; they were pretty collegial. Now, both the welfare and the warfare states have been accepted as part of the cosmic firmament by both parties. Now, it’s about cultural issues. Polite disagreement has turned into visceral hatred.

      The Dems at least stand for some ideas—although they’re all bad ideas. The Reps have never stood for any principles; they just said the Dems wanted too much socialism, too fast. Which is why they were always perceived—correctly—as hypocrites. Things have changed, however. Antagonism between the right and the left is no longer political or economic—it’s cultural. That’s much more serious.

      Look at the 20 Democratic candidates that were in the primary debates last summer. They were all radical collectivists, dedicated statists. The Republicans were all—with one exception—mealy-mouthed nonentities.

      I suspect the Dems will win in November because they actually have a core of philosophical beliefs—and that counts during chaos. It doesn’t matter that they’re irrational or evil. Then, whenever a really radical group takes over—and these people are serious radicals—they cement themselves in power. And it only takes a small number of people working as a cadre to do it.

      With the Russian Revolution, the hardcore Bolsheviks only numbered in the hundreds. That was enough to take control of a hundred million Russians—and stay in power for 70 years until they totally ran the wheels off the economy.

      The same thing happened with Fidel Castro in Cuba. He landed with only 50 or 60 guys, but once he took over the country, his apparatus was able to keep control of it.

      Serious, radical populists and socialists can pull that off. They can say they’re working for the people and can promise lots of free stuff. The hoi polloi want to hear that during a crisis—like the one we’re entering. Once they’re in, it’s almost impossible to get them out.

      International Man: Millennials will soon overtake the baby boomers as the largest adult population. They’ll have a growing impact on elections.

      How do you think this will affect the future direction of the country?

      Doug Casey: First of all, I’ve got to say that I don’t believe in democracy as a method of government. I understand how shocking that is to hear. Let me explain.

      There’s something to be said for a few people, who share traditions and culture and generally agree on how the world works, to vote on who will speak for them. That’s one thing—and it makes sense. But it’s very different from a gigantic agglomeration of very different, even antagonistic, people fighting for control and power.

      Winston Churchill said two things about democracy that are apposite.

      One is that “Democracy is the worst form of government, except for all the others.” I would argue that’s simply not true. Perhaps we can discuss the alternatives someday.

      The other thing that he said was, “The best argument against Democracy is a five-minute conversation with the average voter.” He’s absolutely right in that quip.

      I’d have less of a beef with democracy if the government was totally precluded from any intervention in the economy. The problem is that the institution of government itself is innately, intrinsically, and necessarily coercive.

      In a civilized society, however, coercion should be limited. What does that mean?

      It means that a government should be strictly limited to preventing force and fraud. That implies a police force to prevent domestic force and fraud, a military to protect the country from invasion, and a court system to allow people to adjudicate disputes without resorting to force.

      If the government did nothing but those things, sure you can vote. But votes would be largely irrelevant.

      Actually, an argument can be made that those three things are so important to the conduct of a civilized society that they shouldn’t be left to the kind of people that want to be elected.

      The market can and will do anything that’s needed or wanted, better and cheaper than a political instrument like the government. And at this point, the government doesn’t do any of those three things well. Instead, it tries to do absolutely everything else.

      But, getting back to millennials, Alexandria Ocasio-Cortez (AOC), and people like her, are both the current reality and the future of the Democratic Party — and of the US itself.

      Why? It’s irrational to make a 30-year-old barmaid into an icon. But she’s cute, vivacious, outspoken, and has a plan to remake the country. And she’s shrewd. She knows how to capitalize on envy and resentment. She realized she could win by ringing doorbells in her district, where voter turnout was very low, and about 70% are non-white. There was zero motivation for residents to turn out for the tired, corrupt, old hack of a white man she ran against.

      Nobody, except for a few libertarians and conservatives, are countering the purposefully destructive ideas AOC represents. And they have a very limited audience and not much of a platform. Arguing for sound money and limited government makes them seem like Old Testament prophets. Collectivism and statism are overwhelming the values of individualism and liberty.

      It’s exactly the type of thing the Founders tried to guard against by restricting the vote to property owners over 21, going through the Electoral College. Now, welfare recipients who are only 18 can vote, and the Electoral College is toothless.

      Of course, I don’t believe in either politics or voting. But, if you must have voting, it should only be for people 25 or over, who own a certain amount of property, so they have something to lose in the system. Most important, the government should have zero involvement in the economy. But, forget about it. Just the opposite is happening at an accelerating rate.

      For the last couple of generations, everybody who’s gone to college has been indoctrinated with leftist ideas. Almost all of the professors hold these ideas. They place an intellectual patina on top of emotion and fantasy-driven ideas.

      When the economy collapses in earnest, everybody will blame capitalism. Because Trump is rich, he’s incorrectly associated with capitalism. The country—especially the young, the poor, and the non-white—will look to the government to “do something.” They see the government as a cornucopia, and socialism as a kind and gentle way to expropriate the middle class.

      A majority of millennials are in favor of socialism. By 2050, whites will be a minority in the US. A straw in the wind is that a large majority of the people who commit suicide each year are middle-class white males—essentially, Trump supporters. The demographic handwriting is on the wall. Trump’s election in 2016 was an anomaly. A Last Hurrah.

      There’s no political salvation coming from the Republican party. Like Trump himself, it doesn’t have any core principles. It just reacts to the Dems and proposes less radical alternatives to their ideas. It doesn’t stand for anything. It’s only capable of putting forward empty suits, pure establishment figures like Bob Dole, Mitt Romney, or a Bush. Or a non-entity like Pence. That’s a formula for disaster in today’s demographic and cultural environment.

      *  *  *

      Misguided political and economic ideas have taken hold in the US and around the world. In all likelihood, the public will vote itself more and more “free stuff” until it causes an economic crisis. New York Times best-selling author Doug Casey and his team just released a free guide that will show you exactly how to survive and thrive in the coming crisis. Click here to download the PDF now.

    • Two Of Jeffrey Epstein's Properties, Including His NYC Mansion, Just Hit The Market For $110 Million
      Two Of Jeffrey Epstein’s Properties, Including His NYC Mansion, Just Hit The Market For $110 Million

      Tyler Durden

      Fri, 07/24/2020 – 21:45

      For the low low price of just $110 million, you could have the honor of owning both the Manhattan and Palm Beach residents of the now-deceased sex offender Jeffrey Epstein.

      Think about all the fodder that will provide for those boring dinner parties, when nobody has anything to talk about.

      The NYC property was listed by brokerage Modlin Group for $88 million and is located at 9 E. 71st St. If sold at that price, it could be a price record for a Manhattan townhouse, according to Bloomberg.

      The lengthy description of the NYC property on Modlin’s website describes it as the “last and largest of just a handful of goliath mansions built during its era in the 1930’s” and the “capstone property of the wealthiest and most prominent block of all of New York City.” The Mansion stands with provenance and commanding authority in a neighborhood steeped in New York’s richest history.

      “The property is uniquely positioned,” the listing continues “as the perpetual and unobtrusive perspective overlooking the Frick Museum to Central Park can never be blocked by new construction, a rarity in the ever-growing New York City landscape.”

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Epstein’s former NYC mansion

      It does not, however, mention Jeffrey Epstein. Bloomberg’s description of the property seems a bit more apt: “The Upper East Side home was one of the locations where Epstein was accused of luring underage girls to perform paid sex acts, according to an indictment last year, before the financier was found dead in his jail cell.”

      And of course, it also doesn’t note that before Epstein, the mansion was owned by his Les Wexner, a name that has repeatedly and mysteriously continued to pop up during various stages the Epstein investigations. “In 2011, the deed to the home was transferred from the company Wexner used to buy it to an Epstein company in the U.S. Virgin Islands,” Bloomberg writes. 

      But that doesn’t sound as great in an $88 million real estate listing, we guess. 

      Epstein’s Palm Beach mansion has been listed separately for $21.95 million. More of Epstein’s property is expected to hit the market in the coming weeks, with the proceeds going to Epstein’s estate. The estate has been established as a compensation fund for victims, according to the Wall Street Journal. 

      The agent who listed the Florida home “declined to comment”, which usually isn’t a great first step to selling a home.

    • Americans Are Buying Guns In Record Numbers & The Washington Post Isn't Pleased
      Americans Are Buying Guns In Record Numbers & The Washington Post Isn’t Pleased

      Tyler Durden

      Fri, 07/24/2020 – 21:25

      Authored by Ryan McMaken via The Mises Institute,

      Social scientists have been trying for many years to blame homicides on the presence of guns. A favorite tool in this quest is the use of studies that show a correlation between gun ownership and crime. These studies are then reported as “evidence” that the presence of guns causes crime.

      But there’s always been a problem with this attempt at showing causality between guns and homicides: causality can just as plausibly go the other way. That is, in times and places where the local population feels they are in danger of being crime victims, people are more likely to purchase guns for protection. So, rather than saying “guns cause crime,” we should be saying “crime causes guns.”

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      New Gun Purchases Soar as Uncertainty and Violence Increase

      We’re likely seeing this phenomenon at work now.

      In recent months, according to the firearm industry’s trade group National Shooting Sports Foundation (NSSF), Americans have purchased millions of guns:

      The early part of 2020 has been unlike any other year for firearm purchases—particularly by first-time buyers—as new NSSF® research reveals millions of people chose to purchase their first gun during the COVID-19 pandemic.

      Fox News reports:

      Gun sales have skyrocketed during the past three months, and a record-breaking 80.2 percent increase in sales was reported in May compared to last year, according to the shooting foundation. April’s data showed a 71.3 percent increase from 2019, and there was an 85.3 percent increase in March, according to information previously released by Small Arms Analytics and Forecasting.

      Many new gun owners during this period feared general unrest as a result of the government-mandated lockdowns. Potential first-time buyers still on the fence about buying a firearm in May were perhaps confirmed in their fears by the riots that erupted after the killing of George Floyd by Minneapolis police officers. Then, in the wake of the riots, serious violent crime appeared to spike. It was widely reported, for instance, that homicides in New York City spiked “21 percent in first six months of 2020.” Crime in other cities increased as well, ranging from a jump of over 200 percent in Nashville to 23 percent in Kansas City, Missouri.

      Naturally, seeing these news stories, many potential gun owners are more likely to conclude that they need a gun for personal protection. This is especially true when combined with a perception that police organizations cannot be relied upon to engage in crime prevention and enforcement. And this has indeed been the perception in many places where police have appeared unwilling to intervene in June’s riots.

      Many normal people would see these events as an illustration of how gun purchases result from fears over crime and uncertainty.

      But now, perhaps predictably, left-wing media organizations like the Washington Post are trying to turn this narrative around: people aren’t buying guns as a reaction to violence and social disarray, the Post insists. All those new gun purchases are what’s causing the violence in the first place.

      Says the Post:

      Americans purchased millions more guns than usual this spring, spurred in large part by racial animosity stoked by widespread protests over the killing of George Floyd in Minneapolis, as well as anxiety over the effects of the covid-19 pandemic.

      That gun-buying binge is associated with a significant increase in gun violence across the United States.

      The Post cites two new reports, one from the Brookings Institution and another from the University of California, both of which conclude that the rise in gun purchases has likely caused more “gun violence.”

      Note the careful use of language here, though: the gun purchases are “associated” with an increase in gun violence, since causality cannot be established. Indeed, near the bottom of the Post article, the author admits:

      The authors [of the Brookings and UC reports] caution that a study of this nature cannot prove causality, particularly at a time of massive social upheaval in a country dealing with an unprecedented public health crisis as well as a nationwide protest movement.

      Of course, if one is already committed to the idea that guns cause crime, it makes perfect sense that millions of Americans in early 2020—after passing a criminal background check—will buy guns, and then almost immediately use those guns to commit crimes.

      Moreover, it’s unclear that the two studies referenced by the Post article even imply that homicides result from more gun purchases.

      The Brookings study, for instance, is more of an op-ed than a study. It’s simply a review of some past events which were followed by surges in gun purchases, including the Sandy Hook and Parkland shootings. This appears to be true indeed, and is a helpful reminder that people do often purchase firearms in light of concerns over personal safety, or at least in light of concerns about future access to firearms.

      The UC study is a bit more specific, but even this is far too general to be of any use in concluding that gun purchases lead to violence. Because of data limitations, the UC report, of course, doesn’t establish that the people who bought firearms this year are responsible for any increase in crime that may be occurring. But it’s not even established that surges in gun purchases correlate with surges in crime at the city or neighborhood levels. This is critical, since trends in homicides are not really on a statewide or even metro-wide level. Homicide trends in the US tend to be dominated by homicides in a relatively small number of cities and neighborhoods. For example, the homicide rate in Baltimore is ten times that of the US overall. But this doesn’t mean homicides in Maryland are remarkably high.

      So, have firearms purchases surged near the neighborhoods in Chicago, New York, and Kansas City where surges in crime have also occurred? It’s possible, since people bordering the most violent neighborhoods may feel the most at risk. On the other hand, it’s also entirely possible that firearms sales are occurring in places relatively distant from the places with surging homicides. The UC study only appears to give a state-level reading on this. In other words, the study really tells us very little.

    • Pentagon Found "Vehicles Not Made On This Earth"; Rubio Hopes It's Alien, Not Chinese
      Pentagon Found “Vehicles Not Made On This Earth”; Rubio Hopes It’s Alien, Not Chinese

      Tyler Durden

      Fri, 07/24/2020 – 21:25

      Authored by Elias Marat via TheMindUnleashed.com,

      As secretive unit operating within the U.S. Department of Defense that is charged with investigating unidentified flying objects (UFOs) will make some of its findings public after it was revealed that the Pentagon has been recently briefed about “off-world vehicles not made on this earth.”

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      The once-covert UFO unit, which operates within the U.S. Navy’s Office of Naval Intelligence, will soon begin giving regular biannual updates on its research to the U.S. Senate’s Intelligence Committee, reports The New York Times.

      The Unidentified Aerial Phenomenon Task Force was formed in 2019 for the purpose of studying strange and inexplicable encounters between U.S. military pilots and unidentified aerial vehicles or UFOs in a bid “to standardize collection and reporting” of the various sightings.

      The program is the successor to the Advanced Aerospace Threat Identification Program, which also investigated UFOs but was dissolved in 2017 due to a lapse of funding. However, the team working on that program continued its work alongside the intelligence community even after it was officially disbanded.

      Luis Elizondo, a former military intelligence official who headed the Pentagon program, resigned in October 2017 after a decade with the program. Elizondo, along with a group of former government scientists and officials, remain convinced that objects of unkown origin have crashed on Earth and that these apparently extraterrestrial materials have been the focus of research.

      “It no longer has to hide in the shadows,” Elizondo told the Times.It will have a new transparency.”

      Former Senate majority leader and retired Sen. Harry Reid (D-NV), who led the push to fund the earlier UFO program, also believes that the studies should see the light of day.

      “After looking into this, I came to the conclusion that there were reports — some were substantive, some not so substantive — that there were actual materials that the government and the private sector had in their possession,” Reid said.

      So far, none of the alleged crash artifacts have been subject to public scrutiny or verification by independent researchers. However, some of the retrieved objects such as strange metallic debris were identified as being manmade – raising the possibility that they could be related to the military of U.S. rivals such as China or Russia.

      However, astrophysicist Eric Davis – who served as an advisor for the Pentagon program since 2007 – said that he had briefed the Pentagon in March about material retrieved from “off-world vehicles not made on this earth.”

      The Department of Defense subcontractor also said that he had concluded that the objects found were of the type “we couldn’t make … ourselves.”

      In an interview last month, President Donald Trump told his son Donald Trump Jr. that he had heard some “interesting” things about supposed aliens as well as the secretive Area 51 base near Roswell, New Mexico, that some theorists claim is a UFO crash site.

      The U.S. government has been increasingly open in its discussions of UFOs since last September, when  U.S. Navy admitted that widely-circulated video footage captured by Navy pilots that purportedly showed UFOs flying through the skies did depict actual “unknown” objects that flew into U.S. airspace.

      While officials admitted that they have been baffled by the unknown flying objects, they also admit that past encounters with them have been frequent. They also said that rather than calling them “UFOs,” they prefer the term unidentified aerial phenomena or UAPs.

      While it remains yet to be seen what information the once-secret UFO unit plans to lay out for lawmakers, acting intelligence committee chairman Sen. Marco Rubio (R-FL) is intent on finding out who or what precisely is behind the apparent UFO activity over U.S. military bases.

      “We have things flying over our military bases and places where we are conducting military exercises and we don’t know what it is — and it isn’t ours,” Rubio told CBS Miami in an interview last Friday.

      “Frankly, that if it’s something from outside this planet — that might actually be better than the fact that we’ve seen some technological leap on behalf of the Chinese or the Russians or some other adversary that allows them to conduct this sort of activity,” the hawkish senator added.

      For Reid, further transparency is needed.

      “It is extremely important that information about the discovery of physical materials or retrieved craft come out,” he said.

      Finally, all of this oddness sparked an interesting question from Mike Krieger

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    • "Shut The Eff Up Forever" – Morning Show Host Slams Biden For Calling Trump "The First Racist President"
      “Shut The Eff Up Forever” – Morning Show Host Slams Biden For Calling Trump “The First Racist President”

      Tyler Durden

      Fri, 07/24/2020 – 21:15

      Political affiliations and preferences are a funny thing, especially in the US, where black and latino Democratic voters repeatedly chose former Vice President Joe Biden over his more progressive rivals (Bernie, Warren), as well as DNC insider favorite Kamala Harris (whom the Bernie Bros successfully tarred as “Cop-mala”).

      Biden’s unwavering popularity with minority voters is one of the few legitimate strengths in the Biden column. Of course, the most jarring thing about Biden and his campaign right now is the fact that he’s reportedly been hiding out in his basement and only doing a limited number of speeches and media appearances. The few campaign-related interviews Biden does do are inexplicably buried by mainstream (ie Democratic Party-aligned) media orgs, if they’re covered at all.

      One example of this occurred earlier this week, when one of the most popular radio hosts in the country – “The Breakfast Club” radio host Charlamagne Tha God – derided Biden and his penchant to mistakenly violate progressive orthodoxies, saying he “wished [Biden] would shut the eff up forever” and go back to hiding in the basement.

      Biden’s mistake? Saying that Trump was the “first” racist American president. Even though the founding fathers and their immediate successors have been dead for centuries, Charlamagne insisted that at least 12 former presidents owned slaves. That’s not actually true. According to at least one source, eight former presidents owned slaves. Admittedly, this distinction doesn’t exactly dilute Charlamagne’s point.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Here’s the full quote, courtesy of Fox News:

      “I really wish Joe Biden would shut the eff up forever and continue to act like he’s starring in the movie ‘A Quiet Place’ because as soon as he opens his mouth and makes noise, he gets us all killed, OK?” the radio host said. “There’s already so many people who are reluctantly only voting for Joe Biden because he’s the only option and because Donald J. Trump is that trash.”

      Here’s the context. Charlamagne was referencing a comment Biden made Wednesday in one of his few public statements. The comment earned Biden a place as “Donkey of the Day” on “The Breakfast Club.”

      On Wednesday, Biden took aim at the president’s alleged racism, suggesting it’s historic compared to his predecessors.

      “No sitting president has ever done this… No Republican president has done this. No Democratic president. We’ve had racists and they’ve existed and they’ve tried to get elected president. He’s the first one that has,” Biden said.

      However, Charlamagne declared the presumptive Democratic candidate Thursday’s “Donkey of the Day” for his comments.

      Then, Charlamagne did something unexpected (for a morning show host on a show that mostly focuses on entertainment and pop culture): He wipped out the polling data.

      Charlamagne then cited polling that showed a wide enthusiasm gap between Biden and Trump, noting that it’s “not good” for the Democrat to be lacking excitement among his voters, and suggested Biden’s latest remarks will further contribute to the “lack of enthusiasm.”

      “Old white male leadership has failed America and there is nothing worse than an old white male [who] can’t recognize the faults and flaws of other old white males,” Charlamagne told listeners. “Racism is the American way. Donald Trump is not the first. And sadly, he won’t be the last, right? He’s just more overt with his racism than most presidents in recent times.”

      Biden better announce his VP pick – the candidate has promised to pick a black woman for the position – quick, Charlamagne said. Because the VP isn’t going to be able to ride the BLM wave into the Oval Office if he doesn’t make some commitments.

       

    • One Bank Warns Buying Gold Is The Only Hedge Left For The "Great Debasement"
      One Bank Warns Buying Gold Is The Only Hedge Left For The “Great Debasement”

      Tyler Durden

      Fri, 07/24/2020 – 21:05

      As far as Bank of America is concerned, there are just two themes one needs to know to explain the current “market” (which as the same Bank of America explained last week, is now manipulated to a never before seen extent): the Great Repression and Great Debasement.

      First the Great Repression – also known as “Don’t fight the Fed” –  which according to BofA CIO Michael Hartnett is the outcome of $8 trillion in central bank asset purchases in just three months in 2020, has crushed interest rates, corporate bond spreads, volatility & bears. The most perfect example of this repression: the US fiscal deficit soared from 7% to 40% of GDP in Q2’20…

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      … and less than one month later the volatility of US Treasury market fell close to all-time low.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Besides volatility, central bank repression works its magic on yields: case in point Italian & Greek 10-year government bonds which are down to 1%, while US Commercial Mortgage Backed Securities (CMBS) & IG corporate bonds down to 2%, meanwhile the 30-year US mortgage rate just dropped to a record all time low of 3%.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      As a result of this unprecedented repression (of reality), the Fed has made everyone a winner:

      Fed has made bulls in every asset class a winner…gold, bonds, credit, stocks, real estate all up big since March lows; levered cross-asset risk parity strategy at all-time high.

      It also means that BofA’s recently preferred “All-weather” portfolio consisting of equal parts of all assets, i.e., 25/25/25/25 stocks, bonds, cash, gold, is up a record 18% in the past 90 days (Chart 7), which is “astounding & abnormal” given 7% historic annual average.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      This “can’t lose” market has also led to fundamental shift in the zeitgeist, as the traditionally bearish narratives of Q2 such as a Democratic sweep, end of globalization, Japanification, narrow “lockdown” leadership of growth stocks is paradoxically morphing into bullish narratives. Here, Hartnett reminds is that “when the only reason to be bearish is there is no reason to be bearish” that’s when you sell. And sure enough, recent market moves justify getting defensive: the global equity market cap has round-tripped from $89tn to $62tn back to $87tn, with BofA warning that it is “hard to see financial conditions getting incrementally easier in July/Aug period of “peak policy” stimulus; summer dip in risk assets (e.g. SPX to 3050) likely.

      And yet, all good times come to an end – otherwise the Fed would have printed its way to utopia decades ago – and the with Great Repression in full force, it also means that the Fed is currently pursuing a just as Great Debasement.

      Echoing something we have also said, namely that with the bond market now nationalized by the Fed and no longer providing any useful inflationary (or deflationary) signals, the only remaining asset class with any sort of discounting qualities is gold…

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      … Hartnett writes that interest rate repression means “investors can’t hedge the inflationary risk of $11tn of fiscal stimulus via “short bonds”…so investors crowding into “short US dollar”, “long gold” hedges.

      Indeed, US dollar debasement is well underway as the default narrative for US economy with excess debt, insufficient growth, and maxed-out monetary & fiscal stimulus. However, local currency debasement is also underway everywhere else, and so the next market crisis will lead to an even bigger spike in the dollar as global monetary authorities are faced with an even bigger global synthetic short squeeze than the one which sent the USD soaring to all time highs in March.

      Which is why shorting the dollar to hedge debasement may be profitable for a while but eventually lead to catastrophic consequences.

      That leaves long gold as the only natural hedge to the central bank “all in” bet of kicking the can until something breaks. That something will likely be gold exploding higher first above $2,000… then $2,500… then $3,000 at which point the Fed’s control over fiat currencies, as well asthe illusion that there is no inflation, and the financial regime will finally collapse.

      As Hartnett condludes, “the correct historical analog is the late-1960s when themes of “smaller world”, “bigger government”, “monetary & fiscal excess” led to positive nominal returns but also inflection up in inflation.

      Secular market trend has been deflation (credit & tech) dominating inflation…$100 of EPS in 1995 now $1,500 in tech sector, but just $425 in everything else (Chart 9 and 10);

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      yet in 2021 GDP in dollar terms forecast to rise $1.3tn in China, $767bn in EU+UK, versus $612bn in US; global fiscal stimulus the other big 2020 trend…supports rotation from deflation to inflation…and traders note semiconductor stocks are already discounting ISM levels of >60 (Chart 11).

      Finally, one look at the price of gold – which just closed at an all time high…

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      … and it becomes clear that it is now just a matter of time before the financial world as we know it, will end.

    • San Francisco Mayor Blasts 'Woke' White BLM Supporters For Hijacking Movement
      San Francisco Mayor Blasts ‘Woke’ White BLM Supporters For Hijacking Movement

      Tyler Durden

      Fri, 07/24/2020 – 20:45

      Authored by Stacey Lennox via PJMedia.com,

      In an interview with Vogue Magazine, San Francisco Mayor London Breed discussed a range of issues. When asked about the current cultural moment, she said that she was overwhelmed by the response from people who are not black to the Black Lives Matter movement. However, she also expressed frustration with so-called “white allies.”

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      When she was asked if she had any critiques of the current demonstrations, she responded:

      I have a real problem with the takeover of the movement by white people.

      I want people to respect the opinions and feelings of Black people and allow us to decide what is in our best interest. I talk about the plan to reduce the police budget and reallocate those resources to the African American community, and a large number of non-Blacks reached out to tell me what I should do for the Black community. Then, they say what their community deserves because of their challenges as well. That really bothered me. The Black community [of San Francisco] is capable of speaking for ourselves and deciding what’s in our best interest.

      Then she answered a question as to whether for not she felt that the concerns of San Francisco’s black residents were being heard. Breed’s response was sharp criticism of the progressive movement:

      What’s happening in San Francisco now, and has for so many years, is you have a progressive movement made up of people who are mostly white and feel that they know what’s in the best interest of Black people.

      I’m over that.

      I think it’s important that we support and respect the Black people here enough to know that we have a mind of our own. Because half the policies pushed in San Francisco are “progressive policies” that don’t work for Black people. Because, if they did, why are things far worse for Black people here? In San Francisco, a city where less than 5 to 6% of the population is African American and yet we are disproportionately overrepresented in everything that’s bad: high school dropouts, arrests, homelessness. You name it.

      Thank you, Mayor Breed! Though it could be just as easily argued that progressive policies are bad for everyone. She presides over a city that had more drug addicts than high school students in January of 2019. It also spawned the Snapcrap app that tracked public defecation.

      The city also has one of the most progressive district attorneys in the country. Raised by domestic terrorists Bill Ayes and Bernadette Dorn, Chesa Boudin refuses to prosecute nearly all non-violent crimes. It is so bad Fox News Host Tucker Carlson did a series on San Francisco called American Dystopia:

      With Breed’s criticism of progressive policies, it becomes necessary to wonder why she is embracing one of the worst ideas the woke left has come up with. She is actively diverting money away from the police department to invest in black communities.

      A majority of black Americans do not support this idea. Overall support has been dropping as violence in many cities has escalated.

      Breed’s rhetoric is pretty astonishing, given she leads a city where the black population has been declining for decades. According to the New York Times, black residents used to make up one in seven residents in San Francisco in 1970. Today it has fallen to one in 20 with the majority living in public housing.

      Another consequence of progressive policies is skyrocketing rent and lack of affordable housing. While Breed has tried to remedy some of that by adding low-income units and shelter beds, it is like putting a band-aid on an injury that requires a tourniquet.

      According to the website RENTCafe, the average rent in San Francisco is $3,629, with an average apartment size of 747 square feet. This amount is more than twice the national average of $1,468. This is an astounding price to live among piles of poop, strewn dirty needles, and unaddressed non-violent crime.

      To the activists that have been critical of her leadership, Breed had a few words when she was asked if she was misunderstood:

      Yes, but I don’t care that I am by people who have privilege. Let me be clear: In most cases, they’ve never had to live like I’ve had to live. I had to live in a public housing development that they wouldn’t have even dared set foot in. This is over 20 years, not just two years, of my life. I’ve been working in the trenches for my community my entire life.

      And none of these people have been in the trenches when we were dealing with issues of police brutality on a regular basis. Almost every day you’re hearing that someone that you loved was killed. I think part of it is, my experience is what determines how I make decisions. The good news is the people who know me and love me from the neighborhood I grew up in, they understand why I do what I do. They’re not “activists,” but they love and they trust me.

      Here’s hoping her neighborhood encompassed half the city. Her comments are not likely to be popular with the woke white progressives who follow the Robin Di Angelo school of thinking.

      Only they know what is best, and Mayor Breed isn’t listening.

    •  Space Command Accuses Russia Of Testing Anti-Satellite Weapon
       Space Command Accuses Russia Of Testing Anti-Satellite Weapon

      Tyler Durden

      Fri, 07/24/2020 – 20:25

      President Trump’s newly created Space Command announced Thursday (July 23) that Russia has tested a space-based anti-satellite weapon.

      “On July 15, Russia injected a new object into orbit from Cosmos 2543, currently Satellite Catalog Number 45915 in Space-Track.org,” Space Command wrote. “Russia released this object in proximity to another Russian satellite, which is similar to on-orbit activity conducted by Russia in 2017, and inconsistent with the system’s stated mission as an inspector satellite.”

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      According to Gen. John W. “Jay” Raymond, Commander of U.S. Space Command and U.S. Space Force Chief of Space Operations, the U.S. government “raised concerns” earlier this year about the same Russian satellite system, when it “maneuvered near a U.S. government satellite.” 

       “This is further evidence of Russia’s continuing efforts to develop and test space-based systems, and consistent with the Kremlin’s published military doctrine to employ weapons that hold U.S. and allied space assets at risk,” Raymond said. 

      We noted in April, Russia has been testing anti-satellite weapons, with aims to destroy U.S. spy satellites. This has been an ongoing issue for years. Back in 2018, the State Department raised concerns that a Russian satellite could be weaponized to take out the U.S. GPS network. 

      Russia’s space weapon test is the latest example of new threats emerging in Low Earth orbit (LEO). President Trump’s initiative for a new military branch appears to have been an excellent decision to protect U.S. assets in LEO, despite sparking a new race for the weaponization of space.

      War hawks have claimed that if the Trump administration didn’t act, China or Russia would’ve weaponized outer space first, leaving the U.S., and its network of spy satellites in immediate danger. 

      Space Command already appears to be safeguarding America’s assets in outer space, as it seems Russia could be making moves to take out critical U.S. spy satellites. 

    • Grocery Giant Bows To 17-Year-Old Twitter-Mobster… & Other Absurdities
      Grocery Giant Bows To 17-Year-Old Twitter-Mobster… & Other Absurdities

      Tyler Durden

      Fri, 07/24/2020 – 20:05

      Authored by Simon Black via SovereignMan.com,

      Are you ready for this week’s absurdity? Here’s our Friday roll-up of the most ridiculous stories from around the world that are threats to your liberty, risks to your prosperity… and on occasion, inspiring poetic justice.

      Art museum curator cancelled for not abandoning “white male artists”

      Gary Garrels was the Senior Curator of Painting and Sculpture at the San Francisco Museum of Modern Art.

      After giving a presentation on the importance of diversity in art, he ended by saying, “don’t worry, we will continue to collect white male artists.”

      His word choice may be curious, but his entire point was that diversity should include everyone… and that means white, male artists too. 

      He had mentioned at another point that specifically excluding white artists would be reverse discrimination.

      But this egregious sin was enough to elicit a Change.org petition from his co-workers calling for his ouster.

      The petition claimed that Gary may be “deliberately racist.” It also claimed his use of the term “reverse discrimination” is “white supremacist and racist language.”

      Gary bowed to the mob, and resigned.

      Somehow, this petition did not violate Change.org’s policy against using petitions to bully.

      Click here to read the full story.

      *  *  *

      Florida motorcycle crash victim “died of Covid”

      Sadly, a man from Florida who crashed his motorcycle succumbed to Covid-19.

      At least, that was according to the Florida Health Department.

      Florida initially counted the motorcycle death as one of those rare cases where a 20-something year old died of Covid.

      This came to light during a press conference with a local health official.

      When reporters asked if any of the young victims had any underlying conditions, the health official said, “The first one didn’t have any. He died in a motorcycle accident.”

      He added, “But you could actually argue that it could have been the Covid-19 that caused him to crash.”

      After the media picked up the story, the state corrected the data.

      But it makes you wonder– how much can you trust the official statistics?

      Click here to read the full story.

      *  *  *

      22 peer-reviewed scholarly articles on Covid-19 have been retracted

      Speaking of official statistics being wrong, a lot of the official information has turned out to be wrong too.

      Wear a mask, shut down your business, swear off social contact, and remain in your home cowering in fear. That is the most scientific way to beat Covid-19, according to many news outlets and rabid peers.

      But scientific journals aren’t so sure about the facts on Covid-19.

      A website called Retraction Watch keeps track of papers and studies withdrawn from scholarly and scientific journals.

      So far, it has counted 22 peer-reviewed scientific papers and experiments on Covid-19 that were originally published, but later had to be retracted for various reasons.

      For instance, one study found that coronavirus infects t-cells, but later realized the methodology was wrong, and the virus does not invade t-cells, like HIV.

      Another retracted study said coronavirus could spread 15 feet through the air via water droplets. 

      Several of the retracted studies were from China. And that only adds to the confusion. Were they retracted for faulty science? Or were the results accurate, but the Chinese government forced a retraction in order to placate their narrative? 

      The point is, science is doing the best it can. They’re breaking new ground every day. But there’s still a tremendous amount of uncertainty about Covid. Even when they reach conclusions, they sometimes later find out that their conclusions were wrong. 

      Yet despite this uncertainty, politicians have no trouble shutting down the global economy and trampling over individual freedoms.

      Click here to read the full story.

      *  *  *

      Grocery giant bows to 17-year old Twitter mobster

      Oh what a glorious cultural revolution comrades! When any teenage girl with internet access can do her part to strike the root of prejudice in our society.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      This time the victim of the Twitter mob is Trader Joe’s, a grocery chain known for its quirkiness.

      Trader Joe’s liked to have a little fun with branding its culinary offerings from around the world.

      For instance, the store sells Mexican food under “Trader José,” Chinese food under “Trader Ming,” Italian food under “Trader Giotto” and so on.

      But one teenage tyrant, a 17 year old girl, found this offensive. So she started a petition– once again Change.org helped facilitate this important social reform.

      The petition claims that using variations of Joe in branding foreign foods “belies a narrative of exoticism that perpetuates harmful stereotypes…”

      “The Trader Joe’s branding is racist because it exoticizes other cultures – it presents “Joe” as the default “normal” and the other characters falling outside of it.”

      The petition, now signed by a mob of almost 5,000 random internet users, also took issue with the inspiration for the original Trader Joe’s store.

      The founder read an apparently racist book, and rode an apparently racist Disney ride, which together gave him the idea for his clearly racist business of selling food products from around the world.

      Trader Joe’s quickly yielded to the Twitter mobsters, saying although the names were “rooted in a lighthearted attempt at inclusiveness, we recognize that it may now have the opposite effect.”

      Click here to see the petition.

      *  *  *

      On another note… We think gold could DOUBLE and silver could increase by up to 5 TIMES in the next few years.

      That’s why we published a new, 50-page long Ultimate Guide on Gold & Silver that you can download here.

    • "Schools Steal This Joy From Children": Homeschool & Outdoor Programs See Huge Surge Amid COVID-19
      “Schools Steal This Joy From Children”: Homeschool & Outdoor Programs See Huge Surge Amid COVID-19

      Tyler Durden

      Fri, 07/24/2020 – 19:45

      School districts and counties across the US, including counties in COVID-resurgent Texas this week, have mandated that all public and private schools not start their school year until after Labor Day (Sept. 7). Even after that Fall start date, some areas witnessing the current resurgence of cases, such as in California, may not return in person at all or at least go to a half-capacity scenario while offering online options for those families in a position to allow their children to stay home. But concerning online contingency plans, the trend appears to beRemote learning? No thanks.

      Bottom line is that school-wise it’s a time of extreme uncertainty and anxiety for families across the US. And then there are the difficult questions of assuming the moment a ‘normal’ school year actually kicks off – will masks be required through the day? will younger students really be able to practice social distancing? will a school shut down completely again the moment a student or staff member gets coronavirus? will on-campus schooling be safe? 

      Due to these and other lingering questions, homeschooling is set to explode across the US, despite elites at places like Harvard doing their best to push stereotypes of “insular conservative homeschoolers” and the supposed “dark side” of homeschooling as somehow “detrimental” to societal progress. Regardless, all kinds of ‘alternative’ and hybrid stay at home schooling programs are now popping up organically amid continued pandemic and ‘shutdown’ fears. The Wall Street Journal presents hard numbers illustrating the trend in a lengthy report aptly titledAmid Coronavirus, Parents ‘Pod Up’ to Form At-Home Schools.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Via ThoughtCo/Getty Images

      Recent polls show up to a third of Americans are “not at all” comfortable sending their children back to in-person schooling given the COVID-19 risks and ‘unknowns’. And likely this figure is higher.

      The Wall Street Journal describes of the recent polling:

      A recent poll of 1,341 families by Pittsburgh-based consumer-research firm CivicScience found that more than one-third of parents with children ages 3 to 17 said they are “not at all” comfortable with a return to school in the fall. In a recent Axios-Ipsos poll of 219 parents of children 18 and under, 71% said they felt sending them to school in the fall presented a moderate or large risk to their household’s health and well-being. Not all families can afford to design their own education program. Some households will see their income decline if one parent works fewer hours to manage academics.

      And further, the report details, “In the past three weeks, the National Home School Association has referred about 3,000 parents to local home-schooling groups—compared with a handful, if any, in a typical three-week period says Executive Director J. Allen Weston.”

      One observable trend taking place across the United States includes families and students gathering in ‘pods’ to conduct their own small-scale schooling. Neighbors or families who already have connections and trusted friendships with children similar in age plan to gather in small groups of 5 to 10 students at people’s homes or even local churches. 

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      Within the homeschool sub-culture these are akin to what’s often referred to as “co-ops”. This involves a homeschool group teaching children at home for most of the week based on a common curriculum, but coming together as a ‘campus’ at an outside location (such as a church or rented building, or in a residence) for one or two days of the week. This also takes the form of community field trips or nature outings. It essentially allows for highly independent schooling, yet while maintaining a broader “structure” and interactive social life.

      Interestingly, as the WSJ underscores, parents are actually seeing in the set-back of coronavirus shutdowns and delays of traditional campuses…“an opportunity”. Consider this damning quote of the current established “system” and the state of public school districts from a commentator cited in the WSJ report:

      “Schools steal this joy from children.”

      Now parents, at least those with the time and resources to make it happen, can model their child’s educational experience very differently from the mundane 8 or 9-hour campus life (which for many students feels more like a prison) regulated by periodic bells and a restrictive atmosphere of procedures set up to move thousands of students from point A to point B throughout the day, or what some authors like John Taylor Ghatto have called “factory model schooling” which is not based on truth-seeking, as all learning should be, but instead on “schooling an industrial proletariat”

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Via Louisville Family Fun/Thrive Forest School

      In a revealing section on the state of mass public education today, WSJ writes:

      Home-schooling experts say the approach isn’t just logging in to school virtually. Instead, parents and students seek educational opportunities in everyday life, from reading food labels to learning about nature as they walk through a park, Mr. Weston says. “Schools steal this joy from children,” he adds, and escalating pressure to meet benchmarks on standardized tests hasn’t helped. Not all states require home-schoolers to take those tests, he says. Across the U.S., about 4 million K-12 students are home-schooled, Mr. Weston estimates. He believes that figure will rise to at least 10 million by the end of the 2020-21 school year.

      The report gives an example of how pods of new homeschooling communities are popping up organically in response to the crisis:

      Myra Margolin, a full-time mother of a newborn and preschooler in Washington, created a Facebook group for families interested in forming home-schooling pods. She expected about 30 families would join and exchange ideas. The group, which launched July 6, has more than 850 members. “People are freaking out,” Ms. Margolin says, with interests that range from convening free-form play groups to hiring teachers for more structured learning environments.

      And other alternative programs like ‘homeschool nature programs’ and outdoor focused learning programs, and small scale Montessori environments, as well as Charlotte Mason style and classical learning are also soaring in terms of interest. 

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      All of this begs the question: given that even before the rise of the pandemic, public school districts in many cities were already in a state of crisis – academically, financially, culturally, and otherwise…

      Could the 2020-2021 school year (or lack thereof) be the death knell for mass public education?

    • More Fallout From Iran/China Deal: India Loses Farzad-B
      More Fallout From Iran/China Deal: India Loses Farzad-B

      Tyler Durden

      Fri, 07/24/2020 – 19:25

      Authored by Tom Luongo via Gold, Goats, ‘n Guns blog,

      The carnage for following President Trump’s lead on ending the JCPOA continues for India.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      From SputnikNews last week comes this note about the Farzad-B oil and gas field and Iran.

      Close on the heels of breaking the Chabahar-Zahedan rail project agreement, Iran appears set to deny India’s state-run ONGC Videsh Limited (OVL), exploration and production rights for the key Farzad B gas field.

      The granting  of rights to OVL was already delayed with New Delhi moving slowly on the issue, but came to a complete standstill after the 2018 imposition of US sanctions on Tehran.

      Now that threat looks to be a reality.

      Turkish news agency Anadolu Agency quoted India’s External Affairs Ministry (EAM) as saying on Thursday Tehran would develop the Farzad-B gas field in the Persian Gulf region “on its own” and might engage India “appropriately at a later stage”.

      Translation: “Stop stalling for Trump’s sake and make good on your promises or the project goes to China.”

      Because that’s where this leads in light of the announced mega-deal between Iran and China worth a reported $400 billion.

      I wrote last week I thought India has lost its way on the New Silk Road. Losing the contract to build the railway it pushed for to bypass Pakistan and assert independence from China’s OBOR plans should have been a clear enough signal.

      But apparently it wasn’t.

      India’s involvement in the Farzad-B gas field is now more than a decade delayed because of U.S. interference through sanctions nominally over Iran’s nuclear ambitions.

      Work was supposed to begin in 2012 but President Obama sanctioned Iran, forcing OVL, ONGC’s international arm, to stop. Work was set to begin again after ratification of the JCPOA in 2015 and Trump nixed that in 2018 when he pulled the U.S. out of the deal.

      Not only did this stop India’s work on the field but it also put the kibosh on any new pipeline into India.

      I reported in November of 2017 that Russian Energy Minister Alexander Novak announced preliminary development work on a new version of the Iran-Pakistan-India (IPI) pipeline. That talk abruptly ended with Trump’s pulling out of the JCPOA.

      Some version of IPI has been opposed by the U.S. for two decades now, preferring instead to thread the TAPI pipeline through the needle of failed geopolitics.

      Gazprom already operates in three major Iranian oil fields, including Farzaz-B, and IPI was supposed to be a venture tying Iran and India together with Gazprom supplying the expertise and money to get it done.

      Remember, pipelines are the stitching that bind nations together. This is why the U.S. is so adamant about stopping ones that don’t serve its or its allies’ interests, in this case the Saudis.

      So, while we are regaled incessantly about the dangers of Iran obtaining a nuclear weapon, the real reason for the pulling out of the JCPOA was always about Energy Dominance, Trump’s plans to further solidify the U.S.’s hold over global energy flows.

      Because once Trump did that, multiple projects under development with European and Indian oil majors ended abruptly. Companies like Italy’s ENIFrance’s Total and others were all forced to sell their interests in these major oil and gas development projects.

      And China came in to scoop some of them up, presaging where we are today.

      The same thing happened in the fallout from the coup in Ukraine in 2014 which led to Crimea’s reunification with Russia.

      That prompted onerous sanctions which forced U.S. oil majors out of major deals to develop Russian oil and gas blocs in the Arctic as well as the development of Nordstream 2 and Turkstream.

      Speaking recently about the U.S.’s opposition to Nordstream 2, Alexander Mercouris of The Duran connected these dots back to Exxon-Mobil having to pull out of its projects with Russia because of Crimea sanctions (starts at 4:52 in).

      Germany, for its part, is fully hacked off about what Trump and Pompeo are threatening over Nordstream 2 and this will be the wedge issue which forces a split in policy direction between them, including counter-sanctions from Germany.

      Threats eventually become actions especially when we are dealing with something as fundamental to the future of Germany and the European Union as Nordstream 2. So we should finally see some teeth from Germany if Pompeo goes through with these sanctions.

      Remember also, that CAATSA, the updated version of the Magnitsky Act, took sanctions policy out of the hands of the President by a spiteful Congress (spearheaded by John McCain) and placed it in the hands of the Secretary of State and the Treasury Secretary.

      In this sense Trump is a tourist in his own foreign policy.

      The bottom line here is that Iran and China are countering to up the pressure on India to finally decide where their energy future lies, because the last ten years have been terrible for them in securing their energy future constantly bowing to external pressure.

      One of India’s persistent issues is the vulnerability of its currency due to its intense energy import needs. The rupee is the antithesis of stable in part because of its energy imports.

      Even with drastically lower energy import prices the rupee has been in free fall versus the U.S. dollar for two years now, and nothing the Modi government has done has alleviated India’s reliance having to buy oil only sold for U.S. dollars.

      During the Obama sanction years (2012-15) India and Iran famously traded goods for oil. Under the current environment thanks to CAATSA that option is off the table. Keeping Iran and India at arm’s length is meant to protect the petrodollar system rather than the two countries trading in local currencies.

      What I find most ironic is that every attempt to stop Iran and India from coming closer together on energy projects has forced India to develop closer ties to Russia’s Rosatom for nuclear power.

      Rosatom is the main equipment supplier and technical consultant in the construction of  Kudankulam nuclear power station in the southern state of Tamil Nadu.

      The first and second reactors at the plant are already in service with the third and fourth due to come online in 2023 and 2024, according to Kremlin mouthpiece Tass

      Russia and India are also planning the construction of a second nuclear power station. There are plans for up to six Russian-designed nuclear power plants in India.

      Each and every time the U.S. pressures one of its ‘allies’ back into the narrow box of acceptable energy sources, the net result is a win for either China or Russia.

      The story of the development of Farzad-B is yet another instance of this.

      *  *  *

      Join My Patreon if you want help navigating the waters of geopolitics. Install the Brave Browser if you want to limit the growing Google-led panopticon.

    • It's Happening Again… Investors Dump Everything 'China' 
      It’s Happening Again… Investors Dump Everything ‘China’ 

      Tyler Durden

      Fri, 07/24/2020 – 19:05

      Global stock markets plunged Friday as tensions between the US and China spiral out of control. 

      Stocks in Hong Kong and mainland China tumbled after Beijing ordered Washington to cease all operations at its consulate in the city of Chengdu. This came days after Washington ordered the Chinese consulate in Houston, Texas, to close. 

      Investors are becoming fearful the tit-for-tat spat between the US and China will escalate into August. Today’s equity selling in Asia, Europe, and the US is evident in derisking.

      We must note, derisking has been stealthily occurring under the surface for two months. While President Trump and Barstool Sports’ Dave Portnoy pump stocks, the smart money has been quickly dumping US-listed firms that do business in China because of increasing tensions. 

      Fathom’s proprietary China Exposure Index (CEI) tracks US-listed firms that have 15% and 85% of their revenues from China. The CEI shows investors have been dumping these companies since the start of June. 

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Readers may recall, a plunging CEI in early February preceded the stock market crash that started later in the month. 

      Read: In Latest Sign Of Imminent Market Collapse, Investors Dump Everything’ China’

      So the question we ask today: Is today’s CEI plunge hinting the stock market is set to tank again?

    • 7 Facts That Parents & Teachers Should Know About The Risks Of Reopening Chicago Public Schools
      7 Facts That Parents & Teachers Should Know About The Risks Of Reopening Chicago Public Schools

      Tyler Durden

      Fri, 07/24/2020 – 18:45

      Authored by Ted Dabrowski and John Klingner via Wirepoints.org,

      School reopenings have become the next major political football in America, and the opening of Chicago Public Schools is no exception. The Chicago Teachers Union says they don’t want in-school teaching and prefer to maintain online learning, while the school district officials are planning for a hybrid opening

      But how risky is it really for CPS children to return to school? What are the chances of students catching and spreading the virus? What are the chances of them bringing it home? And how risky is a reopening for teachers?

      Here are seven facts Chicago parents and teachers should know:

      1. Only two Chicago children aged 17 and younger have died from COVID-19 since the virus first appeared, according to the city of Chicago’s latest coronavirus data. While every death is a tragedy, fortunately Chicago’s children haven’t fallen victim to COVID-19.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      2. CPS children face more risk from suicide, accidents and gun deaths. Since March 1, the approximate “start” of the coronavirus, nearly 100 Chicago children under the age of 19 have died from causes other than COVID. Four from suicide. Twelve from car- or drug-related accidents. And an outrageous 46 have died from gun violence.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      3. One nationwide estimate of the infection fatality rate for children is just 0.004 percent. The Women’s Institute for Independent Social Enquiry says nationwide there have been 317,711 reported cases of children with COVID-19, with 805 intensive care hospitalizations and 77 deaths. However, they estimate there are 1.9 million children infected when taking into account undetected cases. That results in a fatality rate of 0.004 percent.

      The actual fatality rate could be even lower once antibody testing can capture just how many children have actually been infected by the virus. 

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      4. More than three-quarters of teachers in CPS are under the age of 50. And 60 percent are under the age of 40. That means as a group they’re at far less risk of suffering death from COVID-19. That’s particularly true when comorbidities are taken into account (next section).

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      In total, 231 Chicago adults under the age of 50 have died from COVID since March. There are over 34,000 known cases in that age group, but the real number of people infected is certainly far larger. The CDC’s best estimates assume there are 10 times more undetected cases of COVID-19 than detected. Based on their estimate, the group fatality rate for those adults younger than 50 is at 0.064 percent.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      5. The risk for teachers is even lower: More than 92 percent of Chicago COVID-19 victims had pre-existing conditions. Age alone should not be the concern for teachers since pre-existing conditions are the determining factor in COVID-19 deaths. Chicago city data shows that over 92 percent of COVID-19 victims in Chicago suffered from one or more comorbidities, i.e., hypertension, obesity, heart disease and diabetes. We’ve provided a full list of Chicago’s COVID-19 deaths and their comorbidities here. The source is the Cook County Medical Examiner’s Office.

      Taking comorbidities into account means even fewer teachers are targets of the virus.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      For sure teachers with pre-existing conditions will need to consider the risk to themselves and others, but what we know of the virus so far can help mitigate those risks. Limiting activities that require close student/teacher contact, keeping students together in teaching groups, making use of schools’ most-open spaces like gyms – all are sensible ideas. Older students can practice better hygiene and social distancing while younger students, as shown below, catch and transmit the virus at very low rates.

      For older teachers and/or those with pre-existing conditions, there is still the option of teaching online for those who need it or even early retirement, if necessary. 

      6. Students, particularly young children, are low vectors for the virus

      Though much more needs to be learned about the interaction of COVID-19 with children, and there is some conflicting evidence, most studies are demonstrating the virus has a limited impact.

      For example, Science magazine recently reported “several studies have found that overall, people under age 18 are between one-third and one-half as likely as adults to contract the virus, and the risk appears lowest for the youngest children.”

      More surprisingly, it appears parents should be more concerned about giving COVID to their children instead of worrying that children will bring the virus home with them.

      The Netherland’s health ministry advises that “Data from the Netherlands also confirms the current understanding: that children play a minor role in the spread of the novel coronavirus. The virus is mainly spread between adults and from adult family members to children. The spread of COVID-19 among children or from children to adults is less common.”

      And a recent rapid literature review of pediatric COVID studies concluded:

      “Low case numbers in children suggest a more limited role than was initially feared. Contact tracing data from Asia, the USA, Europe and Israel have all demonstrated a significantly lower attack rate in children than adults, including testing of asymptomatic household contacts on both PCR and serology. Coupled with low case numbers would suggest that children are less likely to acquire the disease…Limited data on positive cases in schools have not demonstrated significant transmission, except within adolescent populations. Studies of younger children in schools have found low rates of transmission, but with very low case numbers.”

      – Boast A, Munro A, Goldstein H. An evidence summary of Paediatric COVID-19 literature, Don’t Forget the Bubbles, 2020.

      7. Chicago COVID-19 deaths have collapsed to an average of just 2 a day over the last week.

      Once a hotspot nationally, Chicago deaths have collapsed from nearly 50 a day in early May to about 2 a day in the last week. The city is at a level consistent with many European countries when they began to successfully reopen schools.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      In fact, Chicago and New York City are now the only two major cities in the country that have an average daily infection rate of less than 5 percent – epidemiologists’ generally-accepted public health threshold for keeping COVID-10 under control.

      *  *  *

      COVID-19 is scary, but until and only if the virus changes targets, kids are more at risk from violence, accidents and from not being in school. 

      Keeping schools shut has had an increasingly negative impact on children’s lives. More and more evidence shows that children missing school is leading to isolation, anxiety, the loss of critical development time, and not to mention, lost instructional time – remote learning didn’t work. There’s also the increased risk of unreported child abuse and teen suicide.

      Younger children in particular are ill-served by remote learning, according to a new report issued by the National Academies of Science, Engineering and Medicine that recommends students return to the classroom. That report echoes the opinion of the American Academy of Pediatrics, which recommends that “all policy considerations for the coming school year should start with a goal of having students physically present in school.”

      The science and data of COVID-19 in Chicago agree.

    Digest powered by RSS Digest

    Today’s News 24th July 2020

    • Coronavirus Traveled Nearly 30 Feet At German Slaughterhouse Where 1,500 Employees Contracted Virus
      Coronavirus Traveled Nearly 30 Feet At German Slaughterhouse Where 1,500 Employees Contracted Virus

      Tyler Durden

      Fri, 07/24/2020 – 02:45

      COVID-19 particles traveled 26 feet across a German slaughterhouse where approximtely 1,500 workers contracted the virus, according to researchers who reconstructed the likely cause of the outbreak at the Toennies Groups slaughterhouse in Rheda-Wiedenbrueck.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      According to Bloomberg, a combination of cold, stale air allowed the virus to spread over such a long distance, raising concerns that the same might happen at meat plants worldwide.

      And while the virus is significantly less deadly than originally thought, it can lead to significant disruptions, as it takes between two weeks and several months to recover. Some patients still report symptoms, though how contagious they are is yet to be seen. 

      Similar conditions at plants globally are a reason they’ve become virus epicenters, according to the report from groups including the Helmholtz Center for Infection Research.

      Meat plants from the U.S. to the U.K. and South America have seen the rapid spread of the virus, infecting thousands of employees who often work in close proximity on processing lines. Dozens of workers have died, and labor advocates have said that a lack of social distancing could continue to put people at risk. Outbreaks also forced American meat plants to close earlier this year, sparking some protein shortages. –Bloomberg

      The Tonnies outbreak is believed to have been caused in May by a single employee who infected the rest of their co-workers in the plant’s dismantling area, where temperatures hover around 50 degrees Fahrenheit.

      According to Adam Grundhoff, co-author of the study, chilly air circulated without frequent changes, combined with a strenuous work environment, helped move virus particles long distances.

      “It is very likely that these factors generally play a crucial role in the global outbreaks in meat or fish processing plants,” said Grundhoff, a research group leader at the Heinrich Pette Institute, Leibniz Institute for Experimental Virology. He added that distances of 1.5 to 3 meters (5 to 10 feet) is insufficient to prevent transmission.

      The Toennies plant — Germany’s largest pork abattoir — reopened last week after a month-long closure and plans to gradually ramp up output. The company, which posted a link to the research report on Twitter, also recently released a 25-point plan detailing measures it’s making to prevent further outbreaks. They include testing employees twice a week, hiring workers directly and overhauling ventilation.

      The report’s findings show that no factory worldwide was built for such a crisis, and the company has invested in air filters and other mechanisms to protect employees, a Toennies spokesman said by email. –Bloomberg

      The workers’ housing conditions were not found to play a significant role in the outbreaks.

      “The important question now is under what conditions transmission events over longer distances are possible in other areas of life,” said Helmholtz center research group leader Melanie Brinkmann.

      The results of the German meat plant study put COVID-19’s reach at just under twice that observed by a team of Chinese government epidemiologists, who found that aerosolized coronavirus can hang in the air for at least 30 minutes and travel up to 14 feet.

      As we noted in March, the study, conducted by a team of Chinese government epidemiologists from Hunan province, also found that the virus can survive for days on a surface where respiratory droplets land.

      The length of time it lasts on the surface depends on factors such as temperature and the type of surface, for example at around 37C (98F), it can survive for two to three days on glass, fabric, metal, plastic or paper.

      These findings, from a group of official researchers from Hunan province investigating a cluster case, challenge the advice from health authorities around the world that people should remain apart at a “safe distance” of one to two metres (three to six and a half feet). –SCMP

      The researchers warned that the virus could survive over five days in human feces or bodily fluids, and that it could remain floating in the air after a carrier had left a public bus

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      “It can be confirmed that in a closed environment with air-conditioning, the transmission distance of the new coronavirus will exceed the commonly recognised safe distance,” the researchers wrote in their paper, published in peer-reviewed journal, Practical Preventive Medicine.

      “Our advice is to wear a face mask all the way [through the bus ride],” the researchers recommended.

    • Cold Wars & Profit
      Cold Wars & Profit

      Tyler Durden

      Fri, 07/24/2020 – 02:00

      Authored by Craig Murray via ConsortiumNews.com,

      If an asteroid runs into the earth, any surviving press will blame it on Russia…

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      The Guardian a few days ago carried a very strange piece  [which has since been removed] under the heading “Stamps celebrating Ukrainian resistance in pictures.” The first image displayed a stamp bearing the name of the Ukrainian Insurgent Army (UPA).

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      The UPA was, without any shadow of a doubt, responsible for the slaughter of at least 200,000 Polish civilians; they liquidated whole Polish communities in Volhynia and Galicia, including the women and children. The current Polish government, which is as anti-Russian and pro-NATO as they come, nevertheless has declared this a genocide.

      It certainly was an extremely brutal ethnic cleansing. There is no doubt either that at times between 1942 and 1944 the UPA collaborated with the Nazis and collaborated in the destruction of Jews and Gypsies. It is simplistic to describe the UPA as fascist or an extension of the Nazi regime; at times they fought the Nazis, though they collaborated more often.

      There is a real sense in which they operated at the level of medieval peasants, simply seizing local opportunities to exterminate rural populations and seize their land and assets, be they Polish, Jew or Gypsy. But on balance any reasonable person would have to conclude that the UPA was an utterly deplorable phenomenon. To publish a celebration of it, disguised as a graphic art piece, without any of this context, is no more defensible than a display of Nazi art with no context.

      In fact, The Guardian’s very brief text was still worse than no context.

      “Ukrainian photographer Oleksandr Kosmach collects 20th-century stamps issued by Ukrainian groups in exile during the Soviet era.

      Artists and exiles around the world would use stamps to communicate the horrors of Soviet oppression. “These stamps show us the ideas and values of these people, who they really were and what they were fighting for,” Kosmach says.”

      That is so misleadingly partial as a description of the art glorifying the UPA movement as to be deeply reprehensible. It does however fit with the anything- goes stoking of Russophobia, which is the mainstay of government and media discourse at the moment. Even at the height of the Cold War, we never saw such a barrage of unprovable accusations leveled at Russia through the media by “security service sources.”

      Attack on UK Vaccine Research

      A whole slew of these were rehearsed by Andrew Marr on his flagship BBC1 morning show. The latest is the accusation that Russia is responsible for a cyber attack on Covid-19 vaccination research. This is another totally evidence-free accusation. But it misses the point anyway.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Andrew Marr, center, in 2014. (Financial Times, Flickr)

      The alleged cyber attack, if it happened, was a hack not an attack — the allegation is that there was an effort to obtain the results of research, not to disrupt research. It is appalling that the U.K. is trying to keep its research results secret rather than share them freely with the world scientific community.

      As I have reported before, the U.K. and the USA have been preventing the WHO from implementing a common research and common vaccine solution for Covid-19, insisting instead on a profit driven approach to benefit the big pharmaceutical companies (and disadvantage the global poor). 

      What makes the accusation that Russia tried to hack the research even more dubious is the fact that Russia had just bought the very research specified. You don’t steal things you already own.

      Evidence of CIA  Hacks

      If anybody had indeed hacked the research, we all know it is impossible to trace with certainty the whereabouts of hackers. My VPNs [virtual private networks] are habitually set to India, Australia or South Africa depending on where I am trying to watch the cricket, dodging broadcasting restrictions.

      More pertinently, WikiLeaks’ Vault 7 release of CIA material showed the specific programs for the CIA in how to leave clues to make a leak look like it came from Russia. This irrefutable evidence that the CIA do computer hacks with apparent Russian “fingerprints” deliberately left, like little bits of Cyrillic script, is an absolutely classic example of a fact that everybody working in the mainstream media knows to be true, but which they all contrive never to mention.

      Thus when last week’s “Russian hacking” story was briefed by the security services —that former Labour Party Leader Jeremy Corbyn deployed secret documents on U.K./U.S. trade talks which had been posted on Reddit, after being stolen by an evil Russian who left his name of Grigor in his Reddit handle —there was no questioning in the media of this narrative. Instead, we had another round of McCarthyite witch-hunt aimed at the rather tired looking Corbyn. 

      Personally, if the Russians had been responsible for revealing that the Tories are prepared to open up the NHS “market” to big American companies, including ending or raising caps on pharmaceutical prices, I should be very grateful to the Russians for telling us. Just as the world would owe the Russians a favor if it were indeed them who leaked evidence of just how systematically the DNC rigged the 2016 primaries against Bernie Sanders.

      But as it happens, it was not the Russians. The latter case was a leak by a disgusted insider, and I very much suspect the NHS U.S. trade deal link was also from a disgusted insider. 

      When governments do appalling things, very often somebody manages to blow the whistle.

      Crowdstrike’s Quiet Admission  

      If you can delay even the most startling truth for several years, it loses much of its political bite. If you can announce it during a health crisis, it loses still more. The world therefore did not shudder to a halt when the CEO of Crowdstrike admitted there had never been any evidence of a Russian hack of the DNC servers. 

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Crowdstrike’s Shawn Henry presenting at the International Security Forum in Vancouver, 2009.
      (Hubert K, Flickr)

      You will recall the near incredible fact that, even through the Mueller investigation, the FBI never inspected the DNC servers themselves but simply relied on a technical report from Crowdstrike, the Hillary Clinton-related IT security consultant for the DNC.

      It is now known for sure that Crowdstrike had been peddling fake news for Hillary. In fact, Crowdstrike had no record of any internet hack at all. There was no evidence of the email material being exported over the internet. What they claimed did exist was evidence that the files had been organized preparatory to export.

      Remember the entire “Russian hacking” story was based ONLY on Crowdstrike’s say so. There is literally no other evidence of Russian involvement in the DNC emails, which is unsurprising as I have been telling you for four years from my own direct sources that Russia was not involved. Yet finally declassified congressional testimony revealed that Shawn Henry stated on oath that “we did not have concrete evidence” and “There’s circumstantial evidence , but no evidence they were actually exfiltrated.”

      This testimony fits with what I was told by Bill Binney, a former technical director of the National Security Agency (NSA), who told me that it was impossible that any large amount of data should be moved across the internet from the USA, without the NSA both seeing it happen in real time and recording it. If there really had been a Russian hack, the NSA would have been able to give the time of it to a millisecond.

      That the NSA did not have that information was proof the transfer had never happened, according to Binney. What had happened, Binney deduced, was that the files had been downloaded locally, probably to a thumb drive. 

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Bill Binney. (Miquel Taverna / CCCB via Flickr)

      So arguably the biggest news story of the past four years — the claim that Putin effectively interfered to have Donald Trump elected U.S. president —turns out indeed to be utterly baseless. Has the mainstream media, acting on security service behest, done anything to row back from the false impression it created? No it has doubled down.

      Anti-Russia Theme  

      The “Russian hacking” theme keeps being brought back related to whatever is the big story of the day.

      • Brexit? Russian hacking.

      • U.K. general election 2019? Russian hacking

      • Covid-19 vaccine? Russian hacking.

      Then we have those continual security service briefings. Two weeks ago we had unnamed security service sources telling The New York Times that Russia had offered the Taliban a bounty for killing American soldiers. This information had allegedly come from interrogation of captured Taliban in Afghanistan, which would almost certainly mean it was obtained under torture. 

      It is a wildly improbable tale. The Afghans have never needed that kind of incentivization to kill foreign invaders on their soil. It is also a fascinating throwback of an accusation – the British did indeed offer Afghans money for, quite literally, the heads of Afghan resistance leaders during the first Afghan War in 1841, as I detail in my book “Sikunder Burnes.”

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Taliban in Herat, Afghanistan, 2001. (Wikipedia)

      You do not have to look back that far to realize the gross hypocrisy of the accusation. In the 1980s the West was quite openly paying, arming and training the Taliban — including Osama bin Laden – to kill Russian and other Soviet conscripts in their thousands. That is just one example of the hypocrisy.

      The U.S. and U.K. security services both cultivate and bribe senior political and other figures abroad in order to influence policy all of the time. We work to manipulate the result of elections — I have done it personally in my former role as a U.K. diplomat. A great deal of the behavior over which Western governments and media are creating this new McCarthyite anti-Russian witch hunt, is standard diplomatic practice.

      My own view is that there are malign Russian forces attempting to act on government in the U.K. and the USA, but they are not nearly as powerful as the malign British and American forces acting on their own governments.

      The truth is that the world is under the increasing control of a global elite of billionaires, to whom nationality is irrelevant and national governments are tools to be manipulated. Russia is not attempting to buy corrupt political influence on behalf of the Russian people, who are decent folk every bit as exploited by the ultra-wealthy as you or I. Russian billionaires are, just like billionaires everywhere, attempting to game global political, commercial and social structures in their personal interest. 

      The other extreme point of hypocrisy lies in human rights. So many Western media commentators are suddenly interested in China and the Uighurs or in restrictions on the LBGT community in Russia, yet turn a completely blind eye to the abuse committed by Western “allies” such as Saudi Arabia and Bahrain.

      As somebody who was campaigning about the human rights of both the Uighurs and of gay people in Russia a good decade before it became fashionable, I am disgusted by how the term “human rights” has become weaponized for deployment only against those countries designated as enemy by the Western elite.

      Finally, do not forget that there is a massive armaments industry and a massive security industry all dependent on having an “enemy.” Powerful people make money from this Russophobia. Expect much more of it. There is money in a Cold War.

    • Whitehead: The Federal Coup To Overthrow The States And Nix The 10th Amendment Is Underway
      Whitehead: The Federal Coup To Overthrow The States And Nix The 10th Amendment Is Underway

      Tyler Durden

      Thu, 07/23/2020 – 23:50

      Authored by John Whitehead via The Rutherford Institute,

      I don’t need invitations by the state, state mayors, or state governors, to do our job. We’re going to do that, whether they like us there or not.

      – Acting Homeland Security Secretary Chad Wolf’s defense of the Trump Administration’s deployment of militarized federal police to address civil unrest in the states

      This is a wake-up call.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      What is unfolding before our very eyeswith police agencies defying local governments in order to tap into the power of federal militarized troops in order to put down domestic unrestcould very quickly snowball into an act of aggression against the states, a coup by armed, militarized agents of the federal government.

      At a minimum, this is an attack on the Tenth Amendment, which affirms the sovereignty of the states and the citizenry, and the right of the states to stand as a bulwark against overreach and power grabs by the federal government.

      If you’re still deluding yourself into believing that this thinly-veiled exercise in martial law is anything other than an attempt to bulldoze what remains of the Constitution and reinforce the iron-fisted rule of the police state, you need to stop drinking the Kool-Aid.

      This is no longer about partisan politics or civil unrest or even authoritarian impulses.

      This is a turning point.

      Unless we take back the reins—and soon—looking back on this time years from now, historians may well point to the events of 2020 as the death blow to America’s short-lived experiment in self-government.  

      The government’s recent actions in Portland, Oregonwhen unidentified federal agents (believed to be border police, ICE and DHS agents), wearing military fatigues with patches that just say “Police” and sporting all kinds of weapons, descended uninvited on the city in unmarked vehicles, snatching protesters off the streets and detaining them without formally arresting them or offering any explanation of why they’re being heldis just a foretaste of what’s to come.

      One of those detainees was a 53-year-old disabled Navy veteran who was in downtown Portland during the protests but not a participant. Concerned about the tactics being used by government agents who had taken an oath of office to protect and defend the Constitution, Christopher David tried to speak the “secret” police. Almost immediately, he was assaulted by federal agents, beaten with batons and pepper sprayed

      Another peaceful protester was reportedly shot in the head with an impact weapon by this federal goon squad.

      The Trump Administration has already announced its plans to deploy these border patrol agents to other cities across the country (Chicago is supposedly next) in an apparent bid to put down civil unrest. Yet the overriding concerns by state and local government officials to Trump’s plans suggest that weaponizing the DHS as an occupying army will only provoke more violence and unrest.

      We’ve been set up.

      Under the guise of protecting federal properties against civil unrest, the Trump Administration has formed a task force of secret agents who look, dress and act like military stormtroopers on a raid and have been empowered to roam cities in unmarked vehicles, snatching citizens off the streets, whether or not they’ve been engaged in illegal activities.

      As the Guardian reports, “The incidents being described sound eerily reminiscent of the CIA’s post-9/11 rendition program under George W Bush, where intelligence agents would roll up in unmarked vans in foreign countries, blindfold terrorism suspects (many of whom turned to be innocent) and kidnap them without explanation. Only instead of occurring on the streets of Italy or the Middle East, it’s happening in downtown Portland.”

      The so-called racial justice activists who have made looting, violence, vandalism and intimidation tactics the hallmarks of their protests have played right into the government’s hands

      They have delivered all of us into the police state’s hands.

      There’s a reason Trump has tapped the Department of Homeland Security and the U.S. Customs and Border Protection for this dirty business: these agencies are notorious for their lawlessness, routinely sidestepping the Constitution and trampling on the rights of anyone who gets in their way, including legal citizens.

      Indeed, it was only a matter of time before these roving bands of border patrol agents began flexing their muscles far beyond the nation’s borders and exercising their right to disregard the Constitution at every turn.

      Except these border patrol cops aren’t just disregarding the Constitution.

      They’re trampling all over the Constitution, especially the Fourth Amendment, which prohibits the government from carrying out egregious warrantless searches and seizures without probable cause.

      As part of the government’s so-called crackdown on illegal immigration, drugs and trafficking, its border patrol cops have been expanding their reach, roaming further afield and subjecting greater numbers of Americans to warrantless searches, ID checkpoints, transportation checks, and even surveillance on private property far beyond the boundaries of the borderlands.

      That so-called border, once a thin borderline, has become an ever-thickening band spreading deeper and deeper inside the country.

      Now, with this latest salvo by the Trump administration in its so-called crackdown on rioting and civil unrest, America itself is about to become a Constitution-free zone where freedom is off-limits and government agents have all the power and “we the people” have none.

      The Customs and Border Protection (CBP), with its more than 60,000 employees, supplemented by the National Guard and the U.S. military, is an arm of the Department of Homeland Security, a national police force imbued with all the brutality, ineptitude and corruption such a role implies.

      As journalist Todd Miller explains:

      In these vast domains, Homeland Security authorities can institute roving patrols with broad, extra-constitutional powers backed by national security, immigration enforcement and drug interdiction mandates. There, the Border Patrol can set up traffic checkpoints and fly surveillance drones overhead with high-powered cameras and radar that can track your movements. Within twenty-five miles of the international boundary, CBP agents can enter a person’s private property without a warrant.

      Just about every nefarious deed, tactic or thuggish policy advanced by the government today can be traced back to the DHS, its police state mindset, and the billions of dollars it distributes to local police agencies in the form of grants to transform them into extensions of the military.

      As Miller points out, the government has turned the nation’s expanding border regions into “a ripe place to experiment with tearing apart the Constitution, a place where not just undocumented border-crossers, but millions of borderland residents have become the targets of continual surveillance.”

      In much the same way that police across the country have been schooled in the art of sidestepping the Constitution, border cops have also been drilled in the art of “anything goes” in the name of national security.

      In fact, according to FOIA documents shared with The Interceptborder cops even have a checklist of “possible behaviors” that warrant overriding the Constitution and subjecting individuals—including American citizens—to stops, searches, seizures, interrogations and even arrests.

      For instance, if you’re driving a vehicle that to a border cop looks unusual in some way, you can be stopped. If your passengers look dirty or unusual, you can be stopped. If you or your passengers avoid looking at a cop, you can be stopped. If you or your passengers look too long at a cop, you can be stopped.

      If you’re anywhere near a border (near being within 100 miles of a border, or in a city, or on a bus, or at an airport), you can be stopped and asked to prove you’re legally allowed to be in the country. If you’re traveling on a public road that smugglers and other criminals may have traveled, you can be stopped.

      If you’re not driving in the same direction as other cars, you can be stopped. If you appear to be avoiding a police checkpoint, you can be stopped. If your car appears to be weighed down, you can be stopped. If your vehicle is from out of town, wherever that might be, you can be stopped. If you’re driving a make of car that criminal-types have also driven, you can be stopped.

      If your car appears to have been altered or modified, you can be stopped. If the cargo area in your vehicle is covered, you can be stopped.

      If you’re driving during a time of day or night that border cops find suspicious, you can be stopped. If you’re driving when border cops are changing shifts, you can be stopped. If you’re driving in a motorcade or with another vehicle, you can be stopped. If your car appears dusty, you can be stopped.

      If people with you are trying to avoid being seen, or exhibiting “unusual” behavior, you can be stopped. If you slow down after seeing a cop, you can be stopped.

      In Portland, which is 400 miles from the border, protesters didn’t even have to be near federal buildings to be targeted. Some claimed to be targeted for simply wearing black clothing in the area of the demonstration.

      Are you starting to get the picture yet?

      This was never about illegal aliens and border crossings at all. It’s been a test to see how far “we the people” will allow the government to push the limits of the Constitution.

      We’ve been failing this particular test for a long time now.

      It was 1798 when Americans, their fears stoked by rumblings of a Quasi-War with France, failed to protest the Alien and Sedition Acts, which criminalized anti-government speech, empowered the government to deport “dangerous” non-citizens and made it harder for immigrants to vote.

      During the Civil War, Americans went along when Abraham Lincoln suspended the writ of habeas corpus (the right to a speedy trial) and authorized government officials to spy on Americans’ mail.

      During World War I, Americans took it in stride when  President Woodrow Wilson and Congress adopted the Espionage and Sedition Acts, which made it a crime to interfere with the war effort and criminalized any speech critical of war.

      By World War II, Americans were marching in lockstep with the government’s expanding war powers to imprison Japanese-American citizens in detainment camps, censor mail, and lay the groundwork for the future surveillance state.

      Fast-forward to the Cold War’s Red Scares, the McCarthy era’s hearings on un-American activities, and the government’s surveillance of Civil Rights activists such as Martin Luther King Jr.—all done in the name of national security.

      By the time 9/11 rolled around, all George W. Bush had to do was claim the country was being invaded by terrorists, and the government was given greater powers to spy, search, detain and arrest American citizens in order to keep America safe.

      The terrorist invasion never really happened, but the government kept its newly acquired police powers made possible by the nefarious USA Patriot Act.

      Barack Obama continued Bush’s trend of undermining the Constitution, going so far as to give the military the power to strip Americans of their constitutional rights, label them extremists, and detain them indefinitely without trialall in the name of keeping America safe.

      Despite the fact that the breadth of the military’s power to detain American citizens violates not only U.S. law and the Constitution but also international laws, the government has refused to relinquish its detention powers made possible by the National Defense Authorization Act (NDAA).

      Then Donald Trump took office, claiming the country was being invaded by dangerous immigrants and insisting that the only way to keep America safe was to build an expensive border wall, expand the reach of border patrol, and empower the military to “assist” with border control.

      That so-called immigration crisis has now morphed into multiple crises (domestic extremism, the COVID-19 pandemic, race wars, civil unrest, etc.) that the government is eager to use in order to expand its powers.

      Yet as we’ve learned the hard way, once the government acquires—and uses—additional powers (to spy on its citizens, to carry out surveillance, to transform its police forces into extensions of the police, to seize taxpayer funds, to wage endless wars, to censor and silence dissidents, to identify potential troublemakers, to detain citizens without due process), it does not voluntarily relinquish them

      This is the slippery slope on which we’ve been traveling for far too long.

      As Yale historian Timothy Snyder explains, “This is a classic way that violence happens in authoritarian regimes, whether it’s Franco’s Spain or whether it’s the Russian Empire. The people who are getting used to committing violence on the border are then brought in to commit violence against people in the interior.

      Sure, it’s the Trump Administration calling the shots right now, but it’s government agents armed with totalitarian powers and beholden to the bureaucratic Deep State who are carrying out these orders in defiance of the U.S. Constitution and all it represents.

      Whether it’s Trump or Biden or someone else altogether, this year or a dozen years from now, the damage has been done: as I make clear in my book Battlefield America: The War on the American People, we have allowed the president to acquire dictatorial powers that can be unleashed at any moment.

      There’s a reason the Trump Administration is consulting with John Yoo, the Bush-era attorney notorious for justifying waterboarding torture tactics against detainees. They’re not looking to understand how to follow the law and abide by the Constitution. Rather, they’re desperately seeking ways to thwart the Constitution.

      As Harvard constitutional law professor Laurence Tribe recognizes,The dictatorial hunger for power is insatiable.

      This is how it begins.

      This is how it always begins.

      Don’t be fooled into thinking any of this will change when the next election rolls around.

    • "Meat Of The Future"  – KFC Is 3D-Printing Chicken Nuggets 
      “Meat Of The Future”  – KFC Is 3D-Printing Chicken Nuggets 

      Tyler Durden

      Thu, 07/23/2020 – 23:30

      Fast-food chain Kentucky Fried Chicken (KFC) debuted the “restaurant of the future” last month in Moscow. The US fast-food chain unveiled a storefront dominated by automation and food lockers, a move that would allow for a contactless environment to mitigate the spread of COVID-19. 

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      KFC Moscow 

      Besides reinventing the frontend of the store with robots and artificial intelligence, the backend is getting revamped as well. According to a recent company press release, 3D printing technology will be used to produce chicken nuggets. 

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      KFC partnered with 3D Bioprinting Solutions to create cell-based “chicken meat” in labs that will be as “close as possible in both taste and appearance to the original KFC product,” with product testing expected this fall. 

      3D Bioprinting Solutions is developing additive bioprinting technology using chicken cells and plant material, allowing it to reproduce the taste and texture of chicken meat almost without involving animals in the process. KFC will provide its partner with all of the necessary ingredients, such as breading and spices, to achieve the signature KFC taste. At the moment, there are no other methods available on the market that could allow the creation of such complex products from animal cells. – the press release said 

      KFC said using 3D printing to produce the “meat of the future” has its advantages: 

      The bioprinting method has several advantages. Biomeat has exactly the same microelements as the original product, while excluding various additives that are used in traditional farming and animal husbandry, creating a cleaner final product. Cell-based meat products are also more ethical – the production process does not cause any harm to animals. Along with that, KFC remains committed to continuous improvement in animal welfare from the farm and through all aspects of our supply chain, including raising, handling, transportation and processing.

      Also, according to a study by the American Environmental Science & Technology Journal, the technology of growing meat from cells has minimal negative impact on the environment, allowing energy consumption to be cut by more than half, greenhouse gas emissions to be reduced 25 fold and 100 times less land to be used than traditional farm-based meat production. – the release said

      “At KFC, we are closely monitoring all of the latest trends and innovations and doing our best to keep up with the times by introducing advanced technologies to our restaurant networks,” said Raisa Polyakova, General Manager of KFC Russia & CIS.

      KFC unveiling and testing futuristic meat comes as plant-based burgers have been developed by Beyond Meat and are sold at major supermarkets and fast-food chains. 

      A post-coronavirus world appears to be filled with automation, artificial intelligence, and now fake meat. 

    • Scientists Say A Supermassive Black Hole Glitched, Inexplicably Turning Off and On Again
      Scientists Say A Supermassive Black Hole Glitched, Inexplicably Turning Off and On Again

      Tyler Durden

      Thu, 07/23/2020 – 23:10

      Authored by Jake Anderson via TheMindUnleashed.com,

      Supermassive black holes are already recognized as some of the most bizarre objects in the universe. Past their high-energy coronas, inside the event horizons, the known laws of physics seem to shut down.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      But recently, astronomers observed something happening to a black hole that seemed impossible even by the object’s own outlandish standards.

      About 100 million light-years away, the super hot, ultrabright corona at the center of a supermassive black hole (1ES 1927+654) abruptly disappeared and then reformed, essentially turning the black hole off and then starting up again, as though it had glitched. It is the first time such a phenomenon has ever been documented.

      Lead author of the study, Claudio Ricci, remarked,

      It was so strange that at first we thought maybe there was something wrong with the data. When we saw it was real, it was very exciting. But we also had no idea what we were dealing with; no one we talked to had seen anything like this.”

      Ricci and the other MIT astronomers studying the event believe a rogue star may have caused a massive “tidal disruption,” that may have acted like “a pebble tossed into a gearbox,” which subsequently caused the entire corona of highly charged particles to come collapsing into the black hole.

      As a result, the black hole’s brightness diminished precipitously, dimming by a factor of 10,000 in under a year.

      “We expect that luminosity changes this big should vary on timescales of many thousands to millions of years,” Erin Kara, assistant professor of physics at MIT and co-lead on the study, explained

      “But in this object, we saw it change by 10,000 over a year, and it even changed by a factor of 100 in eight hours, which is just totally unheard of and really mind-boggling.”

      So, from the point of view of scientists on Earth, the black hole seemed to just eat itself, close up shop, and disappear from radar, something corroborated by multiple telescopes and observed in X-ray, optical, and ultraviolet wave bands. But that wasn’t the end. Since the core singularity of the black hole still existed, it began to gobble up particles again and spin up a new accretion disk, re-generating its old luminosity in only months.

      The MIT team first discovered the anomaly in March 2018, when they recorded an active galactic nucleus (AGN) using ASSASN, the All-Sky Automated Survey for Super-Novae. They also observed the black hole with NASA’s NICER, an X-ray telescope mounted to the International Space Station.

      “This seems to be the first time we’ve ever seen a corona first of all disappear, but then also rebuild itself, and we’re watching this in real-time,” Kara recalls

      “This will be really important to understanding how a black hole’s corona is heated and powered in the first place.”

      Kara and her co-authors believe the sudden glitch could be caused by the accretion disk’s magnetic field lines collapsing. They published their findings in Astrophysical Journal Letters.

    • Major Hollywood Studio Orders "AI-Driven" Face-Mask Detection Robots
      Major Hollywood Studio Orders “AI-Driven” Face-Mask Detection Robots

      Tyler Durden

      Thu, 07/23/2020 – 22:50

      A major Hollywood studio ordered face mask detection robots this week that mount on walls in public areas. 

      Artificial Intelligence Technology Solutions, Inc., published a press release Wednesday morning, revealing a major studio in the Holywood area (whose name cannot be disclosed due to non-disclosure agreements in place) purchased two Robotic Observation Security Apparatus Units (ROSA) from its wholly-owned subsidiary Robotic Assistance Devices’ (RAD) dealer GSG Protective Services, Inc. in Los Angeles.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      ROSA

      According to RAD, ROSA is an “AI-driven security system including both human and vehicle detection, license plate recognition, and complete integration with the RAD Software suite notification and response library.” 

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Described as the “ultimate autonomous response device,” ROSA uses powerful AI software and sensors in “a 180° field of view” to enforce mask-wearing. 

      “This is a game-changer for us,” said Corey English, COO of GSG Protective Services, the RAD dealer who sold both ROSA devices. 

      “Face mask enforcement in this environment is challenging, and the RAD lineup allows reinforcement of critical regulations that are in place for everyone’s safety – without bias and without confrontation,” English said. 

      Steve Reinharz, Founder and CEO of RAD, said ROSA records violators and repeat offenders of those who fail to wear masks. 

      “The ability to record violators, and particularly repeat violators, gives high profile end-users such as this one options for enforcement and general security,” said Reinharz. “It’s great to see the first order specifically for this technology come within a very short period of time from when we announced it.”

      As ROSA gains popularity in Hollywood, a much wider release of the wall robot is expected, due mostly because half of the country is now under mask requirement orders as virus cases and deaths soar

      Corporations and local authorities cannot dedicate their time to mask-wearing enforcement as hot pockets of social unrest continue around the country. That is why elites will resort to AI technology to monitor Americans, and in some cases, make sure they’re wearing masks.

      The press release didn’t state if there were any consequences for mask offenders at the studio. 

    • After 30 Years, Did The Disabilities Act Work?
      After 30 Years, Did The Disabilities Act Work?

      Tyler Durden

      Thu, 07/23/2020 – 22:30

      Authored by James Bovard via The American Institute for Economic Research,

      Thirty years ago, President George H.W. Bush signed [7/26/1990] the Americans with Disabilities Act, which was supposed to create a new era of equality and justice.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Instead, the ADA often turns disabilities into assets, encouraging far more people to claim to be disabled to receive special treatment or privileges.

      The ADA’s breadth and vagueness have spurred a deluge of absurd federal decrees and more than half a million lawsuits that risk stigmatizing people the law sought to assist. 

      The ADA is essentially a federal command for people to treat certain other people “nice”- with harsh penalties for any behavior considered not nice – and with niceness defined on a case-by-case basis through endless court cases and complaint settlements. Anyone who is disabled acquires a legal right to request accommodations from employers and others, with the federal government and private lawyers waiting to sue anyone who fails to “accommodate.” Congress defined “disability” far more broadly than most Americans recognize, including anyone who claims they have significant trouble standing, lifting, bending, reading, concentrating, or thinking. 

      The ADA is known as “Attorney’s Dreams Answered.” According to lawyer Mark Pulliam, the ADA “may be the most widely-abused law in our history…. Nationwide, a cottage industry has developed among a bottom-feeding element of the plaintiffs’ bar that specializes in bringing a high volume of cookie-cutter lawsuits against small businesses for technical violations of the ADA, and extorting quick settlements of several thousand dollars each.” Federal judges have characterized mass-produced ADA lawsuits as a “sham” and “an ongoing scheme to bilk attorneys’ fees from the defendant.” 

      Hundreds of Florida businesses were hit with cookie-cutter ADA access lawsuits in 2016 and 2019 complaining that “the pipes in the bathrooms weren’t properly wrapped” and similar grave perils. The Florida News-Press reported that “some of the harshest critics of these suits come from people who are disabled or advocate on behalf of people with disabilities.” Kevin Berry, co-chairman of the Southwest Florida ADA Council, complained that the lawsuit surge “has the reverse effect. If someone comes in with a wheelchair or an obvious disability, the (business owner) is saying, ‘Here comes a lawsuit.’”

      One federal judge denounced a lawyer filing such lawsuits for behaving like “a parasite disguised as a social engineer.” But the legal carpet-bombing continues. Late last year, four law firms filed “more than 100 putative class actions charging that retailers are violating the ADA by marketing gift cards that do not include Braille versions,” as the Cato Institute’s Walter Olson, one of the ADA’s most persistent and perceptive critics, reported. 

      You snooze, you lose — you sue,” was the New York Post’s summary of the latest ADA lawsuit trend for sleep apnea sufferers. An obese New York hospital employee sued her former employer for $10 million in 2018 because she was fired after twice falling asleep at her job as an ambulance dispatcher. Her lawyer told the New York Post: “Helen didn’t have a job where it was critical that she be awake 100 percent of the time.” A Kansas policeman who repeatedly fell asleep in his patrol car received almost a million dollars in a jury verdict

      An ex-policeman in the Chicago suburbs filed a lawsuit seeking $75,000 in damages because he was fired after driving drunk, hitting and badly injuring a pedestrian, and leaving the scene of the accident. The ex-policeman claims his firing violates the ADA because he had Post-Traumatic Stress Disorder (PTSD).

      The ADA is increasingly derailing the Internet. University of Chicago law professor Richard Epstein observed, “The ability to work and shop online at one’s own pace offers a set of dazzling technological improvements that have done more to help the disabled than the massive expenditures under the ADA.” Lawyers are increasingly suing colleges, companies, and other targets because their websites are not accessible to the blind, claiming that web pages are “places of public accommodations.” The University of California at Berkeley created a vast offering of free online lectures but threats from the Justice Department resulted in its shutdown in 2016.”

      The Justice Department promised to provide clear compliance guidelines for ADA online access but abandoned the task after issuing conflicting guidance. A tidal wave of litigation resulted, including more than two thousand federal lawsuits on Internet access in 2018 – three times as many as in 2017. Domino’s Pizza was successfully sued by a blind person who claimed he was denied “full and equal enjoyment” of its pizza offerings on its website and app – even though Domino’s offered 13 other ways to place an order for a pizza. Yaroslav Suris, a deaf man, recently sued Pornhub and similar websites claiming that they violated the ADA. Suris complained that, because of lack of closed captioning, he was unable to comprehend the action in “Hot Step Aunt Babysits Disobedient Nephew.” 

      The ADA is roiling schools and colleges by incentivizing disability claims by students seeking privileges. Three times as many college students now consider themselves mentally ill compared to the 1980s. The ADA compels schools to provide “reasonable” accommodations” to students who claim to be disabled – and a doctor’s note is all the proof they need. Up to 25% of students at top colleges “are now classified as disabled, largely because of mental-health issues such as depression or anxiety, entitling them to a widening array of special accommodations like longer time to take exams,” the Wall Street Journal reported in 2018. Lawyer Miriam Kurtzig Freedman observed that giving extra time on tests to people claiming disabilities is “like lowering the basket from 10 feet to eight feet; you’re changing the game.”

      Catch-all federal disability definitions have spawned “Noah’s Ark in the air.” The federal Department of Transportation entitled almost anyone who asserts they have an emotional or mental disorder to bring “emotional support animals” on airplanes. The result is a million cats, kangaroos, squirrels, peacocks, pigs, monkeys, miniature horses, and untrained dogs brought onboard flights each year. Uncontrolled animals have engaged in wholesale “urinating, defecating, and biting” passengers, according to a recent Federal Register notice. The only thing necessary to qualify to bring your pets onboard is to spend $99 for an “emotional support animal letter” from one of the many dubious websites offering to certify people’s disorders. 

      The ADA has also been a disaster at helping the disabled find work and become financially self-reliant. The percentage of disabled who are employed has fallen sharply since the ADA was enacted. A Massachusetts Institute of Technology study concluded that the ADA reduced employment “of disabled men of all working ages and all disabled women under age 40.” Between 1991 and 2010, the percentage of disabled who were employed fell from 50% to 41.% The Census Bureau reported earlier this year that only 19% of persons with a disability were employed in 2019, compared to 66% of people without a disability.

      The ADA sought to achieve progress by maximizing the number of lawsuits, as if average citizens and businesses must be endlessly scourged into decency. The ADA’s absurdities and ritualized legal racketeering are occurring in an era when Americans have become far more humane, rational, and compassionate towards the disabled.

      It is time to end the flying kangaroos, college testing scams, and torpedoed websites and to finally curb the parasite lawyers.

    • Democratic Ex-Congressman Charged With Rigging Votes, Bribery, Falsifying Records And Obstruction
      Democratic Ex-Congressman Charged With Rigging Votes, Bribery, Falsifying Records And Obstruction

      Tyler Durden

      Thu, 07/23/2020 – 22:11

      A federal grand jury has indicted former Pennsylvania Senator Michael J. “Ozzie” Myers on charges that the Philadelphia Democrat committed election fraud for his alleged role in a ballot box-stuffing scheme in 2014, 2015 and 2016, according to CBS Philly.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Michael J. “Ozzie” Myers (D)

      Myers, 77, is charged with conspiring with and bribing another Democrat – former Judge Domenick J. DeMuro, who pleaded guilty in May to accepting the money in the ballot box scheme while he served as a judge of elections. DeMuro’s responsibilities included overseeing a polling place during voting.

      DeMuro, 73, charged between $300 and $5,000 per election to rig the votes for Myers, who in turn charged his clients “consulting fees” which were used to pay off multiple Election Board Officials. The disgraced judge would illegally add votes for certain candidates – many of whom paid for the votes, and others who Myers favored for other reasons. According to this week’s indictment.

      “Free and fair elections are the hallmark of our system of government,” said Acting Assistant Attorney General Brian C. Rabbitt of the DOJ’s Criminal Division. “The Department of Justice has zero tolerance for corruption of the electoral process, and we will spare no effort in investigating and prosecuting those who would seek an unfair advantage at the polls by bribing state and local officials responsible for ensuring the fairness of our elections.”

      In a Thursday statement, US Attorney William M. McSwain said “If only one vote has been illegally rung up or fraudulently stuffed into a ballot box, the integrity of that entire election is undermined,” adding “Votes are not things to be purchased and democracy is not for sale.”

      Myers had previously been convicted of bribery and conspiracy for taking money from FBI agents who posed as Arab sheiks in the 1970s “Abscam” scandal, according to CBS Philly.

      A former ward leader and former cargo checker on the Philly waterfront, he was captured on tape saying a $15,000 bribe was not sufficient.

      Myers was expelled from Congress in 1980 and served more than a year in federal prison before his release in 1985. –CBS Philly

      DeMuro faces up to 15 years at his September sentencing.

    • Watch AI Robo-Barber Cut Hair In Post-COVID World  
      Watch AI Robo-Barber Cut Hair In Post-COVID World  

      Tyler Durden

      Thu, 07/23/2020 – 22:10

      There were several problems people encountered during the virus pandemic. The first, if you couldn’t afford a private barber to make an at-home visit – well, there were no barbershops opened because state governments deemed these businesses non-essential. The second issue, as economies reopened, allowing barbershop to resume operations, people who seriously needed a trim, were still fearful of stepping inside a commercial setting, nevertheless, having a stranger hover over them and touch their head for 15-30 minutes. 

      The pandemic has undoubtedly created a confidence crisis in barbershops. To solve this issue, one millennial during the epidemic built an impressive robot that cuts hair. 

      Shane Wighton of the YouTube channel Stuff Made Here built what appears to be a robo-barber using AI. 

      “There are no buzzers or trimmer involved, just a pair of scissors. And a whole lot of engineering and programming skills,” said Nerdist

      Here’s the general gist of how it works. The cutting mechanism, attached to an adjustable lever, rotates around the head of the “customer.” The machine then selects hair and measures how far away it is from the person’s scalp. That way it won’t accidentally cut them. Then, a vacuum grabs the hair and sucks it up. The hair is pulled tight, just like a human would do, while a small section of locks is portioned off. Then the attached scissors snip away the exposed hair at the correct angle. The entire device is attached to a computer program that allows the user to select the haircut of their choice.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Ultimately it was successful. The built-in safety mechanisms worked, as Wighton was never harmed, and he got a passable haircut. Passable. But there were some issues. A math error made the haircut take four times longer than it should have. The protective mechanism also stopped the machine from cutting hair near his ears. -Nerdist 

      Wighton explains in the video how the robot works. There’s also a demonstration of the robot cutting the inventor’s hair.   

      While robo-barbers could instill confidence among consumers in a post-corona world – the more significant issue will be permanent job loss as the virus has forced corporations to adopt automation and AI at hyperspeed. 

    • Levine: Reading The Market's Postmodern Mind
      Levine: Reading The Market’s Postmodern Mind

      Tyler Durden

      Thu, 07/23/2020 – 21:50

      Authored by Seth Levine via RealInvestmentAdvice.com,

      No matter how you slice it, markets are human. This even applies to the “algos” as it’s we who write their mechanistic marching orders. Thus, understanding human behavior can be helpful in assessing and anticipating market moves. There’s no choice in the fact that we all need a philosophy to live. The same holds for investing. Thus, understanding the dominant market philosophies can potentially give us an investing edge. We can thank Tony Greer, the editor of the Morning Navigator, for doing just this.

      In a recent Hidden Forces interview, Greer casually states the following:

      “I’ve been calling it financial postmodernism, Demetri (emphasis added).

      And I call it that because we just came out of a scenario where as we were getting the actual read on what the lockdown did to the economy and those literally ghoulish economic data numbers, the stock market was putting in massive upside rallies, right? And it was rallying off of the lows and it was rallying off of a spike low. So, it looked even more obnoxious that Wall Street is celebrating while Main Street is getting crushed. And that was sort of the new dichotomy that happened right through, jeez, I guess through April, May, and right into June. Where you’re getting an economic data point on Friday of 9 million people unemployed and nonfarm payrolls and you’re getting the S&P up 6% in the same day against the headlines of Dow up 1,000 on CNBC.

      And people are like, ‘What the hell is going on here? What? Does Wall Street not care? Does the market not care?’”

      Tony Greer, Hidden Forces Episode 142

      Greer’s characterization of today’s investment markets as financial postmodernism is as genius as it is obscure. Since mentioning it, I see parallels between today’s investment markets and the postmodern philosophy everywhere. Perhaps teasing out Greer’s identification can help make better sense of these seemingly insane investment conditions.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      What is Postmodernism

      Only recently did I stumble upon postmodernism. I never heard the term before and suspect few outside the halls of academia have either. While largely unknown, it’s hard to escape postmodernism’s effect on the culture. Investment markets are just one manifestation.

      Postmodernism is an intellectual movement with roots dating back to the 1950s in America. It’s a mixture of philosophy and history that underpins much of the modern culture, and especially the political Left. While postmodernism’s intellectual leaders may not be household names, many postmodern ideas are unfortunately commonplace. These include the beliefs that the U.S. is fundamentally racist, sexist, and shallowly materialistic; that Christopher Columbus is a villain; that one’s ethnicity or race define one’s politics; that Western nations exploit the less developed, and; that humans are a scourge destroying the planet.

      My introduction to postmodernism came via Stephen Hicks. Hicks is a philosophy professor and author. His book Explaining Postmodernism masterfully does just that. It both outlines postmodernism’s core tenets and maps its historical lineage from the end of the Enlightenment up to the present day.

      According to Hicks:

      Postmodernism’s essentials are the opposite of modernism’s.

      • Instead of natural reality—anti-realism.

      • Instead of experience and reason—linguistic social subjectivism.

      • Instead of individual identity and autonomy—various race, sex, and class group-isms.

      • Instead of human interests as fundamentally harmonious and tending toward mutually-beneficial interaction—conflict and oppression.

      • Instead of valuing individualism in values, markets, and politics—calls for communalism, solidarity, and egalitarian restraints.

      • Instead of prizing the achievement of science and technology—suspicion tending toward outright hostility.

      Stephen Hicks, Explaining Postmodernism

      The following chart compares postmodernism’s perspectives with preceding philosophies’. Note that Hicks uses “modernism” synonymously with Enlightenment ideas and ascribes “pre-modernism” to the dominant intellectual framework from 400 to 1300 CE.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Source: Explaining Postmodernism

      Hicks’s summaries are heavy, even for those steeped in philosophy. Nonetheless, the above is a useful framework for examining the zeitgeist of the financial markets. Let’s take it one step at a time to tease out postmodernism’s various influences.

      Metaphysics

      Metaphysics sits at the base of all philosophic systems. It describes the nature of existence (the “meta” moniker is not ironic). For example, are things simply as they appear (A is A in Aristotelian parlance), or can supernatural forces alter the natural world that we perceive? Hicks describes the postmodern view as:

      “… anti-realist, holding that it is impossible to speak meaningfully about an independently existing reality. Postmodernism substitutes instead a social-linguistic, constructionist account of reality.”

      Stephen Hicks, Explaining Postmodernism

      To me, anti-realism is the perfect description for today’s markets. Many people assume that markets must continue to rise. That’s what they’ve always done so that’s what they’ll always do. It’s just the way the world works. The underlying causes and possibilities for change are almost ignored. Then there are those who see markets as distorted and disconnected from economic realities. Central banks and covert “plunge protection teams” are backstopping the equity markets to ensure that they never decline. There’s no other explanation for their behavior given the mess the economy is in.

      To be honest, I see partial truths in both arguments. There’s plenty of evidence for there being a “Fed put” and Donald Trump does make every attempt to pump the stock market. However, human prosperity continues to advance and there could be other potential reasons for the stock market’s unrelenting rise (i.e. financial asset creation is lagging wealth’s).

      Regardless, the market simply is; it is an immutable fact. Treating it as such is a realist perspective. Rather than looking to conspiracies or a long term trend line that ignores the path dependency of returns, this perspective should simply try to uncover the current market drivers and probabilities for change. To contest its state is to contest reality. It is an anti-realist stance.

      Epistemology

      Epistemology is another philosophy concept that I needed to look up two or three hundred times before I grasped its meaning. It’s the science of knowledge formation. In other words, epistemology examines how we uncover truths about the world. Do we learn by using the scientific method or do we receive wisdom from revelations; and is there even such a thing as truth to begin with?!

      “To say that we should drop the idea of truth as out there waiting to be discovered is not to say that we have discovered that, out there, there is no truth. It is to say that our purpose would be served best by ceasing to see truth as a deep matter, as a topic of philosophic interest, or ‘true’ as a term which repays ‘analysis.’ ‘The nature of truth’ is an unprofitable topic, resembling in this respect ‘the nature of man’ and ‘the nature of God’ …”

      Richard Rorty, Contingency, Irony, and Solidarity

      According to postmodernism, there is no such thing as “truth.” Knowledge comes from consensus. Thus, reality can be whatever we want it to be, so long as enough people believe it.

      How true this rings in today’s world of endless market interventions. Central banks have adopted zero and negative interest rate policies, and are voraciously buying sovereign bonds, mortgage bonds, corporate bonds, “junk bonds”, exchange traded funds, and even equities outright (as of this writing, the Swiss National Bank is a top 30 shareholder of Apple according to Bloomberg). What’s the reason for all these drastic actions? Well, because this misplaced concept of inflation is apparently undershooting some arbitrary target of course! (Huh?)

      Sadly, there is little concern for the separation of governments from the capital markets. This feature is conveniently ignored as if it were an accident. So long as we believe these interventions produce prosperity it must be so. Never mind that monetary policy is just another price control with predictable effects; or that any attempt to tip the scale of markets only acts to destroy them and the immense prosperity they produce. We simply wish it were different so it must be so. Truth shmuth. This is the essence of social subjectivism.

      Human Nature

      We can even see hints of Postmodernism in how we view markets themselves. According to Hicks, postmodernism sees humans as pertaining to different groups that are in constant conflict. There are no individuals acting according to their own mind or for mutual benefit. Life is merely a zero-sum, social construction made up of competing teams.

      “Postmodern accounts of human nature are consistently collectivist, holding that individuals’ identities are constructed largely by the social-linguistic groups that they are part of, those groups varying radically across the dimensions of sex, race, ethnicity, and wealth. Postmodern accounts of human nature also consistently emphasize relations of conflict between those groups; and given the de-emphasized or eliminated role of reason, postmodern accounts hold that those conflicts are resolved primarily by the use of force, whether masked or naked; the use of force in turn leads to relations of dominance, submission, and oppression.”

      Stephen Hicks, Explaining Postmodernism

      This collectivism and conflict have analogues in financial markets. We rarely describe them as beneficial methods for allocating capital to individual companies, countries, and entities. They are more commonly considered ways to disperse wealth among competing interests. The characterization takes various forms such as profits vs. wages, shareholders vs. other “stakeholders”, Wall Street vs. Main Street, “labor” vs. “capital”, and so on. Furthermore, only governments (i.e. force) can possibly arbiter these perceived conflicts. We must breakup “Big Tech” monopolies, regulate business, and “nudge” people in the direction of the “common good.” Left to his/her own devices, the free human would destroy financial markets, modern economies, and the planet. Thus, the intellectual elite, who somehow lack these intrinsic faults, must plan every action.

      Ethics

      Ethics is the science that studies how we should act. Our defined purpose for living frames the context for these decisions. Thus, you will come to a different moral code by making your own happiness paramount than by putting all others’ first (and your’s last).

      Hicks describes the postmodern take on ethics as egalitarianism. Here, the belief in equality does not mean political equality, but rather a metaphysical equality. In other words, it’s not that we’re unique individuals who should be treated equally under the law; it’s that we’re literally all the same: physically, emotionally, and spiritually. We differ only by our various group identities (but are interchangeable within our belonged tribes). Individual values are a myth.

      In my view, there’s a parallel to passive investing. Today’s investing context is quite small. Only returns and price fluctuations (i.e. volatility) matter. What’s your Sharpe ratio? If its worse than passive indices with higher fees, watch out, outflows will likely follow.

      While maximizing returns is a key investment goal, it is not the only one. The value of investing cannot be divorced from the investor. Investing—like all actions—serves a purpose to an entity (person, pensioners, etc.). These needs are individualized. Why should every portfolio maximize its Sharpe ratio? To be sure volatility is a admirable attempt to quantify investment risk. However, there’s a whole host of other attributes like liquidity, governance, and political environments that may also suit an investor’s preferences. While I’m sympathetic to the case for passive investing, I take issue with its limited dimensionality. It paints everyone’s financial values with the same brush. This is the spirit of egalitarianism.

      Politics and Economics

      Politics describes the appropriate rules for governing human social systems. Thus, it follows from one’s deeper philosophic principles; politics do not stand on their own. Capitalism is the application of individualism in ethics to a group setting. Collectivism (socialism, communism, fascism, etc.) results from viewing people as parts of various factions. In other words, what we think of the goose dictates our prescriptions for the gander.

      According to Hicks, postmodernists are rationalizing socialists. Their world views logically lead them to collectivism. However, the postmodernists have a problem. Socialism’s historical record is disastrous. Whenever (and to the extent) it’s been implemented, misery, poverty, death, and destruction have followed. Furthermore, not only have dire predictions for capitalism failed to materialize as postmodernists expect, but it created unimaginable prosperity.

      What’s a postmodernist to do when his/her beliefs are in such stark conflict with reality? Simple, just ignore facts and invent a good narrative. After all, there is no truth, so go spin a good story and exercise some power.

      “Postmodernism, Frank Lentricchia explains, ‘seeks not to find the foundation and the conditions of truth but to exercise power for the purpose of social change.”

      Stephen Hicks, Explaining Postmodernism

      What could be more postmodern than Mario Draghi’s “whatever it takes” speech. Given in a July 2012 address at the Global Investment Conference in London, the serving President of the European Central Bank (ECB) stated the following with respect to the European Union:

      “When people talk about the fragility of the Euro … very often non-Euro area member states or leaders, underestimate the amount of political capital that is being invested in the Euro. … Within our mandate, the ECB is ready to do whatever it takes to preserve the Euro (emphasis added). And believe me, it will be enough.”

      Mario Draghi

      Draghi’s comment is laughable. Maintaining the Euro is well beyond the ECB’s power to control. However, it’s a clear instance of rhetoric trumping facts. There are plenty more. Take quantitative easing (QE) for example. It’s failed to deliver on its original promise and only resulted in more. How about Japan’s monetary policies? They are the model for most major central banks, yet the Bank of Japan’s efficacy is wholly ignored. It’s as if central banks throughout the Western world are simply competing to one-up the next. There’s no evidence that their theories are correct. Yet, they remain popular.

      There are other ways too. Failure is not tolerated. In policy, it’s ignored. In industry and markets, pain is collectivized for the greater good of “the economy”, or “the workers”, or “the nation”, or pick your group. Bailouts are now commonplace. Policymakers and central banks reflexively act to prop up all markets, as one. We’re a far cry from capitalism.

      When and Where

      Just as postmodernism got its start in the late 20th century, so too did the current market’s philosophy. While Alan Greenspan’s reign as Fed governor may seem like its origin—after all, he’s the father of the “Fed put” due to his attempts to prop up investment markets—I believe Richard Nixon’s presidency is a better starting point.

      It was Nixon who ushered in the modern era of fiat currency. By removing the dollar’s objective standard of value, its worth became completely subjective. We now must rely upon official releases riddled with vague adjustments to gauge its purchasing power. We can’t ascertain it ourselves. The dollar became a social construct! This lack of objectivity, self-reliance, and autonomy has postmodernism’s fingerprints all over it.

      Our Postmodern Markets

      The financial postmodernism that Greer astutely notes is merely a reflection of the culture. Many of the philosophy’s absurd beliefs have parallels in the investment markets. This manifests in heavy-handed regulations, endless interventions, and a neurotic obsession with markets’ continual rise to name a few. The investment markets are a far cry from a capitalist utopia—no surprise given our world views.

      As investors, identifying the dominant ideas being expressed in the economy can be a useful edge. After all, markets are nothing more than an aggregation of human interactions. Understanding how an investment culture behaves might allow us to better anticipate how investors will integrate new information into price movements. These fluctuations may differ whether pre-modernist, modernist, or postmodernist principles are dominant. Greer’s anecdote illustrates this perfectly. The equity market rise following “literally ghoulish economic data” surprised many.

      To be sure, this is a complex research topic worthy of deep exploration. We merely scratched the surface in this article. Hopefully though, we uncovered some ideas that can help us better read the market’s mind, see around corners, and grow our p&ls.

    • Nearly 75% Of Adults Say Social Media Companies Wield Too Much Power And Influence Over Politics: Pew
      Nearly 75% Of Adults Say Social Media Companies Wield Too Much Power And Influence Over Politics: Pew

      Tyler Durden

      Thu, 07/23/2020 – 21:30

      A new poll from Pew Research finds that 72% of American adults think social media companies wield too much power and influence over politics.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Facebook CEO Mark Zuckerberg

      According to a survey conducted last week, just 22% of Americans believe Silicon Valley technocrats hold the ‘right amount’ of political power, while just 6% believe it’s ‘not enough.’

      Nearly 9 out of 10 ‘conservative Republicans’ (89%) feel social media platforms have too much power vs. 74% of ‘moderate or liberal Republicans,’ while liberal Democrats are slightly more likely than moderate or conservative Democrats to agree (68% vs. 60%).

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Majorities of both Republicans and Democrats believe social media companies wield too much power, but Republicans are particularly likely to express this view. Roughly eight-in-ten Republicans and Republican-leaning independents (82%) think these companies have too much power and influence in politics, compared with 63% of Democrats and Democratic leaners. Democrats, on the other hand, are more likely than Republicans to say these companies have about the right amount of power and influence in politics (28% vs. 13%). Small shares in both parties believe these companies do not have enough power. –Pew Research

      The results echoed a similar 2018 Center survey which found that Republicans were more likely than Democrats to believe social media platforms censor political content, and are biased towards liberal views.

      On July 27, CEOs of Apple, Facebook, Amazon and Google will appear together in front of Congress for the first time to testify before the House Judiciary Antitrust Subcommittee, which has spent the last year investigating competition within the tech industry.

      Beyond debates about fair business practices, the tech industry has also come under fire in recent months from a host of critics – from President Donald Trump to civil rights advocates and even tech companies’ own employees.  

      Amid these concerns, Americans favor more, not less, regulation of major technology companies, according to the Center’s recent survey. Some 47% of the public thinks the government should be regulating major technology companies more than they are now, while just 11% think they should be regulated less. About four-in-ten (39%) believe regulation should stay at its current level. –Pew Research

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Will lawmakers push for oversight so that Silicon Valley tech platforms stop discriminating along party lines?

    • The COVID Panic Is A Lesson In Using Statistics To Get Your Way In Politics
      The COVID Panic Is A Lesson In Using Statistics To Get Your Way In Politics

      Tyler Durden

      Thu, 07/23/2020 – 21:10

      Authored by Ryan McMaken via The Mises Institute,

      It is unlikely that pundits, politicians, and the general public have ever been so obsessed with numbers as they are right now. I speak, of course, of the numbers surrounding deaths and illnesses attributed to COVID-19.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      For months now, every new day has brought new headlines about total COVID-19 infections, total deaths, and estimates put out by models claiming to predict how many deaths will soon occur.

      These numbers have become the focal points of many politicians’ careers. This is especially true for state governors and other politicians in executive positions who now in this time of “emergency” essentially rule by decree. New edicts are regularly issued by policymakers, allegedly based on an assessment of the all-important numbers. These decrees may unilaterally close businesses, cut people off from important medical procedures, ban religious gatherings, or even attempt to confine people to their homes. Those who refuse to comply may have their livelihoods destroyed.

      “The Number” becomes the standard by which all behavior is judged. Will Activity X increase The Number or decrease it? For those who wish to engage in Activity Z, they must first prove that it will not increase The Number. Nothing shall be allowed that doesn’t have a good effect on The Number.

      But there’s a problem with this way of doing things: the number in question only tells us about the one thing being measured. If we only have a number for that one thing, then we tend to ignore all the other things that aren’t being assigned a number.

      Focusing on One Number, Ignoring Others

      Things get even more lopsided if one number is being continually updated in real time, while other numbers are updated only occasionally.

      We can certainly see all of this this at work in the COVID-19 debate. During March 2020 much of the population suddenly became very interested in the latest COVID-19 totals. Johns Hopkins University created a web site to show the spread of the disease, and Worldometer — a site normally only useful for checking the population of, say, Bolivia — began publishing continually updated numbers on total COVID-19 cases and deaths. Models predicting the future course of the disease began to spring up. The ever-rising total deaths number then was compared against the predictions of the models — such as the Imperial College London model predicting more than 2 million deaths in the United States.

      This immediately changed the terms of the debate over what measures to take in response to COVID-19. Faced with rising COVID-19 numbers at Worldometer and related sites, and accompanied by news stories asserting hospitals everywhere will soon run out of room, panicky voters began to demand action from politicians.

      “Look at that terrible number!” was essentially the “argument.” This was followed by the phrase “do something!” Seeing that their opportunity to seize vast new powers had arrived, health bureaucrats were quick to pounce: “quarantine everyone!” they demanded. “there’s no time to consider the downside.”

      Ignoring the Costs of COVID-19 Shutdowns

      Nearly overnight, the only numbers that mattered anymore were the COVID-19 numbers.

      When the advocates for coerced “lockdowns” business closures and stay-at-home orders finally prevailed, a minority nonetheless asked: what are the negative effects of these measures?

      These people were thoroughly ignored. They didn’t have any continually-updating, media-friendly, easy-to-access numbers on their side.

      In fact, the numbers that illustrated the dark side of lockdowns and stay-at-home orders only began to trickle out, any without any online ticker to announce every new case.

      For instance, in April, doctors began to report they were seeing more cases of severe child abuse (both sexual and non-sexual) than before the lockdowns. The lockdowns cut children off from relatives and settings that offered an escape from abuse. Moreover, the likelihood for abuse increased as the lockdown put more financial and emotional stress on families. But did child abuse receive much media attention? Certainly not. Child abuse victims have no dedicated website with a number that’s posted daily at CNN or The Drudge Report.

      We encounter a similar problem with suicides and drug overdoses . Although there is much evidence that suicidesdrug overdosesand other “deaths of despair ” have increased as a result of lockdowns, these threats to life and limb have received little attention by politicians and media outlets looking to maximize fears of COVID-19. Once again, suicides and drug overdoses have no “daily death toll” relentlessly featured in media stories. These deaths aren’t counted in real time.

      Even worse, perhaps, are the measures adopted by state governors that reduce access to essential medical care. As a result of this widespread effort to deny basic medical care to non-COVID patients, hundreds of doctors in May, organized by Dr. Simone Gold, published an open letter to Donald Trump calling for action to end the medical lockdowns. The letter states that the Americans denied treatment under COVID lockdowns includes

      150,000 Americans per month who would have had a new cancer detected through routine screening that hasn’t happened, millions who have missed routine dental care to fix problems strongly linked to heart disease/death, and preventable cases of stroke, heart attack, and child abuse. Suicide hotline phone calls have increased 600%.

      Further complicating matters is the fact many of the negative repercussions of lockdowns and business closures lead to long-term costs. We know that unemployment brings higher mortality due to a wide variety of ailments, long after the initial period of unemployment began.

      It’s Easy to Ignore What You Don’t Measure

      Yet the impact of unemployment on mortality and mental health was almost entirely ignored. This was partly due to the fact that unemployment numbers are not updated daily, as COVID-19 numbers are. The fact 40 million Americans lost their jobs during the lockdowns — and more than 20 million remain unemployed today — continues to be treated as a minor affair. Any increased mortality that results will be labeled simply as a “heart attack.” No connection will be made to the COVID-19 lockdowns.

      Thus, the Gold letter continues:

      The millions of casualties of a continued shutdown will be hiding in plain sight, but they will be called alcoholism, homelessness, suicide, heart attack, stroke, or kidney failure. In youths it will be called financial instability, unemployment, despair, drug addiction, unplanned pregnancies, poverty, and abuse.

      In other words, there will be no media-friendly web site listing the long and lingering effects of the lockdowns. There will be no list of abused children, the destitute, the suicides, and the victims of drug abuse who couldn’t get the help they needed. There will be no list of cancer patients denied care because their states’ governors decided cancer diagnostics were “elective” medical procedures.

      Indeed, so unimportant are the deaths and illnesses uncounted in any any government tally, that politicians are now talking about another round of stay-at-home orders and lockdowns. Los Angeles city officials are threatening to impose new lockdown measures, and at least one county in Texas has implemented a stay-at-home order.

      Those who support these measures need only point to the official statistics: “see, we must do something to keep this COVID-19 number from getting bigger!” The number will be there for all to see.

      But the child abuse, the suicides, and the cancer deaths? There’s no Worldometer number to point to.

      There’s an important lesson here. Since the nineteenth century, government bureaucrats, politicians, and other advocates for more government action have long sought greater use of government statistics as a means of justifying government interventions in the marketplace. In this way of thinking, that which is measured is that which merits government planning.

      It’s simply another illustration of Frederic Bastiat’s lesson of “the seen” versus “the unseen.” As with most government interventions, the public is only interested in the easily seen “benefits” of government intervention. All the unseen costs of that intervention are simply ignored. Paying government workers to provide a “service” that almost nobody wants? That “creates jobs.” That can easily be seen and measured.  The lost wealth that results from such a pointless endeavor? That’s hard to measure, and can be ignored.

      But we’re now learning that, in order to be counted among the “seen,” it’s not enough to just have an occasionally updated statistic. If we want our statistic to receive a lot of attention, it must be easily-found by the public, and be easy for journalists—most of whom lack the skills to engage in serious research—to use. A daily-updated COVID-19 death number, will beat an an annual estimate of drug overdoses any day.

      This is partly why the pandemics of 1958 and 1969 received so much less attention – even though the 1958 pandemic remains deadlier than the current pandemic. Those pandemics had no web site, and no concerted media effort to maximize attention paid to a daily-mounting death toll.

    • Home Prices Surge In Hamptons As Wealthy New Yorkers Flee City 
      Home Prices Surge In Hamptons As Wealthy New Yorkers Flee City 

      Tyler Durden

      Thu, 07/23/2020 – 20:50

      The Hamptons housing market is booming. But how? Isn’t the economy in shambles and the recovery stalling

      Well, yes, but as we’ve discussed over the last several weeks, those who still have the economic mobility are fleeing cities for rural communities and towns, such as the one on eastern Long Island’s South Fork. 

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      For the same price as a multi-million dollar 5 bedroom Manhattan condo, one can easily afford a mansion, with a few acres, garden, tennis court, and maybe even a pool in the Hamptons. If lockdowns come again, instead of being cooped up in a building with no yard, one can have a relaxing cocktail on the back patio while remote working and enjoying the sounds of nature.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      A new report via Miller Samuel and Douglas Elliman (seen by CNBC), outlines how Hampton home prices have hit a new record high due to the influx of New Yorkers permanently leaving the city for the beach town. 

      The median price of a single-family home in the luxurious beach town hit $1.1 million in 2Q20, a 25% increase YoY. The average sale price of a home in the Hamptons during the quarter was up 21% to about $2.1 million, which is relatively cheap, considering how much Manhattan condos cost.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      After a couple of years of weakness, Hamptons real estate appears to be bouncing back. The weekenders who have shown up to the beach town for holidays are now becoming permanent residents as city life, considering today’s unprecedented challenges, just doesn’t make sense anymore.   

      “These aren’t weekenders, or people just here from Memorial Day to Labor Day,” said Gary DePersia, a top broker in the Hamptons with Corcoran. “They plan to be here full time for the duration.”

      DePersia said one of his buyers now works remotely and doesn’t need to be in the city anymore.

      Jonathan Miller, CEO of Miller Samuel, said 2Q sales in the Hamptons slumped 15% over last year because of the virus pandemic, but it was nothing like the 54% crash in Manhattan. He said once lockdowns in the city ended in June, sales in the Hamptons “exploded.” 

      Miller said wealthy families would on longer spend their days in the city, even after a vaccine is developed. Folks are quickly renovating or buying more year-round homes in the Hamptons.

      “I call it ‘co-primary’ residences,” he said. “It’s not just using the Hamptons for summers and occasional weekends. It’s equal to their Manhattan residence.”

      Miller said the virus pandemic has given Hamptons real estate a bump, adding that, “the pandemic may have started the trend, but it’s the technology, and the acceptance of working from home now, that will make it more lasting.”

      And it’s not just wealthy folks abandoning the city, Wall Street firms are leaving as well… 

    • Harvard Faces Demands To Rename "Board Of Overseers" Over Slavery Ties
      Harvard Faces Demands To Rename “Board Of Overseers” Over Slavery Ties

      Tyler Durden

      Thu, 07/23/2020 – 20:30

      Authored by James Ferguson via Campus Reform,

      The Harvard University Board of Overseers is under pressure to alter its name due to the term having ties to slavery. 

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      The Coalition for a Diverse Harvard is calling for the board to drop the title “overseer,” as the term was also used to refer to individuals who managed plantations. The alumni organization Harvard Forward brought attention to the“Board of Overseers” name in a series of tweets.

      “Today, on the 237th anniversary of the abolition of slavery in Massachusetts, we join the @harvarddiverse Coalition in calling to #RenameTheOverseers,” Harvard Forward tweeted July 8.

      https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

      ‘Overseer’ also refers to men hired by plantation owners during that same time period to violently control and abuse enslaved people. Plantation overseers were paid to elicit the most work out of enslaved people, and they often resorted to violent disciplinary tactics and brutal torture. Narratives from enslaved people are filled with accounts of mutilations, burnings, & whippings at the hands of overseers,” the group stated, claiming that “the term ‘overseer’ cannot be separated from its historical context and connotations.” 

      “The continued use of a word characterized by such deep-rooted racism is a testament to Harvard’s failure to confront our country’s history.”

      The group began its campaign to change the name of Harvard’s “second-highest governing body” in 2017, as the Harvard Crimson reported.

      The board itself consists of 30 alumni and has the power to appoint the university president.

      In June, the University of Louisville scrapped the title “overseer” from its student government bodies, saying the term “hearkens back to American slavery and reminds us of the brutality of the conditions and treatment of black people during this time,” University of Louisville President Neeli Bendapudi

      Harvard’s Board of Overseers is not the first organization to come under scrutiny at the Ivy League institution. A petition in June to rename the Mather House, named for Increase Mather, a Harvard president and slave owner who attended the university in 1656.  

      The university’s board elections began July 1.  The Coalition for a Diverse Harvard has backed five candidates who have endorsed altering the name “overseer” as part of their election platform, the Crimson reported.  One of the candidates, John E. Betty said it was difficult for the noun “overseer” to be “divorced” from connections with slavery, saying “we need to change” and further stated that the Board of Overseers “is a bit of a relic around Harvard history and linguistics.” 

      The Coalition for a Diverse Harvard did not respond to Campus Reform’s request for comment. 

    • COVID-19 And The Pandemic Of Surveillance
      COVID-19 And The Pandemic Of Surveillance

      Tyler Durden

      Thu, 07/23/2020 – 19:50

      Authored by J.D.Tuccille via Reason.com,

      Americans are increasingly monitored, and COVID-19 health concerns aren’t improving the situation…

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Pandemic maps are all the rage, these days, but the latest one from the Electronic Frontier Foundation (EFF) is a little different; instead of viral hotspots, it displays a plague of official snoopiness, arranged by location and sortable by technology. While it documents intrusions that predate the current crisis, the Atlas of Surveillance is all too relevant to the age of coronavirus. Concerns about curtailing contagion help to normalize detailed scrutiny of people’s lives and drive us toward a pervasive surveillance state.

      “The Atlas of Surveillance database, containing several thousand data points on over 3,000 city and local police departments and sheriffs’ offices nationwide, allows citizens, journalists, and academics to review details about the technologies police are deploying, and provides a resource to check what devices and systems have been purchased locally,” EFF announced on July 13.

      Users can click on the map to see what surveillance technologies are used in specified localities. If you want to see what’s going on in your area, the map is searchable by the name of a city, county, or state. The map can also be filtered according to technologies such as body-worn cameras, drones, and automated license plate readers.

      The nearest entry to me is in Prescott Valley, Arizona, where the police department is among the hundreds that have partnered with Ring, the Amazon-owned doorbell-camera company.

      The Ring partnerships don’t give police live feeds, but they can request video recordings regarding a specific time and area. While participation by Ring customers is voluntary, the partnerships are “a clever workaround for the development of a wholly new surveillance network, without the kind of scrutiny that would happen if it was coming from the police or government,” warns Andrew Guthrie Ferguson, a professor at the University of the District of Columbia’s David A. Clarke School of Law and author of The Rise of Big Data Policing.

      Researchers find few crimes solved by the voluntary surveillance partnerships, but the home-security marketing of the Ring arrangement nudges the culture toward an easier acceptance of a panopticon that operates outside of the full range of civil liberties protections.

      Also easing America’s slide toward a full surveillance state is fear of the COVID-19 pandemic. Public health officials who, just months ago, fretted about overcoming privacy concerns with regard to contact-tracing schemes have turned to governments’ usual solution: threatening harsh penalties for noncompliance.

      “Travelers from certain states landing at New York airports starting Tuesday could face a $2,000 fine for failing to fill out a form that state officials will use to track travelers and ensure they’re following quarantine restrictions,” AP reported this week.

      Mandatory tracking forms for travelers to New York follow on Rockland County’s earlier efforts to compel cooperation with contact tracers.

      “Commissioner of Health Dr. Patricia Schnabel Ruppert urged residents to comply with the Department of Health’s contact tracing efforts and threatened those who do not comply with subpoenas and $2,000 per day fines,” the county announced on July 1.

      We can hope that health-related snooping into people’s movements and activities will come to an end when the pandemic passes, but these things have a way of getting embedded in the culture as people become accustomed to them. In the name of controlling infection, many private companies are now closely monitoring employees, including their proximity to one another in the workplace.

      “Privacy advocates warn the tracing apps are a slippery slope toward ‘normalizing’ an unprecedented new level of employer surveillance,” notes Politico.

      Aggressive expansion of surveillance programs without adequate checks could normalize privacy intrusions and create systems that may later be used for various forms of political and social repression,” frets Freedom House.

      That novel invasions of privacy which might once have set off alarms can become the new normal is clear from public-private surveillance partnerships of the sort that Ring developed with police departments. After the Supreme Court ruled that police need a warrant to access cellphone location data in Carpenter v. United States (2018), law enforcement quickly started purchasing data from private marketing firms.

      “The Trump administration has bought access to a commercial database that maps the movements of millions of cellphones in America and is using it for immigration and border enforcement,” the Wall Street Journal reported earlier this year.

      “Experts say the information amounts to one of the largest known troves of bulk data being deployed by law enforcement in the U.S.—and that the use appears to be on firm legal footing because the government buys access to it from a commercial vendor.”

      In a growing trend, other agencies, including the FBI and the IRS, have also turned to private sources to monitor social media posts and track cellphone movements. The new surveillance technique is quickly becoming widely established.

      Likewise, even after COVID-19 fades to an unpleasant memory, we may find that it has left a legacy of intrusive monitoring of our whereabouts and social connections—all for our own good, we’ll be told.

      For now, the growing incidence of public health surveillance is too new and low-tech to be included in the Atlas of Surveillance, which is plenty full as it is.

      Selecting “automated license plate readers” reveals dense clusters in California, and in urban areas and along major highways elsewhere.

      Clicking on “drones” reveals that they monitor much of the country—especially east of the Mississippi River and along the West Coast—from the sky.

      A look at “face recognition technology” shows that it is especially popular in Florida and around Washington, D.C.

      As thoroughly monitored as the atlas reveals the country to be, it’s far from complete and EFF invites volunteers to assist in collecting data. As new information trickles in, that map will undoubtedly fill in with new jurisdictions and surveillance efforts as time goes on.

      The Atlas of Surveillance will probably fill in with new monitoring technologies, too, including some driven by public health concerns. For officials looking for reasons to poke their noses into other people’s business, the pandemic is as good an excuse as any.

    • Visualizing The Impact Of COVID-19 Shutdowns On The Gold Supply Chain
      Visualizing The Impact Of COVID-19 Shutdowns On The Gold Supply Chain

      Tyler Durden

      Thu, 07/23/2020 – 19:30

      Chains are only as strong as their weakest link – and, as Visual Capitalist’s Nicholas LePan notes in detail below, recent COVID-19 shutdowns have affected every link in the gold supply chain, from producers to end-users.

      Increased investor demand for gold coupled with a constrained supply has led to high prices and a bullish market, which has been operating despite these pressures on the supply chain.

      Today’s infographic comes to us from Sprott Physical Bullion Trust and it outlines the gold supply chain and the impacts COVID shutdowns have had on the gold market.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      The Ripple Effect: Stalling a Supply Chain

      Disruptions to the gold supply chain have rippled all the way from the mine to the investor:

      1. Production
        Some gold mines halted production due to the high-risk to COVID-19 exposure, reducing the supply of gold. In many nations, operations had to shut down as a result of COVID-19 based legal restrictions.

      2. Delivery
        Strict travel regulations restricted the shipment of gold and increased the costs of delivery as less air routes were available and medical supplies were prioritized.

      3. Refinery
        Refineries depend on gold production for input. A reduction in incoming gold and the suspension of labor work shortened the supply of refined gold.

      4. Metal Traders
        Towards the other end of the gold supply chain, traders have faced both constrained supply and increased cost of delivery. These increased costs have translated over to end-users.

      5. The End Users
        Higher demand, lower supply, and increased costs have resulted in higher prices for buyers of gold.

      Gold: A Safe Haven for Investors

      As the virus spread around the world threatening populations and economies, investors turned to safe-haven investments such as gold to hedge against an economic lockdown.

      This increase in investor demand affected the four primary financial markets for gold:

      1. Futures Contracts:
        A futures contract is an agreement for the delivery of gold at a fixed price in the future. These contracts are standardized by futures exchanges such as COMEX. During the initial periods of the pandemic, the price of gold futures spiked to reach a high of US$70 above the spot price.

      2. Exchange-Traded Funds (ETFs):
        An ETF is an investment fund traded on stock exchanges. ETFs hold assets such as stocks, bonds, and commodities such as gold. From the beginning of 2020 to June, the amount of gold held by ETFs massively increased, from 83 million oz to 103 million oz. The SPDR Gold Trust is a great example of how the surge in ETF demand for gold has played out—the organization was forced to lease gold from the Bank of England when it couldn’t buy enough from suppliers.

      3. Physical Gold for Commerce and Finance:
        The London Bullion Market Association (LBMA) is a market where gold is physically traded over-the-counter. The LBMA recorded 6,573 transfers of gold amounting to 29.2 million oz ($46.4 billion)—all in March 2020. This was the largest amount of monthly transfers since 1996.

      4. Coins and Small Bars:
        One ounce American Gold Eagle coins serve as a good proxy for the demand for physical gold from retail investors. The COINGEAG Index, which tracks the premium price of 1 oz. Gold Eagles, spiked during the early stages of the lockdown.

      Each one of these markets requires access to physical gold. COVID-19 restrictions have disrupted shipping and delivery options, making it harder to access gold. The market for gold has been functioning nonetheless.

      So how does gold get to customers during a time of crisis?

      Gold’s Journey: From the Ground to the Vault

      Gold ore goes through several stages before being ready for the market.

      1. Processing:
        Gold must be released from other minerals to produce a doré bar—a semi-pure alloy of gold that needs further purification to meet investment standards. Doré bars are typically produced at mine sites and transported to refiners.

      2. Refining:
        Refineries are responsible for turning semi-pure gold alloys into refined, pure, gold. In addition to reprocessing doré bars from mines, refiners also recycle gold from scrap materials. Although gold mining is geographically diverse and occurs in all continents except Antarctica, there are only a handful of gold refineries around the world.

      3. Transportation:
        Once it’s refined, gold is transported to financial hubs around the world. There are three main ways gold travels the world, each with their own costs and benefits:

        • Commercial Flights:
          Cheapest of the three options, commercial flights are useful in transporting gold over established passenger routes. However, the volume of gold carried by a commercial flight is typically small and subject to spacing priorities.

        • Cargo Planes:
          At a relatively moderate cost, cargo planes carry medium to large amounts of gold along established trade routes. The space dedicated to cargo determines the cost, with higher volumes leading to higher shipping prices.

        • Chartered Airlines:
          Chartered airlines offer a wider range of travel routes with dedicated shipping space and services tailored to customer demand. However, they charge a high price for these conveniences.

      After reaching its destination via air, armored trucks with security personnel move the gold to vaults and customers in financial hubs around the world.

      The World’s Biggest Gold Hubs

      The U.K.’s bullion banks hold the world’s biggest commercial stockpiles of gold, equal to 10 months of global gold mine output. London is the largest gold hub, with numerous vaults dedicated to gold and other precious metals.

      Four of the largest gold refineries in the world are located in Switzerland, making it an important part of the gold supply chain. Hong Kong, Singapore, and Dubai are surprising additions and remain significant traders of gold despite having no mines within their borders.

      COVID-19: The Perfect Storm for Gold?

      As countries took stringent safety measures such as travel restrictions and border closures, the number of commercial flights dropped exponentially across the world. For the few commercial airlines that still operated, gold was a low-priority cargo as space was dedicated to medical supplies.

      This impeded the flow of gold through the supply chain, increasing the cost of delivery and the price of gold. However, thanks to the diverse geography of gold mining, some countries did not halt production—this helped avoid a complete stall in the supply of gold.

      The COVID-19 pandemic has created the perfect storm for gold by disrupting the global supply chain while investor demand for gold exploded. Despite heightened delivery risks and disruptions, the gold market has managed to continue operating thus far.

    • So You Learned To Code: What Jobs Can You Get After A Developer Bootcamp?
      So You Learned To Code: What Jobs Can You Get After A Developer Bootcamp?

      Tyler Durden

      Thu, 07/23/2020 – 19:10

      By Priceonomics,

      With university campuses closed across America and the fall quarter still uncertain, many current and prospective students are balking at the idea of paying $40,000 a year for what might simply end up being an online education. Students from established institutions like Stanford and Wharton have requested tuition refunds for Spring, and even if some colleges say they will open in August, it could all change by September.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Because of this disruption, some students are choosing to defer their higher education and are looking for an alternative that is both economical and able to get them into the workforce more quickly.

      Coding bootcamps, which are intensive, accelerated programs that teach job-ready skills, offer an appealing option. These bootcamps are an effective, efficient, and affordable way to expand someone’s practical skills and career potential.

      Coding bootcamps have strong success rates. According to a variety of surveys conducted over the past few years, both students and employers have favorable views of coding bootcamps. Indeed found that, “72% of employers think that bootcamp graduates are just as prepared and likely to be high performers as candidates with computer science degrees.” While bootcamps differ from a computer science degree, they are a lower-cost option that teaches foundational and practical skills that are in-demand in today’s job marketplace. Bootcamps also take less time than a traditional degree, which holds an appeal for many students.

      To help prospective students make informed decisions about tech bootcamps and whether it’s the right choice for them, we analyzed our bootcamp review data1 to answer questions like “what kind of jobs are students getting after graduating from these coding bootcamps?” and “how do bootcamp alumni feel about their experience?”

      On our site, we found:

      • The most common job title held by reviewers is “Software Developer,” which makes up 19.3% of all reviews.

      • The top 25 job titles reviewers hold after graduation are overwhelmingly technical and make up 64.7% percent of all reviews.

      • Most reviewers rated their bootcamp experience highly, although reviewers who noted they were “Unemployed” or found themselves in non-technical roles like “Marketing Manager” rated their experiences lower.

      Below, we broke things down further to answer questions about satisfaction, what kind of jobs you can get after coding bootcamp, and what can make the bootcamp experience better.

      How satisfied is the typical reviewer with their technology bootcamp?

      The majority of people who attended coding bootcamps and left reviews are very satisfied with the experience. 86.9% of reviewers gave their bootcamp a 5-star review, and 96.2% percent of reviewers rated their programs either 4 or 5 stars.

      Chart 1 shows the distribution of scores with 1 being the lowest and 5 being the highest.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Chart 1: Percentage of reviews by rating score. (E.g. 86.9% of reviewers gave an average overall rating of 5.)After attending a coding bootcamp, what kind of jobs do people have?

      The top job title held by bootcamp reviewers upon graduation is Software Developer, which makes up 19.3% of the reviews. The top 5 positions are each some variation of a developer, and combined, they comprise 41.8% of the reviews. Among reviewers, there is a high concentration among certain job titles; the top 25 positions make up 64.7% of all job titles among graduates.

      Chart 2 shows the most common job titles of people who review the bootcamp they attended:

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Chart 2: Most popular post-bootcamp job titles. Based on percentage of reviews left on Switchup.org.

      Who is satisfied with their bootcamp education?

      Graduates who have secured technical positions or become entrepreneurs report the highest satisfaction levels with their bootcamps. The most satisfied bootcamp reviewers are JavaScript Developers, which are followed closely by Senior Developers. Job titles associated with entrepreneurship such as Founder and CEO make up a small percentage of reviewers but also rate highly, as does the Freelance Developer Position.

      Unsurprisingly, the least satisfied set of bootcamp reviewers are ones who were unemployed at the time of their review. While comprising just 0.3% of total reviews, they rate their experience 2.1 stars on average. Other job titles that report lower satisfaction with their bootcamp experience are Business Developer and Marketing Manager, which are both non-technical positions. However, they still rate at an average of 3.9 out of 5, which means they likely felt their bootcamp experience provided some value.

      Chart 3 shows the job titles with the most and least average satisfaction with their programs:

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Chart 3: Average rating of bootcamp by job title.

      Taking a Closer Look at Bootcamp Satisfaction: What Made the Bootcamp Experience Better?

      In addition to scoring their overall experience, bootcamp reviewers rated the bootcamp’s job support and curriculum. These factors influenced their bootcamp experience and whether it was satisfactory.

      As part of their programs, bootcamps often offer mentorship, mock interviews, resume help, and more in order to increase graduates’ chances of landing a job. Graduates have gotten hired at notable companies such as Microsoft, Amazon, and Google.

      Again, reviewers who have obtained technical or entrepreneurial positions upon graduation report the highest satisfaction with the career assistance provided by their bootcamps.

      Chart 4 shows the average job support satisfaction rating by job title, segmented by those that are most and least satisfied:

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Chart 4: Average job support rating by job title.

      We also found a correlation between curriculum and satisfaction. Again, those who rated their bootcamp experience highly also felt positively about the curriculum. For example, JavaScript Developers were the most satisfied with their experiences overall and with their curriculum.

      However, looking at the chart, bootcamp alumni rated the curriculum highly across the board. Most students rated their program’s curriculum an average of 4.6 stars or higher, except those who were unemployed or were marketing managers or designers.

      Bootcamps pride themselves on having a comprehensive curriculum that teaches students in-demand skills. One student who took a Java course said, “Java technologies are such a wide environment that you can easily get lost by yourself…But CodingNomads has a great curriculum that gives you the essential technical skill to develop and deploy a Java project. Most valuable is you will have the ability to learn and master any technology you want by yourself!”

      Another reviewer, who is now a data scientist, shared about Galvanize’s Data Science program, saying “The curriculum covered a great breadth of data science topics, but we still went into the depth of the math behind algorithms which I felt gave us good grounding on the justification of what we were learning. I also enjoyed the collaborative atmosphere of the daily assignments and group projects. Most importantly though, I really appreciated the career services they offered throughout the program, up to the final weeks, and even past graduation. I felt they really prepared me for navigating the job search and connecting with people.”

      Chart 5 shows which job titles are most and least satisfied with the curriculum and what they learned in bootcamp:

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Chart 5: Average bootcamp curriculum rating by job title.

      Bootcamps: Overall Impressions

      Our data indicates that bootcamp graduates are satisfied with their experiences. Those most satisfied also felt the curriculum and job search support were beneficial. Reviewers who gave high ratings ended up in the tech field in jobs that resulted from the skills they learned in bootcamps.

      Jobs you can get after a coding bootcamp include developer, associate engineer, data scientist, UX designer, project manager, and application developer. Other bootcamps can lead to jobs in digital marketing, cyber security, marketing, and web design. There is always the option to go freelance or become an entrepreneur.

      Our conclusions also confirm how important it is to enroll in a bootcamp that meets your needs and build skills in the field you’re interested in. You can do this by asking yourself what your goals surrounding bootcamps are, and which type of bootcamp will be right for you.

      A good way to select a coding bootcamp is by looking at what programming languages you want to learn based on the career you’re interested in. Some bootcamps will cover several programming languages, while others will have a more singular focus. Another thing to consider is whether curriculum offers career support, which may include how to search and apply for a job, write a resume, build a portfolio, or have interview practice.

      Its essential to do your research when making a bootcamp decision. Here is a list of resources we’ve put together to help you get started:

      All in all, attending a technology bootcamp is a great alternative as we navigate these uncharted waters. They have the great potential to equip you with in-demand skills, boost your career potential, and lead to many positive job outcomes.

    • "V-Shaped" Recovery? – NYC's Live Camera Feed & Real-Time Traffic Data Suggest Otherwise
      “V-Shaped” Recovery? – NYC’s Live Camera Feed & Real-Time Traffic Data Suggest Otherwise

      Tyler Durden

      Thu, 07/23/2020 – 18:50

      New York City’s Phase 4 reopening should be a turning point for the area, hit hard by the coronavirus pandemic. However, it’s not… 

      On Wednesday morning (around 8:00 ET), EarthCam’s live feeds of the Charging Bull statue in the Financial District of Manhattan to Times Square to Broadway reveal a continued ghost town. Similar to what we showed last week

      Charging Bull 

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Times Square 

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Times Square (street cam) 

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Times Square (another view) 

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Times Square (south view) 

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Broadway 

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Traffic data from New York City (provided by TomTom Traffic Index) show despite lockdowns easing in early June, congestion in the city is not returning to pre-virus levels. 

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Apple mobility data shows walking and transit remain significantly below pre-virus levels. Driving, on the other hand, reverted to baseline in June, but data is questionable considering Tom Tom’s traffic data, and Earthcam feeds, suggesting otherwise. 

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      The “V-shaped” recovery pitched by the White House, the same folks who are desperately in need of another round of stimulus to avoid a fiscal cliff that would undoubtedly crash consumption, is touting the greatest ever economic revival. However, it’s non-existent in New York City, America’s largest metro area in terms of GDP contribution, in July. 

    • US Passes 4 Million Coronavirus Cases As Florida Suffers Another Record Jump In Deaths: Live Updates
      US Passes 4 Million Coronavirus Cases As Florida Suffers Another Record Jump In Deaths: Live Updates

      Tyler Durden

      Thu, 07/23/2020 – 18:36

      Summary:

      • Texas reports 9,507 new cases
      • US cases pass 4 million
      • Greater Houston ICUs at 108% capacity
      • California reports jump in new cases, deaths
      • Alabama reports COVID-19 record
      • CDC says US could see 175k deaths by Aug. 15
      • All AMC theaters will stay closed until August
      • Cuomo holds press briefing at 1130ET
      • Florida reports more than 10k cases, record 173 deaths
      • 9-year-old dies in Florida
      • DeSantis says teachers eager to get back to classroom
      • Dr. Fauci says reopening schools should be a “goal”
      • Iran suffers record daily deaths
      • Australia suffers 2nd highest daily total in Victoria
      • Barcelona hear of latest Spanish outbreak
      • India reports record jump in new cases
      • South Africa now has fifth biggest outbreak

      * * *

      Update (1826ET): Texas reported another 9,507 new cases on Thursday, which is critically below the 10k threshold, bringing the statewide total to 361,125.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Texas also reported another 173 deaths, the state’s third-highest total on record since the beginning of the pandemic. It brought the state’s death toll to 4,521.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Texas’ positivity rate is 11.4%. There are 10,893 confirmed COVID-19 patients in Texas hospitals, but this number is incomplete.

      Before we go, here’s a snapshot of mSightly’s “Major Indicators” for the US, as of 0630ET.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      * * *

      Update (1540ET): As we await today’s Texas numbers, it appears the total number of coronavirus cases reported in the US has finally passed its latest milestone: The US surpassed 4 million confirmed cases on Thursday, according to Johns Hopkins, as well as other tallies maintained by Reuters, Worldometer and the AP.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      It took the US 98 days to reach 1 million cases, but just 16 days to go from 3 million to 4 million. The average number of new US cases is now rising by more than 2,600 every hour, the highest rate in the world.

      On Thursday, Florida reported a record jump in COVID-19 deaths, with 173 lives lost. Alabama reported a record increase in cases for the fourth time this month.

      * * *

      Update (1450ET): According to figures released Thursday afternoon, ICUs in the Greater Houston Area have hit 108% capacity. Here are a few of the latest slides from Texas Medical Center.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      * * *

      Update (1408ET): Following the latest record daily death tally in Florida, California reported its latest figures, with another daily jump in new cases and deaths. The state reported 12,040 cases and 157 additional deaths.

      California’s positivity rate climbed to 7.6% from 7.4%.

      The CDC, meanwhile, reported 1,078 new deaths for Thursday across the US,  with the total climbing to 142,755 deaths vs. 141,677. COVID-19 cases came in at 70,106 new cases across the US, bringing the official total to 3,952,273 cases. The agency added that it’s currently penciling in 160k to 175k COVID-19 deaths by August.

      * * *

      Update (1120ET): Arizona has reported 2,335 new COVD-19 cases, 89 new deaths.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      The state’s ICU capacity has receded back to 87%.  It’s total positivity rate, as the chart above shows, was 12.5%, roughly even with yesterday.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      * * *

      Update (1107ET): AMC will wait until August to reopen its movie theaters in the US., the company said Thursday.

      The largest theater chain in the US had planned to reopen in July, a few weeks before the release of Warner Bros. “Tenet” and Disney’s “Mulan.”

      However, after Tenet was delayed for a third time, the chain decided to change its strategy.

      Other big movie theater chains could also delay their July openings.

      AMC struck a deal earlier this month to help the company – American’s largest theater chain – remain solvent until 2021. All of its locations in the US have been shuttered since mid-March. I

      * * *

      Update (1100ET): New York hasn’t released today’s COVID-119 data yet. That’s likely because Gov Andrew Cuomo is planning to hold another press briefing at 11300 on Thursday.

      * * *

      Update (1020ET): Even more so than the record 7-day death tolls Florida has recently seen, the state reported on Thursday a startling headline: A 9-year-old girl from Fla’s Putnam County is now the youngest person in the state to have succumbed to the virus.

      She’s not the first child to died from SARS-CoV-2: Florida has also seen an 11-year-old boy in Miami-Dade County, an 11-year-old girl in Broward County, a 16-year-old girl in Lee County and a 17-year-old boy in Pasco County, among the minors who have passed due to the virus.

      Meanwhile, Fla. Gov Ron DeSantis has insisted that teachers in his state are eager to get back in the classroom, while Dr. Fauci insisted that reopening schools next months should be a goal, but that local leaders shouldn’t hesitate to keep kids home if returning to school would be too great a risk.

      The City of Miami has issued 115 tickets for face mask violations this week, Miami Mayor Francis Suarez said during his Thursday briefing.

      “We have written 115 tickets,” Suarez said. The breakdown for tickets issues includes, “59 warnings, 41 $50 tickets, 15 $100 tickets and we have closed 15 businesses, 10 for 24 hours and five for 10 hours,” Suarez added.

      Health authorities in the state released the latest numbers at around 1030ET Thursday, with the virus total in the state climbing to 389,868 COVID-19 cases, an increase of 10,249 from the day before. Additionally, the state reported 173 deaths, a record single-day total, bringing the statewide tally to 5,632.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      Testing was down about 9k from the previous days’ report, so unsurprisingly the percentage of positive of new cases went up: 12.31%.

      * * *

      Yesterday, as California and Texas set new records for daily COVID-19 cases and deaths, Brazil reported more than 60k cases in a day. There hasn’t been much in the way of major COVID-19 headlines this morning, but there have been a few notable reports from around the world, particularly in Asia.

      Australia, for example, reported its highest daily number of coronavirus-related deaths in three months as new infections continued to climb in Australia’s second-most-populous state. Victoria state said it had confirmed another 403 infections, while five people had died from the virus in the last 24 hours. The daily death toll was Australia’s biggest since April. Tokyo also reported 366 new cases on Thursday, its latest record-breaking number.

      In Iran, officials confirmed 221 new deaths from the virus, bringing the nationwide death toll to 15,074, according to the Health Ministry. Another 2,621 people tested positive for COVID-19 in the last 24 hours, raising the overall count to 284,034, according to a spokesperson for Iran’s health ministry.

      <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

      As its outbreak continues to worsen, India just reported an all-time high of nearly 45,600 new infections over the last day, as the spread of the virus accelerates in the world’s second most populous country. India’s confirmed coronavirus caseload has now risen to 1.2 million, 28,890 of whom have died. The country also reported a record high of 1,120 deaths in the same period. However, the tally also included the addition of more than 444 earlier coronavirus deaths in the southern State of Tamil Nadu that were not previously attributed to the virus.

      Northeastern Spain’s Catalonia region reported 721 new cases on Wednesday, with 3/4ths of these found in the Greater Barcelona Area.

      Russia reported 5,848 new cases, pushing its national tally to 795,038, still the fourth-largest in the world. More than 12,700 deaths have been recorded  to date and more than 570,000 have recovered. SA has roughly half of total cases in South Africa.

      South Africa’s confirmed coronavirus cases are rapidly closing in on 400,000 as the country suffers a new daily high of 572 deaths. In terms of reported cases, SA is now the world’s fifth worst-hit county.

      South Africa is now one of the world’s top five countries in terms of reported virus cases, and it makes up more than half of the cases on the African continent with 394,948. Deaths are at 5,940.

      Public hospitals are struggling as patient numbers climb, and more than 5,000 health workers have been infected.

      Finally, China’s National Health Commission has reported 22 new cases of the virus on the mainland on Thursday, with most of them discovered in the far western region of Xinjiang where mass testing, and a strict lockdown, is under way.

    Digest powered by RSS Digest